L. Kin 4 Volumes Collection by Alex Jorge

SCIENTOLOGY More Than A Cult ?

From Crusade To Rip-Off

. .

The Principles Unveiled

EDITION SCIENTERRA

“That the Freedom of the Press is one of the great Bulwarks of Liberty and can never be restrained but by dispotic Governements.” The Bill of Rights. Art. 11, 28th of June, 1776.

Copyright © 1991 by L. Kin. all rights reserved Licensed Edition for Europa SCIENTOLOGY- MoreThan A Cult? Subtitles: From CrusadeTo Rip-Off + The Principles Unveiled Copyright ©1991 by Edition ScienTerra . a subdivision of VAP Publishers. Wiesbaden, Germany. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission except in the case of bnef quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. For information or orders please addressVAP Delivery Service, Post Box 1180, D-4994 Preussisch Oldendorf - Germany. ISBN 3-922367-26-7,Verkehrs-Nr. 16645 (BAG)

First printing 1991 Printed in Germany

Table of Contents Publisher’s Foreword.....................................................................................................6 PART ONE: From Crusade To Rip-Off Preface.............................................................................................................................9 Dianetics- The Book That Sparked It Off ....................................................................10 DIANETIC THERAPY ..................................................................................................10 “PRE-CLEAR” AND “CLEAR” ..................................................................................11 Hubbard’s Mission .........................................................................................................12 The Beginning of Scientology ........................................................................................14 A New View of Man.......................................................................................................15 THE WHOLE TRACK...................................................................................................15 THE E-METER ...............................................................................................................15 MAN, SOUL OR “THETAN” ? ....................................................................................16 OUTSIDE THE BODY ..................................................................................................16 WHO MAKES THOSE PICTURES? ............................................................................17 GENETIC MEMORIES..................................................................................................18 GAMES AT THE DAWN OF TIME .............................................................................20 SUMMARY.....................................................................................................................21 A Fateful Church ...........................................................................................................22 ESCAPE TO ENGLAND...............................................................................................23 STAR WARS ..................................................................................................................24 OFF TO THE HIGH SEAS ............................................................................................25 STAR WARS EXPANDED ...........................................................................................26 “OPERATING THETANS” ..........................................................................................28 “STANDARD TECH” ...................................................................................................29 BACK ON LAND...........................................................................................................30 Religious Salesmanship ..................................................................................................32 MASTERS AND MINIONS...........................................................................................32 A CHURCH EATING ITS CHILDREN .......................................................................33 HUBBARD’S COMMENTS..........................................................................................36 Sectarianism....................................................................................................................37 A MONOLITH CRUMBLES.........................................................................................37 THE PRAGMATIC VIEW .............................................................................................39 A “Cleared Planet” ?.....................................................................................................40 5

PART TWO: The Principles Unveiled The “Technologies” of Scientology...............................................................................42 INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................42 STUDY TECH ................................................................................................................42 AUDITING......................................................................................................................44 The Laws and Mechanisms of Charge .........................................................................46 A FRUSTRATION SCALE ...........................................................................................46 REACH AND WITHDRAW..........................................................................................47 GAME THEORY............................................................................................................48 THE EMOTIONAL TONE SCALE ..............................................................................49 THE ARC TRIANGLE...................................................................................................50 AFFINITY .......................................................................................................................52 REALITY ........................................................................................................................53 COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................................53 CONFRONTING ............................................................................................................54 POSTULATES AND CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................55 THE CYCLE OF ACTION ............................................................................................56 GOALS PROBLEMS MASSES (GPMs).......................................................................58 MENTAL MATTER, ENERGY, SPACE AND TIME.................................................60 MENTAL UNIVERSES .................................................................................................63 RESTIMULATION.........................................................................................................64 HAVINGNESS ...............................................................................................................66 ENGRAMS, IMPLANTS AND GPMS .........................................................................68 UNCONSCIOUSNESS ..................................................................................................69 SECONDARIES AND LOCKS.....................................................................................71 VALENCES ....................................................................................................................71 ANALYTICAL MIND - REACTIVE MIND ................................................................72 KEY-IN AND KEY-OUT ..............................................................................................73 END PHENOMENA ......................................................................................................73 THE COMPOSITE CASE ..............................................................................................74 The Rudiments of Life ...................................................................................................75 THE “RUDIMENTS” ....................................................................................................75 MOTIVATORS AND SERVICE FACSIMILES ..........................................................77 CONCLUSIONS.............................................................................................................78 Ethics and The Dynamics of Life ..................................................................................79 THE DYNAMICS...........................................................................................................79 7

ETHICS AND MORALS ...............................................................................................80 COMPETENCE ..............................................................................................................81 Gradients of Clearing.....................................................................................................84 A THEORY OF THE BRIDGE .....................................................................................84 CLEAR AND OT - SEEN HISTORICALLY ...............................................................85 CONTEMPORARY DEFINITIONS .............................................................................88 FUTURE PROJECTS .....................................................................................................90 SCIENTOLOGY AND MAGIC - A DIGRESSION.....................................................93 THE BRIDGE IN PRACTICE .......................................................................................95 MORE THAN ONE BRIDGE........................................................................................98 BEYOND ALL BRIDGES.............................................................................................98 Bibliography ...................................................................................................................101

Publisher’s Foreword Dear Reader, let us be honest: who nowadays would read a classical novel of 6.000 or more pages? Who could still manage to enjoy Goethe’s Faust, for example, late in the evening after a hard day’s work? In order to hold their place against the flood of manuals on gardening, cooking and car repairing, standard classical works are already being abbreviated to an “acceptable” extent. This facilitates the reader’s entry into a new area; and perhaps it leads on to his reading the original text. Even the Bible has suffered this fate - one could only wish that such attempts fully took into account its religious and philosophical aspects. In this context it does not seem inappropriate that VAP is issuing, in a similar manner, a work which started as a bestseller and has continued to sell for over forty years now, totaling 15 million copies worldwide: L. Ron Hubbard’s book “Dianetics”. In the present work, “Dianetics” is being represented with full respect for its authenticity; the philosophical and technical developments over the last 40 years are dealt with; the various ways of applying the ideas and procedures of scientology are pointed out. The original manuscript behind this book (it became stranded at the publisher’s like a message in a bottle) has been written by a high-ranking insider. His profound knowledge and many years of experience with the subject of dianetics and scientology allowed him to produce a reliable synopsis of Hubbard’s writings. After a critical treatment on the part of the publisher, a homogenous and understandable book could be put together. Its first two parts are herewith presented to the reader. In doing this, the publisher aims to rid a hot subject of its taboos and contribute to the information available to the broad public.

PART ONE: From Crusade to Rip-Off

“The motto of this universe is ‘we must have a game’. The game is the thing. The wins and losses are not the thing. One loses every time one wins, for he then has no game.” (L. Ron Hubbard, “Creation of Human Ability”.)

Preface To start off with an anecdote: when I - a young student at the scientology organization at St. Hill, England, - took my first training courses in the mid-seventies, I was all curiosity and enthusiasm. Yet already in the first week of my being there I had a rather sobering experience, the significance of which didn’t dawn on me till many years later. Right outside the courseroom area, on the lawn, there were some benches. They served - in summer - as an “open air waiting room” for the public who took services in the organization. Sitting on one of these benches I met an old man. He was crying. When I asked him what the matter was, he answered: “Scientology is a marvelous thing if it weren’t for the people who run it.” This simple statement contains - in a nutshell - the whole paradox of scientology. Its founder called it “an applied religious philosophy”, but what you see from the outside is big business, scandals, extortion of money from people, governments banning it, the press tearing it up, and what not. On the one hand you have L. Ron Hubbard, a prolific writer and free thinker, and on the other hand a Church of Scientology which anxiously and jealously keeps Hubbard’s teachings a secret and considers itself to have a monopoly on them. Here is a man who - in his “Code of a Scientologist” - gives all scientologists the right “to keep Scientologists, the Public and the Press accurately informed concerning Scientology (. . .)”, and there you have an apparatus which condemns and prosecutes anyone who does so [1]. Much has been said about the Church of Scientology (abbreviated to “CofS” from here on) in the media, none of it was good. Much has been said about L. Ron Hubbard, none of it complimentary. I am not going to repeat it. It can be read elsewhere. Yet in order to show how a basically good thing became distorted and perverted partly by its founder and partly by the apparatus he built to promote it, I will have to dedicate Part One of this book to the development of scientology, its founder and the CofS. Mainly, though, I am going to talk about the thing itself, about the intention and the crusade of Hubbard, about scientology philosophy and its application. This is the concern and the purpose of this book. What is this thing called scientology? What makes people at first rave about it and later condemn it, waste their lives and finances for it, makes them put the blame for their spiritual happiness and failure on it? Is it useful or isn’t it? Does it help or does it destroy? -These questions I will try to suggest answers to. When I assert that scientology is a “basically good thing”, I am speaking from my own background of a good ten thousand hours spent doing therapy work with its methods. The time after 1983 plays a greater role regarding the therapy concepts I developed than the time before. This is because in 1983 the fascist machinations inside the Church of Scientology had reached their peak; out of protest I resigned from my membership - along with thousands of others - and started my own practice. Over the years I succeeded in stripping off the mental narrowness the CofS cultivates in its members and approaching the core of the matter, both in theory and in practice. The teachings of Hubbard do offer many possibilities of helping people - be it with regard to their troubles and sorrows or their psychosomatic illnesses. How one uses this body of knowledge, is a different matter. Whether one uses it successfully or not, depends on how well one understands it.

This is of course true for any body of knowledge. It may be that it gets turned into an ideology, developing all sorts of dogmas, and with a personality cult growing up around its founder, as happened with the CofS. And it must be partly the founder who is to blame and partly the people who follow him in their bigoted way. However, what counts in the end, are positive results.

DianeticsThe Book That Sparked It Off Scientology didn’t get started off under this name. The initial impetus for the movement occurred in 1950 under the name of “dianetics” when Hubbard’s first book appeared, “Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health” (DMSMH for short, also called Book One). Dianetics means with a bit of an etymological somersault - “through the mind”, taken from Greek “dia”, through, and “nous”, mind. The term is meant to signify that all troubles and ills man may suffer stem from mental disorders and can be cured by looking at them “through the mind”. The book - more than 400 pages in the hardcover edition - was written within six weeks only, and that’s what it looks like. What the reason for the haste may have been, remains unclear - after all, Hubbard had been busy exploring the human mind for a good two decades already. Why did he hurry then? Was it because of the 86 000 dead at Hiroshima? The 75 000 dead at Nagasaki? The increase of rocket speed and accelerating rush towards space travel? “Dianetics” presents a theory on the human mind which can be applied in the form of a therapy called “auditing”. As well, it proposes that anyone who reads this book can turn himself into an auditor and audit his family and friends or even become a professional. And it asserts strongly and unequivocally that drugs, hypnosis, physical violence against patients and electric shocks - all in the name of “therapy” - are strictly evil and not needed at all in order to help one’s fellow man. Dianetics rests on the basis of the desire for optimum survival inherent in each living thing. Man, as well as other thinking and feeling beings, wants to feel well physically and to attain the goals he has for himself, for his family and for his business and public life. Anything stopping him he looks at as contra survival. When the opposition is so great that he breaks down under the strain of fighting it, the resulting shock and pain is recorded and leads - as time goes by - to sorrowfulness and psychosomatic illnesses. To quote Hubbard: “The dynamic principle of existence - SURVIVE! (. . .) The reward for survival activity is pleasure. (. . .) The ultimate penalty of destructive activity is death or complete nonsurvival, and is pain. (. . .) Happiness is the overcoming of not unknown obstacle towards a known goal and, transiently, the contemplation of indulgence in pleasure. “ (“The Fundamental Axioms of Dianetics”, to be found in “Dianetics” or in [1].) (All words appearing in bold print can be found in the “Scientology Technical Dictionary” [2] .)

DIANETIC THERAPY Auditing is Hubbard’s name for his brand of therapy. Taken from Latin audire, to listen, it simply means “listening”. Hubbard didn’t like to use the word therapy as it is fraught with connotations from the medical and psychiatric field which Hubbard didn’t wish to be mixed up

with. His intention was not primarily to “repair” the handicapped but “to make the able more able”. In an auditing session the auditor asks his client about times of trouble in his life and helps him to discharge upsetting memories in such a way that they can be looked at with ease . What’s being taken away is not the actual memory of the incident but the charge accumulated regarding it. Charge is a mental energy phenomenon felt by anyone who experiences something unpleasant, dangerous or lethal, something - in a word which goes against his idea of optimum survival concerning any aspect of his life (not only the mere physical one of food and shelter). Charge occurs at the moment a serious counter effort to one’s survival efforts is received. It is also felt at the moment of such an incident being restimulated through the association of some element of the present environment with some element in the past incident. A typical example: little Johnny falls off his bike and hurts his leg, with the consequence that he doesn’t like to ride his bike any more and later on breaks out in tears at the sight of his and maybe even other bikes. When the incident is of considerable severity, such restimulation is likely to occur years and even decades later, given that the pertinent triggers are prevalent in the person’s surroundings. Charge is manifested by misemotions such as anger, fear, grief, apathy or death wishes. In auditing, misemotions and psychosomatic ills are traced down to their basic incident, i.e. the first time the contra survival effort (illness, accident, violence, prenatal stress) occurred. This incident is called an engram. As the example above demonstrates, it is almost unavoidable that one reacts to engrams once they are restimulated. All engrams taken together therefore form a “reactive data bank”, or simply bank. The trouble vanishes as soon as the client has re-experienced in his session those parts of the original incident which - up to this point - were hidden under a layer of unconsciousness. Unconsciousness plays the crucial role in keeping an engram in place. As long as any part of an engram is not fully viewed it can be restimulated, i.e. reactivated by the environment. Some engrams contain only split seconds of unconsciousness, others hours and days of it. Any amount of unconsciousness is sufficient to keep an engram intact and restimulatable. Its like a time bomb ticking away forever and occasionally blowing up, yet never losing its potential to blow up again. “PRE-CLEAR” AND “CLEAR” The client - in the jargon of dianetics - is called a preclear or pc. This means that he isn’t clear - or a Clear - yet. He isn’t clear because he still has a case. His case consists of the amount of charge which happens to be in restimulation; in other words, all the active engrams which pour their charge over the person add up to his case. Making a person “go clear” is the sole purpose of auditing; it is the basis of the auditor’s and the pc’s co-operation; it is their common endeavor. The state of Clear is attained when all engrams have been erased. The person is then free of all potentially restimulatable material and can live and act without interference from unwanted thoughts, emotions, physical sensations or pains. He is not aberrated any longer. This result can be achieved and has been achieved. It does take work, though, in some cases a few hundred hours. The result is highly appreciated by those who have attained it.

The concept of Clear implies that the abilities of a being are not brought about by fortunate social structures or a happy childhood, but by his amount of reactivity alone. “Reactive behavior” triggered by a restimulation is synonymous with irrational, insane, not solution-oriented behavior. The less reactivity someone has, the more he will be able to correctly assess his abilities, take an opportunity and apply them successfully. These thoughts are by no means new; elsewhere they come under the heading of “karma”, the idea that anything happening to someone at all is to a large extent his own fault. If he has done something bad and walks around with a bad conscience, he is withdrawn and doesn’t pay the necessary attention to his environment. He is liable to have an accident quite easily. When this incident is recorded as an engram, reactivity will arise from it later. But before there was reactivity there was one’s own responsibility - and that precisely is karma, as the Buddhists call it.

Hubbard’s Mission L. Ron Hubbard’s life background as stated by him and promoted by the CofS has been widely debated and doubted. It is the subject of a good half-dozen books which are out to leave not a single good spot on the man’s character. Whatever: He was born in 1911 in Nebraska, USA, and traveled a fair bit in his youth due to international family ties. At the age of twenty he started to support himself by writing. Allegedly he participated in the first nuclear physics course in the US. It seems certain that he learnt to fly airplanes, achieved his captain’s license for all oceans and joined the navy as an officer during the war. Eye witnesses narrate that he was severely hurt in a wreck diving accident and barely came through. His companion died in the explosion. Hubbard, who had already done research into the mind before the war already, applied his knowledge to himself and - quite miraculously - got himself going again. (He claims to have been trained in psychoanalysis, by the way.) In 1948 he summarized his findings in a then unpublished manuscript called “The Original Thesis” which contains the philosophical and technical approaches of dianetics in rudimentary form. (It was published in 1951 after his success with “Dianetics”.) Having had published some hundreds of adventure and science fiction stories, Hubbard was - by the time he started dianetics - financially all set up “to get the show on the road” (one of his favorite terms). He didn’t have to “invent a religion” in order to make money. He was - as we will see - honestly concerned with the welfare and the spiritual enhancement of man. However, his intentions are one thing; the way they came across and were interpreted by others, are a different thing altogether. DMSMH (Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health), as mentioned earlier, was written within six weeks only. To Hubbard, his message was an urgent issue; it had to be brought out fast, fast, fast. This sense of urgency, and some other aspects of DMSMH - verbosity, pioneer spiritedness and a sloppy rendition of grand thoughts - sets the stage for the thirty years of research which were to follow (from 1948, to be exact) when Hubbard’s first manuscripts were circulated, till 1978). Hubbard kept being verbose, pioneer spirited and sloppy, and he kept urging, urging, urging himself, the staff, the public; pushing them up and forward to attain the humanly unattainable, to superhuman feats of labor, suffering and success. The subject of “the tech” (i.e. auditing techniques) grew and grew. “Breakthroughs” were proudly announced by Hubbard, only to be discarded soon - in the light of his latest research and to be followed by new breakthroughs. Because of this thirty-year turmoil the tech was never rounded up, finalized and brought into a handy form. Hubbard exited from the stage in 1978, leaving behind a vast amount of written and taped materials: eight books written within the ten years after 1950; an unending avalanche of technical bulletins, originally issued as loose leaves and, when bound, totaling a good five thousand pages (the twelve “Tech Volumes”); some six thousand taped lectures given within twenty years; about two thousand policy letters acting as organizational instructions to the CofS and filling ten volumes of 450 pages each (the “Management Volumes”). The man kept himself busy finding ever-increasing challenges, no doubt. His heritage is twofold: first, an unwieldy pile of brilliant thoughts and definitions which keep changing from one research phase to the next and therefore appear incoherent and contradictory. They are held

together by vast yet unstated concepts only detectable when one manages to read between the lines. The subject of scientology doesn’t open itself easily for inspection. Read DMSMH or some other book, read any technical instruction, listen to any tape: they are all built around the same idea; but what exactly is it? -The second part of his heritage: a church which to all the world seems a bunch of super secretive and possibly criminal lunatics. What, precisely, is this “Church”? Hubbard saw his mission in ‘“clearing the planet”; his tool was the Church of Scientology. “Clearing the planet” meant as much as freeing it from those clandestine suppressive powers which have shaped the history of Earth and which Hubbard recognizes as coming out of the unconscious part of man’s mind. The background and implications of Hubbard’s mission will become apparent as we go along in this introduction. To put it simply: he wanted to win the race against the atom bomb. He wanted to keep mankind from committing planetary suicide by developing weapons beyond their own control. A poignant quotation dating from 1952 sums it up: “My purpose is to bring a barbarism out of the mud it thinks conceived it and to form, here on Earth, a civilization based on human understanding, not violence. That’s a big purpose. A broad field. A starhigh goal. But I think its your purpose, too. “ [1]

The Beginning of Scientology DMSMH was a smash success immediately after it came out. One shouldn’t forget that in the fifties, in the field of mental care, there was nothing officially accepted but psychiatry and psychoanalysis. The psychological therapies for individuals and groups which have sprung up in the last four decades were not around then. There was no yoga, no meditation, no esoterics, no New Age movement. This is why Hubbard’s book went off like a bomb. It formed a real alternative to the psychoterror of a psychiatry torturing its victims with drugs, electric shocks and brain amputations. When you were in trouble, back then, and when your doctor came to the end of his art, the psychiatrist was next in line. Psychoanalysis was too costly for most people, electric shocks however were paid for by your health insurance. Now, with “Dianetics”, there was a chance to help oneself and one’s fellow man! Small wonder that Hubbard’s book was widely read and applied. People bought it, read it and audited each other. Soon a need for coordination and systematic instruction arose. The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was formed in Elizabeth, New Jersey. Branches were established in Los Angeles, New York, Chicago and Honolulu, the main centers being Elizabeth and Los Angeles. After a grand start, the Foundation soon (1951) got into financial trouble due to lack of predictable results. Hubbard himself could audit, but nobody else could. An early follower of his purportedly helped out but in fact crashed the place totally and bought Hubbard’s rights to his own brainchild, i.e. the publishing rights and copyrights on all the Foundation’s publications, including “Dianetics - Modern Science of Mental Health”. Hubbard was left standing empty-handed. In order to continue his work he started the “Hubbard College” and used the name “scientology” instead of dianetics. In late 1954 - after some legal battles - the dianetic copyrights and publishing rights were returned to Hubbard. By that time, however, the word scientology had become so widely promoted already that Hubbard stuck with it from there on out. Since then, the significance of the word “dianetics” is reduced to a particular auditing technique [4]. The term “scientology” is taken - by yet another etymological somersault - from Latin “scire”, to know, and from the generally used Greek suffix “-ology”, science of. So it’s the science of how to know. Know what? Answers to the problems of life, of one’s existence, of where one comes from before birth and where one goes to after death. One can see that Hubbard had gone a few steps beyond the simple therapeutic concept of DMSMH. His target now, with scientology, was to enable the individual to self-determinedly establish who he was, where he came from, why he was here, etc. He wanted people to find the truth within themselves instead of them following another’s truth. Scientology, in Hubbard’s words, is “a religious philosophy in its highest meaning as it brings man to total freedom and truth.” [2] Practically speaking, scientology is a set of methods which aids the individual to look at and have realizations about his existence. It does not provide any ready-made answers to the student or preclear. It teaches mental mechanisms, how they can be a trap in life and how they can be used in auditing to get out of the trap. Auditing is the method to explore and gain insight in one’s personal universe, one’s private world.

The aim of dianetics was “a healthy, happy, high IQ human being”, that of scientology “to increase spiritual freedom, intelligence, ability, and to produce immortality”. (Both quotes in [2].) Naturally, immortality as such cannot be “produced” as one has it anyway. What can be produced, however, is the recognition of it.

A New View of Man The years between 1950 and 1954 brought some considerable advances - the E-meter (electropsychometer), the knowledge of past lives and the “whole track” - which go far beyond the views commonly held by the natural sciences of the west. THE WHOLE TRACK DMSMH had stunned the world - the medical world in particular - with the proposition that prenatal life was sentient; that there was a thinking and feeling being inside the embryonic body. Amongst auditors this never was a point of discussion as most preclears had no difficulty contacting prenatal incidents and alleviating their psychosomatic problems after “running them out” (auditor jargon). However, when Hubbard discovered in 1951 that some seemingly unresolvable cases were getting swift results as soon as they contacted past life incidents, a storm of arguments for and against it broke loose in the auditor community. Hubbard thought it necessary to quite strongly address his auditors regarding this matter: “ The auditor who insists on auditing the current lifetime only, when he has the whole track technique available, is wasting time and effort and is, in fact, swindling his preclear “ [5] When the issue of past lives was investigated further it was found not to be limited only to a few hundred years back but to extend over a vast stretch of time which appeared to be in the magnitude of sixty trillion years. Later research showed it was in excess of four quadrillion years of recallable time. This is what Hubbard called the whole track. Naturally, such time spans go back to periods before there were bodies or even the physical universe itself. Yet even before there was physical matter, energy, space or time there was the spirit, i.e. you and me. What exactly this means is covered in the next sections. THE E-METER 1952, in his book “History of Man”, Hubbard announces the tool which made the discovery of past lives possible: the E-meter. Hubbard had tried electro-encephalographs and police lie detectors, but they hadn’t satisfied him. The E-meter did the job. “It compares (. . .) to existing devices as the electronic microscope compares to looking through a quartz stone. “ [5] The E-meter is - in electronic terms - no magic mystery box but a simple Wheatstone bridge which measures the resistance of the body as influenced by the electric field around it. It does not react to the amount of sweat on the hands of the pre-clear as some seem to think. When the pc contacts a charged area on his timetrack (restimulation), the electric field around his body is affected and causes a reaction (a “read”) on the E-meter’s needle. The auditor, by asking the pc to go deeper into reading areas, will get straighter and faster to the basic incident than by observation of the pc’s skin color, eye brightness, emotional tone and degree of introvertedness alone - the auditing style of DMSMH. With the E-meter, the auditor is able to react to signals from the pc so

subtle that they aren’t perceptible to his eye; the needle, though, tells the tale. The validity of needle reads is confirmed by the pc changing to the better, i.e. realizing something about the connectedness between past incidents and his present condition, brightening up and recovering physically and emotionally. MAN, SOUL OR “THETAN” ? Once it was established that man is more than a combination of his body and his social security card, there was a need to find the right term for the phenomenon. “Man” was no good as it referred too much to the physical aspect. “Soul” didn’t serve as in the Christian tradition man “had” a soul; it wasn’t customary to say that man was a soul or to wonder who and where the owner of the soul was. What to do? A year earlier, in 1951, Hubbard had given a lot of thought to the philosophical foundations of dianetics. The result of his efforts were “The Axioms of Dianetics”, numbering 194. He proposed a theory which - quite in opposition to physics - said that the source of life is comparable to pure thought, that all physical or psychic phenomena are derived from thought, that life derives from thought and not matter. This “life force” he termed theta, simply because the “th” in the word “thought” has its counterpart in the Greek letter “th”, pronounced “theta”. He comes to the simple statement: ‘A life organism is composed of matter and energy in space and time, animated by theta” (Dn Axiom 11; [1]). This sentence is the cornerstone of Hubbard’s philosophical edifice which concerns the interaction between matter, energy, space and time (mest) and theta. All struggles of man in his attempt to survive are interpreted with reference to it. (His book, “Science of Survival”, written 1951, is fully devoted to this theme [16].) Going back to “History of Man” and the problem of how to call “it” that has existed through the millennia and is neither man nor soul and maybe both together: Hubbard’s solution was to call it “theta being” or simply thetan. To give an example: the preclear William Thompson (51 years old, engineer, married, two children, 178 cm tall, 81 kg weight) receives an auditing session. When he recalls an incident of falling off his bicycle at the age of five, he is referring to the same William Thompson he is now, although then (age 5) his physical and social description was entirely different. When he recalls in some other session how he was hanged by the neck for stealing horses in the year 1535, he is still referring to the same person he is now, with the difference that the body he owned then doesn’t exist any more and that then he wasn’t called William Thompson but Pepe Gonzalez and it all happened during the Mexican conquista. But it’s his incident, it happened on his timetrack. He knows it to be so. This person, this spiritual entity of perennial duration which doesn’t live or die but takes bodies (which live and die) in order to play his games and fulfill what he made his mind up to do, is called “thetan”. OUTSIDE THE BODY As they kept running into past deaths and past lifetimes in their sessions, auditors began to understand the thetan as a wanderer from one body to the next. It became undeniably apparent that some people would leave their body right at the moment of death whereas others would hang

around the dead body for a while -sometimes for a long while even. It as well became apparent that people would take new bodies any time between conception and birth, sometimes months after birth. Cases have been known where a person would leave an adult body after an accident and give it up for dead, with another one picking up this very body to make it his home. All sorts of variations on this theme were obviously possible. Proof of the matter was: does running this incident resolve the problem? If so, it must be true. The sheer number of occurrences itself made it hard to doubt the matter. The phenomenon of being outside the body was observed even during sessions and given the term “going exterior”. A preclear would suddenly have perceptions from a point exterior to the body, see the body from above, be outside in the street and see what was happening, etc. This triggered a lot of research. Hubbard developed a number of processes to cultivate this ability. They were released 1954 in the book “Creation of Human Ability”. Someone who managed to stay and act stabily outside the body was deemed an Operating Thetan or OT. “Operate” means as much as “act”. An OT is someone who acts as a thetan, not as a body [2]. The feat of going exterior is of course not restricted to scientology but has been experienced and observed in all spiritual disciplines of the past as well as of the present. Quite a number of people can do it naturally. The ability to do so varies considerably from person to person. Some just feel bigger than their body - as if they were the peach and the body the kernel. Depending on the emotional state of the person the volume of space the person takes in, will vary. It may be of remarkable size. Others actually manage to completely “get out” of the body and “walk around” - to be fair, one has to admit that this is a peak experience which not many have had. Usually it does not last longer than a few seconds or minutes. At this time there is no method in scientology whereby one could reliably turn this into a stable ability, although, regrettably, the promise of achieving such a state has been used as a powerful selling point within the movement. WHO MAKES THOSE PICTURES? Running out the pc’s past life incidents, astounding as it may seem, is an easy matter for the auditor to handle. All he has to do is go earlier and earlier with the pc, and eventually the basic incident (e.g. getting hanged) will become available to be run. The pc can recall anything on the timetrack, no matter how deep down, as long as there is charge on the incident. Once the charge is removed he can recall the incident again (out of session) whenever he is interested to do so. Things turn a trifle more difficult for the auditor when the pc takes his pictures from somebody else’s timetrack. To give one example of many: Mrs. Dimple spends the night in a room where someone was stabbed to death years before, semi-consciously perceives the pictures that person made and has a nightmare. As her perceptions weren’t made in a calm and collected frame of mind but in a state of attenuated consciousness and terror, Mrs. Dimple got tied up with these pictures without her knowing or wanting to do so. And so she keeps having the occasional nightmare whenever those pictures get restimulated. Or she finds herself - sitting at her desk in the office - having daydreams of bloody daggers and black-hooded villains. This issue of “borrowed pictures” may sound even more surprising (except to those who have nightmares) than the issue of having lived before this life, but - looking at it in strictly

technical terms - it isn’t. A picture is nothing but mental energy condensed to mental matter. It is “solidified” or “frozen” attention. It exists in the person’s mental space and contains a certain stretch of mental time. Pictures, therefore, are mental mest (matter + energy + space + time) different from physical mest only by degrees: physical mest is more compressed than mental mest. Some mental image pictures are made up the moment one wishes to see them and unmade the moment one doesn’t need them any longer. This is true for pleasure moments or creative images of the things one sets out to construct, paint or compose. These are easy to control. Other pictures, though, seem to have a life of their own. They come at the wrong moment, one doesn’t quite know where from, and distract and irritate one. These pictures are obviously less easily controllable. Their source are engrams. They are the information stored in engrams, i.e. in moments of such physical or mental duress that the person (thetan) was overwhelmed and succumbed and went unconscious. And what did he do just before going unconscious? He fought against the contra survival inflow by pushing energy against it, physical energy (his muscle power) and mental energy (his will power.) This mental energy - condensed and solidified - is called a ridge. The term is to be understood as an analogy to its physical counterpart: two tectonic plates working against each other form a ridge, i.e. a mountain range; ice floes drifting against each other pile up and make a ridge; standing waves (both in water and in electronics) are ridges; a snowball is a ridge made of snowflakes. Many small particles being pressed into some shape: that is a ridge. A mental ridge is the result of two intentions of comparable magnitude flowing against each other, getting locked up and staying that way, with the result of indecision and the blockage of rational action. (The particles forming a mental ridge are minute quanta of mental energy. More of this in Part Two.) An example: a man, out on the sea, falls overboard and drowns He struggles against his death with all his might, i.e. he uses physical and mental energy to fight what’s going on. This way a ridge is formed. It contains the information of what happened at the time of the contra survival incident. This information is recorded (and later played off) in the form of mental image pictures. Mental image “pictures” don’t necessarily appear visually but in the form of unwanted and inopportune thoughts, emotions, physical sensations and pains. In the example above: in his next lifetime this man may start feeling severely uncomfortable at the sight of water, get the thought of having to avoid boats in order to stay alive, feel the taste of salt water on his tongue and a choking feeling in his lungs anytime he sees a boat race on TV. The information is fully there but not necessarily available to be looked at due to the unconsciousness at the time it was received. (How information can be received despite the person’s unconsciousness will be partly explained further down in this chapter and - in detail - in Part Two of this book.) The engram, therefore, is a complete recording of a harmful incident. It consists of a ridge with pictures in it, some of which one can recall and others which are unconscious. An engram is the facsimile of the real event, a mental video recording. Pictures one cannot control are engram pictures. In order to erase them one has to find the basic incident and run all unconsciousness out of it. (For details on the procedure, see “Dianetics” .)

So much on the picture making mechanism. With this understood it becomes quite apparent how one can snatch a picture away from another. A picture is not a “nothingness” but a “somethingness”. It’s a solid ridge. One can see it even: people whose ridges are restimulated and have come alive, look grey in the face and massy around the head or the body. Pictures can be looked at and grabbed at and pulled in and pushed out. They aren’t visible to the naked eye and not touchable by one’s naked hands, but mentally they can be perceived, yes, and handled. “Thus your thetan has two things; he has his own record of real experience, of things which actually happened to him; and he has whole banks of “second facsimiles” or photographs he has taken from other thetan banks. “ [5] Pictures are not to be found in a person’s head, by the way. You can’t discover them by neurosurgery. They are part of the mind of man, not of his brain. GENETIC MEMORIES Hubbard made further discoveries. Apart from “home-made”’ pictures and “foreignmade” ones, yet another source of disturbance to the unsuspecting thetan was registered: pictures preserved in the genetic make-up of the body; pictures which tell the tale of the evolutionary development from mono-cell to homo sapiens. (Even here, the experience is not unique to scientology. Similar impressions are recorded by people in deep meditation or by those who took LSD in the 60’s. They called it “cellular awareness”.) Genetic images tell of plankton washed ashore millions of years ago, of a shell with a sandgrain irritating its muscle, of fishes and birds being eaten by predators. Who made these pictures? Not the thetan himself. Very few thetans ever take animal or plant bodies and, if so at all, for a short time only. Having important things to do they usually choose the most advanced, the human form. Yet the thetan (in session) will recall pictures of this kind, and recalling and running them will alleviate his psychosomatic afflictions. So again: who made these pictures? Hubbard found there is an agency in the body which collects pro- and contra-survival incidents on a cellular level. It is a mental agency which penetrates all the body cells; it is not a material recording device. In a way, we are dealing with a “created spiritual entity of a low order”. Hubbard called it Genetic Entity or GE. It acts like a “battery” feeding life energy into the body, or like a “computer program” steering it. Without the GE, the body wouldn’t survive when the thetan goes exterior - such as in deep sleep or in the unconsciousness during accidents or heavy operations. The GE’s circuitry keeps the body going in the absence of the thetan. The GE stores all information that has to do with the body: death and injury. Its primitive intelligence thinks in terms of avoidance only, in order that the organism may not be again exposed to the same dangerous circumstances. This way it aids its future survival. Impacts of sufficient magnitude and repetitiousness, picked up by the GE, therefore contribute to the shaping of the individual and the species in accordance with the environment. “The genetic line consists of the total incidents which have occurred during the evolution of the mest body itself.” (Ch.4) “It came on through the evolutionary line, parallel with the protoplasmic line, generation for generation (. . .) “(Ch.3) “The GE continues as the guiding genius throughout prenatal life, building, regulating the heartbeat and attending to complex structural matters.” [S]

What exactly is an entity? Nothing but a ridge which - as goes with all ridges - contains the pictures of the time it was made. There are home-made and foreign-made entities, just as there are home- and foreign-made ridges. It’s two words for the same thing. Different aspects are being emphasized, though: “Ridge” is a merely structural description; “entity” refers to the subjective experience of the person in question - who may perceive his entities as “demons”, “ghosts”, or “disembodied voices”. The Genetic Entity follows the same creation principle as any other entity, too. They are created by the totality of the body’s theta when things were going rough. This “totality of the body’s theta” isn’t just one entity but a multitude of them - each having a specific task to do inside the body, each having its own timetrack, each with its own potential aberratedness due to the engrams it has recorded. All in all they form what Hubbard, in “Dianetics”, called the somatic mind. However, as all the entities of the somatic mind form a self-containing network, an “agency of their own”, the term Genetic Entity (singular) has come to be used for it in the course of time. The way you experience it in session really makes you feel as if you were dealing with one single terminal only, not with an immense number of individual entities. After death, quite some time after the thetan has withdrawn from the body, the GE will leave, too. A body which is attached to a life-saving machine for years and years, usually has been deserted by the thetan long ago already. It is run by the GE only. Once this body dies, the GE will go find a new body for itself. It practically never happens that the thetan meets again with a former GE of his. They run along separate timetracks. Looking at it structurally, we see that the thetan is not only “pushed around” by the foreign-made entities of others, but as well by the genetic entities of the body. He hangs in a network of criss-cross influences. He is not alone. “(. . .) beings of the class of homo sapiens are composite beings motivated by a theta being, entities (another term for ridges), the GE and the environment.” [5] Fantastic as all of this may appear, these pictures are found by the auditor and they are traced down to their various sources by the pc: to his own track, another thetan’s track, or the evolutionary track of the GE. Yet the ordinary person will be rather helpless concerning the proper evaluation and discrimination of the pictures streaming in on him, be it in or out of session. He may easily fall into the trap of thinking they were all his own. Therefore it is the task of the auditor, and a mark of his skill, to help the pc differentiate between the various sources of pictures so as to avoid the pc misidentifying an incident as his own when it isn’t. A failure to do this may cause severe trouble for the pc and make the session stall. Sanity, says Hubbard, is “the ability to recognize differences, similarities and identities” [2] . The more the auditor aids the pc to increase this ability, the more the pc will become causative over the phenomena of his mind, and the sooner he will be clear. GAMES AT THE DAWN OF TIME

Let us sum up what has what has emerged so far: Man, as we saw, is not looked at as a body plus a brain; his existence is not seen as limited to one lifespan only. The term “thetan” was coined to describe him as an immortal being. As such he has existed before there were time and objects, i.e. physical “mest” (matter, energy, space and time). Even whilst having a body he does not necessarily occupy it all of the time but may go exterior to it to the degree that he is in command of this ability. He works with mental mest in order to create intention beams, pictures and ridges. This implies that man isn’t only operating on a physical level but on a theta level, too. He is operating as a thetan, i.e. he creates effects by merely mental or spiritual means. Hubbard came to distinguish between “homo sapiens”, i.e. man living on the level of mere physical awareness, and operating thetan or OT, i.e. man being aware of his immortality, his spiritual powers and his ability to use them. “Operating Thetan - an individual who could operate totally independently of his body, whether he had one or didn’t have one” [2]. These findings are not a breathtaking novelty. They have always been in the awareness of man; to regain them was the objective of religious thought and practice since the days of the vedic hymns. Hubbard actually never claimed that he invented anything new but only used new words for old knowledge. “For to say that out of whole cloth and with no background, a Westerner such as myself should suddenly develop all you need to know to do the things they were trying to do (in the East), is an incredible and an unbelievable and an untrue statement. (. . .) So, we combine the collective wisdom of those ages with a sufficient impatience and urgency. (. . .) Scientology carries forward a tradition of wisdom which concerns itself about the soul and the solution of mysteries of life. It has not deviated. “ [6] It was Hubbard’s intention to rehabilitate the spiritual powers inherent in man. They were there before time was, and they are still there, simply because they are outside and above time. They cannot perish. But - given certain cultural circumstances - they may be ignored, belittled and laughed at and so one tends to invalidate their existence. Yet they can be rekindled easily - as may be demonstrated by various spiritual practices of which auditing is only one example. There are two conclusions one may draw from the above. One is that, if a thetan can move from body to body as he desires, there is nothing to keep him from moving from planet to planet or indeed all around the innumerable galaxies of the physical universe. He may take his position (or body) anywhere. As he doesn’t move by machinery but by his own will and purpose, he is not tied to lightspeed but travels at the speed of thought. Therefore it is at least thinkable that a certain proportion of Earth population actually consists of visitors from elsewhere - and that they came even without the necessity of space travel. You couldn’t tell by their bodies. We are talking of the thetans themselves who came. Their propositions may be quite different from each other - friendly or hostile, as the case may be. They surely didn’t come without a reason. You, the reader, may be one of them! Conclusion two: Once one accepts that there are pictures which weren’t made by oneself (as the corresponding incidents didn’t happen on one’s own track but on that of others), the question arises as to how this mechanism can be used or misused. In present and recent times picking up other people’s pictures has become a fairly incidental affair, something one doesn’t particularly decide to have happen, as we saw in the example of Mrs. Dimple who had nightmares

of getting stabbed to death. Pictures acquired this way may stay for a while and then go elsewhere or even thin out with use and fade away. Not so with the heavy-duty pictures made in times long gone, millions of years down the track. Back then thetans existed without bodies - to be specific: both you the reader and I the writer existed without bodies - and playing around with pictures was considered great fun and a great way, too, to control others. And so force fields were created and tractor waves and pressor waves used and all manner of theta energy traps were built in order to firmly install pictures in others to bring them under one’s dominion. (A weak dramatization of this can be observed in the persistent efforts of advertisement agencies to impress brand names and pictures upon the population. A more brutal dramatization is to be found in brainwashing. Both methods, compared to then, are gentle.) This possibility of “invading and visiting thetans”, “thetan wars” and “thetan games” already mentioned in 1952, were fully confirmed fifteen years later when Hubbard, in 1967, encountered powers from outside this planet blocking his attempts “to make OTs”. Hubbard was not willing to take it with his hands down and, in his turn, prepared a galactic war by telepathic means. (More of this later on.) SUMMARY The “new view of man”, what does it consist of? Of the idea that a person isn’t made out of one piece but that he or she is “multivalent”. Man is being affected by a multiplicity of spiritual influences; he is not necessarily the master in his own house. In administrative terms, there are three “administrative levels” to a thetan with a body: the thetan, his entities and the GE. The body may be compared to a ship; the thetan to a captain who suffers under the burden of his past and keeps parts of it a secret. He drinks in order to forget. His officers (the entities) keep giving opinions and have nothing else in mind but becoming captain themselves - which is not difficult at all, as the old man is quite often in too foggy a state as to do his duty. Everytime the officers manage to take control of the ship, each one steers it his own way, and it goes in circles. The crew (GE) is following orders which have been derived from precedents over millions of years; they don’t pay particular attention to the commands of the captain or the officers. Within each administrative level there are horizontal communication lines; between levels there are vertical command lines. They are in poor shape, as one can easily imagine. Therefore there is a lot of gossip on each level, but there is no flow of orders from the top down and no feedback on the reverse route. The captain is utterly dependent on his crew. As soon as something unpleasant occurs (a restimulation), the whole ship knows about it within a few moments; the crew goes on strike or even mutinies. Naturally, given these circumstances, the captain has trouble keeping his ship on course. Small wonder that he becomes increasingly depressive towards the end of his career.

A Fateful Church Between 1950 and 1954, times were good for Hubbard’s movement. His lectures were attended by thousands of people, many of whom came from overseas. Auditors worked in hospitals and helped to speed up recovery. In California permission had been granted to establish a scientology university. (This scheme eventually failed.) Organizationally it was all held together by the HASI (Hubbard Association of Scientologists International) which consisted of Hubbard, a few staff and a large number of members, i.e. auditors, worldwide. When you look at the amount of organizational policies written between 1950 and 1953, you can tell that Hubbard had an easy time: he wrote only two in total. His main concern was the development of “the tech” and its philosophical ramifications. This was soon to change. In 1954 the Church of Scientology (CofS) was formed in Washington D.C. Now Hubbard was busy establishing it: in the five years between 1954 and 1959 he issued 180 policy letters. And there were more to come in the future. Why he formed the CofS is open for argumentation. Some say it was purely for tax reasons, and they surely have a point there. But Hubbard must have had a bigger problem than that if he turned the simplicity of the HASI into the ever-growing complexity of the CofS. He probably needed an instrument to give him the legal stand to defend his movement against attacks. Much as scientology had been steadily growing for a good four years already, dark clouds overshadowed its growth almost from the day it started. In 1950, one month after DMSMH had come out, the American Medical Association (AMA) declared Hubbard a nutcase. The World Federation of Mental Health (WFMH), the American Psychiatric Association (APA), the CIAthey all got busy investigating, supposing, opinionating, giving each other false or invented data, spreading rumors. In the course of an FBI investigation already in 1951, false reports were put into Interpol files and made available to all Interpol file users worldwide [7]. These data were used and re-used in press articles against scientology in the years to come. They were never doubted or put in question by those who used them. This is peculiar insofar as dianetics (scientology didn’t really exist yet) hadn’t done any damage to anyone yet. Prices were none out of the ordinary, enthusiasm was generally high, Hubbard was about in person and spread a mood of bonhomie and scientific pioneer spirit. Every month brought new insights and advances which were communicated in magazines such as the “Dianetic Auditor’s Bulletin”, the “Journal of Scientology” and the “Professional Auditor’s Bulletin”, with Hubbard writing more busily than ever. There was a big happy family flair about it all. And it wasn’t a “youth cult” at all, as the press had it: The majority of the participants were people in the healthy middle of their lives, professionals from various fields, good citizens. Yet dianetics and (later) scientology had done something. By their mere existence they had stirred up embarrassments the organizations mentioned above would have preferred to keep well hidden. These ventilated their rage by accusing scientology - funnily enough - of the very things they were doing themselves.

Hubbard had asserted that most illnesses (70%) were psychosomatic and could be cured by auditing and not medicine. This went against the doctors; consequently the American Medical Association accused auditors of being quacks. He had asserted that drugs, hypnosis and electric shocks were not only unnecessary for therapy but actually harmful. This went against psychiatry; so the American Psychiatric Association accused scientologists of using drugs and hypnosis. He had made it a strong point that no violence ought to be used in the course of therapy. This went against the World Federation of Mental Health who protected even those psychiatrists who raped their female patients as part of “therapy”; so they accused scientologists of indulging in sex orgies. To top it up, Hubbard - by developing dianetics - had found a way of undoing brainwashing. Techniques which turned people into live robots by giving them instructions under the influence of pain, drugs and hypnosis, were a subject of major interest to the secret services in the 40’s and 50’s. Corresponding research projects were undertaken in the psychological faculties of universities all around the planet. The CIA in particular felt offended by Hubbard’s dianetic techniques and - naturally - accused scientology of brainwashing. The whole scenario of mind control and large scale electronic population control was threatened to be uncovered by scientology auditors [7, 8, 9, 10]. These were enemies to be reckoned with. Hubbard saw it. The CofS was his answer to the threat too weak an answer as it turned out. On United States territory, Hubbard didn’t manage to hold his own against the enemy. In 1959 he went to England. ESCAPE TO ENGLAND Hubbard bought St. Hill Manor, an old manor house in Sussex near the town of East Grinstead. There things continued at an ever-expanding rate. By this time the CofS had gained a foothold in all English-speaking countries around the planet. St. Hill became - to scientologists internationally - the navel of the world. Hubbard continued researching and teaching. He only taught by lecture, backed up by summary write-ups called HCOBs (Hubbard Communications Office Bulletins) which together with the magazines mentioned - were sent to auditors all around the world. His speeches and communications were almost exclusively addressed to the professional auditors and church executives of that time -which nowadays makes them almost unintelligible to outsiders or beginning students. In the 50’s and 60’s there was no “paying public” in today’s sense. There were only auditors, both professional and semiprofessional and they audited each other. Hubbard would give a lecture and propose a new process with the target in mind to find the fastest route to Clear. (He himself had made Clears since 1948. Now he tried to teach others to do it.) The auditors would sit down and run this process on each other: first one way to a result, then the other way. This was called co-auditing. To some extent, everyone internationally was participating in these projects. Telexes and letters were flying back and forth between St. Hill and the scientology organizations of South Africa, Australia, New Zealand and the US. Not that Hubbard took anyone’s opinion or advice - he only relied on himself. But he needed everybody’s results to determine what course to take in his research. In 1965 came his great breakthrough: Clears could be made by others than himself. He seemed to have wrapped it up. Yet the enemy wasn’t sleeping and Hubbard, with all the time he spent on his research, still kept a watchful eye on the movements of press and politics. He quipped that there were more FBI

agents than students on the courses of some of the scientology organizations. Security became an issue. Staff were trained in a procedure called “security checking” to find infiltrators by means of the E-meter and clever questioning - yet some slipped through, as the future showed. In 1963, the unexpected happened: the FBI raided the CofS organization in Washington D.C., wrecked the furniture, threatened the staff and seized books, E-meters and auditing folders containing personal data of pcs. Similar things happened in Los Angeles. (The confiscated items were given back only many years later, after an extended legal battle.) In 1965, scientology was banned in the state of Victoria, Australia; this ban was then extended over all Australia and England, too. In England it concerned only foreign scientologists traveling into the country. They were turned back at the border. (In England, the ban was lifted in 1980.) Hubbard obviously had a problem. The barriers seemed larger than his chances. In fact, the problem was threefold: One, governments and the press were against him. Two, some staff were disloyal to him and in fact in the service of the power groups mentioned earlier. Three, his loyal staff may have been willing, yes, but not necessarily able to do the job - due to their unsuitable professional backgrounds. What Hubbard needed, were auditors, course supervisors and able administrators. What he got were butchers, bakers, engineers, nurses, musicians, secretaries, housewives, and some business people, too. Here he had a product (auditing) which was in growing demand despite certain efforts to suppress it, there he was lacking staff to deliver it. To cap it all, there wasn’t even the time to train those who were there. It was all cope, stress and nervousness. Things seemed to slip out of his hands. The house was on fire; Hubbard poured out policies, orders, telexes to smother the flames. Between 1960 and 1966 he issued 1000 “Hubbard Communications Office Policy Letters” (HCOPLs). Most of them were of three to five pages length. The items “suppressive persons” (SPs), “justice procedures” and “ethics handlings” ranged heavily in the foreground - understandable in the light of the tight situation scientology was in. In 1966 a special branch was formed: the Guardian’s Office (GO). It was to take care of all manner of outside aggressions so as to keep the organizations (“orgs”) free to deliver uninhibitedly. The GO was established hierarchically and represented in each continent, each country and each org; St. Hill was the head office worldwide. Apart from its defensive duties the GO had the task of monitoring and investigating the doings of psychiatry, the FBI and the CIA, and expose them in the press. They did so in the manner of “investigatory journalism” and did a good job at it to start with. Much later, though, in the 70s, the GO network had become so much a machine in its own right that it overshot the mark and began dirty tricks campaigns on people they considered enemies to scientology. It didn’t take much to make the GO think someone was a potential or active “suppressive person”. On such persons black-mail, libel and slander, even personal threats and violence were used. The most insignificant press statement regarding scientology from the side of some Member of Parliament was sufficient to launch a full scale legal attack on him - which didn’t help to heighten the public repute of the CofS [7, 9]. STAR WARS

Back to the year 1963: Hubbard worked out a twenty-six step “Plan for World Peace” involving the governments of Earth and the United Nations. Its major target was the abolishment of nuclear arms. This plan was meant to create a big agreement regarding the game of scientology amongst Hubbard’s followers, something to set against the organizedness of the enemy forces. These he didn’t see on Earth alone but in the galactic space around Earth. He was convinced that the real big bad boys were to found off the planet. Neither Hubbard nor his auditors ever questioned extrasensory perceptions, even if they sounded like science fiction. They perceived a space battle going on with themselves - as “operating thetans” (OTs) - taking part in it by means of their telepathic energies. Here follows a quotation of one of those policy letters which were thought to be “too hot” to be released to the general public. It shows how large Hubbard envisioned the game he considered himself a strategist in. He wrote it on June 25, 1963: “When we were attacked in January for using E-meters, I adopted for us a 2 part policy: 1. To hold the line legally and win in courts where possible but in no event to lose ground, 2. To speed up research, bypassing Clear and Theta Clear as objectives (. . .) and concentrating on the attainment by auditing of the state of OT as the best forward answer to our difficulties. In part one of this program, we are succeeding easily. But d is only short term and world deterioration is accelerating. In part two (. . .) we have OT in direct and real sight (. . .). We are then only months away from having OTs, a year at the most. The trouble with OTs in the past has only been lack of cooperation and a commonly agreed upon objective. Without these, OTs eventually fall prey again to smaller beings with bigger organization skill. (. . .) OT is an unstable state only when OTs are not cooperating with OTs. (. . .) The proof is, OTs have not survived as OTs whenever this super-individuation collided with the super-organization of weaker beings. (. . .) The answer is to remain organized (. . .). The first step is to prevent atomic war and planetary chaos and to utilize Earth as a rehabilitation center since it has already had the technology established here. A second step following after would be to establish units not unlike central’ organizations (of scientology), in nearby systems. No real’ conflict with stellar powers interested in these areas will develop as I can vouch for the two most concerned in this galaxy, the Espinol United Stars to which the solar system distantly belongs and the Galactic Confederation to which Espinol moderately bows. (. . .)” No matter what you and I may think about these lines, Hubbard was convinced of their truth. With this program the starting signal for a crusade without compare was given. It was Hubbard and his OT auditors against a world seen as infested by infiltrators from outer space and their dirty politics here on Earth. The above quotation contains a sentence of great significance for the future application of the tech. It is the statement that the one target to be followed at that time was the making of OTs and that all earlier targets were to neglected. These consisted of a step-by-step clearing program: Clear as freedom from one’s case and Theta Clear as freedom from any tie to the body. From now on the furthering of the individual in the direction of his ultimate spiritual freedom was not the guiding line; instead all forces available were to be utilized for a battle which in Hubbard’s opinion was to decide over the collapse of the world or its salvation. As many people as possible were to be rehabilitated regarding their “OT-ness”. The “case” of the person, his degree of “clearness” seemed - in this state of emergency - less important than developing his spiritual powers and adding them to the common cause. The necessary study materials were to be released in 1967 only

and not, as expected, within a year. The spirit of this state of emergency, lasting for years, was to determine the CofS for decades to come. They haven’t recovered from it up to the present day. “Go OT, no matter at what cost!” still is the widely proclaimed motto. In the course of this mobilization the outside pressures (both planetary and, as Hubbard saw it, extra-planetary) had increased to such a point that St. Hill didn’t seem safe any longer. Hubbard once again had to seek refuge elsewhere: this time in the un-governed waters outside the five-mile zone off the European coastlines. OFF TO THE HIGH SEAS What follows now are the ten adventurous years of the Sea Organization (1967-1977). Hubbard bought a medium-sized passenger ship, named it “Apollo” and continued his research whilst cruising the Mediterranean Sea. Later two more ships were added to the fleet. The Apollo, with Hubbard as Commodore, was the Flag Ship. All staff of the Sea Organization (or SO) had naval ranks apart from their post name or auditor qualification. Prior to starting the “Sea Project” (as it was called in its formative stage), Hubbard had resigned from the CofS as Executive Director and took the title “Founder” instead, holding himself available for consultation and signatures, though. “On specific request, as a write”; I will write books on Scientology, its organization, and will write HCOBs (bulletins) and policy letters as requested. “This he said in a policy of September 6, 1966. What it meant, in actual fact, is that he ran the CofS by telex, from the ship. By request only, yes, but he ran it. Maybe not because he wanted to but because he had to. None of the executives replacing him were up to the size of the task. Hubbard had to step in whenever the house caught fire again, and it did that often. Mismanagement and organizational stupidity from the side of the org staffs on land were the daily, weekly and monthly mishap of the orgs internationally, resulting in loss of income, legal battles, internal tensions and bizarre solutions. Already in February 1965 Hubbard was less than charmed by his church. He didn’t put all the blame on enemy attacks but found enough fault amongst his followers to say: “Trouble spots occur only where there are ‘no results’. Attacks from governments or monopolies occur only when there are ‘no results’ or ‘bad results’. (. . .) So the ogre which might eat us up is not the government or the High Priests. lt’s our possible failure to retain and practice our technology. “ [11] Nevertheless, the CofS kept growing. Not that it went smooth as silk; it was rough. Hubbard poured his administrative resourcefulness into yet another few hundred policy letters, with the emphasis on ethics, security and “admin. know-how” (as he called it). Despite all precautions the powers which were determined to squeeze the life out of scientology eventually got at the Apollo itself. The ship did not escape the long arm of the combined intrigue and rumor machines of CIA and Interpol. Already in 1969 it had started to be banned from various harbors; in the end it became so bad that the Sea Org had no place left to go to [7]. Meanwhile, though, - due to various successes on the legal front - it had become safe again to go on land in the US. The Flag Ship plus crew went to Florida in 1977; the Fort Harrison, a large old hotel in the town of Clearwater, was bought for a few million dollars cash; the Sea Org staff moved in. The place was then called “Flag”, to symbolize that the Flag Ship had moved on

land. To church scientologists, “Flag” ever since - and even after the death of Hubbard - stands for: this is the place where the Commodore himself is present, be it in body or in spirit; this is the place where scientology tech is delivered at the highest possible standard. They call it the “Mecca of standard tech”, and they are dead serious about it. The “navel of the world” had wandered from St. Hill via the Mediterranean to Clearwater, Florida. STAR WARS EXPANDED With respect to Hubbard’s research, the Sea Org years had resulted in a major shift of viewpoint concerning the nature of the “case” (i.e. the sum of engrams and ridges a person has in restimulation), and concerning the nature of the persecution scientology and Hubbard himself were exposed to. It was a shift not in principle but in emphasis. His hope to make OTs soon (voiced in the 1963 policy quoted) hadn’t come true as soon as he had expected. It had in fact taken till 1967. The research on the matter had actually started with Hubbard investigating the trouble his Clears were running into. For themselves, they were doing fine; they had no attention on their own past; all woes and troubles had been discharged; they were masters of their own mental energies and masses. Yet mental pictures and energies, not caused by them, afflicted them. Much as they felt the influence they couldn’t spot its source. A Clear is, by definition, a single being with no self-created masses or ridges attached to him. If he isn’t doing well there must be something influencing him which he himself did not create and which is beyond his normal perception of foreign made entities. Some extensive exploratory auditing (on Hubbard and on others) revealed that ridges had been installed on Earth to make this planet a trap for any thetan who would take a body here. The trap was set in such a way that the person would follow the pictures contained in the ridges as if by command, and that he wouldn’t be able to ever leave Earth again on his own account. These pictures and masses were not only found by Hubbard but by his auditors, too. After having located and run them, Clears would find their troubles disappearing. Therefore Hubbard concluded that there must be truth to the matter. He investigated further. Looking at his findings - as you will see them summarized in a moment - one is likely to wonder whether he didn’t get mixed up with his own science fiction fantasies. Hubbard himself, though, and the people who were part of the research, would have sworn any oath that they had not deviated even a fraction of an inch from their personal sanity and integrity, no matter what anyone else may think. With this word of warning, here is the story: The scheme for the trap set for the thetans on this planet goes back to a galactic confederation which consisted of 21 suns and 76 planets. Its ruler, Xenu, attempted to gain control over all beings under his rule by implanting his own intentions into their minds. “Implanting” means installing attitudes and opinions into another by the use of force, drugs, electric shocks or a combination of the three. It’s something like brainwashing, only worse. These implants contained pictures and commands on the use of sex, drugs, violence and religious symbols; their purpose was to produce aberrated behavior concerning these subjects, in man.

This incident happened 75 million years ago. There were bodies, cars, machines like today except on an incredibly high level of technical accomplishment. The style and taste of those days corresponds to the thirties of this century. Xenu tried to “solve” the overpopulation prevailing then by having people mass drugged, killed and - as thetans - transported to Earth. This happened to billions and billions of thetans. To finish off, Earth itself was blasted into oblivion by H-bombs being dropped down volcano craters. To Hubbard, this incident is the basic engram on the time track of Earth. According to him, all people who ever lived on Earth were affected by it either directly or indirectly, all history shaped by it, all culture contaminated by it. He sees the ridges generated during this genocide and subsequent implant being dramatized in the fear of overpopulation - demonstrated by propaganda against large families and deliberately kept up starvation; in population control by drugs; in mass evacuations and the slaughtering of whole populations; in brainwashing as a weak edition of implanting; in the suicidal play with and in the panic of, atomic weapons. The whole idea behind the implant (says Hubbard) is to make Earth population imitate the technical civilization of 75 million years ago and then trigger mankind to commit planetary suicide by means of the very technical advances they have achieved. If one were to follow his line of thought, one would be bound to interpret certain cultural phenomena in a different light than usual. Take, for example, religious art. It seems that the mental image pictures Hubbard found as part of the implant appear on traditional paintings in the form of trumpeting angels and chariots ploughing through clouds, or in the hallucinations anchorites are tempted by. They appear in Tibetan meditation illustrations and in the custom of nailing people to the cross - as the Romans did two thousand years ago and as Australian aborigines still do (ritualistically) up to this day. C.G. Jung’s study on “archetypes” could be interpreted as related to them. In the second half of the 20th century the restimulators paralleling the contents of the incident are - for the first time in 75 million years - extant again on Earth: cars, airplanes, helicopters, telephones, wireless communication, space missiles, atomic bombs, hallucinogenic drugs, brainwashing, and electric shocks used in psychiatric “therapy” and death sentences. All the “dynamite charges” man has in his mind have been put by him in his environment and are working back on him. The planetary suicide program has started triggering itself. “If you were looking for Hell and found Earth, it would certainly serve. War; famine, agony and disease has been the lot of Man. Right now the great governments of Earth have developed the means offering every Man, Woman and Child on the planet. (He is referring to the atom bomb. ) (. . .) We’re not playing a minor game in Scientology. It isn’t cute or something to do for lack of something better The whole agonized future of this planet, every Man, Woman and Child on it, and your own destiny for the next endless trillions of years depend on what you do here and now with and in Scientology. This is a deadly serious activity. And if we miss getting out of the trap now, we may never again have another chance” [11]. So much on the cultural history of Earth as interpreted by Hubbard How serious he was about it can be seen in the fact that he didn’t limit himself to philosophical musings about the matter. He saw his day-to-day physical and political doings menaced in direct consequence of Xenu’s doings.

Hubbard already took it for granted that a thetan - i.e. the person as a spiritual being - was immortal and that his goals and intentions would not cease to exist at the point of body death but would last until they were either fulfilled or canceled, no matter how many lifetimes it might take. This thought plus the newly discovered knowledge about the implant incident led Hubbard to the conclusion that Xenu and his men must be just as alive (on Earth or elsewhere) as Hubbard and his men and that Xenu probably never dropped his intention to win the world - an intention running diametrically counter to Hubbard’s plan of “clearing the planet”. And where would Xenu’s men best take their bodies in present time (strategically speaking), if not in positions as close to Hubbard as possible? - All of a sudden it had to be taken into account that the whole CofS was infiltrated by Xenu’s men; that things weren’t limited to the undercover agents of the FBI. By his very discoveries and results with regard to auditing, Hubbard had become a countercheck to Xenu’s plot. As a consequence of his findings, he saw himself confronted with the pressing question: Who of the staff is a friend, who belongs to the enemy? Apparently, to find out about the true identity of the staff or the public it wasn’t enough to check into the background of their present lives; one had to look deeper: what did they do 75 million years ago? Which party did they belong to then? Hubbard and his staff went paranoid over this question and the threat posed thereby. The typical characteristics of today’s CofS - strict command abidingness, military/naval toughness, blind followership, preparedness to sniff an enemy every which way, paranoia - are all a remnant of those days. It was in keeping with the matter at hand that the weapon Hubbard devised was a telepathic one. Obviously one cannot fight a thetan who points ridges, pictures, intentions and energy beams at one, with one’s bare hands. Consequently the auditing processes Hubbard designed were to detect and undo the influence from other planets and spaceships, be they directed on Earth in general or certain individuals in particular. “OPERATING THETANS” The processes countering Xenu’s schemes were named the “OT levels”, ranging from OT I to OT III. (Further OT levels, for different purposes, were developed later.) Doing the OT levels was comparable to joining the partisan army, the guerrilla, and going to war. One didn’t do it for “casegain” (i.e. to feel better personally) but for “clearing the planet”. One felt sworn in to a common supra-individual cause. To start with, the OT levels were only delivered on the Flag Ship. The battle cry of the Sea Org was: “first this planet, then this sector of the galaxy, then the universe.” Naturally, rehabilitating one’s higher spiritual dimensions has positive and pleasant aspects, such as conversing with wellmeaning beings in spheres outside the physical universe, reestablishing connections with friends of ages ago who one thought were lost to one but in fact happen to live on this planet, too, and experiencing the coming and going of representatives of peaceful powers. They aren’t all bad, out there, after all. The above Sea Org motto reveals, however, how much such positiveness had become sacrificed to a fighting mentality of “we are the only ones, the knights in white armour, the cavalry rescuing the fort”. - Even though this mentality

- in the light of the events to come - might be considered justified, it still put an ungoodly bias on the attitudes the staff identified with. To the public things were made to look different. The longer the term OT was used for marketing and sales purposes the more its original meaning was twisted; eventually it came to mean something like a boosted-up version of superman. Those believing in this version of the word hoped to gain wondrous powers by doing the OT levels I to III, like walking on water, lifting objects by sheer intention, creating things out of thin air. They projected all their magic fantasies into this legend-embroidered state of OT. Of course, the disappointment was great. But as church registrars always were very skilled, as the public always was ready to believe that their dreams would finally come true, and as “ethics officers” always made very sure that no word about anyone’s frustrations would leak out, the OT levels sold very well. “Going OT” - that meant finding the holy grail, attain enlightenment, disappear in some glorious nirvana. In the CofS, it is advertised in this manner up to the present day. Hubbard himself was much more realistic than his adherents about the effects he would create with scientology. The OT levels were to free the individual from the pictures and masses imposed on him by Xenu’s network. Disentangling oneself naturally went along with weakening the network. The end phenomenon for the individual was: free of the entanglement; the end phenomenon for the planet: a clear planet, i.e. one not governed by foreign intentions, pictures and energies. Much as Hubbard loved to postulate and hypothesize what “a thetan in good shape” might be able to do (it would make any kind of superman blanche), he was as well very down-to-earth regarding the actual results to be expected from auditing. “If you think for a rnornent that its the purpose of Scn to produce something intensely spectacular like a ghost that can move cigarette paper or rnountains, you have definitely gotten the wrong idea. We are interested in well men, we are interested in people with weU bodies, who can think straight, and who co-operate on optimum solutions. We are rlot making magicians.” [12] “We are not trying to achieve the certainly of mysticism, necromancy, or, to be blunt, the Indian ropetrick. We are trying to make sane, well beings. “ [13] To Hubbard, what Counted in the end, was the day-to-day performance of a person, his ability “to make it go right”. Auditing on the OT levels certainly was one facet of life but by no means all there was to it. “STANDARD TECH” During the Sea Org years, apart from the discovery of earthly and not-so-earthly attacks and counterattacks, Hubbard had started to formulate what he thought was going to be his legacy concerning the tech. In 1968, on the ship, he gave a series of lectures, called the “Class VIII Course” (i.e. for auditors of this classification), which were to be the final word on the subject of auditing. After OTIII there were seemingly no secrets left. From now on the tech was considered “standard”, meaning that there was a minutely prescribed way to go about it which would not tolerate any deviations. All cases seemed solvable in accordance with a set pattern. Why would Hubbard, himself the most unorthodox and “unruly” of all auditors, have constructed a corset like this? Probably to somehow transfer his mastership to his pupils. In order to fully appreciate the necessity for this new concept of “standard tech”, one has to recognize how

numerous the auditing procedures of 1968 had become, compared to the days of the Dianetics book (1950). Eighteen years of “streamlining” (Hubbard’s term) had brought about a great number of individual auditing processes. In order to resolve the problems of his clients and answer the questions of his auditors, Hubbard forever had to come up with new solutions. They were distributed worldwide in the form of “Hubbard Communications Office Bulletins” and attained as words of the master - the status of sacred untouchability. They were to be used as model solutions for each and every case problem coming up in session. In the end there were so many of them that the resulting complexity made the tech incomprehensible. Standard tech was Hubbard’s answer to this state of affairs. The wild growth of processes from the past eighteen years was cut down to the most relevant ones. These were put in an order, brought into a strict and unvarying sequence and from here on out formed the steps of the “bridge”. It was supposed to take any person from “green pc” to OT, like on an assembly line. Impressive as this technological structure may appear in theory, it soon showed its drawbacks when it came to practical application. The flexibility, the raw man-to-man approach of Book One (“Dianetics”) auditing gave way to an unwavering rigidity. Auditing stopped being the solution-finding dialogue between two people and was turned into a ritualistic exercise, an application of rote procedures to all and sundry. This future development of course was not expected to happen, when standard tech was proclaimed in 1968. All cases were thought to be solvable in a standard way and all pcs to get the same treatment wherever they went to get their auditing. These assumptions, as it turned out, were far from true. The tech had not been brought in its final form. Hubbard had to keep on correcting and correcting and issuing bulletin upon bulletin for the next ten years - till 1978. Pc’s were not receiving standard tech wherever they went; there were in fact vast quality differences between orgs which infuriated Hubbard to no small degree. Hubbard himself of course could do it all and was famous for it, so apparently the tech was good enough. The weak links in its transmission were the course rooms. Course supervisors - and therefore the auditors trained by them - were not always able to grasp Hubbard’s technical and philosophical concepts and apply them sensibly. Hubbard countered this with the development Of “study tech”. Its success was limited. In the end it as well fell prey to the all-prevailing woodenness of application. As a side product the rather awkward “scientologist’s jargon” developed much to the annoyance of outsiders and newcomers. despite these unfavorable circumstances, the tech still Worked on people. It led staff and public to the recognition of innermost certainties and spiritual enhancement. One just knew that the tech was correct and that one would progress more by further use of it. BACK ON LAND The Sea Org years, as we saw before, ended in 1977 when the Sea Org moved into the Fort Harrison. Hubbard stayed in hiding from his real and not-so-real enemies (he didn’t appear in public any more and lived in forever changing secret locations); OT III was the hot and whisperedabout magic level: the CofS aspired to become a world-embracing business set-up, ready to fight anyone by telepathic, legal or illegal means.

The tech certainly worked; people had life-changing gains from it. Its quality varied considerably, though, depending on the org and on the auditor. Yet the internal groupcohesiveness and the promotional machine of the CofS allowed no criticism: scientology was great, auditing a heavenly experience, and Flag was best of all. The church was always right, no matter how much an individual would be wronged by it. Staff who somehow didn’t make it “went by the boards”, i.e. were declared trouble sources or suppressive, and forgotten. The pc’s whose cases for some reason didn’t straighten out easily, soon filled the role of guinea pigs on which auditors could test their abilities. In case of failure they were handed over to the next higher org, there to have some more money drained out of them. For such people it was not unusual to accumulate a dozen or more session folders - a stack reaching up the ceiling. Several hundreds of valuable auditing hours were churned out on them with no result. In the end, when there was no further bright idea as to what to do next, the unfortunate victims of such experimentation found the blame put on themselves: the CofS quite haughtily found that they weren’t “up to it” yet and dismissed them as “potential trouble sources”. The originally playful spirit of the 50s was degenerating into a super serious no-fun thought regimen under the domination of a mammoth machine who had nothing in mind but to take possession of the planet. “Clearing the planet” came to be understood as: “We are the only ones who know anything about anything, so you’d better listen to us, buddy!” The Church of Scientology, within twenty-five years, had turned into a self-adulatory insider club of naval attire and fascist performance who shunned all comparison with the outside world and only applauded its own self-created values. Hubbard lived in hiding; his only contact with the CofS were communicators who increasingly started to control his communication lines and thereby controlled him. His power had gone over to the apparatus he had built over the years; it had become bigger than him. Unaware of it all, staff and public loved Hubbard more than ever; the PR machine made him come across as everybody’s best friend. “Do as Ron says” was the order of the day in whatever difficult situation. This made for meticulous study of source materials and ready quotations at any given moment, but it didn’t make for good common sense thinking. The more the CofS moved away from its founder and became a machine in its own right, the more it lost in spirit and gained in Stalinistic personality cult with all that goes along with it: handclapping in front of the photograph of the founder, telling anecdotes and legends about him, making his work their gospel. A system of mutual control made sure that nobody broke out of the system. Anyone who had negative feelings would push them out of his mind and feel guilty about them. After all, around here they are only doing what Ron says, and it must be right because Ron is always right. That was the simple logic which very effectively kept things together. The more Hubbard receded as a person, the more “Ron” or “LRH” (L. Ron Hubbard) was sold to the public as a piece of merchandise. The “Old Man” never ceases to be there portrayed, photographed, cast in bronze. He serves well as a sales gimmick. After 1980 he disappeared for good and lived in seclusion on a California ranch, kept incommunicado by the “communicators” controlling him. He died - so the CofS says - in 1986, aged 75.

Religious Salesmanship Despite all the things one could say against the CofS, one thing is for sure: they managed to keep going as a worldwide business and presenting themselves in the form of flashy buildings, glossy magazines, and pompous “Flag Events”. If one is to believe their promotional campaigns, they are now, in 1990, in a better condition than ever before. To look back: 1968 marked the arrival of standard tech. In 1970 the complete collection of Hubbard’s policy letters was brought out in book form (ten volumes). In 1975 a glossary of scientology terms was issued, the “Technical Dictionary”. 1976 brought the compact edition of the technical bulletins (twelve volumes). The years of improvisation were over. With regard to tech delivery, the CofS seemed all set to go off like a rocket. Yet with Hubbard gone (1980) and dead (1986) there was no one to guide the mammoth with a spiritual goal in mind, therefore its only purpose became making money. In the course of the ten years after the withdrawal of the founder (1980 to 1990), the CofS found ever new ways to pull money out of people’s pockets by putting new courses and new “rundowns” (i.e. auditing processes) as a must for everybody, on the curriculum. This curriculum - on the training side - is a sequence of courses one must do in order become an auditor; on the auditing side it is “The Bridge to Total Freedom”. According to Hubbard in 1968, standard tech consists of finding the shortest route between the entry point of the person on the “Bridge” and the state of Clear. The seventies saw a change in this; in the eighties this concept was thoroughly abolished. Today everyone is shoved through the same routine whether they need it or not, with the excuse that “Ron says so”. Which means nothing but profiteering on the personal need and good faith of one’s customers. But people pay, and put up with anything They are scared “to lose their Bridge” and burn in hell forever It seems they would rather sacrifice their personal integrity than relinquish their OT levels. MASTERS AND MINIONS Regarding “tech delivery”, Flag - up to this day - functions as the senior technical org from where the tech is monitored internationally. Organizationally, there is “International Management” (“Int”) in Los Angeles from where seven top executives are calling the shots. “Int” runs scientology orgs worldwide by direct orders given through telex machines. Their common objective is “to get the stats up”. (“Stats” is short for statistics.) The stats for the week are counted each Thursday at 2pm. This means high-pressure time for all staff. It means pushing students through courses no matter whether they have grasped the materials or not, squeezing the last possible auditing hour out of each auditor and pc in sight, “regging” (the registrar selling services) more money than the week before etc. Even a single “Dianetics” paperback sold literally in the last minute to the odd passer-by on the street would save the neck of some hard-struggling staff member. If need be, he would even buy the book himself! -Who ever’s stats aren’t up by Thursday 2pm is in for trouble: in addition to his 70 hour week he has to put in overtime to make up the damage.

It’s a high pressure system based on fear and slave labor. The euphemistic motto is: “high purpose low pay”. The material existence of most staff looks like it: long hours in exchange for mere pocket money. This demonstrates how well the indoctrination machine works. There are two types of staff. Contracted staff go on time contracts of two-and-a-half or five years. Sea Org recruits sign a billion year contract. Of course it is purely symbolic and has no legal value, but it is taken as seriously as any blood oath in the tribal days of pagan Europe. The benefit of staff getting the “ bridge” for free or at least at half price (depending on the auditing level) is a reason for many to join staff. Which is not to say that they get very far with it. Once a staff member is “recruited”, he is trained for his post, be it in the “technical division” (auditing and training) or in an administrative division. When he has finished studying for his post, when his stats are up, when he can make some hours in his day to get sessions, and when just at those hours there is an auditor free for him (the paying public always has priority), then and only then may one staff member or the other, in the course of some years, make it up to Clear. When he is lucky. Not many of them are. The Sea Org, after it moved on land, became a harbor for anyone who didn’t quite know what to do with himself and his life. Sea Org recruits, over the years, became increasingly younger. The paying public certainly couldn’t be labeled by the term “youth cult” but the Sea Org staff well deserves this name. Although the Sea Org has been on land since 1977, men and women alike still have naval ranks and walk around in blue uniforms and white captain’s hats. In the seventies and eighties, the SO staff member lived crammed into dark quarters, for example in the cellar near the ventilation ducts, in the otherwise not lettable rooms of cheapest boardinghouses, or in a dormitory shared with at least as many people as would be considered bearable in a refugee camp. He had about four square meters to his name. He got up early, worked all day, came home late and only in order to sleep. (Which is why four square meters were all he needed). He worked six and a half or seven days a week depending on how his stats were last Thursday. His pay was likely to not exceed 15 Dollars a week for many months in a row. Parents had an hour or two “family time” per day; children grew up rough as wild ponies in internally run kindergartens (if available), their ears full with Sea Org jargon and four letter swear words. (It was considered becoming to swear, for gentlemen and ladies alike.) International Management is assisted in its tasks by a number of administrative networks: the Commodore Messenger Org, the LRH Communicators network, the Flag Representative network, the Watchdog Committee, the Religious Technology Center, the Guardian’s Office, etc. Some of these networks are established on a purely international level, others reach down to continental, national and city org levels. The “tech orgs” must make money, make money, make money. In an “admin. org” whose target it is to make the technical orgs make money, the jingle is slightly different: make them make money, make them make money, etc. etc.. All money for the weekly overheads and staff pay has to be made each week in a new unit of time, by the auditors and course supervisors alone. Auditing and training (apart from book sales) are the only income making activities in a scientology organization. Yet when one looks at the overall ratio between admin. staff and tech staff one finds it to be something to the order of 17:1!

One auditor or supervisor must feed seventeen admin. staff members - of his own and of other (admin.) orgs. Small wonder staff pay is low. What step would such a waterlogged mammoth naturally take to preserve its survival? Raise the prices, of course. And so it happened. Starting in 1976 and continuing for a good ten years, the prices went up by 5% per month. (In England 10% . ) It was started by Hubbard himself as the prices at the time needed adjusting. But Hubbard, in the late 70’s, had already lost his grip on the church. And the prices kept climbing, climbing, climbing. (Even at present they climb occasionally.) And the public? They panicked - and bought on the basis of bank loans. They bought scores of auditing hours in advance and dozens of courses, just to beat the price rise. A CHURCH EATING ITS CHILDREN What makes people endure all this and go along with it? With some, it’s the deep conviction that scientology is a good thing no matter how mad an executive may go occasionally and that one has to live through it till better days are around. To this type of people - usually Sea Org members - supporting scientology is worth more than their lives. With others (the public). the fear of losing their spiritual salvation stands in the foreground. “Going up the Bridge” is their one hope and goal for this life, believing without question that scientology is the one and only way to achieve their total spiritual freedom from the entrapment of compulsive reincarnation on this planet. The outlook of being declared a suppressive person (i.e. being excommunicated) to them is worse than any rudeness, degradation or injustice any ethics officer may dish out anywhere. The CofS has started taking Hubbard literally, to value his every statement as supremely important, to not look at his general intention any more. In the 50s, by the pressure of necessity, the church was created by Hubbard as a weapon. By the end of the 70’s it started to gain its own momentum. In the 80’s it took on a color of its own, moved away from the intentions of its creator and finally turned against its own members. In 1982 the so-called “Finance Police” from International Management traveled around the planet and extorted huge sums from individual scientology missions for alleged “finance crimes” against the orgs. Admission” is a privately owned center franchised to deliver certain standard scientology services. Mission holders were ordered to Flag, the Florida headquarters, to get expensive “security checking” for crimes they had allegedly committed. Some actually were declared a “suppressive person” on the spot by “finger declare” - i.e. by some Sea Org officer pointing his finger at them and “saying the word”. .Officially, according to church policy, a thorough investigation should have been done.) Many missions broke down financially never to recover again. Thousands of scientologists, both staff and public, were declared suppressive or simply left the CofS in protest. The next move: the Religious Technology Center (RTC) was formed by a handful of top CofS executives. It had not been announced by Hubbard with a policy letter as one was accustomed to. The story goes that - in order to make up a proper charter - they forged LRH’s signature. With the RTC, these few executives gained access to all of the CofS funds, reserves and resources and thereby to the peak power position in an international multi million dollar enterprise.

In the years following the RTC coup the magazines became glossier, the promotion flashier, and the self-celebrations of the CofS more bloodcurdlingly embarrassing than ever. The decisive thing, though, started by the RTC and unheard of before, was the introduction of trademarks to make “Scientology Religious Technology” an industrial product comparable to Coca-Cola (a comparison cherished by church officials.) “Scientology” has come to be packaged up in the form of courses or bits of “Bridge”. If it’s bought in the Church of Scientology, it’s the real thing. If it’s bought elsewhere it cannot be but mere tinsel; it will be an alteration of the pure “standard” form. It must be, because only “suppressive” practitioners would use scientology without being in the CofS, and suppressive means insane, incapable, or worse, evil. Scientology, defined by its founder as an “applied religious philosophy” has become a trademarked article subjected to an international PR- and marketing machinery which has no other intention than to make money out of the legacy of L. Ron Hubbard. His books, his taped lectures are marketed in ever new wrappings, the E-meter is priced at many times the value the actual device has, and the writings of Hubbard are shuffled about and put together in ever new courses and auditing rundowns. According to the CofS price list of November 1990 the auditing hour costs between 560 and 740 Dollars; they are sold in blocks of twelve-and-a-half hours only. For the Emeter you pay 4625 Dollars. And all these things are sold, sold, sold. A summary of trademarks always appears in small print at the bottom of CofS promotional materials: “CSI LOGO (Church of Scientology International), SCIENTOLOGY, SCIENTOLOGIST, DIANETICS, LRH (L. Ron Hubbard), OT, FREEWINDS (the name of their cruise liner), FLAG, THE BRIDGE, HUBBARD, HCO, NEW ERA DIANETICS, the SCIENTOLOGY cross, the OT symbol, the LRH signature. E-METER, TRUTH REVEALED, the SCIENTOLOGY symbol, and the DIANETICS symbol are trademarks and service marks owned by the Religious Technology Center and are used with its permission. (. . .) SCIENTOLOGY is an applied religious philosophy.” - Quite obviously the RTC are aspiring to have the monopoly on scientology Who is running the show? -The answer is provided by a 12 page glossy color-brochure entitled “Total Expansion in the 1990’s”. The caption under a photo showing the seven chief executives of the CofS reads: “International Executives, speakers at the New Year’s event in Los Angeles. From left to right: Commander (Right Arm) Norman Starkey, Trustee of LRH Estate; Ensign Heber Jentzsh, President of the Church of Scientology International; Captain Mark Ingber, Commanding Officer of the Commodore’s Messenger Org International; Captain David Miscavige, Chairman of the Board Religious Technology Center; Captain Guillaume Lesevre, Executive Director International; Captain MarcYager, Inspector General for Administration RTC; Captain Ray Mithoff, Inspector General for Technical RTC.” Notwithstanding its huge sales the CofS always managed to keep its status of “non-profit organization”. Legal attacks proved fruitless. In addition to the profits it makes as a “nonprofit” organization it as well makes “real” profit through two profit-oriented companies. One is officially only “associated” but is in truth the fully dependent publishing house “New Era Publications”. The other is “Authors Services International” or ASI. The only author who ever had the pleasure of receiving their services, is Ron Hubbard. Here the marketing of the licenses for his scientological work as well as for his earlier science-fiction writings is done. The money made winds up in the pockets of those members of the Board of Directors of the Church of Scientology

who happen to be at the same time in the directorate of the ASI. - It therefore appears that not all Sea Org members get a mere pittance for their hard work. The CofS has effectively become an instrument to suppress the humanitarian and helpful aspects of scientology. There is no need for any government action or press campaign against Scientology. Left to their own devices, the Church of Scientology will reliably pervert the subject to a point where it will become unbearable even to its members and it will disappear from the face of the Earth. In this context it is worth noting that the CofS, since the 50s, has kept publishing books by L. Ron Hubbard which were not actually written by him. It continues to do so even now, years after the death of the writer. They are the product of an editorial team as one can sometimes tell from the small print on the impressum page. But their sources stay hidden. There are no references as to what source materials were used. And whoever happens to know the relevant passages in the original text, can’t help noticing how they were changed. Those who may fear that the corrosion of source materials finally has set in, fear too late: staff who were working close to Hubbard at the time have witnessed that as early as 1973 technical bulletins (HCOBs) were writ en by others than Hubbard but issued under his name. And today, now that the RTC own the name “L. Ron Hubbard” as a trademark, there is of course no shortage of “sensational new manuscripts” by the late founder. (You may wonder how the top brass of the CofS apparently have not benefited from the improving practices of scientology. The criticism may be made that scientology does not work, but the simplicity seems to be that they never received much auditing or tech training, and because of having been brought up as Sea Org children, they never got a broad experience of life.) HUBBARD’S COMMENTS What might Hubbard have said about the matter? He actually foresaw the development decades earlier already and made some pointed remarks about it. In his “Essay on Management”, of August 1951, he says: “(. . .) Most management’s prefer a good, safely dead goal finder whose ideas and rationale are solidly held by the group, and most groups prefer live goal finders because as long as the goal finder lives (. . .), the group has a solid champion.” [14] - Small wonder the CofS never forgets to add an abundance of eversmiling Hubbard photos to their promo materials Creating the impression that the goal finder still lives makes for better sales. In contrast to the current CofS management Hubbard himself didn’t think it was a good idea to monopolize his techniques. In ‘“Dianetics” he says: “Dianetics is not in any way covered by legislation anywhere for no law can prevent one man sitting down and telling another man his troubles, and if anyone wants a monopoly on ~, be assured that he wants it for reasons which have to do not ~ dianetics but with profit. “ As well in “Dianetics”, Hubbard even asks scientologists to assist him in the future improvement of scientology methods: “In or a hundred years the therapeutic technique which is offered in this volume will appear to be obsolete. Should this not prove to be the case, then the authors faith in the inventiveness of his fellow man ~ not have been justified. (. . .) The application methods cannot but be refined. All sciences begin with the discovery of basic axioms. They

progress as new data is discovered and as the scope of the science is widened. Various tools and techniques rise up continually, improved and re-improved. The basic axioms, the initial discoveries dianetics are such solid scientific truths that they will be altered but little. (. . .)” He ends on the words: “In this handbook we have the basic axioms and a therapy which works. For Gods sake, get busy old build a better bridge!” He demanded that men in general “(. . .) have inalienable rights to think freely, to talk freely, to write freely their own opinions and to counter or utter or write upon the opinions of others. “ The individual scientologist in particular is expected to “use the best I know of Scientology to the best of my ability to help my family, friends, groups and the world.” (“Creed of the Church” and “Code of a Scientologist”, both in [1].) None of this is reflected by the CofS today. They have cast Hubbard in bronze and sell gold-leaf bound editions of his books and platinum-plated E-meters as “collectors items”. A veritable hunting ground for the collector of relics! They have enshrined “the tech” and won’t let anyone touch it. They don’t dare go one step further than “what’s written” - no matter how outdated it may have become. Hubbard found a set of axioms which he granted the importance of natural law. On the set theme of these axioms he improvised for the greater part of his life, finding ever-new solutions to the ever-changing problems presented to him by the cases of people. The great error being made by many scientologists inside and outside the CofS is that they mistake Hubbard’s 30-year research for the ultimate in wisdom. Instead of following Hubbard’s call and researching further - always and unvaryingly on the basis of the axioms - they elevate “what Ron says” to a dogma and introvert into solutions of the past. The implication of this is that while the majority have learned a lot about it, they believe they still have a long way to go before they manage - or dare to claim - to understand the subject. As it stands now, “the tech” in the CofS has lost its aliveness and became petrified. For those, however, who get gains from dancing around the monument of their godhead, it still serves a purpose.

Sectarianism A MONOLITH CRUMBLES As mentioned before: In 1983, immediately after the RTC was formed, hundreds and hundreds of old scientologists were declared suppressive persons. The majority of them had held high positions in the admin network or were experienced top auditors, often trained by Hubbard himself. A whole generation of scientologists who formed the living memory of Hubbard as a person, was wiped away within a few months without the application of any of the justice procedures they would have had a right to have. Some were kept for weeks in secret places in the California desert (Gilman Hot Springs, HappyValley) under conditions similar to prison camps: men and women locked up together in toilets for days, beatings, chicanery. As a consequence, many scientologists resigned from the CofS in protest. There was an actual mass walk-out - a phenomenon unbelievable even to those who themselves did the walking out. It is hard to imagine for an outsider how deeply the lives of those who had suffered the 1982-83 purge were affected. A gigantic and vital stable datum had been taken away from people: the church was not a safe place; Ron was not infallible in his commandership. The question of whether scientology had only been applied wrongly or actually did not work (inconceivable so far) hung in the air like a big cloud of black smoke. The CofS, unrelenting and self-righteous as always, issued a set of policies which cowed those who stayed into silence and made them denounce their best friends. The “outies” were ostracized. Disputes attempted by “outies” failed since “churchies” would simply turn their back. Those who didn’t officially “disconnect” from their “outie” friends, were themselves excommunicated. “Disconnection letters”, dictated to the “churchie” by his ethics officer, therefore were the order of the day. To quote one as an actual example: “Hello John, I’m at London org getting some auditing. I’m totally not in agreement with what you are doing concerning scientology and I want you to stop it. I don’t want to have any contact with you physically and mentally until you have handled your condition. Paul.” Individually the effects of this often took on dramatic forms Overnight the friends of yesterday didn’t know each other when they met in the street; brothers wouldn’t talk any longer with each other; mothers saw their sons leaving them and their daughters raging at them; business partners had actual walls put into their formerly common office space to separate their desks. Years, even decades of time, labor, efforts and hopes seemed wasted; private fortunes - in some cases hundreds of thousands of dollars - had gone up in smoke. And so some thousands went their way and closed a chapter on their life: some hundreds tried to congregate outside the CofS and find a new beginning; some dozens decided to pick up the E-meter and carried on. Around them, the lost and stray sheep began to gather. For most, this gregariousness was an unthinking action, an

instinctive groping for the life-belt in a spiritual survival action. The lost group had to be replaced by a new group. Getting the “outies” organized was first started in Los Angeles by former top tech man and International Case Supervisor. David Mayo, after he had been thrown out of the CofS as “suppressive person”. He started a network of “Advanced Ability Centers” (AACs) in the US and in Europe. After promising start they collapsed because of the legal attack from the CofS. Their reason: the “outies” had gotten hold of the confidential and well-guarded OT III materials and other OT levels. Suddenly there were not only those five Advanced Orgs of the CofS delivering the “secret” level of OT III. but some forty non-CofS centers throughout Europe, the US an-~ Australia. Initially, in 1967, Hubbard imposed this secrecy because he considered that some aspects of the level could be profoundly disturbing and could even drive some individual insane However, to be realistic, it was more likely in 1983 that the CofS saw her hugely lucrative “mystery” threatened and her monopoly on it jeopardized. Either way, they attacked Mayo and some other leading staff of the AAC, by launching court cases against them. There was as well physical violence. Mayo went down, yet the ball was kept rolling by a group forming separately in Europe under the leadership of William “Cptn. Bill” Robertson, Hubbard’s right-hand man for sixteen years and top grade auditor. Robertson had the bulldozer-like intention to carry out what “the old man” had started (and what the CofS had studiously neglected to do), namely the galactic war against Xenu and his network by means of telepathic auditing techniques. He developed a refinement to the OTIII technique, named it “Excalibur” (after a book Hubbard wrote in the 30’s), trained a few dozen OTs on it who again trained others, and soon the intentions of many individual solo-auditors all around the planet once again started permeating Xenu’s communication lines. Thousands and thousands of solo hours were audited throughout the years of 1986 to 1988. The result: Xenu appeared no more. This being who had heavily interfered with individual sessions and been the contestant to hours-long telepathic wrestling matches, had disappeared from the scene. Auditors couldn’t contact him any longer. Instead, lesser beings like lower executive staff of Xenu turned up - in control stations on away planets or in space ships orbiting Earth. They were no problem to audit and rehabilitate as soon as they learned that their master’s game had come to an end. A noteworthy side effect of Robertson’s work were a whole bad of data about the recultivation of Earth after the nuclear radiation from the incident 75 million years ago had ceased, and about the various galactic-political groups who were interested in shaping the future destiny of this planet - in a good as well as in a bad sense. In view of the data amassed by Robertson may conclude that any cultural progress and any political catastrophe on Earth was brought about by “visitors from out there” - up to this day. As an example he interprets the tendencies towards a “One World Government”, proclaimed since 1776, as a shrewd move to satisfy the colonial intentions from galactic confederations who have long since planned to add Earth to their empire. He regards the political inefficiency of Earth governments concerning the solution of the basic needs of man as a maneuver to deceive people. By “playing the media”, by well-aimed catastrophic news. by the arbitrary continuation of war, the population is to get the impression that the problems of this planet are too large to be solved by political means. In the face of the alleged desperateness of the situation man is to be driven to the point of reaching out voluntarily for the

“helping hand from outer space” and empowering the rightful representative of our planet - the UNO - to take it. Which would make Earth a colony by plebiscite. Robertson summed up his thoughts in a manuscript called “Sector 9”; it is only privately circulated. After Xenu was beaten, Robertson’s group began to fall apart. In 1990, no organized followership of Hubbard outside the CofS has remained - at least none that would deserve mentioning. All in all, the independent auditors offer a fairly heterogeneous picture. Some are openly critical of Hubbard due to old personal grudges against him, some have gone off on a tangent of their own, due to their lack of comprehension of his work. some try to be “churchier” than the church itself in adhering to the letter of his words. A “sect”, according to the dictionary, is a “religious group separated from an established church”. The word is derived from the Latin “secare”, meaning “to cut off”. Scientology as such is not a sect but a philosophy in its own right, with religious traits and based on a set of axioms. As long as Hubbard had the helm it was his personality which brought about what may be considered the “established church of the definition above. Yet already durzng his “reign” side movements popped up in the wake of the CofS - be it because of personal rancor or a “know best” attitude. These are sects in the true sense of the definition. Only after Hubbard’s death did it become clear how low the spiritual cohesion of his movement actually was, how much it lived off a guiding personality. With that personality gone, all fell apart. Today, there are a good dozen scientological sects. They congregate around the interpretation which their leaders give to Hubbard’s work. As the CofS itself does not follow the intentions of Hubbard any longer and is far from comprehending the philosophical essentials of scientology, it is nothing but another sect - though admittedly the biggest. THE PRAGMATIC VIEW To make the picture look somewhat less gloomy it must be said that there are as well some auditors who look at scientology from a purely practical viewpoint. They take “the tech” maybe for the first time ever - to the destination it was originally designed for, and that is simply: “the making of the individual capable of living a better life in his own estimation and with his .fellows, and the playing of a better game. “ [15] This form of therapy and personality development is the subject of this book. One might call it “pragmatic scientology”. It is not interested in the indoctrination of people or the forming of ideological brotherhoods. If anything went wrong with scientology, then it is its adherents’ predilection for building strong images of leaders (Ron) and enemies (Xenu), and for forming conspiracy-minded groups around them. For those who are weak and in search for something to hold on to, for those who have never before read a book in their lives, scientology tends to become the thing of all things. They’ll defend it and their group tooth and claw, i.e. the values, ideals and maxims they have uncritically absorbed, because their newly discovered spiritual survival depends on it. Small wonder that such groups finally turn fascist in character: it’s due to the weakness of their members and the undisputed incomparability and infallibility of the leader. This doesn’t have to be so. It is indeed possible to adapt the methods of scientology to the needs of men and women

and their problems and to help them in an acceptable fashion. Pragmatism instead of “supermanism”. It is indeed possible.

A “ Cleared Planet” ? When one, for a moment, forgets the unpleasant outgrowths of scientology in the form of ill-mannered groups and individuals and considers its purely spiritual value in the way its founder intended it, then Hubbard puts quite a claim there: “A civilization without insanity, without crisis and without war; where the able can prosper and honest beings can have rights, and where Man is free to rise to greater heights, are the aims of Scientology.” [15] This claim is not a new one. Many great men have attempted to achieve precisely this. And as soon as they voiced their claim, the opponents to it would get busy. It was always so. Any man who ever tried to get something done on this planet had a rough time, whether he was an artist, a philosopher, a scientist, a politician, a businessman or the founder of a spiritual movement which later turned into a new religion. And where did the tensions between the old and the new always manifest themselves the worst? Within the vicinity of the founder, of course, where the new impulse meets the old order which counters with infiltrators. Any Christ has his Judas. And so there was in group fighting and being right and making wrong and splintering off, but - on the whole - the idea couldn’t be stopped. It survived in its pure form, its altered form, even in its opposites. Look at Buddha, Christ, Freud, Darwin, Galileo, Luther, Michelangelo, Einstein; look at how they were cursed and ridiculed at their time, and look at the schools of thought which followed in their wake. Even though these schools may have been trying to deny the truth of the work inspiring them - they still couldn’t help granting it existence. And it always was time itself which in the end spelled out the value of the founder’s thoughts and goals. The same will be the case with Hubbard and scientology. The time coincidence between Hubbard’s research and concurrent world developments deserve our attention. 1968 was the year of student revolts across Europe, of the Russians taking Prague by tank power; it marks the peak of the Vietnam war and of the peoples of Earth feeling threatened by atomic warfare. Just then, Hubbard began to fight Xenu’s powers by releasing OT III. Twenty years later, in 1988, Xenu ceases to show up in solo sessions. His power is broken. And a year later the Berlin wall falls, the USSR crumbles; again a year later (1990) the former archenemies USA and Russia join hands in the handling of world affairs. The cold war is over for good. Whether these have anything to do with each other - this I leave up to you. You could argue that hell is still turned loose all around the planet; maybe worse than ever. I could counter that an outcry of protest is to be expected when a centuries-old suppression begins to lift off, and that the absence of the enforced stability one is accustomed to will lead invariably to chaos - until a new and self-determined stability has settled in. Apart from that a lot of work with individuals has to be done yet before there will be peace and quietness. Just because the general and his officers have taken to their heels, the troops do not know that the war is over and keep following their old orders. - But, as I said, whether these have anything to do with each other, that decision I leave up to the reader.

PART TWO: The Principles Unveiled.

The “ Technologies” of Scientology INTRODUCTION The philosophical part of this book covers the principle ideas of the theory of auditing. They may at first seem like a random connection of observations of human behavior, but taken all together they form a structured view of how mental charge is the basis of life’s problems, how it is generated, maintained, and how it affects an individual’s life by giving rise to his “case”. Out of this view the procedures of auditing can be seen as an approach to guiding the pc progressively to discover and come to understand, the basis of his own charge and his effect on others, with consequent improvements in his “case”. The thirty-year growth of Hubbard’s work can be seen as an attempt to evolve an integrated and generally workable conceptual system to describe and enhance human behavior. We are now going to look at the practical side of scientology, at its actual methods and their use in day-to-day life. We are going to look at its “technology” as Hubbard calls it. “Technology” simply means “a set of techniques”. Much as one might use the word “methodology” instead, we are going to stick to “technology” or “tech” simply because there is a definite jargon within scientology which it is easier to adhere to than to break. Any jargon is useful as long as it makes sense and furthers the communication between practitioners, so we’ll use it. “Scientologese” is quite a useful language once one has come to grips with it. There are four technologies available in scientology: “study tech”, i.e. the know-how of how to study for hours and hours with full comprehension and without fatigue; “admin tech”, i.e. all things to do with organization, management and production; ”ethics tech”, i.e. the leading of one’s life by one’s own integrity and honor; and “auditing tech”. They all go back to the same philosophical foundations, formulated by Hubbard in the early 50’s and called “The Factors”, “The Axioms of Scientology”, and “The Dianetics Axioms”. All techniques used in scientology are derived from them, just as engineering techniques are derived from the natural law found by physicists. Hubbard did not “invent” the Axioms and the Factors: he only found and formulated them. He did invent “the tech”, though. (Axioms and Factors will be referred to throughout Part Two.) Of all the technologies mentioned we will mainly concentrate on auditing. Firstly, though, we are going to devote a few quick lines to the subject of study tech - for the benefit of the reader. STUDY TECH There are three barriers to study: the misunderstood word, the lack of mass, and the skipped gradient. All study problems can be reduced to these three barriers - given that the student is interested to start with, doesn’t think he knows it all anyway, and studies on his own selfdeterminism. The “misunderstood word” is the most deceptive of the three. One reads through a

paragraph, comes across a word one believes one understands and therefore does not look it up. Sooner or later one’s concentration goes and the whole text doesn’t seem to make sense any more. The words one clearly identified as “not understood” or “half understood” are not the problem. These words one may easily go back to as soon as one loses track of the line of thought in one’s text. Yet the word one always understood in one definition only, doesn’t make sense when it is used in a different definition in the text. Not realizing this, one keeps on reading. Sooner or later one feels bored with the whole book and feels like throwing it against the wall. But one doesn’t know which word it was! Because it didn’t register as misunderstood when you were reading it. So the rule is: when one feels bored or can no longer concentrate on a text one was previously interested in reading, one can be sure one passed a word one didn’t fully understand. Remedy: one goes back to the place where reading was still fun and snoops around a bit. Sooner or later one will find a word one would have sworn one knew - but indeed, in this particular context it has a different meaning altogether. So one gets out a dictionary and clears the word in all its definitions, reads over the part after this word again and miraculously the text will be just as much fun as before. There will be no sign of boredom or lack of concentration. Less deceptive but equally bothersome is the phenomenon called “lack of mass”, the second barrier. “Mass” means as much as having a clear picture or the reality of the thing one is studying about. In order to have sufficient reality one must have been in physical contact with the thing and gained experience in handling it. One must have been in touch with the actual mass of the thing itself, with the material it’s made of, it’s size, weight, color, way of behavior etc. When one is lacking this real-life experience with the thing one reads about, one naturally tries to imagine what it would be like. As one reads on one must keep on imagining and keep on imagining and keep on imagining until one finally feels all exhausted and weighed down by the pictures one made up in one’s mind and the effort to keep them in place. Lacking the mass in front of one, one has become massy in the mind. This is the moment when one decides one “must take a break” because this subject is really “too difficult” and “wears one out” . Remedy: get a drawing, a picture, a film of the thing; better even: go out and find one to look at. If no such thing is available you can at least make a sketch or a graph of it, better even a clay model. You can also, valuably, push odds and ends around on the table to clarify the various inter-relatednesses and mechanisms you are studying. The paperclips, marbles, bits of string become the objects in question, give the ideas more substance, get the images out of your head and hold them down in the real world. The “skipped gradient” (third barrier) goes along with a feeling of confusion. It applies to activities rather than study of theory. One was learning a skill nicely step by step and felt very stable. Suddenly one feels confused, doubts one’s ability to ever master it, feels uncertain and unhappy. Remedy: go back to the point of certainty and see what step has been left out or would need to be put in to make it a smooth gradient. This of course depends very much on the degree of

ability the student brought in to start with. Accordingly, his gradient has to be adjusted. Too low a gradient leads to boredom; too steep a gradient to confusion. Here is an example: Joe wants to drive a car. He reads a book, becomes familiar with the main terminology, key words such as engine, steering wheel, clutch, chassis, wheels etc., until he has a general understanding of them. He understands the difference between a wheel and a steering wheel, and that a “chassis” doesn’t serve to “chase” people, as the term may suggest. His understanding is a bit thin, though. It lacks substance. He may do some drawings to show how it works, and better still, plasticine models of the main parts, but seeing the real thing while studying is even more revealing. So he touches the wheels and feels the rubber and plays around with the clutch and accelerator pedals and follows the cables and pipes going in and out of the engine. Now he has the perfect balance between significance (the terms he studied) and mass (the actual car). Driving, though, is a different story again. This is studying by doing, not by reading. And when the right teaching gradients are kept, Joe will turn out to be a capable and safe driver. Simple as these things may look, they do straighten out the seeming complexities of study. Their remorseless application makes ladies perspire and strong men weep, but in the end it turns them into good students [17]. AUDITING Auditing is not synonymous with “therapy”, at least not in Hubbard’s understanding of the word. With the exception of “Dianetics”, he avoided the word “therapy” as he didn’t mean his tech to be used in the same sense with medicine, psychiatry and psychology. This might generate the idea that his methods were applicable to the sick and disabled only. Of course, one does heal depressions, fears, compulsions and psychosomatic ills with auditing, yet the actual purpose of auditing would be better described in terms like “ability enhancement” or “personality development”. The point is not to make an individual adapt to a “normality” prescribed by society, but to set him free to be, do and have whatever he desires. Hubbard’s concept of “scientology - an applied philosophy designed and developed to make the able more able” [2] implies that there is infinite expansion into ever new fields and dimensions of activity, that there is no standstill. It is a growth process, both in the spiritual and the material sense. And there is probably no person who wouldn’t wish to grow in one or both of these aspects. Which is why auditing is for anyone and not limited to cases of psychosis and neurosis. Looking at it from the outside, an auditing session appears not unlike a session in psychotherapy: two people in a room with the door shut, one asks and the other answers. Yet there are significant differences: A session is not done by the clock but by end result. It is ended when a subject and the emotional charge connected with it have been worked through and when the pc has had a cognit ion about the state he was in which will enable him to initiate a change in his life. (“Charge”, as we saw earlier, is mental tension as expressed by misemotion.) A session, accordingly, may last half an hour, three hours or even longer - in which case one takes breaks, of course.

Sessions are done as close to each other as feasible; there isn’t just once or twice one hour per week. It is not unusual for a pc to run up 25 to 35 auditing hours within one week. This way a considerable discharge and relief is caused within a very short time. The pc will carry on living on a higher level of emotion and ability than when he came in, and, because he is winning now, his morale will be up, he’ll carry on winning and won’t easily fall into new depressions. The downward spiral has turned into an upward spiral. Before a series of sessions is started, a thorough interview is done on the E-meter in order to detect all areas of charge the pc may have. Then an auditing program is developed by the auditor which considers the subjects the pc is interested in, brings them in their order of charged-ness (heaviest one first), and suggests one or more auditing processes for each one. The auditor does not deviate from this program in session. He does not improvise. He stays flexible, yes, but only within the limits of the processes prescribed by the program. The quality and correctness of the program can be estimated by the amount of interest and gain the pc has. When he “goes out of session” (mentally speaking) the program needs revising. The auditor knows no more of the pc but what the pc has said about himself in the interview or finds out during the session. He “doesn’t know all about him” just by looking at the way he sits in the chair. He is only interested in time, place, form and event of the incidents in the pc’s past, and in the pc’s considerations regarding them. The whole session is done by recall with the pc in his normal wakeful state. There are no drugs, hypnosis, electric shocks, trances, rites or initiation ceremonies. The pc will successfully re-experience his past traumata without any such aid. Once the original incident causing the pc’s difficulties has been found and “run out”, his psychosomatic or emotional troubles will disappear. As the auditor’s task is to make the pc find the exact beginning of his troubles, and as these may be earlier than birth, it happens quite by itself that the pc slides into prenatal or even past life memories. This is not enforced by the auditor but a natural consequence of the pc’s improvement in his recall ability and “confront” (i.e. mental stamina). The auditor is bound to follow a code of behavior, the “Auditor’s Code”. As the pc is aware of this code, he knows what he is to expect in the session. Amongst other things, the Auditor’s Code demands that the auditor give no comments, opinions, evaluations, invalidations, or interpretations of any kind regarding the statements of the pc. He is not to do so either in or out of session, whether to the pc himself or any other person. As it is the auditor’s task to help the pc find his own truth about himself and his life it is self-evident that he must not guide or “enlighten” him. The Auditor’s Code is the mainstay of the trust the pc is setting in the auditor. It is a strictly functional code, the breaking of which would lead to immediate disaster [1]. The ultimate goal of an auditing cycle is the pc’s ability to handle mental masses and energies all by himself, in which case he would be cause over his own mind, i.e. his imaginations, thoughts and pictures. This state is called “Clear”. From there on out, the pc would be fully responsible for himself and expand in life without further need of auditing. This result can only be attained by a number of intensive auditing cycles. If one were to only “fix up” a pc anytime life had knocked him about too hard, one would confirm

his position on the effect side of things and not help him to be cause over them. In auditing one works towards an increase of responsibility and ability and is not satisfied with patch-up jobs. In view of what is brought to light in sessions, the folk wisdom of “time heals all wounds” may be considered thoroughly disproven. The charge of an incident of 250 years ago is still there as soon as you put your finger on it. Those little bits of life energy tied up in the shock, pain and grief of that incident, are not recovered simply by time going by. They stay tied up. And each further bit of life energy tied up this way makes the person (thetan) shrink and wither - which is why children usually are more cheerful and enthusiastic than adults. The accumulation of failures and losses and the effort to keep them out of sight are a burden which increases from lifetime to lifetime. Life energy (theta) is locked up in all of this. After it has been regained, the person looks brighter, feels more hopeful, future bound and active. This is the whole purpose of auditing.

The Laws and Mechanisms of Charge This next section covers briefly the principle ideas of the theory of auditing. They may at first seem like a random collection of observations of human behavior, but taken all together they form a structured view of how mental charge is the basis of life’s problems, how it is generated, maintained, and how it affects an individual’s life by giving rise to his “case”. Out of this view the procedures of auditing can be seen as an approach to guiding the pc progressively to discover and come to understand, the basis of his own charge (and his effect on others), with consequent improvements in his “case”. The thirty-year growth of Hubbard’s work can be seen as an attempt to evolve an integrated and generally workable conceptual system to describe human behavior. A FRUSTRATION SCALE Charge, as we saw earlier, is mental tension one feels when things don’t quite go the way they are supposed to. As long as one is certain about one’s data, purpose or intention, one feels fine. The moment one becomes uncertain or doubtful one begins to feel nervous and uneasy. All of a sudden there is a “not know”. Before there was simply a “know”. (“I know for sure that all birds fly. -Well, maybe they don’t, actually . . . Most do, yes. But aren’t there some which don’t . . . ? I ought to look this up in a book.”)The uncertainty created here is felt as mental strain (charge). It leads to curiosity and an attempt to find out. This, if not satisfied, will start a downward slide of frustrations. It goes along with a lowering of one’s emotional tone. Curiosity in itself is nothing bad. But still, it is charge in its finest form. Its satisfaction can be fun and rewarding. One feels it, for example, as one reads a crime story. One is thrilled by the mystery. One wants to find out “who’s done it”. Here we have a conscious “don’t know/want to find out”. This one might call “benevolent charge”. It is the sort of tension without which an activity wouldn’t be fun. There are enough odds to keep one entertained but not enough to make one feel a loser. Now supposing there were a person, Mr. Roberts, who felt rather satisfied with crime stories and had the attitude of “I know what they are all about. You read a dozen and you know the rest of them.” A good salesman could lure him out of this attitude and make him curious by saying: “Very well, sir, but you don’t know this one. This one is special. There is nothing like it. You won’t regret reading it.” So Mr. Roberts might think: “Hm . . . maybe he is right. Maybe there is indeed a new idea on the market. Let’s find out.” And he buys the book. The point of this story is that Mr. Roberts created the attitude of not-know. Surely, the salesman did his bit, too, but in the end it was Mr. Roberts who “un-knew” deliberately what he just knew for certain (which is that he is through with crime stories). He allowed himself to be drawn into the game of the salesman. It is Mr. Roberts’ responsibility that he bought the book, and nobody else’s. When the book turns out to be boring, Mr. Roberts will curse the salesman. But he

can’t deny that he himself decided that perhaps he didn’t know all about crime stories. So he ought to put the blame on himself. Here we have a trend from curiosity to aggressiveness, from “benevolent” to “malevolent” charge. Mr. Roberts thought this was no fun anymore. He felt cheated and was thoroughly annoyed. -We will investigate this downward trend in detail: Mr. Roberts opens his newly-bought book at home and is anxious. He reads a few pages and it isn’t quite what he would have expected. But he desires to get something out of it and therefore carries on reading. It doesn’t get better. Now Mr. Roberts forces himself to read on. He can’t believe that this salesman should have sold just cheap rubbish to him. There has to be something good coming in this cursed story! Nothing coming, though. Mr. Roberts feels inhibited about reading on. It seems a waste of time, really. Doesn’t improve his temper either. A few more paragraphs, and he puts it away. He won’t read on. No good, this book. Didn’t he know it in the first place? All crime stories are the same. He won’t touch one ever again. Mr. Roberts refuses to have to do with the subject of crime stories in the future. The difference between his initial attitude and that of now is an emotional one. To start with, he felt quite happy about not reading further crime stories. Now he feels an aggressive determination to not touch them again, ever ! ! This development went along a scale. It goes “Know-Unknow-Curious-Desired-EnforcedInhibited-No-Refused”. It works with anything if you care to try it out. (It’s called the CDEINR Scale [1].) Gradient scales are a tool often used by Hubbard to describe states and conditions. We will see more of them as we go on. The reason for them is that life is a flexible affair. There may be extremes, yes, but there are no absolutes, no “objective criteria”. There is no absolute happiness or absolute sadness. These are relative terms - relative for each individual and therefore not comparable between individuals. Everybody knows for themselves when they feel more happy or more sad than the day before, or that they “feel happier than ever”. It’s their truth and not anyone else’s truth. - Gradient scales, in the subjective world of the person’s mind, measure a state only the individual can know to be true. (Reference: “The Logics” 6 and 7 in [1].) REACH AND WITHDRAW “Reach and withdraw are the two fundamentals in the action of theta”, says Hubbard [2]. This follows from our story above. Mr. Roberts was reaching for the book, expressed as “curiousdesired-enforced” on our scale. When his frustration rose and his hope of success dwindled, he withdrew from the book, expressed as “inhibited-no-refused”. Is there always reach and withdraw then, and no standstill ever? There can be standstill, too. Before Mr. Roberts participated in the game of the salesman he was in a state of knowing regarding crime stories. (Hubbard calls this knowingness, meaning “a state of being certain”.) He felt perfectly happy and serene and relaxed about them. He had read his share and he had come to an endpoint and a conclusion about them and it had been a satisfying experience all in all. He felt

neither reach nor withdraw. He was above any action with regard to the genre of crime stories. He was not in any action, he was above it. There is yet another point of standstill: that below any action. When Mr. Roberts refused to have to do with crime stories ever again, he was not in the serene mood of before. He was upset. At this point a ridge was formed regarding crime stories because Mr. Roberts, in his anger, pushed mental energy against them. He resisted the inflow of further crime stories by developing a strong outflow against them. This ridge has a certain permanence. It will get activated anytime anyone dares to offer Mr. Roberts a crime story to read. Mr. Roberts is likely to react with no pleasure and without social graces. He will get outright angry. This ridge, as it were, is “frozen theta”. There is no flow; there is standstill. No reach and no withdraw. It’s below the level of action. Action therefore is characterized by reach and withdraw. Above and below the level of action there is no reach and no withdraw. Charge, then, to put it in very simple terms - is nothing but protest against something one doesn’t like. When there is a stop to one’s reach (“can’t get there”) or withdraw (“can’t get away”) one feels a protest; one feels charged up. This corresponds to the definition of chronic charge: “the impulse to withdraw from that which can’t be withdrawn from or to approach that which can’t be approached and this, like a two-pole battery, generates current” [2]. Referring back to Mr. Roberts: Let us assume he worked in a bookstore, exposed to whole shelves of detective stories. He is likely to feel extremely restimulated. Everytime he enters the shop in the morning his ridge starts cooking and keeps on cooking until he leaves in the evening. He feels like withdrawing from those shelves and can’t as that would mean giving up his job. He feels like reaching for any other kind of book but can’t because people keep ordering detective stories to be brought out to them. Constant protest, constant charge. GAME THEORY It has been mentioned before that the salesman managed to draw Mr. Roberts into his game. What is a game? “A game consists of freedoms, barriers and purposes” [2]. The salesman had the purpose to sell a book to Mr. Roberts. His barrier was Mr. Roberts’ reluctance to buy one. His freedom consisted in the application of his persuasiveness. He had a game going. Mr. Roberts didn’t, just then. Mr. Roberts had absolutely no games intentions regarding crime stories. So the salesman got Mr. Roberts involved in his game, and he won. He sold the book. Mr. Roberts lost. He went into the trap. The three components mentioned above are all it takes to define a game. The absence of any of them means: no game. For example: Without a purpose one wouldn’t even start a game. When there are either no barriers at all or insurmountable barriers, there is no game either. No barriers means as much as total freedom. No opponent. No uncertainty about the outcome. Total predictability. This is not a game. It’s tedious routine, at the most. Or it’s a game played at the level of boredom. Insurmountable barriers of course mean no freedom at all, no chance to win, full stop. No game. Between those two extremes, games are possible. Those games which provide a purpose, a proper balance between barriers and freedoms and therefore a chance to win, are regarded as fun.

Games tend to be taken seriously the more they concern the actual survival of a person. Such games tend to be played with a large amount of self-determinism. They must be won, no matter how. When chances are bad and it looks like the game was going to be lost, there usually is a considerable amount of effort put into the game: can’t win but must win. The more one loses the more one goes into the game and keeps trying, keeps trying, keeps trying. One attempts to enforce success. There is a compulsive reach. When one has failed, has been beaten, has given up, there is a compulsive withdraw. Should one manage to play it lightly, though, and not get all too serious about losing, one would contribute to the game as such no matter who wins. This is pan-determinism, the spirit of fair play. When one only plays because one is told to or, worse, forced to, one has become an otherdetermined player. One plays on the determinism of others not one’s own. There are levels even below that: when one’s will has been broken by violent means and one is made to carry on, one has become a robot. And below that there is a state of degradation where one is oblivious of the fact that one is human, a person. an individual. (See chapter K, section “Robotism”, in [17].) THE EMOTIONAL TONE SCALE In the example of Mr.Roberts we could observe a lowering of emotion as his frustration increased. There is an exact scale connected to this which allows such unequivocal prediction that it compares to the natural laws of physics. It is the “emotional tone scale”, a scale of moods. It was found as a result of auditing. Pc’s can be observed to “come uptone” in a regular pattern. They first re-experience (“dramatize”) the grief part of the engram, then show anger at the circumstances of the engram, then get bored talking about it, then show interest in certain details they never considered important before and finally end up in cheerfulness, laughing about the whole incident. They go “up the tone scale”. In or out of session, any person will follow this pattern, be it upwards or downwards on the scale. Sometimes it is done in leaps up or down, leaving out several tones in between, sometimes it goes tone by tone. But it is always along the same scale. In his book “Science of Survival”, Hubbard deals extensively with it. [See 15,16,17,18.] Here are the major steps of the tone scale, going upwards: death wishes/apathy (0.0) - grief (0.5) - fear (1.0) - anger (1.5) - antagonism (2.0) - boredom (2.5) - interest (3.0) - cheerfulness (3.5) - enthusiasm (4.0). There are arbitrary numbers attached to them to make the intervals from tone to tone more graphically obvious. The steps shown here range from 0.0 to 4.0; the intervals are 0.5 in each case. To keep it simple, the in - between tones - of which there are many - are not shown [1, 2]. There is a little wisdom connected to this half-tone spacing: if you want to raise the emotion of your partner, just go half a tone above where he is and you’ll see him come uptone. If you

manage to keep the interval he’ll finally end up being quite happy again. It’s not what you talk about with him, it’s how you say it. It’s your tone level which counts. When you go down to his tone level, nothing changes except that there are two misemotional people now. When you are too high up compared to him you’ll be unreal and he won’t follow you up. When you look at the times you successfully got someone uptone you’ll probably find that you were applying this little wisdom without noticing. One can get pretty good at this. It takes some keen observation, though. (An auditor must know this scale by heart.) Language has many words to describe moods and feelings yet they all tie in with one or the other category of emotions on the tone scale. So far, only the middle part of the tone scale has been presented. It actually extends further upwards and downwards, from “serenity of beingness” (+ 40) to “total failure” (- 40). Along with the upper extreme go attributes like infinite space, infinite freedom, total absence of barriers, total knowingness. The opposite extreme at the bottom of the scale is characterized by infinite condensedness, no space, all barriers, no freedoms, unknow-ness. It is obvious that both extremes do not allow a game: there is no purpose in both cases, there are no barriers/all barriers, there is all freedom/null freedom. These conditions are called no-game conditions. The game called life happens between those two extremes. (Most of human in-the-body experience is expressed within the 0.0 to 4.0 bracket. We won’t look at the full scale here as it would go beyond the limits of this text.) People simultaneously have two tones on this scale. One is the “social tone” which they try to keep up in order to make a good impression. Usually below that you find the “chronic tone”, i.e. the genuine one. You can test a person for his chronic tone by startling him. He’ll fall out of his “false pleasantness” (somewhere in the band of 3.0 = interest) and go right down into fear, for example - which is his real tone. You can tell by his face or by what he says. You can fully rely on this: a person will never drop lower than his chronic tone. He may take a dip further down if the news are too bad, but he’ll soon settle on his chronic tone. After he has composed himself he will put his social tone back on. The chronic tone is a sure indicator for the amount of engrams a person has in restimulation. The lower the chronic tone, the heavier his case weighs on the thetan. The enturbulated theta (Hubbard’s term) stirred up in the activated engrams works on him and pulls him downtone. His free theta creates the buoyancy which keeps him up. Antagonism (2.0) is the turning point on the scale. Above that there are positive emotions such as contentment and interest. From antagonism downwards misemotion begins. The person begins to be other-determined by his engram bank. A person who is chronically misemotional has a lot of engrams in restimulation (This explains why the auditor must keep a high level of interest throughout the session. One of the two people must be “above the bank” so that the other can discharge into him.) The amount of free theta a person has at his disposal may expand or shrink, depending on the degree of restimulation he is suffering. His emotional tone is a direct expression of the proportion between free theta and enturbulated theta. There is another indicator yet for this proportion: the person’s fluidity or fixity of attention. Free theta and free attention are two terms describing the same thing. The more free theta she has the more she can direct her attention by her own volition. As she sinks on the scale (because she

fought too many barriers unsuccessfully), her free theta diminishes and her attention becomes compulsively fixed. In antagonism and anger, she would use her attention like an explosive to blast the opponent out of her space; in fear, her attention would be fixated on the opponent as if by rivets. In apathy none is left; her gaze would wander aimlessly about. THE ARC TRIANGLE We have used the term “theta” already a few times now. What exactly L5 theta? Where does this ‘life force” come from? Is it just there like the air one breathes? Or is it made somewhere? In order to clarify this question properly we will have to refer to the very foundations upon which Hubbard’s philosophical structure rests: the Scientology Axioms and the Dianetic Axioms. They will be quickly introduced before we go on. (There is a third set, the Factors, which won’t concern us as yet. They’ll appear in a later section.) As the word has come up, we’ll have to define it. What are axioms, be it in scientology or in physics? They are laws, principles and agreements so fundamental that they cannot be argued about. They can neither be proven nor disproven. All logical deductions start from there. If one could think “further down” than them, they wouldn’t be axioms. Hubbard presented the Dianetic Axioms in 1951. They cover the complete spectrum of scientology thought but put specific emphasis on the organism. They look at life not so much from the viewpoint of the thetan running the organism but from the organism itself. There are 194 of them. The Scientology Axioms were issued in 1954. They cover the same spectrum as the Dianetic Axioms but emphasize the viewpoint of the thetan. As a thetan is less complex in his actions than an organism, the Scientology Axioms are much more condensed than the Dianetics Axioms and therefore number only 58. (Dianetics Axioms, when referred to, will be abbreviated to “Dn Ax.”; Scientology Axioms to “Ax.”. For references see [1].) All auditing processes and methods of dianetics and scientology go straight back to the Axioms. Anything not aligned with the Axioms won’t work. This is not only true for scientology techniques but as well for any other technique addressing the spirit, be it meditation, psychotherapy or the rites of medicine men. This is quite a claim, I know. But it’s true. At least I found it so. Let us now return to the question posed. What is theta, really? “Theta is an energy existing separate and distinct from the physical universe” [2]. Theta and thought, in Hubbard’s terms, are synonymous: “Thought is considered as a kind of “energy” which is not part of the physical universe. It controls energy, but has no wavelength. It uses matter but has no mass. It is found in space but it has no position. It records time but it is not subject to time” [2] . The reasoning behind this statement is: theta is “life force” or “thought power”. It animates the organism. Therefore it must be senior to the organism. “an organism without thought is already dead” [2]. Since an organism is part of the physical universe it follows that theta (thought) cannot as well be part of the physical universe. Theta works on the physical universe

from outside it. Thought, or theta, does not move but makes things move. Itself it is static; the action it causes is dynamic. (See Dn Ax. 1-5.) Now that we know what theta is defined as, the question remains where and how it is made. To answer this, one must know what theta consists of: “The component parts of theta are affinity, reality, and communication” (Dn Ax. 110). The same is true for understanding: “Understanding is composed of affinity, reality and communication” (Ax. 21). “Theta” and “understanding” apparently are synonymous. This is easily demonstrated. Anytime one feels understood by another one’s free theta increases and one goes up the tonescale. Increasing understanding and increasing theta amount to the same: a rise on the tonescale. In order to feel understood one must have been listened to (communication); one must have received a sign from one’s partner to show that he got what one meant to say (reality); one must feel comfortable with him and well-liked (affinity). After such a conversation one feels relieved. Maybe one came uptone from grief to anger regarding the affair one felt troubled by. (Quite an improvement!) - In order to increase theta one usually does “something nice”. One has had terrible trouble in the office and is all upset on the way home. How does one get one’s tone up: by taking a walk. One communicates with trees and plants, feels in agreement with them and appreciates them. One has increased one’s ARC. Result: the annoyance at the office has lost its sting; it has become boring and unimportant. Conclusion: one does not have to be in touch with a person necessarily in order to regain one’s balance. How one builds up theta is of no importance . There are many possibilities. As long as there is an increase in communication, reality and affinity, one will eventually feel better. An understanding person could be described as “thetaful”. She has a lot of love to give, a lot of free theta to spend, a lot of spare attention for everyone. Such a person will not have much trouble in life. She may never be terribly successful in terms of rank and status, yet she will be well liked and have great peace of mind. This quality was not given to her as a birthright. It is something she creates causatively by using affinity, reality and communication. ‘Affinity, reality and communication co-exist in an inextricable relationship. (. . .) None can be increased without increasing the other two and none can be decreased without decreasing the other two” (Dn Ax. 168). They stand with each other in a triangular relation. There are always the three of them there and influencing each other, no matter which one you work on. You talk to someone about the weather (comm), you come to an agreement that this summer isn’t really worth remembering (reality), you begin to think he’s a great old chap (affinity) . Or: You ask your neighbor’s son who is a little shy usually, about his new bike (reality). He’ll bubble over with pride and excitement about it (comm). You tell him you wished you had had a bike like that when you were his age (agreement/reality). He’ll like you better from now on and be less shy (affinity). Or: you pat a dog (affinity). He’ll leap up and bark at you playfully (comm). You pick up the idea from him and take him for a walk (reality). This, then, is the “ARC triangle”. By increasing or decreasing ARC you can boost or reduce understanding. It all depends on your intentions. ARC, understanding and theta all mean

the same, as it turns out. They don’t exist without the thetan. It follows that the thetan himself produces the theta he works with. Going back to the tone scale for a moment: now that we know the concept of ARC we can easily recognize that the tone scale measures the ARC of a person. Before, we said it measures the proportion between free theta and enturbulated theta. Now we say that it measures the person’s potential of understanding. It’s the same thing. Example: try talking to an angry man. He won’t understand. He has little free theta; his capacity for understanding is comparatively low. If he were in fear. it would be even lower. In antagonism, he’d get it but throw it back at you. Up in boredom he’d get it and keep it without doing anything with it. And so on up the scale. Let us now look at the definitions of A and R and C separately and add some of the philosophical depth needed later on in our discussion. AFFINITY Hubbard defines affinity in terms of reaching. One reaches for something in order to have it close to one. Lack of affinity would be expressed in a withdraw. ‘Affinity is a phenomenon of space in that it expresses the willingness to occupy the same place as the thing which is loved or liked. The reverse of it would be antipathy (. . .) which would be the unwillingness to occupy the same space as or the unwillingness to approach something or someone” [2] . It follows that the “mental space” of someone widens with the amount of things or people he loves. It follows as well that someone high on the tonescale, having a lot of affinity, has no problem with including a lot of things or people in his space. He manages to look at life from other viewpoints as well as his own. That’s a true sign of affinity. He is able “to put himself in someone else’s shoes” and look at things from their angle. Put in more technical terms: he can assume the beingness of another, his role, his identity. This doesn’t refer to people only but to all things alive or dead, such as plants and stones. Given enough affinity, one can deliberately “become them”. This is so because the thetan is not part of the physical universe but places himself in the physical universe wherever he considers it useful or pleasant to be (Ax. 44, 45). Usually one has one’s viewpoint stably anchored inside one’s head. Yet simultaneously one may put a viewpoint into a withering plant on the windowsill, and “wander around inside it” to find out what’s wrong with it. One has, for a moment, assumed the beingness of this plant . “Coincidence of location and beingness, that is the ultimate in affinity” [2]. There are many ways to assume a beingness, to be in the space of another or make another be in one’s space. There is (once again) a whole scale to it, paralleling the tone scale: the “Know-toMystery Scale”. (All scales parallel the tone scale!) Assuming the beingness of another may be done by knowing, by looking, by emotional tuning-in. Beingness can be assumed by effort, by intellectual figuring, in symbolic form, by eating, sex or mystery rites. Examples: An artist gets into the spirit of things and expresses it by dance, painting or music; a hunter shoots his lion to share the same space with him; a cannibal eats his victim’s brains to assume his beingness; sex orgies serve to be “close to each other” - at least

physically. The further you get down on this scale the more solid the means become to attain the end of assuming someone’s beingness. Instead of theta, mest is used (Ax. 25). REALITY Reality is not looked at as “objective” by Hubbard. It is certainly observable, yet not necessarily objective. Each observer takes his own viewpoint, in both senses of the word: a) Mentally speaking, he sees things through the filter of his own attitudes and considerations, and with the amount of affinity he happens to have at the time. (Someone all sad and griefy makes a bad observer.) b) Physically speaking, each observer stands in a different location from the other and therefore has a different angle of view. Therefore each observation, to start with, exists for each observer individually only. It is actually in his mind. This is termed an actuality. As soon as the observers share their observation and come to an agreement with each other, there is “reality” in the full sense of the word: ‘An actuality can exist for one individually, but when it is agreed with by others it can then said to be a reality” (Ax. 27). This does not exclude that one might disagree with oneself occasionally. Off and on “one doesn’t trust one’s own eyes”, as we all know. So even for oneself one sometimes has to work out what is real and what isn’t. Reality changes can easily be induced by drugs and hypnosis, even by mere physical threats and violence. You can beat somebody’s own reality out of him and make him agree to yours. He’ll do it because he wants to live. This way robots are made. In any case, when we talk about reality, we talk about agreement. “Reality is the agreement upon perceptions and data in the physical universe. (All we can be sure is real is that on which we have agreed is real. Agreement is the essence of reality. (Dn Ax. 113) But: just because a few people have agreed on something does not necessarily mean that it is “truly so”. By whose standards anyway? Ask some other people and you’re bound to find a different agreement on the same matter. Reality is therefore “the agreed-upon apparency of existence” (Ax. 26). It’s only an apparency. It may look solid one day; it may change the next day. You never can tell. Even our scientific description of the physical universe is only one way of coming to an agreement concerning it. Cross-cultural studies (particularly in the field of medicine) show that other agreements are possible and when acted upon, bring results, too. COMMUNICATION “Communication is the interchange of perception through the material universe between organisms or the perception of the material universe by sense channels” (Dn Ax. 114). Simply put: just by perceiving something one is already involved with communication and - thereby - with the ARC triangle. The perception is real or not to the extent that one can agree with it or not. Perceptions which one can agree with to some extent and which happen to fall into line with one’s survival efforts, one has affinity with. Others which may be off one’s line of survival or go against it, one may grudgingly accept as real but one surely doesn’t like them. When too rough, one may not even perceive them at all: no communication, apathy (Dn Ax. 113).

The term “interchange” in the quotation above implies that there are two terminals involved in a cycle of communication. “Terminal”, originally a computer term, means in scientologese “the end of a communication line”. There are two: source-point and receipt-point. Thus the definition of communication looks like this: “Communication is the consideration and action of impelling an impulse or particle from source-point across a distance to receipt-point, with the intention of bringing into being at the receipt-point a duplication and understanding of that which emanated from the source point” (Ax. 28). Duplication means: taking in the exact reality of the thing, seeing it as it is without any distortions, without adding to or subtracting from it. Duplication refers to the communication-part of the ARC triangle. A perfect duplication of the particle received would be the optimum end of the actual action of communication. Understanding means: a) comparing the data received with data already known so that they make sense. That’s the reality part. (See Logics 8-12; in [1].) b) Developing an emotional attitude; liking or disliking the message or its sender. That’s the affinity-part. From the definition above the communication formula is derived: “Cause, distance, effect, with intention, attention, duplication and understanding” [2]. It’s a formula in the dictionary sense of “recipe or prescription”. When you mix the ingredients in the formula you get communication. If you leave one ingredient out, it won’t be communication. With the above, one important aspect of an auditing session has been described: the preclear makes himself receipt point of the energy impulses and mass particles which emanate from the ridge or engram. He duplicates and understands them one by one until all information’s contained in the picture have been fully included in his space. Now the picture will vanish. It won’t be a compulsive inflow on the pc any longer. If he want, to, he can re-create it at will. But there won’t be any compulsion to re-creation of it. Observing the ARC triangle in session, one usually finds the pc works with it in reverse order because communication is “the easy way in” . This is how it goes: 1. The pc goes in communication with the thing (engram, ridge. picture) by permitting himself to perceive it. 2. He duplicates its reality until he can agree with the thing being this way and no other. 3. He admires it (gives it affinity) for being the way it is instead of resisting it - at which moment its power over him will vanish. As the pc progresses through his sessions he regains more and more free theta and therefore comes uptone. In the end he will be strong enough to work with affinity only. He sees the picture, permeates it with his affinity and instantly picks up its reality. No drawn-out laborious communication needed, no looking at it this way and that way until finally the whole thing can be confronted. No, it’s one glance and the picture goes up in smoke. This is called “blowing by inspection” (auditor jargon). It means that the pc won’t have a long way to go anymore before he is Clear. CONFRONTING

There was a word in the last few lines of the section above which deserves our special attention. It is the word “confronting”. Hubbard uses it in its dictionary sense with particular emphasis on “not flinching, keeping cool”. Confronting is “the ability to be there comfortably and perceive”[2]. It means calmly holding one’s position without either reaching or withdrawing. It means being there, comfortably, and seeing something as it is. It is a state of being, not of doing. Doing follows from it later. Consequently, “good confront” is the one and only prerequisite to exact duplication. A man in panic won’t see any more what’s right in front of his nose. He does not duplicate. Duplication therefore is the prerequisite to understanding, full ARC and a high position on the tone scale. Three interesting maxims may be derived from this: “The degree of complexity is proportional to the degree of non-confront. The degree of simplicity is proportional to the degree of confront. The basis of aberration is a non-confront.” (HCO PL 18 Sept 1967) If you were interested in making life complicated, here is a sure way: do not confront it. When we combine the data about ARC, tonescale and confronting, we get a “Scale of Confront” [1]. It may be observed in anyone recalling anything, in or out of session. Its lowest stage is characterized by the pc putting something else there than what’s really there. (This is called “dub-in”.) Above that there is seeing blackness or absolutely nothing. Further up follows the effort to mentally “be elsewhere” as a solution to confronting. (You find that in people who complain about “nervousness” or “lack of concentration” as an excuse for not doing their job properly.) Above that is the actual ability to confront. Next step up: the willingness to experience what goes on in the situation, in the other person or in the engram, and to participate in what goes on. And the final step: assuming the beingness of it, identifying with it knowingly and at will, looking at life from the other viewpoint. The top of the tonescale merges with the top of the confront scale. Result: charge blown or situation handled, respectively. (All scales merge at the top, by the way.) POSTULATES AND CONSIDERATIONS In the section on games, the word “purpose” was used. There is another word for it, very much a “scientology” tech word. It is postulate. Postulate means: one is putting something there as true. It is a truth one has created for oneself and by oneself. and it may be true for oneself alone. It is a “self-created Truth” [2]. Postulates may refer to the present, past or future. Take Mr. Jones, for example. He says: “Next weekend I’ll be out fishing.” When he says it it’s true for him. With this statement he has created his future. If you were asking Mr. Jones for his name and his trade, you’d get a postulate referring to Mr Jones’ present as an answer. He’ll say: “My name is Jones and I am a farmer”. This may sound blatantly obvious and not worth mentioning in the context of postulates;

nevertheless, it is something Mr. Jones considers very true for himself. (Postulates which aren’t a one-off thing but are continuously held up, are termed considerations.) You may think it should be difficult to shake Mr. Jones’ certainty about his name and about his being a farmer, yet it can be done with the classic brainwashing and implanting methods of electric shocks, drugs and hypnosis [8]. A comparable effect may be brought about by Mr. Jones becoming reactively identified with the content of an engram, particularly with one of the “dramatis personae” in the engram. As a result of this identification he walks around thinking he is Napoleon. Mind you, he is not recalling having been Napoleon. He thinks he is Napoleon now. This certainly is a postulate determining his present, if only an aberrated (insane) one and imposed on him by the engram. Mr. Jones has postulates about his past too. One of them is: “My father is William Jones.” Mr. Jones believes this to be true. One day he is told by someone that his father died when his mother was three months pregnant, that his mother re-married when he was five months old and that his real (physical) father’s name is Stephen Francis. This may come as quite a shock to Mr. Jones since it would break a consideration he has upheld for a very long time. Evidently, man creates his past, present and future by postulates. His past, present and future exist to the extent that he can postulate them. A man in low spirits has a dim future or even none at all. A hightoned person postulates a splendid future for himself and makes it happen. Someone in apathy never washes his dishes or cleans his room because “it’s too much work” or “there is no time for this”; a cheerful person does it in five minutes. And so on. “Space, energy, objects, form and time are the result of considerations (. . .)” (Ax. 3). THE CYCLE OF ACTION Conclusion from the previous section: What is true for oneself - whether referring to the past or the future - is true now, simply because postulates are always now, once they have been made. This is because postulates are thoughts. They are thoughts connected with action or states of being, so they have a dynamic connotation, but still: they are thoughts. And thoughts, as we saw, exist outside the physical universe. The physical universe - or “mest universe” - consists of the components matter, energy, space and time (mest). Thought is outside and above time and therefore outside and above the mest universe. Thoughts and postulates impinge on the physical universe to give it shape, form and dynamic action, yes, but they are not part of it. Thoughts and postulates all by themselves are static. They don’t move, they are not dynamic, yet bring about dynamic action. They “float along in time” as it were; they are always in the present, forever now, no matter when they were made. The totality of all postulates ever made are expressed in the Now of each moment. They determine life in each instant. How does one undo a postulate then? There is only one way: one must duplicate it exactly as it was made originally; one must recreate it 100% exact in a new unit of time. Then it will be canceled. If one is only a fraction off, it will stay. Example: you made a postulate 1500 years ago that life wasn’t worth living unless you had seen a live unicorn. It didn’t work out that lifetime. Next lifetime you sort of forgot about the actual postulate but you kept catching yourself thinking of unicorns off and on, and wondered why. It went on like this for 1500 years up to the present

lifetime . Today you are a great collector of books and learned essays about unicorns. You know it’s all fantasy and you have an educated scientific viewpoint on it and you consider it just a quaint little hobby, but - and here is the point - you don’t know how come you should be so fascinated with unicorns. The postulate keeps going. And it will keep on going until you realize with a flash (in or out of session) that “life isn’t worth living as long as I haven’t seen a live unicorn”. Not only must you realize this, but you as well must take this realization seriously and accept it, instead of pushing it aside as “part of my stupid unicorn-madness”. With this realization you have made the perfect duplicate of the original postulate, and you made it in a new unit of time. You made it as if you were making it now and had never made it before. It’s not: “I seem to recall that some long time ago I had this thing about unicorns and it appears to have stuck with me. Guess I’ll drop the habit now.” Oh no. This won’t work. It has to be done now as if it had never occurred to you before, and it has to be the exact same thought. With this done your compulsive interest in unicorns will vanish. (Ax. 12, 15, 16, 20.) There is another possibility to end this story: one morning you walk in the park and there’s a unicorn right there on the lawn; a live unicorn, right there! You can hardly believe your eyes, but it’s there. You look at it and it looks at you, and then it walks away. After this experience you feel a tremendous sensation of fulfillment, calmness and serenity. A wish of 1500 years ago finally come true ! What relief . - In this case the perfect duplicate was in real life. And that’s one other way to end a cycle of action. From this chain of thoughts the concept of the actual cycle of action is derived. It starts with creating a postulate and then creating life on the basis of this postulate. And it goes on creating-creating-creating and never stops, until the original postulate is un-created by means of a perfect duplicate. The cycle of action does not come to an end by counter-creating. That only gives you a ridge. Counter-creating doesn’t do away with the postulate. When you get sick and tired of your unicorn fanatism and throw all your books about unicorns in the rubbish bin, you still haven’t canceled your postulate. You have worked against it, suppressed it, invalidated it, yes, and you made a nice fat ridge this way. But you didn’t cancel the postulate because you didn’t make a perfect duplicate (Ax. 17,18). In the physical universe, there is a seemingly different cycle of action. It goes create survive (or persist) - destroy. At least, that’s the way it looks like from the outside. Beneath this apparent cycle of action, though, one again finds postulates. Example: there is this village church, 350 years old, lightning strikes, it bums down. It was created, persisted through time, and was destroyed. End of cycle? No. There is a huge agreement amongst the villagers that they can’t do without their church. So they collect money and rebuild their church exactly as it was. You can’t tell it’s a re-make when you walk past it. (Actual example.) And this church may burn down again, and they’ll for sure build another one. Any style would serve, as long as they have their church. And they will keep doing so no matter how often their church burns down until they will finally have a cognition on the reason they wanted to have a church in the first place. And then they may reconsider and not build another one. But this group cognition is not likely to occur as it would take getting together everybody who ever helped postulating this church into existence, each builder, priest, baptized child, married couple, deceased citizen laying in state, or photo-happy tourist.

Of course, not everything which was destroyed is built up again. There are many reasons. One way of terminating a group postulate is by the group ceasing to exist. Let’s say our village were becoming populated to a large percentage by city people, with the locals slowly dying out. There would be no one left to keep up the original church-postulate. Lacking intention as its driving force, the postulate would gradually peter out. Which does not mean that it was canceled; it just became drowned in apathy. (The passing stage on the way there is nostalgia - 0.5 on the tonescale: grief.) It could be easily revived if enough people were actively backing it up. One reason for not re-building the church may be lack of money. But that doesn’t kill off the intention behind it, provided the villagers were still backing up the idea. It would only temporarily stall the realization of the project. (Ax. 13,14.) To summarize, this idea of “cycle of action” is a way of looking how creation occurs. In the shared physical world things are brought into being because of postulates, and then because of the interaction of the myriad other influences, such as other people’s postulates, they may change, decay, or be destroyed. There is an interaction of many continuous create-create-create cycles of all the contributors with their conflicting purposes. So the actual cycle of action is the subjective one, and the cycle of action that occurs in the “real” world is only an apparency. (This would hold true down to the existence of the universe itself if one assumed, as Hubbard did, that its reality is only an agreement between all the participating thetans, that life, spirit, theta is senior to mest.) From the two different cycles of action two different concepts of time may be derived. The actual cycle of action measures “subjective time” in the form of a sequence of complete cycles of action. The apparent cycle of action measures the “objective time” which has been agreed upon: sunrise-to-sunset, moon phases, the hands moving on the clock dial. Both types of time are covered by the Axioms 7, 8 and 9: “Time is basically a postulate that space and particles will persist. The apparency of time is the change of position of particles in space. Change is the primary manifestation of time.” GOALS PROBLEMS MASSES (GPMs) There is a specific terminology which goes with the “actual cycle of action”. It describes the various states or conditions the individual undergoes in this sequence of “create, create-createcreate, uncreate or, conversely, counter create”. Counter-creation, as we have seen, doesn’t undo the original creation and complete the cycle of action. It only forms a ridge called a GPM or Goals Problems Mass. It is a mass which was formed because one couldn’t handle the problems connected with one’s goal, and gave up. A GPM and a ridge are the same, really, except that the term “GPM” describes the formative process of a ridge, whereas the word “ridge” itself refers to the end product. An engram is a ridge, too. The difference between engram and GPM is that the engram is a recording by the body of what happened to the body, whereas the GPM contains data on what happened to the thetan himself. To exemplify the formation of a GPM, let us regard the life of Gopdhal Khan, an immensely rich and famous 17th century Moghul prince who ruled over Persia at that time. Two

versions of his life story have been passed down to posterity, one with a happy end and the other with an unhappy end. We’ll take the happy-end one to start with. Gopdhal Khan was a man who loved the arts. As well he was a man who lived in a rather modest palace - too modest to accommodate all the private and political activities of court life. One day it happened - when Gopdhal Khan looked at his palace from a distance and saw it for the shabby place it was - that he, quick as lightning, had a vision of something indescribably splendid and beautiful superimposed on the old palace, and he knew with innermost certainty: “I’m going to build the house of my dreams”. He didn’t have any picture of it, nothing concrete and definite. A pure postulate. And he knew he was going to do it. This condition of knowingness which exists at the moment of creation of a thought, is termed an as-isness (Ax. 11). It contains no time as it stays forever with the person who made it. It is always now. Neither does it contain matter, energy or space, or any picture. Postulates, as we saw before, are outside mest. This is true for physical as well as mental mest, i.e. for pictures. The state of as-isness is the moment one conceives the thought or postulate exactly as it is, the pure unadorned and un-camouflaged postulate. Gopdhal Khan went and told his master builder about it. He told him all the purposes connected with this palace and all the guidelines that were to be kept to ensure the perfect outcome. Together they worked out the “ideal scene” [19]. The builder made some sketches and drawings and in the end he made a large plaster model of the palace-to-be, all painted and adorned, with gold roofs and marble gates. Then the construction of the actual palace started. Four years later it was finished. Gopdhal Khan beheld it, tears of joy came to his eyes and he said: “This is it! This is the house of my dreams!” - He moved in and there was not a single day for the rest of his life that he did not feel a sense of joy and fulfillment because of his palace. Three things have happened here. Firstly, the static postulate was pulled down to the level of dynamic mest action (mental as well as physical) and worked upon. Secondly, the final product, i.e. the “existing scene” [19] of the newly-built palace, totally matched the ideal scene, which again matched the actual postulate. A perfect duplicate of it had been created in the mest universe. Thirdly, when Gopdhal Khan said that this was it, this was the house of his dreams, he fully acknowledged the postulate as having come true. Thereby the postulate vanished. It had been fulfilled. The cycle of action had come to its end. A second as-isness occurred here, marking the moment of destruction of the postulate. An as-isness, therefore, “is the condition of existence which exists at the moment of creation and the moment of destruction” (Ax. 11). This is the happy-ending story of Gopdhal Khan and his palace. Let us turn to the unhappy version. What occurred? Well, the story developed as above up to the point when the construction of the actual palace was started. After a year and a half, with everything progressing satisfactorily, Gopdhal Khan went to see his cousin, the prince of Radjastan, on a social visit. It took a year. When he came back, he learned that the enemy had been in the country. He saw his old palace destroyed, his new palace destroyed, the builder killed and all the plans and models burnt. He sat down, wept, and thought: “You never get what you want”. And so he made a second postulate altering the first one. (The first one was: “I’ll built the house of my dreams”.)Yet a second postulate does not cancel the first one; it only alters it. Both

co-existed from now on in Gopdhal Khan’s mind. This condition of existence is called alter-isness (Ax. 11). In the years to come, Gopdhal Khan made it go right as much as he could to fulfill his obligations as a ruler. He had a new palace built without caring too much what it looked like. He somehow settled in on the reality of the situation. He said to himself: “Well, I’m actually quite all right this way. I have a roof over my head and the country is in good shape”. -This condition of existence is called an is-ness. An is-ness is the result of an alter-isness. It is an agreement with what is, after giving up on what should be (Ax. 11). Yet Gopdhal Khan never really recovered from the blow. He sighed a lot when he thought of his beloved palace, and turned bitter. The is-ness of his life could not make him forget his dreams. He took to smoking hashish for comfort and spent the rest of his days in clouded oblivion. -This final condition of existence is called a not-isness (Ax. 11). ‘Ax.18: “The static (i.e. thetan), in practicing not-isness, brings about the persistence of unwanted existence’s, and so brings about unreality, which includes forgetfulness, unconsciousness, and other undesirable states.”(Note: The words “static” and “thetan” actually mean the same. They are often used interchangeably by Hubbard. Sometimes their use depends on the aspect to be emphasized: that of the player in the game - the thetan, or that of the one “above the games” - the static.) Gopdhal Khan’s trouble really started with him making a second postulate (“can’t have”) meant to mask the first one (“want to have”) in such a way as to pretend that the first one wasn’t really there any more. He tried to make himself forget as the obstacles seemed insurmountable: he was getting old, his builder was dead, his private fortune had been robbed by the enemy. The dream palace game had come to an end, obviously. It was only realistic to say so. You never get what you want, just shows you. This second postulate of “you never get what you want”, will continue eternally along with the first one. It’s a pair of postulates. This is what a GPM really is: a pair of postulates or intentions of comparable magnitude, locked up with each other. Whenever he thinks of one, he has to think of the other. So it’s best not to think of either. That’s where hashish helps. What has been built here, is a battery of ever-lasting inexhaustible potential. Postulates are eternal. GPMs, consisting of two interlocked postulates, are eternal, too. All that has to happen is the restimulation of one of them and the other will spring to mind, and charge and mass and misemotion will result. To put it bluntly: Gopdhal Khan has lied to himself. Yes, it was “realistic” to say that in view of circumstances the palace game was over. But this realism is nothing but the expression of an agreement with an alter-isness. At the bottom of his heart Gopdhal Khan knew that he wanted his dream palace and never had stopped wanting it. And obviously, the alter-isness did not end the problem - it actually started and persisted it! Had Gopdhal Khan rolled up his sleeves, spat on is hands and said: “All right people, we may not get there all the way, but we can at least try”, he would have lived by the truth he knew, i.e. without any alter-isness.

‘Ax 38:1. Truth is the exact consideration. 2. Truth is the exact time, place, form and event. (. . .) we can achieve a persistence only when we mask the truth. Lying is an alteration of time, place, event, or form. Lying becomes alter-isness, becomes stupidity. Anything which persists must avoid as-isness. Thus, anything, to persist, must contain a lie. “ ‘Ax.36: A lie is a second postulate, statement or condition, designed to mask a primary postulate which is permitted to remain.” Ax.37: When a primary consideration is altered but still exists, persistence is achieved for the altering consideration. “ “Ax.33: Any as-isness which is altered by not-isness (by force) tends to persist. “ Now supposing Gopdhal Khan had kept on working to get his palace built. But, what with his reduced means and his master builder dead, he still hadn’t got what he wanted. On his death bed he might have said: “Well, I tried up to the last minute, but you can’t expect to get what you want”. So what help is that? The same second postulate, the same alter-isness, just made later! The biggest lie here is the “one-lifetime-consideration” as Hubbard calls it. Saying things like that on your deathbed means you believe you are a body and not an immortal spirit who can use bodies until he gets what he wants. Supposing a Buddhist monk had come along to sit at Gopdhal Khan’s death bed and said to him: “Look, I have news for you. There is a next life.” Certainly Gophal would have said: “Is that so? Oh great! Then I can try to get my palace next lifetime. All it takes is finding a good body in the royal family. Which reminds me: my daughter-inlaw is pregnant. I’d better die fast!” And off he goes. Which shows how to undo a GPM: just take the second postulate (the alter-isness, the “can’t have”) away and the thetan is going full steam again on the first one (the as-isness, the “want to have”). MENTAL MATTER, ENERGY, SPACE AND TIME So far we have covered how charge is generated and how it can be undone. One aspect remains to be looked at: that of restimulation. To clarify this we need yet another set of concepts. We’ll go through them and then return to the subject of restimulation. Hubbard defines charge as “stored recreatable potentials of energy” [2]. So it’s a potential of energy and it’s stored. We saw this in the example of the GPM: a battery which lasts forever. But how is charge re-created? How come it can be felt as a mass when it is only two postulates floating about which by themselves contain no mass at all? How restimulation works and how masses are made after they were non-existent for ages, is explained in the “Factors”, a set of theorems written by Hubbard as a “summation of the considerations and examinations of the human spirit and the material universe completed between A.D. 1923 and 1953” [1]. (Theorems - as opposed to axioms - can be proven to be true, or disproven.) The Factors describe an activity - any activity - from its beginning to its end in the sequence of Be-Do-Have. One has to be someone (a baker), then do what’s appropriate (baking) and have a product (bread) as a result. This simple sequence is differentiated into thirty steps, Fac.1 to Fac.30.

When discussed on a high level of abstraction the Factors may provide answers concerning the creation of the physical universe. In a way, they form a “quantum theory of the theta universe” (comparable to the quantum theory of physics.) On a more practical level they would describe the steps inherent in running a business or - for our purposes - the coming and going of mental mest. To fully comprehend the mechanism of restimulation we must understand what attention is. Attention, according to the Factors, consists of theta energy quanta or attention units. They are a somethingness, not a nothingness. They are, in whatever subtle way, “solid” (Fac. 13). As one puts one’s attention on things or people (whether they are in physical reach or not) one gets a sensation of either emotional closeness or distance with them. The higher one’s affinity, i.e. the higher one’s position on the tonescale regarding them, the closer one feels to them. Evidently, by putting one’s attention on things, mental space is created. The dimensions of this space depend on the number of attention units one has put out and on their affinity value (e.g. interest, boredom, anger). Because they produce dimensions, attention units are referred to as dimension points in the Factors (Fac. 4). Think of someone you like. What happens? You have him or her “in your space”. You agree with her, she is real; there is the intention to give and receive communication. Regarding this person, you have a large space. Now think of someone you don’t like. He is not so much in your space. You have put your dimension points “this side of him”. You want to keep him out. There is a certain degree of unreality i.e. disagreement connected with that person, and an unwillingness to communicate. -This was to demonstrate that mental space is created by dimension points, and that attention is not a neutral thing but a mental energy directly reflecting a position on the tone scale (Fac. 5-8). Now lean back, close your eyes and think of a cat or a dog. Think of it in as many details as you can. Keep reaching, keep pouring out those attention units. The more you do this, the more “solid” the picture becomes. With this picture you have created mental matter. - Now withdraw your attention and thereby uncreate the picture. Ok. Reach for the picture again, re-create it. Look at a nice experience you had with this cat or dog. Look at some action. When you have done so, withdraw from the picture. -You have probably noticed that you could fit a two-hour walk with plenty of details into the five seconds you have spent looking at the picture. This is mental time (Fac. 14, 18). Putting dimension points on things, places, people or animals means as much as establishing a communication line to them, be it in your mind or for real. Dimension points can be very solid, by the way. They may have the form of letters, spoken words, bullets, flowers, bank cheques, etc. All these things are means to give attention. They are the physical equivalent to your mental attention units and very much reveal your degree of affinity with the person. You never think of someone - you never send him a letter. It goes hand in hand. What’s on the other side of a communication line is called a terminal. Terminals are solid. They are people, animals, things or places. When you make them up in your mind by creating their picture they are terminals, too, because pictures are solid.

Now consider the terminals you can rely on and feel happy with. This gives you a sensation of stability. You feel well anchored in your space. This analogy of feeling anchored has lead to yet another name for our theta quanta, that of anchor points. Now think of someone who has given you a hard time recently. He has unstabilized your space by knocking your anchor points inwards. Your space lost dimension; when the going was rough it may have even collapsed. Accordingly, you would have felt quite misemotional. Whether you say dimension point, attention unit or anchor point - they are all theta quanta. Hubbard used different words in the thirty years of his research to explain the same thing from different angles. And what are theta quanta? Simply what you need in order to communicate, at least in this universe. A thetan cannot “just so” talk to another thetan; he needs a relay point. A thetan without a relay point is no terminal. He is simply not there as a communication partner, in the same way as a company doesn’t exist as long as it doesn’t have a telephone, a mailing address and a letterbox (Fac. 11 and 24). In order to be there, he must first create a space and then take up a position in that space. Only then he can do something, e.g. communicate. The sequence always is: be - do have. When a baker never created a bakery or happens not to be in it (be), he cannot bake (do) and there won’t be any bread (have). Now from where is this space created? Who or what feels well or not so well anchored? You, the thetan? Maybe, maybe not. It depends. We must differentiate here between you, the thetan who is cause over all this (Fac. 1), the beingness you have assumed in the game you were going to play (Fac. 2), and the viewpoint you are taking in this game (Fac. 3). To be strictly technical about it: space is created from your viewpoint. Dimension points are extended from the viewpoint, not from the beingness, not from the thetan (Fac. 4). This was quite a mouthful. Let us find an example. There is a professor of physics, Mr. Quark. That’s his beingness. He, the thetan, is beyond and above all roles and identifications. However, on the level of beingness or identity, he is a physics professor. He has some other beingnesses or identities, too: husband, father, golf player, and so on. One thetan, many beingnesses. With regard to each beingness, Mr. Quark holds certain viewpoints. There is more than one viewpoint to each beingness. As a physics professor he holds several scientific viewpoints, debates them, defends them, uses them to knock the anchor points of his opponents in by skillful argumentation changes them when they have become untenable. He is well known for his ability to hold his position against scientific attacks and criticisms. His space is very stable there. His viewpoint is well anchored. He is not so good holding his position against his teenage daughter. She somehow manages to make him change his viewpoint in her favor, no matter how much he tries to be fierce and say “no”. His space (his “fatherly authority”) easily gets a dent with her. There are frequent shouting matches. But as he generally adores her, there is no harm done and he quickly recovers. Things are different in golfing. His space collapses like a ton of bricks coming down when he plays a ball badly and loses a round. He goes off fuming, doesn’t recover for hours, and is considered unbearable by everybody around. He takes golf seriously and puts a lot of effort into it. When he has won he walks around with his chest blown up like a balloon and is considered equally unbearable by everybody around. To sum it up: one’s space widens and shrinks as one reaches and withdraws. The dimensions of one’s space (its size) correspond to the tonescale, i.e. the affinity level one has

concerning the terminal in question. As long as one remains pan-determined, one can be responsible for both sides of a game simultaneously. One stays aloof and plays one’s beingness plus corresponding viewpoints “from above”, like a puppet player. (Mr. Quark well manages to do so as a scientist. He can accept it to drop or change viewpoints without getting a personal feeling of loss. Tone level: interest). When one’s space gets shaken one tends to become selfdetermined and identify with one’s beingness. (To his daughter, Mr. Quark is very much a father who is trying to keep his self-determinism. He does mind losing his viewpoint on her, even though he may recover easily. Regarding her, he is not above things. Tone level: antagonism.)When one’s space gets shaken really badly, one may go as far as identifying with the viewpoint in order to defend it. (When Mr. Quark plays golf he is so nervous that he is soldered right up inside his skull and the space he has is limited to the distance between his eyes and the golfball, and his whole attention is lasered into this single terminal, the golf ball. This is fixated attention and selfdeterminism at its worst. Tone level: fear.) On the levels of other-determinism and below one wouldn’t even have a viewpoint of one’s own anymore. One would accept the viewpoint indoctrinated upon one by another. No self-created dimensions, no own space. And, of course, irresponsibility. MENTAL UNIVERSES Up to this point we have been talking only about the world of Mr. Quark without considering anyone else. All the spaces created from the different viewpoints of Mr. Quark’s various beingnesses add up to his universe. The dictionary defines “universe” as “the whole of existing things”. Hubbard defines it as “a whole system of created things” [2] . This is in keeping with the framework of his philosophy which states that before there was a somethingness (and be it only one single theta quantum) there was a nothingness (the thetan in his non-identified static state), and it is the nothingness which created the somethingness. In simpler terms: before there was mest, there was theta; before there was a physical universe, there was the spirit. All things start with a thought, a postulate, an intention. Mr. Quark would speak of his universe as the “first universe”. Yet he is not alone in the world. Other people have beingnesses and viewpoints and dimension points and spaces, and the dimension points interact because people give each other attention, build up and knock down each other’s spaces, viewpoints and beingnesses - in a word, from this interaction we get all the phenomena there are to communication, and they occur between three universes. “The universes, then, are three in number: the universe created by one viewpoint, the universe created by every other viewpoint, the universe created by the mutual action of viewpoints which is agreed to be upheld (. . .)” (Fac. 23). Example: Mr. Quark develops a new concept in physics (first universe). It refers to the already existing body of data which has been accumulated for centuries by the mutual efforts of physicists. Some of these data are thoroughly agreed upon, others are being looked at skeptically (third universe). Mr. Quark communicates his new concept to a colleague, i.e. he intends to create a duplication and understanding of what he thinks (first universe) in the mind of the other (second universe). His colleague gets the point (duplication, understanding), and can agree to some of it. Now the two of them have something in common. To that extent a third universe has been formed. Quite obviously the phenomena connected with ARC and the communication formula apply to all three universes.

This game of coming to an agreement by throwing together dimension points has one disadvantage: they are hard to take apart because in the end one can’t tell any more which dimension point has which owner - particularly when some owners deny they are the owners, or when some others (power-greedy ones) put a false claim of ownership there. This leads to all the problems connected with responsibility and playing games. Example: Mrs. Quark has an outdoors picnic to celebrate Mr. Quark’s scientific breakthrough. When it’s finished the grass is littered with paper, plastic cups, bottles, etc. Quite visibly, an agreed-upon space has been created by these dimension points. Mrs. Quark stands up and says: “All right everybody, let’s all take care of our rubbish. Each of you pick up what you have dropped on the grass and take it to the nearest rubbish bin on the way back.” Five minutes of activity ensue. The amount of litter has not decreased markedly. How come? Well, some of the people had left already and for their bits nobody felt any responsibility, other people forgot what they threw down, others again said they hadn’t when in fact they had. This of course makes the rubbish persist (Ax. 29). Another trap brought about by grouping dimension points and creating things out of them is the phenomenon of scarcity. Take an artist: He may consider his creation so valuable that he would regret to sell it. Which means that he has lost his belief in his ability to create in abundance, to create the same and even better things in the future. He has started invalidating his potential. This is the moment when he will introvert into the creation. He literally will lose his viewpoint and “become the thing”. He will live not as himself but as “his creation”. He will be the caricature of what’s known as a “real artist”. This beingness he did not assume in the deliberate way characteristic for high tonescale positions, but compulsively and in the spirit of defeat. And because the dimension points and therefore the whole creation may perish the thetan thinks he is likely to perish, too. Thus the idea of death comes about. (Fac. 18, 19, 24.) RESTIMULATION Having clarified the concept of mental mest and universes we may now leave Mr. Quark, his wife and her picnic and return to the problem of restimulation. To start with an example: there is Mr. Bush, a wealthy London businessman. Although he has the money for it he never lives in a house of his own, he prefers apartments. Large, lush, luxurious apartments. He loves gold and marble. He feels a mixture of grief and elatedness when he is surrounded by gold and marble. His wife would like to live out in the country. She nags him to buy one of those quaint manor houses down in Sussex. It would be just the house of her dreams. He invariably gets short-tempered on the subject and tells her that it isn’t worth bothering with as “one never gets what one wants anyway”. At long last the tenacity of his wife does the trick. He buys her a manor house, stables, gatehouse, garden and all. The first summer they spend there he gets very depressed. He keeps grumbling about the building, its shape, location, cost of upkeep. Invariably he throws in the comment that you don’t get what you want anyway. To overcome his depressions he seeks refuge in drinking too much. As well he develops a fascination for photo albums depicting classical Moghul architecture. “That’s the sort of thing one ought to have,” he says whilst helping himself to another drink, “but one never gets what one wants anyway”. Mr. Bush is at the point of turning into an alcoholic. He is persuaded to get treatment and moves to his London flat for the time he sees his psychoanalyst. After two weeks - without any consultations -

his symptoms disappear. His depressions subside and he goes back to his occasional social drinking. As you have probably guessed: Mr. Bush and Gopdhal Khan are one and the same person. Between the two lifetimes there are a good 350 years. There were a number of other lifetimes as well, but they don’t count regarding this subject of restimulation. The charge on palaces lay dormant for 350 years; now it has become activated. Result: depressions and a compulsion to drink alcohol. How was this restimulation caused? By Mr. Bush putting attention on this postulate pair, this GPM. He for some reason was never before in the position to consider buying the house of his (or his wife’s) dreams. There were maybe minor incidents in past lives where a bit of charge flared up, but nothing that would have seriously touched him. But in this case now, he couldn’t help putting attention on his wife’s wish to have the house of her dreams. Well, all right then, he thinks, if that’s what she wants. They go, look around a bit, and buy one. This activity made Mr. Bush outflow attention units on his own first postulate (“dream house”), and this was immediately followed by the appearance of the second postulate (“you never get what you want”). But then again he would like to make his dream come true (attention on that), but oh no, it won’t work ever (attention on that). Well it might work (attention on that). No, because one never gets what one wants (attention on that). There is a mechanism building up whereby Mr. Bush gets into a “flipflop” between one postulate and the other. There is a compulsive “can’t have” and a compulsive “must have” and he can’t help extending his dimension points to these two GPM postulates simply because the source of restimulation is right there in his present environment - in the form of the actual manor house in which they both live. And as all dimension points are solid (as we saw), this accumulation of dimension points builds up to a mass, a mental mass. And in this mass is reflected the emotion of loss and grief of 1628, when he found his palace burnt down, and the subsequent apathy which he soothed with hashish then (and which leads to his alcoholism of today). As soon as attention is put on a GPM, it all comes to life again: postulates, considerations, time, place, form and event, attitudes, emotions, sensations and pains. The whole incident. Reason: the original incident was centered around Gopdhal Khan’s alter-is postulate and succumb to the circumstances. He refused to confront that his palace had burnt down. He could not have it be that way. By “hiding” behind a self-created wall of dimension points (or theta energy quanta) he tried to keep this unwanted reality away from himself. This way a “photographic film” was made upon which time, place, form and event of the incident were recorded. The more resistance, the more film, the more solid the picture. It is a theta energy film. It is held up by the two postulates left and right. If there weren’t two postulates there would be no film. As soon as the GPM is restimulated, i.e. as soon as theta quanta are flowing towards it, the film reels off again. The pc “reads it off the screen” when he is in session. Out of session, when he is not concentrating fully, he may only get the emotions, sensations and psychosomatic pains of it, but none of its visual content. He may reactively voice the second postulate (as Mr. Bush did) but won’t be aware of this (Dn Ax. 144). Let us use a comparison here: imagine the two postulates to be two invisible flag poles. They are invisible because postulates have no mass, and cannot be seen in the form of pictures. Before the incident there is only one flagpole - the 1st postulate. At the moment of the incident, when the thetan gives up, the 2nd postulate is made. This gives us the second flagpole. In between there is a banner on which the entire incident with all its 55 perceptics is being “imprinted”. The

banner consists of theta energy quanta by which the thetan is trying to block off the unwanted experience. Once the incident is over the thetan calms down (destimulation); the banner is folded up and put away; what’s left, are two invisible flagpoles. At the moment of restimulation - whoosh! - the banner unfolds all by itself; the incident has come back into the present. Sometimes it is even more real than the present, depending on how long and how intensely the thetan was exposed to the banner. - So, and now we know what Hubbard means when he says that charge is “stored recreatable potentials of energy”. Supposing you were auditing Mr. Bush on this, when would the session be over? As soon as Mr. Bush had recognized his alter-is postulate and taken full responsibility for it: “Yes, that’s it; that’s what I thought then. Isn’t that just amazing! Wasn’t that a great way of falling over my own feet!” (Laughs). This will make the second postulate vanish. Now he can act upon the 1st postulate and accept the house he has bought as a dream house or go off and build or buy the real thing. As well Mr. Bush could acknowledge the fact that this postulate of “I want to have the house of my dreams” indeed exists; he could admire it for what it is, admire himself for having made such a postulate - and make it vanish, too. That would complete the whole cycle; he would no longer have any attention on “dream houses”. (Fac. 14, 29.) Auditing is the process of getting the pc to build up ARC with the GPMs in his mind. As soon as he has found the second postulate he is able to causatively look at the pictures connected with it and may re-create them at will any time (as an act of memory). At this moment the compulsive re-creation imposed on him by the existence of the second postulate, becomes impossible. There can only be one thing at a time: either the compulsive creation or his causative self-creation. And once he can do it causatively the compulsion goes forever. (Ax. 12, 20.) “Ax. 24: Total ARC would bring about the vanishment of all mechanical conditions of existence.” (Mental masses, misemotions as well as alcoholism are “mechanical conditions of existence” .) “Ax 30: The general rule of auditing is that anything which is unwanted and yet persists must be thoroughly viewed, at which time it will vanish.” Evidently, the way out of the whole problem is having a great ability to confront and enough ARC to become bigger than one’s GPMs. HAVINGNESS There is still one unanswered question: how can one keep oneself from getting into trouble in the first place? - Answer: by being able to have nothing, by being able to be comfortable with nothing. This is very hard to confront. Gopdhal Khan wanted to have a something (the dream palace), wasn’t able to tolerate a nothing (when he found his place burnt down), and out of that arose a compulsive reach and withdraw, a “must have/can’t have” GPM. At first glance Havingness means no more than “ARC with the environment” [2]. The more real something is to you, the more you like it, the easier you can have it around or do something with it. Whatever you have a lot of ARC with, you can “have” a lot. You feel

comfortable with it, you can reach it easily, and feel supported by it. You feel “good” about it, and we could say your “Havingness is high” on it. So Havingness is a constantly changing state and measures the degree of ARC one has. When you cannot “have” something, and resist it, you build up charge. On the other hand, if you can stomach it easily when something unwanted occurs or when you lose something, no charge is built up. Havingness therefore can be the result of the communication with something or of the communication with nothing. Therefore, in essence, it is a measure of one’s ability to communicate with something or nothing. If this communication ability is inhibited, charge is generated. This concept of Havingness is one of the pivots of Hubbard’s philosophy. One rather conclusive statement is to be found in “Ability Magazine 34”, 1956 [20]. There he describes Havingness as a paradox: you have an infinite being, the thetan, who for some reason has put it into his mind that he should communicate (1st postulate). That’s fine. No paradox yet. He is all right as long as he doesn’t mind communicating without anyone listening, i.e. without a terminal. He has endless space and his communication pervades it, goes all the way through it, from one end of infinity to the other. He has a great time. Until he decides that he must communicate to a terminal! (2nd postulate, alter-is). Now he has set himself up for a loss. He doesn’t simply want to communicate any more for the sake of communication, he wants to create an effect. And worse, he wants admiration for it, applause, cheers. This way, he makes himself dependent on a terminal. Terminals, per definition, are always solid. They are the communication relay points between two thetans. A “pure” thetan is, by definition, no terminal as he has no vibration, no mass, no energy, no location in space (Ax. 44). He must produce these to be locatable. For two thetans to communicate with each other there must be a relay system; this job is done by the dimension points. The two thetans communicate via something. When you make a mistake in this arrangement, the relay system will become more important than the person you are talking to: this way souvenirs and relics come about. They are symbols of past communications; they are enshrined relay points. You venerate them instead of who used to be “on the other side” of them (Fac. 11, 24; Ax. 25). What is between you and me? Paper and black ink. In order that I may communicate my thoughts to you, we need to have this relay system. Should I wish to talk to you, we would have to bring our bodies into an appropriate position, use vocal chords, produce sound waves, set ear drums in motion, activate neural synapses, etc. All these aids come under the heading of “dimension points”. Anything we use as a means of communication becomes a dimension point be it bodies, tanks, enemy armies, letters, flowers, crystal balls or horoscopes. And here, finally, we have the paradox: there is a nothingness (the thetan) who requires being acknowledged by a somethingness (the terminal) to confirm that he (the thetan) exists. Whoever has a problem with regard to having Nothing, needs Something: a terminal. If there isn’t one, he will create one: by putting out a dimension point, and another one and another one, and he’ll make them nice and solid and now he has someone to talk to. This is how he creates his first universe. (When you see people talking to themselves they are just busy communicating to a made-up terminal.)

The whole problem is summed up in this statement: “The highest purpose in this universe is the creation of an effect” (Ax. 10). It is so much easier to have something instead of nothing, to communicate to a somethingness instead of a nothingness, that the thetan permits himself to get pulled down into the realm of matter, energy, space and time (mental as well as physical) in order to have fun. Which is safe as long as he does not introvert into the mest universe and get stuck there. As long as he can have the loss of terminals and dimension points (e.g. friends or money), i.e. can have nothing where before there was something, he won’t get trapped by his own compulsive flip-flop of “must have/ can’t have”. As long as he does not forget that there is a whole abundance of terminals and dimension points he could create for himself (make new friends, make more money, etc.), he will never have a loss. It is all a matter of certainty of self (Fac. 28). So what’s the answer to “avoidance of charge”? Simply this: Know that having nothing is not a threat to you because you can always create some more of something. So there is no loss, no failed purpose, no frustration, no diminishing and degrading of self by making counter-postulates to your original postulates, no charge generated. Know that you are infinite and immortal and that survival problems therefore are paradoxical. Know that playing a game happens within the framework of matter, energy, space and time, but know as well that you as a thetan exist outside matter, energy, space and time. - When you can hold this attitude you have attained “serenity of being”, at tone 40 of the emotional tone scale.

The Key Terms of Auditing ENGRAMS, IMPLANTS AND GPMS In dianetics there are three categories of incidents, graded according to their heaviness: engrams, secondaries and locks. Their definitions follow in the course of this text. An engram is the heaviest. It is a “mental image picture which is a recording of a time of physical pain and unconsciousness” [2]. It contains as well a recording of a second postulate. This is why it contains charge at all. The body suffered it; the thetan made the postulate. Falling off roofs, breaking one’s legs, operations, illnesses, accidents are all incidents which may be recorded as engrams. Please note that the incidents themselves are not engrams. The recordings of them are, though. They are done the moment a thetan agrees that there is a stop to his intentions and actions. If he could easily tolerate the accident or injury or implant, die, go exterior, and say “I’ll carry on anyway”, it wouldn’t be an engram. So the necessary ingredient for an incident to be recorded as an engram isn’t just pain and unconsciousness, but the succumb postulate made before or during the incident. Hubbard calls engrams “the single source of all inorganic mental and organic psychosomatic ills” [3] . They work this way after the principle: you become what you resist. The very parts of the engram incident which you cannot confront, are recorded by the ridge you have formed in your defense. And precisely what you don’t want you’ll get - because you’ll carry it with you in form of the picture you made. When your car swerved and turned over, you thought: “I don’t want to die!” Each time this gets restimulated, you’ll feel fear of death. You think: “What a terrible awful splintered bone! I can’t get myself to look at it!” - Of all the broken bones, that’s the one which will not set right. You pretend things weren’t the way they are, you alter-is them and - wham! - there’s a ridge recording the whole thing and playing it back on you mentally or physically. (For plenty more examples, see DMSMH [3].) As the GPM and the two postulates contained therein are the backbone of our further discussions regarding the practice of auditing, there is a quick “rule of thumb” definition to remind you: 1st postulate: reach, start, above antagonism on the tonescale (as-isness). 2nd postulate: withdraw, stop, succumb, antagonism or below (alter-isness). GPM (Goals Problems Mass): the mass resulting from the tension between the two. All engrams contain succumb postulates. Yet succumb postulates may as well occur without any physical pain and unconsciousness. After all, before there were bodies thetans already existed, played games and had their problems with them. This is what the term “GPM” refers to. It applies to the thetan as such. The term “engram” applies not only to the thetan-plusbody compound, but as well to the body without thetan, since it may have been recorded on the level of the Genetic Entity (GE) mentioned in Part One. No matter if you, the thetan, consider it a stop or not when your body gets smashed up - the body itself, the organism, does mind. “The word engram in dianetics is used in its severely accurate sense as a “definite and permanent trace left by a stimulus on the protoplasm of a tissue”. It is considered as a unit group of stimuli impinged solely on the cellular being” (DMSMH, p.60).

In auditing it may therefore happen that the GE shoves an incident into the awareness of the thetan, i.e. an incident which was recorded by the GE and not by the thetan himself. It won’t be difficult for the pc to tell them apart, as he feels “stand-offish” with the GE one; regarding his own he accepts the ownership. It is his incident, not a foreign-made one. And he knows it. An Implant is a special form of engram or GPM, respectively. The difference lies in the underlying incident. Let’s take a normal engram to start with. Situation one: you had an accident, the body lies next to the car and is unconscious, you as a thetan are pretty groggy, too. You think the body may die and postulate: “Oh it’s over, I can feel it - I’m going to die!” -This is your 2nd postulate against the 1st postulate of thinking you’ll live forever no matter how racily you may drive. Situation two: the ambulance comes, they get out to pick you up, one of them says: “Pretty bad”. You, being rather confused, take that as a stable datum for yourself to hold on to, and think “pretty bad” as your second postulate. Before you thought you were pretty good, now you think you are pretty bad. The point here is that you picked up the postulate of another, agreed with it and made it your own. In an engram, therefore, a second postulate is either made by you yourself or accidentally picked up from another. In an implant, the postulate is intentionally given to you by another. That’s the whole purpose of an implant. “A painful and forceful means of overwhelming a being with artificial purpose or false concepts in a malicious attempt to control and suppress him” [2]. A really effective implant gives you postulates as well as counter postulates regarding a preferably wide area of game. This way there is a good chance that it will be restimulated without your being able to escape that restimulation. The wider the area of game being addressed, the better the implant works. You can’t withdraw - except inwards. So you introvert and become very small and stop playing games. Which is what was wanted. A classical implant runs more or less like this: you sit strapped to your chair, electronic gear and picture flashing apparatus all around you, electrodes fastened to your temples. You get your shock, lose all orientation, become totally overwhelmed, and right then there is this voice into your ear: “be nobody” shock - “be everybody” - shock - “do right” - shock - “do wrong” - shock, and so on. After that pretty much everything you try to be or do will be restimulative of the pains received and give you a headache. Your own viewpoint has been submerged by forcefully installed other viewpoints. You have become other-determined or even robotized. Drugs and hypnosis may be used as part of it. You may wonder, but engrams/GPMs like this do come up in auditing. Apart from “whole track” incidents, versions of this range from supposedly “corrective” psychiatric treatment to brainwashing. The fact that early dianetics exposed such treatments in the attempt to resolve the problem of US war veterans may have played a part in the initial opposition to dianetics and scientology. There is as well a lighter and more every-day version, called “teaching by engrams”. Here is how it goes: little kid walks through a puddle, messes up her new shoes. Mother slaps her. “You don’t want to walk in puddles (slap), do you! ! (Slap) And you won’t mess up your shoes again (slap), promise? (Slap).” - Makes good and solid citizens, this.

UNCONSCIOUSNESS A note on the “unconsciousness” which forms part of the definition of engram: who goes unconscious - the body or the thetan? If it were the body and the thetan stayed fully conscious, he would then be able to recall it all. So there wouldn’t be any engram on him, but maybe on the GE. If it were the thetan going unconscious. but how does a thetan go unconscious? -This is a matter of definition. Hubbard looks at unconsciousness as a gradual phenomenon. It is a sliding scale between full awareness and no awareness. Full awareness means 100% confront (free theta, free attention units) and duplication of what’s going on; no awareness means no confront, no duplication. A useful term to describe the phenomenon of unconsciousness is randomity. Randomity means, in the dictionary sense of the word: things are not happening by plan but by chance. Hubbard defines it from the subjective viewpoint of a person as “the amount of predicted and unpredicted motion” a person can tolerate [2]. It’s a proportion between the two. When one can predict most of what’s going on one feels bored. This would be minus randomity (Dn Ax. 73). When it’s a nice mixture between predictability and surprise, one feels interested and entertained. This would be called optimum randomity. When too much goes on - more than one could grasp one feels overwhelmed and loses control. This is called plus randomity. Naturally, it all depends on the confronting ability someone has. What a racing driver would consider minus randomity probably is totally overwhelming (plus randomity) to most people. Back to unconsciousness: “Dn Ax.93: Unconsciousness is an excess of randomity imposed by a counter-effort of sufficient force to cloud the awareness (.).”When the thetan loses track of what is happening but cannot withdraw, he goes to that degree unconscious of his environment and his body. He loses his viewpoint partly or wholly; he withdraws dimension points and his space shrinks. This may occur when there is too much happening, but as well when there is too little happening. “Dn Ax 92: The engram is a severe area of plus or minus randomity of sufficient volume to cause unconsciousness. “ It is easy to imagine how plus randomity would cause one to lose control and cloud one’s awareness. One was busy fighting things, and there was just too much happening all at the same time. A car crash would be a good example. You just can’t follow all of the motions suddenly reeling off all around you with lightning speed. A situation of severe minus randomity which may cloud one’s awareness is probably less obvious. Therefore an example: the jet-fighter pilot who was shot out of his damaged plane, came down on a parachute and now sits in the middle of the Sahara desert with absolutely nothing happening - that’s the start of a GPM and an engram! Leaving his plane and parachuting down had high randomity, but he could handle that easily. No shock, no engram connected with this. But with the desert, with sitting and waiting, yes, there is an engram connected with this. Why? Because he has all the time in the world to very slowly succumb to the circumstances and make a good and strong counter-postulate against flying in general and deserts in particular. There is absolutely nothing else to attract his attention except his own mishap and his fruitless efforts to make it un-happen. He introverts and goes unconscious of his environment. What is hard on him as a thetan, is the minus-randomity. Because of it, he forms a GPM. Parallel to that his body dies of

thirst and sunburn. On a cellular level there is a lack of supplies, so the GE suffers from minusrandomity as well. It records a physical engram in the sense of “memory traces left on the cells”. How are things recorded when he goes unconscious? Well, he may not take it all in as it is happening. In the case of the car crash, death comes too fast; in the case of the pilot, death comes too slow. In any case: the thetan is always there pouring out attention, intention, theta energy and dimension points to keep the worst from happening, or to call up the powers which may save him. He is pushing out and pulling in, thereby producing the film the whole thing is being recorded on. The less he confronts, the more he resists and the more film is put there. The more he confronts, the less he resists and the less film is put there. In this latter case the person will have no pictures of the incident. He knows it happened, oh yes, and he can talk about it with no charge. And with no pictures. The other person involved in the car crash referred to above, couldn’t confront looking at it when it happened, and can’t do so now either. She just can’t get herself to talk about it. She’s surrounded by pictures, ridges, masses and energies, all too terrible to look at. Full-blown restimulation. Takes 15 hours of auditing to run her through the whole thing, make her confront it layer by layer, until finally she finds the counter postulate she made in the incident. The incident discharges; now she laughs about it. She knows it happened and can talk about it in detail with no charge. Like the other person. Except he needed no auditing; she did. Difference in confront level and availability of free theta, that’s the reason. (Please note that this is only true for the thetan himself. The GE always records, because it always resists, whatever may be countering physical survival. This is a “built-in construction feature”. The GE is made that way.) SECONDARIES AND LOCKS Having cleared “engram” and “unconsciousness” we are now going to look at the remaining two categories of incidents. They are called “secondary” for the lighter category and “lock” for the lightest category. A secondary is the restimulation of the loss contained in the engram. “The secondary engram depends for its strength and force upon physical pain engrams which underlie it. “ [2] After all, by making a 2nd postulate the thetan has given up his own self-determined goal; he has lost his game and therefore lost what he considered a survival thing to do. He may have lost his body, too. His survival potential has decreased. An incident restimulating his loss of a body or a game will cause grief, sadness, tears. These are the typical phenomena for a secondary. A lock is as well the restimulation of a loss or stop, but of a lighter kind than the secondary. The phenomena are: slight misemotion, an uncomfortable wondering about something one was impressed with. A “button” has been pushed, the thetan doesn’t quite know why he went downtone all of a sudden, and he wonders about it. Locks are moments when dormant engrams are woken up for a short moment and connect up with the thetan. VALENCES

Picking up a postulate from another is called “going into his valence”. Derived from the Latin word for “power”, the term “valence” means as much as becoming part of another’s power and therefore losing one’s own . When you, with a lot of affinity, assume the viewpoint of another, that’s taking on a beingness. That is not a valence shift. However, when you, in a state of unconsciousness and overwhelm, become indoctrinated with the postulates of another, that is going into the other’s valence. Identifying with a winning valence really is a survival choice done on an aberrated level: “If he is so strong that he can kill me, he must be a better survivor than I am, therefore it’s safer to become him than to stay myself”. Example: It is the year 1327, a portly monk is being robbed and killed by two robbers. One of the two, just as he brings down the deathly blow, shouts: “I’ll show you, priest!” This robber is a skinny man who wears a huge beard and a red scarf. In this incident there are three valences, three “dramatis personae”: the monk, the bearded one and the second robber. The second robber is the weakest valence, simply because he keeps himself in the background. The fight happens between the monk and the bearded robber. Here the monk is the loser. As he dies, he thinks: “Its all over now!” The strongest valence is the bearded robber. He is the winner. Six hundred and fifty years later, in 1977, we meet the monk again. His name is Frank Rogers now; he belongs to a leftwing intellectual group who specializes in denouncing religion as opium for the people. Frank Rogers is rather portly; he wears a red scarf and a huge beard. He is known for his wild anticlerical utterances; his favorite is: “Just you wait, you priests, we’ll show you!” Comrades close to him, however, can’t help but recognize a tendency towards despair beneath his wildness; any slightest mishap will make him believe that “it’s all over now”. Obviously, two valences are being dramatized here: the winning one (the robber) and Frank’s own (the monk). Both are overlapping; that of the robber is in the foreground. Being rough and tough, believes Frank, is the best way to make it in life. Our example demonstrates how valences can show themselves in mannerisms and in voicing one’s 2nd postulates without noticing. These go around one’s heads in ever repeating circuits and cause the phenomenon of inner voices, sometimes so strongly that it seems like a little demon was talking. Indeed, occasionally one may feel a voice coming down from the left or from some ten feet above, for example. In any case you are dealing with entities which are nothing but ridges. They contain pictures and postulates acting as “voices”. Of course one may consciously put on a valence, like in acting. This contains the potential liability of restimulating the existing valences in the case. One may have a hard time stripping off the role one played once one is off the stage! ANALYTICAL MIND - REACTIVE MIND The model of “analytical mind” and “reactive mind”, presented in 1950 in the book “Dianetics”, has lead to a lot of confusion because it was taken literally and resulted in the idea that the thetan thinks “with” his analytical mind and is restimulated because he has engrams “in” his reactive mind. Auditing - on this level of literalness - is understood as a process whereby one takes the black nasty pictures “out of” the reactive mind, cleans them off by looking at them carefully and then puts the nice pretty pictures “in” the analytical mind.

This is great for a simple and descriptive model, but that’s not the way it works. An engram is restimulated by stimuli in the thetan’s environment, yes, he finds himself doing and saying things he couldn’t agree with once the restimulation is over, yes, but the engrams are not “in” his reactive mind. The reactive mind consists of all the GPMs and ridges and circuits and valences and entities (which is all the same anyway); it consists of them but it does not contain these things. What makes the thetan react is one or more GPMs in sudden or chronic restimulation. A GPM consists of two postulates. Postulates don’t exist inside anything, that’s totally against their definition. The pictures and masses re-created at the moment of restimulation which make the thetan react, are not inside anything either; much rather they are around the body - which is where the thetan has his viewpoint usually - and press in on it. When the thetan leaves his body he takes his mind along. His mind consists of “pictures (. . .) preserved in energy and mass in the vicinity of the being (. . .) which when restimulated are re-created without his analytical awareness” [2]. The analytical mind consists of the circuits the thetan has made up voluntarily in order to put certain activities “on automatic”, such as writing, driving a car, swimming, etc. They are the result of learning. The thetan does not think “with” his analytical mind. He thinks. And the analytical mind he uses. He uses it as a “communication and control system between the thetan and his environment” [2]. Without a mind the thetan could not be contacted; he simply wouldn’t be there. In order to be in the game, he needs a mind; without his mind he would be static. The mind is actually nothing else but the viewpoint the thetan takes within a universe. The difference between thetan and mind is not always made in common scientologese parlance - not even by Hubbard himself. On the one hand he says: “In the final analysis, what is this thing called thetan? It is you before you mocked yourself up” [2]. Thereby the thetan is positioned above the “mocked-up self”. This “self” corresponds to the analytical mind: “The awareness of awareness unit plus some evaluative circuits or machinery to make the handling of the body possible” [2]. Therefore the analytical mind is not the thetan (the awareness of awareness unit) in his pure form, but the thetan plus something. Yet on the other hand, and quite in violation of this, Hubbard says: “The analytical mind is just the pc, the thetan” [2]. In this text, we will stick to this last definition because it has come to be generally used amongst scientologists. When we say “thetan”, we mean the active player (Fac. 2); when we say “the static”, we refer to him who is “before the beginning” (Fac. 1). Another hint with regard to the differentiation between static, mind and reactive mind is given by the definition of bank. The term is taken in analogy to the data-banks of computers. It means “a combination of energy and significance and this comprises a mass (. . .)” [2]. What then does the bank, or the reactive mind, consist of? Of aberrated postulates (significance’s) and masses (pictures). And the analytical mind? Of sensible postulates and pictures. And the static? Of none of all that. KEY-IN AND KEY-OUT As we have already seen in Part One, the bank is the total sum of GPMs; the case, however, is the sum of only those which are in restimulation. This means that case exists at any

given moment only to the extent that the reactive bank is restimulated. People are more or less “casey” depending on how many restimulators are present and how worn out they are. Being worn out they have little free theta left and react to pretty much anything. This is why a change of environment or a holiday may work wonders - until one is back in the old environment and the old restimulators start working on one again. GPMs not currently restimulated lie “dormant”. Therefore a person who lives in a safe and stable environment may appear very bright and happy and case-less. Here a change of environment may work very much to his detriment. He may key in all sorts of engrams and GPM postulate pairs. “Key in” (again a computer term) means: the moment the GPM is restimulated and the flipflop set off. When this particular person comes back home (lives in the country, has been in the city for two weeks visiting relatives; comes back as a nervous wreck), she will slowly key out. This means that the various GPMs which were keyed in in the city slowly or gradually stop flipflopping. When it’s over, that’s the moment of key-out. An erasure is achieved when the GPM- or engram-forming incident has been found, fully confronted and duplicated, and when the 2nd postulate made then has been as-ised. A keyout, in contrast, is the dropping away of the GPM because enough theta has been regained by whatever means to “cut the wire”. (Child cries, gets an icecream, stops crying. A key-out.) An erasure means: going all the way to the source of the trouble. A GPM therefore is the basic on the chain. Whenever it is restimulated, an enturbulation of theta occurs and is recorded as a secondary or lock. The incidents related to one particular GPM make a chain. It is a chain only of those incidents which are connected to this particular GPM. The aim in auditing is to find and discharge incidents working back along a single chain to the basic, which will erase. One danger one may run into in auditing, is the “crossing of chains”, caused by the pc starting to freely associate rather than looking for the exact earlier similar incident. The pc then gets so massy as if someone had poured concrete all over him, and the session gets stuck. When the free theta of the pc is low, he may have to run through each incident on the chain from the present to the past in order to get down to the basic. When he has a lot of free theta, he will blow through the whole chain at first glance, find the basic and come up with the postulate right away (Dn Ax. 124). END PHENOMENA A moment like the one just mentioned would be considered an end phenomenon (EP). It is characterized by a cognition, which is a realization about his life after the aberrating postulate has been as-ised, and VGIs (Very Good Indicators, i.e. pc looks bright). On the E-meter you would see a certain needle phenomenon called “floating needle” (see Part Three). Not only an erasure, but a key-out, too, is an end phenomenon. Naturally, it is not as thorough as an erasure. Many key-outs, however, make the person regain so much free theta that he floats off like a balloon and totally disconnects from the bank. This is called a release. Some pc’s cannot have it that a cycle of action is complete. They cannot have that there all of a sudden is nothing where before there was something (the GPM). So they keep on looking -

and restimulate some other GPM by means of the power of their attention. This is called an overrun. The pc “pulls in masses” again - from somewhere else. The auditor has to be very careful not to allow the pc to overrun. Although one can easily rehabilitate the EP which occurred before the moment of overrun, it means that the auditor lacks session control. THE COMPOSITE CASE In Part One the fact was mentioned that ridges may be made by one person but picked up by another later on. This means that not all GPMs, ridges, engrams, valences and circuits one carries around as part of one’s case ,were fabricated by oneself. One may have - at some time or other - contacted some foreign-made ones and “woken them up” by one’s attention. The ensuing restimulation one of course did not like but resisted it and tried to push the source of it out of one’s space. Which of course made it connect up even stronger. So there is one’s “own case” (consisting of home-made ridges) and there is the composite case (consisting of foreign-made ones one went in contact with). The ridges in the composite case are usually referred to as entities. Some people can “see” entities naturally, others learn to do so as they move up the auditing steps to Clear and above.

The Rudiments of Life THE “RUDIMENTS” In the friction between an as-isness and an alter-isness, in the lie implied by an alter-isness, we have the most fundamental violation of one’s personal integrity. There is something one has considered true and now one doesn’t consider it true any more - just because there is a barrier consisting of matter, energy, space or time. One has allowed the mest universe to be bigger than oneself; one has invalidated one’s position (as a thetan) outside and above mest and one has done so knowingly. That’s pretty bad. Putting one’s own certainty (1st universe) in question and succumbing to the mest universe (3rd universe) - that is the fundamental overt act a thetan could commit. The term overt, in scientologese, stands for any kind of misdeed. It is called an overt because you cannot deny to yourself that you did it - even when there was no witness about. Certainty in the first universe may not mean that something is certain to happen in the third universe, i.e. “objectively”. One may be certain that one’s car won’t get stolen (first universe) although everyone around tells one that it’s silly to leave it out in the street and one should put it in a garage. Eventually it does get stolen (third universe). Now they’ll all say: “Didn’t we know it! See how wrong you were to act against our advice”. One doesn’t have to feel wrong at all, actually. One stuck to one’s certainty, that’s all. One didn’t allow “public opinion” to destabilize one in one’s certainty. Now that the car has been stolen - ok, one takes the hint and puts the next car in a garage. But one changed one’s opinion oneself, that’s the point. First one was certain it wasn’t going to get stolen, now one is certain that cars do get stolen in this part of town. One has lived by one’s own truth and experience. Had one listened to the others and put the car away one might have felt a little stupid, like: “Why do I rent this expensive garage when I don’t even know if cars get stolen around here? How do I know if these people are right or wrong?” One had to test it out and match one’s own certainty against the 3rd universe. One made one’s experiences and adjusted one’s postulates accordingly. But not in the spirit of defeat! Not as a 2nd postulate! One found a new survival course after finding the previous survival course unworkable. So one “officially” ended the original consideration and replaced it by a new consideration. There is a difference between “wishful thinking” which lives off drawing the curtains on the harshness of reality, and sensibly postulating in accordance with reality. A matter of good confront, as usual. “Logic 16: An abstract postulate must be compared to the universe to which it applies and brought into the category of things which can be sensed, measured or experienced in that universe before such postulate can be considered workable.” [1] The art of “living by as-isness” would imply that one always ends a cycle of action. One would either fulfill or un-create a postulate, then make a new one and thereby never generate any charge. So one would change postulates, yes, but only after canceling (as-ising) the ones which one has adhered to so far and which have become unworkable. And one would do so on the basis of one’s own volition, not because one has been persuaded or bullied into it. The end product would be “successfully accomplished survival”.

At this point the reproach could be thrown in that such an attitude was egocentric and betrayed a weak character. That it meant changing direction like a flag in the wind. Egocentric it doesn’t have to be - we will see why in the next chapter. A sign of a weak character it is not, as long as the person involved takes his bearings with reference to a high purpose and a broad game, and when he is determined to not go one fraction of a millimeter off it. Whoever lives along such lines may have to go through all manner of hardships, but he won’t ever be a traitor to himself. “Living by as-isness” therefore is by no means the same as the ill-reputed “way of the least resistance”. In fact, these two principles don’t even exclude, but actually complement each other! Water for example always goes the way of the least resistance, yet never loses sight of its main goal: it always reaches the ocean. To continue with having committed the overt of betraying one’s own certainty: the person doing so usually can’t confront it. He does not want it known that it happened. He not-ises it for himself and he withholds it from others. It is not to be mentioned or brought up as it would endanger his survival. It’s safer to keep it covered than to bring it out in the open. Example: Fred is at Linda’s party. Lots of people there. Fred spills a glass of red wine on the beige carpet. He is startled, helpless and thinks: “Oh no!” - which means as much as “I can’t have done this; I can’t have been that stupid; it wasn’t me”. Here then is the overt. He did something, knows he did, pretends he didn’t, and pretends it not only to himself but to everybody else, too. So it’s an overt in the first universe and in the third one, too. And his postulate of “Oh no” is of course the alter-is, i.e. the withhold he has from himself and from others regarding the truth of the matter. Now Fred has a real problem. He has created a nice little Goals-Problems-Mass (GPM) for himself. He is torn between “should I tell - shouldn’t I tell”, “Was it me - no, it can’t have been me”. This problem keeps going around in his mind. Consequently, Fred will avoid meeting the eyes of Linda for the rest of his time at the party, and he’ll find a good reason to leave earlier than he would have otherwise. When he says good-bye to Linda he makes sure not to look straight at her. Linda says: “Nice you came, dear. I hope you liked the red wine.” And she winks at him with one eye. Fred feels caught out. Does she know? Or doesn’t she? His withhold has been restimulated and he wonders if Linda knows what he did. He can’t tell. Hastily he goes off. His friendliness towards Linda is markedly lowered in the future. He avoids her as much as he can which isn’t so easy as she works in the same office. His colleagues notice that there is something cooking and ask him about it. He drops scathing and critical remarks about Linda and makes her look a rather despicable person in order to have a “good reason” not to talk to her any more and to justify this before everybody else. In technical terms, this is the sequence: overt leads to withhold leads to missed withhold leads to problem. When the withhold was almost found out to the point of one wondering if the other knows or not, we talk about a “missed withhold”. A missed withhold is the act of another, of the one who is almost finding out; in our example it is Linda. The guilty party has the withhold; the other is knowingly or unknowingly doing or saying something which restimulates the withhold. But she doesn’t hit it smack in the middle so that the sparks fly, she misses it. In this manner it may be restimulated forever after. The well-known phenomenon going along with it, is a bad conscience.

Now the person has a problem: who can he possibly trust? Do they know or don’t they? Which of course leads to an “ARC break”, i.e. a lowering or even breaking of one’s willingness to communicate with the other, share reality or have affinity with him or her. A typical indicator for a missed withhold is Fred complaining about Linda. The clever auditor would immediately ask: what has Fred done to Linda that he has to cover up by invalidating her? These, then, are the rudiments: overt, withhold, missed withhold, problem, ARCBreak. The term “rudiment” implies that this is what life is basically composed of. When “the ruds are in” life is good fun, when “the ruds are out” there is some sort of undetected trouble afoot (as the auditor jargon has it). MOTIVATORS AND SERVICE FACSIMILES Now that we know what an overt is, we can go a step further and look at the overtmotivator sequence. A ”motivator” is “an aggressive or destructive act received by the person (. . .). Its called a motivator because it tends to prompt that one pays it back - it “motivates” a new overt” [2]. Example: you lost the tennis match (motivator received), blame it on the racket, knock the racket against the wall in anger and break it. “Well justified’, certainly, but an overt against the poor tennis racket nevertheless. You original overt was not being able to have how badly you played - which made you lose the match. Or: Paul, at the age of 12, gets spanked by his father for having bad marks at school (motivator received). At the age of 35, Paul spanks his own son for having bad marks at school (“well justified”, of course). As we have seen in the example of Fred at Linda’s party: the motivator he received by the disastrous occurrence of the wine glass spilling its wine (all by itself, naturally) gives Fred ample reason for snide comments and unjust “criticism” against Linda. (“Why doesn’t she get herself a set of wine glasses which don’t tip over so easily”, etc.) He does it in an attempt to belittle the person he has committed the overt against, and make it look as if that person deserved it - all in the effort to make it all right that the carpet was messed up. In scientologese this is called “being motivator hungry”; it serves to make oneself right. What do you do when you feel found out by someone and get a bad conscience? You claim that he did something terrible to you. You react in two ways: Either you attack him to wipe him out, be it socially, businesswise or even physically. Or you withdraw into the sulking depth of an ARCbreak. The interesting thing about it is the sequence: overt first, motivator second. It’s not a motivator-overt sequence. Any “look what-they’ve-done-to-me” attitude can be easily shattered by asking: “And what have you done that made it come about?” One had the responsibility to make it go right. One didn’t, and got under the wheels. How come one didn’t? When one has been hit, claims to be a poor victim, and starts feeling terribly right whilst making others wrong, one has begun to use a Service Facsimile. “Service because they serve him.

Facsimile because they are in mental image picture form. They explain his disabilities as well. The facsimile part is actually a self-installed disability that “explains” how he is not responsible for being able to cope. So he is not wrong for not coping Part of the “package” is to be right by making wrong. The service facsimile is therefore a picture containing an explanation of self condition and also affixed method of making others wrong. (. . .) It is simply a time when you tried to do something and were hurt or failed and got sympathy for it. Then afterwards when you were hurt or failed and wanted an explanation, you used it. And if you didn’t succeed in getting sympathy for it, you used it so hard it became a psychosomatic illness. (. . .) Its your explanation to yourself and the world as to how and why you failed. It once got you sympathy” [2]. Example: little William, 5 years old, climbs up the ladder to the apple tree. He misses a rung, stumbles and falls down. That’s an overt, it’s his fault; he should have watched out better. He is unconscious for a moment, comes to and feels nauseous. (This remains non-confronted so it is an engram.) He is put to bed immediately, taken care of, pampered; Aunt Mary scolds Uncle Peter for allowing “that poor little boy” to climb up this “terribly high” ladder. Little William knows to take an advantage when he sees one: Uncle Peter has to carry him upstairs to his bedroom every night now, because William “feels so weak at the sight of that high staircase”. When Uncle Peter tells him he is a big boy and has already demonstrated that he can go upstairs by himself and maybe should try again now, William says he would really like to try but just now he feels so nauseous. So he gets carried up, particularly as Aunt Mary is all worried. What William is doing here: he is consciously using the facsimile of the accident plus its physical sensation (the nausea) to keep up his victim position and thereby control his environment. The trick is that he pretends to be willing to co-operate but that he unfortunately can’t because of a somatic he (“of course”) is not in control of. So he pretends not to be able and expects others to coax him back into a state of being able, without ever doing them the favor. This can go a long way. It will finally end up in a real psychosomatic illness. All William has to do to “pull one in”, is to use his facsimile really hard, put lots of attention on it and restimulate the engram by his own efforts. (He was unconscious and did feel nauseous, after all. And as he never confronted it, it was recorded as an engram by the body and as a little GPM by him.) Here is the further development: William, now 16 years old, has a school exam coming up. He has never studied up on this particular subject. The world looks black to him. The next week (exams) is going to be a disaster, he knows it already. These things are much too difficult for his little brain. He tells his mother that he is afraid. His mother tells him to sit down and learn. William sits down and - as a “solution” - faints (the unconsciousnes of the engram) and drops off the chair. He feels quite sick suddenly (the nausea of the engram). He has to stay in bed, feels weak, can’t learn. Mother writes a note of excuse to the headmaster that her son can’t attend the exams. Such a poor victim. Certainly he can’t be expected to be responsible for his progress at school, what with that inexplicable and sudden illness. And on it goes. In the final stage, at age 35, William will have developed a permanent stomach ulcer which gives him a good and generally acceptable reason not to appear in the office when more than the usual is being demanded. And it’s a real ulcer; the doctor has diagnosed it so. Nobody would argue with that, given the usual social agreements on such matters.

By this time, anything will be explained by the ulcer, just anything. It’s the most marvelously useful method of being irresponsible and bad-tempered without having to account for it. Its drawback is that William genuinely has become a victim now. What started out as a bit of boyish play-acting in an aberrated attempt to control others, turned into a “survival” mechanism, to an attitude of “must be right”. Its original deliberateness was totally and utterly lost along the way. William cant drop his Service Facsimile any more. He has a psychosomatic illness now. It is the result of his attempt ,,to make self right and others wrong, to dominate or escape domination and enhance own survival and injure that of others” [2]. CONCLUSIONS In view of the fundamental principle of “GPM = 1st postulate + 2nd postulate” it appears that the making of a 2nd postulate is the overt act to beget all later overt acts. It is at this point that the thetan violates his integrity. In order to cover this up, he will either claim to have received a motivator and therefore feel justified in committing “well-motivated” misdeeds, or he will use service facsimiles to dominate everybody and escape domination oneself. Both - motivators as well as “SerFacs” go back to the 2nd postulate. They are a dramatization of the succumb- and victimattitude inherent in any 2nd postulate. The difference between the two dramatizations lies in their position on the tone scale: someone using motivators, acts overtly antagonistic (2.0) or angry (1.5); someone using SerFacs acts on the sly. He is just above fear (1.0), yet below openly shown resentment (1.3), at a point called “covert hostility” (1.1).

Ethics and The Dynamics of Life THE DYNAMICS In the beginning of the last chapter it was mentioned that “successfully accomplished survival” made one right for what one did in order to achieve one’s purposes. We meant to come back to this, and we are doing so now. You might call it a very selfish attitude, and you would be right. Indeed, if it were understood on a strictly individual basis, I’d call it that way, too. Yet the above sentence is probably quite acceptable, if set in a wide enough supra-individual framework. This is provided by the eight dynamics. The thetan, as a thought being, is in principle above all games. He is infinite and therefore static. This is the 8th dynamic. (How come it is called a “dynamic” when it in fact represents a static, will be explained in a minute.) In order to play a game, the thetan has to firstly postulate one, secondly he has to enter the realm of duality by assuming a beingness, thirdly he has to act from a certain viewpoint. Once he has made himself a definite terminal, communication and all the phenomena of ARC are possible. This is happening on the 7th dynamic. Having started to work with attention units and dimension points (theta quanta), he of course creates mental mest now and forms agreements with regard to physical mest. This is the 6th dynamic, the dynamic of inorganic mest: rocks, chairs, houses, fluids, gases, planets, suns, galaxies. (Hubbard looks at physical mest in the same terms as mental mest: condensed and “frozen” theta quanta. Physical mest is just a little more solid than mental mest. Think of a diamond - good. Now squeeze real hard and have a genuine solid diamond in front of you - very good. If you could do that you’d be in excellent shape as a thetan.) On the 5th dynamic, there are all forms of organic life: plants, animal and human bodies. They are run by Genetic Entities as long as they are alive. Once they are dead, they are part of the 6th dynamic. The bodies plus the thetans living “in” them are considered the 4th dynamic of a specific planet. 4th dynamic means: all the people on a particular planet. People form groups in order to work, help each other out or play games together. -This is the 3rd dynamic. To keep the human race going and provide bodies for one’s own future, one needs to procreate. Sex, children, family - this is the 2nd dynamic (often abbreviated “2D”). One’s own life in the body one happens to have, expressing oneself individually by means of hobbies, sports, artistic activities, whatever - that is the 1st dynamic.

These dynamics overlap, certainly. There is not one act in life where the full set of dynamics wouldn’t come to bear - one may be more emphasized than the other, yes, but they are all there. Example: you, the thetan (8th dynamic), sit in the office in your identity as secretary (7th dynamic), and need some coffee (6th dynamic), to satisfy the thirst of your body (5th dynamic). The office staff (3rd dynamic) have put money together to buy a coffee machine (6th dynamic). Getting the coffee from Brazil to Brighton was an operation involving half the people on the planet (4th dynamic). You use the cup your husband gave you as a present once (2nd dynamic). You make a cup of coffee for yourself and enjoy it (lst dynamic). Usually, dynamics are looked at as “survival urges” covering an ever expanding range. Here you start at the bottom with the 1st dynamic and count upwards: There is the urge to survive as yourself, as your family, as your group, as mankind, as a healthy natural environment, as a planet, as a spirit, and as an infinite being. The urge to survive as infinity makes the 8th dynamic a “dynamic”. In order to grow along the dynamics one must have accomplished stability on a certain dynamic before approaching the next one. The power to operate on the next higher dynamic is derived from standing on the solid platform of the dynamics below it. If, for example, the President of the United States, whose decisions surely influence the fate of the 4th dynamic, wasn’t backed up by the 3rd dynamic of his aids and the American people, if he were having family trouble (2nd dynamic), if he had a case problem and needed therapy (1st dynamic), his attention would get pulled down from the 4th dynamic to lower dynamics. He would have to fix the emergency and danger situations on the lower dynamics before being able to resume his operations on the 4th dynamic. To that extent, his post would have been left unattended to. So a danger situation was brought about on a higher dynamic because of weak spots on lower dynamics. ETHICS AND MORALS Going back to “successfully accomplished survival” making one right for what one did: The attitude connected with this phrase is not selfish if it is proven to occur on a higher dynamic than the first. Suddenly we find ourselves engaged in a discussion of ethics! Hubbard’s concept of ethics is built around the term optimum solution. An optimum solution is always to be sought by the decision maker. He is to make sure that - to the best of his knowledge - the survival of the maximum number of terminals involved in his decision is furthered by his decision. Only the minimum number of terminals is to be inhibited in their survival. Dn Ax.192: “Optimum survival behavior consists of effort in the maximum survival interest in everything concerned in the dynamics. “ Ax.193: “The optimum survival solution of any problem would consists of the highest attainable survival for every dynamic concerned” [1]. This requires great flexibility on the side of the decision maker (thetan) as his decisions have to always be made “here and now”. He can’t think today as he thought only yesterday as yesterday’s situation is not the same as today’s. Many variables may have changed overnight and therefore the whole thing must be thought over again. Not only his flexibility but as well the number of dynamics a person can think on determine his chances for success. Example: a company owner who can only think on the 1st and 2nd dynamic, will exploit the company for his personal

welfare and that of his family. He won’t care in the least for the life of his workers as he is not interested in them, but in profit alone. This attitude is shortsighted as it leads to a lot of trouble for his personnel department: many sick leaves, frequent staff changes. In the end the quality and quantity of production will suffer. If this company owner were able to think on the 3rd dynamic he would consider the welfare of all concerned when he makes his decisions, i.e. his own, that of his family and that of his workers. If he were, beyond this, capable of thinking on the 4th dynamic he would take care not to produce things which might damage mankind on the whole - simply because in the end it would damage him. And so on, up the dynamics. He thinks of his own survival in terms of everybody’s survival, because he knows that he is not alone in the world. When he knows, too, that he will be born again and will have to clean up the mess he made this lifetime in his next lifetime, he will think twice of making contra survival decisions. The more higher dynamics someone can incorporate in his thinking, the higher is according to Hubbard - his potential value. When his decisions are as well aligned with an optimum solution, not only his potential value but his actual worth, too, will be high. However, if his decisions are not aligned in such manner, such a person - because of his very intelligence with regard to higher dynamics - is likely to be extremely destructive. As is only all too often demonstrated in politics and history. (As a reference to this, see “The Fundamental Axioms of Dianetics” in DMSMH or in [1].) Traditional morals are only one factor to be considered in an ethical decision. An ethical decision tries to find a solution which guarantees the optimum survival for all concerned. There are situations where it is saner, more pro-survival and therefore more ethical, to act against traditional morals. By some individuals doing so, a whole society may change. Look at the arguments for and against marriage between Catholics and Protestants, about premarital sex, abortion, single parents bringing up their children, homosexuality, and look how the pertinent values have changed since the beginning of this century. General morals are changed by the disagreement of individuals who look for new and ethical solutions. For the sake of completion it must unfortunately be added that morals are as well subjected to change, because certain individuals manage to propagate their unethical solutions by means of large-scale media campaigns. In this manner, suppressive powers succeed in steering society to the point where they want to have it [7, 8, 9, 10]. Whoever controls the communication lines on the 4th dynamic, determines the reality of people, i.e. their moral judgment - and thereby the affinity of one nation with the other. What do ethics matters have to do with auditing? Well, a lot. Simply because all overts start with the untruth of a 2nd postulate masking the truth of a 1st postulate. This is the charge which reads on the meter. And this is what the auditor is concerned with. He is not concerned with the value systems and beliefs of the pc. He is only looking for disagreements the pc has with himself, inside his own universe. He is looking for cracks in the pc’s personal integrity. It would be against his code if he were passing evaluative judgments on the pc’s life and standards of behavior. The pc has his very personal principles. He is certain of their truth and value. As well, he is sworn in to the laws and morals of his chosen group and makes them his own. Someone else may consider the pc’s group insane and murderous, but he, the pc, is certain that this group deserves his support. He will develop charge anytime he transgresses against his own laws or against those he

absorbed from his group. This, to him, is unethical. Supposing he were a hunter and transgressed against the codes and customs of hunting, he’d feel guilty. But the subject of killing animals as such will never come up in his sessions! Because he has no disagreements whatsoever with the killing part of hunting. The next pc, who is a vegetarian, transgressed his own principles when he ate a steak the other day. He had to; it was his grandmother’s birthday; she would have been very hurt had he said “no” to her steak. But he feels guilty; he feels that he has contributed to the demand for steaks and thereby to the continuation of cows being killed. He lives within a different set of agreements than the hunter; accordingly he has charge on quite different items. It follows that the auditor works “inside” the pc’s universe and inside his ethics frame of reference. The vegetarian has charge on eating steaks - fine, it’ll be handled in his next session. The hunter likes his steaks - fine, no need to mention it any further. COMPETENCE There are moments when it is more important to do an ethics consultation than to just carry on auditing. This is not done as part of a session but as a separate cycle, preferably by a different person than the auditor. Anyone making a mistake through incompetence naturally builds up charge because of it. He wanted the best and fouled it all up and now he is upset. Auditing takes this charge away. But auditing does not increase the person’s competence! In order to increase his competence, the person would have to study and learn so that he may control things better and bear higher responsibility regarding them. All auditing deals with the removal of charge. This is called negative gain. The pc wins by losing a burden. Positive gain would be achieved by studying, and by living one’s life on a high level of awareness and ethics. Removal of charge alone may make a Clear but it doesn’t necessarily make a fellow who is useful to have around. As Hubbard puts it in the parable of the cleared cannibal: “The individual without engrams seeks survival along all of the dynamics in accordance with his breadth of understanding. This does not mean that a Zulu who has been cleared of all his engrams would not continue to eat missionaries if he were a cannibal by education; but it does mean that he would be as rational as possible about eating missionaries; further); it would be easier to reeducate him about eating missionaries if he were a Clear” [2] . When we wish to increase knowledge, responsibility or control, we are encountering an interrelationship similar to that of the ARC-triangle: the KRC-triangle. Its three components knowledge, responsibility and control (KRC) amount to competence. Knowledge consists of the complete store of experience a person has available to draw from. Responsibility is expressed in the willingness to predict a result and to bear the consequences of success and failure. Control is simply defined as the ability to start, change and stop things, people or activities. Control makes prediction possible. As pointed out above, there is an interrelationship between these three components. In order to increase a person’s control you must increase his knowledge and give him more

responsibility. Conversely: if someone has vast knowledge and no responsibility, his activities will run out of control. Examples: whoever operates the trigger of an atomic weapon, controls a terrifying devastation potential and therefore bears a gigantic responsibility; he can only live up to it if he knows what he is dealing with and what the consequences are. Someone who knows that tipping old engine oil down a drainpipe leads to water pollution, automatically has the responsibility to not do that, but get rid of his wastes in a controlled way. A senior who is responsible for his production and a number of juniors, must have great knowledge of his job in order to predict, supervise and control all activities. Competence and incompetence are solely determined by the degree of knowledge, responsibility and control demonstrated by a person with regard to a certain activity. Competence and incompetence can be unequivocally told by looking at someone’s products. They are expressed in deeds not words. ARC and KRC are not two separate systems but mutually dependent. Example: the science of physics provides the means to build surgical lasers on the one hand and atom bombs on the other hand. What is being done, depends on the KRC of the physicist and on his ARC with mankind. It’s not the fault of physics when cities get bombed but that of the man who built the bombs. Yes, you may argue, but wasn’t he very competent, too? Because his bombs went off at the right moment, didn’t they? True. So he was competent. But then his ARC regarding the dynamics involved was very low. He had high responsibility for his bombs but low affinity for who was going to get killed by them. He didn’t care about that. So you show him some pictures of people blown up by his bombs. Now that he knows what effect he is causing, now that this reality entered his mind, he may change his attitude and join the Peace Corps. If he has the reality but he still doesn’t care, there must be something below it. It’s the quality of the person’s intention. “Insanity is the overt or covert but always complex and continuous determination to harm or destroy” [17]. When a thetan is biased in such a way he will have a lot of affinity with dead bodies and be very responsible to produce a lot of them. Such person is called a suppressive person (SP). (He can be handled by auditing. It takes a lot of work, though - if he wants it at all! SPs usually don’t volunteer to change their ways and get better.) Going back to the interdependence between ARC and KRC: in the more usual (sane instead of insane) run of life, ARC alone does not suffice to make it; it takes KRC as well. Love without competence may not get anyone anywhere, but it surely “feels nice”. Competence without any friendliness and understanding (as expressed in a dictatorial mentality) gets things done all right - but only temporarily as the hate accumulated by those this sort of competence is enforced on, will be its final stumbling block. ARC and KRC, understanding and competence, go best hand in hand. For this reason they have been chosen by Hubbard to form the scientology symbol: two triangles with an S weaving through them. The interesting thing about it is that the KRCtriangle is the upper triangle. “Little by little one can make anything go right by: increasing KNOWLEDGE on all dynamics, increasing RESPONSIBILITY on all dynamics, increasing CONTROL on all dynamics” [2].

Gradients of Clearing A THEORY OF THE BRIDGE Having examined these different explanatory models on the subject of thetan-mind-body, we are finally in a position to answer the question: What is auditing? It is a procedure which reduces charge by encouraging the individual to look at his past, present and future, to confront the games conditions he has created by his postulates and considerations, to dissolve them and the ridges which go along with them and come out more selfdetermined than before. He was being the effect of all this; now he is at cause over it. He can run his life better. The gradient steps needed to get to this point Hubbard calls a “bridge”. “BRIDGE, THE, 2. A term originating in early Dianetic days to symbolize travel from unknowingness to revelation” [2]. For a description of the bridge, the Factors and Axioms are most useful. First, the way downward: anytime a thetan decides to cause an effect (Fac. 1), he has to assume a beingness, (Fac. 2) and then do something (Fac. 3-7) in order to have something (Fac. 10). The more thetans are involved in this, the more complex this game will become (Fac. 11-23). Things get bad for our thetan when he starts considering that his dimension points are too valuable to be lost or given up. He introverts into what he has already created and invalidates his knowledge that he can create more of them. Suddenly there is scarcity; he thinks because his creations can perish he might perish, too, and starts to think of death (Fac. 24, 25). Now he believes that he “must become” someone and forgets that he already is someone anyway (Fac. 27). He has invalidated his own true nature as a thetan. How can he pull himself back up? - By sorting out the mess bit by bit, exactly as described in Factor 28. The exact rules to be followed are given in the Axioms: he separates his 1st postulates from his 2nd postulates (Ax. 36) by confronting the not-is-nesses and alter-isnesses (Ax. 11) and as-ises them by the use of ARC (Ax. 24). Eventually he will wind up back at the top: before the beginning (Fac. 1), as a static (Axiom 1). - He has worked himself out of this particular game and can start a new one by assuming a new beingness (Fac. 2). So what is a bridge? - It’s the journey of a thetan from a state of identification with masses and the corresponding “unknowingness”, to the “revelation” of having a static quality above and beyond mest. He gets there by rehabilitating his ability to have or not have masses at will [20]. This does not mean that he would stop being a player of games. But it does mean the end of his unawareness and his entanglement in mest. When one has completed one’s case, one would not be fixated on one’s first universe problems and masses but be extroverted and find one’s games and problems in the third universe. At this stage one could not have further case gain through auditing (as there isn’t any case left), but would have one’s gains in life by the application of ethics, tech and admin know-how. One would demonstrate competence observably, i.e. in the third universe (Dn Ax. 194) .

100

The end result, in the words of Hubbard: ‘A qualitative return of confidence in self, not quantitative handling of bank.” (HCOB 7.4.60). “Certainty in all three universes (. . .). “ (Fac. 28). ‘A person who is at cause over his own reactive bank and can create and uncreate it at will “ (Ability, March 59) . “He finally winds up without a reactive bank and he’s happy about it because he can mock one up anytime he wants, but he doesn’t have to now. (. . .) Its a horrible truth that people - through irresponsibility - mocked up all of their own difficulties” (Clearing Congress 1958, video tape 6). How much bridge does it take to perform such a rehabilitation to its end phenomenon? This is different from person to person. It depends on how much the thetan actually considers himself identified with masses. CLEAR AND OT - SEEN HISTORICALLY When Hubbard originally formulated the sentences above, he was referring to the state of Clear. We are saying, though, that the end of the bridge is “Case Completion” rather than “Clear”. So what does that mean? And what happened to the much-rumored “OT”? With these questions we wind up right in the middle of the confusion of terms and concepts regarding this subject. What does Clear really mean? And OT? This is hard to answer in one word, because there has been a confusing number of definitions of Clear between 1950 and 1978 and a change in the definition of “reactive bank”. The definition of “OT” became increasingly shallow. It is not easy to find one’s way through this, but we may at least try. (This is not a “merely historical” easy, by the way, but a very practical one: because without a goal you can’t guide, and guiding is the auditor’s task; so he must know his goal.) Let us take an unhurried look, then, at the development of the concepts in question. In “Dianetics” we find: ‘A clear (noun) is an individual who, as a result of dianetic therapy, has neither active nor potential psycho-somatic illness or aberration” (p. 170). “There are no demon circuits in his mind (. . .)” (p. 171). “In a clear; the entire content (of the reactive bank) is removed” (p. 174). “Cells, not the individual, are evidenced to record pain. And the reactive engram bank is composed only of cells. (. . .) The engram is not a memory; it is a cellular trace of recordings impinged deeply into the very structure of the body itself’ (p. 128). -This is how Hubbard sees the Clear and the reactive bank in 1950. The thetan does not exist under this name yet. He is called “I” or “basic personality”. The thetan himself does not make pictures; they press in on him from the body only and impede his natural rationality. “History of Man” (1952, abbreviated HOM), “Scientology 8-8008” (1953, abbr. 8-8008) and “Creation of Human Ability” (1954, abbr. COHA) all circle around the same thought: how does one manage to make the thetan come out of his body? Since HOM the thetan exists under this name. As the result of dianetic therapy he has become a “Mest Clear” and sticks to his body as if glued in. Apart from Mest Clear he is as well called Homo Novis. What’s wrong with him? “This homo novis is limited in his self-determinism by all the economic and social restrictions of an aberrated society. He is not free of food, clothing or shelter He dies when you get him too cold, he perishes when the oxygen content drops too low. He is living in a tolerance band which keeps him cramped to the face of one second-rate planet in a tenth rate system, prey to all the ill will that

101

blows. Is this being free and self-determined?” (HOM, p. 38.)Therefore the motto: “The goal (. . .) is OPERATING THETAN, a higher goal than earlier procedures.” (8-8008, p. 115.) This higher goal is called Theta Clear: ‘A being who is reasonably stable outside the body (. . .).” (8-8008, Glossary.) Above that there is yet another higher goal, the Cleared Theta Clear: ‘A person (. . .) who is able to create illusions perceivable by others at will, to handle MEST universe objects without mechanical means and to have and feel no need of bodies or even the MEST universe to keep himself and his friends interested in existence. “ (8-8008, p. 114.) In order to attain these things it seemed advisable to catapult the thetan out of his body instead of auditing a sheer endless quantity of entities one by one. “These entities run off their own past deaths, on other tracks (. . .). They are actually the basis of “demon circuits” (as covered in DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH) (. . .). “ (HOM, p. 14.) “The THETA BEING is the principal target of the auditor. (. . .) The main thing wrong with any preclear is that he cannot disentangle himself from entities and somatic entities, from demon circuits and mest bodies.” (HOM, p. 37.) Now, in contrast to the days of “Dianetics”, the focus of attention was on the thetan himself. Hubbard names four approaches for solving a case. The last one deals with the time track of the thetan-plus-beingness, i.e. with someone who has a wavelength, self-created automatisms and a position in space. “Of the four only the last is actually capable of producing the clear with any rapidity.” (HOM, p. 9.) The time track of “Dianetics”, restricted to the present life, had become extended trillions of years into a past when very thorough and lasting implants were dealt out and taken in. Now the thetan’s own pictures were starting to be looked at - which is not done at all in “Dianetics”. Accordingly, the reactive bank was not described as a mere cellular affair any more, but as “the ridge automatic response system”. The “somatic mind” became the “genetic entity plus the brain system of the body”. (Both quotes from 8-8008, glossary.) As we saw above: Hubbard tried to achieve exteriorizations by “going past the entities”. This did not always work well for those who took part in the experiment, the circle closest to Hubbard. Amazing things were made to happen, feats which came very close to the states mentioned above - yet unfortunately the participants did not survive it in some cases! Their entities became restimulated to such extent that their bodies broke down under the strain and died. (This was reported by one of the then - and since re-incarnated - students.) The whole track with its implants increasingly constituted a problem. Hubbard sat down for quite a while to study GPMs, particularly in the early 60’s. The reactive mind was more and more seen as connected to implants and GPMs. 1965 the bridge was arranged in a new and different way. It consisted of five “release grades”. What previously was called Mest Clear or DianeticClear is now called “Second Stage Release”. The “real” Clear is the Scientology Clear, the “Fifth Stage Release”. Similar to “Dianetics”, the claim is raised that “one has to have run out the whole remaining reactive mind. “ (See “Stages of Release” in the Tech Dict.)The section of the reactive mind handled here became known as the R6-bank, because it was worked on with an auditing process called Routine 6. The Pre-Clear audited for hundreds of hours on the content of an implant which was assumed to have happened to him only (not his entities), and which was called the “Clearing Course Implant”. It’s all on his own track. He audits “solo”. Solo-auditing

102

was a novelty then: the auditor has the two cans (insulated from each other) in one hand, and with the other he operates the E-meter and writes down the session actions. Even after 1965 Clears showed to be susceptible to aberrations and psychosomatic illnesses. Evidently there was - at long last - no way around dealing with the so far neglected entities. And this is how the OT levels I-III were developed, which since 1967 became a fixed part of the bridge. Hubbard had to give his Clears the reality of what Xenu had done, 75 million years ago, as they didn’t find out by themselves. He could confront and do the research about it; they couldn’t. So he had to tell them. Once a Clear is informed about this OT III reality, he can get in communication with the pertinent ridges and develop enough affinity to “blow” (as-is) them. If it weren’t for the particular complexity of the OT III ridges, a Clear could be expected to clean them up simply by direct confront. Yet OT III, being designed not to be found out about, does not permit this approach. So Hubbard said: “Look, there’s some more case, and it’s on the 3rd and 4th dynamic. It may not have happened to all of you personally (back then) but you surely went into contact with it from the day you started taking a position on Earth. It’s weighing you down and you don’t even know it. So look at these materials and start doing something about it. As-ising these ridges will not only free you but clean the air for this planet, too. And it will wreck the game of Xenu, and that’s what we want.” -Well, since people had the next section of case and were now informed about its contents, they could of course sit down with their solo-cans, confront it, increase their ARC and havingness concerning it and as-is it. OT III was extremely successful; enormous wins and visible changes of body and personality went along with it as a rule. That it was only in 1965, after the release of Clear, that Hubbard should have started to see that Xenu was in his way, is for two reasons unlikely: Firstly there is the 1963 policy quoted in Part One, where Hubbard says that Clear and Theta Clear were not any more the course to take, but that the making of OTs had priority because there was a battle to be fought. Secondly, the Clearing Course Implant from about roughly one quadrillion years ago, which had apparently meant the end of being Clear, is in terms of content closely related to the implant from 75 million years ago. In both Xenu was the stage manager. From this one may conclude that Hubbard, from 1963 onwards, had started developing the bridge according to strategic and not technical priorities. The bridge used since 1970 does look like it. Apart from some minor changes it is still in use nowadays - at least in the CofS - and prescribes the route to take. A number of dianetics and scientology processes lead up to the state of Clear which is for the first time seen as limited to the 1st dynamic: ‘A thetan who can be at cause knowingly and at will over mental matter, energy, space and time as regards the first dynamic” [2]. Then follow OT I-III where disturbing influences (ridges and entities) on the 3rd and 4th dynamic are eliminated. This would actually result in something like a “complete Clear” - but it isn’t anywhere stated that way. However, it is suggested in two ways: Firstly, Hubbard recommends as the last step on OTIII that one should look along one’s own track - after having cleaned up all entities and check into one’s own involvement 75 million years ago, be it on the overt or on the motivator side.

103

So there could be still charge on one’s own time track! Which of course should not be the case when one takes the definition of “Clear on the first dynamic” literally. Which means that, with Clear, it is not all over yet. Secondly, the original levels above OTIII, OTIV-VII, contained exercises concerning exteriorization. These levels therefore constitute an attempt to attain what always had been attempted after Clear: the stably exteriorized thetan, once called “Theta Clear”. And above that, one step higher, there is OT VIII as a vision: “OPERATING THETAN, OTVIII: Ability to be at cause knowingly and at will over thought, life, form, matter; energy, space and time, subjective and objective” [1]. Which is nothing else but the Cleared Theta Clear postulated already 17 years earlier - unattained then as well as today (1990). Neither then nor now are there the necessary auditing procedures in a finalized version. Hubbard died without having reached his great goal. He was worn out by the problem of how to bring about at least as much as a clean and decent Clear under the bank-conditions of this planet. It therefore isn’t a mere coincidence that his last word concerning the bridge refers to the composite case. In the bulletin “Nature of a Being” (1980) he says unequivocally that the thetan, apart form having his own bank, is surrounded by all sorts of entities, and that these obey the same laws as the thetan himself. Although he let a cat out of its bag a second time - marveled at by the auditor community - which in fact had been out of the bag with “History of Man” once before, he used a slightly different tone this time: back in the past he had tried to find his way around the entities, now he cannot help including them. Whoever manages to handle the composite case in its totality, is a Clear in the full sense of the word; that is the message. The changes which were made since 1978 regarding the bridge, must be understood in this context. The OT levels IV-VII were an attempt to fulfill the promise of Theta Clear and stable exteriorization but didn’t hold up to it. As well it became increasingly clear that even OT III was not enough to do away with all the entities whirling around the thetan. People either were not aware of them and became aberrated without knowing, or they - as auditors - could not handle them. Consequently the old exteriorization-levels IV-VII were taken off the bridge in 1978, to become replaced by a set of “anti-entity” OT-levels. These became known under the name of “New Era Dianetics for OTs”, abbreviated NOTs. During this time (1978) there was as well the recognition that some people are naturally Clear on the 1st dynamic. They don’t bring in much of a case from the start. This was called Natural Clear by Hubbard. Of equally great importance was the realization that one can go Clear even through dianetic auditing. Whoever had, in the years before, completed his dianetic case and found no more engrams, was allowed to attest to Dianetic Clear - but he still had to audit his way through the series of implants of the Clearing Course in order to become Scientology Clear. This led to enormous session difficulties, because one was trying to audit something where there was actually nothing. Many people gave up because of frustration or because they ran out of money. The message “the Dianetic Clear is a valid Clear” caused a sigh of relief around the world and got many going again who had got stuck on the lower bridge. This released a whole wave of power on to OT III - which of course was perfectly in accordance with Hubbard’s plans. (For references see Tech Vol . XII . )

104

NOTs (1978) proved to be fairly ineffective, which was probably due to the people administering it rather than to Hubbard’s concepts. Most NOTs bulletins were not actually written by Hubbard himself but by the leading tech man of the day, David Mayo. That they were signed “L.Ron Hubbard” was the done thing at the time. To what extent Hubbard was still in control and able to influence things, is an open question. As you may remember, he disappeared from the stage only a few years later. After the initial hooray and clamorous worldwide marketing of NOTs as the fast route to real OT, it soon showed that there was no end to the auditing on this level. Some auditors worked for thousands (!) of hours on it, until in the end they got the feeling that the case was endless and disappointedly gave up. (Which didn’t change the hooray and the marketing strategies of the CofS one bit.) 1982 the NOTs materials got into the hands of Bill Robertson who, during the great purge of 1982, had been thrown out of the CofS as a “suppressive person”. After sixteen years of personal contact with Hubbard, Robertson was more familiar with his ways of working and thinking than anyone else. He turned the NOTs process into what it was originally intended for: namely to erase all aspects of foreign-made and enforced mental masses and energies, and to enable the thetan to be cause over them. This development of his, Robertson called “Excalibur” after the legendary and lost book Hubbard allegedly had written in the thirties. CONTEMPORARY DEFINITIONS So much for the history of Clear and OT. What are we left with considering this confusion of terms? With the sobering realization that the OT-levels, NOTs and Excalibur amount to not more than a nicely rounded-off Clear - not just on the 1st dynamic, though, but as well on the 3rd and 4th. Why? Well, “Clear”, because he can handle mental mest; “3rd and 4th dynamic” because it may not be made by himself only (1st dynamic), but as well by others (3rd dynamic), particularly at times of galactic upheavals (4th dynamic). The unfortunate thing about it is that no term of the traditional scientology vocabulary covers this state correctly: “Mest Clear” does not fit because it refers to this lifetime only by definition; the “Dianetic-book Clear” it is not because that would imply a release from the aberrations of the GE (which belongs on the 5th dynamic); the “1965 Scientology Clear” is incorrect, too, insofar it refers to one’s own time track only (1st dynamic); “OT” is not right because it was always booked for the ability to exteriorize. None of this fits exactly, yet there is something in all of them. At the end of the current bridge there is, as it were, a “Mest Clear on the dynamics 1, 3 and 4 with an individually different ability to exteriorize.” Which is not to say that it all comes down to nothing! Quite the contrary - it is a fabulous result! Anyone who has attained that state knows what I am talking about. One might characterize it more or less by the following: you know that you are an immortal spiritual being which exists independently of its current body; you act on a physical as well as a theta level and are aware of your own concurrent infinity; you are not particularly impressed by mental mest no matter of what origin; you are in good communication with your body and can audit and discharge the Genetic Entity; you perceive mental messages from animals, plants or bodiless thetans - in a word: you are

105

in very good communication. Looking at it this way, we are not only dealing with a cleared-ness on the dynamics mentioned (1st, 3rd, 4th), but with a phenomenon covering other dynamics as well - for example the 5th and the 7th. How far this goes, is different from person to person. It can certainly be expanded on. It is stable on the dynamics 1, 3 and 4, on the others it is not (at this time). Therefore the concept of “clearing along the dynamics” offers itself as the next step to take. The word “unfortunate” used above, solely refers to the circumstance that the OT-ness implied in the word “OT-level” does not set in to the expected extent. True, telepathic abilities increase throughout the OT-levels - if they did not, one could not possibly audit entities, let alone the “bad guys” in spaceships or implant stations. Except that these abilities come into play only when the charge of the solo-auditor pulls his attention in the direction of the bad guy. Once the solo-auditor has undone the control-line from the opposing thetan to himself, his telepathic perception of him usually disappears - at least with most solo-auditors it is so. The ability, arisen out of necessity, is not always available afterwards when it would be useful, particularly for “civilian purposes”. Some have more talent there than others, and exercises always help - but still: the free-roaming thetan exterior cannot be claimed to be a predictable result of present-day scientology. It hasn’t got as far as that yet. Theta Clear, therefore, still stands as a research project. What are the consequences of our discussion for the practical work of the auditor in his session? Very important ones, because they make it possible to find the common denominator in Hubbard’s thirty-year research, and to clarify the words “Clear” and “OT” once and forever. Result: a clear-cut course. Here then is the common denominator: A Clear is a thetan who does not react any more. An OT is a thetan who acts, and does so solely by the strength and clarity of his postulates. (To what extent he is able to do this whilst being exterior and without using physical or mechanical means, is a matter of individual ability and does not enter this definition.) Seen like this, any thetan is OT to a degree. But not every OT is necessarily a Clear! These are two separate categories of ability. A Clear won’t be touched any more by mental mest; he is cause over it as long as he can recognize and dissolve it. An OT, however, may be aberrated in many ways, but has “incidentally”, “from the moment of his birth” or through special training a number of abilities which make the rest of us gape in awe and wonder - such as telepathic healing, levitating, aura reading, fortune telling, bending or moving heavy metal objects, etc. The existence of such phenomena has been documented too widely in east and west as to allow an argument about them [21, 22, 23]. Despite all the universities of this world, nobody can explain them “scientifically” yet. Hubbard’s philosophy at least offers an approach to an explanation - but cannot purport to predictably lead to such results. Each auditor knows what spectacular things may happen as a result of a session. But each auditor knows as well how short the duration of such things may be. Of what binding agreements the pc disconnects when he comes in the possession of such abilities, is not always known. If it were, one could rehabilitate them case for case. At least, though, one can be sure that these abilities exist. And abilities, no matter what kind, can be rehabilitated by means of the tech. At this time, the correct angle of approach is not known yet. And this is where the task for the future lies.

106

One question has not been answered yet: When would someone be allowed to call himself Clear? To give a very pragmatic answer: When he can confront the remainder of his case and can audit it solo, without the need of another auditor. Which presupposes that he has achieved the following with the auditor’s help: Firstly he has done away with his own case. Secondly he has got rid of all entities which he could contact by means of his natural awareness at the time of the auditing. (Some have a lot to do here, others very little.) If he still had these influencing factors, he would not be able to audit solo, because the entities of the composite case would restimulate his own ridges so vehemently that the cans would drop from his hands. Below Clear, there is the well-known rule: “Auditor plus pc is greater than the bank”. From Clear on it goes: “Solo-auditor plus tech is greater than the bank”. A Clear, therefore, would be somebody who can go it alone up to case completion. His Clear-ness would extend to the 1st dynamic plus to such entities (3rd dynamic) which he can approach without additional restimulation. “Clear” means that he stays cause over it, that he can handle it when he gets touched by it. (When we use the word Clear further on in this text, it is to be understood in this definition.) A Case Completion would be someone like a “full Clear with rudimentary OT abilities”. Someone who would not react anymore and to some extent could act as an OT, on any given dynamic. This is a relative concept as a Case Completion would always depend on the state of the tech at the time. Currently a Case Completion refers to the dynamics 1, 3 and 4, as we have seen. The 5th dynamic by and large is still a terra incognita. (Words in bold italics refer to newly-coined terms and cannot be found in the Tech Dict.) To what extent a Case Completion would be able to resist the Between-Life Implants, mentioned variously by Hubbard, is as yet an open question. Case Completion’s have been made during the last very few years only; none of them has so far dropped his body. So we will have to wait for at least twenty or thirty years before they would drop back in (voluntarily) and tell us what happened to them. (When none of them came back - that would be a good sign!) Regarding the Clears and OTs of the fifties and sixties who have made their “comeback”, one can observe that they quite easily recall their past lives and their past scientological activities - it takes only a very few auditing hours. Which means nothing else than that they have become victims of the betweenlife implants as well, albeit to a lesser extent than pre-Clears. One should not imagine the between-life implants being executed by implanter thetans who, equipped with butterfly nets, sneak around the planet waiting to catch a thetan as he tries to exteriorize after his death. These implants much rather come in the form of a firmly installed “electric cow fence” around Earth, consisting of a very fine field of vibrations which give the thetan a good jolt as soon as he approaches this frequency in the attempt to shake off his masses and thereby lose his ties to Earth. It is a one-way fence, by the way. It lets you in, but not out. In this field, too, a lot of research work has yet to be done. FUTURE PROJECTS Let us have a tentative look, then, at the possibility of “clearing along the dynamics”: a Clear on the 5th dynamic would be in excellent contact with his GE and audit it when it demonstrates an aberration - he may even de-aberrate it entirely. He would be able to communicate

107

with his cells; cancer and AIDS would not threaten him. However, the experiences made with the scientologists of the past twenty years have shown one unfortunate thing very clearly: the Clear on dynamics 1, 3 and 4 can quite comfortably live alongside his body, not with his body as he should do. He - the thetan - does not feel impeded by the body having a stomach ache, a skin disease or diabetes. When you audit such a person you will sooner or later get to the end phenomenon of him confronting his illness with full Havingness, and him feeling just fine - as a thetan - despite the illness. In most cases the next step cannot be taken, which is to receive the communications of the organs in trouble and audit them. (It ought to be emphasized again that the respective talents vary from person to person.) In this context it is quite interesting to note that the GE can be addressed by acupuncture, homeopathy, Bach Flower Remedies and hypnosis with the thetan simply being left out of the procedure! How come he cannot achieve by himself, by direct communication, what the treatments above achieve in the GE, by the use of their respective means? The Clear on the 5th dynamic implies the Clear on the 2nd dynamic. Body and sexuality are one package, because both are governed by the GE - and sometimes by its aberrations. The 2nd dynamic probably is the most aberrated of them all. There is a lot left to clear up on it! Why for example does a sexually neutral thetan behave like a man or a woman as soon as he has taken the respective body? And how come he behaves the opposite way in the case of homosexuality? And where does the imaginativeness of torturers come from, which is always directed towards the maiming of sexual organs? It all comes from the GE. The OT III implants do not suffice as an explanation. It is earlier on the time track. A thetan who uses a body whilst being free of the aberrating influences of the GE - that would be a Clear in the full sense of “Dianetics”. Would it be a Theta Clear, too? Could it be possible that one’s ability to stably exteriorize are blocked by ages-old agreements with the GE? By so far undetected implants? Hubbard, in 1952, had tried to obtain a One-shot Clear. He used key-out processes which directly aim at exteriorization. This approach failed. And up to this day it has not been found out what the compulsion to interiorize is based on. Back in the 50s, the fast scientology-style key-out approach did not do the trick - perhaps the slow methods of dianetics would lead to success? By handling and erasing all the engrams of the GE? The next step upwards would be the Clear on the 6th dynamic. He could not be disturbed by the vibrations of rocks or water veins, by X-rays or whatever inorganic radiation source. He could locate it and de-aberrate it by auditing, if it were aberrated; at least he could keep it from influencing his body or himself. - Let us imagine a thetan for a moment, who would understand mest completely and utterly, who could communicate with each minute subatomic particle lovingly - would he not, as the next step, begin to influence mest causatively? By making it storm and snow on a bright sunny day, by making stones melt, by moving mountains? By creating solid objects out of nothing or letting his body pass through walls? Is it here where we find the Cleared Theta Clear? A Clear on the 7th dynamic should be able to voluntarily pick up any affinity vibration, any postulate crossing his own game, any type of theta communication with the same clarity as a radio receives the wave frequencies of a broadcasting station. No matter if he encountered the spirits of plants and mountains or the enticing calls of bodiless thetans from other universes neither of them would manage to overwhelm him, subjugate his will and subtly guide him. Such attempts would glance off his alertness. He would even go one step further and audit the senders of such

108

messages, should they be of unethical nature. “The price of freedom: constant alertness, constant willingness to fight back. There is no other price. “ [2] It is doubtful if such a thetan were still to be met in the physical universe. He would probably not be bothered with mest-related activities any longer. He would be a “pure beingness” (Fac. 2) but have no location (Fac. 3). This makes him stand even above a Cleared Theta Clear who has full command power over the physical universe, yes, but cannot yet escape the necessity to be manifested in it. The vibrations of a 7th-dynamic Clear would be so fine that only someone of comparable nature could perceive them. They are on the level of pure postulates. And as he stands outside any entanglement with mest he would be well dispositioned to create whole worlds by a mere postulate - which, naturally, is the reason for the existence of the mest universe. A Clear on the 8th dynamic cannot possibly exist. This would be a contradiction in itself, because infinity is above action; therefore infinity cannot make one react. On the 8th dynamic there is infinite ARC - or, reversely, no ARC at all. Which is, interestingly enough, the same. The reasoning behind this: ARC contains communication, and an important element of the communication formula is “distance”. Distance again presupposes the existence of two terminals. However, when there are two thetans co-existing in infinity, there cannot be any distance between them. It takes a beingness to create distance and therewith duality; all of which is situated on the 7th dynamic. On the 8th dynamic there is no duality, no distance, no communication. Only coexistence in infinity (Ax. 25). The crucial ability a Clear must have, by our definition, consists of duplicating and understanding anything he receives as an inflow. This would form the necessary prerequisite for gradually becoming an OT on the dynamic in question. Because: how would one be able to act, i.e. outflow a communication, when there is no reality and affinity with the terminal one is aiming at - no matter whether one wishes to heal a plant, break down a wall or smooth out a quarrel. OTness means KRC and competence, it means getting the product no matter how. Whether by purely exterior means or by the brute force of sledgehammers - what counts is that the wall comes down in the end. The product tells the tale; all else is a matter of style and elegance. In Hubbard’s words: “The supreme test of a thetan is his ability to make things go right” [2]. On the first seven dynamics this means “no more” than fulfilling one’s obligations in one’s private life, towards one’s family, in one’s business, as a responsible member of the population of Earth, as a user of nature in its organic and inorganic aspects, and as a culturally, artistically and spiritually interested person. Within the framework of one’s own goals, naturally, and with different priorities on each one, certainly - but still: in order to have all these aspects of life running well under one’s control and in an ethical manner, one has to be pretty OT. Case Completion means: end of negative gain. After that would follow the “interest levels”, where one would cultivate those abilities one is most interested in: positive gain. And should it be part of the life goal and purpose of someone that he learn to fully exteriorize - he will learn it, no doubt. (Hubbard’s initial processes for this, by the way, are given in the books “Scientology 8-8008” and “Creation of Human Ability”.)

109

One would have to approach the whole subject pragmatically, precisely in the spirit of the program quoted already in Part One, where Hubbard says: “If you think for a moment that it is the purpose of Scientology to produce something intensely spectacular like a ghost that can move cigarette paper or mountains, you have definitely gotten the wrong idea. We are interested in well men, we are interested in people with well bodies who think straight and who co-operate on optimum solutions. We are not making magicians. There are a great many things which a thetan or the analytical mind can do, but all these, until you are certain of them, belong in the field of para-Scientology and are only interesting data” [12]. “Para-Scientology” is “that large bin which includes all greater or lesser uncertainties” [2]. SCIENTOLOGY AND MAGIC - A DIGRESSION In the course of the last section, when we discussed possible Clear-abilities on dynamics 5, 6 and 7, we touched upon the border between scientology and magic - which is precisely the area of para-scientology. There you find the shadowy existence of phenomena about which the experienced and pragmatically oriented auditor has the “greater or lesser uncertainties” quoted above. The reason he feels ill at ease about them is that quite a number of practical session problems - in particular with regard to the solo, or “advanced”, levels - stem from such wishes of the public as cannot be satisfied within the scope of scientology. It’s not that scientology was failing there - it’s simply not on its line! There ought to be a clear statement about this at some point, so we take the opportunity now. Some may be disappointed to hear that scientology - as mentioned in the previous section “isn’t as far as that yet”. They may say: “These OTs don’t even manage to knock tables about or read the future, which is as easy as child’s play for any ordinary poltergeist or, respectively, any halfway decent medium. So why should one bother with it?” Well, wait a moment. When Hubbard talks about Theta Clear and Cleared Theta Clear, he is following other goals than those the adept of a magic circle would be envisioning. Many a frustrated “OT” would have been well advised to join a secret esoteric society instead of doing the solo-levels. This is because scientology and magic have two distinctly different aims, if not fundamentally different ethical principles. (Hubbard, who had intimate knowledge of the sex-magic of the then world-famous magician Aleister Crowley, was undoubtedly aware of this.) Magic teaches “siddhis”, as the Hindus call it, meaning the powers of the sorcerer. Amongst them you find healing by the touch of one’s hand, instant healing, healing and killing over a distance, fire walking, running spikes through one’s tongue whilst in trance, reading the future e.g. in a crystal ball, conveying definite messages telepathically (e.g. for the secret services), astral walking, levitating and many other feats. These things can be learned. Esoteric knowledge has always been guarded by priests and been taught in temples since there were people on this planet; up to this day there are mystery schools in existence. In order to acquire these forms of OTness, one does not have to have crossed any scientological bridges or be Clear or OT in the sense of Hubbard.

110

Performances of this character nevertheless count as the criteria amongst some scientologists, to judge the “maturity” of an OT by. Someone who cannot levitate is no OT, and that’s it on that! Much as such feats may appear to be criteria to certain people, they are in fact not. This is because of the above-mentioned difference between scientology and magic. In scientology one works towards dissolving ridges and entities of whatever kind. In magic however one strives to create new entities, and to command about and use already existing ones. Whether one is dealing with black or white magic is a matter of the underlying evil or, respectively, good intention; it is not a matter of the technique being used. Whoever can heal someone by prayers can just as well kill him the same way, no problem [23]. Consequently Scientology cannot be compared to white or black magic. The task of the auditor consists of rehabilitating the self-determinism of a being and of eliminating the aberrating influences of mental masses and energies on the thetan. In order to achieve this, the auditor does not send the annoying masses, ridges and entities back to their creator with the intention to destroy him by means of the destruction postulates contained in the attacking entity (a possible defense in the case of death prayers), no, he dissolves, erases, as-ises them. Their effect, no matter when it was calculated to come off, is thereby canceled. The auditor is pan-determined and impartial. He does not restore peace by throwing the bomb back where it came from, but by discharging all ammunition and drawing it out of circulation. He audits games conditions below 2.0 on the tone scale, the kind characterized by the hardened self-determinism called “eye for an eye, tooth for a tooth”; he wishes to create positive games conditions in the form of optimum solutions, ideally even pan-determined no-games conditions. Scientology therefore addresses itself to the dissolving of unwanted conditions; black magic, in contrast, to the solidification, the clustering of black masses and their employment in the control of beings; white magic concentrates on the use of entities in order to achieve good effects. The aim of scientology, in a word, is: “More ethics!” Optimum solutions on as many dynamics as possible; in particular on the higher ones. Pre-Clear and solo auditor both strive to create order and conditions worth living in, be it privately, within the framework of society, or on the subtle level of entities and theta-quanta. “More ethics!” is the motto, not the mastering of spiritual circus tricks, not the accumulation of personal power by magical mystery forces. Scientology is an attempt to advance towards a fundamental understanding of existence, and responsibility for it, as opposed to development of power merely to manipulate what already exists. There is the possibility of evil. Instead of using it or fighting it, one ought to grow above it. How, under these circumstances, could one as a scientologist possibly demonstrate one’s OT-ness? One would rather excel through the absence of such tricks! In the case of mental attacks one would show untouchability and lack of aggressiveness; one would put the blame on the correct source - more likely than not even on oneself. One would stay unnoticed. A maxim could be tailored from this: the more someone controls his life and the less attention he draws, the bigger and wider he plays and the more innocuous he stays, the more he is OT. This thought places scientology in direct line with Buddhism and Taoism. There, the chief characteristic of the sage is that he does not leave any traces. Someone might object that Hubbard is propagating precisely the thing condemned above, when he talks of Theta Clear and Cleared Theta Clear. Yes and no. The emphasis is not quite in the same place. It is quite up to the OT to decide if he works white or black magic, i.e. creates theta-quanta and sends them about for his own use. Whoever wishes to create effects on a spiritual

111

level in the manner of magicians cannot but work with theta-quanta. However, an OT- if he were to follow the tenets of scientology ethics - would dissolve them all after use! This is of paramount importance in this context. This makes the difference. And below it all there is his continuous intention to disentangle each and every circumstance not in keeping with an optimum solution. Which takes us back to the subject of postulates: whose postulates created the unwanted circumstances? Working on it from this angle means all by itself that one would contribute to the senior product of an ethical order. That one would approach the area of “superhuman feats” in the process would certainly be a nice side product worth following up - but it would never stand in the focus of one’s purposes. As a summary we might say that a person intent on the attainment of magical effects should attend the pertinent schools, because scientology, being merely interested in the increase of ethics, could be a disappointment for him. Nevertheless, it would not be a bad thing at all if Clears and OTs consulted precisely these schools of magic on order to enhance their general spiritual education! Partly because such knowledge has been used powerfully in the past to entrap and cause harm, partly because, in order to achieve an ethical order, one has to have a full working knowledge of what dangers exist. To reduce the field of para-scientology in size by increased research and inter-disciplinary comparison, is yet another task for the future. (And quite in keeping with the “Code of Scientologist” [1].) THE BRIDGE IN PRACTICE The crossing of the auditing bridge is done in three stages: the first from beginning to Clear, the second from Clear to Case Completion, the third after Case Completion. Let us look at them one after the other. First stage: Up to Clear home-made ridges from one’s own track are usually handled; the occasional entity may slip in here and there. The pc soon recognizes which are his and which aren’t and learns to tell them apart. From Clear on he keeps himself clean by making sure not to create new ridges or get tied up with foreign ones. Should he do this he is usually able to dissolve them immediately, even without the use of an E-meter. Taking it step by step, the sequence is roughly like this: To start with, one would audit what the pc is most troubled with and therefore most interested in. He will tell the auditor all about it in his Introductory Interview The auditor analyzes the case, selects the most suitable processes and audits a Life Repair. A Life Repair may concern the pc’s social situation, in which case his rudiments on life will be “put in”. It may concern psychosomatic illnesses, in which case engrams, GPMs and postulates are found and audited. The end phenomenon (EP) of a Life Repair occurs when the pc feels happy about his present life and when his complaints have disappeared. This result would be the absolute optimum. More usually, though, the mere fact of having discharged his trouble spots does not change the pc’s life circumstances immediately. But he can confront them now, go out, roll up his sleeves and do something about them.

112

Look at the reality of it: the pc has had 25 or 40 hours of Life Repair within two or three weeks. He has discharged all his worries regarding his family and his company and knows the reason for them. As well he has found the engram which keeps his hip from healing. Up to this point, all these changes have happened in his first universe only. His family and the company (third universe) haven’t been affected by his positive changes yet. So he has to go out and DO IT in the third universe. He has to make his new positiveness happen out there. A little study program on the subjects of ethics and management will assist him in this phase, provide guidelines and increase his KRC on life. (Auditing has increased the ARC. But that’s not all it takes, as we have seen.) And regarding his hip, he has to actually take vitamins and minerals and exercises to make it heal properly. The engram is gone, yes, and now healing can occur where before it couldn’t. But he still has to actively look after his leg (KRC) to make it heal all the way. During the auditing it may happen that the pc has big cognition’s on his postulates and on himself being the cause for all his troubles. He may realize that it is himself who keeps the case there. Which is to say that the pc may go Clear as the EP of the Life Repair. If he doesn’t, he will come back after he has settled in on his new level of ARC/KRC in life, and want some more auditing. Why? Because he has expanded. He has grown, hit new walls, overcome them, hit some more walls, got a bloody nose, and now wonders why. Again he gets an interview, and again suitable processes are selected. He may get an Expanded Life Repair now, again in the style of rudiment running or engram handling, depending. Or he may get a number of processes called the Grades. The “Scientology Grades” are five sets of processes, each dealing with a separate subject. Grade 0: communication. Grade I: problems. Grade II: overts/withholds. Grade III: life ruins. Grade IV: service facsimiles. There are as well the less frequently needed Grades V to VII. With this done, the pc will eventually go Clear. Nobody will tell him so, by the way. Because of his general technical knowledge he will come up with this realization himself and inform the auditor. Now an auditing action called the Clear Check ensues; it confirms the state or demonstrates that the pc is not Clear yet and should get some more auditing. Up to this point, he has handled home-made charge. It may have happened that a foreignmade ridge slipped in during one session or the other, but as long as the pc took it as his own it will have gone by unnoticed. However, as the pc approaches Clear, his level of differentiation will increase and he won’t “buy it” anymore when a foreign-made incident pops up in session. The session will stall unless the auditor helps the pc to identify the correct source of the ridge. It may well happen that the pc goes over more and more into handling foreign made ridges, simply because there are none of his own left. This means that he has gone Clear because his ARC (tone level and confront) has increased so much that his own ridges have dissolved and vanished. Yet his KRC remains wanting: he can spot the composite case as the source of trouble (which is the mark of a Clear) but he cannot handle it yet. To do so, he studies to become a solo auditor and audits his Solo Assists. He audits processes which stabilize him and keep the composite case off his back. He undoes everything which may have connected up with him. The purpose of the Solo Assists is the disconnection from foreign entities in order to keep one’s space clean and free.

113

Second stage: How come that the thetan should have this mass of foreign-made ridges and entities stuck to him at all? Quite simple: He went in contact with them because he was sufficiently aware of them to recognize their existence, but he was not willing to confront or able to as-is them. At the moment of making contact with them, he counter-created against them in an effort to make them disappear from his awareness (not-is). Thereby he contributed to the already existing ridge by adding his own theta energy quanta to it. Thus a lasting connection was formed. As a consequence the ridge is even harder to as-is since the number of its creators (thetans) who contributed to it with their theta-quanta, has increased by one more. Therefore the authorship of each quantum is that much harder to identify and the as-ising, which only comes about by correct designation of authorship, is harder to do. The more creators (authors) a ridge has, the harder it is to take it apart. (Dn Ax. 118; Ax. 32, 34. ) Example: Fred takes a walk through the forest. He passes a spot - without knowing about it - where they used to hang people from the gallows, some hundreds of years ago. All sorts of ridges and pictures from those days are still around. They stem from people who disagreed with getting hanged because it went against their survival postulates. So they considered it a stop, formed a succumb postulate and thus made a ridge. It is interesting to note that these ridges stay in their place no matter how much time may have passed and no matter where the thetan who made them happens to be. This is the reason for the spooks one can observe in some places. Right there Fred sits down to take a rest. He gets an eerie feeling. As he looks at a strong bough, he reckons it would serve well for hanging someone and wonders about his own thought; he gets a tight sensation around the neck and throat; he gets pictures of dangling feet. Although he hasn’t paid too much attention to any of this he nevertheless has communicated to one or more of these ridges by the act of perceiving them. He has gone into ARC with them. Technically, he has received a lock; except that the engram restimulated wasn’t made on his track. It was a foreignmade one. (The expression “going into ARC” doesn’t mean that he thought these were pretty pictures. ARC is a flexible phenomenon occurring on a scale between +40 and -40. True, there is a survival/non-survival watershed at 2.0 on this scale (antagonism), but nonetheless it’s ARC all the way from top to bottom, be it in its positive or its inverted form. - See Ax.25.) Once the Clear has finished his Solo Assists, he goes one step further and actually picks out the entities of the composite case one after the other and audits them. The same rules as in any other auditing as well as the auditor’s code apply. He audits them the same way and pretty much on the same processes he was audited on himself. It is a two-phase program: first he works on those entities he can perceive naturally, until none are left. Then an additional restimulation is necessary to “break some more bank loose” and make it available for auditing. The OT III materials serve this purpose. In order to understand the full mechanism of this part of the bank the solo-auditor studies the OTIII techniques and audits what he can find that way. When he runs out of entities, or meets situations he cannot resolve with OTIII, the techniques of Excalibur will help him. They aim at a level of subtlety way beyond the scope of OTIII techniques. By this action the solo auditor becomes engaged in resolving the “Earth case”, i.e. the ridges left flying around due to Xenu’s galactic power coup 75 million years ago, and due to other implants as well.

114

The end phenomenon of Excalibur is: foreign-made ridges gone, no more composite case. The solo auditor is now a free thetan with nothing to block his view outwards and with no masses to inhibit telepathic communications flowing towards him. At this stage he will notice - much to his amazement - that there are games still going on he once (eons ago) was part of, that there are players still around he once was a team-mate of. (Remember: thetans do not die, and not all of them have bodies.) He discovers that there are quite some withholds and overts which were never cleaned up because the composite case interfered with the rather subtle communication lines from those former and present co-players and opponents. So he sits down and audits this level of Games and Players. He is, by the way, dealing with home-made charge again. After all it was him who caused the incomplete cycles which made these players have attention on him since those bygone times. Towards the end of this level, he is however not dealing any more with “old” ridges, but finds himself involved in a telepathic struggle on the level of postulates, occurring in present time. Postulates one cannot register with an E-meter as they have no mass or energy, no mental mest. Postulates one can know, yet one cannot measure them. (For this reason the E-meter becomes increasingly unnecessary at this point.) Should one make the mistake, though, of resisting inflowing postulates (alter-is, not-is), new ridges will be created instantly - and for their erasure the E-meter may certainly be useful. Particularly when one has allowed it to go a bit too far. Third stage: This is how far the bridge goes currently. As its result the thetan does not find himself engaged any more in games conditions with the composite case formed by Xenu or other political implant games of then or now. He has become a “single being” in the true sense of the word. He has come to the end of “negative gain” and can now develop his abilities in order to have positive gains. He can expand his OT-ness to his heart’s desire without being encumbered by a reactive bank. A Case Completion is neither an “automatic” nor an “absolute” state. It grows or decays depending on the thetan’s awareness about higher dynamics and his willingness to behave himself ethically and in accordance with ARC and KRC. A thetan has absolutely no problem creating another bank for himself. In the paragraph about “Games and Players” above you have seen how easy it is. You may think now: “But that’s crazy! Nobody is going to make a bank for himself!” But oh yes, they do. And they even have the right to do so. (And remember: We have all started that way. Else we wouldn’t be here.) MORE THAN ONE BRIDGE The sequence of steps from Life Repair to Case Completion given in this chapter represent one possible way of working. They do not correspond to what is sold in the CofS under the name of “The Bridge” (Trademark). Their “Bridge” looks different. Below Clear there are three blocks of auditing: Introductory - the Grades - Dianetics (“New Era Dianetics”). They have to be done by everybody, like it or not. Then follows a Clear attest which usually lacks any instruction as to why Clear was attested and what it actually means. Then the levels “New OT I to VII” are done, just as

115

inescapably as the steps before Clear. This - as everybody is to suffer the same treatment standardly - the CofS considers “standard tech”. One cannot pretend, unfortunately, that things look much better outside the CofS probably because most auditors working outside the CofS were trained in the CofS. Since free scientology splintered off the church in 1983, there came into being as many bridges as there are scientological sects. They are based - just as the one suggested here - on the degree of comprehension or miscomprehension the individual “bridge builder” has of Hubbard’s work. A little hint to the potential bridge-crosser so that his doubts about the right choice may be dispelled: Just ask for the goal and purpose of the bridge in question. What does the other shore look like? When you only get to see glittering eyes and feel beaten down by stormy assertions instead of receiving a clear answer, I would - if I were in your place withdraw politely. BEYOND ALL BRIDGES As we know from the Factors: “Before the beginning there was a Cause and the entire purpose of the Cause was the creation of an effect” (Fac. 1). So there was oneself, the nonpostulating one. With a first postulate he created his own beginning: “In the beginning and forever there is the decision and the decision is TO BE” (Fac. 2). Before the beginning one existed as a potential, in the beginning one exists in actuality. With Factor 2 the game has started. Precisely there is our often-quoted 1st postulate. What is there above Factor 1 then, above oneself as cause? A difficult question and hard to answer, because as soon as one sets out to find an answer one finds oneself being cause! For this reason it says in Factor 30: ‘“And above these things there might be speculation only.” So let us go ahead and speculate - if not above the Factors, so at least along their upper edge, within the bracket of Factors 1-4. If one took the concept of the 1st postulate to its extreme, one might say that the whole reason for the existence of a thetan in his non-static state, that of a player, depended on one single postulate, made eons ago, with which he started his game cycles. It is this postulate by which he lowered himself from a hypothetical state of “pure static” to the level of a player and became involved with the dynamics. “The ultimate truth is a static” (Ax. 35). This is one of the two important data here. You, the reader, are static (or eternal, if you wish) to the extent that you have recognized yourself as the ultimate truth. The other important datum is taken from the Know-To-Mystery Scale: a postulate implies a not-know. Therefore a postulate (no matter what postulate) always is a lie with reference to the ultimate truth, insofar as the ultimate truth implies knowing all, whereas postulating implies not knowing all (Ax. 25, 37) . You, as the ultimate truth, pretend to not-know, thereby lie to yourself - and stop being the ultimate truth (Ax. 44-46). To say “I know that I not-know” does not help much as it does not contain the answer to what it is that you not-know. In order to have a game, the ultimate truth must lie to himself. To play a game, to enter the field of dynamics, there must be barriers. Without barriers there is no game. Not knowing of course

116

is a barrier; knowing all, on the other hand, is a no-game condition. Considering to not-know something and then going to find out about it, is the start of any game. If there were a thetan with only one single postulate and without any alter-is of it, there would be nothing left on him to be restimulated. No case. There would only be action towards the postulated purpose (Dn Ax. 190). His game would be over as soon as this single postulate were fulfilled, i.e. executed in reality, or canceled by the thetan himself. At this moment the existence of this thetan would be without goal and purpose. His beingness, his reason for existence would be redeemed. There would be no game any more, therefore no purposes/barriers/ freedoms, therefore an infinite potential of purposes/barriers/ freedoms, therefore infinite beingness, infinite doingness, infinite havingness - and that is static. (Please note that beingness, doingness and havingness denote states, not actions.) At this point the thetan would vanish as a player and become a “pure static”. He would be infinite, he would be the 8th dynamic. You could not locate him anywhere as he has “no mass, no motion, no wavelength, no location in space or time”. Yet he always has “the ability to postulate and perceive” (Ax. 1). Having an ability does not necessarily mean that one must use it all the time. He doesn’t have to postulate and perceive - unless he wishes to start another game. He may as well stay in this state of “pure static”. How long would one remain in this state? How long were you static the last time you had this state? -These questions cannot be answered; they are self-contradictory and put the wrong way. Firstly the concept of static excludes the concept of time. Therefore one cannot possibly ask: “How long were you static the last time?” Time is brought about through the cycle of action. As a full static does not act at all but simply knows, there is no time to that state. Secondly, a state of “pure static” is merely hypothetical. In practice the thetan has a dual quality: that of player in the game and that of static above the games (Ax. 1, 48; Dn Ax. 1-5). This double quality can be experienced. If one did not have an inkling of it, one would not wish to go up the bridge to Case Completion, finish one’s game and become a “pure static” once again. One feels one is “down here” and wants to get back “up there”. Now, what “part of him” got stuck in the mest universe? Well, of course that part which is identified with a beingness and introverted into a viewpoint (Fac. 24; Ax. 45, 46). This, then, is the message of the Axioms and Factors: the thetan as player and the thetan as static co-exist perpetually. One is static “all the time”, simply because time does not exist. As well and along with static, one is actively playing. This results in the ideal game situation for a thetan: that of “action”, tone 20 on the emotional tone scale. Here one is fully aware of both one’s staticness and one’s senior games postulate. No alter-is has been put up against it yet. He plays “full blast”; his intention knows no reservation. Yet one does not feel a “lone ranger” but embedded in a flowing web of postulates which one aligns oneself with and which one in turn influences. One feels included in a whole universe of games going on concurrently. Therefore anybody’s action determinates one’s own and vice versa. ‘“All thought is concerned with motion” (Dn Ax. 23) . What could one possibly do wrong at this level of lusty immortality? Are there any ethical standards at all? You cannot kill a thetan, therefore anything is permitted, one might think. But no. Even here there are agreements with regard to an optimum solution, guaranteeing the continuation

117

of “The Game”. They are expressed in the two “Rights of a Thetan” Hubbard formulated in 1952 on the Philadelphia Doctorate Course. They are the “Right To One’s Self-Determinism” and the “Right To Leave A Game”. To leave one is always more difficult than to start one, as we have seen. Which is mainly one’s own fault as the counter-postulates stem from oneself and no one else. Yet apart from that one may get stopped from leaving a game by implants - which is only possible by the implanter using the self-created masses already there, in order to stick his own to them and thereby pull one even deeper into mest. The possible argument in defense of implanting, “His own fault shouldn’t have made any masses to start with!”, has no validity. The point to be observed is that implanting is not a “games accident” but a deliberate suppression. Seen in this light, the two Rights represent the highest possible ethical standard. Implanting is the heaviest possible offense against them. At tone 20 on the tone scale the two Rights are made the most of. Here the thetan plays his game self-determinedly (1st Right) and with the certainty of being free to leave it any time (2nd Right). He has not yet created anything which might keep him against his will - and therefore noone else could. Faites votre jeux!

118

Bibliography (1) “Scn 0-8”, by L. Ron Hubbard (LRH), 1970. (2) “Technical Dictionary”, by LRH, 1975. (3) “Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health”, by LRH, 1950, edition of 1973. (4) “The Sad Tale of Scientology”, by Eric Tonwnsend, 1985. (5) “History of Man”, by LRH, 1952. (6) “The Phoenix Lectures”, by LRH, 1954. (7) “The Hidden Story of Scientology”, by Omar Garrison, 1974. (8) “Operation Mind Control”, by Walter Bowart, 1978. (9) “Playing Dirty”, by Omar Garrison, 1980. (10) “The Secret World of Interpol”, Omar V. Garrison, London 1977. (11) “Keeping Scientology Working”, HCO PL 7 Feb 1965. (12) “Professional Auditor’s Bulletin” Nr.2., Technical Bulletins, Volume I, 1976. (13) “Creation of Human Ability”, by LRH, 1954. (14) “Tech Bulletins”, Vol. I. (15) “Fundamentals of Thought”, by LRH, 1956. (16) “Science of Survival”, by LRH, 1951. (17) “The Volunteer Minister’s Handbook”, by LRH, 1976. (18) “How to choose your people”, by Ruth Minshull, 1973. (19) “Modern Management Technology Defined”, By LRH, 1976. (20) “Tech Bulletins”, Vol. II. (21) “The Way Of The White Clouds”, by Lama Govinda, 1966. (22) “Autobiography of a Yogi”, by Yogananda, 1946. (23) “The secret science behind miracles”, by Max F. Long, Huna Research Publications, Vista/California.

119

Index Aberrated 11, 55 Actuality 53 Affinity 51, 52 Alter-is 66 Alter-isness 59 Alter-isness, 60 Analytical mind 72 Anchor points. 62 Arc 50, 63, 65, 79, 82, 83, 84, 87, 92, 95, 96 Arc-break 76 As-is 96 As-isness 58, 59, 60, 75 Attention 50 Attention units 61 Auditing 10, 44, 65, 70, 72, 81, 84 Auditor 20, 44, 45, 50, 74 Bank 11, 73 Basic on the chain 73 Be-do-have 61 Beingness 52 Between-life implants 90 Case 11, 73 Case completion 90, 97 Chain 73 Charge 10 Chronic charge 48 Circuits 72 Clear 11, 85, 88, 89, 91, 98 Cleared theta clear 85 Cognition 74 Communication 53 Communication formula 54 Communication line 61 Competence 82 Composite case 74 Confront 55 Considerations 55 Control 82 Cycle of action 56, 57 Demon 72 Dianetic clear 88 Dianetics 10, 98

120

Dimension points 61 Dynamic 51 Dynamics 79 E-meter 15 End phenomena 73 Energy 16, 61 Engram 11 Engrams 68 Entities 72, 74 Entity 19 Enturbulated theta 50 Ep 74 Erasure 73 Ethics 79, 80 Excalibur 88 Exterior 16 Facsimile 77 GE 19, 89, 90 Genetic entity 19, 68 Goals problems mass 58 GPM 58 GPMs 68 Grades 95, 98 Gradient scales 47 Have 61 Havingness 66 Implant 68 Implants 68 Is-ness 59 Key-in 73 Key-out 73 Knowingness 47 Knowledge 82 KRC 83 KRC-triangle 82 Life repair 95, 97 Locks 71 Matter 16, 61 Mental image pictures 17 Mental matter, energy, space and time 60 Mental MEST 17 MEST 16 Mest clear 85, 89 Mind 18 Misemotion 50 Missed withhold 76 Morals 80

121

Natural clear 88 Negative gain 82 No-game 49 Not-isness 59 NOTs 88 Oblivious 49 One-shot clear 91 Operating thetan 17 Operating thetans 28 Optimum solution 80 Optimum survival 80 OT 20, 85, 88, 89 Other-determined 48 Overrun 74 Overt 75, 76 Overt-motivator sequence 77 Pan-determinism 48 Postulates 55 Potential value 81 Pre-clear 11 Randomity 69, 70 Reactive mind 72 Reality 53 Release 74 Responsibility 82 Restimulation 11, 64 Ridge 18, 47 Robot 48 Rudiments 76 Scientology clear 86, 88, 89 Secondaries 71 Self-determinism 48 Service facsimile 77 Solo assists 96 Somatic mind 19 SP 83 Space 16, 61 Static 51 Suppressive person 83 Terminal 62 Theta 16, 50 Theta clear 85, 91 Thetan 16 Thoughts 56 Time 16, 61 Unconsciousness 11, 69 Universe 63

122

Valences 71 Winning valence 71 Withhold 76 Worth 81

123

SCIENTOLOGY A Handbook For Use by L. Kin Volume 2

The Procedures

. .

Professional Application

EDITION SCIENTERRA

“I maintain that cosmic religious feeling is the strongest and noblest incitement to scientific research.” Albert Einstein (The World As I See It.)

Copyright (©) 1992 by Edition ScienTerra, a subdivision of VAP Publishers, Wlesbaden, Germany. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. For information or orders please address VAP Delivery Service, Post Box 1180. D-4994 Preussisch Oldendorf - Germany. ISBN 3-922367-26-7, Verkehrs-Nr. 16645 (BAG) First printing 1992 Printed in Germany

Table of Contents A Comment By The Publisher .........................................................................................7 PART THREE: THE PROCEDURES Introduction ....................................................................................................................10 The Training Routines (TRs)- Basic Elements of Communication............................11 Auditor and Pc- an Introduction ..................................................................................15 The session in practice......................................................................................................15 The Auditor’s Code..........................................................................................................15 The auditing communication cycle ...................................................................................16 Mass and significance.......................................................................................................16 Trust .................................................................................................................................16 Who to audit? ...................................................................................................................17 Exchange..........................................................................................................................17 The auditor’s tools: A) Simple Techniques...........................................19 Assists...............................................................................................................................19 “Book One” auditing.......................................................................................................20 Session “admin” ..............................................................................................................21 Emphasis on training ........................................................................................................21 The auditor’s tools: b) Objective Processes..........................................22 General description...........................................................................................................22 Procedure..........................................................................................................................24 End phenomenon..............................................................................................................27 Who needs objectives? .....................................................................................................27 Instructions to the pc.........................................................................................................28 The auditor's tools: C) Postulate Auditing ...........................................30 Introduction ......................................................................................................................30 Finding something to audit ...............................................................................................30 The technique of lock-scanning........................................................................................31 Narrative style...................................................................................................................31 Finding the postulate in the incident .................................................................................32 Repeater technique ...........................................................................................................33 Sticky sessions..................................................................................................................34 Stripping valences.............................................................................................................35 Summary ..........................................................................................................................35 5

The procedure step by step ...............................................................................................36 Session breaks ..................................................................................................................39 The auditor’s tools: D) Auditing with the E-Meter.................................41 1.The many roles of the auditor ....................................................................................41 The interviewer.................................................................................................................41 The auditor .......................................................................................................................41 The case supervisor ..........................................................................................................42 The examiner....................................................................................................................42 The ethics consultant ........................................................................................................43 2.The language of the E-Meter......................................................................................45 How the E-meter ..............................................................................................................45 What is a read? .................................................................................................................46 ”yes” and “no” ................................................................................................................47 The instant read ................................................................................................................47 The floating needle (F/N) .................................................................................................48 High TA F/N....................................................................................................................49 The ARC-break F/N.........................................................................................................50 The dirty needle................................................................................................................50 Three buttons to check for charge.....................................................................................50 The false read ...................................................................................................................51 Completing cycles of action..............................................................................................51 Indication of charge and why ...........................................................................................52 3. Preparing the session..................................................................................................53 Clearing words .................................................................................................................53 The pre-session.................................................................................................................53 The can squeeze ...............................................................................................................54 Metabolism .......................................................................................................................55 The session .......................................................................................................................56 Admin and C/Sing............................................................................................................56 4. Introduction to the Various Techniques...................................................................59 4.1 The Prepcheck..........................................................................................................61 The procedure...................................................................................................................61 Getting the item ................................................................................................................62 The end phenomenon .......................................................................................................62 The prepcheck combined with Postulate Auditing ...........................................................63

4.2 The Repair List.........................................................................................................65 Origin and purpose ...........................................................................................................65 The L1C ...........................................................................................................................66 The end phenomenon .......................................................................................................66 4.3 The Rudiments .........................................................................................................68 “Normal” rudiments.........................................................................................................68 The missed withhold and the overt ...................................................................................70 Invalidation and Evaluation ..............................................................................................72 Rudiments of Long Duration (LD Ruds)..........................................................................72 LD ruds ............................................................................................................................73 Normal ruds......................................................................................................................73 Repetitive ruds..................................................................................................................74 ”False” ruds .....................................................................................................................74 Reverse ruds .....................................................................................................................75 Flows................................................................................................................................75 4.4 Rehabilitation Procedure.........................................................................................76 The purpose of a rehabilitation .........................................................................................76 Theory and definitions......................................................................................................76 The procedure by key-out.................................................................................................77 Rehab by Key-out: command sequence and patter...........................................................78 Rehab by Postulate Auditing ............................................................................................80 Rehab by counting............................................................................................................81 4.5 Dating and Locating (D/L) ......................................................................................83 Theory ..............................................................................................................................83 Procedure..........................................................................................................................83 4.6 Listing and Nulling (L&N) ......................................................................................86 5.The High and the Low TA .........................................................................................89 Clear read and High TA ...................................................................................................89 The rising TA ...................................................................................................................89 The low TA......................................................................................................................90 How to get the TA down..................................................................................................90 Handling the low TA........................................................................................................92 PART FOUR: PROFESSIONAL APPLICATION The Bridge below Clear.................................................................................................95 The life repair ...................................................................................................................95 The drug rundown............................................................................................................96 7

A note on the grades.........................................................................................................97 Postulate auditing why no flows? .....................................................................................99 A Simple Life Repair Program .....................................................................................101 How the C/S thinks ..........................................................................................................101 The program .....................................................................................................................102 The Interview..................................................................................................................103 Auditing vs. Interviewing .................................................................................................103 How to do an Interview....................................................................................................103 A questionnaire for the Introductory Interview.................................................................104 The questionnaire explained .............................................................................................105 Advanced programming................................................................................................108 Auditing and C/Sing.........................................................................................................109 Pc gone clear?...................................................................................................................110 The clear check.................................................................................................................111 Ethics-Measures..............................................................................................................114 From Clear On Up .........................................................................................................116 Author’s Postscript.........................................................................................................119 Appendix.........................................................................................................................121 Index............................................................................................... 134

A Comment By The Publisher After “Scientology - More than a Cult?” had been published, the many positive letters from readers in the English- and German-speaking world made the publisher feel acknowledged for his efforts and encouraged him to proceed with issuing the present volume, “A Handbook for Use”. Not withstanding the controversial personality of L. Ron Hubbard who for a good forty years formed the target for Time Magazine attacks, and despite the allegations and insinuations of self-styled “sect hunters” against the teachings of the founder of the scientology movement, the publisher considered it unquestionably necessary to make the present materials available to the broad public. Even some recently published English and American titles working on the principle that Hubbard had had nothing else in mind than to establish a system of manipulation and control, could not change the publisher’s decision, because he, having himself been a member of the Church of Scientology in years past, had already come to his own conclusions, situated somewhere in between these artificially constructed battlefronts. The present handbook, then, has come to be produced from the background of the publisher’s dealing for over twenty years with friends and foes of this controversial movement. The experiences made in context with VAP’s publishing of the German version of “The Hidden Story of Scientology”, by Omar V. Garrison, were of particular importance, as they clearly demonstrated how far the Church of Scientology had deviated from Hubbard’s intentions. Particularly their noisily asserted claim to having a monopoly on Hubbard’s work appears to be utterly untenable, and unacceptable if looked at in the light of the freedom of science and religion anchored within the democratic constitutions of the western world. Himself a free thinker, in addressing his readers with a script like this, the publisher has simply the intention to free the philosophy and methodology of Hubbard from their superfluous dead weight and to make them accessible to the general public. This is in the hope that the techniques discussed here are put to an unprejudiced test so that an impartial judgment from the side of ordinary people is made possible, i.e. from those not indoctrinated by the Church of Scientology or its detractors. References are made throughout this book to other scientological materials, such as Hubbard’s books and tapes or CofS publications. It would be convenient if all the materials needed in order to understand and use the whole of this subject could be included in this book. As this would make it unmanageable and present copyright difficulties, it has been decided to leave the references to the dictionaries and technical publications as stated, hoping that the context is nonetheless understandable and that for those readers keen to study further there is access to these publications. They can be ordered through book shops if one would rather not approach the CofS directly. If there should be any trouble with obtaining books and E-Meters, you are welcome to get in touch with the publisher.

PART THREE: The Procedures.

Personal Integrity What is true for you is what you have observed yourself And when you lose that you have lost everything. What is personal integrity? Personal integrity is knowing what you know What you know is what you know And to have the courage to know and say what you have observed. And that is integrity And there is no other integrity. Nothing in Dianetics and Scientology is true for you Unless you have observed it And it is true according to your observation. That is all. (L. Ron Hubbard, in “Ability” No. 125,1961.)

Introduction In this second volume on the subject of scientology, we are going to discuss the practical application of the auditing theory which was the content of the first volume, particularly of Part Two. It now goes on with Part Three and Four. Part Three describes the individual procedures “processes”) and their application; Part Four deals with Case Supervision, i.e. the analysis of a case on the basis of a previous interview, the working out of a program containing the procedures explained in Part Three, and the doing of the program. Auditing is the means of therapy used in scientology. As a word, it means “listening”, which signifies that the activity is based on the use of communication processes. It can be done on many levels and isn’t restricted in its application to professional therapists. Also one doesn’t have to have mastered the whole subject and have read every word Hubbard wrote (or indeed the whole of this book) before one can do useful and beneficial work as an auditor. Part of this book is concerned with the use of the E-meter as an auditing aid, but valuable results can be attained without it. (Witness the vast popularity of early dianetics in the 50’s, before the E-meter was developed. ) Some processes are designed to be used without the meter, others require it. The following chapters have been arranged accordingly. For those who wish to audit without an E-meter, the chapters on “Simple Techniques”, “Objective Processes” and “Postulate Auditing” are the ones to study. Beginning with the chapter on “Auditing with the E-meter” there is an increasingly professional slant. Whether you use a meter or do without, all procedures need to be drilled well before you go into a real auditing session. Drilling is an essential part of the auditor’s training. The timehonored rule is “read it - drill it - do it”. One of the proven aspects of scientology practitioner training is that you cannot expect to become an auditor just by reading about it. Your certainty regarding the various procedures, your routine in handling the E-meter and your auditor presence can only be achieved by drilling, drilling, drilling and doing, doing, doing. You need an experienced auditor to train you. You cannot pick it up from a book, be it this one or any other one. Your auditor presence in particular is the platform the pc’s trust in you rests on. If you were a “technician” only, your pc would soon feel lonely. There are moments when you have to be personally with him and help him through, on a direct thetan-to-thetan ARC line. This cannot be substituted by any “technical procedures” . And it is not simply a matter of training either. Auditor presence is the quality that underlies all real success in many fields, such as education or medicine, for example. It is an expression of genuine caring and ability to grant beingness to the other person. This natural willingness to respect the way others are, and to respond to a need for help, can be enhanced by training in communication skills, although this cannot be a substitute for it. The importance of good auditor presence particularly is that it allows the pc to feel safe and thus to have the confidence to face up to what he couldn’t confront before. Hubbard recognized this importance and was aware that an auditor becomes more effective as he progresses with his own case-handling and becomes Clear himself. To some extent, though, auditor presence can be acquired and enhanced by means of a number of drills called the “Training Routines” or “TRs”. They deal with the fundamental 12

elements of communication. For this reason the first chapter is devoted to them. No matter what you do in auditing or in life, your TRs “have to be in” . This means as much as “your presence must be unshakable” - be it as an auditor or as a private person. As in Volume 1, all words in bold print are technical terms and can be looked up in the Technical Dictionary.

TheTraining Routines (TRs): Basic Elements Of Communication The training routines or TRs are called this, because they ought to be drilled as a matter of routine. They are the back bone of any kind of auditor training. They are all done the same way: a student, a coach; the drill is done with the coach correcting the student as needed, until the student has passed the drill; then their roles reverse. In the following text you will find that the actual drills are described rather briefly, whereas their application to auditing is discussed more broadly. It would be beyond the scope of this book to elaborate the full drilling instructions. However, they can be found in a compilation of Hubbard texts, which despite its rather frightful name, is very useful: “The Volunteer Minister’s Handbook” [17]. (The name stems from a time when the CofS was very eagerly proclaiming its “religious image”.) The TRs are the most important tool the auditor has. Good TRs combined with keeping the Auditor’s Code are the fundamentals on which the tech rests. Any amount of technical processes would be ineffective if used by an auditor who commits Code breaks - such as getting angry at the pc or giving comments and opinions on the pc’s statements - and who doesn’t have proper command of the communication cycle . (See “Dangerous Auditor” in the Tech Dict.) TR-0: (Confronting)The actual drill: Student and coach sit opposite each other on two chairs and confront each other first with closed eyes and then with their eyes open. When they feel comfortably here and now with their eyes closed, without being involved in thoughts or bothered by masses and pressures, they open their eyes; each when he is finished for himself. Then they continue with their eyes open. The emphasis of the drill is on attention and affinity alone. It is passed when they can give each other flawless attention on the level of friendly interest, for at least two hours. Then the newly acquired poise of calmly being able to face up to whatever it may be, is put to a test. The two partners divide up in coach and student, and the coach tries verbally and nonverbally to tease the student and make fun of him. This is called “bullbaiting”. When he does not manage to throw the student and when the student succeeds in keeping up his calm serenity, the drill is passed. The coach corrects the student concerning the training target by saying “flunk!” anytime the student goes off the exact form, and carefully explaining to the student what he, the coach, has objectively observed. Then the coach goes through the same situation once again, so often till the student can take the hurdle easily. Only then will the coach present a new situation or increase the gradient of difficulty. He makes sure that the correct training gradient is kept and that there is never more than one button pushed. A “button” is an item stored in the reactive bank. When it gets “pushed” (restimulated) by the words, phrases or gestures of the coach, the student will react with discomfort, embarrassment, upset or uncontrollable laughter. A button is pushed repeatedly until it 14

is flat. i.e. until the student has ceased reacting to it. Only then does the coach look for a new one. (As this training technique is used in all TRs, it will not be explained again.) The significance of the drill: With his TR-0 the auditor puts a safe mental space there. He is just there, he isn’t doing anything but being there for and with the pc. He adds no unnecessary comments and enturbulations. He is expected not to have a case. This means that he puts a nothingness there, whereas the pc puts a big somethingness there: his case . This way the auditor forms a vacuum and the pc a high pressure area. Charge can now flow from the pc to the auditor. Good TR-0 has the effect that the pc just can’t help talking about his case. It’s being sucked out of him, as it were. - A bad auditor who can’t confront bank will act as a suppressor to the pc’s origination’s. The pc will not wish to say very much to him. TR-1: (Controlled Outflow)The actual drill: Position as above. The student chooses a phrase or sentence in direct speech from a book, makes it his own and speaks it clearly and loudly enough across to the other, as if it had just occurred to him. He must be very natural in doing so. The coach corrects him in the way described in TR-0 as criteria for his judgment he uses the elements of the communication formula, the ARC-triangle and the tone scale . (As these criteria are used as a means of training in all auditor drills, not only the TRs, there is no need to keep restating them.) The significance of the drill: TR-1 is the auditor’s mental and verbal reach into the pc’s bank. He is interested, he is curious (3.5 on the tonescale). He wants to get something done about it. He restimulates the pc by the auditing command, he invites him to look into the bank and thereby establishes the auditing comm cycle. A bad auditor will under-restimulate the pc, not reach him, bore him, and get nothing done. TR-2: (Acknowledgement of an Inflow) The actual drill: Position and procedure as above, but with reversed roles. The coach speaks the sentences taken from the book across to the student who has to acknowledge them loudly, clearly, without any stuttering or communication lags, and in a sensible way. The significance of the drill: TR-2 validates the pc for having found an answer to the auditor’s question. He has done what the auditor commanded, he has looked and searched and it wasn’t easy at all and now he has come up with an answer: he wants this validated. The auditor’s TR-2 acknowledges the pc’s efforts and results. This is not in order to be nice, this is no hand-patting. The auditor has commanded the pc to enter the unknown jungle of his bank and come out with a certain thing which the pc doesn’t quite know what it is going to be. So the pc goes into the jungle and comes out with something and doesn’t know yet if it is the right thing. The auditor looks at what the pc found, estimates its value by meter reaction and pc indicators, sends him back when it isn’t good enough or validates him when it indeed is the real thing. A full acknowledgement is given when the auditor has fully understood the pc, and not before. It’s a sign of understanding and therefore composed of Communication and Reality and Affinity, in this sequence. The auditor has received the pc’s Communication. He acknowledges the Reality of the pc in a way that makes the pc confident that the auditor did get it. Only then will the pc feel no further need to talk about the subject. The auditor as well must acknowledge the pc on 15

the right tone level (Affinity): a half-tone above the pc’s tone. Then, and only then, will the pc feel understood . When the auditor is over-serious (“wooden TRs”) or lower toned than the pc, the pc will never have a release as he won’t come uptone enough to get out of the bank. The auditor therefore takes up two positions on the tone scale simultaneously: that of interest (3.5) which he never leaves, and that one half tone above that of the pc. This is not to say that the auditor is pretending no, he just naturally goes along with the pc. The auditor “listens and computes” [2]. He does not just listen, take anything the pc may say, and nod his head. He computes. He thinks. It is entirely up to his judgment how far he drives the pc into the bank, what he has him search for and for how long it is up to his estimation whether what the pc found is within the context of the specific auditing command - fitting or not. He uses his own good sense. He most certainly does not break the Auditor’s Code [1] by invalidating the pc or making evaluative comments. And yet he computes, by giving his acknowledgement at the right point and for the right thing. His TR-2 controls the communication cycle - and it makes the pc feel more certain. The pc’s uncertainty regarding the three universes is the only reason why he wants auditing. He needs the auditor’s acknowledgement in order to build up the certainty he does not have naturally. Good TR-2 encourages the pc to be fully certain; eventually he will create his own certainty independent of the auditor or anyone. TR-2 is the vital factor in a session. Any session lives off it, no matter what method is being used. TR-3: (Persistence)The actual drill: The student asks the coach a simple question which can only be answered in a simple way, i.e. by “yes”, “no”, or “I don’t know”. Traditionally the innocuous questions “Do fish swim?” and “Do birds fly?” are used. When the coach answers the question, the student acknowledges with a “thank you”. When he does not answer it, the student leads back to the question with a “I repeat the question” or a similar phrase, and repeats the question verbatim in a friendly way as if it had never occurred before. This happens anytime the coach does not answer. The coach tries with unexpected comments, similar to TR-0 bullbaited, to throw the student off. The drill is passed when the student keeps up his persistence and gets an answer under all circumstances. The significance of the drill: This TR trains the auditor to persist in asking his question until the pc comes up with the right answer, not a contrived one. The right answer is accompanied by masses blowing off . A wrong answer is a mere “significance” [2] and has no mass connected to it. In this case the auditor sends the pc back into the jungle to look some more. He does his TR-3 subtly and tactfully and imperceptibly and keeps the question going till he has the answer. And then - bang - here comes his TR-2 to end the cycle. TR-4: (Handling Misemotions and Unwillingness) The actual drill looks from the outside like TR-3. There is a difference, though, in that the coach does not, as in TR-3, give nonsensical comments directed strictly at the student. but refers to himself, to his thoughts, misemotions, physical sensations and pains. He acts as if he couldn’t answer the question even if he wanted to, because he feels so bad. This drill requires a lot of authenticity from the coach. Much as he is only pretending, he must be very true to himself in order to stay realistic. In such a situation the student cannot just work with persistence as that would make the situation worse. He must be understanding, listen to the other, acknowledge him in his troubles and then gently and tactfully lead back to the question. Understanding, acknowledging, leading back to the question; that is the 16

recipe for handling misemotion and unwillingness. The coach can increase the training gradient by positioning his dramatization further and further down on the tonescale. The TR-4 of the student is challenged the more, the “worse” the coach feels and the more strongly and thoroughly he acts the particular mood out. The significance of the drill: It is the objective of TR-4 to reestablish the pc’s willingness to cooperate with the auditor and continue with the process .TR-4 is the auditor’s tool to help build up the pc’s confront when he’s too scared of the bank to carry on. It doesn’t matter how the auditor does it and how long it takes, as long as the pc is back in session. TR-4 is the most subtle of all TR’s as it entirely lives off the ARC of the auditor and nothing else. Going back for a moment to the importance of “auditor presence”: It is most obvious in TR-4, where the auditor has to show that he has really understood the pc, and in doing so, he, the auditor, is at his most visible. If he is not genuinely interested, his acknowledgment will stand out as false or inadequate, with the result that the pc will cease to feel safe, will lose trust, and the auditing session will fail to some degree. It is no surprise that TR-4 is the most difficult for some to learn to do really well. The auditor’s interest in the pc is as important as the pc’s interest in his bank. TRs 5-9: (Developing and Upholding Intention) TRs 5-9 teach the auditor to have just the right amount of intention to get the job done; they teach him session control. Without a willingness to control, the auditor’s TRs 1-4 will collapse as soon as the going gets rough in session. Or, should he assume too much control, the pc will feel overwhelmed. If you would wish to develop a professional standard of skill as an auditor, you would be well advised to spend considerable time on these basic drills, and that may amount to as much as three to six weeks, ten hours a day - such is the value and importance of the TRs. (This is true for solo-auditors too. Their success in session is equally dependent on their TRs. )

Auditor And Pc- An Introduction THE SESSION IN PRACTICE Having already covered the theoretical aspects of auditing in Part One and Two of the first volume, a more practical description of it follows now: The auditor asks the pc a set of questions or directs him to examine some previously unviewed aspect of himself or his past. This is continued until the pc has gained some certainty on the underlying cause of his troubles, realizing “it is a . . .”. He has done what is called an itsa. He has had a cognition. When you make the mistake of carrying on beyond this point, you get an overrun. But never mind, it can be rehabilitated later. (See the appropriate section in this book.) To the extent that the process, i.e. the set of questions, is specifically relevant to the pc (and this is carefully determined first), the achievement of his cognition will be accompanied by relief, brightening up, and various other “very good indicators” (VGIs), that together amount to the End Phenomena (EP), of the process. THE AUDITOR’S CODE Further on in this text we will describe the various tasks the auditor has to fulfill, in detail. (See “The Many Roles Of The Auditor”.) At this point only the most fundamental needs stating: The auditor has his auditing commands and his TRs. He does no more than putting the pc in session (TR-0), giving the auditing command (TR-1), acknowledging the pc’s answer (TR-2), and getting the pc back to the auditing command when he wanders off (TR-3, TR-4). Further than that, the auditor does not talk. His behavior is wholly determined by the Auditor’s Code [1]. There is nothing ritualistic or artificial about this code. It provides a frame of reference for the auditor’s behavior which he is obliged to adhere to, as otherwise the session would come to a bad end. When it is violated, wins and results cannot be guaranteed. It is a strictly functional code, with the exception of some “political” points (24-28) which have no bearing on the actual session. There is one aspect of the pc-auditor interrelation expressed in point 16 of the Auditor’s Code, which deserves mentioning in particular: “I promise to maintain Communication with the preclear (. . .)”. This does not only refer to the actual session itself. Because out of session, the PC usually has a lot of questions about the auditing, about the session, about the tech, about the Emeter. Of course, you should never allow the pc to “talk case” out of session as it would only lead to over-restimulation. But apart from that, he will want to know what you are doing technically. Answer all his questions. Sometimes LRH-references help, but usually it’s you who has to do the explaining. There is nothing worse than a tight-lipped auditor, who for fear of invalidating the pc or evaluating for him (which would be a violation of the code, indeed), turns the whole why and wherefore of the session into a huge secret. He doesn’t even do himself a favor that way, because he keeps the pc stupid. How on Earth is he going to audit a pc who is down on his knees with awe of the auditor, admiration of the session and respect for the authority of L. Ron Hubbard, but does not understand a thing of what’s happening to him? The whole session will become a ritual, a ceremony, where the pc says what he thinks the auditor may want to hear at this or that point of the procedure. So please answer all questions. When you answer them technically, as a general matter, 18

and not with respect to the pc’s own case, there will be no invalidation or evaluation, and you will not introvert him at all. Quite the contrary: he will be a better team partner, because by giving him some knowledge, you have increased his KRC-level. And a good team partner makes work ever so easy. In the CofS, one is warned against giving “verbal tech”, which is sensible if it prevents misrepresentation of the concepts. However, if you understand these ideas well enough to work with them as an auditor, you surely can explain them adequately to your pc, and can recognize when you need to refer to LRH materials. (See “Code of a Scientologist, points 2,14,17 in [1].) THE AUDITING COMMUNICATION CYCLE In the actual session, the auditing comm cycle [2] goes on between auditor and pc. Its quality and smoothness is wholly determined by the auditor’s TRs. In slightly abbreviated form, it runs like this: 1. Is the pc ready to receive the command? 2. The auditor gives his command. 3. The pc looks to his bank for an answer. 4. The pc receives an answer from the bank. 5. The pc gives this answer to the auditor. 6. The auditor acknowledges the pc. 7. He makes sure the acknowledgment has been received by the pc. Now the next cycle starts with 1. again. MASS AND SIGNIFICANCE Although it may sound all too obvious, the following must be stated at some point, so here it is: The pc must say out loud and in detail what comes to his mind . When he only thinks it, or says “yes” as an answer to the auditing command, he will not get rid of any charge. Quite the contrary: he will increase it! Each thing that comes to his mind with reference to the auditing question and stays un-communicated, will blow up the tension. “Have you ever had an operation?” Pc goes pale and says: “Yes, but I can’t tell you about it, it was too terrible.” Now, when the auditor goes on to the next question, what help would that be to the pc? A button has been restimulated, and it must be cleaned before you go on. The pc must recreate the whole incident in his mind (lst universe), and as he goes along doing so, he must create it for real (3rd universe). too, by describing all the sordid details to the auditor. Only then can an as-isness occur. The mental creation, the mental image picture of the incident must be a perfect duplicate of the actual incident, complete with time, place, form, event and exact postulate and the description the pc gives to the auditor must be a perfect duplicate of what he sees in his mind, and only then will they all discharge into each other and it goes poof! and nothing is left. Axiom 12. “The primary condition of any universe is that two spaces, energies, or objects must not occupy the same space. When this condition is violated (perfect duplicate) the apparency of any universe or any part thereof is nulled.” The pc must create the mass of the incident, the emotional energy, the pain, the physical sensation, he must sweat and pant and weep in session only then has he got any value out of it. When he merely says: “Well, I know what happened, it was like so-and-so and bla-di-bla, and that reminds me that I had a similar cognition only the other week as I was picking some daffodils”, he is indulging in significance’s. That is not going to get him anywhere. Confronting significance’s 19

leads to nothing but theta cosmetics. Confronting masses - that’s the hard part. And it’s up to the auditor to get the pc there. If he could do it alone, he wouldn’t need an auditor. TRUST The pc puts a lot of trust in his auditor. Therefore the auditor has to behave accordingly. ‘A pc tends to be able to confront to the degree that he or she feels safe. (. . .) If the auditors TRs are rough and his manner uncertain or challenging, evaluative or invalidative, the pcs confront is reduced to zero or worse. This comes from a very early set of laws (. . .): Auditor plus pc is greater than the bank, Auditor plus bank is greater than the pc, Pc minus auditor is less than the bank. No “bedside manner” is required or sympathetic expression. It’s just that an auditor who knows his procedures and has good TRs inspires more confidence.” (From HCOB 30 April 1969, “Auditor Trust” .) WHO TO AUDIT? Who should you accept as your pc? -This is entirely up to the type of work you want to do as an auditor. You may wish to help suicide cases, druggies and others who really got under the wheels. That’s fine, you may do so of course. Yet Hubbard’s motto is “to make the able more able”. You will save yourself a lot of trouble when you stick to his words. Start with the easy ones, keep the rough cases till later. And it’s a sane viewpoint on the third dynamic, too: able people are likely to create more positive change with broader influence on society than unable ones. Once scientology is as widely accepted as medicine or psychology and subsidized by the government and insurance companies, auditors will be able to afford looking after drug addicts, criminals, and the socially or mentally handicapped, in the institutions already set up for this purpose. But no matter whom you may wish to accept: be very sure he sincerely desires to get better, and is willing to do something about it! He must be in “need of change”, which is -4 on the Scale of Awareness Characteristics [1]. (This scale reaches from -34, where the being considers himself to be in a state of unexistence, to +21, where he realizes himself to be the sole source of his success and failure in life.) EXCHANGE Lastly, a word should be said on the subject of exchange. It is customary that the auditor gets paid by the pc. He gets paid by the hour. He does not get paid by the final result. It is important that one understands the significance of this. What does the auditor do? He gives his time and his know-how to assist the pc in solving his problems. The actual solving, however, is done by the pc! The auditor supervises the pc’s attempts to free himself and suggests new and better ways of doing it, by selecting the right auditing process. The pc does the work. And the pc agrees with the auditor regarding the strategies the auditor has chosen. Speaking in comparison, it is like the pc wished to be taken to the other shore and needed a ferryman. The ferryman can guarantee in principal that the destination will be reached, but he 20

cannot guarantee that the pc is going to stand it financially and physically. Because it is the pc who is doing the rowing. Not the ferryman! He gets paid for his knowledge being used. And the longer it takes, the more expensive it is going to be. (This is actually being handled in the same way in the whole field of therapy, not only in scientology.) So there is a contract: the auditor gives the pc something the pc considers valuable, and the pc pays the auditor according to the fee set. When the pc permits himself to get audited without feeling that it is valuable, and still pays the auditor for it, he is himself to blame. This comes down to two simple business guidelines, one for the pc, the other for the auditor: The pc should be sincere with himself. He should discontinue the auditing when he gets the feeling that it does not do anything for him. He should not go on, hoping it was going to get better, and then complain that he was cheated. What he does with his money is his own responsibility. The auditor, on the other hand, should not promise what he cannot keep. He should promise results regarding spiritual abilities, yes, such as going Clear. When he feels competent enough, he may even say to the pc: “Your fear of spiders - well, auditing can handle that!” Because it does. So he may promise a result concerning a specific trouble the pc has, certainly, but he should never say how long it will take ! All sorts of things may turn up in the attempt to handle this one particular thing, and so it may take five times longer than expected. And again: auditing serves to increase the spiritual awareness of a person, his tone level, and his ability to handle his life causatively. It does not exclusively serve to undo someone’s fear of spiders. It has a much broader scope than that. It does often achieve miracles, no doubt, but they are not necessarily made to order. “I promise not to advocate Scientology only to cure illness or only to treat the insane, knowing well it was intended for spiritual gain. “ (Auditor’s Code, point 25 . )

The Auditor’s Tools: A)Simple Techniques The simple techniques covered in this section may well serve as “introductory auditing”. This is recommended in some cases, because it seems more “natural” to some people than metered auditing. To a beginning pc a controlled cycle of action from “This is the session” to “End of session”, a tightly held communication line, a specific auditing command meant to be answered, are enough of a novelty to make him wonder. Adding E-meter and cans as well may just be too much to take, at the start. For the beginning auditor, introductory auditing provides an easy gradient to make him feel at home with session procedure, pc reactions, keeping session control, etc. ASSISTS Assists serve as a mental first aid when the pc is in a state of shock and pain right after the accident happened (Contact Assist), as a relief from confusion (Locational Assist) or psychosomatic tension (Touch Assist). They reduce the unconsciousness produced by the shock of the accident, and they help to undo counter-postulates made during it. For children they work fabulously well. Instead of pitying the child, or scolding him for his “stupidity”, the caring parent would do an assist, make the child conscious of what has happened, make him confront the accident and the pain - and miraculously the shock will disappear. It is a great way of helping children to be more responsible for their actions and keeping them from building up “Service Facsimiles” in the attempt to control adults by means of tantrums and tearful faces. (Service Facsimiles were explained in Volume 1, Part Two.) Assists require no prior auditor experience. Good TRs are very useful, though, as a wellcontrolled auditing communication cycle is of supreme importance: command - execution acknowledgment (“thank you”) - next command - etc., until the end phenomenon sets in. In a Contact Assist the person is made to touch the exact spot on the object he has hit, using the exact body part with which he hit the object. For example, you have banged your head on the door: touch your head back in the same place. Ideally the whole body motion and position should be exactly duplicated. It is done many times. At first the shock and pain will become worse, then the pc feels relief. Whether this should be done before or after medical first aid, depends on the situation. There is no set command. What counts is the exact duplication of the harmful incident by acting it out precisely as it was, or, in the case of precluding a painful event such as a smallpox injection would be for a little child, playing it through beforehand as it is going to happen. In a Locational Assist the pc is made to touch things or to look at things until his confusion goes and he is back in touch with his environment. This is done on people who are under the influence of shock, alcohol or drugs. - Commands: “Look at the (object)!” or: “Touch the (object)!” - Pc does it. - “Thank you!” This one repeats till the pc looks and feels better. 22

In a Touch Assist the tips of the pc’s toes and fingers are touched in a left-right symmetrical sequence. (Left thumb - right thumb - left forefinger - right forefinger - etc.) In the same way, going upwards, one touches points alongside his spine (the width of one hand away on either side) and around the crown of his head. Then one works one’s way down along the same route and starts all over again. Usually one does it about a dozen times before any betterment can be expected. The pc keeps his eyes closed all the while. A Touch Assist must be done for a long time and for some consecutive days, to have a good and lasting result. It relieves chronic or acute somatics, colds, headaches, etc. It can have quite startling results not necessarily to be expected from such a simple procedure. - Commands: “Feel my finger!” - Pc: “Hm” . _ “Thank you!” - And so on. (See the “Volunteer Minister’s Handbook” [17] .) ”BOOK ONE” AUDITING Book One auditing is the application of the techniques presented in the first of Hubbard’s books, “Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health”. This approach to the case is excellent for the person who arrives at your door in a state of great need or distress, as it goes right down to the source of his troubles without any need of prior instruction. It is a technique all by itself. It demands a special training course and appropriate experience in order to be done well. Quite in contrast to the rumors about it, Book One auditing is not easy. Certainly, one can be fairly sure to cause an impressive effect on someone by hitting on prenatal incidents or past lives even in his first session. Or by undoing a chronic disability or a psychosomatic illness. In that sense it is a “simple technique”, can be used as such, and is rightfully mentioned as part of this particular chapter. But that does not mean by far that one would be handling the case as a whole! That is just interesting, exciting, “oh wow!”, etc. Doing something for the pc consistently by means of raw Dianeticsbook auditing, handling his case bit by bit, taking him up to Clear, is immensely difficult. When you can do it, you have earned yourself the master’s degree. If done well, it’s the cream of all auditing . Why? Because you use no meter to tell you where the charge is and which way to go. You only rely on your observation and your judgment. Why did Hubbard invent all the other techniques? Because Book One is so dreadfully complex. Everything else is comparatively straightforward. Everything else added up and used right by instinct and intuition with no meter, would amount to what “Dianetics” demands of the auditor. This is not to discourage anyone it is just to explain why Book One auditing cannot be covered here . Anyone wishing to work with this technique is referred to DMSMH, Science of Survival and the very helpful bulletin “Standard Procedure” in Tech Vol.I, p.15. SELF ANALYSIS This type of auditing is extremely simple, good fun and surprisingly effective. It takes its name from a book called “Self Analysis” (published 1951) which provides a number of lists containing some 30 to 60 auditing questions each. Each question asks the pc to recall a certain incident, some of them pleasurable, some lightly unpleasant.

Self Analysis processes may appear too simple to be bothered with. They are not . They build up recall and confront ability and teach the pc to create a timetrack by finding earlier similar incidents. Running Self Analysis Lists usually is a very rewarding experience for both the auditor and the pc . This is particularly true for List 1, Pleasure Moments. To give an example of the command sequence and a few items: “Recall a time when you were happy.” Pc does so and tells the auditor briefly about it. Then: “Recall an earlier time when you were happy.” Pc does so. Then: “Recall the earliest time you can when you were happy.” Pc does so . This would complete one command cycle . The same sequence is used for the other items on the list, such as “when you finished constructing something”, “when life was cheerful”, when you ate something good”, “when you were kissed by someone you liked”, and further questions. Additionally, one asks the pc for specific sense perceptions such as sight, sound, color and motion. On each command cycle one particular perception is used, on the next command cycle another one, and so on. SESSION “ADMIN” “Admin”, derived from the word “administration”, simply means “the paperwork connected with a session”. The session with simple techniques has the same form that is being used generally: 1.”This is the session!” 2.The process is run to a win or to an EP. 3.”End of session!”. In contrast to sessions with the E-meter, the auditor is not expected to write during the session. He writes his summary session report afterwards or in a break. It contains for each process when it was started and when it was ended, indicators of the pc during the process, and his origination’s and cognition’s. On a separate sheet which is stapled on top of the summary report, you add your comments and your suggestions for the next session, usually no more than “carry on with the process to EP”, or: “next process” - depending on how far you got with the pc. This is all the admin you need to do. (In metered auditing there is more of it.) EMPHASIS ON TRAINING Once the new pc has had a few sessions and a few wins he will feel at home with this new procedure of auditing. He should now do a TRs-course to increase his confront. As well he should clear some basic technical and philosophical concepts as covered in Part Two of the previous volume. This balance of auditing and training will increase his knowledge, responsibility and control (KRC) regarding the handling of his case. The pc must understand that he has not come to a party of “beautiful people” who have nothing better to do than patting his hands, but to a place where he can learn to help himself . “Be cause ! “ is the motto.

The Auditor’s Tools: B) Objective Processes GENERAL DESCRIPTION Auditing processes which make the pc look at his timetrack and his mental image pictures, are called subjective processes. In contrast to that, when he is running objective processes, the pc is asked to look at or do something with the actual objects in his environment . The command to look at or do something with the object in question is not given only once but repeatedly. It’s a repetitive process. This way, restimulation occurs. An example: pc and auditor sit on two chairs opposite each other with the auditor’s knees closing the pc’s knees in. Their hands rest on their (own) thighs. The auditor says: “Give me that hand” . Pc gives the auditor his right hand. The auditor says “Thank you” and uses his left hand to put the pc’s right hand gently back on his thigh and repeats the whole cycle. The commands are given very fast and at a fairly even speed. This is run for some hours. (This process is called “CCH 1”.)The pc will display all sorts of mechanisms and mental circuits. He will go down the tonescale and up again, he may go unconscious (deep sleep) and wake up again, until finally the EP occurs. It is simply: no further restimulation possible. The pc does the process with enthusiasm and has no attention on time at all. He could continue it for hours without any effort. Another example of an objective process is Opening Procedure by Duplication. It goes like this: Pc and auditor walk up and down between two tables or chairs on one of them there is a book, on the other a bottle. Commands: “Look at that book!” - pc looks - “Thank you ! “ - “Walk over to it ! “ - they walk over - “Thank you!” - “Pick it up!” - pc does - “Thank you!” “What’s it’s color?”/”What’s it’s temperature?”/”What’s it’s weight?” - pc answers each time as truthfully as he can and auditor acknowledges each time with a “Thank you!” - “Put it down in exactly the same place!” - “Thank you!” - “Look at that bottle!” - etc. Again, this is done for hours. The pc will try to stay in present time but will invariably doze off. The most marvelous phenomena will occur until the pc- after ten, thirty or fifty hours, spread out over a number of sessions - has run out all disagreements with monotonous and nonsensical activities and can do it as brightly as the morning sun without any attention on a time limit at all. He will feel that there won’t be anything to irritate him further in doing this particular activity, that there won’t be anything left in his bank which might get stirred up to distract him. Now he is “through” the process. -Transferring this result to life, one would expect that the pc, regarding his various activities, does not get sidetracked by his bank any longer. Apart from the few processes mentioned here as examples, there are quite a lot more. One could put them in three categories: First: Processes based on the principle of Reach and Withdraw. They follow the simple pattern: “Touch the (object) ! “ - “Thank you!” - “Let go of the (object)!” - “Thank you!” - Etc. (As well, depending on circumstances: “Look at the (object)!” “Thank you!” - “Look away!” “Thank you!” - Etc.) Used with reference to objects, places or people the pc has trouble confronting (as manifested by shyness, repulsion, panic, etc.), they will turn on his symptoms quite 25

vehemently to start with. Later the reaction will subside and vanish, to be replaced by positive realizations. Second: Processes which “crack” the case, such as the ones mentioned, i.e. CCH 1 and Opening Procedure By Duplication. Third: Processes serving to increase one’s range of ability and awareness. They are in actual fact to be classed as learning processes. They are run in the repetitive style as well, but in contrast to the previous category, in a very considerate and observant manner. (There will be some examples of them in the course of the text.) In auditing objectives you will see the pc going foggy, having misemotions, sensations and somatics. How come objectives can restimulate bank? After all, the reactive mind consists of locks, secondaries, engrams, of masses and significance’s (postulates) - how can you get it restimulated by having the pc repeatedly touch that wall, let go of that wall, touch that wall, let go of that wall; over and over and over again? (This would be an example of a Reach and withdraw process first category above.) It is not necessarily the case that the object used in the process (i.e. the wall, the auditor’s hand, the book, the bottle) is acting as a restimulator. The incidents restimulated may not contain any of these things. So how come there can be a key-in? The secret lies in the repetitiveness of the action. It’s the repetitiveness itself which causes the restimulation! With objectives you are addressing circuits. All engrams contain circuits. That’s because all engrams contain 2nd postulates: either someone said something and the pc picked it up and agreed to it, or - even if nobody said anything in the whole incident - he made a succumb-postulate himself. These postulates go unconsciously round and round “in the pc’s head” like a circuit, and determine his behavior. The constant repetition of the auditing command in an objective process restimulates these circuits. The auditor acts exactly as the circuit does: he keeps repeating the same command. (As these mental circuits keep going continually, they are also called automaticities.) All 2nd postulates follow the pattern of: “I don’t want to do it any more; I won’t do it any more; I can’t do it any more. ”This is exactly what is being restimulated by the continuously repeated auditing command - plus the interconnected engrams and GPMs with all their misemotions and pains. Now that we know how restimulation occurs (by repetition) and what is being restimulated (2nd postulates), we may ask what is the difference compared to subjective processes. There as well you have the repetitive style there as well you are dealing with postulates. So what is special about the objectives? It is that they approach the case from the angle of control. Each thetan loves to be in control; he likes to be at cause over his outflow of particles, i.e. over his communication. To him, outflow is nobler than inflow. Now, when he encounters a stop, when an intention is stronger than his and an obstacle bigger than him, when his body gets smashed - there he is being controlled, there he must permit the inflow despite his attempts to control it. Therefore he musters all his strength in order to control the overwhelming power, puts energies, masses and postulates against it. But, when he does not undo these energies, masses and postulates after the danger has passed, they remain in the form of a ridge, of a circuit . With the result that the circuit starts controlling the thetan himself firstly, 26

because it is unconscious, and secondly, restimulatable. The situation of then is “forever now” - as soon as it is restimulated. The thetan reacts to what he himself has created. He controls compulsively. By giving the same command repetitively the auditor takes control of the pc’s actions and at the same time asks him to take over and run his own control. This of course gets the pc in conflict with his circuits. By trying to take control himself, the pc restimulates all the circuits to which he has delegated his control. As a result, the circuits start playing up and in turn control him. It’s the old principle of getting the thetan to consciously do what he is already doing reactively which invariably leads to introversion. (See also “Mimicry”, Tech Dict.) So the processes used are convenient ways to address this tendency, with only general significance in the choice of subjects. One can certainly devise processes using pc-specific objects in certain cases. Reach-and Withdraw processes are very adaptable in this respect. A DIGRESSION ON HYPNOSIS To get another angle on this, consider hypnotism. That suggestible people are manipulated is the basis of the main criticism of scientology, so this might be an opportunity to clarify this point. How does hypnosis work? The subject, at the insistence of the hypnotist, enters an unquestioning state of mind and gives over control to him, at a deep or shallow level. He will behave as commanded. Even afterwards, awakened, he will still execute “post-hypnotic commands”, i.e. commands given during the trance to be executed after it is over. The state of mind where these commands persist, unsuspected and unviewed, is exactly what you would call “bank” in scientology. If force or pain. especially when sufficient to cause heavy unconsciousness - as in an engram or a GPM - prevent review and discharge of the commands, then they will continue to operate. In hypnotherapy the suggestions of the hypnotist are designed to override the negative succumb-postulates with positive ones, which may happen to appear similar to the original 1st postulates. This can of course be somewhat effective, though without removing the underlying 2nd postulates the results are unlikely to be lasting. (The same could be said in criticism of what is called “positive thinking”.) Life can be hypnotic. Life situations can force the person to abandon his own conscious control and agree with the commands of the situation, the environment, other people or entities. He changes his state of mind, against his will, and even it is only for an instant it can afterwards act back on him, just like the post-hypnotic suggestion. An individual who has been heavily oppressed by life - and undoubtedly scientology does attract such people - is likely to be easily hypnotized, as he may be in an almost continuous light trance anyway, imposed on him by external forces. So can be readily manipulated or taken advantage of. Unfortunately such has happened in the CofS, though not necessarily from evilintentionedness - which is the accusation. It is simply a shared group dramatization which people in all walks of life are susceptible to. Objective processes in the manner described here, undo all these instants, heavy or light, without the need to identify specific incidents. They run them out by restimulating the outside control factor which the pc is identified with. The consequence is like an awakening and the pc becomes far less hypnotizable by life. 27

PROCEDURE The introversion mentioned may go to the extreme of the pc being shaken by a fit of grief and tears, an anger tantrum, or by his losing consciousness partially or fully. Naturally, the auditor doesn’t allow his pc to get cowed back into agreement with his circuits but keeps giving the command - even to the point of bypassing the thetan and moving his body around for him. Supported by the auditor, the pc starts fighting his circuits. They turn on heavier than usual and either gradually or suddenly release all of their remaining components: unconsciousness, pain, misemotion - the sort of stuff one would expect to be contained in an engram. The pc dramatizes them, usually without getting any pictures. Suddenly it goes wham! - and a whole big chunk of mass just blows away. Do adjust your speed to that of the pc whilst he is dramatizing. Don’t continue mechanically like a robot! You would either slow him down or urge him on. Certainly, in order to get him into a dramatization, you must work evenly and steadily. But once he is in something, care and attentiveness must be applied. This is your non-verbal way to stay in communication with the pc and keep the ARC up. And another thing: let him talk when he wants to talk! Not only when he has a final realization, but as well when he sees pictures or re-lives incidents of the past. This does not occur all too often with objective processes as the bank shows itself in the form of masses only. But when it happens: let him finish talking, acknowledge him, carry on. Do not cut him short - but do not switch over to subjective auditing either, trying to continue the objective process as a recall process. What’s right here, is entirely a matter of tact and feeling. Very subtle. Technically speaking: it’s your TR-4 which will save the situation. As you go along with your process, you will observe that the effects it produces grow less and less. To start with, there will be heavy masses, later misemotions, finally “weird thoughts” which of course are 2nd postulates. The process is “running flat”. And then the EP will occur: the pc beams and thinks it is perfectly all right to continue the process forever. So what has happened here? -The pc who has initially resisted the inflowing control and communication from the auditor and from his GPMs, can now tolerate them and permit them to “pass through him” . Instead of fighting them, he can have them. His Havingness has come up in both senses of the definition: as “ARC with a something-ness”, i.e. the environment which he now perceives with greater clarity and friendliness than ever before; and as “ARC with a nothingness”, i.e. the absence of circuits in the bank. He can have it that there is nothing where just before there still was something, and he does not feel insecure because of it. The bank - at least the section restimulated here - has no more power over him; his environment cannot find any more “buttons” on him to push. This development from control via communication to Havingness has lent its name to a number of objective processes: they are called CCHs, from Control-Communication-Havingness. CCH 1, the process mentioned, is usually done in combination with CCH 2, 3 and 4. Here is the full procedure of CCH 1-4:

CCH 1: As described. Run it to a change (pc keys something in) and continue until the pc is back up to normal or better. When it seems to be flat from the start (no apparent change), do run it for about half an hour to ascertain that there really is no change. (It may go flat at any point on the tone scale. When it goes flat below 3 .0, it is not the EP but just a momentary flat point . )Then go to CCH 2. Experience shows that one should run CCH 1 at a given speed with a definite and unchanging rhythm in order to cause a restimulation, and then keep this speed until the restimulation ceases. Change of speed seems to play a role. The pc may not be affected at all when you do it fast, then you change to slow, and within seconds he slumbers away. Or vice versa. Therefore make sure to change your tempo occasionally, whenever things seem to be flat and uneventful. But don’t get jumpy! Run each tempo for at least 10 minutes before you change. CCH 2: Auditor and pc walk up and down between two opposing walls in a room. Commands: “Look at that wall!” - “Thank you!” -Walk over to that wall!” - “Thank you!” “Touch that wall!” - “Thank you!” - “Turn around!” - “Thank you!” “Look at that wall!” -And so on, from the begining. The theory regarding the mechanism of restimulation for CCH 2 is the same as for CCH 1. Both are control processes of the category two mentioned above. CCH 2 is lighter on the pc as it allows him more choices than CCH 1. Run it to a change and through it if there is no change, run it for at least 20 minutes just to make sure . Then go to CCH 3. CCH 3: Pc and auditor sit on two chairs opposite each other, like in CCH 1. The auditor holds out his hands shoulder-high, palms out to the pc; the pc does the same; their palms touch midway between them. Commands: “I am going to do a motion with my right hand. You follow it. Then I’ll do the same motion with my left hand; this time you contribute to the motion, or even lead it. This depends on how well you duplicated the first motion on the right hand side.” -The auditor does a motion with his right hand, then with his left hand. The pc’s palms stay on his palms all the while . Nothing is being said. Then he asks: “Did you follow the motion on the one side? Did you contribute to it on the other side?” - Depending on the pc’s answer he has to determine whether he should repeat the same motion, make a simpler one or a more difficult one. This, as you see, is not a heavy control process, but a communication process. It is meant to enhance abilities and therefore belongs to category three above. Here the auditor does not rotely repeat the same command to check if it evokes masses, energies and unconsciousness in the pc; quite the contrary, he is in close communication with the pc, he sets a certain gradient of difficulty to see if the pc can do it and lowers or heightens his standards according to the pc’s performance. The auditor gives the command as much as is needed and in different ways; his main concern is keeping a lively commline with the pc. It is all done in the spirit of team work. CCH 3 has to do with duplication and understanding. The pc has to duplicate and understand the motion shown to him by the auditor on the one side, in order to be able to repeat it by himself or even contribute to the repetition, on the other side. When the auditor transfers his own motion from the right side to the left in order to repeat it there, this repetition is done symmetrically. When he has done a motion to the right with his right hand, he will do the same motion to the left with his left hand.

Gradients of difficulty are established by a) the number of corners, or changes, a motion has; b) speed of the motion; c) distance between the hands of the two. (They don’t have to touch all the time.) The whole purpose is to make the pc feel certain, on a gradient of difficulty, concerning his ability to duplicate and repeat a particular motion. When the pc has a win on this gradient - which presupposes that he had to do some work on it - the auditor goes on to CCH 4. CCH 4: This process follows the same theory as CCH 3. It is a communication process; yet in contrast to CCH 3 it allows the pc more creative self-determinism. There is no set command at all. Auditor and pc sit opposite each other as in CCH 3. The auditor has a book in his hand and makes a motion with this book, a simple one to start with. The motion occurs on a vertical plane midway between auditor and pc. Then he hands the book to the pc and asks him to do the same motion all by himself - not mirror-image-wise, but the same motion. Taking the viewpoint of the book, the book must travel through the same space both times. Just as in CCH 3, the auditor has the determine the right gradient of difficulty, repeat the motion he just did until the pc has duplicated and executed it well, lower or heighten his standards if it proved too difficult or too easy for the pc. In both CCH 3 and 4 the auditor needs good observation and good judgment. The sort of restimulation likely to occur on CCH 3 and 4 is different from CCH 1 and 2. You are not going to see heavy masses and energies, but grief discharges, general misemotions, and realizations about suppressive teaching strategies of parents and teachers. The whole subject of “learning through punishment” gets dragged up out of the depths of the pc’s mind. You will observe the pc going up the tonescale more and more as you progress from CCH 1 to CCH 4. Each CCH will run shorter than the previous one; CCH 4 is quite often done for some minutes only. Now, with the pc all bright and shiny after CCH 4, the auditor says: “Now let’s see if you can do CCH 1 with the same lightness and keep it all the way through.” -And now they are back to work. CCH 1-4 is considered one process, consisting of four parts . The EP, by the way, is on CCH 1, because of all the CCHs it is the hardest for keeping one’s spirits high without an effort. END PHENOMENON There is the classical objectives EP of “pc going exterior”. This stems from the time when Hubbard was intensely attempting to make OTs - which did not work in this way, as we have seen in Volume 1. The experience does occur off and on, but is of very short duration only. Hence exteriorization cannot be considered a final EP but merely a nice experience - good enough to take a break. Look at the demands of life and work: one is expected to repeat the same actions daily, year in, year out; who cares if one goes exterior or not? Even if exterior one is expected to do one’s job. They are not even giving you a break for it. Nobody wants to know if you happen to be inside or outside your body; what counts, are your products. For a thetan in good shape it is quite a normal thing to operate from an exterior viewpoint. Therefore, regarding our process, only one question is of importance: What happens when you carry on after the break or the next day? Is the process flat (does it produce any more change) or 30

not? Can the pc - exterior or not - execute the command for the length of time set, or does the bank get in his way? The senior EP to be had from objectives (beyond going exterior) therefore is a demonstration of competence: the pc can prove to the auditor that he is able to repeat the same action unlimitedly without getting bothered by any circuits, and can do so with full interest and in the best of spirits - for the sole reason that he has decided to do so ! He is fully able and prepared to run something as “nonsensical” as “Give me that hand” for another 25 hours, just because it’s fun! As the pc is reaching his EP, his level of Havingness is so high that he can communicate without any reservations. Whether with a terminal or without, whether with sense or without - it is all the same to him. You may consider this a bit odd or even impossible - but if you think about it, little children do exactly that. They are constantly in the best of communication; with or without a terminal, with or without making sense. Although one could not take them as models for human behavior in general, they do serve as a good example for the concept of high Havingness. Given this EP it is obviously nonsense to “check CCHs on the meter” to see if the are charged! You have to DO them with the pc for some hours before you can tell if they are flat or not. And when he is through you can tell by his performance and his indicators. One doesn’t need an E-meter to see that. WHO NEEDS OBJECTIVES? Objective processes are described in the book ‘ Creation of Human Ability” [13] and in Tech Vol.III, IVandV. At the time they were researched, they were thought to make people become Clear and OT, because they put the pc at control over his bank or made him go exterior. They probably served their purpose in some cases, but not in all of them. Therefore they came to be reduced in importance and play a different role today. They are an excellent way of making people find out what it means to have a bank, particularly those who are hung up in significance’s (empty words and meanings) and have lost the line to their own subjective certainty. You cannot run such people on subjective recall processes because they won’t tell you what they feel is true but instead try to ”figure out the right answer” . They cannot confront masses but only significance’s. They are afraid to experience things; they go on and on about their lives but don’t dive into the brutal details of a peculiar occurrence. All of which means that they are not well in-session. Such cases are “cracked” by objective processes, simply because they can’t predict what’s going to happen in the course of the auditing. They cannot “figure out the EP”, as they might attempt to do in a subjective process. Another type of case may have a button on control. They resist being controlled or compulsively control others and themselves. They have great benefits from objective processing. This is as well true for alcoholics and druggies, but again for a different reason: their ability to control and communicate is so broken down that they’ll never find a line into the bank. By means of objective processes they will begin to get in communication with their bank and with the environment as well.

Cases which are heavily out-of-valence respond well to CCH 1-4 in particular. Just get the idea that, with an out-of-valence case, you have not one person in front of you but several. The “chief thetan” is submerged by valences - which is why he cannot make decisions or finish cycles of action. When you give the command, you are talking to a group of people, as it were . They will work it out between themselves which way they are going to execute the command if they are going to do it at all. It may turn into quite a fight. In the end, the “chief thetan” - your pc - wins and is in control. Objectives may certainly be done on anyone, which is not to say that they bite on everyone. There is nothing wrong with trying, though. Some cases respond extremely well to them, others needing a different approach - just feel indifferent. A pc whose objectives aren’t in, is hard to audit subjectively as he tends to go effect of the bank. He cross-associates, pulls in bank, isn’t sure what’s real and what isn’t, thinks he’s imagining it all, figures about the session after it’s over and gets into trouble, and so on. This is of no use when you audit subjective processes. There you want a pc who is in causative control over his bank, who can look at one thing at a time, blow it, have a win; get the next bit restimulated, look at it, blow it, have a win, etc. Clean cycles of action. If he can’t do that, he’ll need an objectives rundown. To finish off it should be mentioned that you have to be prepared for anything with regard to the duration of objective processes - on CCH 1-4 for example, anything between 15 and 150 hours is possible. It takes as long as it takes. INSTRUCTIONS TO THE PC Make sure that the pc understands the concepts and the procedures of objective processes very well, and that he is willing to do them. This is true for all auditing but even more so for objectives as they don’t make sense at all at first glance - unless they are explained well. The pc will not be in session as long as objective processes seem strange and peculiar to him. Clear the words and the concept of C-C-H (control-communication-havingness), and of objective versus subjective auditing. Then clarify the mechanics of restimulation brought about by them. When the pc has understood the pertinent mechanisms you can tell him: “Now let’s see if you can run this process for half an hour without keying anything in”. -You will have his full interest and cooperation as the pc feels challenged personally such as he would in sports, for example. Get him to agree to a “test stretch” for the EP. But don’t do it below half an hour. The higher you put it, the cleaner the pc will come out. But he may feel it’s overwhelming or unrealistic when you ask him to do it for two hours. Do it gradiently, step by step. There will be the point when he knows with certainty that he could continue forever. That is the EP. (For reference, see BTB 30 Sept 1971 RA, “Model Session for CCH I-IV”; Ability Mag.34, “Havingness”, in Tech Vol.II; the booklet “Scientology Clear Procedure”, 1957; “Creation of Human Ability”; all entries on “objectives” and “CCHs” in the index of Tech Vol.X.)

The Auditor's Tools: C) Postulate Auditing INTRODUCTION In subjective auditing, done by recalling incidents on the time track, the main target of the auditor is the well-aimed removal of 2nd postulates so that 1st postulates may be either executed or canceled. This was explained in the philosophical discussion in Part Two. The life of man, or better, the games of a thetan, are determined by postulates. They, however, are not all his own. Foreign-made entities and the Genetic Entity put their pictures, charges and postulates into the head of the unaware thetan - and drive him “out of valence”. He takes on valences foreign to him; his own valence is submerged. Postulate Auditing is a blend, a condensation, of various techniques Hubbard developed over the years (as the expert will immediately notice). They are going to be covered one after the other in detail. It is very safe to use for beginners and may take them a long way in handling the cases of their friends or family. The expert will find it provides a very smooth handling for his “rough cases”. It can be done without an E-meter and is presented here with that intention. Those familiar with the E-meter may of course use it as the meter makes for precision and session speed. The procedure is the same. Remarks addressed to meter users may be ignored by others. (These will be “F/N” and “TA”. They are explained in the chapter on the E-meter.) FINDING SOMETHING TO AUDIT The first thing one would have to do in auditing, is finding out what’s bothering the pc. What he tells you is called an item. Any item, to be auditable, must have the pc’s interest - and a read on the meter. Those two conditions must be fulfilled for a successful session to occur. You don’t audit items the pc isn’t interested in, or non-reading ones. An item is never just an observation of the environment. “It’s raining” is not an item (even when it reads), not in this way of saying it. An item contains the emotional involvement of the pc in the way it’s stated and has the form of an Attitude, Emotion, Sensation or Pain (AESP). So what’s wrong with rain? “Too much rain is unhealthy. “This is an item. It has the form of an attitude, i.e. a thought or postulate about life. Or: “It makes me sad”. This is an item because it contains an emotion. Or: “When it rains I always get a foggy head” - a sensation. Or: “My bones ache when it rains” - a pain. An item does not have to be defined as narrowly as just described, though. After all, there are often situations which one just generally feels unhappy about. To split them up in AESPs would not do them any justice. Examples would be: “the death of my grandmother”, “I lost my job”, “my bronchitis”. When someone is full of pain and sorrow about his mishap, one should allow him first of all to just talk it through. Whilst he is talking one will see the complexity of the situation fall apart, and single AESPs will emerge all by themselves. These one should note down and take them up later. 33

A valid item would always affect the pc as a misemotion, i.e. it would be stated at 2.0 on the tonescale or below. All statements made below 2.0 indicate that a 2nd postulate has been restimulated. Rule of thumb: 1st postulate: reach, start of a game, above 2.0 on the tonescale. 2nd postulate: withdraw, stop, below 2.0. THE TECHNIQUE OF LOCK-SCANNING Lock-scanning is the lightest way of entering a case. Skillfully applied, it will get the pc down to the secondary, the engram. and finally the postulate. So lock-scanning may not only produce a key-out but even a full erasure. As one is always working right in the pc’s center of attention, he usually is super interested in the action and very much in session. Here is a brief sketch of this method: the pc is afraid of horses. Referring to the section above, this would be a good example for a generally upsetting situation. It is not a very precisely defined AESP-item. Never the less it is a valid one, because it is situated below 2.0 on the tonescale and the pc would like to do away with it. So to start with, the auditor asks him for the earliest time the pc can easily recall when he was afraid of horses, gets the answer and then has the pc recall all later times when he was afraid of horses, up to present time (PT). Then the auditor asks for the earliest time available now, gets the answer and again runs all later locks to PT. And again. And again. And again. Always the same procedure. On each run through the pc will drop some of the locks of the previous runs and come up with new locks, or new details of locks already mentioned. Enturbulated theta is converted into free theta. More attention units and more confront power are available for use. Consequently moments of heavier restimulation will appear, simply because the pc can confront them now. He will contact secondaries. More enturbulated theta is converted into free theta; confront power increases even more. Now, as you continue your lock-scanning, the thetan will “fall” into the engram. When all later locks and secondaries are cleaned off and the basic engram is left all by itself, the pc will be able to run it as easily as a cat lapping up warm milk. You always and unvaryingly stick to your earliest-to-PT routine. This applies to running the basic incident, too . You can immediately tell what the basic is: it’s one of the times the pc has put a stop on his 1st postulate by making a 2nd postulate. This usually occurs in the context of an engram or an implant. Get the beginning the pc can find now, run through to its end, then scan locks to PT. Go again to the basic, see if there is an earlier beginning in the incident, run the whole incident through to its end, scan locks to PT. Soon the pc’s interest will be totally off the later locks; he’s now fully ready to use all of his free attention and confront the basic incident (engram/implant). Now you go earlier beginning-to-end, earlier-beginning-to-end, and again, and again, till he has found the beginning of the incident. And along with this he will come up with the postulate which has kept the basic incident and the whole chain in place. Technically speaking, the auditor changed from lock scanning to “ narrative style”. The difference is that in lock-scanning a whole chain of incidents is run through (from its earliest beginning to present time), whereas in narrative style it is only a single one. The pc “narrates” the content of this particular incident from its earliest beginning to its end.

During both the lock-scanning and the narrative part, the original, very generally worded item “fear of horses” will break up into various AESP-items. In context with the incidents the pc tells, further attitudes, emotions, physical sensations and pains in context with horses will be mentioned. When these utterances are accompanied by corresponding indicators and a read on the meter, the auditor must note them down. They will get taken up later one by one. NARRATIVE STYLE As we just saw: the auditing procedure where you have the pc tell you an incident from beginning to end, again and again and again, is called “narrative style”. It helps the pc to bring order into the chaos of the incident. When he starts out he will just see a glimpse of it which may be at its end or somewhere in the middle. By asking the pc to find the earliest possible beginning and to tell the whole story from there to the end, the auditor assists the pc to gradually raise his confront of the incident. Finally he will see it in all details. He may have to run it through twenty or thirty times, though! Each time through, known data won’t get mentioned again and new data, so far unknown, will appear. There is one potential danger in narrative style: the pc may start narrating the incident “by memory?’. He will start mocking it up again! This is not what you want. To avoid it, you must explain very clearly to the pc what he ought to do. It’s like he was watching a TV screen which the auditor can’t see. So the pc must tell the auditor what he sees on the screen, i.e. what he sees now while the action is happening, not what he saw the last time through the incident. (What the pc “sees” is not limited to his visual impressions only, but refers to 54 further sense perceptics as well! [1]) Only what he sees now is of importance. “I see a man. He walks into a room. From the left; there is a door. He stops by the table. It’s dark and cold. I am afraid. Etc.” This way the auditor can tell how the pc is moving from the level of action to the levels of emotion and postulate. He can see the shift of importance’s. And he can see how the incident is gradually erasing and thus recognize when to stop. When the pc starts talking “about” the incident instead of describing what he sees, he will be beginning to put something there where there is actually nothing. This is a problem common to all thetans. It is so much easier to acknowledge that there is something than to acknowledge that there is nothing! Failing to accept that there is nothing, the pc will either put something there or pull in some other engram or picture, just so that he has something to talk about. But: this will go along with bad indicators, such as glumness, slowness, unavailability of data, and on the meter it will produce a sticky needle and finally a high and very stuck TA. Developing an awareness of when a process is complete, when the EP has been reached, and so when to stop, is one of the vitally important points of learning to audit. FINDING THE POSTULATE IN THE INCIDENT The pc will run through his incidents as described by a scale called “Points of Case Address” [1]. It goes (upwards): matter effort - emotion - reason - aesthetics. To start with, the pc will be busy with the level of effort and counter-effort. He’ll be talking about matter, energy, space, time and action. When this goes flat and he goes through the incident again (and again and again), he picks out the emotions: that’s the next level up. After that has gone flat the auditor sends him through again (and again and again) and the decisions and postulates made during the incident become available. There are several of them, usually, not just one. This is the level of “reason” on 35

the scale. On this level the pc will encounter (amongst others) the crucial 2nd postulate, recognize it for what it is and as-is it. That being done he’ll marvel at the whole incident, how it could have happened to him, how he could have made such a postulate, how the events of the incident interrelate with the actions in his later life - he is moving up to the level of aesthetics. “Now isn’t that something! Wow! Would you believe it!” Aesthetics. Admiration (Factors 14 and 29) - Now, the whole incident is erased. Not only in the basic incident but in locks as well, the pc will voice postulates. They have the form of decisions regarding a state of being, doing or having. They describe precisely the state the pc is habitually in. His chronic state of being, doing and having, both physically and mentally, is determined by the sum of his own postulates and decisions, no matter if they are sane or aberrated. Those voiced in context with a lock, secondary or engram are of course aberrated ones. They are usually worded in an imperative way. Examples: “I don’t know what they want!”; “It doesn’t work!”; “It can’t be!”; “I cut all my feelings off.”; “I’m happy it’s over.”; “I can’t reach it.”; “I just never manage . “; “It kills me” . They often go along with a startled expression or a blush on the pc’s face, with him suddenly getting agitated, assertive or possibly tearful - and with a read on the meter. The auditor must keep his ears open for such utterances and note them down verbatim as they come . They play a crucial role in really cleaning up the pc’s case when they are run in the next step, by repeater technique. REPEATER TECHNIQUE AND HOW TO DEAL WITH BASIC INCIDENTS A normal session would run like this: pc has a complaint. Its either an attitude, emotion, sensation or pain (AESP). Let us say he has a “burning sensation in the lungs”. This is followed down the track by lock-scanning and narrative technique. The pc finds a beginning of his complaint at the age of three and runs through all locks several times, until they get really “thin” . The auditor, every time he returns the pc to the beginning of the chain, makes sure to ask if there is an earlier beginning to this complaint. Suddenly a picture shows up which the pc can’t put anywhere in this lifetime. They follow it up and find out he was caught in a burning house, couldn’t get out and burnt to death. It was in 1651. The postulate found is: “I’m always the victim”. The incident erases, the pc looks good and bright, on the meter there is an F/N. What is the auditor going to do when the pc does not “fall into the engram”? Take a variation of the example before: The complaint (burning sensation in the lungs) is traced down to childhood. The pc is twelve years old, sits by the table and watches with terror as his parents have a bad fight. In the back there is a fire going in the fireplace. Nothing earlier, no engram. Lockscanning is done till all locks are erased; the basic incident (the fight) is gone through in narrative style; the pc voices the postulate: “I’m always the victim”. The incident erases, pc is happy, F/N . This was not an engram . It was a heavy lock, at best a secondary (a moment when the pc felt threatened by a loss, i.e. that of his parents.) There is something foul here, obviously. How can a severe 2nd postulate be made under circumstances not worse than a light secondary? Didn’t we learn that it takes a lot of force (engram/ implant) to stop a thetan sufficiently so that he makes a 2nd postulate? How does all this fit in together? Answer: the engram we are looking for is not on the pc’s track, but on that of an 36

entity. It was restimulated by the open fire in the fireplace which formed part of the fighting incident, and thereupon locked itself up with the pc. This was only possible, because the pc was due to the quarrel between his parents - emotionally troubled and less alert than usual. Being down on the tonescale is the prerequisite for a key-in. In the first example above, the pc found a basic on his own track: 1651, the burning house. This is the moment the 2nd postulate was made, and it was made by himself. We know by theory that there cannot be anything earlier than that, so it is an absolute basic. In the second example, the pc found a basic, too: the fight between the parents. As there was nothing earlier, it was - to the best of the pc’s knowledge - a basic it could be erased. Yet it was a basic relative to the pcs track only! As the absolute basic must be an engram or an implant, but was not to be found on the pc’s time track in the second example, it must be on that of an entity. The restimulators prevalent during the quarrel between the pc’s parents caused this entity to awaken, connect up with the pc and pour its postulate over him. This is a relative basic. It doesn’t matter if this was the first time a connection was made, or if it was an old connection with an entity which had been dormant in the meantime. Speaking in technical terms, it is simply a lock. In the first example, the absolute basic was on the time track of the pc. In the second one, the relative basic was found on the pc’s time track, the absolute basic on that of an entity. When it cannot be found on the pc’s track it has to be on that of an entity there is no other option. This is proven by the phenomena one gets with repeater tech. It is applied after the basic has been found and erased, be it a relative or an absolute basic. The postulates voiced by the pc are repeated by him, one after the other, in order to detect further incidents connected with them. “Repeater Technique: the repetition of a word or phrase in order to produce movement on the time track into an entheta area containing that word or phrase. (. . .) Repetition of such a phrase, over and over sucks the patient back down the track and into contact with an engram which contains it” [2]. Going back to example one, above: the auditor asks the pc to repeat “I’m always the victim” over and over again and tell him all incidents which get washed into view this way. The pc will find a few incidents on his own track when he used this postulate to make himself right in a situation, or to explain why he couldn’t cope with it. He gives them a fleeting glance and erases them. A clean-up action of ten minutes or so; all concerning his own time track. Now let’s look at example two: here as well the auditor asks the pc to repeat the postulate, but a lot more than in example one is caused: the absolute basic, on a different track than the pc’s, comes to view. It occurred in 1943 when a farmer burnt to his death in his barn. The pc knows this barn, still all black and ruined; he has seen it in his childhood. As he was born in 1944 he assumes that he must have been this farmer in his past life . The session gets stickier and stickier the more the pc finds out about this. The auditor asks him if this incident may possibly not be his own. The pc feels immediate relief. The auditor gives only the minimally required explanations; the bulk of them he saves up till after the session. The pc has now acknowledged to himself that he was not this farmer and that the action did not happen on his own track, and again the session goes as smooth as silk. The pc gets all details of the incident, finds the moment when the farmer made the postulate of “Why is it always me?”, and the incident erases. Note that the wording of the actual postulate found in the incident usually differs to some extent from the postulate the pc mentioned originally. Therefore care must be taken to get the exact postulate for each incident separately.

After this success the pc again repeats “I’m always the victim” and yet another incident is washed up! This time it is that of a woman being burnt at the stake, in 1532. Again the pc recognizes that it is not his own timetrack. After this incident is fully run the postulate of the woman is found: “I’m a victim of my good faith”. Pc cognites that he always had trouble trusting people. Again the postulate “I’m always the victim” is repeated; this time to no result. Pc smiles and is certain that there is nothing left in connection with this postulate and that it actually has no further power over him. (F/N on the meter.)The pc reports after a few weeks that the burning sensation in his lungs has not occurred any more, and that he finds himself more self-confident and outgoing in life. STICKY SESSIONS Sometimes it happens that sessions get slow and sticky after a while . Typical phenomena: pc uncertain about the exact content of the incident, can’t move back and forth on the track, has a stuck picture, sees nothing at all, starts seeing details which belong to other incidents, gets various incidents mixed up with each other. On the meter this is accompanied by a TA rising high and finally getting stuck. There are only four reasons for this: 1. The pc is working on an incident on his own timetrack and has not confronted certain parts of it yet. 2. A similar incident is concurrently in restimulation. It may be earlier or later on the timetrack. 3. An entity has been restimulated and is not recognized as such. Auditor and pc still assume that the incident is on the pc’s track; but this isn’t the case. It’s an incident on a different track. 4. Several entities are in restimulation at the same time. The session will get going again as soon as the correct reason has been found (Fac. 28 and Ax. 29). Handling for 1: When the pc cannot confront something it is advisable to run later similar incidents in order to reduce their charge and build up the confront power of the pc. Should there be no such incidents, there is no alternative to repeatedly running through the incident in question, until it has cleared up in all aspects. Handling for 2-4: Find the entities or incidents associated with the incident you are running and run them out, then return to the incident you originally started out from. Simply ask the pc for the various possibilities, when you hit upon the right one, he will brighten up immediately. STRIPPING VALENCES Situation: you have run your pc through an absolute basic on his own or someone else’s track, he finds his 2nd postulate - but has no full end phenomena. How come? Well, you ran it from the pc’s viewpoint only (if it happened on his own track), or from the viewpoint of the person to whom it happened (if it is from another’s track). Have the pc look around some more in the incident and you will find that he still has attention on some of the other people involved. Have him additionally run the incident from the viewpoint of these people, one by one; have him speak in the first person as if it had happened to him. Have him get each person’s postulate, too. This makes the pc go into that person’s valence knowingly. Doing so, he will disconnect from his identification with that person; the valence will break off him. Its power over 38

the pc could only exist as long as he went into the valence unknowingly. Strip one valence after the other off the pc. When the incident itself has been erased: run these valence postulates by repeater tech also! It will make the pc clean up all the times he was out of valence in this regard. There will be a marvelous EP. SUMMARY The basic idea of Postulate Auditing is to get straight down to the postulates which keep the case together. Such postulates were already given a lot of attention in “Dianetics” . There Hubbard asked the auditor to take mental notes of habitual utterances of the pc in or out of session, so as to get a key for “cracking his case”. Such utterances were termed “bouncers”, “denyers” (deny-ers), “misdirectors”, etc. in the Dianetics book. When they appear in session, the recall work done up to this point usually comes to a halt. To give an example of a normal Book One session: the pc has found an engram and goes several times through it from beginning to end, until it is emptied of all details and its whole charge is deflated - which means it has been erased. (This is the “narrative style”.) In contrast, when a session comes to a standstill, it may look like this: the pc narrates the contents of his engram and suddenly sees no more of it. He says: “There is nothing there!” However, as he doesn’t look as if he were through with it but appears to be stuck in the middle of an incident, the auditor assumes that this must be a ‘“denyer”. He has the pc repeat: “There is nothing there - there is nothing there - there is nothing there” - etc. All of a sudden the pc will get a picture of the incident when the postulate “There is nothing there” was made. As soon as this incident is erased, he can return to the engram that was left open before, and erase it as well. Technically speaking, the auditor changed over from “narrative style” to “repeater technique”, so as to follow a postulate down to its point of origin. Narrative style and repeater technique are two of the sources for Postulate Auditing. Another is that of lock-scanning, taken from “Science of Survival”. In “Dianetics” one was trying to get as directly as possible to the engram causing the pc’s trouble. The auditor would straight forwardly ask for it. The earlier, the better. When one got an incident this way, one would reduce its charge by having the pc describe it, and then look for earlier similar incidents. One threw the pc in at the deep end, so to speak, and had him wade in deeper and deeper. It could be quite a strain for him. Later, in “Science of Survival”, Hubbard revised and simplified this approach by having the pc run light moments of restimulation to begin with, moments when engrams “locked up” with the pc. Such moments were called “locks”. In contrast to engrams, these locks were not run earlier - earlier - earlier on the timetrack, but always from the earliest lock one happened to have found, to present time. Only then an earlier lock was looked for. This approach has the advantage of reducing all charge between the lock found and the present, before going earlier. Additionally, one never demands too much of the pc and he stays mentally and physically in good shape all along. Out of the combination of narrative style, repeater technique and lock-scanning, the four main parts of Postulate Auditing are derived: First part: You have the pc tell you what his difficulties are and get an item you can audit. Second part: You have the pc find the earliest beginning, the moment when his troubles really started. This chain of incidents (from the earliest to the present) is run through by

lockscanning till all later locks are erased and only the basic incident is left, usually an engram or implant. Third part: This basic incident is repeatedly run through narrative style until there is nothing left to say about it, until no further pictures are pressing in on the pc, until he can laugh about it. That is an erasure. Fourth part: All postulates the auditor took note of in the second and third part, are run with repeater technique. In the process of this, incidents will come into view when the pc tried to “prove” that he was unable to cope. (This relates them to Service Facsimiles). As well foreignmade incidents of entities or the GE will show up. Whatever their origin, each is run through in narrative style to erasure. The pc will come to differentiate more and more with regard to correct authorship, and correspondingly become “master in his own house”. In the end he may even go Clear. Postulate Auditing is built around the concept that the incidents of the reactive mind are cross-referenced and interwoven by means of postulates. (See A = A = A.) Entities of any description can only connect up with the pc if he has already succumb postulates in operation. By unconsciously using and habitually not-ising them, he creates mental mass, a chronic charge which free-floating entities can cling to. Which makes things worse, of course. Only by finding out who has done what, by assigning correct authorship, can the knot be disentangled eventually (Ax. 29, Fac.28). In the final analysis, it is the pc’s own responsibility what sort of case and what size case he has - and that he has one at all. The above reasoning explains why incidents found in the fourth part of the sequence (the auditing of postulates) are run by repeater technique instead of being followed up by going earlier similar. (“Is there an earlier similar incident?”) It’s because repeater technique will bring up the exact incident that is ready to be “plucked” . The mass backing up the picture is produced by a postulate you already know - it’s the one you are working with. So you don’t have to go E/S (earlier similar), because you are not - in the attempt to find a 2nd postulate - looking for a basic. You have the postulate already. By repeating it you wave it about like a piece of fly paper to find out which bit of mass (both home-made and foreign-made) is going to stick to it. And when you got one, you clean it up nicely and then you wave your fly paper about again, to see what else will to stick to it. And so on. After a while there won’t be any more bits of mass which are going to respond to that particular sort of fly paper, and you know the room is clean. No more flies of that kind. And then you pull out your next bit of fly paper, the next postulate, and start the process all over again. You are never interested in earlier similar flies. You are only concerned with that particular fly that just got stuck to your paper. THE PROCEDURE STEP BY STEP First part: 1.

Finding an item. “What do you want handled?” “What is bothering you?” (The pc will answer with a generally worded item or a specific AESP-item)

Second part: Scanning locks. 2.

“Recall the earliest time you can when you had (item)!” (Give the item exactly as it was worded).

“Tell me about it!” (Get as much time/place/form/event as the pc can give you easily.)

Instruction to the pc: “Tell me in the present tense as if you were reading it off a TV screen. Tell me all you can actually see or feel; no more, no less.” (Note: before giving the next command you may have to run through this particular incident a few times to reduce its charge if the pc demonstrates a lot of it. Cool it off first, then carry on towards PT. )

“Go to the next incident towards present time when you had (item) !”

Repeat 5 until pc is back in PT. (Encourage him to tell only what comes easily to him. No effort, please!)

“Is there an earlier time when you had (item)?”

Repeat 5 and 6. Instruct the pc: “Only tell me what’s on the screen now and do not add what you know from before. Don’t put it there again by memory. Just always tell me what you see and feel now”.

Repeat 7 and 8 until the pc has gone to the earliest time he can find. That is the basic, the beginning of the chain.

10.

Make the pc clean up all later locks by repeatedly running from basic to PT. Each time he will get some more data out of the basic. Keep it effortless. Don’t ever push him into the basic. During the steps 2-10, do watch out for further AESPs the pc may voice . They could be useful later on . Do not let it show in your behavior when he has said one. Just make sure that you write it down verbatim (and with the corresponding read on the meter.)

Third part: Running the basic incident. 11.

With all later locks gone, the basic is now free for inspection. Take the pc through it from beginning to end. Ask him each time if it possibly began earlier, then take him through again from the new beginning. Sooner or later he will find the exact beginning. (Only he knows that. He’ll brighten up when he has found it.)

12.

Have him go through the incident repeatedly until he has duplicated everything on the level of effort and action. Then the incident is “flat”, i.e. there is no more change. Be careful not to “plough the pc in” during these repetitions. Don’t have him dig in, run him through. The hazy or peculiar bits will clear up as the pc goes through the incident a few more times. Just make sure that he gets each time as 41

much time, place, form and event as is easily available. Don’t have him guess. Have him duplicate the incident. 13.

Now send the pc through on the level of emotion: “Now go through the incident again and tell me all the emotions you can pick up!” Give this command only when the pc has not come up with emotions all by himself. Have him run the incident repeatedly until it is flat regarding emotions.

14.

Now send him through on the level of thoughts, postulates, decisions. There will be several of them. “What decisions did you make during the incident; what thoughts did you have? “The 2nd postulate is the moment when the pc finally succumbed to the counter-intentions against him. Ask him specifically for it only if he does not volunteer the information. (Make a circle around each reading postulate, as you will come back to it later.)

15 .

Find the exact wording of the 2nd postulate. When the pc has found it he will have VGIs (and an F/N) . The incident will erase; the pc will not be interested in looking at it further.

Fourth part: Auditing postulates. 16.

Go through your worksheets and pick out all the postulates the pc has originated on his way to the EP. Write them on a separate sheet of paper. This is your “postulate list” .

17.

Explain to the pc that this step serves to restimulate and deactivate further incidents, in connection with the postulates he has voiced. Use repeater tech on the postulate with the most charge (biggest read). Ask him to repeat the postulate a dozen times (or so) on his own. It will either bite and trigger some incidents, or go flat and F/N. (Do this step even if there is no read on calling out the postulate. Remember that it did read when the pc mentioned it originally. You cannot be sure if it is as-ised unless you try heating it up by repeater technique.)

18.

Run each incident which comes up on a given postulate in narrative style, until it is erased. Some will erase at first glance, others will have to be run through a few (or many) times. Do follow the pc here. Don’t make the incident more important than it is to him naturally, particularly when it is part of his present life and can be dealt with in a few words. No pressure, please! Light incidents of the pc’s present life usually don’t F/N. The F/N generally occurs after a whole series of such light incidents; or after a heavy incident has been worked through and erased - be it the pc’s or that of an entity.

19.

Keep using repeater tech on the same postulate until the pc knows with certainty that there is absolutely nothing connected with this postulate any more . The postulate will F/N whilst the pc pronounces it! The pc will look very bright at this point. - On this step, many pc’s have great cognitions. They see how their life is

determined by a network of postulates which they hang on like a puppet on its strings. 20.

Now go back to your list of postulates, take them up one by one in the sequence of their charged-ness (read size) and audit them with steps 17-19.

21.

Then go back to step 1 and start the whole cycle again by asking the pc for a new item to work on. Or keep on working on the same item by taking up the AESPs incurred up to this point. Which decision you make, depends entirely on the pc’s interest. When his “fear of horses” has been handled with a single run through the steps 1-20 - marvelous. But when he is not quite so sure, you find your entry point through the AESPs already mentioned. (The “A’s i.e. the attitudes, you have actually handled already on the postulate-part of the sequence as all attitudes are basically postulates . )

Practical notes: To reduce an incident and finally erase it, you may have to run through it twenty to forty times. Don’t be impatient. It takes as long as it takes. Observe the pc. As long as he is coming up on the tonescale, everything is fine . When he is through, he will be genuinely cheerful. You’ll know it when you see it. Don’t get worried if each run through the incident brings up different data. It may change considerably as the pc keeps repeating it! The final version may be very much unlike the first version. The explanation for this phenomenon is given in the “Scale of Confront” [1]. On the fourth part, step 19: A dozen or more incidents may appear on a given postulate! Don’t worry: when there is nothing left there is nothing left, and the pc knows it. It is almost impossible to overrun this. Each session you do will be different, but underlying each variation there is the pattern of steps 1-19. So stick to the steps as closely as you can, but be prepared to be flexible so as not to impede the alive-ness of the session. SESSION BREAKS (This section addresses meter users in particular, but it is as well of general interest. It is about F/Ns and when to interrupt sessions without any risk.) An F/N at session start is usually not a must in Postulate Auditing. Particularly in the first session, at step 1, the pc has so much attention on his troubles that an F/N obviously cannot be expected. The whole cycle through the steps 1-19 may take several sessions, lasting between eight and fifteen hours, in some cases longer. When heavy engrams are contacted and many postulates voiced, it will naturally take longer than it would with a light case. Of course you will have to 43

interrupt the cycle now and then, to take a break or to end off for the day. The best moment for this is at the end of any of the major parts of the sequence. At times, however, it may have to be done at a less optimum point, for example when an incident was reduced but not erased, or a postulate was worked on with repeater technique and still is incomplete, i.e. no F/N on it yet. When you carry on after the break, you will naturally take the session up at the exact point where you ended off. So you cannot expect an F/N here either. You can absolutely rely on this: it goes on after the break or the next day, as if you never had interrupted the session. The case keeps quiet. It doesn’t run away in the meantime or restructure itself. What you are handling with the pc is so fundamental and has been stable for such a long time that it won’t change just in a few hours. Another case: Supposing you had erased an incident or de-activated a postulate and had had an F/N before the break, you would naturally expect an F/N at the start of the next session. And then you notice with dismay that there isn’t one! Don’t worry about it. Just carry on. What step follows next? Or: What postulate is next on your list? The F/N is suppressed by the fact that the next step or postulate is already keyed in . This is true in most cases. However, should there be a whole night or even several days between two sessions and should there be no F/N and even a high TA at the start of the next session, you would be well advised to ask the pc: “How have you been doing since your last session?” He will tell you. If he gives you a well-reading item which is entirely different from what you would have expected according to your notes, you do take the new item up. Work it through and then return to the point on your program where you left off, and continue with your next auditing step, the next postulate on your list, or a new item (step 1). Usually, though, whatever happened during the break will have to do with the next auditing step you would have done anyway; you’ll have no problem recognizing this. (In one case the pc was off for two full years but the auditing could continue as if the last session had only been yesterday.) You cannot audit against the bank but only with it, and with the willingness of the pc to confront it. Follow the direction the attention of the pc takes; pick up what is available next . When it reads it is offering itself to be taken up. This way you find your entry point into the bank quite effortlessly. Remember that the auditor first listens and only then computes. Never make a million computations about a case and then sit down to audit something that isn’t really there . You would risk projecting your own case, or that of another, on the case of the pc. This would violate point 1 and 21 of the Auditor’s Code. There may be cycles within cycles within cycles. This does happen occasionally. But never leave an open cycle incomplete! You’ll plough your pc under this way, and yourself along with it. Therefore: take good notes - particularly of the exact wording of reading items and postulates - and keep your worksheets tidy. This way you won’t lose sight of where you were coming from and where you are going to. (References: all HCOBs on R3RA and on Dianetics, see index of Tech Vol.X-XII. For lockscanning: Science of Survival, Bk.II, Ch. 10 & 11[16]. Recommended in particular are the two bulletins called “The time track and running engrams by chains”, one of 15 May 1963, the other of 8 June 1963, both in Tech Vol.V. As well worth reading is the second half of HCOB 3 April 1966, “Dianetic Auditing Course”, page 161-163 in Tech Vol.VI. It demonstrates how easy auditing can be.)

The Auditor’s Tools: D) Auditing With The E-Meter l.The Many Roles Of The Auditor The auditor as a one-man-band must be aware that he is not just the auditor as such but plays other roles, too. This becomes apparent to the extent that he moves away from using the simple techniques described up to this point, auditing for the benefit of his friends or his family, and begins increasingly to work with the E-meter in the attempt to resolve complex case situations and take someone up to Clear. Once one starts working on a professional level it is unavoidable that one differentiate one’s activity into different roles, even though the whole team may consist of oneself only. Therefore the auditor must make it clear to the pc from which role he is talking so as not to confuse him when he changes from one role to the other, as a different behavior pattern goes with each one. (It’s easier when each function is performed by a different person.) THE INTERVIEWER Before a session cycle, an interview is done. Interviews are ordered by the person who is overseeing the auditors, the case supervisor or “C/S”. (The role of the case supervisor is described in the section further on.)The interview is done exactly according to the instructions of the C/S. Out-of-session chats should never concern the case of the pc. They are not an interview. An interview is always done formally. It may happen, though, that the pc - perhaps even inadvertently - comes up with case data out of session. Of this a written note must be made and handed in to the case supervisor to be kept in the pc’s folder so that the case will not turn into an enigma at some later stage. THE AUDITOR The most fundamental tasks of the auditor have already been discussed thoroughly in the chapter on simple techniques. Therefore it seems sufficient to keep it short and only repeat a key paragraph here: The auditor has his auditing commands and his TRs. He does no more than putting the pc in session (TR-0). giving the auditing command (TR-1), acknowledging the pc’s answer (TR-2), and getting the pc back to the auditing command when he wanders off (TR-3, TR-4) . Further than that, the auditor does not talk. His behavior is wholly determined by the Auditor’s Code . There is nothing ritualistic or artificial about this code. It provides a frame of reference for the auditor’s behavior which he is obliged to adhere to, as otherwise the session would come to a bad end. When it is violated, wins and results cannot be guaranteed. It is a strictly functional code. with the exception of some “political” points (24-28) which have no bearing on the actual session. When the pc originates something which makes it unwise to continue the particular process he is on, i.e. when a situation arises which cannot be solved by TR-4 but in fact requires a different 45

process than the one that is being run, the auditor ends off. He asks the pc if there is anything else he would like to say or ask before the end of the session, and hands the folder in to the C/S (case supervisor). THE CASE SUPERVISOR (C/S) When auditor and C/S are different persons and when there are several auditors to one C/S, the C/S would not himself audit. He may never even see the pc whose case he is C/Sing. The C/S receives a cardboard folder which contains the session write-up done by the auditor, and adjudicates what should be done in the next session. If needed, he corrects the auditor by giving him a study assignment to do. The C/S works on data only, not on opinion. To him, what isn’t written in the folder isn’t true. Anything relevant to handling the pc’s case must appear in written form and be put in the folder may it come from the interviewer, the auditor, the examiner (see below), a friend or a family member of the pc. If he doesn’t have enough data to work out a strategy for solving the case he tells the interviewer to do an interview and get data. Or he asks the course supervisor or the ethics consultant for data. In truth, the C/S does a data evaluation: he finds “plus-points’ and “out-points”, importance’s and unimportance’s, and compares them. (See Mgmt. Dictionary and Axiom 58.) In this work, he is not interested in significance’s, but in masses He judges the importance of data by the amount of E-meter reads they have. In his program, he puts the area of biggest charge as the first one to be handled. This area is most real to the pc because it troubles him the most, and can be confronted best. A program is a series of steps which help the pc to as-is the charge he has on the areas mentioned in his interview. Each step on the program should have the pc fully “in session” . “In session” means high interest and lots of big reads. This is the mark of a good program. An uneventful program and a bored pc indicate that the C/S didn’t evaluate his data well. (For full instructions on C/Sing see the C/S-Series in Vol.X and the “Class VIII Notes” by Bill Robertson.) In the case of a one-man band the auditor himself is the C/S Even then he does the C/Sing in his own time and space and no during the session. (See ivory tower rule.) He does not “C/S in the chair”. Going off the process and replacing it by another one, is considered so, for example. Changing the process to suit the pc’s origination’s, is a Q & A. (See the Tech Dict for this term also C/S-Series 55 and 89, in Vol X.) - But: getting a result is always the best excuse for whatever one did. Always keep the product in mind and don’t be rigid about the rules. (See ‘ In structor’s Stable Data” in [1], and HCO PL 19 March 1968, Service”, in Mgmt. Vol. 0.) THE EXAMINER It is found to be valuable for another than the “usual” auditor to be available immediately after session, to look at the pc and note down his indicators and meter reactions. This person is called the “examiner”. He works with the E-meter. The pc can comment to him about the session,

his wins or losses. This provides additional data for the C/S. If, for example, the pc seems upset at session end, it wouldn’t go unnoticed. Also the pc has someone to whom he can make a statement about how he feels in general or with regard to his auditing, if he needs to. The auditor is one “ear” of the C/S, the examiner the other. The examiner fulfills another function as well he takes care of attesting. This is also checked on an E-meter. It is customary to attest to the completion of a study course or auditing rundown after completing it. “To attest” means to make it known to all concerned. This is done by telling the examiner about the auditing or training cycle one has completed, and putting in writing what one has got out of it. This makes a public acknowledgment and validation for the completion, and does help the pc to accept that he has handled this particular aspect of awareness or ability. The examiner makes sure that the person attesting has good indicators and the corresponding needle response on the E-meter. The attest by a pc or student always refers to a potential performance, not a real performance. He attests to the fact that an ability has been newly learned or rehabilitated; he does not attest to already having demonstrated it many times under all sorts of difficult circumstances. We are not expecting people to suddenly be able to do something that is “out-gradient” just because they have attested. We are looking for an improvement in the ordinary daily performance. For example this woman who just attested to a communications course. She can talk to her neighbor now and before she couldn’t. You wouldn’t expect her to suddenly be able to speak to twenty thousand people in a football stadium! But what she has achieved, should be acknowledged by attesting to it. And then it’s up to her to expand on her ability by making observations, applying her new knowledge, studying and drilling. How soon and how far one progresses, is always a personal matter. This may sound easy and matter-of-course. It isn’t, unfortunately. Because some people will always project all their desires and failed purposes into the attests of others, and if they see another who has attested Clear and doesn’t live up to their standards or imagination, they will say “it isn’t worth going Clear”, or “if that’s a Clear then I’ve been Clear all along, too”. And so it goes with OTIII, Excalibur, and Case Completion. And it always was so, throughout the history of scientology. Whosoever makes it to the top of the bridge must be the exact superman one always wished to be oneself: “If he doesn’t act the way I think he should, then he just can’t be an OT”. The C/S must never make this mistake. He looks at Fred as Fred goes into session, and he looks at Fred as Fred comes out of session, and if there was improvement in between (concerning the subject matter of the level audited), he allows Fred to attest. And he makes sure that Fred does a course or a little application program so Fred can settle in on his new ability level. And as long as Fred keeps improving, all is well. -The C/S never compares Fred with Joe! He never compares anyone with anyone else. He only measures improvement along the individual gradient scale of the person concerned. He never tries to turn a duck into an eagle, yet he always tries to turn a duck into a better duck. (Note: The failure of the standardized sequence of bridge steps, which has occurred consistently since 1968, isn’t just that it gives an unthinking approach to “handling” all cases, but that it allows 47

free rein to this sort of comparison and invalidation, and encourages the superman syndrome”. Much better to have a procedural approach that identifies major personal wins and encourages attests when appropriate, to punctuate progress.) THE ETHICS CONSULTANT The ethics consultant looks with the pc at the reality of the pc’s life and helps him to decide on a more pro-survival course. To “get ethics in” on one’s life means as much as creating the order necessary to attain a postulated goal. This is best done after an auditing cycle when the pc’s charge is gone and his confront on life has increased. It may have to be done before an auditing cycle when the pc has such aggravating life difficulties that he can’t get auditing, because he is kept so tied up by them. A lot of the public protest against scientology was connected with the harsh treatments of “scientology ethics” customary in the CofS. It was, for example, enforced that pcs or students “disconnect” from their friends, spouses or parents, because the “ethics officer” considered them “antagonistic to scientology”. But distilled out of the whole subject are some valuable ideas about how to handle the conditions of life more effectively. The “Volunteer Minister’s Handbook” contains a section on this and it should be studied, as often specific assistance with handling life is necessary, for some pc’s, in order to allow lasting case changes to occur from their auditing [17].

2.The Language Of The E-Meter HOW THE E-METER WORKS The E-meter (electropsychometer) is essentially a Wheatstone bridge. Much as it’s a simple measuring device in principle, the actual building of it demands some skill - evidenced by the fact that there has been a sequence of seven models from the time it was first used (1953) until today, each being an improvement compared to the previous one. When you include the ones developed and produced outside the CofS - often of considerably better quality - they add up to about a dozen. The E-meter isn’t influenced by the sweat on the pc’s hands but by the electrical resistance of mental masses around the pc. This is how it works: a battery inside it sends a very low voltage current (9 Volts) through a wire which is clipped to an ordinary tin can the pc holds in one hand. The current runs around his body and is picked up again by a tin can the pc holds in his other hand, and led off back into the negative pole of the battery inside the meter. Only 2 Volts actually arrive at the pc. As the current “runs around the pc’s body” it encounters a certain resistance due to the physical conditions of the body. As well it encounters the mental masses produced by the pc in the effort to not look at the terrible things in the engram. These masses add to the body resistance and make the needle rise on the dial. The needle goes to the left. In order to keep the needle on the “set”-position on the dial, the auditor would have to move it to the right. To do so, he turns a knob on the face of the meter clockwise . This way he “opens the throttle” and allows more current to flow out in order to overcome the increased resistance. This knob is called the Tone Arm (TA), indicating the “tone”, the mental tenseness or relaxedness, of the pc. It has a scale around it and a pointer towards this scale. Therefore, when the pc starts encountering an engram, the needle rises” to the left on its scale. The TA “rises” to the right on it’s scale, turned by the auditor in order to compensate for the rising of the needle. When the pc has duplicated some part of the engram and managed to look at it as it is, his tension immediately relaxes. What he can “have”, he won’t resist any more. Therefore the electrical resistance of his “mental defense shield” lessens, too, the needle falls to the right on the dial and the auditor has to adjust the Tone Arm to put the needle back on set. This is called a TA blowdown or BD. The amount of charge “blown” can be told by the difference between the two positions of the TA. At session start the TA pointed at the 2.5 mark on the scale around it. At peak point, when the pc’s resistance at looking at the engram was the highest, the TA had gone up to 4.6. Then, after the pc managed to look at and have that particular part of the engram’s content, the TA shot down to 3.1. So the total charge blown at this point is the difference between 4.6 and 3.1, which is 1.5. As only part of the engram was found, the auditor sends the pc through his recall again and again. Everytime the TA will go up and come down in the manner described. At the end of the session, when the pc has seen and re-experienced the engramic incident in all detail and has nothing left he couldn’t easily have, the TA will not move anymore. The process has gone flat. No further restimulation is possible concerning this engram; it has erased. Now the auditor adds up the individual downward motions of the Tone Arm and divides it by the number of session hours to 49

get the average. Five units TA motion per hour - the TA-Action or TAA - would be quite effective and acceptable. The more the better. The correct TAA-value per session is brought about by the auditor keeping the needle on the set”-mark as much as he can. This means that he has to compensate each needle motion to the left or right by adjusting the Tone Arm accordingly. When he does not do this, big reads the pc may have will appear only on the needle dial and not count on the TA-motion . Which makes the session look as if there had been very little TAA only. (See EMeter Drill 6.) This figure of “TAA per hour” is a valuable indicator for the progress the pc is making. When there is no TA action, the auditing process or even the program have to be changed because they are obviously inefficient. Reading the E-meter properly takes quite a lot of skill and experience. Therefore a lot of emphasis in auditor training is put on the “E-Meter Drills”. To the beginner the needle seems but a madly wiggling thingamajig; to the expert each needle motion allows exact conclusions regarding the flow of the pc’s attention. The meter does not tell the auditor what picture the pc sees; it does tell him, though, when the pc is approaching a “hot area”, when he is backing off from it, when he is right in it blowing it to pieces, and also when there is no charge left on an item and the auditing action is complete. The meter allows the auditor to steer the pc’s attention exactly, and therefore makes for efficient and intensive session work. Auditing happens between two thetans: the auditor and the pc. It does not happen between the auditor and his E-Meter. The auditor observes the pc’s indicators, such as his fluctuations on the tone scale, his delay in responding or answering a question (comm lag), his blushing or blanching, smiling or crying, his change from brightness to dullness and back. As well he observes the needle reactions on the meter. It gives him an additional indicator. This is because some charge may be so minute that you, as the auditor, won’t be able to tell from the pc’s face if there was a reaction to your question or not. But on the meter you get a small Fall (sF) and now you know there is charge on the process. The meter cannot replace the live ARC between auditor and pc, but it can add valuable information without which the process may come to a standstill or the session go off the rails. The meter is a steering device. That’s its whole purpose. WHAT IS A READ? A read means: a charged item was located and the charge reduced. How does charge come about’? By the pc wishing to know something and not knowing it. Basically because he has postulated that he won’t know it or that he can’t confront it. The harder the pc wants to know and the more difficult it is for him to find out, the more charge there will be. Consequently the reduction of charge sets in when the pc moves off from the point of not-know towards being willing to know. Not knowing something one desires to know creates tension such as in the case of reading a thriller or wondering what one is going to get for Christmas. Finding out and knowing brings relief. Anytime the pc (or any person) experiences relief there will be a big read. For a little bit of relief only, there will be a small read. It all depends on the importance the pc puts on the item in the first place and on the amount of engram content he can confront at a time.

These are the most common reads: Small Fall

(sF): The needle moves 0.6 to 1,5 cm to the right.

Fall

(F): 1.5 to 3 cm.

Long Fall

(LF): 3 to 4.5 cm.

Long Fall Blowdown (LFBD): When the needle does a Long Fall and stays on the right hand side of the dial, the auditor must move the TA to the left in order to bring the needle back up to “set”. This way the TA “blows down”. Tick

(T): A Tick is smaller than a sF. Usually it is not taken up as it is a sign of there not being enough charge to deal with the item successfully. It does not count as a read, strictly speaking, but just as a hint to a possible read. One pokes about a little in this particular area, but when there is not more than another tick or two, one should leave it alone.

Dirty Needle

(D.N.): It looks like many little ticks going left and right in an irregular fashion. It signifies that something goes on “down below” which has not been voiced yet.

(References: “The Book of E-Meter Drills”, “E-Meter Essentials”, “Introduction to the E-Meter”, by L.Ron Hubbard.) ”YES” AND “NO” Your E-Meter’s language is simple: it can say either “yes” or “no”. You ask a question and get a read: that means “yes”. You get no read: that means “no”. The pc says something; it reads: “yes”. It doesn’t read: “no”. (See C/S-Series 24.) The read confirms the auditor’s question or the pc’s origination as true. Why? - Because an as-isness occurs, however small it may be. “Truth is the exact consideration; the exact time, place, form, and event. Thus we see that the discovery of truth would bring about an As-isness by actual experiment. “ (From Axiom 38. The “actual experiment” is the session itself.) Any partial as-isness reduces some of the charge, so you have less electrical resistance, so you get a read. Examples: “Do you have a problem?” plus read: He has a problem. (Meter confirms the question.) “Do you have a problem?”, no read: He doesn’t have one. “Do you have a problem?”, no read. Pc says, “No, I don’t think so”, plus read: He doesn’t have one. (Meter confirms pc’s answer.)

Pc says at session start, “I feel great today”, plus read: He had a release, but there is some charge connected with it. Find out about the release and acknowledge it. If it F/N’s, great, leave it at that. If not, the read means there is bank accessible connected with it that should be dealt with while it is restimulated, to consolidate the win. Hence one should “rehab” the release part. (See the section on “Rehabilitation” further down in the text.) Pc says at session start, “Last night I had a terrible dream”, with no read. So there is no charge . Acknowledge politely, but do not take it up. Go into the process you have a C/Sinstruction for. THE INSTANT READ “An instant read is defined as that reaction of the needle which occurs at the precise end of any major thought voiced by the auditor “ “By major thought is meant the complete thought being expressed in words by the auditor “ (HCOB May 25, 1962) Precise as these definitions are, they still lead to confusion on the side of the auditor with the result of charge being stirred up and left on the case of the pc. When is the instant read to occur? At the end of the last syllable uttered by the auditor or at the end of the major thought? Are we talking about auditing as a mest universe phenomenon or a theta phenomenon? If we were to say that the read has to occur at the moment the last soundwave has left the auditor’s mouth we would be talking about a mest universe phenomenon. But auditing is an ARC game, not a mest game! It has to do with attention and intention, with the auditing comm-cycle (Tech Dict.). Which means that the pc’s attention and interest count. not the sound waves of the auditor. The pc’s in-session-ness is the senior factor. When the pc is on the line to his bank for one or even five seconds and then has a read and then originates an answer with read and interest and corresponding indicators, are you going to drop it because “it occurred too late”? He was on the line to his bank, he was on the major thought voiced in words by the auditor, he was in session on it, he found something which read and he was interested in talking about it, so there was truth, there was a partial as-isness - so of course you take it up! - If not you will have stirred up charge and left it unhandled, and very soon you will get a dirty needle, a rising TA, a stuck needle and all the other things no auditor really likes. You have to get the pc to put a commline over to his bank, and therefore you must allow a communication lag - as long as the pc’s attention is on the command! Only acute observation can help you through this. Four situations are possible: 1. Pc didn’t pay attention when you gave the command and thought of something else anyway: prior read. 2. Pc got the command, has no interest, there is no read; no button was pressed at all. The pc’s mind wanders off to something else and that reads: latent read. 3. Pc got the command, introverts, looks around in his mind, commlags, then gives a reading answer which makes sense regarding the command: instant read. 4. Auditor gives command, gets a read immediately, pc hesitates a moment, then gives a sensible and reading answer: the absolute model of an instant read! (See C/S-Series 24.) Naturally, when you do a rapid assessment by instant read (i.e when you rattle off the questions on a previously prepared list), you take the read that occurs the moment you have finished speaking. (See E-Meter Drill 24.) This, however, works only when you have excellent 52

duplication and understanding on the part of the pc! In order to live through a rapid assessment, the pc must have a conceptual understanding of what the auditor says. If not, you get the phenomena going along with misunderstood words, such as dirty needles, pc’s face going grey, and other nasty things. It takes a very well grooved in pc for you to just say: “Please lean back for a moment; I’m doing this assessment. You don’t have to say anything whilst I’m doing it.” And then it goes pakata-pakata-pakata (as Hubbard would say): there’s your assessment shooting off and there are your reads. - It’s true that the assessment goes “right to the pcs bank “ (Tech Dict . ), but the bank doesn’t speak English ! So of course it’s a conceptual thing. If the pc has no concept of what you are talking about, there will be no reads. If the thetan (pc) didn’t have to be involved during the assessment one should be able to do an assessment in a foreign language and still get reads. But try to assess an L1C (List 1C, a repair list) in English on a Spaniard and you’ll see that it won’t work! - So it only goes “straight to the pc’s bank”, IF the thetan acts as a communicator and opens the door to the bank. No magic involved, only the application of the communication formula. THE FLOATING NEEDLE (F/N) The F/N is the most difficult needle characteristic of them all. This is because it comes in so many different forms and sizes. “Floating Needle: the idle uninfluenced movement of the needle on the dial without any patterns or reactions in it. (. . .) It moves to the left at the same speed as it moves to the right. (. . .) It ceases to register on the pcs bank. It just idly floats about(. . .) “ (Tech Dict.). Many beginning auditors think that an F/N ought to be perfectly symmetrical around the center of the dial, and at least as wide as a Fall. However, this is not implied by the definition given above. It may be a rhythmical motion to the right, like three large right-hand swings with smaller left-hand swings in between. It may just be one swing either side and not even symmetrical. It may be dialwide and of short duration, or only as wide as a third of the dial and last for minutes. Or any of the above combinations. - On a high TA, when you are battling away to get the TA down, it may not be more than the momentary easing up of a tight needle, with a corresponding brightening up of the pc. (See the chapter on “High TA” further down.) Some people really have trouble telling the difference between a sequence of sF’s or F’s, and an F/N. -The best way to tell: look at the pc! If the pc were not released the needle wouldn’t float. So it’s not just the meter that shows an F/N, the pc does, too! The F/N, by the way, is the only meter read which is indicated by the auditor to the pc. Doing so, he acknowledges the release the pc has experienced. One has to be careful not to indicate the F/N too early as that may interrupt the pc’s cognition and make the F/N cease prematurely. How does an F/N come to be? At the moment you give the auditing command the pc connects up with a ridge and a small as-isness occurs; you get a read. From this moment on the attention of the pc is on the GPM/ridge/engram/secondary/lock/ incident/picture until he has as-ised (blown) it fully. With an engram, this is called erasure; with a lock, it’s a key-out. At this moment it goes ‘pop” and the compulsive commline to the terminal/item breaks. The pc has no more attention on the thing. And that is the moment the needle floats! Its importance is that it indicates when to stop, i.e when the particular auditing cycle is complete . When it’s a big release it will keep on 53

floating for a while . When the pc is in the middle of a series of processes, though, which all deal with the same area of charge (e.g. “the 2nd dynamic”), then his F/N will not last long. It will stop as soon as the next ridge has attracted the pc’s attention. In detail: He has had attention on one particular bit of bank in this area; he has blown that, F/N. Now he is drawn back into the area by the next bit of bank. The F/N stops. You give the next command, get a read, work it over, F/N; next command, read, work it over, F/N, etc., till the whole area is discharged and the pc has a big release and a large F/N and VVGIs. One may observe that there is a correspondence between the amount of TAA a process had, and the size and the duration of the final F/N. They seem to be in direct proportion with each other. So when you have run an auditing question which had a sF, and the pc has as-ised the charge rather briefly with no more than another sF, you can’t expect to get a huge F/N. Don’t try to get one - you’ll end up in a stupid overrun! On the other hand, after a 2-hour auditing action on “my schoolteacher” with 22 divisions of TA-Action, you will see a big and lasting F/N as part of the EP. F/Ns are usually “indicated” to the pc, which means one tells him that he just has one . This is a way of acknowledging (TR-2) that an auditing cycle has been completed, that a release was attained. The disadvantage of this procedure is that it may make the pc dependent on his F/Ns! In the end he will run the process only in order to get his F/N. Or he accepts the indication of an F/N (in case of an auditor error) without the feeling of having completed anything. In either case the pc is not properly in session. Hence it is much better to have him experience his F/N a few times until he knows what he should feel like when the auditor says: “I’d like to indicate, your needle is floating”. This way he learns to find certainty in himself and not in the E-meter. HIGH TA F/Ns What is a “high TA”? According to the Tech Dictionary it’s a TA above 3.5 on the TAscale. An F/N - again according to theTech Dict. - must occur between TA 2.0 and 3 .0 to be valid. Years later, in C/S-Series 99, Hubbard revised this and stated that an F/N always is an F/N, no matter how high the TA. High-TA F/Ns occur whilst you are working on something. Don’t settle for an EP-F/N above 3.5. You may have worked on something, brought the TA down from 5.3 to 4.5 and got an F/N there; small and short perhaps, but an F/N. That’s very good. But you want it down in the EP range below 3.5. This will make a lot of difference to the pc. So do find those last scraps of charge on the respective subject by all means, and end off with an F/N below 3.5. It will make quite a difference to the well-being of the pc. THE ARC-BREAK F/N There is the paradoxical phenomenon of an F/N occurring whilst the pc has very bad indicators (VBIs). How is this possible? Well, the answer is quite easy once you have understood what a read is and what an F/N is.

A read means “something there” (i.e. a mass) .The pc looks at it in auditing. At the end of the process you get an F/N. An F/N means “nothing there where before there was something”. A read is the meter reaction to a somethingness the F/N the meter reaction to a nothingness. When the pc is totally ARC-broken he is totally out of communication, has totally no reality and no affinity with anything. There is no commline to the bank. Therefore, when you ask such a pc an auditing question, nothing will register. And that’s why you get an F/N. It means “nothing there where there may be something but I’m too hopeless to even look”. -The technical term for this phenomenon is “ARC-Break F/N”. THE DIRTY NEEDLE Some auditors have come to believe that a Dirty Needle (D.N.) can mean one thing only: the pc has a mw/h (missed withhold). Dirty needle = mw/h. That simple. So there is something terrible and nasty the pc is hiding: let’s get it out of him! (See C/S Series 1.) This is as oversimplified as it’s unfair on the pc. It means putting the whole blame for the D.N. on him. But most of the time, in fact, the needle is dirtied by the auditor himself, i.e..by his bad TR’s! - If you don’t believe it, re-read E-Meter drill 20. It shows you ten ways of dirtying a clean needle by means of a bad comm cycle. In the final analysis, the equation “D.N. = mw/h” is true, though. Because the auditor’s bad TRs produce a no-comm situation with the pc trying to say something without being listened to! The w/h is actually enforced on the pc. This is covered under “unintentional withhold” in theTech Dictionary. (But never forget: It could be a real nasty withhold, too!) THREE BUTTONS TO CHECK FOR CHARGE As long as a thetan cannot have the is-ness of a certain charge it will not read on the meter, but there won’t be an F/N either. The pc is blocking the access to his case. In order to find out what he is doing to hold the charge off his awareness (not-is), you do this little assessment: “On this question, has anything been suppressed/invalidated/not-ised?” And that will read on the meter when there is charge. Supposing you had a read on one of the three buttons, e.g. on “suppressed”, you do not ask: “What has been suppressed?”, because you would go off the actual auditing question. Instead you keep insisting on the question you have started with. You could tell the pc what’s going on, by saying: “I’d like to indicate to you that something was suppressed on the question ‘Do you have a problem?’ What problem is that?” And now he will find one. (It could of course be a “false read” see the next section.) When you do not get a read on the initial question nor on the three buttons, you can be sure that there is no charge present. Actually, there ought to be an F/N now. If this is not the case, it is wise to tell the pc that there is no charge indeed. This makes him relax and then there will be an F/N for sure. An auditor who is a real craftsman would only allow two possibilities with regard to an auditing question: a read or an F/N. To leave a question open, i.e. with no read and no F/N, would not even cross his mind. 55

The explanation for this phenomenon is given in Axiom 11. The buttons suppress, invalidate and not-is relate to the conditions of existence of alter-isness and not-isness. In HCOB “Rudiments, Definitions and Patter” (Tech Vol.XI) only one button (“suppress”) is mentioned. But, according to this Axiom, it is perfectly all right to use three. THE FALSE READ You ask a question like: “Do you have a problem?” and get a read. The pc says: “No, not really” and has a read on that, too. That is a “false read”, according to the hallowed rule which says: if there is any doubt, the answer of the pc is right. There was a read all right, but it did not relate to what you have asked. It’s on something else - after all, there was an energy which pushed the needle over. The energy didn’t come from the thing you asked for; so where did it come from? If we exclude things like body motion and pc sighing or coughing right at that moment, then it must have come from the bank. So what button was pushed that caused the read? Simple: being asked such a question at all. “How dare you . . . !” That’s the button. Therefore a false read is the pc’s protest against what you are asking him. And that’s why you handle a false read with the question: “Did anyone say you had a problem when you didn’t have one? (read)” . - Pc: “Yes (read), my mother always told me I was looking so confused when I wasn’t confused at all ! (read)”. So the pc felt evaluated for or invalidated, and he was protesting it then just as he is protesting it now. What you are really running here is a chain of protests about inval/eval. Get all of the incident, when/where/what happened exactly; and then: “Is there an earlier similar time someone said you had a problem when you didn’t have one?” At the end of the chain you’ll get a keyout and F/N plus VGIs. COMPLETING CYCLES OF ACTION When you pick up an item or a question, it must of course have read. Either on the question itself, or on checking the three buttons mentioned above. One never takes up unreading questions and items as there is the danger that the pc starts imagining things or gets pushed into his bank . The read on the question or the item is the start of a cycle of action, the process its continuation, the F/N or the EP its end. You must end everything you have started, because if you don’t, if you work on something over an incomplete cycle of action, there will be over-restimation and the pc will feel overwhelmed. As one asks an auditing question, one has to make sure that the read occurs not only on the question, but on the answer as well! Failing to do this may result in your running an unreading item the one mentioned by the pc - although there was a read on the actual question. Example: “Have you committed an overt?” (F). Pc: “Recently, when I took a walk in the park, I threw an empty cigarette pack on the lawn instead of putting it in the nearest rubbish bin” (x, i.e. no read). If the auditor were to take this up, had the pc tell all about it and then went earlier-similar on it, he would totally audit past the thing which actually caused the read. He would have taken up an unreading item - the one offered by the pc. And soon the usual trouble would follow: needle tightening up,

TA rising, pc becoming disinterested, chain not coming to an end. Incomplete cycle of action. Very embarrassing! The correct action in this case would have been to ask the pc: “Is there perhaps another overt?” (Again the F). “Well,” says the pc, “When I drove my father’s car the other day, I bumped against the garage door and didn’t tell my father it was me who made the dent” (sF). That is the answer the auditor should take up. The read on the answer was smaller than the read on the question, yes, but that does not matter. That is merely a matter of the pc’s confront of his overt. The important thing is that there was a read. The lesson to be learned here: the read on the auditor’s question must be echoed by the read on the pc’s answer. When this happens one can be certain that the cycle of action of this particular auditing process can be taken to its proper end. (See C/S-Series 89 in Vol.X.) INDICATION OF CHARGE AND WHY It is the purpose of auditing to re-establish the pc’s certainty of self. “Certainty in all three universes must be regained, for certainty, not data, is knowledge” (Factor 28) . The only reason, then, why a person would want auditing, is his or her lack of certainty with respect to some areas in one of the three universes. To coax him into being more certain, the auditor indicates to the pc that there is charge on his origination or the item in question. This acts as a special kind of TR-2 (acknowledgment). This confirms what the pc has felt and thereby gradually increases his certainty. Examples: Pc: “I always had a problem with my uncle”. - Read. (Pc isn’t quite sure if this is important.) -Auditor: “I’d like to indicate, there IS charge on this problem!” - Pc (certain now): “Well, you know - I actually thought so! This has bothered me for many years.” Etc., etc. In this case the indication has opened the pc’s “outflow valve” (Itsa-line, Tech Dict.); he feels reassured that it isn’t just an imagined problem but a real one and therefore is immediately in session on it. Auditor: “Have you committed an overt?” - No read. - “On this question, anything suppressed?” - No read. - Pc says nothing and anxiously waits for the auditor to say something. He doesn’t think there is any overt in particular but doesn’t feel sure enough to say so. After all, life has been so long and one has done so many things which weren’t ok. So who could safely say that he never committed an overt? - Auditor: “I’d like to indicate, there’s no charge on this question”. Pc (relieved): “Oh - good.” - F/N. In this case there was nothing in the bank, so there was no read. Yet there was attention on the question itself; so there was no F/N, either. The certainty created by the auditor’s indication took the pc’s attention away from the question so that the needle could float. (The best address for E-meters is “Ability Meters International”, 9 Portland Road, East Grinstead, West-Sussex, RH19 4EB, England.)

3. Preparing The Session CLEARING WORDS You must make sure that the pc understands the key words which go along with the auditing he receives. Build it up as you go along. This is best done in the courseroom. Later, in session, you verify the pc’s understanding of each word as you come to it, by having him give you examples. Don’t do it all at once. Here is a list of words which will provide a very good basic education for the pc. Most of them have been covered in Part Two of Volume 1. All figures refer to those within the definitions in the Tech Dictionary. Following them you will not get tangled up with new and unknown words which some other definitions are full of. Please go through the left column first, then throught the right one. Auditing - 2, 5. Auditing Communication Cycle. Theta - 3, 4, 5. Mind-1, 2, 3. Analytical mind- 1, 2, 5. Not-isness Engram-1,2,6. Secondary- 1. Valence. Misemotion. Somatic. Chronic charge. Key-in. Release - 2, 3, 6. VGIs. Consideration. As-is. Overrun - 2, 3, 4. Negative gain. Cleared cannibal. Knowingness- 1, 2, 3. Affinity- 1, 2, 3. Communication. ARC- 1. Problem- 1, 2, 4. Withhold- 1, 2, 4. Overt. Evaluation-1, 2.

Processing - 2, 5. Thetan - 5, 6, 9. Reach and Withdraw. Body- 1, 5. Reactive mind- 1. Aberration- 1, 2. Engram bank. Lock - 1, 4. Time track. Charge-1, 2, 3, 4. Erase. Key-out. Floating needle. Postulate. Cognition- 1. EP. Exteriorisation - 1, 2 Clear- 1-9. OT- 4, 5. Knowledge- 1, 2. Reality - 3, 5, 7. Understanding- 1, 3. ARC-Break. Present Time Problem. MissedW/H. Invalidation- 1, 3, 4.

THE PRE-SESSION CHECKLIST

The auditor does the pre-session checks to find out if the pc is sessionable, and to adjust his E-meter to the pc. 1)

He adjusts the sensitivity by can squeeze.

He does a false TA check when the TA is above 3.5. False TA may be due to cold hands, cold feet, tight clothes, dry hands, wrong can grip. Handle accordingly. A real high TA would demand a handling in session and require a change of C/S. That’s why you have to find out if your high TA is real or false.

He asks the pc if he is tired or hungry or physically worn out. (Ref.: Auditor’s Code.) If so: handle accordingly. You want the pc’s attention on his case not on his body. Should the pc be unsessionable and you continue nevertheless, you will soon see the needle- and TAmotion tightening up. In the case of an EP, the F/N will be short and narrow or not come at all; the VGIs of the pc will look rather muffled.

He asks the pc to take a deep breath and blow it out hard, watches the needle read, and thereby finds out about the pc’s metabolism.

The auditor asks the pc if he has taken drugs, medicine or alcohol. - If so, the session cannot be started as the pc has to “dry out” first. Reason: a pc under the influence of drugs, medicine, or alcohol will have bad recall, a sticky needle and very little TA-motion. (HCOB 17 Oct 69: “Drugs, Aspirin, and Tranquilizers”, Tech Vol.XI or [17].)

He asks the pc if he feels comfortable. (Chair, temperature, etc.)

He asks: “Is there any reason why we shouldn’t start the session now?”

All ok: “This is the session!” THE CAN SQUEEZE

E-Meter Drill 5 and 5 RA both say something substantial separately but neither of the two combines it. (See as well “E-Meter Essentials”, section E.) EM-5 says the can squeeze checks the pc’s current state of Havingnes. EM-5 RA says one has to adjust the sensitivity so the needle falls over one third of the dial when the pc squeezes the cans. Neither of the two state clearly how hard one is supposed to squeeze - which has driven some auditors (and pc’s) to despair. A “light squeeze” may be entirely different when it’s repeated a second or third time from how it was done the first time, so there’s a different size read each time. The answer to the difficulty lies in the definition of Havingness and its application to the can squeeze. “HAVINGNESS, 1. that which permits the experience of mass and pressure”. [2] This means having ARC with a somethingness, a terminal. As the pc squeezes the cans he demonstrates by the drop of the needle how far he is capable of experiencing the mass and pressure of the cans on his hands. Therefore the pc should squeeze as hard as he can - slowly and steadily, yes, but as hard as he can. When one has him 59

squeeze the cans two or three times, one keeps at least one variable stable: his pressure. -The other variable one adjusts as required, by setting the sensitivity knob to a needle drop of 1/3 on the dial. The can squeeze does not measure the muscular strength of the pc, but his Havingness. This is easily observable . When the pc squeezes the cans the needle will move gradually to the right and then stop, although the pc may still be increasing the power of his squeeze! So his muscular strength does not push the needle further over than his Havingness allows. The reverse effect one can observe when the pc’s Havingness has increased after a session; usually the sensitivity could now be adjusted lower than before. (Try it out and see!) This is surely not because the pc’s muscle power would have increased within a session of one and a half hours! - It’s his ability to experience mass and pressure which has increased. Why does one measure Havingness at all? - Because one has to adjust the meter (sensitivity knob) so it reads on the masses in the case of the pc. This adjustment is conveniently done by measuring the pc’s ability to experience the masses of the cans. A pc whose Havingness is low, will feel the mass of the cans to a certain extent as he squeezes them, but not sufficiently to make the meter read on a sensitivity setting of e.g. 2. Accordingly he will not experience the masses of the bank sufficiently, given the same sensitivity setting, as to make the needle register. Therefore, to get reads, one has to amplify the signals of the bank electronically by turning up the sensitivity knob. This of course does not increase the Havingness of the pc; it increases the signal strength which then makes reads possible. Which means that this particular pc win have reads as soon as his sensitivity is set at 7, for example. METABOLISM How come you get a read on the metabolism test (breath test)’? (See point 3 on the presession checklist.) To understand this you need to know three facts: Firstly: the current runs from the battery in the E-meter through the lead into one can, through the body into the other can, and back through the other lead, to the battery. The body has a mass which the current has to overcome in order to get from one can to the other. Secondly: the digestive system turns the food you eat into carbohydrates (and other things). These are taken to the cells of the muscles and other organs through the blood stream. The lungs take up oxygen from the air. The oxygen is picked up in the blood stream, too, and taken to the cells in the body. The carbohydrates are burnt up by the oxygen in the cells to generate energy. As usual, when something gets burnt up heat is generated. This is how the body stays warm. And this is what’s called “metabolism”. Thirdly: a warm human body has a lower resistance than a cold one. Now this is what happens when you check for metabolism: When you breathe in deeply, hold the air for a moment, and then breathe out vigorously, there will be a steep increase of oxygen in the blood stream. Naturally, the rate of combustion will increase, too. (As anyone knows who has ever blown into the open flames of a fire . ) Now of course the body temperature rises (breathe hard ten times and you’ll see) and the body resistance against electrical current is lowered. This 60

decrease of resistance is expressed in the meter read: the electrical resistance of the body drops, which makes the needle fall and the TA come down - if only in degrees. But: the combustion rate will only increase if there is actual oxygen entering the blood stream with actual carbohydrates there and ready to get burnt up. So if you don’t get a read it may mean that the pc didn’t eat right, that he didn’t sleep right, or that he didn’t breathe right. Or it may mean that there is something wrong with his system, and the food doesn’t get turned into energy. In case of high TA you may have a hard time getting a read on the metabolism test. Do a false TA check to make sure it’s nothing mechanical. (Pc too cold, etc.) If it is a real high TA caused by charge, you will find quite often that it is this charge which suppresses the metabolism read. Don’t worry about it; go in session anyway, and handle the charge - provided the pc has eaten and slept well. The main stable datum here is the Auditor’s Code, points 5 and 6. If that is in, the auditor may take the pc in session. However, he must inform the pc about a weak metabolism read before he starts, because should it turn out that the needle does not read well in session (in the usual way for this pc), then the auditor can simply end the session with a short explanation of the matter and the pc will understand the situation. THE SESSION The preparations are all done now. The auditor starts the session with “This is the session!”. If there is no F/N he flies as many rudiments as needed in order to have a stable F/N. Reason: you want the pc’s attention fully on the major process which is to be done in this session according to the C/S. One doesn’t go into a major action over out-ruds (see C/S-Series 1). The necessary ruds and then the major process for this session are taken to F/N and EP. Then the auditor asks: “Is there anything you’d like to say or ask before we end the session?” This provides an opportunity for the pc to look back over the session and to originate on various aspects of it. Should he have questions beyond the immediate scope of the session, the auditor notes them down, acknowledges their importance and says that they will be taken up after the session . Then he gives his “End of session!” In either case the pc should have an F/N here. It means that the pc has ended the session for himself. At the time of the EP he had an F/N on the process, now he has one on the end of the session. There is a significant difference between the two. When there is no F/N after “say/ask?”, you know that there is something wrong. This is an important information for the C/S. Should anything unexpected happen which the auditor can’t handle on the spot, he explains to the pc that he has to end the session in order to get a technical consultation, and turns the folder in to the C/S. When the pc has blown a lot of charge (as seen by plenty of TA action) he may feel an actual lack of mass and feel a bit woozy in the head. His F/N may be smaller than you would expect in view of the big release he has. In this case you must replace the bank masses by the actual masses of the mest environment and make him repeatedly touch things or look at things or spot things in the room. (Each of these would be one process in itself. Do not give more than a dozen commands because it will turn the orientation assist into an objective auditing process.) The 61

pc will soon feel oriented again - a dozen commands is enough - and his F/N has a wider swing now. He has lost reactively created dimension points in the bank because the engram has gone; he has replaced them by analytically created ones. Now you can safely give your “End of Session!” (See HCOB 11 Aug 1978 II, “Model Session”, Tech Vol.XI.) ADMIN AND C/Sing When the auditor has finished the session, he must do his session admin. This must be done properly as the “admin” of the session (an auditor slang term) communicates the session content to the C/S. The C/S should be able to understand the run of the session without having to send for the auditor and ask him about particulars. A session consists of three different types of particles. They are stapled together and put into the folder, in this sequence: the worksheets at the bottom, next the Auditor Report Form, the C/S-sheet on the top. 1. The Worksheets; They are notes of the session actions, usually written in two columns. What must be written in them is: a) Each auditor command, each reading origination of the pc (and others, too, when you can write fast enough) . b)The pc’s change of indicators, such as position on the tone scale and facial expression. c) The time goes on the left-hand margin of the column. d) The reads and any change of TA position go on the right hand margin beside the exact words of the pc that caused the read. e) F/Ns go in the middle of the column and are circled. To give the worksheets a clear appearance, it is recommended that auditor commands are underlined and auditor observations are put in brackets; pc origination’s stay as they are. This way the C/S can see at one glance what was said by whom and how the process ran. 2. The Auditor Report Form. It has the same function as the contents table of a book. The C/S should be able to look over the whole session as it is summarized on one or two pages. There are three columns, from left to right: 1. what process was done, 2. time and TA position at end of process, 3. EP or not plus auditor’s observations. The sensitivity is marked only once (in column 2) unless it changes during the session. - Pc’s name auditor’s name, date, TA-range, total TA-action and session time should be noted at the top, like “pc Joe, auditor Fred. 6.8.1988, TArange between 2.3 and 4.1; total TAA 16.4; session time: 2:35 (2 hours 35 minutes), previous session time total: 16:12, new total: 18:47”. The ARF should reveal at one glance what decisions the auditor took during the session. Column 1:What did he do? Column 2 and 3: What was the result? Next line down, column 1: How did he carry on? Column 2 and 3: What was the result of that? And so on. 3. The C/S-sheet. Here the auditor expresses his thoughts and comments about the session and draws the attention of the C/S to aspects not easily to be seen from the worksheets, like: “Today it didn’t run quite as smoothly as usual, needle was a bit tighter all in all, less flowy”. Organizationally speaking, the auditor is a junior to the C/S. The C/S is his senior. A junior should present solutions to his senior. He should not present problems. Therefore it is up to the auditor to suggest the instructions for the next session. It is looked at and considered ok or not ok by the C/S.

The auditor’s comment (in red) presents the situation and gives all data. The auditor’s C/S (in blue) presents a solution. This solution must logically evolve out of the data given, and be in full alignment with the tech. Example: “No F/N at session end. High TA.” (Situation, red.) “On p.12 there was a BD and VGIs but no F/N. I thought if I carry on the pc may get a cognition. So I carried on but his indicators got worse and worse and the TA started rising. - I had to end session as it became too late to carry on.” (Data, red.) “Next C/S: (Solution, blue.) 1) In your last session, did you go past an EP? (Rehabilitate to EP.) 2) Next step on the program.” - Signature (red) This procedure is an excellent way to get an auditor to start thinking like a C/S. It is the basis of all C/S-training. (References: C/S Series No.25; definition of “CSW” in the Mgmt. Dictionary.) 4. The Folder Summary. The actual folder is just a piece of cardboard folded in half, big enough to accommodate A4 or foolscap size paper (1 to 3 above). Inside its front cover a few sheets of blank paper are stapled. They are the contents table of the whole folder. Usually it is done in two columns. After each session the auditor makes a short note in it about the date of the session, the time it took, the actions done and their result and if there was an F/N at EoS (End of Session) or not. It serves as a brief orientation for the C/S or auditor when he has to study the entire folder of a pc. From the entries in the Folder Summary the C/S can pick out the dates of the sessions he wants to look at in particular. When the folder becomes too fat, a second one is started. The Folder Summary is transferred to the new folder so that a complete view over all case actions this pc had, is always possible. This system was developed in order to keep an accurate and easily reviewed record of a pc’s auditing and case progress, and is particularly useful if problems develop and one has to search for past auditing errors, or if a new auditor or C/S is taking over. Session admin becomes very important when one does long actions extending over many sessions. When one looks back over a series of sessions one must always be able to clearly see what made one decide to do a certain C/S step. What seems logical at the moment it’s written down may appear perfect nonsense when looked at three weeks later. This is bad enough for oneself trying to figure out why one did what one did when one did it; it is even worse for another (the C/S), particularly when he has to handle a great number of cases or just temporarily fills in, because the usual C/S takes a holiday. You can make life easy for your C/S when you keep good admin. He will at a glance be able to see the good and the bad points in your sessions; he will see immediately which of your

actions was right and which was wrong. It is your admin which forms the basis of the decisions your C/S will make on the case, and for the corrections he may possibly give you. Remember: the C/S can only work from the data you give him! So anything which the pc or his friends tell you between sessions: don’t discuss it and don’t simply dismiss it either. Make a note of it ! And put it into the folder. You do the auditing and the routine C/Sing. The C/S does the special C/Sing - like when you get stuck or when a new step on the program gets started. (Reference for session admin: see Auditor Admin Series in Vol. IX. Do as well pay attention to the diagrams in the appendix.)

4. Introduction To The Various Techniques Looking at the great number and variety of scientology and dianetic processes, one may get rather confused. Yet below the apparent complexity one actually finds no more than five different techniques, and all auditing programs consist of one or a combination of them. They are all derived from the procedures described in “Dianetics”. If one were to reduce their interwoven-ness by sorting them into separate techniques and added the E-meter, one would get the auditing methods of modern scientology, i.e. of the time after 1968. The techniques gradiently require increasing confront by the pc - and by the auditor. They are listed below in the sequence from light to demanding. Using the same question (e.g.: “Do you have a problem?”) with each technique would cause different things, of increasing intensity, to happen between the pc and his bank. Which gradient one chooses, depends on the pc’s abilities alone. (The following chapters will elaborate this.) Two-Way Communication (2WC): 2WC is the easiest on the pc but doesn’t reach very deep. A (reading) question is looked at loosely from all sorts of angles; the auditor keeps repeating the question in so many different ways, the pc answers; finally it will F/N. The auditor just makes sure that the pc doesn’t drift off the subject, but there is no push to get anywhere in particular as long as one stays within the logical limits of the subject. The auditor may pick up large reads and follow them up until they have flattened out. The whole objective is to give the pc a chance to voice all his considerations regarding the subject in question, until he has no more compulsively fixated attention on it. Repetitive Technique: In repetitive technique the identical command is repeated over and over again (in the fashion drilled in TR-3). This allows the pc to pick and choose from his track as suits his confront ability best. He takes what comes easily. This technique runs deeper than 2WC but still comparatively shallow. It is applied in prepchecks. Grades processes and rehabilitation’s. (See appropriate sections.) Narrative: This style was already talked about at length in the chapter on Postulate Auditing. In contrast to repetitive technique, where the pc is free to tell as much about the incident as he likes, the narrative style would require him to tell the whole incident in detail. Running Chains: Running chains is more demanding in so far as the pc is asked to arrange incidents in a chronological sequence on the timetrack. This is not difficult as long as it is done on the level of locks; it gets harder with secondaries and engrams. This technique is applied in running the “earlier similar chains” of rudiments, repair lists or engrams (see appropriate sections). As a general note it should be mentioned that running chains makes the pc believe that his incidents were arranged on his timetrack in a linear fashion. This is a dangerous illusion! The pc does not “go down the time track” when he is running a recall process. He is in present time, and his case is in present time, too! His case exists to the extent that the pc is creating it under the 65

direction of the auditor. He does not drag it along like a long streamer. (Except for his “chronic case” which is permanently in restimulation.) And of course, the time track does exist - but as an imagined thing only! Not for real! The time track is the result of an agreement one has with oneself and others about what was. Without this agreement it would not exist (Axiom 3). Techniques for Finding a Single Item: To these count “Dating and Locating” and “Listing and Nulling”. a) Dating and Locating (D/L): In searching for the beginning of a particular incident, the auditor wants the pc to find the exact date down to the second and the exact distance down to the millimeter. (The bank does contain data with this degree of precision!) D/L demands a high confront level from the pc because of its minute exactness. (See the appropriate section.) b) Listing and Nulling (L&N): L&N is the top gradient as it asks for one single item only. The auditor asks a question which is formulated to allow only one item as the correct answer; pc searches around in his mind and makes a list of items until he comes up with the item and has F/N VGIs. Example: “What ice cream do you like best?” (Question reads.) Pc: “Hm - strawberry, I guess.” Auditor: “Keep on looking!” Pc: “Vanilla banana - well, in fact. it’s chocolate ! ! “ (Some of these items may have read, others not. The last one, however, has a LFBD and an F/N, the pc is VGIs.) Auditor: “I’d like to indicate to you, chocolate is the correct item. “You couldn’t do this with an overcharged pc who has twenty different life areas in restimulation. This is the reason why L&N appears only in Grade III, IV, and Va, after the case has cooled off. It is possible, though, to use it towards the end of a Life Repair, depending on the confront level of the pc and the auditor’s skill. All of these techniques are a way for the pc to find out precisely what is in his bank, to make him find the object or person or event or postulate of which he was so far unconscious. This is because at a certain point of non-confront or overwhelm he had pushed it out of his consciousness. Having found it, he will have a cognition and recognize that “it is a . . .”, hence the term itsa. Getting the pc to itsa, to have cognitions, is the essential aim of auditing. In the following chapters, the auditing processes most commonly used in Life Repairs and in the Solo-Assists (after Clear) will be presented. They appear in the order of increasing difficulty for the auditor: Prepchecks, Repair Lists, Rudiments, Rehabilitation’s, Date/Locate. They demand a comment as the relevant HCOBs do not cover all the questions students usually have. This is not the case for Two-Way Comm, engram running and L&N, as the HCOBs on them speak for themselves. (See the index of Vol.X, XI and XII for references. ) Important Note: To be fully prepared for the following chapters (4.1 - 4.5), to be well acquainted with the fundamentals of theory and procedure, you must have thoroughly studied the chapter on Postulate Auditing! It contains as well comments on the use of 2WC, narrative, running chains and repetitive technique.

4.1 The Prepcheck THE PROCEDURE The prepcheck could be described as a tool which serves to bring clarity to a confused area of thought, using a rather broad approach. It compares to a scanning searchlight rather than to a surgical laser. “Prepcheck” means “preparatory check” [2]. The first prepcheck bulletins appear in 1962. The technique was then used for quite different purposes than today. Today’s style was first summarized two years later, in HCOB 14 August 1964, and only fourteen years later brought in its final form (HCOB 7 Sept 1978). 1. The buttons, the item and the prefix: The prepcheck consists of twenty “buttons”, for example “suppressed”, “invalidated”, “careful of”, “suggested” . These buttons are used in relation to a charged reading item found previously, for example during an interview or an earlier session. As this item is called newly with each command, it serves as a ‘ prefix” to the command. 2. Repetitive style auditing: Supposing “apples” were the item, you’d use “apples” as a prefix and ask the pc: “On apples, has anything been suppressed?” The question reads. The pc answers; that as well reads. You acknowledge the answer and keep asking the identical question until the pc runs out of answers, which is a flat point, or until there is an F/N, which is the EP on this particular series of questions on this button . This is called “repetitive style auditing”. Now you take up the next button on the list and proceed in exactly the same way. 3. Flat points and end phenomena: Some buttons will go flat, others will F/N . The pc will have small cognitions here and there and say things like: “Now I see! That’s what it is! I never looked at it this way before!” And so on. He is doing his itsa. After a while, he will come to a big itsa, a big cognition, something that disconnects and releases him from the subject as a whole. He may say: “Now I get it! Gee! That’s the thing on apples-they are FRUIT! That’s what they are! Wow!” And so on. That’s the EP. That’s when you end off. Some notes on certain details: To increase the pc’s range of answers, clarify all possible interactions with regard to the question. Have the pc demonstrate his understanding to you by asking him to push paperclips and pens around on the table. There are quite a number of combinations: 1. Did apples suppress him? 2. Did he suppress apples? 3. Did he observe others suppressing apples? 4. Did he suppress himself because of apples? 5. Did others suppress him because of apples? 6. Did he suppress others because of apples? 7. Did he observe apples suppressing others? 8. Did apples suppress themselves? 9. Did apples suppress each other? Perhaps there are some more combinations. Of course, you don’t ask the pc these questions one by one, but you do want him to have a good and broad understanding of them. When you give the auditing question to the pc, each time you pick up a new button, you don’t “check” it or “assess” it on the E-meter. You simply ask the pc in a friendly and interested manner. If there is no read, you do not check supp/inval/not-is. You don’t check a button on a button. Instead you ask the pc for an example concerning the question. Have him invent one if 67

needed to demonstrate his understanding. If it reads now the button is charged, you inform the pc that this is so, and you run it repetitively to a flat point or F/N. If it goes flat by the pc running out of answers, do not continue questioning him in the desperate effort to get an F/N, as it would force the issue - which is never done. There’s no need to push the pc anyway! Should there be any further charge left on any of the buttons, he’ll get it on the next round through. You use as many buttons as needed to get to the EP. A dozen of them may be enough in one case; in another you may have to go through the whole lot, all twenty of them, three times. And please, don’t run your repeater style like a robot. Encourage the pc to elaborate and go in further when one answer or the other is accompanied by a big read. Permit your pc to make itsa! The experts amongst the readers will have noticed that the above procedure does not represent the suggestions of the latest HCOB mentioned above. This is because these suggestions do not prove successful, if followed to the letter. Taking each button separately to F/N cog VGIs, as the bulletin demands, simply does not work. It means forcing the pc who has run out of answers, into more answers; it means tight needles and rising TA; it means ignoring that there is such a thing as a flat point in a process. -Therefore this HCOB is “out-tech” (Tech Dict. ), no matter if it was written by Hubbard himself or by another (which unfortunately happened all too often.) GETTING THE ITEM On the Cl.VIII course Hubbard says that you can do a prepcheck on any area of charge. It goes without saying that the more defined an area is, the better it will read and the better your prepcheck will run. As an example, let us take a pc who mentions a terminal (person, place, thing) or an AESPitem in several places of his interview but only has small reads on it. Added up, they amount to a lot of charge, though. Therefore you decide to do a prepcheck on this terminal or item. The first thing you do in session: ask him what he would call that item just for himself. His name for it. This will pull all the dispersed attention units into one and give you a blowdown. The pc has done an itsa. Now you have a precise target to work on. Example: pc talks about school here and there in the interview. Lots of sF’s. You ask him: “What’s your word for ‘school”’? Your personal description for it?” - Pc says: “That madhouse!”. laughs, BD. Now you do your prepcheck on “that madhouse”, because this is what the big restimulator behind the actual school was. Why the pc calls it a “madhouse”, exactly where the charge is coming from - whether it is a past-life overwhelm or a present-life suppressive teacher - will be discovered in session. Which means: even before you start the action of prepchecking you have an item and you know that it is charged . The prepcheck does not serve to find out if an item is charged. It is not an assessment to find out which button is charged the most. Not at all. It offers twenty angles (the 20 buttons) to get at a known charge and blow it. It serves as a tool to “crack” a charged subject. Two further solutions concerning the above situation, for the professional and more stylish: pc talks about school, teachers, good and bad marks, homework etc. You don’t know what out of 68

all this is the real button. When you are good at Listing & Nulling you could ask: “Who or what would represent school to you?” Answer: “The maths teacher!” This item blows down and F/N’s. Now you can do a prepcheck on it. -And there is yet another L & N approach: “Regarding school, who or what would have these difficulties?” Answer: “A dumb boy!” plus LFBD F/N VGIs . That’s the valence he is stuck in . Prepcheck that . (See the chapter “Listing & Nulling” for further details.) THE END PHENOMENON The EP of a prepcheck is a release, no matter how many buttons it took. In order to go release it takes a number of key-outs. (See Tech Dict. under “Release”.) Some buttons will produce a key-out with a realization and an F/N, others will just go flat. - Neither the realization nor the F/N have to be particularly spectacular. They are on the particular button you have been working on, not on the item as a whole . The final cognition will be big and on the item as such; and the F/N will be wide. That is the EP. So you don’t have to F/N each button. You run it till there’s no read and no answer left on it. You run it flat. Should it F/N, that’s fine . You carry on, run the remaining buttons to flat or F/N, start again with the first button, go through the lot again and again, till the EP occurs. You just run each button, whether it has F/Ned on the run before or not. If it has already F/Ned it may read again as it has restimulated another lock connected with the subject. Remember, it’s a lock action, and there is no end to the number of locks. (See Tech Dict.: “Reduce” “flat”, “flat by TA”, “flat comm lag”, “flat point”, “flat process” . ) These are the prepcheck buttons (quoted from HCOB 7 September 1978 R, “Modern Repetitive Prepchecking”,Vol.XI, p. 469): Suppressed Evaluated Invalidated Careful of Didn’t reveal Not-ised Suggested Mistake been made Protested Anxious about Decided Withdrawn from Reached Ignored Stated Helped Altered Revealed Asserted Agreed with 69

THE PREPCHECK COMBINED WITH POSTULATE AUDITING Situation: You realize that a lot of charged items in the pc’s life are connected with her 2nd dynamic (sex and family), such as: a) her first husband, b) his parents who own the local shop where she can’t help buying things although she doesn’t like to because of their snide remarks, c) her current husband with whom she shares a company that isn’t doing well because of his sloppynes, d) his parents who she hates but has to put up with as they live together in the same house, e) her lover who runs a company that’s doing business with her husband’s company and whom she therefore has on the phone a lot. (Actual example.) So what to do? What is the king pin here which would make the whole construction collapse if one pulled it out? Hard to say. This is where a prepcheck comes in handy, done in combination with lock-scanning. As an analogy, the prepcheck functions as a metal detector or Geiger counter. It’s for horizontal action, for sweeping. You search the area; when you get a big read you dig down to the lode. For digging down you use lock-scanning. That’s the vertical action. If one were to describe prepcheck-procedure in terms of the basic techniques mentioned before, one would get the following steps: one starts out with a 2WC (which in this case was already done in the interview) in order to generally discuss the subject. Then the actual prepcheck follows, based on repetitive technique. During the prepcheck you find a “hot button” and ask the pc to tell you the corresponding incident in the narrative style. To then go down deep and find the basic incident you would use lock-scanning, which relates to the basic technique of running chains. To continue with the above example: you do a prepcheck “on the 2D”. You run three or four buttons to flat point, all rather uneventful. Next button: “has a mistake been made?” Suddenly pc gets tears in her eyes when she says, yes, both of her marriages were a mistake. Big reads. So here is your area, here you can dig in. Instead of TR-3ing the button you have her tell you how and when this mistake was made. How did she meet the first and later the second husband, how did she get to know them, when exactly did she decide to marry them? You get a postulate like “I just had to have him” . There is a good read on it, yet no relief, no F/N. The beginning, therefore, must be deeper down the track. “First time you made that postulate?” Lockscan to present time. You go through all of her friends and lovers; still no EP. Got to be earlier. Ah! - she just had to have the body she’s in now. A prenatal incident. Lockscan to present time. That still isn’t it . ‘ Earlier?” ‘Past life?” - Bingo ! - Egypt ! She “had to have” the priest, seduced him, was found out; then they both got ritually executed. But she never as-ised the postulate, so of course she kept going on it! Now that she has as-ised it she laughs, big cognition on the 2D, F/N. (This in the second session; pc never ran past lives before.) This was definitely not all of the EP yet. There’s more awry on this 2nd dynamic. So you continue your prepcheck down the list of buttons and keep doing the above anytime you get a hot answer. At the end the pc will tell you that her 2nd dynamic looks all different to her, that her past does not have a grip on her any more and that she feels positive about her future. This would be a very nice EP for the prepcheck as such. Additionally you may now clean up all the postulates found, by repeater technique, i.e. in the style of Postulate Auditing.

4.2 The Repair List ORIGIN AND PURPOSE A repair list (or correction list) is used when something goes wrong in session. It helps the auditor to find the source of the trouble. (See “Correction List”, Tech.Dict.) It consists of a number of questions which lay down a barrage to shoot anything which may have contributed to the session getting stuck. This may have been due to auditor mistakes, to unexpected maneuvers of the bank, or to so far unknown peculiarities of the pc. The auditor “assesses the list”, i.e. he reads it line by line from top to bottom in a good questioning tone of voice (“assessment TR-1”) and notes down the reads. During the assessment, the pc does not speak. Only when the auditor takes up a reading question, does the pc talk about it. Most questions are handled earlier-similar style, others demand the assessment of yet another repair list. About half a dozen repair lists are in use; some of them are of a general nature, others specifically aim at repairing certain auditing rundowns. Since the late seventies, it is quite customary for a professional auditor to whip out one or more repair lists whenever there is a spot of trouble in the session. As the handling of some repair lists demands yet other repair lists, you can imagine what a mess of incomplete cycles is created that way much to the suffering of the pc. Instead of live communication with the pc, the repair list had become the “universal solvent” for the C/S and the auditor. The attitude is: the pc has a case, or even IS a case, he has no idea of the Tech, he is in fact wholly incapable. This results more often than not in the C/S and the auditor trying to “handle” a case directly, whilst leaving the pc out of the game. Auditing is not done with the pc but for the pc. Under these circumstances the auditing comm cycle cannot go in at all, the needle gets dirty, the TA rises and sticks - time for yet another repair list . Ten years earlier, in the late sixties, there were no prefabricated solutions. Repair lists did not replace the thinking of the auditor or C/S yet. The review auditor had to study the folder and put his own repair rundown together by working out the right questions for this pc at this time. The whole wisdom of the ClassVIII tapes was brought to bear. When you watched one of the representatives of the “old days” work, it would look like this: He gets his data from the pc folder and maybe from an interview done additionally; then he analyses the structure of the case, writes a thesis of several pages about it and derives the necessary auditing commands from it. He uses no repair list as far as he can avoid it. His viewpoint is: how can I get this thetan in comm with his case so he can handle it? And all it takes him to do it are the simple tools Hubbard mentions in the ClassVIII course: two-way comm, ruds, rehabs, prepchecks, and engram running. A possible explanation for the increased use of repair lists may be that the CofS underwent such a rapid expansion in the early seventies that there weren’t enough repair specialists of Class VIII rank for each org. To become a ClassVIII auditor one had to be OTIII - a then rarely attained advanced auditing level which made the applicants even more scarce. Repair lists, apparently, were the solution to the problem. Now each Class IV auditor suddenly was in the position to do the 71

repairs for which formerly one would have needed to be a Class VIII Review Auditor. (Note that at that time, in 1971, Hubbard started issuing the C/S-Series in the attempt to communicate ClassVIII knowledge to Class IV C/Ses, or, in different words: in the attempt to water down a knowledge which really belongs to the level of OTIII, to render it harmless enough and digestible, to a non-OT III C/S. - SeeVol.X for the complete C/S-Series.) THE L1C AND HOW TO USE IT The L1C needs mentioning separately because it is quite a helpful tool for the beginning auditor. It is assessed like any other list but the handling of the individual lines needs no particular instruction. They are all taken E/S (earlier similar) to F/N. In other repair lists you find specific handling instructions for each line which makes them more difficult to master. Here is the procedure: you assess the list on the pc line by line with a good questioning assessment TR-1. In “Method 3” you take up each reading question as you come to it; in “Method 5” you assess the whole list once through and then take up the reads in order of their size. Either way: invite the pc to talk about the reading line, get his itsa and go E/S when there is no F/N. It is important that not only the question itself reads, but also the pc’s answer! When this is not so you may wind up in nowhere-land as you attempt to go earlier/similar: the pc doesn’t recall any earlier incidents and the TA climbs up and up. No completed cycle of action. Why? Because it wasn’t started right to begin with. Very unpleasant for all concerned. Usually the list is done “on something”, for example on an item which has come up previously in an earlier session or interview. This is called a “prefix”. “On the time you went to school, is there (LlC line)?” - Or: “On Joe, is there . . .?” - Or: “On the second dynamic . . .?” When no special terminal is used as a prefix one usually prefixes with “Recently . . .?” or “In your life . . .?” It is important that the prefix reads well else your list will be a very joyless affair for both pc and auditor. The prefix should be a terminal (person, place, thing, subject), a timespan or an activity - not an AESP-item. On AESP-items you had best run the underlying engram; on terminals etc. you can run ruds or L1Cs. The following basic techniques are used in an L1C: a question has read; to start with, the auditor discusses it briefly with the pc (2WC) until an incident is found. Then the pc recalls the incident in full detail (narrative) . When this does not lead to a key-out with F/N one goes E/S ( chains), goes over the earlier incident in the narrative style, goes E/S, etc. Take your time! Reduce the charge on each incident by going over it repeatedly, before going earlier/similar. (Have a look at the procedure diagrams in the appendix.) And please: do not expect an instant read on the question: “Is there an earlier similar problem?” (Or whatever the L1C-line may be . ) It doesn’t have to read now as it already read when you originally checked the command for charge. And that original read came from the basic on the chain. Now when the L1C-line doesn’t F/N on the first incident the pc told you, is there an E/S? Of course there is, whether it reads or not! You know it when you understand your basics. THE END PHENOMENON

A list is continued as long as there is non-confront or compulsive attention on the prefixed item. The EP is cognition on the terminal in question, VGIs, F/N. Of course, each line by itself is taken to F/N, too, but these are only sub-EPs. The final EP is on the whole thing. This may occur after just a few lines or it may require that you take the pc through the whole list a number of times. Sometimes the C/S wants to be dead-certain that there’s no scrap of charge left on the subject in question and orders “an L1C to F/Ning list” . He wants to see an F/N on each line. This is accomplished by first taking up each line which reads straight away and taking it to F/N, and then checking the remaining lines by means of the three buttons (suppressed, invalidated, not-ised) which will either cause a read or an F/N. Otherwise the three buttons are not used on a repair list unless there are no reads at all. (Which raises the question of whether the assessment-TRs of the auditor are any good, or if the C/S perhaps didn’t take the wrong approach to the case. ) (You can find an L1C in Vol. III, p. 203.)

4.3 The Rudiments “Rudiment, n. 2. A first or elementary principle of any art or science; as, the tenents of geometry.” -Webster’s Student Dictionary, 1943. With respect to auditing, the “elementary principles” of the definition above are contained in the six session rudiments: ARC break (ARCX), problem, missed withhold, overt, evaluation and invalidation. (For the theory of rudiments, see Volume 1, Part Two.) When you, as the auditor. begin a session, you ideally would like to see an F/N. It means that the pc’s attention is on nothing in particular; he is not distracted by anything and is ready to pay attention to the auditing command you are going to give him. His “rudiments are in”. In contrast to this, anyone who is sad, has a problem, a bad conscience from having done something he considers naughty, feels criticized or degraded, won’t be any good at concentrating on the task ahead - such as an auditing process, for example. For this reason you have “to put the ruds in on the pc”. The difficulties of life made the pc’s “ruds go out”; now you “put them in”. The usual C/S-instructions for this are: “Fly a rud if no F/N at session start”, or: “Fly six ruds to F/N”. In the former case the ruds are gone through in sequence and the first reading one is taken to F/N. Then one goes on to the main process for this session. In the latter case all ruds are repeatedly gone through in sequence till each one has an F/N. Only then does one go on to the main process. A further possibility would be to assess all six rudiments and handle them in the sequence of their chargedness. Taking rudiments to F/N handles locks, i.e. present time key-ins, and thereby disengages the pc’s attention from his life worries. In the Tech Dict. it says that rudiments are not auditing, but only serve to get the pc in session. This is only so, when you “fly a rud” at the start of a session in order to get an F/N. (“To fly a rud” means you take it to F/N.) However, when you put ruds in on a whole item or terminal, you get an actual repair rundown which is definitely auditing. (For references on ruds, see “Rudiments, Definition and Patter”, HCOB 11.8.1978, Vol.XI) A note to the expert: This strategy of “first ruds then the major process” can be justifiably argued about. When the pc, at the start of his auditing program, comes in all weighed down by his problems, one cannot expect him to F/N. If one were to audit his ruds now just for the sake of getting an F/N, it would be mere “cosmetics” . One wouldn’t have done more than brush off a few locks. One may have even kept the pc from saying what’s really troubling him! The pc has the natural urge to speak of nothing but his main difficulties. No matter whether one uses rudiments or any of the other processes described later, the main point is to work always in the center of the pc’s attention. As even the rudiments may serve this purpose, it would elevate them to the rank of “major process”! Which wouldn’t be a merely superficial cosmetic treatment but go right down to the core of the case. The separation between ruds and major process therefore seems fairly arbitrary, at least with regard to a Life Repair. At a later stage when the pc is in pretty good shape anyway - e.g. on the Grades 0-IV or a special rundown - the ruds would certainly be useful as a session preparation.

”NORMAL” RUDIMENTS Normal rudiments refer to a present time situation: an ARCX, a problem, a mw/h, an overt, an invalidation or an evaluation. The basic pattern of the procedure is: you ask the ruds question, e.g. “Have you committed an overt?”, get a read, and get the data from the pc. No F/N on this one: go earlier similar: “Is there an earlier similar overt?” Along the timetrack, earlier similar situations are arranged on a chain. As the pc goes down the chain the auditor makes sure he says all there is to each incident; finally there will be a key-out and an F/N. This is the correct EP, because in flying rudiments you are dealing with lock chains, not with engram chains, which would demand an erasure. In rudiments, the application of the basic techniques is similar to the L1C: a short 2WC - narrative (except for ARCXs as they are assessed see further down) - running chains. When the pc has a high TA you don’t fly his ruds. Why? Because something is already in restimulation. You don’t need to free his attention from present time concerns in order so that you can then restimulate some part of his bank with a process it’s happened already, so you find what it is and handle it. For this, the rudiment questions are not useful. (See the section on High TA.) As we have already pointed out concerning the L1C, one can make a fatal mistake at the point of picking up a reading question and when one goes E/S. As one picks up a reading question one must make very sure that the answer of the pc reads, too, otherwise one risks running an uncharged item and cannot complete the cycle of action. With regard to going earlier/ similar, one can often observe auditors rushing down rudiment chains by going E/S much to soon. This way the charge on the incident being run will not be reduced sufficiently. He will have trouble looking over the “hump” of the accumulated unhandled charge and - after a while - find no further E/S incidents. The chain goes dead with no F/N, rising TA and a hopeless auditor. Remember the old rule of itsa. You must always get the PC to say what IT is.(“Oh-it’s-aso-and-so!”) This way you get the exact consideration, the exact time, place, form and event. Don’t take just everything the pc says for an answer. Think of the definition of TR 3: only acknowledge when you have received an answer directly to the question; never acknowledge anything else. So: what exactly IS the problem? The W/H? The overt? The evaluation? The invalidation? - Get his “itsa” and you will get a good read on it. If it does not F/N, you’ll get your F/N on an earlier similar one. An ARCX is a restimulation of a loss (a secondary). When the pc is ARC-broken, he is angry or sad about something. Get what person, place or subject he is ARC-broken with. Keep it short. Then assess the ARCX, get the point which reads the most and indicate it to the pc. “Is it a break in Affinity - Reality - Communication - Understanding ?” Usually he brightens up on the indication. Continue by assessing Curious - Desired- Enforced - Inhibited - No - Refused on the point found. (To refresh your memory, see the beginning of Part Two in the previous book or in [1].) Supposing the biggest read on the previous assessment had been on “Reality”, you would ask: “Regarding this ARCX, were you curious about a reality?” “Was there a desired reality?” And so on. Find the most charged point on this assessment, too, and indicate it to the pc. Now that you have found and indicated what it is (“an enforced reality”), the pc’s ARC is to some degree re-established. Have him look at the incident in terms of what you indicated to him, 75

and he will have cognition’s. He never looked at it this way. He thought it was a “desired reality” but thinking that obviously didn’t help him. So obviously the assessment serves as a fast way to get the exact “what” of the ARCX. To continue, you go E/S to F/N, or - should the pc have had this ARCX for a while already - you handle it by Long Duration technique (see below) . Slow ARCX-assessment by TA: New PC’s usually have a hard time following the ARCX assessment. They haven’t understood the concepts involved and so you possibly won’t get any reads. Doing a slow assessment by TA (E-Meter Drill 23) makes it really easy on the pc and he gets grooved in on the procedure at the same time. You have him originate on each point of the A-R-C-U and the CD-E-I-N-R-assessment, note all reads, and after each assessment indicate the biggest reading point to him. After a few times through this slow procedure the pc will now be ready to follow the rapid assessment, with good reads. (No concept = no reads. -The other reason for no reads of course is: your TR-1 is too weak.) In contrast to the ARCX the problem is talked about, and very much so, in the 2WC-part of the handling, until one has found out what really is the matter. (This is done as well with all the following rudiments.)The auditor must be careful not to mix up all those difficulties the pc is telling him about, with the actual problem beneath it all. When he falls into this trap, he will believe that he has all the data now and go E/S much too soon. In everyday language it is quite customary to call any difficulty a “problem”, but in technical terms we have to differentiate very carefully between the two. A difficulty is nothing but an obstacle one has to overcome. As long as one is high-spirited and believes in one’s success, there are (technically speaking) no problems. The counter-intentions of others or the mest-universe are never a problem. Only when one begins to doubt oneself or the possibility of winning (2nd postulate), does a problem arise: in the form of indecision, withdraw and standstill. It is therefore the task of the auditor to peel the actual problem out of the difficulties the pc will tell him about. What was the pc’s intention when he set out to do a certain thing, and what is the intention he agreed to when he decided to stop doing this thing or decided to do something else? Note that both postulates are the pc’s. A counter-intention may seemingly come from the environment or a terminal, but in fact what you are looking at is an agreement made by the pc with the source of the counter-intention (Dn Axiom 118). It’s strictly 2nd postulate counter 1st postulate. Example: Father says: “No, you don’t go to the movies before you are grown up.” Son is 6 years old when this is said; now - at the time of the session - he is 35 years old and still doesn’t go to the movies. What counter-postulate did he form against his own wish that kept him from going to the movies up to the present day? - It’s not what the father said. It’s what he made up himself to agree with it! When you have established what the problem is and didn’t get an F/N, you go E/S. THE MISSED WITHHOLD AND THE OVERT Hubbard had a lot to say about this subject. It’s a whole philosophy on ethics and personal integrity. For the purpose of this text we will keep to the practical side of handling mw/h’s and overts. Should anyone wish more detailed information on this subject beyond what was said in Part Two, he is encouraged to consult the index of Vol.X or study “Academy Level II”. 76

Overts and w/hs are run the same way because both have in common that a) something was done or, respectively, withheld, and b) that the person wonders if he’s been found out or not. So there are two sections each for handling overts or withholds, with the emphasis on section a). Section b) is not always the case. After all, there are overts and withholds where you never felt found out afterwards and didn’t have to develop a bad conscience regarding anyone. Except for yourself perhaps: anytime you thought of it. Re a): You must get all of the w/h or the overt; that’s the ethics part of it. What has he DONE; time, place, form (the circumstances of the incident), and event (the actual sequence in the incident, what effect was caused, what the consequences were, what harm was done). One important aspect of looking at “event” as “consequences” is the possibility of examining harm done and whether in fact any harm was done! Too often whether something is an overt is accepted from someone else’s evaluation of it, e.g. the morals of one’s parents or society. So the auditing of overts should specifically include the opportunity to realize this. (The question: “In what way was that actually an overt?” can start this re-evaluation very effectively.) Where it is really an overt, looking at “event” as outcome, harm caused, encourages an examination of the ethics of it more immediately. Omitting this differentiation would certainly bring about the “false reads” often observed in this context (when it was not an overt), or a particular w/h may always come up again and again, although it has “F/Ned” already (when the pc never had the opportunity to re-evaluate the supposed overt). There is no “system” to it. It takes asking curious questions and relying on your E-meter and not acknowledging before the whole thing has become clear to you as the auditor. And you must get all of the facts - only then will the pc have confronted his own responsibility for the overt and w/h. So when it looks as if the pc had said all, you ask: “Is that all of it?”, and you want to get a read there. When the pc says “yes” and it is true, there should be another read there. When there is a read on only one of the two possibilities, that is still good enough. If neither of the two read you know you haven’t got all yet. If you’d now go E/S, you’d soon be in trouble: charge was restimulated and has been left behind: it will blur the earlier similar incidents and the chain will not come to an end. Re b): You must get who missed it, who almost found him out, who caused him a bad conscience. “Who almost found out about what you did?” “Who made you feel he knew it?” Pc: “Joe”. Auditor: “And what did Joe do that made you think he knew?” This is the social aspect of it; it’s cleaning up the pc’s ARCXs which formed on the basis of his mw/h or overt. In the first part you get the facts, in the second part you get who missed it. Always bear in mind: ‘“All ARCXs stem from missed withholds.” This principle leads to an important application: it allows the auditor to start from an ARCX and trace it right down to the underlying mw/h and overt, without taking the ARCX to an F/N first! He would get the pc “to dive straight through”, as it were. (See the chapter “Integrity”, section 10, in [17]; as well HCOB 30.11.1978, “Confessional Procedure”,Vol.XII) And mind you: don’t make the pc feel bad by a stem face or reproachful tone of voice, because of his withholds and overts! Stay calm and factual. Get the subjective rightness in them. 77

Despite the wrongness of the overt or the w/h there were rightnesses. He didn’t talk about his deeds as this would have endangered his self preservation. That’s a rightness. (See definition of w/h in the Tech Dict.) He committed the overt because he was sitting on a misunderstood word such as a set of false, uninspected values - which made it right to do what he did (see “cycle of an overt”, Tech Dict.). Or it is a datum held in high esteem by him - and in fact, on inspection it turns out to have been received through a method called “teaching by engrams”. It was father beating up Jonny whilst speaking wise words. Father is of course out of valence himself at this time, and makes himself the mouthpiece of his bank. This way father makes sure that his bank is properly transferred to the next generation. It’s not in the blood, as folk wisdom has it. It’s in the bank! Not only through the application of fatherly violence can Jonny pick up father’s valence and along with it uninspected attitudes, but as well through his admiration for father. Jonny may, for example, wind up one day at court for repeated theft in department stores. “Why did you steal?”, asked the judge. “They have plenty of them anyway!”, says Jonny. End of hearing. The auditor would ask: “And where does this idea come from?” In the end it turns out that father once, when Jonny was three years old, had taken a few apples from the farmer’s apple tree without permission, and mother had said: “But William! You can’t do that!” Whereupon he shrugged magnanimously, took a bite with relish from a stolen apple, and said: “They have plenty of them anyway!” Who was the winner here? Father. Whom did Jonny admire? Father. Whose valence did he take on? Father’s, of course. Mother didn’t make herself heard successfully, so she was the loser. As a further possibility there is of course the combination of the above with a real implant, which makes the whole matter even harder to resolve. The common denominator is, in any case, that the pc sits on a false datum, is identified with the source of it, has gone out of valence to it and commits any amount of overts on that basis which he has no trouble at all justifying. Naturally, none of these justifications make the overts or w/hs right. But they help the auditor to understand the pc! And that’s his job, after all. The real and only overt, by the way, is having violated one’s own integrity by making a 2nd postulate. That’s contra-survival against oneself to start with, but later spreads out over all of the dynamics. When you have dug as deep as that, your pc will have some big cognition’s! (See the definitions of “W/H” and “Cycle of an Overt” in the Tech Dict., as well of “Murder Routine”.) INVALIDATION AND EVALUATION Inval and Eval are the easiest ones on both pc and auditor. Just itsa and E/S itsa. But don’t sell them off cheaply ! Self-inval is the bottom line to the whole case ! If he hadn’t violated his integrity he wouldn’t have committed the overt of forming a 2nd postulate and not gotten into the predicament of withholding it from others and himself. And that’s the point where the thetan starts digging his own grave! As usual, do get a reading itsa on both inval and eval before you go earlier similar. (See the appendix for a schematic graph on the handling of rudiments. ) 78

RUDIMENTS OF LONG DURATION (LD RUDS) LD Ruds refer to a situation which has “always been like this”, “all my life”, “never been any different”, etc. The attention of the pc is not on a present time situation but on a time span of considerable magnitude. Here one cannot simply go E/S after a few words about the matter. That would be too fast; it wouldn’t be in proportion to the magnitude of the charge. Instead, one must find out when exactly the specific out-rud situation began. So instead of asking for “E/S?” one asks for and gets the earlier beginning (“E/B”), lockscans to PT, asks for yet another earlier beginning and another, each time lock-scanning to PT, until one has found the exact beginning of the situation. (“I always had money problems, all my life, and it started when I got my first pocket money and it wasn’t enough to buy a lollipop with.”) This will result in great relief for the pc, followed by a BD and perhaps an F/N. When you do not get an F/N at this point you must decide whether you want to go about it thoroughly or just quickly finish it off with a simple key-out. In the latter case it would be enough to Date/Locate this moment, to F/N. (This process is described in a later section.) In the former, you would have to continue lock-scanning till the pc has found the basic, and then let him run that incident narratively until it is erased and the postulate in it found. It is not recommended to ask for an “E/S out-rud of LD?” as that would get you into a different postulate chain. Each LD out-rud describes a unique situation, really, and should be handled as such, i.e. by analyzing its specific postulate structure. When the auditor, in running normal ruds, gets originations from the pc which indicate LD Ruds are out, he of course switches over to the LD-method. When the auditor has a specific C/S to do LD Ruds, the command would be for example: “Do you have an ARCX of long duration?” - or: “Is there a problem you have had for a very long time?” LD RUDS AND FINDING POSTULATES LD Ruds, as we have seen, are an excellent way to dig up basics and the postulates contained within them. These can then be worked on further in the style of Postulate Auditing. LD Ruds therefore go way beyond the scope of normal rudiments which are designed to merely key out currently troublesome situations. The procedure of finding postulates is now shown in detail: ARCX: First get its beginning, assess it at the time of the beginning and indicate to the pc what you found, then have the pc look over his time track at all later similar items (e.g. “a refused affinity”) with lock scan procedure. It may even go down to an earlier beginning now. Find out what he thought, decided, postulated or intended at the very moment when his affinity was refused. This way you get the 2nd postulate.

Problem: Get what he wants (1st postulate) and what exactly keeps him from doing it; find out when this happened the first time (exact beginning) and then peel the exact thought out of the basic incident which made him agree that it wasn’t possible to get or do what he wanted (2nd postulate). Missed Withhold: Get as much of the w/h as is easily available to the pc, trace it back to its beginning, all the while getting more and more of the w/h until you have it ALL. Then find out how withholding what he did aided his survival. Now you have the 2nd postulate, the “rightness” consideration. This may F/N. Then, even after the F/N, look for who missed it. This is an entirely different matter: it’s the ARCXs which occurred as a consequence of the w/h. Lockscan these ARCXs and get an F/N on this, too. (Quite often the pc will tell you who missed it even whilst talking about the actual w/h; therefore the “missed”-part may be no more than a mop-up of bits left over from before.) Overt Get what he did, trace it back to the first time. Find out from him how committing the overt was a solution to a problem. Then have the pc find out how doing what he did went against his own integrity; how it was wrong by his own standards. (It must be, else there wouldn’t be any charge.) Don’t buy any hogwash about morals and “everybody thinks”. That’s not the overt. It’s how he violated his own principles, maxims or policies - whether they were invented by him personally, or adopted by him from others, doesn’t matter, as long as he considered them his own. And then find out what went through his mind when he did it - that’s his 2nd postulate; that’s the overt. Perhaps you can even find out whose idea he had taken over there, i.e. into whose valence he went then. Eval/lnval: Easy. Find the earliest time the pc received the particular evaluation or invalidation, then ask him what he thought of himself at that moment, and you have your 2nd postulate. NORMAL RUDS: THEIR LIABILITY Normal ruds may very easily lead over into ruds of long duration, because the present time restimulation of the normal rud may not be a “first ever” concerning the situation in question. He has an ARCX with his aunt, ok, but is it the first time? No, he’s always had trouble with his aunt. So it may soon go into LD, either immediately or after once or twice going E/S. Now supposing it were really the first time he has an ARCX with his aunt, you’d of course handle it by assessment and then go E/S. Now here is the difficulty: what does earlier similar mean? Well, you may say, similar is whatever the pc considers so. Good. But this may lead you anywhere! Going E/S contains the liability of the pc going “by association”. He may wind up in nowhere-land, find nothing earlier and feel generally bored with the whole thing. (With the TA creeping up and up.) He is going earlier, yes, but what is the logical thread? What’s holding the chain together? Against what is the similarity measured? As there is not a clearly defined Attitude, Emotion, Sensation or Pain (AESP), auditor and pc may not necessarily know what to relate to. Let us stay with the example of the aunt and suppose it were a “refused affinity”. So what is the pc to do as he goes earlier similar? He is clearly not intended to just find an earlier similar 80

incident of “refused affinity” as the next auditing command asks him to find a new ARCX, an earlier similar one, which is assessed newly. The definition of “ITSA” presents the answer to this theoretical dilemma. As soon as the pc has found the exact ARCX (or whatever the rud may be), as soon as he has found exactly what it is, he will have a stable datum to work from when he goes E/S. This may occur after the ARCXassessment, too. You have found, by assessment, that it is a “refused affinity” . You have indicated the charge on it to the pc. The pc does not brighten up particularly. So you ask him to look at this ARCX in terms or “refused affinity” and to tell you about it. Now he will discover an aspect which so far has escaped his attention, he will really brighten up and say: “That’s it! That’s the moment when I felt really upset! The moment I was giving her the present and she just snarled at me! I felt totally refused.” At this moment the whole thing makes sense to the pc. He has made the data found in the assessment come alive for himself. And now he will know what to look for when you give him the E/S command. So do take the time to get a proper itsa.

REPETITIVE RUDS The C/S-instruction: “Repetitive Ruds till they F/N on call” means that you fly six ruds (“on life” or on a particular item), each to F/N. Then you run them again. This time some will F/N “on call”, i.e. they F/N right after giving the command, without even a read. Then you run the sequence a third time, omitting those which have F/Ned on call on the run before, to forego an over-run. (An O/R means going on too long, past the end phenomenon.) Continue this way until they have all F/Ned on call. ”FALSE” RUDS Further up, in the section on the E-meter, the subject of “false reads” was mentioned. It’s the read you get because the pc feels invalidated or evaluated by the question, or that your question restimulates evaluation/invalidation of LD because he’s been asked the same stupid question so many times before. (“You look so worried - anything wrong?”, when he actually feels fine.) It means the person received a false indication by the one asking the question. If this happened many times to someone throughout his life he will develop the general feeling that nobody understands him and he will feel uncomfortable with people as they keep misinterpreting how he actually feels. To handle this case-situation, you just fly 6 “false” ruds on him, repetitively till they F/N on call. “Did anyone say/think/assume you had a (rud) when you didn’t have one?” Run per E/S or LD; whatever applies best. As a result, the pc will feel very rehabilitated regarding his social life. (This is also very valuable as a clean up of past bad auditing which unfortunately does happen not infrequently.) REVERSE RUDS This is a useful process when you have a pc who lives in a persistent state of panic and overwhelm because he thinks “they are after me to get me”. You just reverse the ruds flow and 81

make him confront what people are actually thinking about him. “Does anyone have an ARCX with you? A problem with you? A w/h from you? An overt on you? Feel evaluated/invalidated by you?” Run per E/S or LD as suits the situation best. This cleans up the pc’s considerations about his social field like you wouldn’t believe. FLOWS AND QUAD RUDS In auditing, the action of theta (reaching and withdrawing) is looked at in terms of four flows, i.e. the flow of mest particles or attention units from one terminal to the other. Flow one (F1) is the inflow or motivator, flow two (F-2) the outflow or overt, flow three (F-3) the flow between two people with oneself being the witness; flow zero (F-0) goes from oneself back to oneself in circular fashion (therefore “zero”). The “quad” in “Quad Ruds” means “quadruple”, “fourfold”. When the C/S orders Quad Ruds to be done, you run six ruds on F-1, then on F-2, then on F-3, then on F-0.You could do it as a general action without any prefix to the command, but it works best on a specific highly charged terminal. Example: F-1:” Does Joe have a (rud) with you?” - F-2: “Do you have a (rud) with Joe?” - F-3A: “Does Joe have a (rud) with others?” - F-3B: “Do others have a (rud) with Joe?” F-0: “Do you have a (rud) with yourself because of Joe?” This process may be mindblowing; or it may be dead boring. Therefore, use it selectively.

4.4 Rehabilitation Procedure As most students ask the same questions concerning the HCOB 19 December 1980, “Rehab Tech”, one may conclude that this bulletin presents a simple procedure in a confusing way. The following section may serve as a clarification.

THE PURPOSE OF A REHABILITATION Rehabilitation directly aims at re-establishing wins and abilities which the pc has lost because he went into agreement with an invalidation or suppression. (See Dn Axiom 118.)The result of a good rehab is: more certainty for the pc, less self-invalidation and doubt, past purposes unearthed and validated. His succumb postulates have been detected and as-ised; he is again ready “to go for it”. THEORY AND DEFINITIONS Arranged on a timetrack, the following three points come in this sequence (from early to present time): first the key-out - then the release or win - then the key-in. Let us look at this for a moment: the pc has made his 1st postulate (“I want to learn swimming”) . Later some water gets into his lungs. This is painful (engram) he makes the 2nd postulate (“I’m suffocating”). That’s the absolute basic. After this, he never goes swimming again and gets a tight feeling in the throat when he sees lakes or swimming pools. Then, because of favorable circumstances (friends, nice holiday), he overcomes his fear by his own strength, goes swimming and discovers that he can do it! That is a release. What had to fall away from him to make it possible is the 2nd postulate of “I’m suffocating”. The moment it fell off him: that’s the key-out. For the next few years he manages to swim well; then, one night, he falls out of a rowing boat and panics. And that is the end of his ability to swim. That is the key-in. The above may be interpreted in two ways: either the old 2nd postulate (“I’m suffocating”) - which was just pushed away but never as-ised - came back, or he made a new 2nd postulate (“I’m lost!”) Only the first of the two, strictly speaking, would be a key-in, i.e. a locking-on of an already existing counter postulate; the latter really would be a new GPM on the chain, complete with a newly made counter-postulate. This terminological differentiation, however, is not generally made. Both of the above versions are usually called a key-in. The key-in is simply the point in time when a period of release comes to an end. So, in brief: the point of key-out is defined as something unwanted (a 2nd postulate) going away; the point of key-in is defined as something unwanted (the same or another 2nd postulate) coming in on one. The release is the stretch of time when one is in full possession of one’s ability, i.e. when one is working on the basis of one’s 1st postulate. The duration of this varies considerably, depending on circumstances.

Mind you, although it’s always a postulate which keys in or out the pc will not necessarily be aware of this. He may give you any amount of AESP-items instead. (“A” items, attitudes, are postulates, though.) Example: “Suddenly I had this terrible pain in my chest and I couldn’t swim any longer”. Of course, you have to work with what he is giving you, particularly as long as it reads well. There are two distinctly different handlings. There is the key-out variety which works on the basis of prepcheck technique, and there is the erasure variety which works on the basis of Postulate Auditing. The key-out variety demands less skill from the auditor and is useful for light actions, like rehabilitating the EP of a session just after one over-ran it. But when the key-in has led to deep-seated failed purposes or heavy somatics, the Postulate Auditing variety will be the tool to use. The key-out method is of temporary value only as the pc may key in again when life is sufficiently nasty to him. After all, his 2nd postulates were not erased but only destimulated and “switched off”. The plug has been pulled out of the bank. But the bank can plug itself back in on the basis of the very same 2nd postulates! This of course won’t happen when you have erased the 2nd postulates by Postulate Auditing technique. The pc ideally - is down to his 1st postulate and acts and lives by it. All past 2nd postulates have been as-ised. He can’t key in - but he can make a new 2nd postulate when there is more counter-effort in life than he can take. (See “randomity” in Dianetic Axiom 144 and others.)

THE PROCEDURE BY KEY-OUT In the actual rehabilitation process you run the three points in question in a different sequence from how they are arranged on the timetrack: first the release point, then the key-out before it, then the key-in after it. Why? - Because the thetan is less interested in his bank than in his abilities. As the rehab procedure addresses lost abilities, the release obviously holds the most interest for the thetan. Rehabilitating the release means putting the pc’s attention on his 1st postulate. That’s why it is looked at first. With good TRs (TR 2!) and some good luck the process may already come to an EP as soon as the main point of interest (the release) has been found and acknowledged. No F/N at this point means that the release (i.e. the 1st postulate) is buried under much charge accumulated through suppressing, invalidating and not-acknowledging it (all of which are 2nd postulates). A simple acknowledgment of the release apparently is not sufficient to make the pc overcome this charge. Therefore one has to audit these “three buttons” repetitively. “On the release, has anything been suppressed/invalidated/not acknowledged?” They are not being assessed! As in prepchecking, you ask the pc for each one, get your read on the question or on his answer and run it repetitively till it goes flat or F/Ns. As the pc is itsa-ing he is blowing charge; the release is coming back up to the surface; finally it’s all cleaned up and there is your F/N. 1st postulate back in full swing. No F/N after the three buttons on the release: there must be more charge elsewhere. There are two options for this, two masses the pc has not yet perceived and fully acknowledged: either the mass which fell off him (key-out) and made it possible for him to go release, or the mass which came on to him after the release and ended the period of release (key-in). Run your pc through these two points, find out exactly what A or E or S or P keyed out or keyed in and discharge it by 84

use of the buttons. The rehab will come to an EP at either of the two points, with cognition, F/N and VGIs. When you find the release, key-out or key-in item very heavily charged, running three buttons only may not be sufficient to reduce the charge. There is no reason why you shouldn’t pull out your list of prepcheck buttons and put in some more buttons in order to help the pc through. One may argue that “suppress, invalidate, not acknowledged” are closely aligned with alter-is and not-is of Axiom 11 and that one therefore shouldn’t do more than those three buttons. But this argument doesn’t hold water as all of the 20 prepcheck buttons, too, are built around Axiom 11! So if it’s ok to do the one it must be ok to do the other as well. Indicating charge: Increase of certainty is achieved by indicating charge to the pc during the rehab. It is a form of acknowledgment (TR-2). One has to use it right; when you do it too often or unnecessarily the session will slow down and the pc grow impatient. You don’t indicate each and every read - only when he feels uncertain about something. It makes him get the feeling that he’s “spot on” with his originations. At the moment that he validates himself for his wins, he will be bigger and stronger than the bank. -This is the EP, with cognition, VGIs and F/N . Getting the exact item: Without itsa nothing goes during a rehab! -The pc has to originate fully on each item (release, keyout, key-in) until he has said it, till he has hit the bull’s eye. It will be a postulate or an AESP-item. Here are some typical examples; for the release: “I just knew I could do it!”; for the key-out: “I lost the feeling that I’m too stupid for this”, or: “suddenly this sadness went away”; for the key-in: “I felt like a zombie and gave up”, “I felt my head was bursting, so I couldn’t concentrate and failed the exams.” - It’s not what happened: “As I walked down the road I felt sort of nice.” That would be a mere situation. You are looking for what he postulated or felt emotionally or physically, and for the exact formulation of it. You want the exact wording, and that is what you audit the three buttons on. In getting the exact wording the auditor goes for the biggest possible read (ideally LFBD, of course) and pays attention to the indicators of the pc. When the pc has given his itsa down to the exact wording you’ll see it on his face and on the needle. And THAT you acknowledge - be it with good TR 2 or with a formal indication of charge. EP trouble: When you have done all the steps and there is no F/N, you have the pc once again look at each item (release, keyout, key-in) . This serves to orient him, particularly when the session has been long. In a way, you “rehab the session” by doing so. When this doesn’t give you an F/N either, there’s only one possibility left: the release was overshadowed by an out-rud at the time it occurred (or slightly earlier). This out-rud must be found. So you run as many ruds as needed “concerning the release” until the pc goes VGIs on the release and the process is complete. Should even that not give you an EP-type F/N, or should the action become unworkable, then you are auditing too late on the chain. There must be an earlier beginning to this release, or an E/S release. Find the E/B or E/S, and do the action on that item. (You ought to have found that out on the initial question: “When was the release point?”, though! When the answer the pc gave then didn’t read well you could have guessed you were too late. - See further down, “Command Sequence and Patter” .) 85

A note on the EP: Usually the first F/N counts as the EP. The pc has his release back and that’s enough. You don’t want to push him back into the bank by further auditing. However, if the indicators of the pc aren’t quite so good, and the F/N isn’t quite as wide as you’d expect it from this pc, and if the TA is rising after the F/N - then there is still some charge cooking somewhere. So just carry on. Supposing you had - of the three possible points only addressed the release so far, and had got an F/N on a rising TA, one or both of the yet unhandled ones would still need looking at, or the rudiment steps needs doing, or there is an E/B or an E/S. - Just do the next step in the sequence, and it’ll all clear up. When the pc is VGIs on the whole rehab and says so but the TA is rising right after the F/N, there may be some other O/R (overrun) coming up already, or a protest or a failed purpose. When a short two-way comm does not help you to find out what is going on, you had better end the session at this point and consult your C/S. REHAB BY KEY-OUT: COMMAND SEQUENCE AND PATTER 0. Instruction to the pc: In case of an in-session O/R you simply say: “We are now going to rehabilitate the point when you felt released on this process. “When you pick up an item from the introductory interview, you tell the pc so: “In your interview you mentioned that you feel an overwhelming sensation of happiness when you listen to music and that you regret that the feeling always passes away so soon. -We are now going to rehabilitate this state.” 1. Find the win or release till it reads then get the exact wording of WHAT it was and you’ll get an even better read. Patter: “On the process (or subject) of X, was there a release?” (Let the pc tell you. ) “When was that?” “Where was it?” “What exactly would you call this win or release?” “On (exact wording of the release), has anything been: - suppressed?” - invalidated?” - not acknowledged?” (Each reading button repetitively till flat or F/N.) 2. No F/N on 1: find the key-out before the release till it reads, get exactly WHAT it is and a bigger read. Patter: “What keyed out before the release?” (Let the pc tell you.) “When?” “Where?” “What would you call that exactly?” “On (exact wording of the key-out) has anything been: - suppressed?” 86

- invalidated?” - not acknowledged?” (Each reading button repetitively till flat or F/N.) 3. No F/N on 2: find the key-in which ended the time of release to a read, get exactly WHAT keyed in and a bigger read. Patter: “What keyed in after the release?” (Let the pc tell you. ) “When?” “Where?” “What would you call that exactly?” “On (exact wording of the key-in), has anything been: - suppressed?” - invalidated?” - not acknowledged?” (Each reading button repetitively till flat or F/N.) 4. No F/N on 3: Have the pc look at the release, the key-out and the key-in and invite him to tell you more about each point. Patter: “Have another look at the release. -Would you like to tell me some more about it?” (Same with key-out and key-in.)

5. No F/N on 4: Check for out-ruds concerning the release. Patter: “Concerning the release, was there: - an ARCX?” - a Problem?” - a missed withhold?” - an overt?” (Run only as many ruds as needed to complete the rehab.)

REHAB BY POSTULATE AUDITING In many cases a rehab doesn’t just concern a session win (in which case the procedure by key-out would serve just fine) but touches on deep-seated failed purposes in the pc. As we have seen, the moment a 2nd postulate is made the lid is put on one’s 1st postulate. This is not a key-in, a relative basic, it’s the absolute basic. In the “rehab by key-out” style you were working on what the pc gave you right away, i.e. on the latest release. You worked with buttons to attain a key-out. In the “rehab by Postulate Auditing” you 1. search for the earliest release the pc can find; 2. get all the postulates which keyed out or in; 3. erase all incidents connected with these postulates. 1. Pc: “I always wanted to become a concert pianist, but in the end I had to give up on it.” (Failed purpose). -Auditor: “Did you ever go release (or: have any wins) on playing the piano?” (Big read.) - PC (brightens up): “Yes, when I won a contest at school and was awarded the first prize.” - Auditor has the pc lock-scan all later times when he felt good about playing the piano, asks for E/B and finally gets the first time the pc made this postulate and had full certainty regarding it. This was either early in this life or in an earlier life. If the pc has VGIs but no F/N, a Date/Locate (see section below) will do the job. There will be no key-out preceding this, of course. It’s the moment the 1st postulate was made, so it isn’t even a release, really. There is nothing earlier. In this case you would only have to find the key-in points following later (see below). More usually, though, the pc will not manage to go all the way down his track to the time he actually made this 1st postulate; he will give you a later time, and that would be a release with both key-out before and key-in afterwards. Result of step 1: you have rehabilitated a release where the pc knew with great certainty that he wanted to become a pianist and knew that he was going to make it, too. This may or may not F/N. No F/N means: key-out or key-in are pressing in on the pc. In either case, do the remaining steps. You want a general erasure, not just a momentary key-out. 2. Regarding the release found, find out what keyed out to make it possible. If the pc gives an attitude (postulate) right away - great! Repeater tech on it. If he gives you an E, S or P: lockscan the item to an F/N. Note down all the postulates. Despite the F/N, do step 3, too.

3. Auditor: “Tell me all the times when you felt it was impossible to make it as a piano player.” - Lock-scan down to earliest key-in. Again, make sure to take notes of all the postulates the pc gives you. Result of step 2 and 3: Absolute basics found and erased. 4. Now take up all postulates in order of read size and audit them by repeater technique, the last step of Postulate Auditing. Result: the pc’s own and foreign-made postulates are as-ised, all incidents, entities and valences connected with them have been erased. From now on, nothing should interfere any more with the PC’s following up his purposes and plans. As long as he does what needs doing to take him there! Because it won’t happen all by itself. Please note that the sequence may be different at times. Quite often in step 1, the pc will start talking about his key-ins right away. That’s fine, take it up and handle as described in step 3. Then put the other steps in. Always work along the lines of the pc’s interest and you’ll be all right. The bank will “defoliate” all by itself.

REHAB BY COUNTING “Rehab by counting” is a shortcut method used to obtain a quick key-out concerning a subject. It is very useful when you just want to handle surface charge and leave a more thorough handling till later. It is excellent for handling false reads, for keying out the aberrated, compulsive variety of “pleasure moments”, induced by drugs, sex and alcohol (see Tech Dict.), and for rehabilitating light and repeated releases. All of this needs a light approach. The procedure: Pc: “I feel so great playing the piano; I really love it!” - LF. (Note that this statement is made in a light mood. Therefore a light approach is justified.) Auditor: “Give me the first figure that comes to your mind: how often did you feel great playing the piano?” Pc: “163 times.” - F. Auditor: “I’d like to indicate to you, you felt great playing the piano 163 times. This figure is correct. “ - BD F/N VGIs. It may not always go so easily. Here is a complication you are going to encounter often: Pc: “163 times (F). But that can’t be as I haven’t played more often than maybe 20 times all in all!” (Rise) Auditor: “That’s all right. You see, in auditing we duplicate and understand what the bank has to say, no matter if it’s true for your present life or not. The bank is an aberrated machine; it may give aberrated answers. When these answers are charged they are important, so we take them up. - I’d like to indicate to you that 163 is the right answer. There are 163 pleasure moments connected with playing the piano!” - LF. No F/N. Pc smiles but is somewhat uncertain.

Auditor: “Please acknowledge the bank around you that 163 is the right answer; do it in a loud voice. “ - Pc does, laughs, LFBD F/N. Note that the auditor acknowledges the pc’s answer in a general way. He does not say: “You had 163 pleasure moments in playing the piano”, but: “There are 163 . . .” etc. This way he not only acknowledges the pc himself but as well all the entities and valences who have responded to the auditing command and contribute to the total figure of 163 (whereas 20 is correct for the pc). In the light of this, here is a final variation: Pc: “163 times (F). But that can’t be as I haven’t played more often than maybe 20 times (sF) all in all!” (Rise) Auditor gives his little explanation about duplicating and understanding the bank, and then says: “I would like to indicate that 163 is correct for the bank, and 20 times is correct for you!” BDVGIs F/N. Why this handling? Because in this case the “20 times” read as well as the “163”; so both need acknowledging separately. The reference for this approach is given by the auditing comm cycle (Tech Dict.), where the pc is seen as separate from the bank and consulting it as if it were a data manual - which in fact it is. There is nothing wrong with reminding the pc occasionally that in auditing one is dealing with bank data and not necessarily with his data. This keeps auditing from getting too serious and the pc from introverting into the “wisdom’s” the bank has to offer. As well there are the important references of Axiom 29 and Factor 28, whereby you must assign the correct authorship to a particle, mass or energy so as to make it blow.

4.5 Dating And Locating (D/L) THEORY Dating and Locating (D/L) is a very fast and direct method to produce a key-out. One gets the exact date and location of the earliest beginning of the incident the pc is recalling. This usually is a relative basic. A D/L therefore produces a key-out by snapping the link between absolute basic and pc. The GPM gets disconnected. A D/L works on time and place only; form and event are only considered as much as they are needed to correctly get time and place. Dating & Locating is useful to blow charge off somatics the pc may have had in the past: “As a child I had pneumonia”. Or: “I sometimes got panicky in elevators”. You have to find the beginning; that’s all there is to it. Once you have it you can do your D/L. For rehabilitating failed purposes it is very useful: you D/L the first moment the pc postulated his purpose (1st postulate) with the absolute certainty that this was what he was going to be or do or have, and that he was going to make it. (“On the day after my fourth birthday I just knew I wanted to be a farmer. It was exactly at 10:27 and 13 seconds. I stood on top of the staircase and still had the doorknob in my hand”. ) Likewise it can be used to blow a stop off (2nd postulate). Just find the earliest moment the pc can recall of encountering the stop and D/L it. It works nicely. (“When my father said I should become a school teacher and not a farmer. I was twelve years old; 1956, 8th of May, at 2:23 and 12 seconds; I stood next to the mirror in the lounge, right between him and the door.”) Nothing should keep you from finding the postulate in the incident, too; it’s the postulate, after all, which creates the stop. D/L serves as a shortcut in lockscanning. Instead of going through the lock chain again and again and again until it’s flat, and then finding the basic and running it again and again and again till it’s erased, you may do a D/L and get the earliest beginning of the earliest incident right away, resulting in a key-out with VGIs and F/N. -The choice of the tool you are going to use depends on your thoroughness of approach. Some things you want to treat lightly only - that’s where the D/L comes handy. It does depend as well on the pc’s confront level. A pc who can’t look down his timetrack deeply enough will get very shallow key-outs with a Date/Locate. Date/Locating is a very light action. It takes good TRs to do it, particularly a friendly TR-0 and TR-2. -This is because the lack of certainty in the pc must be made up for by the certainty of the auditor. More than anywhere else, the auditor’s presence is upholding the session here.

PROCEDURE (0) In the earlier part of the session or in the interview, you have established something which you are now going to date and locate. Usually it is the beginning of an incident. Example: pc has had flu or has it now. So you start out by saying: “Tell me about (whatever the condition is you want to D/L)”.

(1) Get the exact beginning of the incident. Ask “Is there an earlier beginning?” (E/B), until you have the exact beginning. You can tell when you have it because you will get a good read on it and the pc will brighten up. Getting the exact beginning is important because all things start with a postulate. But don’t push for it as not all pcs are equally able to find the postulate right away. Just take what the pc gives you easily. - When the pc has found the beginning exactly and there is no F/N, the exact date will get the F/N. (2) “When was that?” (i.e. the exact beginning.) The pc will answer with some form of date; it may not always be a calendar type date. (“In 1963” as an example for a calendar type date; “When I was 6” and “Just after the thunderstorm” as other acceptable ways of dating.) (3) “When was it exactly?” Get the pc to narrow it down within the time system he started out with. Indicate each part of the date he is giving which reads. Encourage him to be as precise as he possibly can. (In May - sF; the 17th sF; 3:30 pm -T; no. 3:34! - F; 3:34 and 28 seconds!” - LF.) Usually the pc will refuse to believe that one can be this precise. Use good and friendly TR-2 and he’ll be amazed to see how finely he can get it narrowed down. -At some point there will be a LF or a BD, and an F/N. (4) No F/N on (3): indicate the complete date to the pc in the sequence he gave it. It will F/N now. (5) No F/N after full indication: “On that time, was anything suppressed? - invalidated? not-ised?” (Each reading button repetitive to flat or F/N.) There will be a correction of the date; or some detail in the incident will come up which hasn’t been looked at ever. Then the rest of the charge on the date will blow and it will F/N. (6) With or without F/N on the dating step: do the locating step now. The end product of the action is to blow the mass completely. You have discharged it sufficiently on the dating step already; when there was no F/N on it, the locating step will complete the job. If you had a big BD and wide F/N and VGIs on the dating step you may have blown the complete mass already. - Do the locating step anyway, just to be sure. But careful! Don’t O/R! Don’t make him pull back what he has blown already! Command: “With your hand still on the can, take one finger off and point m the direction of the incident where it seems to be now.” Keep the pc from going “rational” or “geographical”. Encourage him to point to the first thing which comes to his mind, to do it intuitively. This will give you a good read. The pc in most cases points directly to the ridge, not to the real or imagined geographical location of the incident. He will point upward or downward, left or right - wherever the ridge is situated. Less often the pc will locate himself in the actual incident, i.e. himself as a thetan. It does happen, for example when he went exterior after his own death and felt all confused about his location.

(7) “What’s the distance to that point? Do the same procedure as in the dating step (3); down to the millimeter if needed. Indicate in full at the end (4); use the three buttons when there is no F/N after the full indication (5) . There will be a final blow after this step, and a final F/N. (8) If there is still no F/N, there must be an earlier similar time (E/S) or an earlier beginning (E/B).You didn’t get the first time or the exact beginning right when you started the action. Don’t lose your TRs over this. Do step (1) again and go through the process in the same way as before. It will work now. Note: The meter reads as soon as the pc reaches with his attention towards the right item in his bank. So pointing out reads as he is looking can help him find the hidden answer. This is called “steering” (E-Meter Drill 21). Use the meter for steering purposes only when the pc doesn’t know further or is uncertain. If you do steer, keep it light; just enough to get him going again. - Do not make the pc depend on the meter, whether in a D/L or any other process. You want to create certainty of self in the pc, not meter dependence. (References: Meter dependence: Tech Vol.V, p. 334. D/L Procedure: XII-233. General background: Axioms 11,12;17,18,19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24; 30, 38.)

4.6 Listing And Nulling (L&N) Listing and Nulling are two aspects of the same process. Listing was already explained earlier on, in the chapter “Introduction to the various Techniques”. One asks a question which is formulated in such a way that it allows only a single item as an answer, the pc gives a list of possible answers until he hits upon the answer of all answers. This is “ THE item”. The auditor “gives the pc his item”, and if it hasn’t F/N’ed yet, it will F/N now. Should it not work out so nicely, the auditor must use “nulling”. He repeatedly assesses the reading items on the list until they all except one, stop reading. They have become null-items. (See as well E-Meter Drill 24.)The last one remaining is considered by elimination -THE item. Nulling has its risks, for once the pc begins to lose certainty or to lack interest in the subject, your L&Naction will stall! Therefore it is best to find the item already on the listing step when the charge on the subject is still good and hot. Even without nulling, listing doesn’t always work as smoothly as in the icecream-example. Take a question like: “In your life, who or what would you like to help?” This question is likely to hit the core of the whole case, provided it is well placed. Here, however, the pc will not be ready and prepared to rattle off half a dozen answers and then come up with the item. Oh no! He will think and figure and sweat and grumble and even claim that he cannot possibly find a proper answer to the question! It may go on like this for an hour. Without excellent TR-4 from the side of the auditor the session will come to a dead standstill. And precisely that is the difficulty of L&N: it is too simple an action! The auditor can’t hide behind some tech. He has his question (which of course has to read) and his TRs - nothing else. There is a specialty we ought to deal with here: sometimes it happens that the pc answers with a plural-item instead of a singular-item, and that it F/N’s. Example: in the interview the pc complained about the frightening state of the Earth in political and ecological respects. The C/S decides to get right down to the bottom of the matter and writes the following question into the program: “Who or what would ruin the planet?” (This wording was chosen in accordance with an origination of the pc done during the interview and accompanied by a BD.) PC: “The human race!” BD, F/N, GIs. (Not VGIs.) The auditor does a “represent list” now, in order to reduce the answer to a singular item: “Who or what would represent ‘the human race’ to you?” PC (a woman): “All men!” Again with BD, F/N, GIs. Auditor: “Who or what would represent ‘all men’ to you?” Pc searches around a bit and then, to the surprise of both, comes up with the answer: “Joseph Stalin!” and starts to laugh uncontrollably and compulsively. Big BD, big F/N, VGIs. Later it turns out that she, in her life just before this one, was a victim of Stalin’s agricultural reforms and died in this context. The original L&N question obviously beamed down to a deep and heavy layer of charge which was hidden under present-day restimulators (global ecological problems) and could only be unearthed through two additional questions. Listing and Nulling is a very direct way to get at valences, no matter if these are caused by the pc’s own incidents or by entities. It is useful with all sorts of AESPs, but works only when the pc is “ripe” for the question. When the question hits upon too many associated items of equal strength, the pc will not manage to put weight and importance on the right one, and a list with equally large reads on all items will result. You could do your nulling now, but this bears its risks 94

as pointed out above. To avoid these and not give a wrong item to the pc, it is advisable to prepcheck the item remaining after the nulling is done. Or you drop the whole action and follow up the AESP item in question by lock-scanning in order to find the underlying engram. Works slower, yes, but is a safe route. But let us assume the pc were properly set up for this action. It would look like this then: 0. The pc said in the interview that he could not learn properly. 1. Auditor: “Who or what wouldn’t be able to learn properly?” (The questions are always asked in a potential not an actual form in order to keep the scope of possible answers wide.) 2. PC gives his list and finally comes up with “A dumb lout!” as the item, with BD, F/N,VGIs. (This could either mean that the pc was once screamed at, abused with these words and probably beaten, because he didn’t do his homework right so that his inclination to learn sank down to nil. He then went into the valence impressed on him. Or the whole thing did not happen to him personally but to an entity which connected up with him when he came home from school one day with bad marks and when father boxed his ears lightly and called him a dumb lout enough to restimulate the entity and drive the pc into its valence.) 3. The item is now prepchecked in order to get at all incidents connected with it and to thoroughly discharge it. You could just as well run six ruds on it. Here as well there is a specialty worth mentioning: the pc may give “I!” as an answer. He has not identified the item but is identified with it. In this case one would desist from taking any further action! If one did, one would risk opening up all of the case because of the possibility of wrong authorship - and turn all hell loose on the pc. The only danger connected with L&N is that, without enough care, the auditor could indicate a “wrong item”. It may be entirely wrong or perhaps just a little bit wrong. This can happen when the auditor did not write the precise formulation of the item down, and therefore doesn’t give the accurate item to the pc when it comes to it. Small mistakes can go a long way here! L&N can give access to deep layers of the bank, as we have seen, and if incorrectly identified, the pc can become seriously upset and introverted. He has taken the wrong reason for some recognized case difficulty. He uses a wrong why as a stable datum to re-arrange his life . And he won’t have a chance, of course! Not only was no charge blown, but additional areas of bank are restimulated, too, as he tries to make sense of it. The more the pc thinks about his wrong item, the more he will be heating the restimulation up and the more confused and unhappy he will feel. You have to keep a watchful eye on these phenomena. Should they occur, the pc must immediately be interviewed concerning his last few sessions in order to find out if a wrong item in the broadest sense of the word was given. Perhaps it did not even happen in session but came from some authoritative person whose opinions the pc is used to blindly follow! To shed light into this is not always easy, because the pc after all agreed to the wrong item. It takes some real detective work until one has found out what it is so that the pc can again disconnect from it. (See the “Laws of Listing and Nulling” and other pertinent references in Tech Vol. X. )

5.The High And The Low TA Definition: “Tone, n. 6, normal healthy condition, vigor: Regular exercise keeps your body in tone. 7, degree of firmness or tension normal to the organs or tissues when healthy”. (Thorndike-Barnhart Advanced Dictionary, Second Edition, 1974) Putting it in terms of thetan instead of body the TA would indicate the tone of the thetan, i.e. his degree of tension or “charged-up-ness” . CLEAR READ AND HIGH TA The normal body resistance without any charge added to it is between 2.0 and 3.0. The socalled Clear read is what you get when there is no thetan in the body - either he is Clear and exterior, or it’s a corpse, i.e. a body without a soul. It’s 2.0 for women and 3.0 for men. Why then is the TA considered “high” as soon as it’s above 3.5? Why 3.5? Why not 4.0 or 2.7? - Let’s look at this. The scale around the TA consists of a set of arbitrary figures. Other figures could have been used just the same. One could have designed a scale with 0.0 at the bottom and 15 at its top and a very fine gradation in between. Maybe this was not considered practical at the time when the E-meter was developed. For whatever reason, the scale used on scientology Emeters was decided to go from 1 to 6 and stayed like this up to the present. A lot of experience regarding the interrelation between the pc’s indicators and the TA position was accumulated over the years - in particular, of course, in the 50’s. After having had his auditors audit for a few years, Hubbard finally concluded that EPs would occur only when the TA was between 2.0. and 3.0. Mind you, this was a discovery! The significance of a high TA and the specific phenomenon of a floating needle were not known from the first day E-meters were used. Neither were these things generally observed and accepted by all auditors. This lead to loads of people being only was no charge blown, but additional areas of bank are restimulated, too, as he tries to make sense of it. The more the pc thinks about his wrong item, the more he will be heating the restimulation up and the more confused and unhappy he will feel. You have to keep a watchful eye on these phenomena. Should they occur, the pc must immediately be interviewed concerning his last few sessions in order to find out if a wrong item in the broadest sense of the word was given. Perhaps it did not even happen in session but came from some authoritative person whose opinions the pc is used to blindly follow! To shed light into this is not always easy, because the pc after all agreed to the wrong item. It takes some real detective work until one has found out what it is so that the pc can again disconnect from it. (See the “Laws of Listing and Nulling” and other pertinent references in Tech Vol. X.)

5.The High And The Low TA Definition: “Tone, n. 6, normal healthy condition, vigor: Regular exercise keeps your body in tone. 7, degree of firmness or tension normal to the organs or tissues when healthy”. (Thorndike-Barnhart Advanced Dictionary, Second Edition, 1974) Putting it in terms of thetan instead of body the TA would indicate the tone of the thetan, i.e. his degree of tension or “charged-up-ness” . CLEAR READ AND HIGH TA The normal body resistance without any charge added to it is between 2.0 and 3.0. The socalled Clear read is what you get when there is no thetan in the body - either he is Clear and exterior, or it’s a corpse, i.e. a body without a soul. It’s 2.0 for women and 3.0 for men. Why then is the TA considered “high” as soon as it’s above 3.5? Why 3.5? Why not 4.0 or 2.7? - Let’s look at this. The scale around the TA consists of a set of arbitrary figures. Other figures could have been used just the same. One could have designed a scale with 0.0 at the bottom and 15 at its top and a very fine gradation in between. Maybe this was not considered practical at the time when the E-meter was developed. For whatever reason, the scale used on scientology Emeters was decided to go from 1 to 6 and stayed like this up to the present. A lot of experience regarding the interrelation between the pc’s indicators and the TA position was accumulated over the years - in particular, of course, in the 50’s. After having had his auditors audit for a few years, Hubbard finally concluded that EPs would occur only when the TA was between 2.0. and 3.0. Mind you, this was a discovery ! The significance of a high TA and the specific phenomenon of a floating needle were not known from the first day E-meters were used. Neither were these things generally observed and accepted by all auditors. This lead to loads of people being run beyond their EPs in the old days and “rehabilitation tech” was even made a matter of policy in 1966 (Vol. VI, p.143). That the subject of F/N and TA position was undefined territory in the early days can be concluded from the fact that the F/N is not mentioned earlier than 1965 in the Tech Volumes (VI, p. 66) and that the E-meter drills only date from 1961 onward - fully nine years after the meter was introduced. The question of “high” versus “normal” TA therefore is a matter of a) the agreement on a certain measuring scale and b) the observations made regarding it. On the scale being used, the “normal” TA range between 2.0 and 3.0 is marked by the two “clear reads” - 2.0 for female, 3.0 for male bodies. This refers to the body resistance with no added charge created by the thetan. However, these two points of 2.0 and 3.0 respectively are evidently not correct for all female or male bodies. The variation from body to body may be as much as 0.5 TA divisions. This means that the clear read for males may be anywhere between 2.5 and 3.5, for females between 1.5 and 2.5! Therefore the high TA starts at 3.5. Unfortunately the measuring deviation from one E-meter to the next has to be taken into account as well. It is around 0.3 TA divisions. So an objective TA of 3.5 may be at 3.2 on one meter and on 3.8 on the next. One has to keep this tolerance range in mind. It follows that a TA of 3.8 is definitely outside this tolerance band, therefore out of normal range and for this reason called a high TA. (For male bodies, mind you.) For reasons of 97

convenience and probably because “Ron says so”, the question has been settled with the consideration that the TA starts being high at 3 .5. (Which is - quite illogically so considered valid for women as well.) THE RISING TA As we saw before: the thetan builds up protest charge whenever he doesn’t get what he wants, or when he can’t get away from something he does not want. This charge is made now, in the session . The energy created by the pc forms a resistance which adds to the body resistance. The needle rises. More power is needed to overcome this increased resistance. In order to keep the needle on “set”, the auditor turns up the TA to make more current flow. So the TA “rises”. The dianetics auditors will say now: “Sure, that’s because an engram is in restimulation!” And they are right. Dianetically speaking, the charge contained in the engram, originally created in the past, has been restimulated and is re-created in the present. Those trained in scientology techniques would say: “Rising TA means either protest or overrun! “ And they would be right as well. It may be a new protest or O/R of the present, or the restimulation of a GPM of the past. It has been dormant in the meantime and becomes active now, since the flip-flop between 1st and 2nd postulate is set in motion. (What’s the difference between a protest and an overrun? In an overrun something good happened and then things went badly, which is what the thetan didn’t like. In a protest he didn’t like what happened from the start.) Both parties agree (the dianetics and the scientology ones) that the TA will rise when an earlier similar incident, no matter of what kind, is pressing in. You are busy planing down an incident narrative style, and the TA rises. Why? An E/S has been unearthed. Since the incident you are currently dealing with has been sufficiently unburdened, the earlier one in line can now float to the surface. The common denominator between all these viewpoints is precisely what was said at the start of this section: the TA rises because the thetan is protesting against something - against the charge of an engram pushing in on him; against something having gone wrong in his life (protest); against something desirable having gone away and something undesirable having taken its place (O/R). All charge therefore is protest charge. The handling is different, though, depending on whether one is working in the style of dianetics or that of scientology. A note to the budding young auditor: don’t worry when the TA rises. It’s part of the process! When you start a process on a charged item, you will see a building up of charge and a rising TA and a working off of charge and a falling TA. The TA is “pumping” . This to be expected and it is a good indicator! It means the pc is doing work. You only have to start worrying when the pc isn’t in-session anymore: disinterested suddenly, finds no more to look at, wonders about the whole thing, etc. - and the TA going up and up! So here is a rule: Pc well insession, with TA pumping = good indicator; carry on with the process. Pc not in-session, with TA going high and sticking = bad indicator find out what’s going on.

THE LOW TA Should the pc give up fighting his masses there is only one alternative: he has to identify with them. He goes out of valence. (DMSMH: either you dramatize the engram and you go out of valence or you suppress the dramatization and you get somatics.) As thetan, body, and masses have become one field now, the current can flow very easily. There is very little resistance, even less than what the body offers normally. So there is very little power needed and the TA stays below 2.0. -This is a low TA. (Wet hands make a false low TA!) HOW TO GET THE TA DOWN We have seen that there is basically only one type of charge, and that is protest charge. The handling, however, is varied. It depends on the type of auditing one is doing, speaking in the “classical” categories, it is either dianetics (running engrams to erasure) or scientology (producing key-outs). Engram in restimulation: On a dianetic rundown, when you see a high TA you know immediately: engram in restimulation. When this happens at session start, you must find out with the pc which engram may have gone in restimulation. When it happens during the session, you go either E/S, or look over the folder and find where it went wrong. You could as well put your hope on a repair list called “L3RG” to find and correct the mistake. In postulate auditing you’d have to go over your worksheets to see if you didn’t finish a cycle of action properly or if there is more than one incident or entity in restimulation at the same time. (Do ask the pc. It will read when it is the case. Mostly it is the case.) Protest or Overrun: In scientology auditing, the first thing you think of on seeing the TA rise is: protest or O/R, just as it says in C/S-Series 1. - You check these questions on the meter and handle accordingly: the O/R by Rehab procedure, the protest by itsa and E/S-itsa. When the pc comes in with a high TA after having had a normal in-range TA in his previous sessions, you ask him if anything has happened since the last session. He will come up with a protest or an O/R, either caused by life or by his past auditing. When you don’t get a read the easy way - on the questions: “Something happened?”, “Protest?”, “Overrun?” - you had better rephrase your questions and ask the same thing in many different ways: Did anything happen the pc absolutely disagreed with? Did someone work against him? Was he fed up with something or someone? Did something good happen to him and nobody noticed it? Did he have a win or release or cognition in context with the process he ran? When the TA is high and sticky you must ask the exact question in order to get the needle moving. This may take some doing. (Do write down exactly what you are asking!) When you hit the right area you will see a tick, and you steer the pc by it, and it turns into a sF, and now it dawns on him, and you get a F, and finally he can tell you what it is. Depending on the type of answer you handle it either by protest- or by rehab-procedure.

Exterior: If protest or O/R doesn’t handle, what do you do? Check for a very special type of release which the pc usually would not think of himself, and that’s: exterior. ‘ In your recent auditing (or: in life), did you go exterior?” (Make sure the new pc understands the question.) This will give a good read if it is the case you handle it by rehab procedure to F/N. The TA will be in normal range. Take a break till the next day. All fine the next day: carry on with your program. However, when the rehab of exterior doesn’t get the TA down into normal range, or when you got it down at the end of the session but the pc comes in the next day and his TA is up again: Now you must do an Int Rundown, there’s no way around it. (“Interiorization-Exteriorization RD”, see Tech Dict and the pertinent references in Vol .XII. ) Why does the TA go up after the pc went exterior? The explanation given in HCOB 4 Jan 71R, “Exteriorization and High TA”, is: engram in restimulation. Before he went in he was out (which is the natural state for a thetan) and having been forced in by violent means is an engram. (See “Implant” in the Tech Dict.) Going exterior, then, may restimulate the earlier beginning of the incident, and that was going interior. The ensuing high TA can be interpreted, dianetically, as engram charge. Likewise it may be looked at, scientologically, as overrun/protest charge and be handled that way. Overruns and Protests in Life: Should the TA be high from the first moment the pc takes the cans in the interview, and if there would be no good-sized reads in the interview which would give you a lead into the charged areas, you would assume that the pc sits on some big (and often multiple) protest or O/R of long duration which has been overshadowing his life for years. (The possibility of the pc being in actual pain must be checked into as well!) So you ask for protest and O/R with the prefix “In your life, has anything been . . .?” It may be as simple as that; it may demand a more specific wording, the exact question. Make a list of possible questions to do with protest and O/R. (See the examples in the paragraph above) . Do an Assessment by TA (E-Meter Drill 23), take up the best reading area; handle by protest or O/R procedure. Note that the pc may come up with more than one area. Start with the biggest reading one and rehab that. You may get stuck and not be able to take it to F/N - yet the TA has come down a little. Take up the next one, rehab. You may get stuck again, yet the TA is down a bit more. You are working in the right direction. Take up the third one. This may come to an F/N - a small one, on a high TA, but still an F/N. Now go back to the first area, take that to F/N. (Always and unvaryingly use the rehab procedure.) Now that this is handled, finish cycle on the second area. By now the TA will be in range and the pc happy and quite changed; his F/N will be wide now. Take up the remaining areas the pc has mentioned - but watch out: he may not even be interested any more ! Overrun and Protest because of past bad sessions: Auditing itself may drive the pc’s TA up. - He may not even have had any auditing before, yet as soon as he sees an E-Meter or gets questioned by the auditor, he keys in on past police interrogations, medical screenings, psychiatric shock treatments, on black magic sessions or even on bad past-life auditing - things he protested against or became thoroughly fed up with. If this wasn’t picked up on the step above (“O/R and protest in life”), you ask the pc straightforwardly: does auditing remind you of anything? Have you experienced something similar to it previously? Do you feel uncomfortable about the meter? The cans? The session space?

100

Processes? Auditors? Questions? Psychiatry? Inquisition? Police? Doctors? Rituals? Ceremonies? Weird practices? Implants? Been in scientology in your past life? Had past life auditing? Something or other will read. Handle with protest or O/R. Quite likely the charge will have been sitting there for quite a long time already, probably since lifetimes down the track. So make sure to get the earliest beginning of the protest, or the first release point. Use lockscanning technique to clean the track so the pc can go earlier and earlier to the real beginning of it all. Chronically high and stuck TA: Some pc’s aren’t impressed by one or more engrams or GPMs in restimulation. They manage to tell you their whole life story with their needle stuck and their TA at 4.8. Some even say they feel fine and crack a joke -TA glued to the 5.3 mark. They are so used to fighting the bank that it has become habitual to them, so much so that they don’t even notice . This is a “habitual not-is” . To crack those old jammed-up circuits there’s only one remedy: objective processes! HANDLING THE LOW TA Before you do any low TA handlings: make sure the TA isn’t low because of the pc’s wet hands! A real low TA results from overwhelm. It means unflat OTIII, as Hubbard says on the Cl.VIII course. (See Robertson’s “Cl.VIII Notes”.) So how does one handle a low TA on a pc who isn’t on OTIII yet? -To put it differently: how can you handle the composite case without the use of the OTIII materials? Let us first look at the underlying cause for low TA: it means identification with a winning valence (Tech Dict.) brought about by the use of force; it means overwhelm. The being has been utterly invalidated, suppressed, unmocked, made nothing of. This may have happened either to the pc himself or to an entity in his composite case which is in restimulation (without the pc knowing it, of course). No matter what: we are dealing with invalidation. How to handle? For example by “Evaluation of long duration?” and “Invalidation of long duration?”, run alternately to F/N, first one then the other, again and again, till they each F/N on calling the command. Or by six false ruds, done repetitively (1-6, 1-6, 1-6) till they F/N on calling the command: “Did anyone say you had an (out-rud) when you didn’t have one?” This approach of course aims directly at the eval/inval the pc has inflowed from others (people or - unknowingly his entities, circuits and valences), and gets it out of the way. - It may be followed up by six reverse ruds, repetitive to F/N: “Does anyone have a (rud) with you? “This again addresses the out-ruds the pc is inflowing from the composite case. (See the chapter on rudiments . ) Doing these little rundowns will clean up the pc’s social field, reestablish his certainty of self and put him back in valence, build up his confront and keep the composite off his back. (A good TR’s-Course would help a lot, too!) His TA will come up into range as a result.

101

PART FOUR: Professional Application. 102

The Bridge Below Clear THE LIFE REPAIR With the techniques covered so far, and provided you have done your drills and TRs well, you are in the position to start auditing someone on a full Life Repair and perhaps even take him up to Clear. An interview is always the best thing to begin a case handling with, but it demands some auditing experience and the ability to write very fast, to see and note down all reads, and to interpret them later. How to do an interview is described in a later chapter. For the moment, we are taking the viewpoint that the beginning auditor cannot do one, and ways are pointed out how he can still audit despite that. The first action one would do on a new pc, is called “Life Repair”, as we saw in the description of the bridge in Volume 1. In the superficial understanding of the word, this means: handling what the pc’s attention is on at present; “getting the pc’s rudiments in” on his life. In a deeper understanding it would mean getting at the roots of what is fouling up the pc’s life, working directly at the core of his case, rehabilitating his causativeness and self-determinism. The greatest ruin of a thetan is the fact that he has a case . Therefore it must be the goal of all auditing actions, to make the pc go Clear or at least lead him one step further in that direction. No matter with how much depth you are personally able to program and audit a Life Repair, as you start a case off you will always encounter four basic situations, leading to different assumptions about the auditability of the PC: 1. One would assume that the pc cannot be audited well on recall processes because he has taken drugs, medicines and alcohol excessively in the past or is doing so at present. Or because one finds out after a few sessions that his confront is so weak that he sees more in the bank than he can easily face up to and therefore runs away from it. 2. Lacking a drug history, one would assume that the pc can be audited well on recall processes. Specific situation: his attention is mainly on body problems, i.e. psychosomatic illnesses (“somatics”). 3. The same assumption as in 2, for the same reason. Specific situation: the pc has no body problems and only wishes to increase his abilities in certain areas of his life. 4. All of that together, at the same time. The handling: Re 1: Have the pc do TRs and objectives. That handles the low confront part. Then, if he has a drug problem as well, audit a “Drug Rundown” as the first subjective auditing action. (See section below).

103

Re 2: Use Dianetics or Postulate Auditing. You could of course try to key his somatics out with a Date/Locate . This works in many cases. However, should this light approach fail, you would have to do a full “Dianetic Assist” to handle his current pains. Do send the pc to the doctor first to make sure that all possibilities of standard medical help have been exhausted and that his illnesses are indeed psychosomatic. This keeps you out of legal trouble. (See as well Auditor’s Code point 25.) - When there are no physical sensations or pains and the pc’s main interest is on his mental and spiritual development, you would start him scientology style with Ruds, Rehabs , Prepchecks . This will blow lots of locks, increase his confront ability on life and make him a real release. This approach is faster and lighter than the dianetics one, where you would list all unwanted AESPs of the pc’s life and audit the corresponding engram chains. Yet it is far less thorough, because it does not lead to the source of the stops. Which road you prefer to take depends on your evaluation of circumstances and priorities (Ax. 58). You could combine both approaches by using Postulate Auditing. Re 4: Do the handling of point 1 to start with as that would form the prerequisite for everything else. Then you would have to do a thorough interview in order to establish the quantity of charge for each area of interest, and work out a program in the corresponding sequence. That would be the optimum route. Less optimum, a bit slower and less effective, would be to just give the pc question 1 of Postulate Auditing (“Tell me what’s bothering you”), and take it from there. Here you would totally rely on the bank opening up all by itself, by following the direction the pc’s attention takes. Those experienced in Dianetics would make a list of AESPs and handle engrams by R3RA-technique, hoping in the same way for the bank to open. THE DRUG RUNDOWN Drugs, medicine or alcohol taken excessively in the past or present have extremely undesirable mental and psychosomatic effects on the pc. A drug handling must be done as part of the Life Repair. Depending on the amount of charge on this subject, it is put in its appropriate place in the sequence of things to be handled. The whole theory of the Drug Rundown is hinged on the term chemical release. One takes drugs in order to have a good time, to dull the comm-lines into the body so that no more pain is felt, or to get unusual mental or physical powers for a short time. It’s an artificial way of going release temporarily, and may even amount to states comparable to OT (“Keyed-out OT” [2]). Yet, artificial or not, it’s a release in case it worked. (It doesn’t always work.)That’s why the first step on the classical drug rundown is a rehab of releases on the drugs taken. A list of drugs medicines and alcohol taken in the past is made. (The word “drugs” is to be taken in its widest sense, it includes anything causing physical or spiritual effects such as inhaling glue or poisonous gases.) Each reading one is rehabilitated in the style of Rehab by Counting, in sequence of read size, as usual. The second step is a recall step. The pc recalls the times he took drugs, repetitive style, on four flows. This would complete the scientology-style drug rundown.

104

The dianetics version extends from this. One would now find out about the AESPs connected with the drugs taken and run the respective engram chains on four flows. Then one would find out what AESPs were the original reason to take each of those drugs, and handle the respective chains by dianetic technique (R3RA). You can do a Drug Rundown in the style of Postulate Auditing too. Take a reading drug on the list and lock-scan all the times the pc took it till you get down to absolute basic - which is when the pc decided he needed a little help because he couldn’t bear it any longer. Or it was a drug implant. During the lock-scan, do make a note of all reading AESPs. When you have finished the lock-scanning part and erased all the basics you found, you would then take up the AESPs incurred so far and audit them with the steps 1-20 of Postulate Auditing. (Are habilitation of past releases through drugs, medicines and alcohol is not done separately as it is well taken care of during the lock-scanning part.) The EP’s are worded according to the four flows. Flow 1: “No harmful effects left from drugs/medicine/alcohol taken in the past; no further need to take them.” F-2: “No compulsion to give drugs to others to make them happy or suffer less.” F-3: “No compulsion to take drugs oneself when one sees others take them.”F-0: “No need to give drugs to oneself to make oneself feel better.” (The difference between F-1 and F-0 lies in the determinism. In F-1 one was asked to take them; in F-0 one decided to do so oneself.) Should your pc be a heavy druggy (now or in his past) he may need a special set-up program consisting of vitamins, adequate nutrition and exercises. As well he should be given the opportunity to do useful physical work, getting properly rewarded for it. This program starts to reestablish an ethical basis for his life with self-determined control of body and environment. He ought to do plenty of objective processes and TRs, to be auditable on recall processes later on. This is because drugs block his recall ability and make needle and TA go sticky. Of course it is permissible to take medicines in an emergency, particularly organic or homeopathic ones, to then stop taking them when the emergency is over. Therefore one cannot say that anybody who took the occasional medicines, has a “drug case”. Even then, when the pc never was hung up on drugs, you still had better check the Drug Rundown EPs, just to be sure, and to confirm it for him. (Ref: HCOB 21 Dec 1980, “The Scientology Drug Rundown”. HCOB 17 Oct 69, “Drugs, Aspirin and Tranquilizers”. All entries in the index of Vol.X, XI, XII under the heading of “drugs” and “drug rundown” . A useful compilation of relevant materials is given in the Volunteer Minister’s Handbook.)

A NOTE ON THE GRADES (This section is mainly addressed to those readers who have some experience with Grades auditing.) Grades are - as the term implies - a gradual approach to removing charge from the case. They are arranged in a logical order, starting with the subject of communication (Grade 0) and 105

continuing with the subjects of problems (Grade I), overts/withholds (Grade II), life ruins (Grade III) and Service Facsimiles (Grade IV) . Their arrangement and their aim very much resemble the rudiments. Considering that each Grade has a few dozen processes, they are really a broad way of putting the ruds in on life. Historical background: They are first mentioned in 1965 (C/S Series 2). Back then there was only a small number of key processes. They were co-audited since there wasn’t any paid-for auditing for the public yet. Between 1965 and 1970 the tech went badly out; the infamous “Quickie Grades” were delivered: all processes were done in a couple of hours by riding along on the F/N of the first process, thereby F/Ning all further processes in its wake. The remedy to this were the “Expanded Lower Grades”, a collection of processes put together by editorial teams who went through Hubbard’s original writings of the 1950s, looked through all processes they found scattered about in his various writings, and grouped them in accordance with one Grade or the other (C/S-Series 12). The BTB of 4 Jan 1972 finalized this project. (“BTB” means “Board Technical Bulletin”, a bulletin not written by Hubbard himself but by another.) Note that by this time, the delivery of paid-for auditing to the public had started. It formed an important income source to the expanding CofS. Therefore many new auditors had to be trained as quickly as possible. In this context one may suspect that the Grades, being very simple to audit, were meant to replace the self-determined thinking, the solution-oriented creativity of the auditor and the C/S. (Not the original key processes, but the compilation known as “Grades 0-IV”.) Look at the early 70’s: Hubbard tried in many ways to dilute the Class VIII knowledge of 1968 down to the level of beginners, due to the shortage of Class VIII C/Ses at a time of worldwide expansion. So instead of having to work out their own solutions, beginners were given prefabricated solutions: fixed rundowns and repair lists for any possible situation. This didn’t do much good to their thinking ability. The very nature of the Expanded Grades supports this suspicion. They are a catch-all method for any kind of case. If you’d start a pc on “ARC-Straightwire” (the lowest Grades process) and ran him through all charged processes there are up to Gr.IV, there’s nothing in the case which could possibly escape you. Provided there aren’t any unexpected case difficulties, such as a drug history, this approach could be done on anyone without any C/Sing. (See “Resistive Case Points” in the Tech Dict.) No thinking needed. Just run the next process. Boring on the pc, yes; pc not always in-session, yes; takes an awful long time and costs a fortune, yes; but in the end we are getting there, no doubt. It’s like shooting at your pet canary inside his cage with a shotgun: you don’t have to aim all that carefully as at least one piece of shot is bound to hit him. The editorial team which put the Grades processes together certainly did a fantastic job. Without their efforts a huge amount of processes might have passed into oblivion. Yet they made two mistakes which the auditor ought to be aware of: First mistake: they tried to turn process commands into four flows which should have been left standing the way they were. (Those were the times of “ Triple Flows”, followed later by “Quadruple Flows”, so apparently everything had to be turned into four flows - by decree from “high up” -, whether it was logically fitting or not . ) Second mistake: in quite a few cases the flows are misworded in such a way that F-1 and F-2 are mixed up, that F-2 and F-3 only differ in that they are formulated as singular and plural, 106

that F-0 looks the same as F-1 or is worded in some illogical fashion having nothing to do with the actual intention of the process. Both auditor and pc usually get into trouble when they try to work out what it all means. So always, before running a Grades process with funny-looking flows which don’t make sense to you, check up on the original process by Hubbard. The source is usually quoted in the Grades process materials. Then decide if you are going to drop the flows on this particular process because it should be left as it was formulated originally, or if the wording of the flows has to be corrected. Taking heed of the above, the C/S usually will have little trouble with the Grades. With the pc well set up, they usually run all by themselves . The only trouble one may get into is doing too much of them and overruning the EP. The significance of the Grades nowadays, their value to the C/S, is a matter of discussion. Earlier on, in the seventies, one did dianetics actions as the first thing in order to handle the pc’s physical problems, to set all his attention free and allow him to fully concentrate on Clear. This purpose was served by the Grades, which back then went up to VII. The EP of Grade VII was the Clear. 1976 and 1978 - with Dianetic Clear - significant changes occurred in the tech; the old Grade VII was no longer needed. (See Volume 1.) Which technical criteria (or power politics) played a role there, is hard to guess. In the end (and up till today) it all came down to the pc receiving first “introductory processes”, then the Grades, then Dianetics. Most incomprehensibly, the Life Repair, earlier an integral part of the bridge below anything else, was omitted. The beauty of a Life Repair is that it is directly tailored to the pc’s needs. This one cannot say of the Grades they are much rather a broadside from all guns. Even the old Standard Dianetics, done by means of AESPs voiced by the pc, was very much following his personal needs, which is certainly not so with New Era Dianetics (NED) and its hyper-technical approach to the case. As a result from the re-building of the bridge and the omission of the Life Repair, the tech had lost its “human dimensions” and became unpleasantly technocratic. The reason for this may be what was already said further up: anyone can audit Grades, you don’t even need a C/S for it. But doing a good interview and working out a tailor-made program - that takes experience and professionality. And not everybody has that. And as, in the CofS, degraded auditing has become a mass happening, it of course takes masses of auditors, who by necessity are greenhorns led on by greenhorns. And their tech is no better than that. To go back to the question posed above: today, the Grades do not lead up to Clear any more, they are but a substitute for the Life Repair. Therefore they become less necessary the more care is taken in planning and executing the Life Repair. And, as a Life Repair program does not exclude dianetic auditing, it may happen that the pc works on his engrams so thoroughly that he goes Clear as a result. Try running the Grades processes after a good Life Repair was done, and you’ll see: yawning boredom. The same is true for Clears who didn’t have the Grades before: they also find them boring. Moreover they usually get a lot of false reads because they start running the entities of the composite case. As usual, there is no single rule to suit all cases. The pc may have completed his Life Repair and you know there is still more that could get done on the case. But the pc doesn’t originate by himself. This means that he has arrived at a state of agreement with his life where he 107

doesn’t see any more inconsistencies; therefore there are no origination’s and no reads . You could leave it at that, tell him to come back when he feels like he needs more auditing, let him go off, and do another interview and an expanded Life Repair when he returns. Or you could use the Grades processes on him, but selectively: only what he needs. Choose the process which in your estimation suits the pc best. And some of these Grades processes are marvelous; they can be real case crackers! Again, the only rule is that of standard tech: do just what the pc needs and wants, no more and no less. Although not all pc’s may need the Grades as an auditing action, it must be clearly emphasized that the bulletins they are based on, are indispensable for the training of the auditor and the C/S. Anyone wishing to work professionally must study them.

POSTULATE AUDITING: WHY NO FLOWS? Since flows are so common in Dianetics and in Grades auditing, the expert may have wondered how come there are no flows in Postulate Auditing. Well, you may have observed that in the auditing style of Book One there aren’t any flows at all, and that it still works very well. Flows were only introduced into auditing in context with the OT III research of the mid-60s. Why? Because Flow 3 runs out entities and disconnects the pc from his OTIII case. Which makes it easier to audit him on his own engrams later on. Further, on closer inspection of Postulate Auditing, you will find that flows are in fact implicitly run on each item you handle The lock-scanning part starts it off with a motivator chain . Then you get to the basic, the real big motivator. Up to here it’s all Flow 1. Then you find the postulate in the basic incident, that’s Flow 2, because the pc did it himself and it is an overt. He may even find out how he was responsible for getting into this situation in the first place, which is Flow 2 again. Then, as you get to the repeater part, the pc starts pulling in entities by repeating the postulate, and to tell you about situations when he saw others using that particular postulate. Both of that is Flow 3 Everytime he cognites what he has done to himself by making succumbpostulates, he has a realization concerning Flow 0. So there are flows in Postulate Auditing, after all.

108

A Simple Life Repair Program HOW THE C/S THINKS Each and every pc is most interested in solving the mystery of his existence, where he comes from, why he is here at all, where fate will take him. All these are significance’s, i.e. thought structures full of ponderous importance. The C/S, in contrast, is not interested in the significance’s but in the masses of the pc. He knows that there are incidents of unimaginable force and brutality on the time track, which have to be found and erased so that the pc may find answers to his questions about the where from and whereto, and gradually recapture his abilities as a thetan. He knows that it is only due to these energy masses that the pc keeps figuring why he is in the state he happens to be in. Without masses, without charge, the pc wouldn’t have any questions. He wouldn’t be introverted into significance’s, but find games in accordance with his goals and purposes and take on the challenge of real barriers and real enemies. He would be extroverted. The C/S therefore has the obligation to help the pc find an access to these incidents. His attention is mostly on the TA-Action per session hour. This to him is the clear and irrefutable evidence that something is happening in the universe of the pc, that things get shaken about, broken loose, and cleaned up. The more, the better. TAA occurs only when incidents are being run. It does not occur when the pc philosophizes fancifully about life whilst holding the cans. Time, place, form, event and the exact postulate - only that counts to the C/S. His constant question is: How do I get the pc to find and run an incident relevant to him? There are various possibilities, depending on the situation you are starting out with. Let’s look at them one by one: Firstly: The pc tells an incident right from the start without any prompting. That is the simplest case. Her cat was run over yesterday; she is all in tears about it. Wonderful! Fancy an incident falling into your lap just like that! Let her tell you about it. Narrative style and running chains are the tools to use here. Secondly: The pc is generally upset and annoyed because of a terminal, i.e. a person, place, animal, plant, or object. Or he is unhappy because things don’t work out right in some area of his life, be it concerning his girl friend, his job, his football club, whatever. He does not specify very precisely what’s going on. Something is foul, certainly, but what exactly? Here you would start out with a 2WC in a loose and easy manner, and give the pc the opportunity to blow off some steam and sort things out a little. As a result one would have found out who the terminal or what the area in question is. All right. Now how do you get down to the incident from here? With dianetics, you would ask the pc for the AESPs connected with this terminal or area. Once he has given you an AESP-item you can immediately ask him to relate it to his time track: “Recall a time, when . . .” And there comes the incident! With scientology auditing, you could keep up the 2WC and take it to a key-out and an F/N. You could use an L1C, six ruds or a prepcheck concerning the terminal or area in question. All of these methods will lead to incidents.

109

How deep one manages to reach into the bank depends on the skill of the auditor and cannot immediately be influenced by the C/S. It is quite possible as we have seen, to bridge over by means of Postulate Auditing, from the light scientology processes to the engram/GPM-bank. How good an auditor is at that, solely depends on his experience. And that, simply, is the whole of the wisdom of the C/S and the whole of the task of the auditor. The rest is up to the pc. Communication with the incident, reality on the incident, affinity with the incident, cognition, erasure. The more he sweats and pants in the process, the more it’s worth it.

THE PROGRAM The following program addresses those auditors who are more at home with scientology than with dianetics methods. For starting a case it is most suitable for the third of the four situations already referred to above, which one may encounter in starting a new pc: no drug history, no somatics, only an interest in getting a better grip on life in general. The case is entered on the level of locks, but this can be modified as one goes along, in the direction of engrams, GPMs and entities, depending on one’s skill. This program is useful when the pc does not originate further areas of difficulty by himself, for example after a laborious auditing period with respect to the first two of the four starting situations. He has gone through all the points originally troubling him. The approach below helps him to look for new areas of charge. As well there is the advantage that one can do it without a prior interview. Therefore it is useful to the beginning auditor who can neither do a proper interview, nor analyze its data. Should you, as a green auditor, suffer from nervousness or stagefright: don’t worry. You can’t do any damage at all with the techniques presented here. 1) TA high when you start: “Are you protesting anything?” “Is something going on too long?” - “Has an achievement not been acknowledged?” - “Is there an O/R?” - Do you have pains?” - “Body problems?” - Is there something you cannot tell anyone?” “Something that would kill you if it were told?” (Ask in different ways as needed to suit the pc’s gradient of understanding. Handle all items the pc mentions, to F/N. You may have high TA F/N’s to start with but eventually the TA will be in range. See the chapter on High/Low TA.) 2) TA in range: fly six ruds . (Assess the ARCX slowly by TA, to start with.) 3) Ask the pc for times of trouble in his life. Note the reads on each area of charge . Take the biggest reading one, ask the pc to give you in his own words a prefix for the L1C questions you are going to ask him. (“In kindergarten...”, “Before the exams . . .”, “On my job . . .”.) Make sure the prefix reads well. (Never run an unreading prefix!) - Now do an L1C to EP, using this prefix. Then pick up the remaining areas, in sequence of magnitude of charge. (Result of 2 and 3: Ruds are in on life in general. Now the pc is not distracted by anything and can concentrate on past wins and releases.)

110

4) Ask the pc for achievements in his life which were not acknowledged, and for times when he carried on with an activity after having had a win on it, and then felt worse. Note all reads; then rehab all areas, starting with the biggest reading one. (Result of 4: Pc’s certainty and appreciation of self has increased enormously. He is now ready to confront the “big bad boys” in his life.) 5) Ask the pc for terminals he had trouble with in his life. (Terminal = a person, animal, place, or thing.) - Do a prepcheck on each one, starting with the biggest reading one. (Result of 15: Pc has cleaned the charge off great parts of his track; he is now prepared to take a long view over this lifetime and handle charge of long duration.) 6) Fly six ruds of long duration. Run them repetitively till they F/N on call. (This will dig up things way beyond what the pc was aware of when he started. ) Comments: You may do step 6 in the place of step 2 . You’ll find that “normal” ruds done as step 2 invariably draw you into an LD type handling, simply because the pc’s “whole life” is sitting on him. Quite often you will find that the new pc is bubbling over with charged items - so much so that the ruds approach will appear “too structured” to him. In this case the L1C or - even more uncomplicated - the prepcheck are better tools than the ruds. (It does depend on the auditor’s skills too.) When you are skilled with Postulate Auditing you may branch off from Ruds, Rehabs and Prepchecks and follow up postulates.

The Interview After this simple program has been done, you should have an experienced person do an interview to search for areas which were so far missed out on, get him to work out a program for you, and clean those areas up as well. Speaking from a strictly professional viewpoint, an interview should always be the first thing in line, followed by a thorough case analysis. No “catch-all” approach can match a tailormade program. Of course, you can always help someone out by using whatever bits of tech you happen to know; and you should do it. That’s what the tech is there for, after all . But auditing professionally, that’s different.

AUDITING vs. INTERVIEWING There is a difference between an interview and auditing. When this difference is not understood there will be meager results in the interview and the C/S won’t have enough data to work from. This is the difference: auditing has the purpose of establishing a comm-line between pc and bank, and of as-ising the bank. In contrast to that, in an interview one doesn’t audit. One finds out what is there that can be audited later. The interviewer gets data with charge on them. The auditor helps the pc to blow the charge. The interviewer does not do that. He just finds data. The program the C/S makes is based 111

on data, and only on data. Without any data there can be no auditing program . These data are found by the interviewer in the interview. There are other sources of data, too, such as reports on the pc by friends and family, etc., which the auditor happens to hear about. But whatever their source may be: they have to be presented in writing to the C/S so that he may work out his solutions for the case in question, on their basis. Principally, there are two types of interviews. One concerns the totality of the pc’s life and forms the basis of the case analysis and the Life Repair program. The list of questions following after the next section gives a good example of it. The other relates to specific situations, for example when the pc or student doesn’t seem to make any progress on his auditing program, his course or his ethics program, and the C/S wants to find out how he is doing. This latter interview usually has the simple form of a Two Way Comm on the question: “How are you doing in your current auditing?” (or whatever).

HOW TO DO AN INTERVIEW The interviewer asks the pc about a specific situation in his life or in his previous auditing, or about his life in general. Usually he has a list of questions worked out by the C/S. It is his job to get a full answer to each question. As long as he hasn’t clearly grasped the life situation of the pc yet, he does not fully acknowledge his answer. The interviewer keeps at his question until he has got it. Then only does he acknowledge and go to the next question. (The question or the answers have to read, of course. ) As you are not doing repetitive auditing here, you ought to rephrase the question when you repeat it. You are not doing a “Two-Way Comm to F/N” either, which is a process. You are doing a “Two Way Comm for data”. Sometimes the pc may start talking as if he were already in session. Do not allow this to happen. As soon as you have grasped the situation you tell him: “Thank you. I have fully understood the situation you are in. The charge on it will get handled in session, not now.” -And you go to the next question. All with good ARC, naturally. Be curious about the other person’s life; get all the data. The product of a good interview: the interviewer has grasped the life and the time track of the pc so well that he could write a documentary screen play about it.

A QUESTIONNAIRE FOR THE INTRODUCTORY INTERVIEW When you do an interview you may ask many questions, as many as you like, but there is only one thing you want to know: what is the pc’s ideal scene in life, what is his existing scene, and how far does the existing scene depart from the ideal scene? You want to help the pc close that gap; that’s the only reason why you audit him.

112

This particular questionnaire addresses new clients, who know nothing about scientology, as well as dyed-in-the-wool ‘veterans” . The questions would have to be adapted accordingly. (1)

“What would you like to get handled?”

(2)

“Are there any other reasons you have come which you’d rather not tell me about?” (Possibly he is ‘ up to something”; possibly there is just something embarrassing. )

(3)

“Tell me about your life from beginning to present time.” (Work out his timetrack with him so clearly that you can draw a chart of it in the end. Very useful for the C/S.)

(4)

“As you look at your eight dynamics one by one, what involvement do you have with each one?” (Get areas of action and non-action; work out wins as well as losses. Should the pc not know the dynamics yet you may ask him in words he can understand, of course. Make sure that you - regarding the 2nd dynamic - find out about his relationship to his parents and grandparents, to his or her spouse, children and relatives; see if there were any losses or deaths.)

(5)

“Does anyone have evil intentions towards you or does actual damage to you’? Do you have enemies?”

(6)

“How are you doing physically?” (Food, sleep, energy level, exercise.)

113

(7)

“Do you have chronic somatics? Or re-occurring acute somatics over a long period of time?”

(8)

“Are you thinking and pondering about the unfortunate sides of your life? If so, what about?”

(9)

“Did you take drugs / medicines / alcohol ? -When, how long, how much?” - “Are you currently taking any?”

(10)

“In your life, have you had accidents / illnesses / operations / psychotherapies / electric shock treatment? - Any treatment going on currently?”

(11)

“Are you a member of a secret society?” (A lodge, the secret service, a black magic circle, etc.)

(12)

“Before scientology, have you done other spiritual practices?” - “Are you doing any currently?”

(13)

“What do you want to achieve in your life?”

(14)

“Can you recall past lives?”

(15)

“What scientology auditing and training have you had so far?” (Get wins had/losses had, on the actions mentioned.)

(16)

“Anything in scientology you are not certain about?” (Data not understood, weird auditing, whatever.)

(17)

“Have you been in scientology already in your last life?” And: “Have you had anything to do with L. Ron Hubbard before this life?” (Ask only if the person was born later than 1950.)

(18)

“Do you want to attain the state of Clear?” (Ask only if you are sure he knows what you are talking about. If not, phrase it as “a state of spiritual freedom and independence”.)

(19)

(For those who have already attested Clear:) “Has your Clear state been stable?”

(20)

“What are your ideas about the solo-levels? - What do you expect to get from them?”

(21)

“Have you seen or been told about OT III materials?”

(22)

“Is there anything we have missed in this interview?” (If this reads: follow it up!)

THE QUESTIONNAIRE EXPLAINED

114

When you have a look at the definition of “Seven Resistive Cases” in the Tech Dict. and at the Expanded Green Form 40 (a repair list), you’ll find that this questionnaire deals with resistive case phenomena. To get them out of the way, it should be evaluated accordingly. Question 1 asks directly for the pc’s life ruin. Here you often find the highest-charged area. Qu. 2 gets at ruins which may be socially embarrassing to talk about. As well it reveals destructive intentions. Qu. 3 has the pc re-construct his time track. This step in itself may cause quite some realizations and relief, too, as it creates order, certainty and orientation where before there was disorder or unawareness. Qu. 4 It broadens the information received in Qu. 3 and opens areas of charge the pc didn’t think of yet. - It is important to get losses AND wins. The validation of a rightness (win) pulls a thetan up the tone scale and takes his attention off the wrongnesses (losses). Result: lessened introversion. Qu. 5 The pc will mention terminals he considers suppressive and goes out of valence to. (See “PTS”, Tech Dict.) Qu. 6 uncovers the reason for unsessionability and for “case trouble” which is really due to mistreating or neglecting the body. Qu. 7 helps the C/S to decide whether to start with scientology or dianetic-style auditing. Qu. 8 A person doing this has a failed purpose or is doing something which is very much off what he ought to be doing. He has a “wrong item” (see Tech Dict.) Qu. 9, 10, 11 and 12 check into the resistive case points of “drugs”, “seriously physically ill”, “PTS”, “former therapies” and “other practices”. Charge on this may make the pc hard to audit. Qu. 13 Here you usually get any failed purpose or a no-purpose-at-all situation, a lack of motive for living. Qu. 14 is a “curiosity” question to find out about the pc’s spiritual abilities. The answers can be quite amazing. Qu. 15 and 16 reveal glibness and superficiality in his past scientology training, as well as invalidation’s due to out-tech. Qu. 17 will shed light on certain case peculiarities - for example that the person has already gone up to Clear or even OTIII in his last life and therefore has no particular interest in the lower bridge yet at the same time demonstrates an uncanny knowledgeability of things he wouldn’t be expected to know.

115

Qu. l8 When the pc does not want what this question is asking for, when he does not wish to become freer and spiritually more able, but only wants to be “cured” of something, it may well be that he is using a SerFac to make auditing wrong, to ‘ prove” to you that it does not work. When he has no goals beyond curing his stomach ulcers, he is - quite paradoxically - likely to keep his stomach ulcers under all circumstances, because it is the only thing by which he can attract interest. With you, the auditor, he does the same: he tries - in an aberrated way - to attract your interest. Perhaps there is nobody left in the whole wide world who would take an interest in him. So he pays you for listening. However, should his ulcers get cured, he would run out of a topic for conversation; therefore he cannot allow them to be cured! In order to resolve such a paradoxical situation, you, as C/S or auditor, need quite a bit of experience. Do not take such a person on unless you trust yourself to get a result. Here is a question you could ask in order to decide whether to take the case on or not: “Supposing your ulcers had disappeared, what would you do in life which you cannot do now because of the ulcers?” When the pc has a positive answer to this, he has as well a superior goal; making the ulcers disappear would therefore be a necessary and realistic sub-goal to him. With him you could easily work. But when he says: “Don’t know. I never thought that far ahead. I’ll start thinking about it when my ulcers are gone.” - then you had better be careful. Qu. 19 You may get indicators for a false or incorrect Clear attest in the past, for uncertainties, eval and inval regarding Clear. Qu. 20 detects false data. Get the source with time, place, form and event, get the moment he accepted the false datum and made it his own. Provide correct data. (This handling applies to any kind of false data beyond the limits of this question.) Qu. 21 When that has happened, the C/S has to be very careful when he makes his program. (When he isn’t OTIII himself he’d better leave it to someone who is.)

116

Advanced Programming Step 0: Do the interview. Step 1: Take a sheet of paper, note down each reading origination of the pc in the sequence they occur in the worksheets. Note the reads down with them. A pattern will emerge once you have noted down the first dozen or so. In the end you can tell that the fifty or eighty origination’s the pc has given, spiral around five or six ruin areas only. Step 2: Take a new sheet and group the origination’s together in terms of areas. Husband reads, first marriage reads. That’s one area: second dynamic. Then there’s the 7th dynamic: interested in magic, talks to the spirits of the dead; has done yoga and meditated. That’s another area. Then there is his business not doing well. A third area. And so on. Sometimes the areas you find will coincide with the dynamics; sometimes there will be more than one area to a given dynamic. Step 3: Add up the reads in each area. To do so, you must determine the “blowdownvalue” of each read. How much TA-blowdown is caused by a Fall? By a sF? By a LF? This depends on the sensitivity used and on your type of E-meter. - Procedure: Put the needle on “set” with the sensitivity used in the interview and the TA on 2. Move the TA gently up. The needle will start falling. When it has reached the width defined for the sF you can tell how much TA movement went into this sF. It may not be more than 0.05 divisions on a sensitivity of 3. But ten sF’s make a total blowdown of 0.5 divisions, and that’s a lot! (This is why you need to note down each and every read as it occurs in the interview. ) Step 4: You have now worked out the amount of charge for each area. There will be one or two highly charged ones, three or four lesser ones, and a number of “stray reads” which stand for themselves. Arrange it all in the sequence of magnitude of charge. This is the sequence of your actual program, too. All that’s left to do is to find out which process you’ll have to use to “crack” each area. Steps 2 and 4 in a way relate to data evaluation. (See Data Evaluation Series in the green Management Volumes.) You have found outpoints (reading items) and pluspoints (non-reading and F/Ning items) . You put all the outpoints together to find the area which departs the most from the ideal scene, and propose a handling: the auditing process you are going to use in session. (See Logic 13, in “Scn 0-8”.) Step 5: Now try your tools on the areas found. What to use exactly is hard to say as it depends a lot on your previous experience, the previous experience of the pc, the complexity of the situation, the daringness of the auditor. You could use an L1C, six ruds or a prepcheck on the 2Dsituation mentioned in Step 2; you could single out one BD-item (first marriage) and work on it separately before getting into the general area of the 2D; you could cool off the general aspect first with an L1C on “your 2D” and then pick out the particulars. It is so much up to the individual constellation of facts and circumstances that only general advice can be given. A catch-all is “6 Ruds on the 2D, done repetitively till they F/N on calling them. “ -A more specific one: “Prepcheck on the 2D, lock-scan each BD item that shows up, to postulate and F/N; continue 117

prepcheck this way till all compulsive attention is off the 2D.” - One for those who can do L&N: “Who or what would represent the 2D to you?”; get the BD F/N item and do 6 ruds or a prepcheck on it, then clean up the 2D in general with an L1C taken to F/Ning list. Past wins, abilities once had and somehow lost, life purposes which were never attained are - naturally - done with rehab tech. Always make sure the item you are rehabbing is exactly worded to a big read or BD (see “itsa”); it will run all by itself then.

AUDITING AND C/Sing Do not worry about actually making one of the ten thousand possible mistakes one could make in auditing, or about making your pc worse than he is. You cannot audit something the bank is not willing to give out. You can only audit what’s available. The biggest reading item is the one most available to be run. Should you have made a mistake in arranging the sequence of charged areas or in the selection of processes you are using on them, well, the worst that can happen is: nothing. As long as you are not forcing the pc, no damage can be done. And if you only listen to what the pc’s attention is on, you’ll soon know what’s available, and that’s what you run. Any of the processes presented in Part Three of this handbook applied to any of the pc’s areas of charge, will blow charge and - therefore - increase awareness. They are all workable - which isn’t to say that your use of them will always be elegant or artful. Their correct application to the right item - so that they hit like a bomb - requires experience. Artfulness comes with time. Just do it and keep doing it. Audit hundreds and hundreds of hours. See what your tools can do for the case. Get to know them. And, little by little, you’ll be able to predict how the case will react to a certain approach. You will be able to calculate your moves against the bank like a master chess-player predicting his enemy a dozen moves in advance. And then you’ll be a C/S. The C/S must be able to predict. He determines the longterm strategy of dealing with this case. The auditor makes this strategy come true in each of his sessions. He uses on-the-spot tactics and flexibility. The C/S is the strategist, the auditor the tactician. To briefly summarize the sequence of action in its simplicity, no matter whether it applies to a one-man-band or to a larger setup: The interviewer does his interview. The C/S works out a program of perhaps eight or ten major steps . The auditor takes the pc in session and works on the steps prescribed by the C/S. When they bite, all is well. When they don’t bite, or half-bite, it may be due to the auditor’s inability to realize the program step in session, or to the program step unexpectedly not paralleling the pc’s case. Either way, the auditor ends the session after the EP or when it does not go, and writes it up: he puts numbers on his worksheets, summarizes the session content on the Auditor’s Report Form, writes his comment in red and his next C/S in blue and fills out the Folder Summary. Then he hands his folder in to the C/S who reads through the worksheets and gives his comments. Either he accepts the auditor’s proposition for the next C/S without changing it in any way, or he corrects it, or gives an entirely new and different instruction. Should the auditor have overlooked something or made a technical mistake, the C/S gives him a short study program to avoid a repetition of the same situation. If the auditor’s C/S was accepted, he can go back in session right away. However, if he was given a study program, he has to work it through before being allowed to audit further. The jargon term for this form of teaching is “cramming”. The C/S himself needs cramming occasionally, for example when he has failed to 118

solve one or even several cases. In a larger set-up he would usually have a “Senior C/S” picking up his mistakes and correcting him. Lacking such a person, he would look around for some other C/S whose abilities he trusts, and consult him. So the “correction of the corrector” is done on a voluntary basis here. (He would be ill advised not to do it, because sooner or later his customers will stay away!) How long does it take to become a professional? Five thousand well done auditing hours to become technically proficient, ten thousand to understand what it is all about.

PC Gone Clear? How can you tell when your pc has gone Clear? And, if so, what do you do? Here are some typical indicators: pc has had a successful Life Repair, is now on the Grades but has little TA action and no interest in the auditing; has lots of false reads and runs entities instead of own incidents; says he has more wins on study than in auditing; blows charge by inspection; can handle somatics at will out of session and without an E-meter; keeps asking questions about the solo-levels. But he doesn’t think or say that he might be Clear. Or he does say so. Now what do you do? Answer: leave it up to an experienced C/S. Of course it may happen that your pc has had a big win or release and just thinks he’s gone Clear because he doesn’t understand the technicalities of it. In this case you do a rehab on the release, explain the whole thing to the pc and carry on with your program. However, if your pc does have the indicators mentioned above, you should delegate the case to a C/S who has already done his OT III. Why? Before Clear you have a being who is identified with his composite case. When he goes Clear he understands that he is himself, that he is mocking up his own pictures and thereby causes his own troubles himself. But he doesn’t quite understand yet what it is exactly that exists along with him, i.e. the entities of the composite case. In C/Sing a Clear Check, you must be able to discriminate between “own charge” and “others’ charge” . This moves you close to the C/Sing style used on the Solo-levels. To get experience in this field, there is only one way: the C/S must have solo-audited successfully himself. This is why your Clear Check ought to be C/Sed by an OTIII C/S. It’s always advisable for the C/S to be at least one level up from the level he is C/Sing. The C/S C/Sing OTIII should himself have completed Excalibur the C/S C/Sing Excalibur should have completed his case for good. -This is a safeguard to make sure that the C/S doesn’t dramatize his own case and project his problems into the case of the pc. To let the cat out of the bag at least a little, a brief sketch of a possible approach to the Clear Check is now suggested. It is based on the Pre-Havingness Scale [1]. This scale, plus the reason why it has been chosen for the Clear Check, needs explaining before we get to the actual process.

119

The Pre-Havingness Scale ranges from Havingness, through various levels of attempts and failures to obtain it, to complete failure to be able to have. It describes a downward trend. To give an example of the logic of it: Supposing there is Havingness on a particular subject and something unpleasant happens, Failed Havingness, the next level down, would be the result. This would lead to interest in the subject, one further level down. This interest, if successfully pursued, would take one up the scale again to restored Havingness. If the interest fails (next level down), there will be the intention to be in Communication with the subject (again one level down) and should that attempt fail, the wish for Control will result. If that fails, you get the desire to Help. And so on, level by level, down to the aberrated levels of Inverted Help, Inverted Control, Inverted Communication and Inverted Interest. “Inverted” in this context would mean “turning back on oneself”, like the shot that goes off into one’s face instead of leaving the barrel. It means achieving the opposite of what is wanted. The inverted levels on the scale could possibly be interpreted as “knocked out of the game but still compulsively trying to participate somehow”, or “honestly attempting to play along, but unintentionally achieving the opposite of what the game is actually about”. (An example of this is given in Charlie Chaplin’s films. They all play at the bottom end of this scale . That people have an endless number of buttons in context with inverted help, control and communication, is demonstrated by the timeless success of these movies.)When there is a failure on even these levels, one drops to the bottom of the scale with Obsessive Can’t Have and ultimately the conviction that one can create No Effect at all. What does this have to do with doing a Clear Check? Well, it puts the pc to a test. He says he is Clear - now does that mean that there is no charge on his timetrack he couldn’t handle by himself, or could it merely be that he is not aware of further areas of charge due to non-confront? This needs finding out. You cannot find it out by doing yet another interview, because the pc has originated all inconsistencies he is aware of; he is well in tune with himself and his life. So you must challenge him. This is done by clarifying with him the concept of each level on the PreHavingness Scale . When the clarification on a particular level does not F/N, you know that there must be something behind it, i.e. a non-confronted terminal or item. So you find out who or what that is. Then you trace it down to the incident which caused the situation, by Postulate Auditing. It will soon become apparent whether you are dealing with the pc’s own charge or with an entity. The result of this approach would be: hidden pockets of own charge cleaned up; remaining yet unrecognized valences discovered and erased or disconnected from; pc certain about having no further charge of his own that he could not as-is by merely confronting it. He would “blow it by inspection”. With this Clear Check the pc has the opportunity to demonstrate that he “can be at cause knowingly and at will over mental matter, energy, space and time as regards the first dynamic (survival for self) “ [2]. The Pre-Havingness Scale covers all possible areas of unviewed charge he could still have at this stage. Now the pc can attest Clear with full certainty and knowledge.

THE CLEAR CHECK 1. Prerequisites: 1.1

The pc is on the whole in agreement with his life. He has things under control. He is futureoriented and optimistic. His life does not follow a roller-coaster course but is on a steady 120

upward trend. He understands the basic knowledge of scientology tech, admin and ethics and applies it in life. 1.2

Should the above condition not be fully prevalent, i.e. should the pc still be troubled by this or that, it would be found in auditing him - if he really is a Clear - that he is being influenced by entities. There would be unmistakable evidence that his troubles do not stem from home-made charge from his own time track. Before he can be allowed to attest and go on the solo levels, his troubles would need handling, though, by disconnecting him as much as possible from the entities bothering him. The techniques to be used conveniently would be either D/L for a light key-out, or Postulate Auditing for finding out what he does to keep the entity connected to him . )

2. Procedure Steps: After having cleaned up all personal charge and all immediately troublesome entities according to 1.2, and after having attained the condition described in 1.1 above, the steadfastness of the person presumed to be Clear is put to a test. 2.1

Do a slow assessment of the Pre-Havingness Scale, starting at the top. What does each level mean to the pc as a general concept; what does it mean to him personally? Get him to tell you.

2.2

When there has been no F/N on one level or the other, you would first see how much charge is on each one of them (by counting up the reads). Then, beginning with the biggest reading one, you would ask: “Who or what could you . . .?”, filling in the item in question. For the first level on the scale this would be worded as: “Who or what could you easily have?” The ones below that would be worded like: “Who or what would you fail to have?”, “. . . would you be interested in?”, “. . . would you fail to be interested in?”, and so on. According to the rules of Listing & Nulling, you should get a BD F/N item as an answer to your question. L & N questions are worded to allow for only one item to be the answer to the question. The pc will make a list of items which come to his mind, some of them will read, there may be a slight communication lag, and then suddenly he comes up with the item, has a BD followed by an F/N and laughs. This is not difficult at all, provided your TR-0 and your TR-2 are good.

2.3

Now you find the underlying incident. Supposing you had not received an F/N on clearing the level of “failed interest”, had done your L&N-process and received the item “apples”, you would now ask: “Recall the earliest time you can when you failed to be interested in apples” . Proceed according to Postulate Auditing procedure . (For a briefer and more superficial handling you could branch off at this point and do a D/L.)

2.4

Be very observant of the session getting efforty or unreal. In this case you immediately have to find the correct authorship for the incident you are running. Should you be dealing with a restimulated entity (instead of a mere non-confront of own charge), you audit it narrative style until it disconnects or “dissolves in thin air”. 121

2.5

The EP of the action is a cognition of the pc about his relationship to the composite case, with him being certain about his ability to create and un-create charge of his own. This may occur even before the whole scale has been done. If there is any doubt, it’s worth doing a few more levels and risking an overrun, rather than doing too little and staying superficial.

3. The actual check-up on Clear: Now clear the definitions 1-9 of “Clear” with the pc, in the Tech Dictionary. Tailor them to suit the first dynamic as not all are formulated that way. Have the pc give you examples demonstrating that he can act that way. It is he who has to “come up with the evidence”. The definitions must F/N. (His sessions of the past count of course as “evidence”, too.) 3.1

Now 6 Ruds “concerning Clear” are taken to F/N, to do away with any last doubts or reservations on the part of the pc.

3.2

Now ask the pc: “When did you go Clear?” Pick this question up only when it is charged. This will be so when the pc has been Clear for quite some time already, without anyone having noticed or acknowledged it, or when he attained Clear in his last life. (Which might be the reason for much of the joyless auditing he had! Nothing but O/R and false reads.) In order to rehabilitate the state, it is sufficient to find the exact point in time when it was attained (perhaps by using a D/L) and to then polish it up nicely with rehab-tech.

4. Attest: The “pc” attests to being “Clear on the 1st dynamic” . 5. Instruction: He gets full instructions about the composite case and about solo-auditing dealing exclusively with entities. The best basis for this instruction would be HCOB 30. July 1980, “The Nature of a Being”. 6. Result: The Clear feels competent to handle the remainder of his case, i.e. his entities, as a soloauditor. (Should he not say anything to that effect by himself, one ought to ask him in an interview.) (Usually you would find some source references at this point. But there aren’t any worth mentioning. The two attempts by the CofS to “make Clears”, the “Dianetic Clear Special Intensive” or DCSI, later turned into the “Clear Certainty Rundown” or CCRD, are both too much of a joke as to be seriously discussed or referred to. For those who wish to convince themselves: the DCSI you find in Tech Vol.XII; for the CCRD, which has not been issued publicly, it is sufficient to ask the victims.)

122

Ethics-Measures Ethics is to be applied with not more strength than needed to make the fulfillment of one’s goals possible. There is no hardship and no ideology connected with it. Everything is just fine as long as the pc does whatever is necessary to attain the ideal scene he has postulated for himself. Products in life tell the tale. “Ethics: that which is enforced by oneself, his belief in his own honor and good reason, an optimum solution along the eight dynamics” [2] . It is the use of reason towards optimum survival. We are not here to impose the morals of society or our own scientological convictions on the pc. We are here to enable him to find out for himself what’s right for him. Ethics should never be used as an other-determinism on the pc; it should increase his self-determinism. Therefore, speaking from a practical viewpoint, the C/S shouldn’t worry about anything in the pc’s life as long as it does not interrupt his progress in the direction of Clear - no matter what opinions and feelings the C/S personally may have regarding the pc’s doings. From a Clear, however, one would expect that he is well in control of his life. Someone who expects his sololevels to be a remedy for his life problems, is a pretty low-grade Clear or maybe not a Clear at all. And he will soon be in trouble on solo. At the point of Clear, then, the C/S must look at the life of the pc before giving him the ok to continue. The theory of the bridge implies that a being will act increasingly rationally as he is getting rid of his bank. His ability to find sane solutions can be expected to rise to the extent that he lets go of his fixation on aberrated solutions. This means that you will need very little ethics handling as you take the pc up the bridge - as long as you are producing technical results on him. Because of bad tech the pc’s life may go up and down which makes it look as if he had an “unusual case”. (See “roller-coastering” in the Tech Dict.) For this reason the pc folder must be seen by the C/S before the pc is sent to the ethics consultant. The other reasons for “ups and downs” are lack of data, missing know-how, false data, or uneducatedness in the activity one is failing in - maybe even a disability in mastering the three R’s (reading, writing, arithmetic). So at some point or other an education job will need to get done on such a person. When the pc’s activities in life amount to a real present time problem (PTP), it must be handled for real - with the tools of ethics. With all the auditing hours in the world you cannot expect to handle a real-life present-time ethics situation. A rather obvious example may serve to illustrate the point: a husband beats his wife every night he comes home from the bar. His wife gets auditing to handle the situation. You audit her to a win. She goes home, her husband beats her up as usual. The next day she has more auditing. Goes home, gets beaten up. And so on. Doesn’t work, you see? Any subjective problem (the considerations in the pc’s own universe) is handled with auditing tech. Now that the charge is gone and the pc is able to confront his life better, it may turn out that there is as well an objective part to the problem. This is the appropriate moment for the pc

123

to have an ethics consultation. When a handling which was agreed upon has been actually and demonstrably done, auditing can be successfully resumed without any further distraction. Example: The PC has problems handling money. After completing the respective auditing cycle he may have no more charge on his overts and withholds on the subject of money, but he still cannot handle it. Why should he, after all? Perhaps he has never learned it! An alert C/S picks up the situation before it can build up steam and keeps it from developing by using all the tools at his disposal, not only auditing. He must predict; that’s his job.

124

From Clear On Up In this book, the most common auditing methods from Life Repair to Clear have been presented to you. To say more - in simple words - would be hard, because from here on up on the bridge the application of the tech becomes so differentiated that its description would go beyond the limits of this text. The skill required in steering a thetan through his composite case to a point of case completion, can only be attained after auditing and C/Sing some dozens of cases successfully up to Clear, and after having done the solo-levels oneself, too - with personal gains. It takes a professional to understand the upper bridge. What makes things difficult, too, is the unavailability of reference materials . The levels OT I-III have always been kept confidential by the CofS, and rightly so as they may be restimulative to some people and one doesn’t want to run the risk. (A bit of mystery makes for better selling, too.) In order to talk in detail about the ins and outs of solo-auditing and solo-C/Sing, one would need a full set of the OTI-III scripts. They cannot be reprinted here for the reason stated, and because of copyright violations. They can easily be obtained, though, from most non CofS centers. Yet the mere fact of having them doesn’t help. It takes experience to understand them and apply them to a good result for oneself or the solo-auditor one is C/Sing. Now, in the 90’s, giving someone the OT III materials to read may not put him at risk any longer. After roughly two million solo auditing hours (at least) on OT III and Excalibur, done between 1968 and 1988, this part of the case has gone pretty flat. This is demonstrated by soloauditors today not being restimulated by OTIII as much as they were up to 1988. The same is true for the levels below OTIII. R6EW, the C.C., OTII - they were a fighting matter at the time they came out, they took hundreds of hours for each solo-auditor who did them. Today they don’t push a button any more in most people . These levels have gone flat on the 4th dynamic. Bits of them may still show in individual cases (1st dynamic) but the general phenomenon is that the Earth case has gone flat, at least the Xenu part of it. There are other things showing up now which aren’t straight OT III or Excalibur, yet can only be understood and handled in these terms, i.e. with reference to Xenu’s game. This is not to underestimate the value of these levels. For one person they may not do much, yet the next person may have a tremendous amount of charge tied up in the composite case and in his whole unviewed involvement with other beings and entities. When he is Clear he is in shape to start really dealing with it. The auditing techniques available to dig deep into this make for extraordinary gains, no denying it. The C/S must know his tools inside out and be flexible, that’s all one would need to say. He must work on the case as it presents itself to him here and now, and not confuse it with some case example Hubbard gave years ago for instructional purposes. The C/S bears great responsibility; his knowledge must match up to it or he won’t be able to control and predict the case he is C/Sing. Much as the OT III materials are rendered relatively “harmless” now, they shouldn’t be thrown on the market wholesale as they may be picked up by “C/Ses” who weren’t steeped in the experience of a few thousand hours of auditing on the lower bridge and who are therefore liable to use the data to the detriment of their public. And to the detriment of the subject

125

itself - because as long as quackery and dilettantism are tolerated in scientology, there will be nobody wishing to grant it any acceptance in science and society. But let us return to the “upper bridge”. What is it really? The answer most readily given is: “the OT levels”. Even in this book we have used this as an answer without worrying too much about its validity. Yet it is not a proper answer, because there was no proper question! To speak of the upper bridge merely in terms of the OT levels, wouldn’t do any justice to the different needs of individuals, their different awareness and pace. The CofS has for a long time encouraged a fiction of “OT” as an undefined yet specific magical state where all powers are restored and eternal freedom is regained. Or something like that. And that the OT-levels will take you there, when they are finally issued and when you have paid for them. This isn’t a bridge at all of course, but it is their hold on people and their undoing. The correct question we ought to ask is: where do we want to go; where is a bridge meant to take us? Generally speaking, auditing results in a greater sense of identity for the person who had it. He feels backed up by the experience of a few hundred lifetimes, he senses greater depth and feels more settled within himself. He understands his present as the result of things left undone in the past. To the extent that he knows his goal and can tackle the tasks connected therewith successfully, he will be happy, for the definition of happiness is: “the overcoming of not unknowable obstacles towards a known goal” (“The Fundamental Axioms of Dianetics” in [2].) Which implies three possibilities for his further development: when he fails, because freedoms, barriers and purposes have become unbalanced and things took an unfavorable turn against him and his game, he will want more auditing. He has failed ethically and now he wants help to become “repaired”. When he is happy with his life, and keeps on being happy, he won’t dream of ever getting audited again. Or, after having become so stabilized on his new level of knowledge and awareness and having explored it to its limits, he may become curious to find out more. He may wish to get a good C/S and pick up the solo-cans again in order to work out answers. He has found new and higher goals, new freedoms, but along with them new obstacles, too. This sort of expansion one would expect from someone playing his game ethically. Looking at auditing as a general growth process towards ultimate beingness, doingness and havingness, there is an end to the bridge only at that final point when the thetan has done it all and seen it all, completed his self-determined mission and sees no further reason for his own existence. Auditing certainly abbreviates the time it would take to get there, but it is no substitute for the corresponding activities. The incomplete cycles, the overts and withholds, the “bad karma” of the past once they have been taken away from one’s own universe, it is so much easier to strive, in the “real” world, for the final attainment of one’s basic goal in one’s current cycle of existence’s. And how long would it take? A few lifetimes? Some thousands of years? As much time into the future as it took from the moment one entered the mest universe, to the present? How long does it take to complete a cycle of action? It takes as long as it takes. “Time is the primary source of untruth” (Ax. 43) . The main thing is to keep growing in terms of quality, not in terms of speed. A true bridge would have to be adaptable to this pattern of growth in a smooth and organic fashion. It certainly isn’t that the pc goes “up the bridge” in a straight line! Not at all. The key items of his life as a thetan, his reason for being in the game at all, will keep re-appearing in ever more subtle form. Auditing therefore can be viewed as an upward spiral much rather than as a bridge. You will see the pc going through the same sort of thing again and again, each time on a 126

finer level, until finally he has solved the “riddle of his existence” sufficiently to play happily along towards the end of his games cycle. Much as it may be different from individual to individual, there is still a recognizable pattern in this. To start with, one is usually dealing with Flow 1 and Flow 2: what have others done to one, what has one done to them? The result of that is a Clear who can keep himself clean on the 1st dynamic. After that follows a long stretch of Flow 3: what have others done to others? This is the subject of the OT levels proper, where one audits the entities of the composite case, created by powerful forces on the intergalactic battlefield. With that done, this subject matter has lost its impressiveness to the solo-auditor. He can have it. By that time, entities have become about as solid and visible to him as the lamps in a beer garden. From now on his attention will gradually turn to Flow 0: what has he done to himself to become who he is now? This is perhaps the most important one. A thetan, in the final analysis, has created himself by postulates. Everything else depends on this. Whatever attitude or consideration, principle, concept or policy he has once used successfully or saw others use successfully, he collected and kept, all along the track since that moment when he created himself - a moment which is far away as well as now. And along with it he created and stored some working installations; they allow him, amongst other useful things, to drive a car, write, recite the alphabet and play the violin, without him having to put too much attention on it (circuits). The thetan always keeps one finger, as it were, on his awareness of himself as a static, and it is from this knowledge that he can consider that even the most positive structures that aid his game play are but fabrications, and he should be able to as-is or change them at will. One’s involvement’s with bodies, use of mental constructions at all, reliance on mest for communication could be, where it is not a matter of free choice, considered “case” and therefore subject to the need for a bridge. These are of course structures across all the dynamics, and our bridge doesn’t penetrate that far (yet), not withstanding CofS selling tactics. After dealing with all obvious reactive bank, after exhausting “negative gain”, there still remain the positive characteristics, the mental attributes that one has accepted as “oneself”. You probably have noticed that the point we are getting to, is the analytical mind, known as well as a man’s “character” or “personality”, perhaps as his “ego”. It’s what he mocked himself up to be. And it’s what he is going to keep on being, exactly as long as it takes him to unmock himself again. According to the two “Rights of a Thetan” it is up to each individual to leave his games in a manner determined by him alone. This is not a collective endeavor where all, in step with each other, would go through the same phases of development. One doesn’t have to wait until the others are ready. Only each one for himself can make up his mind with regard to his rate of progress, can know what is left to be done by him until he can attain the state beyond all games. And a bridge is only as good as it takes you there.

127

Author’s Postscript What I have tried to do in the two volumes of this book is to present a distillation of my experience with scientology, of what I found valid and workable, so that one may be able to freely talk about it without being forced into agreements and conclusions, and without cringing inwardly. This experience has three aspects: that of studying and being audited, that of applying it in my private life, my family and, naturally, my job, and lastly that of having become a member of a movement which I consider vitally important in cultural and humanitarian respects. When I started to become interested in scientology, it appeared to promise insights into the connectedness between man and his mind far beyond any comparable system I was aware of. This promise has been kept. My studies into, and personal experiences with, western psychology, eastern philosophy, yoga and meditation were, prior to that, of great importance to me but turned out to have been only preliminaries, for when I finally hit upon scientology, it allowed me, retrospectively, to fully penetrate the earlier disciplines. In the many years I have worked with scientology, I was not alone but with a number of others at various times, first inside the CofS and then outside, both as an auditor using the tech individually, and helping to train others in its use . (A double function which is practiced by most auditors in the CofS independent field.) The reason to write all this down was partly to clear my head of the whole thing at a point where I felt I finally got on top of it, but also because of the realization that it could well serve a useful purpose in helping others to understand something that is not that easy to grasp from available materials. Personally I feel it is our joint responsibility to care for the immense achievement that Ron Hubbard’s work represents, and to exhaust all its possibilities. It is the responsibility of all those who feel a mental response to his thoughts. One should not by any means leave this up to the CofS alone. A glance in your daily paper will tell you what results they are getting and how far adrift they are. As soon as you take the viewpoint that you are responsible for something, it becomes easier to comprehend it and to identify areas that need further clarification. It is probably this that has enabled us outside the CofS to resolve various aspects of the tech, particularly about the upper part of the bridge, that were left incomplete by Hubbard and were proving dissatisfactory in practice. This, and the fact that no-one in the CofS is allowed to contribute to the subject, which they think was Hubbard’s job, and they believe he completed it. So there is nothing that ever came from their side, no further thoughts, no reflections, critical discussions, whatever, and one would not expect anything to come from them in the future. It seems very much so that we were right in taking on this responsibility. One example for that is the reach of the bridge as it is delivered outside the CofS, and the results obtained. This is true in particular for Bill Robertson’s “Excalibur” which certainly does reach parts of the case that “NOTs”, the CofS’s equivalent, cannot reach. As well, the standard of a “case completion” is wholly unknown in the CofS. And as it is all entirely within the concepts and technology as

128

devised by Hubbard, we may assume that we did the right thing and that he would approve of our work instead of turning in his grave. I am, of course, not claiming all is known to us regarding the mind. I restrict myself to simply saying that a certain stage of know-how and effectiveness have been achieved which can be made public in this way. Perhaps it will help others to take their part in the work of carrying it further, the work L. Ron Hubbard started when he wrote in 1950 at the end of “Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health”: “For God’s sake, get busy and build a better bridge ! “ I for one take him seriously.

129

Appendix

130

Admin: A Example for session worksheets John F. (pc) Paul B. (auditor)

TR-3 My wife, that I shouldn't always cut my fingers whilst peeling them!

10.6.1990 ________________________________ sensitivity: 3

LF (laughs)

TA: 3.7 (without creme) 2.8 (with creme)

2.3 TR-3

breath: F (comm lag) TITS (This Is The Session) 2.9

Funny, everybody seems to keep telling me what I should do...

How did it go since vour last session?

2.7

15:32

(GIs)

very well!

more to that?

(GIs)

Seems they think I can't look after myself

(F/N) 15:33

sF 28

Like a baby. F

We continue the prepcheck on apples

(grins) 2.6

suggested?

button,TR-4 sF

My grandmother, that I should eat more of the apple tart

that's all, really X sF

2.9

2.6 TR-3

next button: mistake been made? X

My friend, that I should come and steal some F

wouldn't know what 131

to say on that ... 2.5

3.1

Admin: A

next button: protested?

TR-2

X Perhaps when apples are sour? I'm always protesting when I get a sour one

Would you believe it .. They think I'm a baby! X

BD 2.9 ! F

The trouble is - half the time I do feel that way!

3.4

F 2.8 Regarding this session is there a protest? X 3.6 no Regarding this session. has something been overrun?

-I'm a baby now fancy that! Gee! BD 2.4 (laughs loud) TR-2 (F/N)

sf 3.7

15:53

2.5

well, that's possible... Something you want to say or ask before we end the session?

wouldn't know what, though Perhaps a release point?

No. that’s all right! X

BD 2.3 (still laughing)

a cognition? F 3.6

(F/N) 15:55

2.5

Hmmm ... Could be ... sF

EOS 132

(End Of Session) when? maybe when I reallzed that they all think I'm a baby? BD 3.3

Admin: B Example of an Auditor's Report Form John F. Paul B.

10.6.1990 Session time so far: Session time today: Total:

2:43 0:23 3:06

TAA: 2.2 (= 6.0/hr)

TA-Range: 2.3-3.7

Process

Time

TITS

15:32

2.9

How did it go since last session~

15:33

2.8

good, F/N, GIs

3.7

pc very responsive to start with, then dries up, TA rising

Prepcheck cont’d from “suggested”, three buttons

Protest/Overrun?

Sens. Result 3

GIs

A cognition was bypassed: "I'm a baby!" 15:53

2.5

F/N, VGIs

133

Admin: C Example of a C/S-sheet In red ink: John F. Paul B.

10.6.1990

Went well. Pc had a cognition and blew a valence. This did not immediately show up, so we had to do a brief rehab. Although his cognition is important it only related to the button in question but not to the subject of apples in general. So we can assume that this prepcheck is not quite complete yet. In blue ink: C/S: 1.

How did it go since last session? (Brief 2WC to F/N. possibly a rudiment to F/N.)

When there is an F/N, or when the pc has no F/N but already starts originating about apples: continue prepcheck "on apples' to EP.

Next step on the programm.

In red ink: Paul B. (signature)

134

Admin: D Example of a Folder Summary 3.6.1990 Interview & Pgm ____________________________ 9.6.1990 Prepcheck on 2:43 apples, 6 buttons, Incomplete. F/N at EOS. ____________________________ 10.6.1990 Prepcheck cont'd, 0:33 3 more buttons, cog "I'm a baby", F/N VGIs. F/N at EOS. _____________________

135

136

2a The rudiments, general pattern

A) ARC-Break 1. Do you have an ARC-Break ? 2. Tell me about it ! 3. Was it a Break in - affinity ? - reality ? - communication ? - understanding ? 4. Was it a Break in (e.g. communication) ? 5. I would like to indicate, it was a Break in (e.g. communication). 6. Was it - curiosity about (e.g. communication) ? - a desired (e.g. communication) ? - an enforced (e.g. communication) ? - an inhibited (e.g. communication) ? - no (e.g. communication) ? - a refused (e.g. communication) ? 7. Was it a (e.g. a refused communication) ? 8. I would like to indicate, it was a (e.g. a refused communication). 9. Is there an earlier similar ARC-Break ?

B) Problem, Invalidation, Evaluation 1. - Do you have a present time problem ? - Have you been invalidated ? - Has someone evaluated for you ? 2. Pc tells the incident. 3. - Is there an earlier similar problem ? - Is there an earlier similar invalidation ? - Is there an earlier similar evaluation ?

137

2b The rudiments, general pattern

C) Withhold, Overt 1. Has a withhold been missed ? Have you committed an overt ? 2. a) What was it ? b) When was it ? c) Is that all to it ? (must read) d) Who has missed it ? e) What did X do that made you think he/she knew ? f) Who else has missed it ? (see e) 3. Is there an earlier similar mw/h (or overt, respectively) ?

D) The “False”-Handling Has anyone said you had - an ARC-Break, - a present time problem, - a missed w/h, - committed an overt, - been invalidated, - been evaluated for, when this was not the case ?

138

139

140

141

142

Index AESP 30, 31, 33, 37, 62, 66, 74, 76, 78, 86, 96, 101 Assessment 48, 50, 62, 65, 66, 69, 74, 92, 111 Attest 42, 43, 107, 111 Auditor’s code 11, 13, 15, 18, 40, 41, 54, 55, 95 Auditor’s presence 83 Basic 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 64, 66, 72, 76, 80, 83, 96, 99, 117 Buttons 25, 51, 61, 62, 63, 64, 66, 77, 78, 80, 84, 110 Case supervisor 41, 42 CCH 22, 25 Chain 31, 33, 36, 37, 51, 66, 69, 71, 72, 74, 76, 78, 83, 99 Chemical release 96 Circuits 22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 92, 93, 118 Clear 10, 18, 20, 21, 27, 41, 43, 88, 89, 95, 98, 99, 105, 106, 107, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 116, 117 Cognition 15 Dating and locating 60, 83 Drugs 19, 54, 81, 95, 96, 105, 106 End phenomena 15 End phenomenon 19, 27, 62, 66, 74 Engram 24, 31, 32, 33, 35 Entities 113 Entity 30, 33, 38, 87, 91, 93, 111, 112 False read 51, 71, 74, 81, 99, 110, 112 Flat 61 Flows 75, 96, 98, 99 GPM 24, 49, 76, 83, 90, 101 Indicators 12, 15, 21, 27, 31, 32, 42, 43, 46, 50, 56, 78, 88, 89, 107, 110 Item 60, 62, 78 Itsa 15, 52, 60, 61, 62, 66, 69, 72, 74, 78, 91, 109 Justification 72 L1C 48, 66, 69, 101, 102, 108 Life repair 60, 68, 95, 96, 98, 103, 110, 116 Listing and nulling 60, 86, 87, 88 Lock scanning 31 Lock-scanning 31, 33, 35, 36, 40, 64, 72, 86, 96, 99 Lockscanning 92 Narrative style 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 38, 59, 64, 66, 90, 101, 112 Objective processes 10, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28, 92, 97 Overrun 15, 39, 49, 78, 90, 91, 92, 112 Postulate auditing 10, 30, 35, 36, 39, 60, 64, 73, 77, 80, 91, 95, 96, 99, 101, 103, 111, 112 Pre-havingness scale 110 Prepcheck 61, 62, 63, 64, 77, 86, 101, 102 143

Process 15, 91 Program 10, 42, 46, 86, 95, 96 Q & A 42 R3RA 40, 96 Rehabilitation 76, 89 Release 91, 92, 96, 110 Repair list 65, 91 Repair list 48 Repair lists 59, 60, 66 Repeater technique 32, 33, 35, 36, 38, 39, 64, 80 Repetitive process 22 Rudiments 56, 59, 60, 68, 95, 97, 128 Secondary 31, 32, 33, 49, 69 Tone arm 45 TRS 10, 11, 15, 17, 19, 21, 41, 50, 67, 86, 95, 97 Two way comm 103, 104 Valence 28, 30, 35, 62, 71, 73, 90, 93, 106 VGIs 15

144

The Pied Pipers of Heaven Who calls the tune? by L.Kin About Ghosts, Demons, Gods, Angels, Shamans, Gurus, Occultists, Magicians, Cosmic Powers, Secret Lodges, Scientologists, UFOs, Extraterrestrials, Galactic Confederations and Conspiracies against Planet Earth

EDITION SCIENTERRA 1

Copyright © 1994 by L. Kin, All rights reserved Title: The Pied Pipers of Heaven - Who calls the tune? Copyright © 1994 by Edition ScienTerra, a subdivision of VAP Publishers, Wiesbaden, Germany All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without wrinen permission except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. For information or book orders please address VAP Delivery Service, Post Box 1180, D-32352 Preussisch Oldendorf, Germany, Fax 49 l 57 42 l 93 04 55 ISBN 3-922367-28-3, Verkehrs-Nr. 16645 (BAG) First printing 1994 Printed in Germany

Table of Contents Preface

CHAPTER 1. Esoterics East and West 1.1 Spirits, Ghosts and Demons

GHOST ENCOUNTERS * DEMONS * MENTAL ENERGY AND IT S SOURCE * EMOTIONS * THE MIND AND THE BRAIN * THE STATIC * ENLIGHTENMENT * THE STUFF THE MINDS MADE OF * THE REACTIVE BAINK * AUDITING * GAMES AND POSTULATES * PROBLEMS * IMPLANTS * MIND-SHARING * RESPONSIBILITY AND REINCARNATION * THE CLEAR 1.2 Soul and Body

THE BREATH OF LIFE * LIFE FORCE AND MEMORY STORAGE * CHILD DEVELOPMENT * PSYCHOSOMATICS * PRANA * CHAKRAS * CH I * KAHUNA * DRUGS, HYPNOSIS, MEDICINE * EUROPEAN OCCULTISM * FRINGE MEDICINE * THE RESONANCE PRINCIPLE 1.3 Creating a Universe

AKASHA * ETHER POWER * FROM STATIC TO MEST * A DOWNWARD SPIRAL * UNDOING THE UNIVERSE 1.4 God and the Infinite

ATHEISM * MONOTHEISM * STATIC AND DYNAMIC * TWO BASIC RIGHTS CHAPTER 2. Scientology - Science or Science Fiction? 2.1 Auditing Compared to Traditional Practices

MEDITATION AND AUDITlNG * SHAMANISM AND DIANETICS * ON ENERGY TRANSFORMATION AND UN-CREATION 2.2 Hubbard s Space Opera

SCIENCE FlCTION * SCIENTIFIC FUNDAMENTALS * SCIENCE VERSUS MYTHOLOGY * THE AXIOMS * THE ELECTROPSYCHOMETER (E-METER) * FACT OR FICTION?

CHAPTER 3. The Xenu Myth 3.1 A Global Catastrophe

WARNING TO THE READER * A GALACTIC POWER COUP * BATTLEFIELD EARTH * A PLACE OF EVIL * ON BTs AND CLUSTERS * 3.2 Of Gods and Angels

INCIDENT ONE * IMAGINARY UNIVERSES * A MAGICAL MULTIMEDIA SHOW * THE END OF SINGLENESS * THE BEGINING OF TIME * GAMES PREPARATIONS * TRAPPING ATTENTION * XENU RECRUITS HIS TEAM * THE GAME TAKES OFF * A NETWORK TO CONTROL ALL 3.3 Before Time Began

THE AKASHA CHRONICLE * LUCIFER AND HIS DISCIPLES * AN ENERGY PRESERVATION CONFERENCE * GAMES ALTERNATIVES * TWO CONTESTANTS CHAPTER 4. Earlier than Atlantis 4.1 Twelve who are Thirteen

A THIRD CONTESTANT * GAMES NAMES * THE PHI PROJECT * THE CONVERSION PROGRAM * TIMELESS CONCEPTS * YATRUS 4.2 The Binding of Spirit and Soul

ONE PLUS ONE MAKES THREE * NEW TOYS FOR THETAN S * SURVIVAL WORRIES SEXUALITY * PARADISE LOST * CATCH YOURSELF A THETAN * BODY SERVANTS 4.3 Setting Cosmic Law

101

TWO RIVALS * OLD ABILITIES NEWLY IMPLANTED * HOW TO IMPLANT CROSSED-OVER PURPOSES * A SECOND SWITCHBOARD * COSMIC LAW * A LESSON IN BASIC GEOMETRY 4.4 A New Culture

106

YATRUS BIO-LAB * SIGNS OF DECLINE * OUR ATLANTEAN HERITAGE

CHAPTER 5. The Fate of Earth 5.1 Earth since the Cataclysm

109

A BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE WHOLE TRACK * EDUCATION BY IMPLANT * A LOBSTER-POT FOR THETAN S * THE DEMON PLANET * MISSIONAIRES OF MANY SHADES * THE MARCABIAN CONFEDERACY * RE-CIVILIZATION PROJECTS * HIGH TECH FOR MR. CAVEMAN * A NET TO CATCH THEM ALL * THETANS ON A LEASH * THE MARCABIAN IMPACT * R6 DECO 5.2 Masterminding History

126

WHOSE ONE WORLD ? * XENU S MONOLOGUE * ONE WORLD, ONE VOTE * A WHITE PLANET 5.3 In the Hands of Extraterrestrials

135

YATRUSCAN DELIGHTS A PIGGYBACK SCENARIO * LIZARD MEN * UFO MANEUVERS CHAPTER 6. Defense by Telepathy 6.1 The Magicians War

146

OCCULTISM WHITE AND BLACK * A FORMATION OF FORCES 6.2 Hubbard s Attack

152

CLEARS IN TROUBLE * THE OT III BREAKTHROUGH * HUBBARD RECRUITS LOYAL OFFICERS * A BLUNTED ATTACK 6.3 The Battle Goes On

157

A NEW CHURCH * EXCALIBUR * GALACTIC ADMINISTRATION XENU IN SESSION * A NEW TYPE OF CLEAR * YATRUS GETS AUDITING * THE GE POOL * GERD * THE PHI MATRIX * DEPROGRAMMING THE SCREEN * THE M-SHIP IN ORBIT * FUTURE PROJECTS CHAPTER 7. The Future

169

MARCAB CRUMBLING * A BODY CULTURE * THE FRIENDLY PLANET * POLITICS SCIENCE AND ART * THE ATLANTEAN LIABILITY Epilogue

177

APPENDIX A. Glossary

179

B. Reader s Restimulation Remedy

183

C. Excalibur

187

D. Bibliography

191

Preface Various New Age techniques such as meditation have brought an awareness of man s position in the spiritual cosmos, channeling has opened communication lines with beings from other worlds, UFOlogists observe extra-terrestrial activities and warn the population of this planet of imminent dangers. Within this context, this book adds yet another facet. It s an attempt to communicate something I consider worthwhile, perhaps with the hope of contributing to desirable global changes. One might say that is concerns itself with a rather specific view of the world that of Ron Hubbard and his adherents. (Please note that neither author nor publisher are connected to the Church of Scientology or any of its organizations.) Hubbard s view of the world might be boiled down to the simple statement that planet Earth is in the process of being conquered. colonialized and practically enslaved by extraterrestrial powers since millennia. He is not the only one to say so. To arrive at this conclusion, the main theme of this book, we need to go through four preparatory chapters without which the findings and interpretations of chapter 5, The Fate of Earth , would appear incomprehensible and nonsensical. We need to build a runway of sufficient length, as it were, in order to safely take off. Chapter 1 deals with some fundamentals concerning the spirit, the soul, god and the universe; it incorporates classical as well as esoteric concepts on the subject of psychosomatic and compares them with each other. Chapter 2 deals with the question of scientific truth versus esoteric truth and gives some examples of the myths natural science indulges in without really admitting to it. Chapters 3 and 4 give an account of the history of this universe and center around the myth of Xenu, a mighty spirit Hubbard identified as controlling the fate of the world. In chapter 5 follows a general interpretation of the data accumulated so far, specifically with reference to the political and cultural position of Earth within this galaxy. Chapter 6, Defense by Telepathy , shows what has been done and is being done for Earth to escape its fate. Chapter 7 is an attempt to predict some outlines of the future. The appendix contains a glossary of terms as well as notes on the procedures which have led to the findings and results described in chapters 3 to 6. Acknowledgments: Although any book appears to be written by one author only, it is in fact the result of a stream of knowledge squeezed through that particular author and somehow ending up as ink on paper. My thanks go to all whose knowledge I could refer to and use in my own work; they go to my clients and assistants who in the attempt to shake off their psychic burden, found fairly unusual data, incidents and scenarios, and thus helped to write this account; they go to the teachers I had in this life, in particular to Ron Hubbard and Bill Robertson, and last not least to my earlier teachers of many lifetimes ago, spent in the foothills of the Himalayas, namely Sri Yuktesvar and the saint Babaji (as they are called today).

Notes: Quotations from Hubbard s work are printed in italics. Small figures like

6 at the end of sentences refer to titles listed in the bibliography. All technical terms

specific to scientology will appear in bold print when they are mentioned the first time; they are summarized in the appendix as a glossary for easy reference. Here and there in the text you ll find something like this: (Fac.12) or (Ax.45) or (Dn Ax.2). These are references to scientology source materials such as the Factors (Fac), the Axioms (Ax) or the Dianetics Axioms (Dn Ax). The Factors, Axioms and Dianetics Axioms are philosophical structures Hubbard s teachings are derived from.

CHAPTER 1 Esoterics East and West 1.1 Spirits, Ghosts and Demons GHOST ENCOUNTERS * DEMONS * MENTAL ENERGY AND ITS SOURCE * EMOTIONS * THE MIND AND THE BRAIN * THE STATIC * ENLIGHTENMENT * THE STUFF THE MIND IS MADE OF * THE REACTIVE BANK * AUDITING * GAMES AND POSTULATES * PROBLEMS * IMPLANTS * MIND-SHARING * RESPONSIBILITY AND REINCARNATION * THE CLEAR GHOST ENCOUNTERS I met my first ghost as I was walking down a narrow country lane near East Grinstead, Sussex, England. It was close to Midnight. In the silence I suddenly heard the creaking of w heels and the clop-clop of hooves on the street, and all of a sudden there emerged, right next to me, so close I could have touched it, the silhouette of a stage coach. The coachman sat all huddled up in his cloak, as dark as the devil himself and gave me an evil glance. The apparition lasted about two minutes and then faded. I walked on. This was rather strong, particularly for a densely populated part of the country. One might expect that sort of thing in Scotland, but in Sussex? As I got home, I said to my wife: Do you know what just happened to me? And she said, without me being able to continue: The stage coach? Did you see that, too? It turned out that she had come across the same thing about an hour earlier. Another one: one night I took a walk across the large green in front of the manor I used to live in; the moon was full, the wind rattled in the trees, the clouds raced across the sky, and I was enjoying myself no end. Suddenly I felt a pang of fear, like the blade of a knife was entering my chest. Immediately I spotted the direction it came from: out of a dark place where the trees grew thick and black. Behind it, about a hundred yards away, was a pond. I opened myself for the stream of pictures which I knew would be accompanying this powerful emotion, and there they were! The story of a young man, a gardener, who drowned himself one winter s night because of a lost love, about twenty years ago. As he saw his body floating down the pond and getting caught at the grid, an even greater loss overcame him and he hovered over his dead body in grief and noncomprehension and never got out of the incident. He stayed there, glued to the spot, for a good twenty years! He unloaded his misery to me, then decided to give it a new start, and left. The next day I asked the landlady if something funny had ever happened at the lake, and she said oh yes, had I picked it up, too, there definitely was something foul down there, none of the children ever liked to go to the pond although it s the ideal

place in summer, and it probably started about twenty years ago when poor William F., the gardener, drowned himself in the pond etc., etc. (Next summer, by the way, the pond was crowded with children.) I found that people, at least the English, have quite a good understanding of ghosts. Once, when I did some painting and decorating as a side job, I worked in a country manor and perceived a ghost of a woman who fled when she noticed that I had spotted her. I told the proprietor about my observation. She said: No need to worry; she s a nice ghost, we know her quite well. Last century she actually owned the house. She just doesn t like people to sleep in the bedroom w here she used to have it off with her lover. When we have guests we w ant to get rid of we put them in that bed and she ll come at night and knock it about. All very matter-of-fact. Pregnant women are sometimes very aware of ghosts, meaning spirits in need of bodies. One lady told me that they came to her queuing up, applying for entry, and she wouldn t let them in until she found the right one. (Now, seven years later, I can only congratulate her on her choice.) Another lady told me that she became aware of a second spirit challenging the first spirit who had already claimed the embryo in her womb. She was sitting in her lounge one evening, when suddenly a tremendous tension built up in the room, with pictures moving on the wall and books falling off the shelf, until the two had fought it out between them. The lady herself had added to the charge as she was in favor of the existing proprietor and didn t like the intruder. So she helped fight the intruder, yet he won. Afterwards it took the lady a while to get used to him, and finally she welcomed him. They made a good team, as it turned out over the years. A ghost is a spirit stuck in an incident and hanging about waiting to be redeemed by a kind soul. Just try your local graveyard! You ll find quite a number of spirits sitting on their graves bewailing their fate. Listen to them and they ll gratefully disappear. Some will ask you directions to the nearest maternity ward before they go. (No joke.) The process to achieve this is quite simple: just have a ghost tell his grievous story about a dozen times - and he will either dissolve or go off to start a new incarnation, depending if it s a demon or a real ghost. DEMONS A real ghost is an individual spirit like you and me except that he has no body. In that he can freely direct his attention and cause certain effects consciously and voluntarily, he is a creator, whereas a demon is only a created entity. White magicians trying to influence the weather or making the crop grow better are creating or using such entities by means of evocations , and so do black magicians in order to subordinate others to their will or even kill them. In the magician s trade, demon entities are called elementals . Although a demon is not a free and unlimitedly causative spirit, he has an ego nevertheless, and he can act. You can freely talk and argue with demons. They will try to dominate you and attempt to deceive you about their true nature when they feel found

out. They may react like a real person in flesh and blood sitting across the table. This depends on the size and density of the entity and of the intention with which it is loaded. Some of them - like those used in voodoo and black magic - are positively killers! In contrast to a spirit, an entity is only a ridge. A ridge is a mass of mental energy containing all data of the incident when it was formed, including the voice tracks of the people involved. Everybody makes ridges at times of high stress, loss or physical danger. Ridges bother one long after the actual incident is over; sometimes they appear as nagging mental image pictures which distract one or pull one into a daydream. So ridges are made by oneself; with entities, however, it s somewhat more complicated. Although they are only ridges, they aren t made by oneself but by another person during some heavy incident. An entity is another person s ridge that wandered over to you. It gets from the other fellow s space into yours, and because you don t like it you push energy against it and wall it off- and that makes it really go solid. That solders it in for good. And then, one day or perhaps in the middle of the night, you find someone is talking to you from over there ! Eerie feeling, takes getting used to. Very demonic. Entities are usually perceived as out there whereas one s own pictures appear to be all around or perhaps in front of one. Since entities are made of another s mental stuff (with one s own added), they are a bit more resistive than home-made ridges. They reveal their contents in picture form like any other ridge would, but in order to dissolve them one has to actually recognize them for what they are and acknowledge them as foreign-made . This makes some of them disappear in thin air - whereas others actually talk back! They contain voice circuits and are even able to give intelligent answers about the incident when they were created and in case of black magic, what purpose they were created for. You ask When was it? or Who was there? , and the entity flashes the details you were asking for in picture form. One has to be aware of the existence of entities when one does any kind of recall process or reincarnation-therapy , because the impressions one gets may not stem from oneself but from an entity and therefore from the time track of another person. Getting time tracks mixed up can lead to severe complications in any form of therapy. A simple example of this is the fear usually associated with ghosts - maybe it s the ghost s fear, and we aren t used to distinguishing such things. MENTAL ENERGY AND ITS SOURCE We said that ridges and entities were made of mental energy. What is that? Where does it come from, how is it made? To help explain this, we need to introduce two terms: theta and thetan. Theta means thought, thought power, thought energy. The spirit who is doing the thinking, is correspondingly called thetan . (The th in the Greek letter theta resembles the th in the English word thought , therefore Hubbard chose to use the letter theta as a symbol for all things to do with thought.)

Thetan and theta are the heart of the matter; we must examine them closely. Every spiritual being is considered a thetan; you are a thetan, I am a thetan, pretty much everybody operating a human body is a thetan. It would be wrong to say: have a thetan , because thetan refers to the sprit himself, not to some part of him. Equally incorrect would it be to assume that any human being was a thetan and that human being and thetan was synonymous, since thetan refers to the spiritual aspect only, and as we shall see, a human being is powered and run by more forces than only one single thetan. We ll come to that in the course of this chapter. For now it is sufficient to know that a thetan is an immortal spiritual being who produces and uses an energy called theta in order to translate his thoughts into action. Theta manifests itself in a twofold way: firstly as pure thought or pure concept in the form of postulates, secondly as energized thought in the form of loud thinking and mental image pictures. Mental image pictures, imaginations, hallucinations, fantasies, dreams, all consist of mental mass and energy existing in space and time. (This is usually abbreviated to mental mest.) Some pictures have more mass than others, are denser, more solid, larger and longer-lasting than others. Depending on the amount of attention the thetan gives them this can go to the extreme of the picture being more solid and real than the actual matter, energy, space and time of the surrounding physical universe. At which point the person is considered psychotic. He sees things which nobody else sees; his personal reality is severely diverging from the shared reality of normal people (i.e. the majority), and so he is called insane. This gives us an interesting insight in how reality is formed. Reality is the agreement upon perceptions and data in the physical universe. (Dn Ax.113) This sentence ought to be written in ten-foot high neon letters. The real world is only real to the extent that realities are shared. When one agrees with oneself only and disagrees with the majority, one is called insane. This can be easily observed. Just go to a party whose merriment is supported, improved and boosted by a selection of fine spirits, and stay sober yourself. Soon you ll see realities slipping apart quite dramatically. And who, then, is to call whom insane, one wonders? To repeat, theta appears in a twofold way - as pure thought (concepts, postulates) and as energized thought (pictures, intentions, will power). A demon entity, for example, is not a pure thought but a mass of theta energy once created by a thetan. A pure thought, in contrast, is invisible. Both types of theta are created by the thetan. Theta is created by thetans. And to the thetan, too, the two modes of manifestation apply. A ghost, for example, is a thetan in his energized form. He is a bodiless thetan giving out energy impulses which make him recognizable. His energy impulses are coded as emotions such as fear, terror or grief. When he is in the business of haunting houses, he is usually stuck in some incident of the past and has a compulsion to tell everybody about it, or at any rate people he sees as sensitive .

One usually perceives a person as a body superimposed by a pattern of emotional vibrations. Even without the body one can recognize the individual blend of energy vibrations typical for a certain person. If one didn t, one wouldn t know people from one s past life when one bumps into them in this life! Neither could one make repeated telepathic contact with others, be they on this planet or elsewhere, with body or without, because one wouldn t be able to tell if one were dealing with the same individual each time. A thetan as pure thought on the other hand, a pure thought being without any energies attached, would be telepathically imperceptible. One might know him, yes, but not see him. It follows that a thetan creates his own theta field to have a platform to act from. So although he actually exists outside the coordinates of time and space, energy and matter (mest), he is as well located inside them. Without such a field, he would exist outside mest only. This bundle of mental energy is referred to by Hubbard as mind. In his function as a player of the game of life where he needs a body, food, playmates and things to play with, the thetan manifests himself - through his mind - on the level of mental mest and physical mest. The mind contains useful circuitry and data, for example all conscious memory, all learned skills, all automaticities such as walking, writing or driving. The mind is the thetan s briefcase, or perhaps his electronic notebook . In that the thetan continuously creates this energy field called mind and in that he carelessly tends to identify with it, one could rightfully say that the thetan is his mind. Thetans - you, me, anyone - exist as game-players to the extent that they make themselves perceptible by a mental field and act through one. EMOTIONS The mind, being an energy phenomenon, always is in some state of vibration. It cannot hold still; it pulses. The vibrations emanating from it are felt as emotions. ( Emotion , Latin, means a motion emanating .) Emotions have frequency and amplitude. The lower the frequency, the lower is the emotion; the lower the amplitude, the weaker is their volume of expression. It s a total parallel to guitar strings - the tauter they are, the higher their pitch; the wider they swing back and forth (because they were plucked hard), the louder they sound. Emotions are the thetan s mode of pulsing into his body and environment and of responding to it. The intention to exert effort bridges (from the thetan) into the body by emotion. In other words, the physical-mental bridge is emotion. One can t get the body moving by thought alone; one must additionally produce mental force (emotion) on the basis of that thought in order to achieve physical activity (motion).

Attitudes are a pattern of postulates and counter-postulates accumulated over many lifetimes. Some of them are habitually energized, that is, with attention put on them which keeps them activated, and this is what makes each thetan have a certain character . He pulses according to his postulate/counter postulate sets (Ax. 2, 3). In the course of time he may become narrowed down to a fixated pattern of emotional frequency and so to a narrow band of sending and receiving. Emotion is the energy manifestation of affinity. (. . .) Emotion could be called the index of a state of being. A thetan who is not flexible on the emotional tone scale but stuck on a certain band, will only respond to a range of half a tone above and half a tone below where he stands and simply not perceive w hat s further above and below. Seen this way, emotions are not simply passing moods but basic and fairly persistent attitudes towards life. They function as filters for one s perceptions (inflow) and actions (outflow). Man sees his environment through these filters; he literally creates the world in his own image! An angry man sees the world through this particular emotion and acts accordingly, so does the fearful one, the apathetic one, and as well the cheerful and enthusiastic ones. As all actions are preceded by thought and accompanied by emotions, it follows that emotion and irrationality are not synonymous. One surely wouldn t call a habitually joyful person making sane decisions irrational , just because those decisions were based on a joyful emotion; but one would rightfully use that term for a habitually angry person making insane decisions because of the anger involved. Only a low emotion can blind the conscious mind, the ratio , and is therefore correctly to be called irrational . On the basis of this model, the interaction between thetans can be seen to occur purely by resonance. The vibrations of one thetan may touch a sympathetic string in the other- and behold! there is communication. Or not. It depends on the chronic tone level of the receiving thetan. If the two don t harmonize, their communication won t last long - they may not even perceive each other! Resonance is therefore but another word for affinity . To go back to ridges and entities for a moment - their interaction with a thetan works on the same basis, naturally. As ridges and entities are small sub-fields within the general field of a thetan, living a life of their own because the the boss has walled them off to keep their unpleasant contents away from him, and as they can t help vibrating, they of course influence and modify the quality of the general field and thus affect the thetan. He responds to the vibrations of other thetans, his own ridges and foreign entities in the same way a radio responds to a radio station. To the extent that he doesn t recognize this, the thetan doesn t consciously respond but unconsciously react to these influences, and accordingly this walled-off part of the mind is called reactive mind. The reactive mind is shut off from his awareness but still affects him. Usually one only notices how one is being affected - in the form of unwanted emotions and body pains - but doesn t see the source of it. (In the Sanskrit terminology of ancient India the reactive mind would compare to the concept of samskara which literally means lasting impression . The lasting impressions of many lifetimes - as long as one is

unaware of them - are the driving force generating one s present karma and all the mishaps connected with it.)

THE MIND AND THE BRAIN A clear distinction ought to be made between the mind and the brain. The brain is a lump of tissue, it doesn t think nor does it contain pictures. The mind, in contrast, is a theta energy phenomenon produced by the thetan to operate within the world of mental and physical matter, energy, space and time. It is a communication relay point for that level of game. Here is a test: close your eyes and imagine a cat. Now get a brain surgeon to open your skull and find the picture of that cat in your brain. He won t find it. Because it isn t in your brain but in your mind. And who looked at it is you. This simple demonstration clarifies the difference between thetan, mind and body. This stands in obvious contrast to some schools of psychology, psychiatry and medicine where it is held as truth that man is a lump of meat, his development based on a set of genes, his psyche governed by cerebral, neural and endocrine circuits, and his existence limited to the time span between his leaving the womb to the instant the EEG stops registering on his brain. This creature is known by the name of Homo Sapiens, the wise man . Certainly the brain has its value in that it functions as a very mechanical rattletrap sort of a switchboard , as Hubbard disrespectfully calls it, and certainly, when you stimulate or surgically remove certain parts of the brain, certain parts of the mind and its capacity to translate thought into action and to coordinate energy becomes affected, but nevertheless, the mind is not the brain! Anything that could be said about the function of the right and left brain lobes refers to the structure of the switchboard, not to the mind. It is of paramount importance to observe the difference between structure and function. A switchboard operator may function well, but with a damaged switchboard she doesn t stand a chance. No structure there to work with. It would be utterly incorrect to put the intelligence of the switchboard operator (function) in question just because the switchboard (structure) is out of order; likewise, even a structurally intact switchboard is worthless in the hands of a dull switchboard operator who doesn t function well. The connection between thetan, mind and brain is (once again) based on resonance. A thetan gets his brain working by pulsing towards it; in other words, it s the mental vibrations of the mind sealing the neural activity of the brain off. Scientific experiments demonstrating that the brain as a whole responds to gigahertz frequencies actually confirm this. Psychiatric patients in Russia who were treated with microwaves showed significant improvements in their behavior. No drugs were given, no psychotherapy. Microwaves were beamed at the brain; that was all. The brain is an antenna. This is not to underrate the brain s complexity and subtlety. It continually receives and decodes data from the body s sense organs and as well integrates and amplifies the energy vibrations generated by the thetan into the appropriate motor channels with phenomenal speed and coordination. One would be completely wrong to suppose all is known about it yet, but nonetheless the principle remains that it is a tool.

THE STATIC Above the level of mental mest, of mind-to-mind telepathy, a thetan is manifested as postulates. On this level of existence he is invisible and infinite. Infinite means: no boundaries, no limits. A thought, a postulate, does not exist within space and time, it does not show up as mass or energy. It is infinite. Through their postulates all thetans overlap as infinities, or perhaps in infinity. This infinity aspect of a thetan is referred to as static. The game of life, of individuality and ego, can only be kept up by a pretense called not-knowing or un-knowing . One cannot play a game when one can predict (know) everything everybody else will do. One has to agree to be not-knowing in order to experience surprise. Not-knowing, then, is a determined action, an act of will - but it may turn into a habit! That s where it becomes dangerous. Once one pretended not to know so that one would have a game, and by and by it became a habit. It s like playing hide and seek with little children. You pretend not to know where they are, you pretend to seek them, you pretend to be surprised on having found them. They in turn often only pretend to hide. It s make-believe on both sides, to have a game. Now imagine the pretense became a serious conviction - that you really didn t know where the child was and didn t see it although it s right behind the arm chair. It would turn the initially lighthearted game into a rather dramatic search of all closets and cabinets in the whole house accompanied by anger, fear, effort, frustration, despair. The more not-knowing becomes a habit, the more one sees oneself as down here , as trapped in the universe of matter, energy, space and time. And then one forgets that one is actually up there as well, that one is pure thought and, further up even, the source of thought - static. Hubbard defines the thetan as an awareness of awareness unit and as well as an energy-space production unit 1. So he creates his thoughts, emotions and his mental space, and he is aware of that. As well he is aware of the thoughts, emotions and perceptions streaming in on him from the environment and of his responses to that. He is aware of being aware . If one could have and hold this position of awareness one would remain just as unaffected by thoughts and emotions as a mountain top is unaffected by rain clouds. This state of being the cause of motion without moving oneself is the essence of static-ness. Static is unfortunately not an automatic state but one situated on a sliding scale from full awareness down to non-awareness. The thetan may through negligence forfeit his birthright of being fully aware of himself as a static and a source. The desire to reverse this draws people towards religious and mystical practices. They want to break through this self-erected barrier of un-knowingness, join their bottom-half with their top-half and be one with themselves.

ENLIGHTENMENT Breaking the barrier of un-knowingness is called samadhi or satori in the East; usually this is translated with enlightenment . A better translation would be an awakening , because one doesn t see a light , rather one wakes up to bodhi , to one s true spiritual nature. Seeing a light means that one has become aware of some sort of energy phenomenon, yet bodhi, one s true nature as a static, is beyond that. So instead of seeing something at one s awakening one rather realizes and knows that there is nothing to be seen, heard or experienced. It s like one had been looking out of the window all the time, enjoying the view, and one day one discovered that the window was only painted on the wall, the wall itself not thicker than the actual wall paper - and that behind it there is emptiness. Bodhi translated into Hubbard s terminology, would go along with the ability to have everything as well as nothing without ducking, evading, attacking, ignoring or any other mechanism. One would take it as it comes without losing one s good humor and serenity. This ability is termed havingness. When Jesus Christ suggests to turn the other cheek he isn t actually asking for a demonstration of meekness but of havingness. Give me another blow! I can have it. I m stronger than you. Having total nothingness would mean tolerating the absence of absolutely everything. This is incredibly difficult, because the concept of being someone , of ego. is already a somethingness and ultimate]y one would have to let go of that, too! But . . . but . . . but then one would be nothing . . . How awful! Yet a Zen master would say: Great! Who needs an ego anyway? Throw it away! The ego, real as it may be on one level of existence, creates the illusion of duality and bars the way to a higher level of existence beyond duality. The level of nonduality where one-ness and nothingness merge, is termed nirvana in Buddhism. An awareness of nirvana whilst simultaneously being down here on the playing field of the world without falling into the trap of the mest-universe - that s the true test of enlightenment. Through the specifically scientological self-realization technique called auditing - to explain its purpose in this particular context - a gradual spiritual awakening occurs. Session by session one recognizes I m not that . All the incidents, pictures and masses which formerly one identified with, one eventually sees as not me . On a finer level of perception one becomes aware of negative postulates, knows I m not that and cancels them. In the pursuit of Tao, every day something is dropped , as the Tao-te-ching, a Chinese book of wisdom, has it. Lao-tsu, its author, says this about the nature of the Tao: It is beyond form. It is beyond sound. It is intangible. It returns to nothingness. The form of the formless, the image of the imageless, it is called indefinable and beyond imagination.

The search for enlightenment is often viewed as an escape from all things unpleasant and cumbersome. Rather the aim is a full integration, a wholeness where life can be fully understood and experienced with total joy. THE STUFF THE MIND IS MADE OF Now what does mental mest actually consist of? So far it was simply stated that it s there - in form of willpower and emotion and I hope that the reader, on the basis of his own observations, can agree. But how does it come to be? According to Hubbard, mental energy consists of attention units. As he uses a number of names for this phenomenon to distinguish between specific functions, I personally prefer to call them by the catch-all name theta particles or theta quanta . They are very fine vibrating quantities of mental energy comparable to the subatomic quanta observed in physics, said to be the most subtle particles in the physical universe, way below the level of atoms. Hubbard notes that electronics are lower and cruder manifestations of the same order of actuality as thought, and that the laws of the theta universe parallel electromagneticgravitic laws . And just as physicists prove the existence of sub-atomic quanta by means of their linear accelerators, mental particles or theta quanta can be shown to exist with an E-meter , Hubbard s ill-reputed, media-decried but nevertheless widely copied and used electropsychometer. (The E-meter is a mental energy detection device often used in auditing. Its exact functions are described in chapter 2.) Whatever one puts attention on is energized by the theta quanta flow one s attention essentially consists of. The energy vanishes as soon as one has recognized that one did put it in a certain place, particularly after one has found the decision (a postulate) that preceded the action. You could make a person put attention on an object, or ask him to hold his attention concentratedly in mid-air, and you would see a corresponding reaction on the E-meter. This can be shown to work even on single theta particles, no matter at what distance. The thetan is able to detect his particles wherever they may be. After all it s him who created them; they are his own flesh and blood as it were, they contain an imprint of his postulates and emotions at the time they were made. and he will invariably find them and unmake them if that s what he wishes. Physical space is no obstacle to this, because one is dealing with mental space which isn t measured in kilometers but in terms of affinity or lack thereof. Some people manage to detect their parked theta particles millions of lightyears away in some remote part of this galaxy or another. They were drawn to them in the effort of undoing an unwanted attitude, emotion, sensation or pain. The meter reads acting like a Geiger counter, showed the way; the incident causing the attention to congeal there was found out about - and the unpleasant phenomena disappeared. Habitually one puts bits or perhaps lumps of attention units on things, people or other aspects of life. These attention units connect one into the world and stabilize one

like a ship well moored by her anchor chains. For this reason, Hubbard occasionally calls them anchor points. They create the mental space of a thetan. Usually one doesn t think much about one s anchor points, one takes them for granted. One s marriage partner, the children, the car, the job, the fact that winter follows summer and night follows day; all this is taken for granted. One mainly notices anchor points at the moment of abrupt change or loss. A sudden car crash, the death of a family member - this destabilizes life and makes one s space collapse; one feels caved in and drops on the scale of emotions to a low point. Yet only a certain amount of one s attention is fixated this way. Beyond that one has a potentially unlimited capacity for producing more and more theta quanta to freely put them on things, people, emotions, mental image pictures and thoughts. Whatever one puts attention on becomes highly energized, as we saw, and it becomes important be it positively or negatively. For example, when one feels sad and puts a lot of attention on it, one feels even sadder. Had one put one s attention on something cheerful instead, the sadness would have diminished. Likewise, putting attention on one s positive games postulates puts one into a state of exhilaration, whereas energizing ones negative counter-postulates makes one feel listless, massy and depressed. As a thetan one can channel one s theta energy, one s attention, either towards problems or towards solutions, and life will run accordingly (Ax. 49). THE REACTIVE BANK Now that it is understood that mental energy consists of theta quanta, we can have a better look at what a ridge really is. It consists of tightly packed-up theta particles, created in the attempt to keep the unpleasant and painful events of life away. They serve as a cushion or a shock absorber. As one tries to hold such an event off whilst it s happening or ban it from one s mind once it s over, one works against it with one s theta energy. In other words, forcefully trying to not-have something as it is, creates a ridge. Havingness means going with the flow, bending in the wind like a reed, rolling along with the wave. No damage. It may even mean dissolving the incoming flow by sheer love. Non-havingness means opposition, and leads to ridges. A ridge contains all the information pertaining to its formative situation - one s emotions, one s postulates, and those of any other person involved in the incident, too. It contains action, emotion and thought. A ridge is like a real-life video cassette. When it gets restimulated by outside influences, it reels off its contents and is dramatized by the person. He will reactively and unknowingly replay parts of the video film contained in the ridge, on the level of action, emotion, thought or all three of them. In most cases this may not look terribly insane, yet it does show in the lack of positive results and optimum solutions.

A rather simplistic example: a man gets bitten by a dog; his leg bleeds. That s the incident as such. Later, whenever he sees a dog (restimulation), he feels ill at ease and may even get unpleasant sensations in his leg (dramatization). The point is - he gets this even though he knows that he got bitten and that he felt alright about dogs before. So there is something unknown in the incident which has the power to trigger misemotions and physical sensations in the presence of a restimulator (in this case the dog). If the person were fully conscious of all aspects of the incident, he couldn t get restimulated by anything. The restimulation mechanism, to be exact, is not set in motion by the outside influence itself but by the thetan s own games postulates or counter-postulates. This is evidenced by the fact that sometimes one can tolerate (have) a certain outside influence without feeling restimulated at all, whereas at other times a full-blown restimulation may set in. Let s take a more sophisticated example. Supposing there was a lady (let s call her Mary) who had trouble going on motor ways in her car, because she quite often felt like her chest was all tight and she couldn t breathe. She says to her friend: Look, John, sorry I can t come along for a ride, but it s killing me . It s killing me is the counter-postulate. Mary pronounces it without being aware of it. But, and that s the point, it doesn t always enter her mind! When she is in a fine mood, she finds herself enjoying the car ride. No attention on the counter-postulate It s killing me at all! However, when she is depressed for some reason, she finds her symptoms turning on - because in a low emotional condition, black thoughts are likely to cross anyone s mind, even though they may have been caused by something entirely different. The fact that she puts attention on a particular black thought ( It s killing me! ) energizes it and so creates the mass which presses down on her body and results in her symptoms . If you gave Mary some cocaine or opium, she might get so high on it that she wouldn t panic in cars no matter how fast they went. Or, if she went to the pharmacy and got a depressant, she would be too dulled to have any emotion at all, not even panic. Why does she have this tightness in her chest? Here is the background story (which she doesn t know): she had a car crash in her last life. When the car started skidding on the rainy motor way, she thought: It s killing me! , and it did. She died because the steering column went through her chest. From that stems a counter-postulate ( It s killing me! ) and a psychosomatic pain (in her chest). The data are stored in Mary s mental data banks now. But not only stored - they are locked away and hidden from view behind impenetrable walls of mental energy, piled up at the time of the accident by Mary s wish never to look at it again. Too terrible. Still, in a low emotional condition Mary will react to stimuli in the environment that resemble those of the original incident. She won t become aware of the accident as such; she will only dramatize it. Because of this involuntary, unwanted but yet compulsive reaction to events of the past, Hubbard calls the banks where such data are

stored, the reactive bank or reactive mind. (We already had a brief glance at it a few pages earlier.) Restimulation of the reactive bank is not fully automatic . We saw that Mary s chest pains turn on not everytime she drives on a rainy street, not everytime she sits in a skidding car, not everytime she races down a motor way, no - it turns on when the thought It s killing me! crosses her mind. Only then. It is this thought that she doesn t want to have, she pushes against it with all her mental energy - and thereby recreates the ridge which was formed at the time of the original incident. Thought precedes energy production and action. The restimulation mechanism therefore is not to be compared to the environment landing a direct hit in the bank like the ball of a pinball-machine hitting the heads and the display panel going wild. This would pre-suppose that the bank had an existence of its own - which it doesn t. Certainly, some portions of the bank are in chronic restimulation, so the bank does exist - but only because it is made to exist by the thetan creating counter-postulates on the basis of negative emotions to start with, and then keeping both the postulates and the emotions going indefinitely. Postulates are senior to mest. The thetan creates mental mest on the basis of postulates. It s not the outside world creating mental masses around the thetan, rather it is the thetan himself doing it as soon as he remembers his counter-postulates in context with a particular situation. Of course, for the thetan outside mest there is only time-lessness or eternity . So he is creating for himself particles and ridges with an apparent sense of time, space and content and as well a justification for believing all this about them. AUDITING Un-creating such a counter-postulate usually requires finding the incident when it was made (the basic) and running through it many times until its sequence of events is fully known and all negative emotions (charge) are drained off it. This may take many hours and the dramatization of the incident s contents may be very demanding on the auditee. But as soon as all charge is gone, the postulate will come to view and the auditee will have a life-changing cognition. After such an end phenomenon, the psychosomatic complaints of the auditee will have disappeared. The same goes for demons and other entities - as soon as the postulates keeping them created, are found, they will dissolve into thin air. This implies that places that used to be haunted won t be haunted any more. The only reason for the entity to be kept in that place was a postulate kept unknowingly alive and energized by its owner . Whether one audits the owner or the entity doesn t make a difference - in either case the entity will be gone and its owner will feel correspondingly relieved (even though he may not realize that someone was auditing the entity created by him.) The two energy fields of the thetan on the one hand and his entities on the other might be compared to a bowl containing a mixture of salt and sugar. The bowl in this example would correspond to the mind, the grains of salt and sugar to different types of

theta quanta. Auditing is the attempt to separate the grains by looking at each one, determining its correct classification (home-made or foreign-made) and finding out who put them there in the first place (Ax.29). Sanity . says Hubbard, consists of the ability to recognize differences, similarities and identities . Usually auditing is done between two people, the auditor and the auditee. The auditee, in scientology jargon, is generally called pre-clear or pc. This term presupposes that there were a definite point of mental clearedness (Clear) after which no further auditing occurs, which definitely is not the case. People do get audited after Clear, simply because there are no limits to one s expansion. Clear therefore is a gradually evolving phenomenon. Most commonly people carry on with their mental cleansing process as solo-auditors , that is, they use auditing techniques and an E-meter to approach their bank directly and without the help of an auditor. Yet there are points when the solo-auditor s havingness isn t sufficient to look at certain incidents - in which case he will seek the assistance of an auditor and for that span of time become an auditee again. So auditee seems to be a more convenient term than pre-clear since one is always this side of the hypothetical state of absolute Clear . An advanced solo-auditor will have no problem entering another person s reactive data banks telepathically and assisting him in cleaning them up. This is limited by the auditee s ability and willingness to cooperate. To give an example: BS, a capable solo-auditor (name abbreviated), decided to help his cousin, Cathy (name altered), a lady in her fifties who had suffered severe depressions and wound up in a psychiatric clinic where she was given plenty of pharma-drugs. Cathy had already spent two years in the clinic and was in a state of apathy. The clinic was 600 kilometers from the place where BS lives. They had the occasional phone contact, but BS found he couldn t do anything for her just talking to her. So he went in session, put himself in the position of Cathy s viewpoint, telepathically looked at her bank from the inside , became aware of a number of ridges, entities and postulates and cleaned up what he had found. The session took about 90 minutes and happened to end at exactly 4 pm. At about 7 pm Cathy rang him and told him that at about 4 pm, for the first time in many months, she had felt self-confident enough to leave the clinic and take a stroll through town. She really had enjoyed herself. BS carried on with this telepathic assist and Cathy made good progress, but eventually they couldn t win against the overpowering influence of the drugs Cathy was being given. A change of environment and treatment would have been needed which in Cathy s case was not possible to arrange. GAMES AND POSTULATES Any activity containing a goal and the intention to reach it despite all obstacles, is (in scientology parlance) considered a game. It consists of goals, freedoms and barriers. The game as such isn t that important, it could be anything; winning it, however, is important.

A games intention - for example I know I ll pass my exams! - is expressed as a postulate containing the element of unshakable certainty. A postulate is a type of thought occurring without any mental pictures. It is a pure concept. One carries it about and draws one s decisions, imaginations and evaluations from it. Mental image pictures are created on the basis of such pure concepts or postulates. Usually one is so fully identified with one s postulates and concepts that one doesn t even know that one is running on them. For example, there is a whole range of concepts (or basic attitudes, as one might say as well) connected with existing as man or woman in the Christian parts of Europe. A wholly different set of concepts is maintained in Islamic North Africa and again in Black Africa (and so on). These concepts are so deeply ingrained in the culture and its people that individual men and women would have a hard time answering a question like: To play the game of being a man (or a woman), what games postulates do you adhere to? This would require that they step back from a cultural habit they adapted to during their whole life and most likely through a series of past lives, too. A postulate, therefore, is something one takes for granted even without being aware of it. It is a personal truth. Life is shaped and formed by postulated personal truths. Man is as he considers himself to be (Ax. 2, 3, 14). Now someone might say: But I m ill and unhappy and I can t say that I wanted that particularly! Very well but what postulate is he running on that makes him persist in illness and unhappiness? I don t know. . . , he says. There is something the person wants to know but doesn t know. He is involved in a game but isn t conscious of it. Perhaps he ought to focus his attention with the help of a spiritual guide. PROBLEMS Apparently there are two kinds of postulates: games postulates and counterpostulates. Games postulates, when acted upon, give you what you want, counterpostulates keep you from it. Where and when were they formed? During a time. of overwhelm when things went out of control and one was about to lose one s game. Before, one thought: I can do it! That s a games postulate; it s the first of the two, the start of something. It s powerful because it s made by the thetan outside the mest of the game. Then a difficulty arises, insurmountable barriers, he fights, loses and thinks: I can t do it! That s the second of the two, the counter postulate. It means one slows down on a given course or sidesteps away from it: perhaps it even comes to a full stop. Just thinking I can t do it within the game isn t enough, though, but at the moment of overwhelm, when he loses grip on his anchor points, he is for an instant outside the game, and has sudden theta-power to make a counter-postulate that even though he is a low emotional state, is comparably powerful to the initial games postulate. To come to a full stop on a game, to submerge a games postulate fully, it takes quite a number of counter-postulates. One usually isn t enough. Yet a games postulate doesn t disappear just because it became submerged by counter-postulates! It s still there and kicks up against the counter-postulates trying to silence it.

This, and only this, is the true source of the inner tension called charge - the friction between a games postulate and its counter-postulates. Everyone knows what it means to have to decide between two known options of equal value (strawberry ice cream or vanilla?) - but that s nothing compared to the strain produced between the two unknown options of postulate and counter-postulate. The depression, the massy-ness resulting from such inner strain is called a Goals Problems Mass or GPM. It goes without saying that any normal problem is aggravated and made unsolvable when it restimulates an already existing GPM. The term GPM describes the sequence of events leading up to a mental mass. First step: there is a postulate towards a goal; second step: upon hitting a barrier, there is a postulate away from the goal. Result: a standstill and indecision. Third step: as one doesn t know which way to go, one puts attention (theta quanta) on the postulate, the counter-postulate, the postulate, the counter-postulate, the postulate, the counterpostulate, and so on, can t decide on either of the two and in the end gives up altogether. Now that one has thoroughly energized this postulate-pair, one feels massy, misemotional and depressed. To put it shortly: unknowingly putting attention on goal and counter-goal lead to a problem which eventually results in a mass (and ultimately in a psychosomatic illness). Let us look at an example of someone attempting to submerge his games postulate by counter-postulates: John wants to be a performing jazz guitarist. He studies hard at it but fails for various reasons. Not good enough (counter-postulate). To stay within the trade he decides to give guitar lessons (survival compromise). He doesn t make a very good job of it as it isn t really what he wanted to do. All pupils are stupid, anyway (counter-postulate). He becomes a jazz critic for the local paper (compromise). Being rather depressed now, he takes to the bottle. A man needs a drink off and on, after all (counter postulate). He winds up being a street bum and sleeps under railway bridges (compromise). He is picked up by the Salvation Army, becomes a fervent follower and sings in their choir. The Lord has saved him (counter-postulate against his own responsibility). He becomes a preacher and speaks out loud against jazz music and other degraded features of modern society (compromise). And so on. All done to submerge, drown, wall up, forget that he really wanted to be a performing jazz guitarist! He couldn t have the loss of not becoming one, couldn t cancel his games postulate in all serenity and make a new and different one. He acted against it. And that was his mistake. No havingness. Bad loser. (Ax. 11.) IMPLANTS Sometimes GPMs are forcefully installed in people, like for example in brainwashing. The person is made to forget his original intentions and conditioned to go for their opposite or for whatever his tormentor imposes on him. Hubbard calls this implanting. Just as one can implant foreign tissue into an organism, one can - by using

the combination of pain, drugs and hypnosis - implant an idea into the mind of a person. That this is not a thing of the future can be gathered from the words of James V. McConnell in a 1970 issue of Psychology Today: The day has come when we can combine sensory deprivation with drugs, hypnosis, and astute manipulation of reward and punishment, to gain almost absolute control over an individual s behavior and personality. (. . .) We should reshape society so that we all would be trained from birth to want to do what society wants us to do. We have the techniques to do it. (. . .) No-one owns his own personality.? The methods listed by McConnell are fairly crude compared to what they have in stock today, 20 years later. In January 1991 the University of Arizona hosted a conference entitled NATO Advance Research Workshop on Coherent and Emergent Phenomena in Bimolecular Systems . The organizer of the conference, Dr. Hameroff, said: An individual may then be able to transfer his or her consciousness to an artificial environment when their body approached expiration. Isn t this great? They can strip your mind off you and store it. This is coming very close to the sophisticated techniques used earlier on the time track and by some space civilizations of the present where implanting isn t only done on the spirit-plusbody composite but as well on thetans who have no more substance to grab them by than their energy fields. (We ll come back to that in the chapter on Xenu.) Through implanting, a thetan becomes his bank much more irreversibly than by the mere creation of a ridge or by contacting an entity. This is because implants usually contain precautions against their detection such as the command to forget and false data regarding their time and location. Worse, implants degrade thetans to such a state of victimization that they see their only chance to survive in identifying with the implanter and becoming him . They will now do to others as he did to them. (This explains a lot of what goes on in prisoner-of-war camps or concentration camps.) One step removed from this but equally disastrous, is a thetan identifying with an entity he has acquired that was created at a time when another was implanted, which in a roundabout way will make that thetan either dramatize the role of the victim or the role of the implanter - or both of them alternatingly, depending on what restimulators are prevalent in his environment. MIND-SHARING Ridges have one rather peculiar feature: they can wander from one thetan to the next and so become what we call entities. The lubricant facilitating this, is affinity, particularly when it comes in the form of pity. ( Pity in this context means reactively identifying with a victim to such an extent that one almost becomes that victim oneself - something entirely different from the very desirable attitude of karuna , a Sanskrit term meaning ( compassion guided by wisdom .) As an example, consider Mary, our speed-happy lady. She created a ridge during her accident in an effort to keep the steering wheel from penetrating her chest, to fend off the effects she had involuntarily created. Everytime she says It s killing me . she

partly re-creates the ridge, and accordingly suffers a depression. This happens a lot as It s killing me is one of her stock phrases. (What a sweltering day! It s killing me followed by a pain in the chest.) Now supposing Mary and her friend John who loves fast cars himself, were sitting in their lounge and she were saying: Oh, I d love to go out for a drive, but it s one of those days . . . I m afraid it s killing me . At this moment she would be recreating the ridge and feel depressed. John, with real pity for her (and for himself as well), might say: Oh, you poor dear, always this chest problem of yours, just when we could go out and have fun , and he would extend this tremendously strong affinity bridge over to her. In order to help her-he adjusts to her emotional level. A little later John goes outside feeling a little heavy-hearted, sits down at the wheel of their sports car to go for a spin all by himself, and just as he picks up speed he feels like a piece of lead was on his chest and he can t breathe. Phew , he says as he slows down, what on Earth is this? It s killing me! What happened? John made a copy of his lady friend s postulate when he was down at her emotional level, and from now on this ridge can be re-created by him, too. It didn t leave her space, though! They both have it now. John momentarily shared Mary s mental force field. He went into her valence . ( Valens , Latin, means force .) This explains why children inherit certain traits of character from their parents. A ridge, once it has wandered from its creator to some other host, is an entity, as we already know. The ridge has been copied. Its original creator didn t get rid of it, though, because it consists of his theta quanta. We heard before that each theta quantum has a branding stamp on it, consisting of its creator s postulate and emotion at the moment of its creation. Only because of this can one tell who the owner is. The real difference between an entity and a ridge is that an entity in contrast to a ridge consists of at least two brands of theta particles: those of the original creators and those of the second owner who subconsciously registered their foreign ridge, and in trying to keep it out, made a copy of it. John couldn t have it that his lady friend was depressed (no havingness) and so counter-created against this. He didn t let her ridge be but made a little ridge of his own and pushed it against hers and thus an entity was formed. It is glued to John by Johns own attention units. In theory this wandering-about of ridges could go on indefinitely; yet in practice one rarely finds an entity with more than a handful of hosts. You erase it by tracing these hosts from last to first and finding all the postulates made along the way. The moral of the tale: one is responsible for possessing one s entities, because one made the glue oneself. But wouldn t a very aware person keep himself free of this? Certainly - as long as he managed to stay very aware! It s like this: imagine yourself sitting in a malaria swamp with your binoculars and your notepad, doing some birdwatching. There s no-one else there except the mosquitoes. You are a very aware person and you usually notice a mosquito the moment it settles down on your bare arms and kill it with a slap of your hand. But when at long last, after hours and hours of waiting, this unbelievably rare and almost extinct specimen of ornithos bipedis appears (the one with the yellowbeak?, you remain motionless and glued to your binoculars for the next

fifteen minutes without noticing that half a thousand mosquitoes are feeding on your blood. And then you come down with malaria and wonder why. It goes the same with very aware thetans who come to this planet for the first time (pretty clean) and then slowly get caked up with the stuff that flies about here. It takes more than just awareness to cope with this. It takes a spiritual cleansing method to stay on top of things - such as the traditional techniques of the past, both eastern and western. Theta quanta are separated from each other by finding out who created them, when, where and why. Recognizing this makes them vanish (Fac. 20, 28). RESPONSIBILITY AND REINCARNATION In order to cleanse oneself spiritually one usually looks inwards, because that s where the cause of one s problems lies. Inevitably one will find that one did something stupid, awkward and sometimes even terrible, and that this led to some disaster or other. For example one might have belted down a motor way, didn t pay attention for as little as a split second and - wham! - car crash. Result: a shock, a broken leg and a general fear of driving cars. And no matter if it was, from the viewpoint of the law, the other person s fault - one cannot deny that oneself, too, was involved. What did one do to help bring the accident about, what didn t one do to avoid it? How was one responsible for it? This system of thought does not permit blaming others. It puts the responsibility for one s condition upon oneself. This condition is the result of one s past good and bad deeds - a concept well known in Buddhism under the name of karma . Karma, a Sanskrit term, means a deed . Lifetime after lifetime bad karma is accumulated whenever one has acted irresponsibly. The bad deeds of one s past draw one s attention away from the present. One is not fully here and now . This leads to non optimum or aberrated behavior. Taken from Latin, aberrated means literally having wandered off the path . One doesn t go from A to B as one intended to, but gets distracted and winds up somewhere else. Of course, one doesn t live life alone. There are others, there are harsh circumstances. Yet there is no use complaining. One is getting what one deserves. There is not one incident that would have happened by chance. One experiences what one experiences because one considers that sort of experience necessary as a learning process, a challenge, to make amends, whatever. One may die and go through the same set of experiences lifetime after lifetime. One s own agreements make one do this. (One has to dive deep down into the individual or even the collective unconscious to find these agreements, yet they can be found.) Only after having suffered sufficiently what one considered worth suffering, will one say: I m tired of this. Why is this happening to me? And in the attempt to come off the wheel of birth and death called samsara in Buddhism and Hinduism, one turns towards philosophy and religion for an answer. The living of life didn t seem to provide answers and so one looks higher up for them.

Reincarnation can cause severe social problems. Just because a person has died physically he or she doesn t let go of his intentions and desires. Far from it! An example of this is the spreading neo-Nazi cult in Germany and elsewhere. They are young people in their teens and early twenties, so they must have had their last death between 1970 and 1980. Assuming they had died in their late sixties, the birth years of their last lives would lie between 1910 and 1920 - and that s the generation which grew up around Hitler and supported him! And now, having come again, they of course attempt to repeat living the glorious days of their past. Naturally, their victims keep coming back as well. And so one may expect this game to go on for a while. The trouble is, you can t keep people from reincarnating. But you can audit them and take their aberrations off their minds. THE CLEAR The end result of contacting suppressed incidents in one s past lives is a clear mind; the person who achieves this end phenomenon is called a Clear . Although he has worked off some of his bad karma , he has not found and erased each single traumatic incident of the past few thousand years on his time track, rather he has become able to handle such memories as they come up. He has acquired the ability to have them when the environment restimulates them. He can handle mental mest without assistance, doesn t get frightened by it or identify with it. And, as it goes with any and all abilities, he is responsible for keeping this ability intact - if he doesn t, it will deteriorate and he won t be a Clear much longer. Being Clear is not limited to one lifetime, by the way, as long as one keeps the ability in good shape. Some years ago a Clear (let s say his name was Steve) told me that after only a few hours of the first auditing he ever had in this life, it turned out that he had become Clear in his previous life. Then as now he lived in Birmingham. He could recall details of the small auditing group where he used to go, and he remembered the lady in charge. It all took place in her lounge. Apparently he, an elderly man, had died soon after becoming Clear. After recalling all this Steve went home to Birmingham to see if that lady still lived at the same address. She did. He, now a young lad of twenty years, rang the door bell and waited. She, now a lady in her sixties, opened the door and said, slightly puzzled at the grinning young man in front of her: Can I help you? He said: Don t you recognize me? And she did! Whereupon there was some hugging and kissing and ushering him in to the lounge and cups of tea and stories of the old days. There are degrees of Clearness - one could be Clear regarding one s own past lives, regarding one s entities, regarding the energy field organizing one s body, regarding one s compulsive interaction with the physical universe, and so on. A Clear in the full sense of the word would be an entirely un-aberrated being. He would not unknowingly be attached to irritating thoughts or pictures from any source, no, he would be right here and now, in present time, without any distraction. Consequently one would expect him to live up to the requirements of a given situation to the full, and to resolve any difficulty to the greatest benefit of all concerned. And indeed, to keep his Clear-ness

intact, he would have strive to find an optimum solution on the principle of the greatest good for the greatest number of participants. In this he would follow the guideline that his integrity and his honor are more important than his immediate life4. This way he would come out of any situation without any bad feelings from or towards others and therefore wouldn t ever be drawn back into his past. He d be free for the next moment. In his actions he would not put out a big noisy ego but tune in and harmonize. Despite being in full control of the situation he would scarcely be noted. His deeds would be effortless - an ability termed wu-wei in the philosophy of the Tao-te-ching: doing without effort. Hubbard s concept of being ties in with this concept of wu-wei. If one is afraid to be, one will, of course, become logical. 5 This means that once one has lost one s spontaneity and needs to think, figure and come to logical conclusions , one is lagging behind - and the situation runs away from one. One has made the mistake of not intuitively being all factors pertaining to a given situation. One went out of tune . This is the source of haste, wrong decisions and failures. Thinking does not replace a knowing certainty. Knowing through being is senior to knowing through data (Fac. 28). A nice example of this is given in the autobiography of the Indian yogi Yogananda 6. On his way to America in 1920 - he went by steamer - Yogananda was asked to give a speech, yet his English was only rudimentary at the time. However, his firm belief in God and his certainty that he was going to make it somehow gave him the strength to step on the podium, face the audience - and the most embarrassing silence occurred. The audience tittered. But suddenly Yogananda was inside the English language and gave a fiery speech on Hinduism which earned him a standing ovation. People told him that his English was brilliant. When the event was over Yoganada didn t have a clue what had happened and how. But somehow he had managed to be English and the English language poured out of him. The two abilities mentioned above - that of being in present time and that of finding optimum solutions - add up to ethical behavior. One would expect a Clear, within the limits of his awareness, to be ethical. If a game were played in the spirit of wu-wei, that is, without egotism or any compulsiveness about winning or losing, if everybody involved were granted his personal rightness instead of being made wrong (to make oneself right), a game could be fun even when one lost it.

.2 Soul and Body THE BREATH OF LIFE * LIFE FORCE AND MEMORY STORAGE * CHILD DEVELOPMENT * PSYCHOSOMATICS * PRANA * CHAKRAS * CH I * KAHUNA * DRUGS, HYPNOSIS, MEDICINE * EUROPEAN OCCULTISM * FRINGE MEDICINE * THE RESONANCE PRINCIPLE THE BREATH OF LIFE In the last chapter we heard of spirits, ghosts, demons, of mental masses and energies composed of theta quanta, and of a thetan w ho has the double function of a player of games and of a static standing above all games. With that, we have described what Hubbard calls a universe a whole system of created things 1. One creator and his created things make one universe. That s one thetan. And as other thetans, too, have created their universes, each person carries his universe about and feels at home there. And only to the extent that these universes interact and overlap can there be agreements and disagreements on games and opinions and thus, reality. So far we only spoke about the interaction of thetans and their thetanish universes - now what about the body? After all, here on Earth this is a device quite commonly used for playing one s games. How do thetan and body interact? Hubbard quips: The body is a carbon-oxygen engine which runs at 98.6 degrees F. The theta being is the engineer running this engine in a Homo Sapiens 1. Fair enough, one must distinguish between oneself and the body - but again, how do thetan and body interact? One surely - as a thetan - doesn t take care of each heart beat and bowel movement from birth to death, does one! And indeed, we have to differentiate further: between thetan, body and an energy field organizing this body and adding life to it. The body is directly monitored by the genetic entity in activities such as respiration, heartbeat and endocrine secretion; but these activities may be modified by the thetan. 1 The Genetic Entity or GE - that s a theta energy field permeating the body and taking care of its needs in terms of growth, healing, maintenance and procreation. It powers the material set of genes. Elsewhere this field is known as aura (a Greek word) or soul (a Germanic one). Both words mean breath and refer to the breath of life without which the body would be dead matter. In the Roman world one distinguished between animus , signifying spirit, mind, will (thetan), and anima , the vital principle, soul, life (GE). A similar distinction was made by the Greeks with psyche and eros . LIFE FORCE AND MEMORY STORAGE Body and thetan perceive and experience on two different levels. The body always suffers when it gets hurt: the spirit not always. Think of sports accidents - a few

broken ribs are considered part of the fun! And as long as the thetan considers it fun to get hurt, he will expect the body to heal, and the body will indeed heal. But nevertheless, the life force permeating and surrounding the body will record the accident and store the information. The aura - or, in Hubbard s terms, the GE - is an information carrier. So there are two parties involved in running a body. The thetan steers it about and the Genetic Entity does growth and maintenance jobs. The body by itself does nothing. The Genetic Entity has only one purpose in mind - to make the body survive under all circumstances. When the body gets hurt, the GE will pour out theta quanta against the survival-endangering intruder, thus forming a ridge - just like the thetan does. So the GE is very well equipped for doing its job; indeed, it is that beingness not dissimilar to the thetan which has carried forward and developed the body from its earliest moments along the evolutionary line on Earth (...) It has no real personality, it is not the I of the body. This is the mind of an animal, a dog or a cat or a cow. 1 In any incident, two separate modes of experiencing are involved. For example during an operation under anesthesia the thetan usually leaves the body and observes the operating table from above, whereas the GE records the details from within. Running the auditee through such an incident from his own viewpoint will make him recall his own considerations and emotions at the time; yet running him through it from within, from the viewpoint of the GE, will produce heavy emotions of loss, physical sensations and pains. This poses an interesting question: who is actually there when a person is under intensive care for months or even years? Heart is beating, EEG still registers on the brain, food is given intravenously - who is kept alive here? The person himself or only a forlorn GE? The ridges formed by the GE are called engrams, a Greek word meaning something like inscription . An engram contains all information received by the body cells at the time they were hurt. The link is the GE. It records and stores accidents and injuries as mental image pictures created on the basis of theta quanta. The engram is such a picture. By its dictionary definition, an engram is an enduring change, believed to occur in the protoplasm of nerve tissues in response to stimuli, which may account for the acquisition of skills, lasting memories, etc. Hubbard took this a step further by saying that although all sorts of stimuli get imprinted on the cells, the learning process as such isn t done by the body proper but by the energy field he calls Genetic Entity. The definition quoted goes back to 19th century psychology investigating the phenomenon of memory, i.e. the ability to recall incidents in the form of mental images. Semon, a German psychologist, proposed a theory in 1911 that all organic life in order to survive, depended on its past, and that the present is to be understood as the result of the accumulated experiences from earlier existence s. These residues of the past, contained in a supra-personal unconscious mind, Semon called engrams .

Only recently Semon s and Hubbard s views were confirmed by the English biologist Rupert Sheldrake who found evidence that morphogenetic or form-giving fields act as information carriers and form the vital intelligence of living organisms 7. He concludes that the wide range of intelligent plant, animal and human behavior can only be explained in these terms and not by heredity alone. According to Sheldrake, the existence of genes inside a seed do not suffice to explain the flexible behavior of a growing tree which is trying to make it against all the odds by turning this way and that, by assuming a certain individual form, by being aware of environmental change and adjusting to it. The intelligence of the tree makes it survive, not its genes alone. Once when a huge old tree was felled, I actually saw the morphogenetic field or Genetic Entity of that tree. The chainsaw had bitten its way through the trunk, the tree fell and crashed to the ground - yet the soul of the tree remained upright! For a moment it was like there were two trees, the material one on the ground and the energy image of it still standing. A tremendous wave of shock, incomprehension, disappointment and finally grief was sent out by this tree-soul. My own GE reacted strongly; I felt my stomach turning to jelly. My wife, observing the same phenomenon, had tears streaming down her face. After a few seconds the tree-soul dissolved and disappeared. Some plants have very strong fields. Recently I saw a Hibiscus bud opening and one could clearly see how its GE-field extended all around the physical bud and pulled it into shape , as it were. It wasn t the bud expanding into the space around it but rather the reverse - the unfolding blossom imploding into the ever-expanding field around it. An engram is not formed each time one cuts one s finger. The GE would know how to deal with this as part of its basic program. But as soon as it cannot cope, as soon as the situation gets out of hand and the GE feels desperate, the incident is recorded as an engram. Examples for that would be non-programmed and irreparable damages and deaths caused by torture, mutilation, radiation, electromagnetic interference, electric shock and other environmental stress not foreseen in the original blueprint (of which we ll hear more in chapters and 6). Engram pictures are kept in the data banks of the GE way beyond body death and form part of its survival program . It has learned what to avoid - and that comes useful when the GE enters a future body. Indeed, death can be seen as a vital positive part of the learning process of evolution. The intimacy of experience of an overwhelming environmental force provides specific data on how it works, so that protection can be devised. For example the shell-less mollusk, rolled about over the rocks by the surf, getting damaged and killed that way. learns three things: one, that hardness is a winning survival tactic - after all the rocks won: two, he adopts the blueprint of the structure of a hard shell, by close molecular-level contact: and maybe three. that a circular form permits rolling with the movement of the tides. So the rocks

told the mollusk how to grow a shell, and this understanding became part of the morphogenetic field (or GE, depending on one s terminology). So not only the spirit goes from one lifetime to the next, taking a new body each time, the Genetic Entity does as well. Both not being physical but mental entities - are immortal. However, at the moment of death they don t go parallel ways but take different bodies in their next incarnation. The difference between a thetan s reincarnation and that of the GE is considerable, in that a thetan continues from body to body as an individual, whereas the GE merges with some sort of general GE field and data pool which all GEs are connected with according to species and where they get their data from and feed new data to. (Sheldrake actually mentions this in context with global learning phenomena within particular species.) After body death complete GEs actually go up to the general GE Data Pool and come raining down again when a new body is being created during sexual intercourse. (The research leading to these insights is covered in chapter 6.) So strictly speaking. there are no past lives for a thetan. Existing as an immortal individual, he continues along an unbroken line, sometimes with a body, sometimes without. The GE, however, ceases existing after body death, merges with the GE Pool and drops down as a new entity at the moment of fertilization. During a sexual act a new GE for that particular species stands by, ready to start monitoring cell growth. This has been variously confirmed in auditing sessions. As soon as the sperm enters the egg cell, the GE gets drawn in on the scene, triggered by a resonance phenomenon (affinity) between the two parent GEs and the GE Pool. The data stored in the banks of one s GE are therefore not personal to that GE, rather they are all the data (engrams) that ever where accumulated by GEs since the beginning of bodies on Earth, regardless of species. (In following up engrams, auditees have been found to contact incidents suffered by non-human species as a routine occurrence.) To ascertain that the body is dead for sure the GE may persevere in it for some days at least, sometimes for even more than a week. Then it dissolves and lifts off like an amorphous blue cloud of smoke. Perhaps it is for this reason that we feel horrified at the sight of a recently deceased person whose GE is still in the body - it is neither quite alive nor quite dead. Our own GEs react to that. A similar horror befalls us when we deal with people who have a dead GE and who act with unfeeling, inhuman cruelty. Here we have a thetan who has utterly suppressed his GE- a spirit without a soul . The GE s one and only purpose is to make the body survive, no matter what. To this end, it contains all sorts of construction and maintenance programs. Any race or species has its own highly specialized Genetic Entity. The senior, most important programs are the sexual ones as they ensure the survival of the race. It is they which determine the typically female and male behavior patterns to be found at the bottom of all cultures on this planet (and of course. in the animal and plant realms, too). A person will have no difficulty behaving in accordance with the patterns of his sex when he has been of the same sex in his past life and agrees with being it again in

his present life. Yet a thetan used to male bodies may feel very ill at ease in a female one and protest the patterns imposed on him by the GE program. Likewise it is possible that a wrong program gets triggered in the GE, meaning that a male body is run on a female pattern. The person involved will feel very uncertain about his sexual role and his general social behavior. It s the GE and not the thetan determining the sexual flavor of human interaction and communication. Because man is composed of spirit and body, and because the body is run and powered by the Genetic Entity, the three of them - thetan, GE and body - form a composite. The engrams (memories of past deaths, mutilations, accidents, etc.) contained in the GE are therefore part of man s composite subconscious, his reactive mind. When restimulated, they appear as pictures on his mental screen and cause irritation, depression and psychosomatic illnesses - just as his own thetanish pictures would. Many people only feel the effects of this and are not aware of the actual film on the screen. Of an advanced Clear one would expect this as a matter of course. He would determine the correct source of a mental image picture (be it himself, an entity or the GE) and erase it. Failing to discriminate between one s own and the GE s pictures may lead one to believe that one was a snail in one s past life, and that one will be re-borne as a cockroach when one doesn t behave up to standard in this life. This is a false notion. The thetan always chooses the human form because that s the only way he can get the sort of things done that are important to him. I have never met anyone who was a rain worm in one of his past lives. Auditees do indeed come up with such pictures, yet after brief inspection they invariably turnout to stem from the GE. The GE runs the body, the spirit lives in it. When the spirit leaves the body at night, the GE finds time to cleanup. When the body is hurt, the spirit is wise to stay cool, calm and collected; thus he enables the GE to activate its healing programs. Getting excited doesn t help at all. A thetan usually claims his body somewhere between conception and birth. However, there have been cases of people robbing bodies from others at a body age of 15 or even 25 years. They sneaked in when the actual proprietor was out, such as after an accident or during a prolonged illness, or perhaps they came to some gentleman s agreement with him. In either case they tried getting around the usual waiting period of 20 years from babyhood until being taken seriously again. It is actually quite puzzling that such people should immediately feel at home in the social environment of the new body. Where did they get the data from (name of mother and father, language spoken, home address, childhood memories etc.)? Auditing sessions revealed that all such vital informations actually pertaining to the thetan, are photocopied and filed by the GE. because they are, on a social level, survival data. The new thetan taking the body over from its former proprietor inherits this information package, stored in the GE, as part of the deal. The former proprietor, as he leaves, keeps these data with him, stored in his own mind, because they are part of his personal time

track. The GE does not keep social survival data till after death but erases them. It only stores data of somatic importance. (This is why it takes many generations of learning by engrams before a breed of dogs differentiates out. The GE of a dog may learn within the span of one life that it should retrieve ducks or herd sheep but forgets it from one life to the next, because it s not part of the basic dog program . However, many dog generations of reward and punishment in true Pavlovian spirit will make the lesson sink in slowly.)

CHILD DEVELOPMENT Embryos are fully conscious in the sense of the GE being present and recording from the moment the sperm penetrates the ovum. Should a thetan, too, be present at such an early stage, he would have an awareness of his own, separate to that of the GE. For this reason Hubbard understandably spoke out strongly against abortion in Dianetics . His views stand in obvious contrast to the profound insights of modern science teaching us that the fetus is just a bunch of growing cells but not a person. With that we are not any wiser than the .Middle Ages where they said that the soul does not enter the body before that body is three months old (which made it alright to kill embryos up to that age?. Yet in the light of our findings, abortion- whether done earlier than three months pregnant or later - doesn t seem so much a simple operation to remove some unwanted growth from the womb but could be likened to murder. With all due respect to a woman s right to play her game and enjoy her freedom - but what about the GE and its game? Here is the area of friction, the eternal clash of intentions between spirit and GE, both demanding their rights, both forced to share the same body, both unable to leave. What a planet! From childhood to old age, man is severely influenced by the demands of the GE. What is foremost on his mind? Food, drink, sex, body care: not too warm, not too cold, precautions against illness and senility. Death - a horror. On the opposing vector stands the ascetic fighting and suppressing his GE by self-denial, severe fasting and a vow to celibacy. Yet another and very sinister expression of this clash between thetan and GE can be found in all the prison camps that ever were, where the torturer, knowing that the thetan can t help returning to his body this side of death, makes the sexual organs of men, women and children his favorite target. What a planet! Children are real people . They are not born as clean slates ; they have lived before. And apart from a treasure box full of abilities they bring with them, too, a black coal scuttle loaded with reactive bank. As analogy, imagine your new-born baby to be a grown man who came to live with you in your house. Here is someone who looks back on the experience of a long life of his own (past lives), who claims to get frequent phone calls from his friends and enemies (because of his intact awareness of ghosts, demons and disembodied thetans) yet can t prove it and therefore frequently seems irrational, and who has unexpected body needs (by GE command). Now supposing you d keep telling this man: Hush, don t do that! , Oh, we are still a little to small for that, aren t we?, You are imagining all this! , You can t be hungry again! and such like - what would he feel like? One particular phenomenon resulting from the conflict between thetan and GE is the love-hate relationship between children and parents. The child as a thetan is interested in games, fairness and justice: he runs away from the unjustly punishing

parent, from criticism that. not being based on explicit policies, appears wholly arbitrary to him (and actually quite often is). The GE, however. knowing that the parent is the sole chance for the body s survival, draws the child close to the parent. And so. much as a child may hate his parents on the intellectual level, he or she nevertheless loves his parents on the instinctive animal level of the GE. In human growth and social development the data banks of the GE play a vast role. It may be assumed that smiling, crying, blushing etc. are not governed by the genes but by the GE s most basic programs. And just watch children change during puberty! They turn from little angelic beings to sad introverted little lumps as soon as the GE starts installing its procreation programs. The body, so far a useful tool to the child, starts playing up in unexpected ways, the child (as a thetan) doesn t know what s happening - and introverts. The desire to procreate is a two-faced affair because the aspect of must do something for bodily survival stirs up all sorts of past incidents of non-survival in the GE s bank, memories of death. The child begins to be death-oriented and perhaps suicidal, or- if those past incidents contain the elements of cruelty, sadism, torture - the child will dramatize this by tearing off the legs of a frog or by actually mutilating and murdering his fellows. The patterns imposed by the GE stay intact for the longer part of adult life - as long as sexual potency remains intact. Only when the sex drive lessens do such dramatizations subside and we get the wisdom of old age . PSYCHOSOMATICS To briefly summarize: according to Hubbard, man is understood as an interactive system (a universe) consisting of the following components: static (the thetan unmanifested) - thetan (the thetan manifested as mental energy, i.e. as a mind) - ridges and entities (the thetan s reactive bank) - the Genetic Entity (and its reactive bank, i.e. engrams) - the flesh body. Interaction within the components of one particular universe and between several different universes is done by means of theta quanta (attention units). The action of theta quanta and the performance of a given universe as a whole depends on postulates. In terms of emotion this means that we are looking at three overlapping fields. each of them pulsing at its own rate; yet taken together they even out on a common denominator between them, on a general vibration. It s like a stage was lit with a spot light of one color and a second spotlight of a different color was superimposed on the first one; the result is a light of a third color. This conglomerate of vibrations is what we consider a person . Beings of the class of Homo Sapiens are composite beings motivated by a theta being, entities, the GE and the environment. 8

The sequence leading up to psychosomatic illnesses roughly runs like this: a thetan plays a game and suffers a crash; his body is hurt. The thetan makes a counterpostulate against his initial games postulate and thus constructs a GPM; he records the incident including emotions and postulate as a mental image picture. Simultaneously the GE makes its own recording, emphasizing the sensations and pains the body suffered (engram). After the incident is over, both types of mental image pictures slowly disappear. Destimulation has occurred. When the counter-postulate is restimulated, the misemotion of the incident is newly re-created by the thetan, he builds up charge and by resonance an engram is triggered in the GE s banks. This, when dramatized, incapacitates the body. In short: a thetan indulging in a pessimistic attitude on some aspect of life will occasionally or chronically evoke the corresponding emotions; when this is done long enough and with sufficient volume (amplitude), these emotional vibrations will bridge over into the GE, restimulate engrams and produce unpleasant sensations and even pains in the body. Formula: attitudes - emotions - sensations - pains. Between the three components constituting a universe various interactions and cross-restimulations may occur. A worried thetan may either directly affect the GE or first wake up an entity which in turn triggers some engram in the GE. Reversely, a chronically restimulated entity may beam its vibrations and postulates at the thetan who takes its thought and emotion up and reflects it down to the GE. The cycle may even start with the GE: triggered by environmental stimuli (poisons etc.) it may dramatize engrams which in turn affect either the thetan directly or via an entity. Any combination is possible. I remember auditing a butcher who, twenty years ago, had suffered from what he called a nervous breakdown and since then was on psychiatric drugs because he felt suicidal. I asked him what it had felt like to have a nervous breakdown . He said he got severe pains in the forehead, it went all black around him and he knew he was going to die. It had happened on a Monday evening, after several months of severe strain having to do with his business. He had felt over worked and slightly hopeless on that Monday. And as usual, like on every Monday morning, he had gone to the slaughterhouse to kill his animals. Cattle were killed with a bolt into the forehead. pigs with electric clamps on the forehead. So what would the animal GE feel like? Headache, darkness and a certainty that it was going to die. And that s what jumped over on the emotionally weakened butcher, affected his GE - and led to a nervous breakdown with subsequent suicidal tendencies . It went from foreign GE to own GE to thetan. The interaction between the universes of individuals may be a lot more intense than described above; this depends on the number of people involved in a certain incident. When some impact, like for example an airplane crash, happens to a number of people all at the same time. they will naturally resist the incident heavily, putting a tremendous amount of attention (theta energy) on it as a defense. They will wind up having the same picture - which isn t quite true as each of them had a different angle of observation. so there is a difference in place even though there may not have been a difference in time. But for practical purposes they do have the same picture, because

their theta quanta became so enmeshed with each other that they have effectively turned from being individual thetans to a cluster of thetans. From now on they are on an enforced telepathic communication line with each other. When one of them gets restimulated, the others will be, too - no matter where they happen to be in the world and no matter how much time has elapsed since the original incident. Every viewpoint equals every other viewpoint; everything experienced, thought or felt by anyone is thought. felt or experienced by everybody else - result: we are all one . This, being a reactive agreement, is of course not known to the people involved. They are not aware of it but still cant help following it. They are stuck in the incident and so are stuck together. To give an example: one woman complained about panicking in enclosed areas and not being able to get pregnant. In session we found a war incident of 1943 when her body was an eight months old embryo. Her mother was on her way to an underground bomb shelter because an air raid was expected. Whilst she was still walking on the street, a bomb fell on a nearby house and exploded. The woman fell to her knees, covered her head and when the danger was over, walked on. That was all. Yet only seemingly so! Under the surface , a tremendous amount of interaction had happened. We kept going through the incident from beginning to end innumerable times, and still new aspects of it would open. It took a good fifteen hours (spread over two days); considering that this was the first lot of auditing the auditee had ever had, she did exceedingly well. The following emerged: the crashing and splintering noises from the exploding house a) frightened both mother and baby as thetans and made them desire to get away and be elsewhere. As well it b) made the baby s GE wish the baby to be outside, to get born immediately, in order to ensure its survival; against this c) mothers GE argued as it wasn t the right time yet, therefore, in order to survive, one had better stay inside. So there was panic and unwillingness to give birth to the child; the interaction of these four viewpoints seemed sufficient to explain the auditee s trouble and in fact relieved her. The auditee had become her mother . Yet this wasn t all! Mother had understandably attention on d) father, her hope flew across to where father was who happened to be busy rescuing people from an entirely different house in another part of town, filled with fear about the possibility of this happening to his own family as well. As father s viewpoint was available through mother, this could be resolved; the auditee who had become father since then, could disconnect from that viewpoint. There is more to come: as the bomb went off, it e) hurt and killed a few dozen people and f) disrupted a wedding party. All these viewpoints had to be considered They could be read off through mother s viewpoint, because by involuntarily and uncontrollably flowing attention towards the incident, her theta quanta were glued together with those of the other people. A shared postulate of this goes to fast! was found (apart from her and mother s personal ones), again explaining the auditee s tendency to panic. She had effectively become all these victims. To continue with vet a further viewpoint, g): the bomber pilot was attacked by ground fire, released his bomb, his plane was hit, he jumped out and was killed whilst still in the air. His attention, too, had been on the exploding house, his target. Beyond that the auditee noticed h) all manner of discarnate beings, black and white ones, with evil and good intentions, being engaged in the

general fighting from a different plane of operation; she recognized herself to be involved in this fight and i) have a viewpoint up there as well as down here . She realized that this was in fact her first visit to Earth and that she was on a special mission . (We ll come to that in later chapters.) To get back to the point: the auditee since then continued to be all of these viewpoints simultaneously! She had clustered with all these others to some extent, creating an impression of their viewpoint at the moment of the attack. She held onto this as a theta link with the others who shared the incident. The command line inside a particular universe runs from thetan to GE. The thetan as initiator is ultimately responsible for the condition of his universe, a condition usually characterized by heated up entities and a GE dramatizing engrams. The body therefore can be seen to be the playing field of the three parties involved (thetan, entities, GE). As long as the thetan stays calm, all will be well. This seniority of the thetan over the GE is expressed in Axiom 55: Create, survive, destroy, the cycle of action accepted by the GE, is only a consideration which can be changed by the thetan making a new consideration or different action cycles . In a way, their relationship resembles that of a rider and his horse. The horse may shy at certain hurdles, particularly the oldtime battle horse may have felt terrified at the blood it waded through, the screams piercing his ears, the death vibrations filling the air - yet the rider, quite against the nature of the horse, would keep it tightly controlled and functioning. Without such control one couldn t do things - forbidding things from the viewpoint of the GE - like climbing icy mountain peaks or jumping out of airplanes with a parachute, without dying of fear. Hubbard s model of the mind is by no means a novelty. Similar models have existed for as long as man has walked the Earth, probably because once one has looked into one s inner world long enough, one can t help finding the same as everybody else. And equally long man has attempted to devise methods for the control of life force and the conversion of the tension between the warring parties (thetan, entities, GE) into positive, harmonic resonance and peaceful co-existence in mutual affinity, so as to have mens sana incorpore sano , a sane mind in a healthy body. A great deal of the knowledge about such methods was never accepted by official science and religion; partly for this reason and partly because one needed certain metaphysical initiations, it had to remain occult . Yet the spiritual achievements of yogis, lamas, shamans and healers all around the world are much too well-documented as to be denied. The same goes for some western physicists, biologists and physicians. There appears to be a wisdom the cultures on this planet have shared throughout all ages, a wisdom that leads to practical results no matter what terminological differences might exist between the many schools of thought representing it. And as scientology deals with making a spirit sane and a body sound, with re-incarnation, out-of-body experiences and immortality of the soul, it obviously sits in the same boat with these other schools.

PRANA Let us begin our esoteric world trip in India. There, religious and medical knowledge was handed down orally over some five or ten thousand years; the source of this knowledge are the Vedas, a collection of the insights and visions of seers or rishis . They spoke Sanskrit, a sophisticated ancient language (still in use today) featuring highly differentiated terms for a vast array of psychic phenomena, way beyond the vocabulary of any current European language. The Sanskrit word for life force is prana . This term, along with a complete spiritual technology, was introduced to the West on a popular level by the yogi Paramhansa Yogananda in 1920. Yogananda taught Kriya Yoga, a meditation and breathing technique (pranayama) allowing the control of life force (prana) as it streams through the body. Breath control is seen to equal life force control. This way the yogi not only realizes that he is an immortal spiritual being but as well attains the power to have a healthy and even immortal body. For example in 1895, Lahiri Mahasaya, Yogananda s teacher, predicted the day he was going to die, took his leave from his friends and died whilst sitting in a yoga position. After his death his body showed no signs of decay for many months. Whilst his flesh body was still lying in state, the master resurrected and showed himself in a prana body to many of his disciples. The same demonstration of GE-control was given by Yogananda s guru. Sri Yukteswar, who also predicted the day of his death, kept his body from decaying and reappeared to comfort his disconsolate disciples. Yogananda himself did the same feat, except that he didn t resurrect 6. Not that India was the only place for this. Going back to Europe we find Theresa of Avila, a saint who died in 1582 and whose body is said to be undecayed up to this day. Another well known teacher in the field of self-realization and life force control is Maharishi Mahesh Yogi who in 1958 started Transcendental Meditation (TM) in the west. In his system, stress is seen to be the major burden weighing Man down and contaminating his body. Mantra meditation serves to reduce stress. At the initiation ceremony, the person is given a mantra by his teacher. Then he sits for at least half an hour per day and concentrates on his mantra. In principle, no more is required. This way a spiritual cleansing process sets in. A mantra is a syllable tuned to the person s vibratory pattern. When repeated in meditation, it resonates from the lowest depth of the being up to his most subtle strata. All mantras are in resonance with the core mantra Aum . Aum again is supposed to be the vibration of all the life force permeating the universe. Therefore, if one s mantra is correctly chosen by the TM teacher, one would eventually be in harmony with all phenomena of the spiritual and physical universes. (In terms of Hubbard s model, the omnipresence of theta quanta could be seen to add up to this universal life force or prana and form the carrier medium for telepathic wave interactions.)

The actual technique of Transcendental Meditation might be compared to a candle burning in a dark room. The candle is the mantra; the dark room is the mind. At the edge of the space lit up by the candle, dark and evil fumes waft about. As soon as they enter the bright space, they get burnt up by the candle, and the bright space expands. More fumes are restimulated by the mantra burnt up, and more and more, and all the while the bright space expands. Because of this effect it is said of Gurudev, Maharishi s own guru, that within two miles around his meditation abode there reigned peace amongst the birds and beasts of the forest. CHAKRAS Not only in the meditation disciplines of Hinduism and Buddhism but in practically all schools of self-exploration around the world it has been found that the Genetic Entity doesn t exist as one lump of energy, as a homogeneous field, but that it is structured internally. This structure has become known in the west in particular under the Sanskrit term chakra . Chakra means wheel . Along a central channel ( sushumna ) from crotch to crown seven energy wheels can be experienced; they don t exist in the physical but in the astral body and therefore cannot be found by surgery. However, there are body energy parallels in the way that the energy flow up and down the spine mechanically produces eddies and diversions matching precisely the chakras and that imbalance in the chakras thus relates to posture and vice versa. This has provided body manipulation therapists (e.g. in shiatsu) with an approach to remedying physical well-being. From each chakra a number of channels ( nadis ) branch off; within these, prana flows and feeds one s physical organs with life energy. With each chakra goes a certain vibration which can be evoked or boosted by specific mantras; with a lot of practice and skill the yogi will thus gain para-normal powers ( siddhis ). As well, each chakra appears to have a specific color, yet there doesn t seem to be a clear agreement on what these are. Some sources say they follow the rainbow colors (bottom chakra red, top chakra purple), others give different specifications. Thetans who don t distinguish between themselves and their Genetic Entity will identify with certain chakras and their commands (postulates). This is evidenced by some people involuntarily pointing to their heart when they refer to themselves, the heart chakra being the seat of emotions. Others, under the command of the lower two chakras, will perceive the world exclusively as a playground for sex games and collect or even produce pornographic literature. Others again may be so introverted into their intellectual 6th chakra on the forehead that they altogether lose contact with body, sex drive and emotions. And so on. A whole characterology as well as a pattern of psychosomatic complaints go with these chakras, particularly when they are in an unbalanced condition. The first chakra (crotch) is seen to contain kundalini , a vast reservoir of life energy which, if evoked, will gradually move up from chakra to chakra and

correspondingly boost one s spiritual powers (siddhis). When the practitioner has managed to short-circuit the first and the seventh chakra by purifying the intermediate chakras, kundalini will develop its full force and produce sensations like heavenly bliss, waves of light like from a million suns and a feeling of being beyond the beyond. All conscious thought is wiped out in this state; it escapes any description. As the 7th chakra is situated above the head and so outside the body, one is dealing with ecstasy, literally translated a state outside and today often referred to as OOB (out-of-body experience). From this chakra not a limited number but innumerable nadis are felt to branch off, therefore the meditating person ( chela ) feels connected to all life , the whole universe or God . This experience is considered by some to be enlightenment ( samandhi ). The flow of kundalini - or generally, that of prana - is inhibited by chakra impurities stemming from stress, that is, unresolved incidents of the past, old karma. Small wonder that practitioners of kundalini-yoga find abhorrent pictures streaming in on them, devastating emotions and destructive counter-postulates when their meditation opens such engrams. In scientology terms one might say that each chakra contains certain aspects of the GE s bank which is not the thetan s-bank but represents the collective phylogenetic unconsciousness going back millions of lifetimes. From this bank, when it s ignited by kundalini touching certain chakras, considerable depressions, compulsions and fears may gush forth, sometimes leaving lasting marks on the unprepared chela, for which reason kundalini yoga is considered a dangerous discipline. (Auditing has been found to undo the unpleasant side effects of kundalini yoga.) CH I Moving further east, to China and Japan, we find disciplines like T ai-chich uan, Reiki, Aikido and Shiatsu, utilizing an energy called ch i . Ch i, like prana, is seen to permeate the whole universe including one s body. Primal Ch i (T ai-chi or Tao) is pure unity; however, when it becomes active it manifests itself in the opposing principles of yin and yang which represent duality and activity. Those who can tune in to ch i and succeed in harmonizing its two dynamic aspects of yin and yang, enjoy good health, longevity, physical strength and even paranormal powers. Like yogis, they comfortably bathe in ice-cold water and with equal pleasure walk across red-hot volcanic lava. In a healthy person ch i moves through the body as a balanced flow, in an unhealthy person its balance is disturbed. Eastern fighting techniques, too - like judo, karate, kung-fu - are built around the concept of ch i. The fighter draws his power from the area around the solar plexus, the body s primary accumulation center of ch i. It is through this area (the 3rd chakra in Indian terms) that the all-engulfing cosmic ch i streaming in via the 7th chakra (from the GE Pool) can be best activated and used. Acupuncturists, well introduced to the west by now, consider the condition of the body to be the result of harmonious or disharmonious

energy flowing through it along meridians . By sticking needles into certain node points, the flow of ch i is facilitated, impeded or re-directed. (Again, these meridians are not different from the prana-carrying nadis observed by yogis.) Some people, once they have become aware of prana or ch i and have learned how to use it for themselves, actually do the next step which is bestowing it upon others to heal them. And just as an auditor must have more free theta than the auditee whose theta is tied up in his reactive bank, a ch i healer can only work when he has more ch i to give than the illness of his patient can absorb. He actually pumps ch i into an ill person. It is quite remarkable. One Chinese healer on a TV documentary made a woman walk within half an hour who had been bed-ridden for fifteen years, with no conventional doctor having been able to help her. This healer obviously had a lot of free theta (or free ch i, as he would probably say). Another, by holding 410 volt copper leads with his bare hands and making long sparks fly between them without getting hurt, demonstrated convincingly that the control of ch i permits one to dominate physical universe energies. In the practical work of healers and shamans, when they make the blocked life energies of their patients flow again, it is not uncommon that grief incidents are triggered and discharged. Releasing suppressed energy is quite naturally paralleled by the release of suppressed emotions, and often a ch i session will turn into a therapy session where the patient tells his practitioner about childhood, birth or pre-natal engrams - the sort of thing contained in the banks of the Genetic Entity. This suggests that the terms ch i , prana and lambda force (GE) refer to pretty much the same type of mental energy. KAHUNA Going even further east on our esoteric itinerary, we arrive at Hawaii and discover Kahuna, an ancient form of shamanism. Its practitioners, the Hunas, are known to make the dead come alive, to conjure up the visible images of kings and holy men of the past, making them walk about in processions for all to see; they use telepathy both to heal and to kill at great distances. (Perhaps one should cautiously add that they did do all that in the past before the practice of Kahuna was forbidden by U.S. authorities. Some Hunas seem to have kept up their tradition, though 9,76,77.) It is definitely worth our while spending some time studying this very clear and scientific system of Kahuna which almost uncannily compares to Hubbard s model of the mind. Man is considered to be composed of three selves . The lower self takes care of the body; it s the sort of mind a cow or dog would have. The middle self is what might be called conscious man . The higher self is something like an all-knowing guardian angel of the lower two. Through their interaction, life becomes possible. The three selves communicate with each other and other people through a fine substance called shadow stuff or mana . As mana engulfs and permeates each of the three selves, three shadow bodies are formed. The shadow body of the lower self permeates all of the physical body. It contains a concept of the ideal condition for each

organ, each bit of tissue and each single cell. The combined shadow bodies of the lower and middle self form the bio-electric field around the body, the aura. As the lower and the middle self run the life of a person, the exchange of information between them (on the basis of mana) is rather frequent and intense. The upper self, in contrast, is a supervising consultant addressed by the middle self in the form of prayer or meditation when in need. The answer occurs in the form of insights, visions and inspirations. Five parallels to scientology are obvious: Firstly, man is seen as a thetan tied to a body and identified with the game of life (middle self), rather than with his own infinite or static aspect (higher self). In both systems the GE (lower self) is seen to contain the blueprint of an ideal body and to run the actual body accordingly. Secondly, the lower self records continuously and non-selectively - precisely as the GE would. The middle self (thetan), capable of will power, logical thinking and reasoning, is fed the stored pictures from the next level below. When it reasons sensibly on any false data received from the lower self (engram data), it will arrive at aberrative solutions. Thirdly, the middle self consults with the higher self (static) on how to carry on when life gets rough. Communication between the two selves occurs through shadow stuff or mana (theta quanta) and postulates. Fourthly, Mana is not only the carrier of information between one s own three selves and those of others, it as well sticks to everything one has ever put attention on. Therefore man (his middle self) appears to hang in a web of tiny invisible lines connecting him to things, events and people of his past, present and future. Fifthly, not only the middle selves but as well the higher selves of all men are closely interconnected with each other. They overlap as infinities as we said of thetans. Everybody, although an individual, is connected to the rest of the world through the shadow stuff (mana) and simultaneously, above the level of mana (on the plane of postulates), to all other infinite beings. DRUGS, HYPNOSIS, MEDICINE According to Huna lore, healing is done by directly addressing the lower self and simultaneously tapping the powers of the higher self. Life energy is then poured out by the higher self and utilized by the lower self. For example, a Huna healer will heal a broken ankle within seconds by reminding the lower self, i.e. the GE, of the ideal scene imbedded in it, thus extroverting it from the engram-agreement it became stuck in. The middle self, and that s the crucial point, is totally by-passed. Healing is done by leaving the thetan out of the game. He thinks too much, gets too excited and so disturbs the healing process. The lower self (GE) knows full well what to do anyway, it

just needs a bit of assistance from the higher self. The think-think-think of the middle self is really in the way. On this observation all healing processes seem to be based, not only the ones we have referred to so far, but all medical help, actually. The patient is told: You ll be alright, don t worry. Just take this medicine and give the body a good rest. They want the thetan out of the way so that the GE may do its job. The medicine doesn t actually have to do anything at all, as long as the thetan trusts his doctor . Colored water works fine in many cases - especially if it tastes nasty! This is called placebo effect, and is a recognized aspect of treatment. What we are dealing with here, is in fact hypnosis. The GE is set free to do its work as soon as the thetan s attention is fixated elsewhere. This fixation of attention, the result of hypnosis, is called trance . As soon as a state of trance has been established, the GE can be addressed directly by the healer. You could, for example, put a coin on a man s hand, hypnotize the thetan and tell his GE that the coin was red-hot - and his hand will develop a blister. Reversely one can make it disappear by the same method. Some western hypnotherapists (particularly those of the Milton Erickson school) actually use this method to reduce the suffering of pain-afflicted patients in hospitals. Some even have their patients undergo surgical operations under hypnosis, with no anesthesia. Other effects beyond mere healing may set in when neither thetan nor GE dramatize any aberrations - such as walking across red-hot coal, putting spikes through one s cheeks, getting crucified in a state of religious ecstasy, and so on. All of this seems to work as long as thetan and GE don t worry. As soon as they get worried, engrams get triggered and pains, psychosomatic illnesses and death follow. Apart from hypnosis, other time-honored means of putting the thetan in a nonworried condition are drugs, alcohol, strong pharmaceutical medicines and narcosis. In the GE they restimulate old engrams of getting poisoned and it therefore thinks of death; the thetan gets the message and goes exterior, i.e. leaves the body. (He always does when the going gets rough and leaves it up to the GE to pick up the broken bits, much to the dismay of the GE.) Although this is known to work - and in fact works so well that the thetan does it for pleasure and takes drugs to escape the clutches of the GE at least temporarily - it has the side effect of landing the thetan in his bank with an almighty crash once the drug s effect lessens. He has to come back from his lovely carefree position outside, only to enter a body dramatizing the sensations and pains of many past deaths. (This is variously called hangover or cold turkey , depending on the drug taken.) Excessive drug taking may upset the fine interplay between thetan, entities and GE to such extent that their force fields collapse momentarily, leading to a gigantic super-restimulation accompanied by unconsciousness - a thetan in full grip of his various banks, rendering him insane beyond easy repair. EUROPEAN OCCULTISM

Continuing our magical mystery tour further east, we reach the USA and - most unforgivably skipping over the vast lore of the American Indian - are back in the European tradition. There we find two branches outside regular religion and science occultism and fringe medicine - both dealing with the tension between spirit and soul. Occult , Latin, means hidden . The term refers to hidden knowledge that doesn t meet the eye at first glance, to knowledge of the astral rather than the material world. In the 19th century, occultism came to be en vogue in some circles of society. Perhaps best known are Helena Blavatsky (1831-1891), the founder of Theosophy, and Rudolf Steiner (1861-1925), who developed Anthroposophy. Both took their inspiration from Vedic sources and frequently used Sanskrit terminology. In contrast, the qabalist Franz Bardon (1909-1958) who continued the hermetic tradition of ancient Egypt originating with Hermes Trismegistos, preferred fairly ordinary language. Bardon is said to be a re-incarnation of Hermes Trismegistos (meaning the threefold master of magic ). These three persons one might call white magicians who evoke helpful elemental entities and fend off the black destructive ones evoked by black magicians. One rather infamous representative of the latter category is Aleister Crowley (18751947) of the Ordo Templis Orientalis (O.T.O.), who, aided by heroin, combined black magic with blood and sex rituals. Whereas Blavatsky and Steiner where students of occult lore, visionaries of astral mysteries but only marginally equipped with actual occult powers (siddhis), Bardon was a master of the craft, a famous stage magician who drew considerable crowds to the box offices of Dresden, Germany - and his magic wasn t based on tricks, it was for real. He could read people s life history and their future down to minute details as if it was written on their faces; by as much as a glance he could diagnose and heal illnesses (sometimes instantly, like the Hunas); he knew how to use chakras to install telepathic lines for defense and attack; and he was adept at evoking nature spirits ( elementals ) in order to make rainclouds or sunshine. Blavatsky s and Steiner s psychological models by and large compare with that of Bardon; a different terminology is used, though. The Genetic Entity Steiner calls ether body ; to Blavatsky it s the animal soul sharing the physical body with the human soul . Steiner actually states that the ether body does its reconstruction work of the physical body during deep sleep when there is no disturbance from the astral body (Steiner s term for thetan), and that the ether body dissolves after death (as one would say of the GE, too)l . All of these three occultists agree on the existence of a senior spiritual element called akasha or ether , source of the well-known four elements , fire, air, water and earth. In Bardon s system the threesomeness or perhaps trinity we could already detect in the system of the Hunas and that of Hubbard, is represented in simpler form than in those of Blavatsky and Steiner, so we ll briefly sketch it. Bardon likens the allpervading akasha to God (static). A splinter or spark of this is manifested in each man as his immortal spirit or I . This is akasha in its individualized form, the mental body

of man (thetan) and his most subtle level of existence. The mental body contains within itself the four elements as a mere potential; only when energized they form the astral body (probably compares to the GE). Additionally, so that one may get active in the physical world, a physical body is needed, too. The control line runs from up top downwards, from the mental body through the astral body into the physical body. Connection between the three bodies is made through mental stuff which Bardon considers to have electromagnetic properties. FRINGE MEDICINE Not only the occultists of Europe worked on the basis of the concepts we are discussing - some scientists, usually outsiders to the main stream of knowledge of their day, did as well. To name but a few: Paracelsus (1493-1541) was one of the first to claim that unconscious motivations were the reason for neurosis quite a claim at a time still dominated by the medical system of Hippocrates (460-377 B.C.) who didn t allow any other explanation for mental or physical disorder but an imbalance of juices . The unconscious, the religious and the transcendental had no place in Hippocrates thinking. Yet Paracelsus proved that illness can be healed by placing magnets on the body. Doing so, he evidently influenced the lambda energy field of the Genetic Entity. Robert Fludd (1574-1637), an earlier incarnation of Franz Bardon, stated that the microcosm of man paralleled the macrocosm of the universe, that man was surrounded by a magnetic field and that magnetic phenomena between the fields of two people explained a lot about human interaction. In the disharmony between microcosm and macrocosm Fludd saw the reason for illness. Franz Anton Mesmer (1734-1815) recognized a force he named animal magnetism . Treatments done on this basis proved to be spectacular, particularly when he healed a psychosomatically blind woman. He was in such demand that he had to appear on stage and do mass healings. In 1799 Mesmer theorized that there must be a physical fluid filling the entire cosmos (which would supposedly compare to lambda, ch i or prana). Mesmer s pupils began to argue against Mesmer s cosmic fluid but found hypnotic trance to be a workable method in the healing of diseases. Hypnosis was extensively experimented with; towards the middle of the 19th century James Braid pioneered surgical operations under hypnosis and proved the mortality rate to sink from 60% in some cases!) to a mere 5%. This promising development soon came to a halt, because in the course of the Industrial Revolution (it being as well a scientific revolution) new drugs and medicaments were invented, amongst them ether and chloroform. Anesthesia by chemistry came to be preferred to anesthesia by hypnosis, and hypnosis was decried as unscientific in this new age of materialist and mechanist science.

Hypnosis nevertheless lived on; it was handed from Ambroise Liebeault (18231904) to Hyppolite Bemheim (1840-1919) who actually coined the term psychotherapy , and finally to Sigmund Freud (1856-1939). However, after initial experimentation with hypnosis Freud proclaimed it useless and developed psychoanalysis. Here hypnosis in used in an extremely light form only, enough to relax the patient physically and mentally so that he many be able to explore his unconscious data banks - his reactive mind. (Eventually some Freudian methods wound up in the hands of Hubbard whose initial dianetics sessions around 1950 strongly resemble psychoanalysis - down to details like the patient lying on the couch and being put in reverie . Hubbard knew his psychology and was evidently an experienced hypnotist as well.) Freud s great pioneering idea was that all forms of neurosis have a non-physical cause and that this cause is to be found in the unconscious . The pictures contained in the unconscious are explained to be partly man s soul heritage and partly the result of his fight against the demands of libido , a life force wanting nothing but physical and sexual pleasure. However, as society considers other things more important, man has to suppress the drives and urges of libido. This either leads to a conversion of libido, making it a positive force aiding man, or to its perversion when the compelling imagery of the unconscious gets the better of man and destroys him. Freud s psychological model consists of the id (the it ), the ego and the super-ego. The ethical and aesthetic goals, purposes and standards set by the super-ego clash with the body and sex-oriented lust of the id; man s ego is the product of this friction. Again, and even in the middle of the professorial world of a Viennese university at the turn of this century, we find our familiar trinity -concept of static, thetan and GE. And indeed - all of the above happened in the high halls of established science. So far we haven t spoken of fringe medicine at all, quite the contrary! Coming to the fringes now we find scientists whose work has been reluctantly, if at all, been recognized by official medicine, such as that of Christian Friedrich Samuel Hahnemann (1755-1843), founder of homeopathy, of Edward Bach (1886-1936), known through his Bach flower therapy, of Albert Abrams (1863-1924) who discovered Radionics, and of Wilhelm Reich (1897-1957). Reich had studied under Freud but later developed his own system. He considered the healthy organism to be permeated by a bio-energy he named orgone , the harmonious flow of which would make for a happy and healthy life. He theorized that in the course of one s life bio-energy was getting lumped up or locked up in form of a crust ( Panzer ) thereby engendering psychosomatic illnesses. Reich developed his ideas from the 1930 s onward, was despised by his fellow scientists, and died in isolation. (We will hear of him again in chapter 6.) In a way, Reich had a predecessor, a real odd man out - the German Karl Freiherr von Reichenbach (1788-1869). After making his career and his money in chemistry, mining and mineralogy - some of his inventions like for example paraffin are still used today, and his treatise on meteorites is considered a standard - he began experimenting with 600 sensitives , amongst them famous people of his day, and

found in the strictest discipline of natural science, energy phenomena like people drawing flames out of crystals and magnets, light and color phenomena between two persons, between people and minerals, and people and plants. For over twenty years, on his own money, he broadly analyzed energy exchanges between the micro- and macrocosm. Reichenbach didn t try to prove some far-out pet theory of his - he simply made observations and attempted to explain them. His conclusion was that there must be a yet unknown moving agent pervading the cosmos; he called it the od after a Germanic word signifying movement and claimed that the one reason for illness was a disturbance in the balance of the od 12. As his findings didn t fit in with the paradigms of his day such as gravity, electricity, magnetism, light, warmth and sound, Reichenbach was met with severe animosity from high-ranking scientists of his day, some of them his former friends and admirers. He died a social outcast and a poor man. And so Reichenbach suffered a similar fate as Wilhelm Reich was to have 90 years later. Two hundred years before Reich, Hahnemann observed that certain plants produce effects on the body which exactly parallel the symptoms of certain illnesses, and that these illnesses can be cured by using the very same plant as a medicine. A catarrh for example produces the same phenomena as cutting onions would: stuffed up nose, tears running from the eyes, etc. And indeed catarrh can be healed by turning the onion into homeopathic medicine. Homeopathic , taken from Greek and literally translated, means similar suffering . In Latin, the scientific language of Hahnemann s days, the principle of his medical theory is stated as similia similibus curentur . Roughly translated this means to cure an illness you must use what is similar to it . With this, Hahnemann continued a string of thoughts already suggested three hundred years earlier by Paracelsus, but nevertheless his statement was and still is, revolutionary. Official medicine generally advocates allopathy , a method of treating a disease by using remedies that produce different or contrary effects to those of the disease, thus canceling them. ( Alloion , Greek, means different, alien .) Most pharmaceutical medicines work on this principle. Homeopathy was Hahnemann s alternative to allopathy. He saw illness as a suffering of life force (Hahnemann s own term). Life force keeps the body going so that the spirit may use it for his purposes. The material organism alone cannot keep itself up nor follow any line of action. This is done by the dynamis , Hahnemann s other term for life force . The dynamis manages the body s survival and expresses itself as emotions. In case of disease the dynamis is upset or out of tune . It is not the body that is ill, it s the dynamis. This is why medicine has to work on the dynamis and not on the body. Hahnemann saw the development from health to disease and back to health as a wholly immaterial process. As the dynamis, a spiritual entity, can only be made ill by spiritual factors such as misemotions, the treatment of illnesses must therefore be done on a spiritual basis, too. To get the dynamis back in tune, the tuning power of a remedy is much more important than mere chemical reactions in the body.

Consequently treatment is not done by eating or drinking a herbal concoction but by thinning down plant substances at ratios from 1:100 up to 1:50.000. The plant s healing powers, thus dynamified , are said to permeate the whole organism with their healing vibrations at the moment the medicine as much as touches the body. Healing does not occur through a mechanical transmission of particles such as atoms, but is brought about by energetic resonance s. The higher a plant has been dynamified, the more its healing power is supposed to be freed. Speaking in scientological terms one would say that homeopathic remedies are directly addressing the Genetic Entity of the patient. Between the GEs of man and plant, sympathetic resonance is established. And as resonance is but another term for affinity , one might say that on the basis of affinity, non-verbal communication between plant and human GEs is made to occur. However, not all homeopathic remedies are plants - some are minerals. So perhaps one ought to speak of the demonstration of the vibratory patterns of one life form, be it plant or mineral, as influencing another, but not of an actual healing power inherent in the plant or mineral. Experiments have shown that such vibrations can be created artificially and when transmitted to water, will have the expected homeopathic healing effects. In this as well as in all other therapies that are based on the recognition of life force, the role of the therapist as a person is decisive. It is his case analysis and indication of similarity of vibration of plant extracts (which often, in large concentrations, would be poisons) and symptoms and condition of the patient that is instrumental - often his recognition of the case pattern is terms of the available remedies is treatment enough. Using this same principle of resonance, Bach flower therapy goes yet a step further. In Edward Bach s theory, man is seen to be composed of a Higher Self and a Personality ; between them there is either consonance or dissonance. The Higher Self is seen to be the seat of virtue and benevolent intentions, whereas the Personality, as a result of man s fight for survival, may be at worst a gnarled, bruised, ill-tempered, evil-minded ego who doesn t listen much to the appeals to virtue and benevolence from the next level up. Conflict between the two is therefore pre-programmed. When it occurs, the ensuing dissonance is taken out on the body in the form of psychosomatic illness. The illness tells the Personality to take care, change his ways and get back in a state of consonance with his Higher Self. To guide the Personality back to wholesomeness, flowers, blossoms and plants are used. The art of the Bach healer consists of finding out which plant or blossom would correspond best to the Personality of the patient. The vibrant quality of the blossom concentrate will, if chosen correctly, help to restore a consonant vibration between Personality and Higher Self.

The interesting thing about Bach is that he doesn t use a single plant traditionally classified as a healing plant . Healing plants or herbs directly address the somatic problems of the patient; they (in scientology terms) address the GE directly. Bach blossoms however, work on a higher level; they address the character of the Personality, the set of attitudes (postulates) habitually energized without the person being aware of it. ( Circuits , in scientological terms.) Bach s system, then, can be said to address postulates, the very stuff a thetan is made of - so it operates on a very high level indeed. (However, to really cure an illness permanently, the thetan would have to recognize his or the GE s postulates and cancel them. Whether this is actually attained during Bach flower therapy along with the healing effects, would be worth investigating.) Now to Radionics, the last development at the fringes of western medicine we are going to deal with. (The list is by no means complete!) According to Radionic theory all life forms have specific electro-magnetic fields around them. Ultimately all fields are seen to merge with the electro-magnetic field surrounding Earth. Consequently the patient is looked at as a complex of interpenetrating energy fields. When they are in a state of disharmony, disease results. Radionics was developed by the American physician Albert Abrams at the beginning of the 20th century. He built electronic diagnostic instruments to measure disease reactions. Further developments, particularly in the 1940s, made it possible to diagnose and treat a patient over a distance on the basis of no more than a blood sample or a lock of hair. The vibratory patterns of diseased organs and of their remedies, too, are analyzed and then tuned to each other. Detection and treatment is done across hundreds of kilometers by using the Earth field as a telepathic communication link between patient and practitioner. Radionics is not entirely instrument-bound. A senior prerequisite are the extra-sensory perception faculties (ESP) of the practitioner; Radionics is therefore, like all the others mentioned, a truly esoteric discipline. When the practitioner and his instruments are tuned to the patient, a series of diagnostic questions is asked telepathically. The cause of the disease, below that diagnosed by medical means, is detected. Then the collect vibratory rate for the healing process is determined. Sometimes homeopathic or Bach remedies are placed near the patient s blood or hair sample. The rates (a Radionic key word) are then transmitted to the patient. The advantages of Radionics are that disease can be detected even before its actual outbreak and that remedies leave no side effects on the body. (Of course, all other sensible measures are recommended as well, such as keeping to a diet or seeing a chiropractor or physician.) It is remarkable that the internal organs of the donor of the blood sample can be photographed by radionic cameras linked to the sample, again over hundreds of kilometers. Radionic cameras shoot ether pictures through an ether link resulting in photographs for example of cancerous tissue or brain tumors. In one instance when a photo was taken during an ongoing operation, it even showed the surgeon s hands and

instruments working on an organ. (In this particular case, the photographic equipment was in the USA, the operation in England.) One is led to the possibility that Radionic photography makes GE pictures visible, the very pictures recorded by the Genetic Entity as engrams during an accident or operation and usually visualized only by the auditee in his session13. (As a side note: totally independent of what went on in Radionics, Franz Bardon in the 1930s actually took photos of people long dead and of places long disappeared by utilizing the ether stratum or akasha10.) THE RESONANCE PRINCIPLE Resonance appears to be the basis of the relationship between thetans and thetans, thetans and GEs, GEs and GEs and GEs and the environment. Interaction between spirit, soul, body and the physical universe can be seen to occur through consonant and dissonant energy vibrations, subjectively felt as emotions and objectively expressed as psychosomatic illnesses. The principle is that something placed close enough to a source of vibration will begin to vibrate also. Proximity (affinity) and comparable properties (reality) are necessary for a duplication of vibration, a resonance, to occur (communication). Because of the intimate connection between thetan and GE, and on the basis of such communication, vibrations in the environment that are disagreeable may cause dissonance, stress, disease. Healing occurs by introducing harmonious vibrations, thus de-enturbulating the dissonance s. This may be done by hypnosis, auditing, medicine - even by exposing the universe in question (in particular the GE) to the vibrations of colors and crystals. To give some examples: Once I sat on a garden bench, an old man next to me, and after a few minutes I felt strong shoulder pains as if I had rheumatism. The old man got up and went, the pains subsided; he came back - and so did my pains. I realized that this was a resonance phenomenon between his GE and mine and indicated this to my GE, whereupon my pains went. Later I asked the son of the old man if his father suffered from rheumatism and was told that he did indeed. Another example: research in bio-resonance has evidenced that the GE s vibrations can be technically imitated by microwaves. Accordingly the MORA-Therapy developed 1977 in Germany by the physician Dr. Franz Morell and the engineer E. Rasche, is based on the simple concept of detecting the patient s dissonant wave areas, feeding the wave into an electronic device which mirrors it, plays it back to the patient and thus cancels the harmful vibrations to zero. As an aside - you may remember that microwaves were mentioned once before in the previous chapter, section The Mind and the Brain . There, the brain was called an antenna . Now, at the end of this present chapter it may have become clear that the brain as such doesn t originate thought, emotion or action but that the operating agents are GE and thetan However, the brain does receive actual microwave vibrations, no

matter who generated them, and so it follows that one could use microwaves deliberately to influence either a thetan or his GE via his body (brain) - not to make him sane but mad; not to heal but to cause illness. One could for example spread illnesses by satellites radiating microwaves on select parts of the planet. Radiation affects the body and this effect bounces back on the GE; some types of radiation may even affect the GE directly, as Morell has shown. Genetic mutations may occur after body and GE were exposed to radioactive radiation. So whether directly or indirectly, it s the GE and its banks which get affected, and once the information ( software ) has been fiddled with, the genes ( hardware ) holding this information will distribute and continue it. Thus one gets heredity. Resonance, then, is a two-faced device. It may be used either way for healing or for deforming. Some further and more pleasant examples on the effects of resonance: in 1966 Cleve Backster, America s foremost lie-detector expert, found out that his galvanometer would react to plants as well as humans. (A galvanometer is in principle not different from the E-meter used in auditing.) Apart from examining people with his lie-detector, Backster as well taught this skill to policemen and security agents from all over the world. In one experiment, he asked a student to kill one of two house plants, then paraded a number of students before the surviving plant and sure enough got a meter reaction when the right man entered the room. In another experiment Backster used a polygraph which would record meter reactions on a sheet of paper. With the use of synchronized stop watches he was able to see that each of the three plants connected with the polygraph monitored his emotional reactions when he spend an exciting and slightly adventurous afternoon in New York City. At the exact moment he was getting upset about something, the plants would react on the meter14. Another example: In 1969 Dorothy Rettallack, a biology student at the university of Denver, discovered that various types of plants such as petunias, sweet corn, squash, zinnias, and marigolds reacted to music in various ways. Exposed to rock music, some of the plants died within a fortnight, whereas those exposed to classical music, actually flowered. In a follow-up experiment plants leaned away from the speaker boxes when rock music was played to them, they leaned towards the boxes when Bach organ preludes were put on, and when Ravi Shankar played some Indian ragas on the sitar, the plants actually bent down to nearly horizontal, the nearest one almost embracing the speaker box. In meditation, too, the principle of resonance is known and used. Aum, the mantra already mentioned in context with Maharishi s TM, is considered senior to all other mantras because it not only symbolizes but actually is the sound of the universe. In the beginning stages of meditation it is a spoken mantra, but the true initiate can actually hear it. In Zen literature for example, it has been likened to a deep rumbling noise or the rushing of a waterfall. Similar descriptions were given by prophets of the old and new testament (Ezekiel 3,13; Revelations 1,15). As one would compare novel experiences to what one is familiar with, a city person may not liken the Aum to the sound of rushing water but perhaps to the purring of a contented cat played through a set

of 300 watt bass speaker boxes at low volume. That s at least how I heard it myself during one particular kundalini meditation. It didn t come from anywhere in particular, it simply was there. Yogananda speaks of the Aum as the vibration of the Cosmic Motor . Hubbard seems to agree to this when he says: Recent researches I have done in the field of aesthetics tend to indicate that rhythm is the source of present time. The thetan is carried along both by his own desire to have, do or be and by having been overwhelmed in the distant past by a continuous minute rhythm. This is a possible explanation of a thetan s continuous presence in Present Time. Present Time, then, can be defined as a response to the continuous rhythm of the physical universe, resulting in a hereness and nowness. 15 Being here and now therefore isn t necessarily a very desirable state as it would tie one down to space (here) and time (now), a condition below the native state of a thetan which is timelessness and non-locatedness (static). Therefore those who don t unknowingly respond to this rhythm but are aware of it and can causatively tune in to it from above , have power over anything that vibrates, be it alive or dead. According to the Indian philosopher Patanjali (200 B.C.), each time a person speaks a word or utters a mental impulse, it is transmitted by the Aum to the universal energy of akasha. In a similar vein Helena Blavatsky says - referring to the magic discipline qabala - that the Hebrew alphabet is an emanation of the unspeakable name of God and if used correctly will give the speaker powers parallelling those of God when he spoke the word at the beginning of creation (John 1, 1-3). And likewise Rudolf Steiner said that the world is but frozen akasha , the condensed word of God . Each sound or mental image, then, is seen as a creative act, and if performed with great purity and integrity will result in visible and even tangible effects like objects being created out of thin air 5. Concerning this, the great Indian musician Ravi Shankar says: There is no dearth of beautiful stories relating how great musicians and saintmusicians (. . .) performed miracles by singing certain ragas. It is said that some could light fires or the oil lamps by singing one raga, or bring rain, melt stones, cause flowers to blossom, and attract ferocious wild animals - even snakes and tigers - to a peaceful, quiet circle in a forest around a singing musician 67. In fact, all language was originally creative or evocative insofar as the root sounds of words denote concepts rather than things and, if spoken properly, would evoke the spirit of the thing and thus make theta quanta assemble and bring the actual thing into physical existence. That this can be done by mantras up to this day simply means that in India this tradition hasn t disappeared yet. The power of the original Sanskrit is still alive. That these are not merely nostalgic reminiscences of days long gone by is evidenced by Rettallack s musical flowers experiment quoted above. Even something as mind-boggling as the transportation of heavy building materials on the basis of resonance alone was only recently observed in Tibet, not longer than some 50 years ago, by the Swedish physician Dr. Jarl. Monks were building a wall in front of the entrance to a cave; the tricky part of the project was that the cave was behind a ledge, that the ledge was 250m up the face of a sheer cliff and that the wall was to be placed on that

ledge. There was no access to the ledge except by rope pulleys from the top of the cliff. This is how the monks got there but not their building material - hefty stone blocks of 1m side length and 1.50 m height. To get them up there they didn t use pulleys - but music! 250m away from the foot of the cliff, on the level ground, a flat bowl carved from a solid piece of rock, was positioned. Into that bowl the building blocks, hauled about by yaks, were put one by one. Again 63 m away from the bowl a quarter circle of monk musicians assembled. Thus the musicians, the bowl and the cliff were positioned in a straight line. They used the instruments common in Tibetan religious music. Behind the musicians stood four rows of priests. At a signal the musicians started off beating their drums and blowing their horns, the priests chanted their mantras, and after about four minutes the building block began to rock gently, then lifted off, hovered up in a parabolic curve and after about three further minutes settled down on the ledge. This way the monks transported about five blocks per hour. Dr. Jarl, being a good and skeptical western scientist, wanted to make sure that he wasn t suffering from mass psychosis and had the event filmed by two separate cameras simultaneously. When he handed the films over to the British scientific society he worked for, he was told that the films were considered top secret and had to be locked away for 50 years, till 1990 16. Having come to the end of our little esoteric cross-country ride now, we can safely conclude that below all terminological differences there is a certainty and an awareness of a static, a thetan, a Genetic Entity and an apparently infinite potential of life energy. Now what about physical energy? What about the physical universe with its suns, planets, galaxies and the vast spaces in between? What sort of energy keeps all this together? The next chapter will tell.

1.3 Creating a Universe AKASHA * ETHER POWER * FROM STATIC TO MEST * A DOWNWARD SPIRAL * UNDOING THE UNIVERSE

AKASHA In the view of the occultists, of Bardon, Steiner, Blavatsky and of their common source, Vedic philosophy, akasha is the most subtle of substances, a mere potential and mother to the four elements. By transforming itself, akasha becomes first fire, as such produces gases (air), these on cooling off liquefy (water) and finally, through further condensation, turn into solid matter (earth). The occultists associated something holy or god-like with akasha and its four elements, and indeed, according to the old testament, God created the world in the same alchemistic pattern - the spirit of God made first light (fire), then water and earth. Yet in Indian terms akasha simply means universal energy or, to use an expression of modern physics, space-energy (as distinguished from prana which is life energy .) Let s take a second look at this cosmic creation process, this time in slow motion: in its non-active, non-perceptible manifestation as a pure potential, akasha is as well termed prakriti . Prakriti could be translated as potential of primal matter and is composed of minute particles that have both quality and substance, and seem to correspond to Hubbard s theta quanta. They are subdivided in three categories called gunas . As long as prakriti remains a mere potential, there is no real world yet. Only when consciousness (purusha) acts upon prakriti, does prakriti lose its potentiality and take on actual shapes and forms. The guna particles aggregate and become manifested as fire, air, water and earth. Conscious thought acting upon the potential of substance brings forth real substance such as space, energy and matter . Therefore the visible, tangible universe, real as it may appear to one, is actually an illusion (maya). Consisting of tiny energy quanta, it is a continuously created thing. It s real but it isn t real. It doesn t hold any more still than a speck of oil on water would do. But interestingly enough, although a speck of oil keeps oscillating incessantly, everybody seems to know what it looks like. This is because one does not define it as a single event but as a generalization on the basis of many observations. Once again we can see that reality is an agreement . A comparable principle is known to western physics as superposition . Superposition basically means that any given thing cannot merely be defined as a solid unchanging unit but only as the sum of changes it may possibly go through in the course of its existence. Dice for example, are not simply cubes with dots on them numbering one to six, they are - in terms of superposition - the sum of possible ways in which they can fall. So the universe is not looked at as a fixed thing but as a set of probabilities - it is but maya, a delusive apparency.

ETHER POWER The following statement, though very Vedic in spirit, was made by a western scientist: Long ago man recognized that all perceptible matter comes from a primary substance, of a tenuity beyond conception, filling all space, the Akasha or Luminiferous Ether, which is acted upon by the life-giving prana or creative force, calling into existence, in never-ending cycles, all things and phenomena. The primary substance, thrown into infinitesimal whirls of prodigious velocity, becomes gross matter; the force subsiding, the motion ceases and matter disappears, reverting to the primary substance. 18. Nicola Tesla (1856-1943) who said this, not only claimed but experimentally proved that the force described above, known to the west since Aristoteles as the ether , could be tapped and used. He invented ether-powered generators that would drive cars as well as cause artificial earthquakes and thunderstorms; he found ways to transmit electricity without copper wire and pylons. In a word, he put the akasha to industrial use. According to Tesla, if one only used the universally available cosmic energy there couldn t possibly be any energy shortage ever. Speaking in comparison, it is as if a person were sitting at the bottom of the sea with a cup in his hand, wondering how to fill it with water. Just as that person is not aware of the water surrounding him, man doesn t seem to be aware of the omnipresence of cosmic energy. Not surprisingly, official physics of today ridicule Tesla s work, energy monopolists bought his patents and locked them away whereas the military of the USA and Russia research the matter to develop advanced weaponry. Yet despite all disinformation campaigns on the subject of Free Energy, the vision of its possibility could never be stamped out19. Yet another western scientist surmised that space is not empty but filled with an all-pervading ether, and no actual difference can be made between space and ether. This scientist is Albert Einstein (1879-1955). He looked at space as a somethingness rather than a nothingness (speaking in Hubbard s terminology). As a young man Einstein believed, along with contemporary science, in the existence of an ether. In the tradition of James Clark Maxwell (1860) and Isaac Newton (1690), the ether was considered to be the medium carrying light and force through the vastness of the cosmos. In 1905 Einstein dropped this idea and for eleven years, till 1916, fully negated it. This span of time during which Einstein developed his theory of relativity, proved to be crucial for the course physics was to take. The theory of relativity became the official credo; other, later statements of Einstein, particularly those concerning the ether, were ignored.

In 1934 for example, he said: Physical space and the ether are merely different names for the same concepts; fields are physical states of space. He went as far as stating that there was no empty space, that space is a dynamic field-medium actually producing elemental particles - not a far cry from what ancient India says about akasha20. Although established physics generally disregard Einstein s notion of an ether, there are the occasional exceptions. Hannes Alfven, physics Nobel prize winner of 1970, said in the 1982 meeting of Nobel laureates in Konstanz, Germany, that interstellar space is not empty as had been generally assumed, but that 99% of the universe is filled with plasma . With that, he re-emphasized a point other Nobel prize laureates had made before him: Lenard in 1905, Stark in 1919, Compton in 1927, de Broglie in 1929, Dirac in 1933, Yukawa in 1949. The ether concept survived - cloaked as neutrino sea , radiant energy , primary energy , tachyon field , zero-point energy , gravitational field energy or space energy 20 Ether, akasha, prana, ch i - where does this energy come from? Has it always been there? Did we, as thetans, produce this potential, or are we its product? Who is the cause of this? Whose consciousness is at work here, turning the potential for matter into actual matter? That of God? Quite so , the Vedic sage would answer, you may call it god, but to be more specific one should say it s atman. Atman is the source of all this. Fair enough - but who or what is atman? Atman is you or me or anyone; it s the Sanskrit word for thetan. Conclusion: we, all of us together, create our world - and then believe it to be real. Which is a mistake, because it isn t. It s maya - an illusion passing for reality. Now, after all this Sanskrit terminology, let s see what Hubbard has to say about the matter. We will specifically consult the Factors , thirty statements on how life and the universe came to be21. FROM STATIC TO MEST Factors, by dictionary definition, are a circumstance, fact or influence that tends to produce a result . The scientology Factors are a description of the circumstances, facts and influences resulting in a universe - any universe, be it a mental or a physical one. It took Hubbard thirty years to work them out, from 1923 till 1953. Factor 1 says that before the beginning of any game there is a Cause and that the entire purpose of the Cause is the creation of effect. At this stage the Cause is merely a potential. This statement doesn t necessarily refer to something very grandiose that might have happened quadrillions of years ago. It refers to present time as well. You or me or indeed anyone is in a cause position most of the time, at least when we begin to

conceptualize a game. We start things. And before anything is started, we, the starters, are already there. In order to be an actual Cause with demonstrable effects, the first thing one would have to do is putting somebody there to get things started; lacking anyone else one would of course take oneself. In the beginning of any game, therefore, is the decision to BE. Somebody has to be there, and so the Cause assumes a beingness. That s Factor 2. You have to be someone before you can do (act), and finally have the result of your doings. Be, do and have are the elements of any cycle of action21. Now that one has assumed a beingness, one would need to actually take up a position, a point to act from. One can t lift a chair with no firm ground to stand on. So one would, as one s first action, have to have a standpoint or viewpoint. And from that viewpoint, one would extend one s theta quanta in various directions (Factors 3 and 4). In terms of the Axioms, this would mean: the static has descended and manifests himself as a thetan. He has become an energy-space production unit . The position of a viewpoint is defined by the particles emanating from it. Take a river, for example: to find its source you d just walk upstream till you got to the point where the water particles emanate from. That s the source of the river, that s the place where he acts from - that s his viewpoint . One couldn t possibly have a viewpoint without outflowing any particles; likewise one couldn t outflow any particles without a viewpoint. You can t see without being seen. One is the condition for the other, and vice versa. Each particle emanating from the viewpoint serves as an orientation point for the thetan. Thus the surrounding monotony of nothingness becomes structured by an impression of dimensions. This is why Hubbard calls such particles dimension points theta quanta with a specific function. As a result of flowing out particles and making coordinates, space is created (Factor 5). Example: supposing you sat in a boat out on the open sea (unstructured space) and dropped some buoys, you d have created a two-dimensional space around you. Space therefore is defined as the dimensions created and experienced from a specific viewpoint. (A viewpoint. Please note that one might have more than one.) So space is defined in terms of dimensions, dimensions in terms of the placing of theta quanta. This means that to the thetan, there is no other space than that created by his theta quanta. The rest of the world does not exist to him. The thetan is where his attention units are parked, he isn t anywhere else as well . As a comparison, look at a flock of starlings, notice its ever-changing shape - that s the space of a thetan (supposing that each starling were a dimension point). Some of the Factors can be read as referring to one s inner world only, yet some others definitely refer to the creation of a very real physical universe. This is how they are going to be interpreted as we carry on, because after all we wanted to see if Hubbard can offer a story of myth comparable to those we saw earlier. It begins to show already,

actually. When we add Hubbard s statement: The basic unit of energy is the dimension point 5 to his definition of space (as consisting of dimension points), we aren t a far cry from Tesla s and Einstein s tenet that space equals energy . How does it go on after space has been created? Well, this space soon starts humming with activity. Between you, the viewpoint, and your dimension points are connection and interchange. You keep flowing out more and more theta quanta as you look back and forth between the various dimension points already created and thus there is communication (Factors 6 and 7). This (the intense communication between viewpoints and dimension points) brings about the phenomenon of light. Next, energy evolves, and finally, life (Factors 8, 9 and 10). Life at this stage of its evolution would be purely spiritual. It would mean that one exists as a spiritual being who is perceptible because of his theta energy field, who participates on the playing field of mental matter, energy, space and time (mest) and as a player, creates mental image pictures, glittery and fantastical astral objects, demons and entities. Of course, one wouldn t be alone doing so. Others, too, took a viewpoint and extended their dimension points (Factor 11), but one doesn t know of them except through the interchange of dimension points, through giving and receiving theta quanta (Factor 24). It is this zone where theta quanta mingle, that we call a shared universe and therewith, reality . The extent of game one may have with another is proportionate to the amount of overlap one s own universe has with his (Dn Ax.113, 114). Sounds a bit sobering, perhaps? But look, if it is true that pure spirits in their static state live in a place where there are no particles, how would they see each other? They wouldn t! But they d know each other. And that s an entirely different matter. Because knowing another occurs through mutual recognition of postulates on a level above quanta flows, whereas seeing or any other form of energy-related perception depends on particles serving as a communication medium. Without a medium there cannot be any vibration and therefore neither sensual nor telepathic communication. A non-energized thetan exists merely as a beingness. That s the first step down from static, from potential Cause. Beingness is the result of postulates. Postulates are infinite. Particles are not. Therefore those on a static plane and those one step down (thetans identified with no more than their postulates) would know each other, they would notice each other s beingness, but they wouldn t perceive each other in any mestrelated way. Thus knowing and seeing are two entirely different modes of awareness. To recapitulate: our static is operating simultaneously on three floors by this time; firstly as a static nothingness (where he isn t operating at all, actually); secondly as a postulate or perhaps a will, a determined thought; thirdly on the level of substance,

the stuff he creates or uses to put that will into action. He produces his theta quanta, throws them out further and further, pulls them in, interchanges them with those of others, piles them up in one place, disperses them in some other. So there is motion (Factor 12). Because of the postulated solidity of theta particles, they can be combined to all sorts of forms, be they gases, fluids or solids. Thus there is matter (Factors 13 to 16). Matter at this point means the stuff the physical universe is made of. It isn t mental imagery any more. Much as mental mest is solid to a degree, the physical universe is more solid. It s the same stuff, but much more condensed. A simple example: you as the Cause could postulate to be a coffee-maker (beingness), take up a viewpoint in the kitchen and start getting your bearings concerning cups and spoons and water and kettle and coffee (dimension points), thereby creating your space in the kitchen. Then you would proceed to move these shapes and forms about and combine them, and in the end you d have a cup of coffee. Again we are talking about the cycle of action, about Be-Do-Have. Theta quanta are no neuters. Each of them has two characteristics: the postulate and the emotion at the moment of their creation. They bear the personal stamp of their maker. Apart from that they carry all later information, for example who used them, when, and with what postulate and emotion. Indeed, theta quanta contain the complete history of the particular universe they pertain to. A DOWNWARD SPIRAL The remaining Factors describe what Hubbard occasionally calls the downward spiral . The viewpoints (thetans) began to consider their creations more valuable than themselves and felt dependent on them. This is partly because many of these creations were co-creations. Thetans didn t know any longer which particle had been created by whom, therefore couldn t easily un-create them and so became terribly careful about creating anything. In the end they stopped believing that they could create at all; and thus there was scarcity and the illusion of death (Factors 17 to 26). This is where we as thetans stand today - we are concentrated so hard on having to become better or freer or holier, on having to become different, that we forgot entirely that we actually were someone all along anyway, and still are, at this very moment. There is beingness, but man thinks there is only becomingness. (Factor 27.) Unhappiness and the need to change only show when one has lost contact with one s higher immortal self. In Factors 13 and 28 suggestions are made on how to resolve the thetan s entanglement with mest: by restoring his ability to freely create and uncreate, start, change and stop any kind of theta quantum and by enabling him to admire the mest universe as a whole, each particular condition and creation and even each single theta quantum within it - because only that would un-create any unwanted condition or creation. To see it precisely as it is and admire it makes it go poof! and vanish. (. . .) admiration is so strong its absence alone permits persistence. (Factor 13.)

As an aside - the above is actually put in practice in each auditing session, because there the mental masses one creates involuntarily are un-created by the single means of looking at them exactly as they are and admiring them to bits . This is an affinity-based process. Expressed in terms of resonance it means that one duplicates the exact wave pattern and actually creates it newly and voluntarily in its own time and space, a condition which in this universe leads to immediate annihilation (Ax.12, 15, 16). (This will involve recognizing and granting beingness to others who as co-creators have contributed to the masses existence. As we have said, this forgetting to differentiate between oneself and others as co-creators is probably the major reason why we are in a state of believing that we have to experience and suffer from so much solidity.) To end off on the Factors - there are two more, 29 and 30, containing general philosophical statements which we do not need to take up here. But before ending off it should be said that the Factors are not necessarily equally relevant to all thetans, and that the historical development shown in them has not been suffered by all thetans in the same severity. Each thetan is different. Each thetan is at his own point in this downward spiral, or perhaps he is already in an upward spiral and on his way out. And it s not that we all started at the same instance and went through this whole development in step with each other. Personally, I see all parts of the evolvement described in the Factors as existing simultaneously here and now. There is a perpetual coming and going of thetans of different awareness and ability, and some of them may have come to the specific universe described by the Factors from other possible universes not described by the Factors which may exist parallel to this one, or they have descended straight down from the static plane as undiluted manifestations of the Cause. (Some auditing sessions did provide evidence for this. In Sanskrit they are called avatars .) Back to our initial question of Who made the ether? Well, if it is true that the ether, akasha, ch i or prana are consistent with Hubbard s theta quanta, the answer would be that these energy fields didn t always exist but were created by everybody who ever participated in the mest universe game. A gigantic co-creauon ! The MEST universe (. . .) is found to consist of a high-level agreement amongst us. (. . .) The reality of one s own universe is poor because he is in a comatose state of agreement with the MEST universe. (. . .) (A thetan) is in good and active condition in direct ratio to the degree he can break this flow of agreement and establish his own flows and thus create his own universe. One s appreciation of the MEST universe is almost uniformly the energy which one himself places upon the MEST universe, in other words his illusions. When he loses his hopes and dreams (his illusions), it is because he has lost his ability to emanate energy back at the MEST universe and is dependent upon the energy the MEST universe thrusts at him. 5 UNDOING THE UNIVERSE

Even theta quanta condensed to the solidity of physical mest are sufficiently alive to give and receive communication. There are many examples for this. Some people have been known to communicate with metals so intimately that they manage to bend spoons and metal bars without even touching them; animals can pre-divine avalanches and earthquakes; miners in the old days consulted mountain gnomes to find a lode and its path through the rock; desert people like the Australian aborigines have a sixth sense for underground water reservoirs; geomancers (people who perceive magnetic power spots under the ground) used to determine the sites for building the cathedrals, monasteries and chapels of medieval Europe. This has lived on in the Chinese custom of feng shui demanding that one consult the Earth dragon before building one s house so as to balance the forces of yin and yang. The energy field of the landscape is to be conformed with and enhanced rather than destroyed by the position of buildings, tombs, walls and roads22. Even natural science confirms the aliveness of dead matter . Around the turn of the 20th century, the great Indian scientist Sir Jagadis Chandra Bose demonstrated that metals respond to stimulation by Hertzian waves or exposure to drugs in so much the same way as organic tissue that even experts were hard put to tell the resulting curves apart. Stress and strain in the living and non-living graphically showed in the same way. Bose concluded that there is no clear borderline between the organic and the inorganic6,14. In the words of Hubbard: Mest persists and solidifies to the degree that it is not granted life. (Ax. 52) Perhaps we should briefly contemplate the implications of Hubbard s view of the world. If all conditions of existence were indeed brought about only by irresponsibility, if matter, energy, space and time were enforced and not natural states, then the ultimate consequence of each thetan taking responsibility for his part of creation would be that the physical universe dissolves and that each particle returns to where it came from - to nothingness. To facilitate digesting this it is perhaps helpful to point out that Hubbard is not the only one favoring large-scale purposes. Siddartha Gautama, the historical Buddha of 2500 years ago, set out to free all sentient beings from samsara, the wheel of birth and death. This intention was upheld throughout the ages by the religious leaders and teachers of India, China and Japan, amongst them the Dalai Lama who so far has reincarnated fourteen times to assist in this mission, and the Tibetan Karmapa who has continuously reincarnated sixteen times (800 years) for the same purpose. Some readers may wonder about the time aspect of such endeavors and indeed, there are large time spans involved. Yet to the spirit there is no time as we have seen, and as one Age of Brahma (the life span of a whole universe) amounts to 314 trillion years by Vedic reckoning, there is obviously time in abundance and no reason to get fidgety6. (One trillion , in the numerical system of the USA and Canada used in this book, is a 1 followed by 12 zeroes.)

1.4 God and the Infinite ATHEISM * MONOTHEISM * STATIC AND DYNAMIC * TWO BASIC RIGHTS

In many cultures three views regarding the nature of god co-exist side by side - a polytheistic one, where many gods are seen to govern different aspects of life, a monotheistic one, where the One God is considered the single source of influence on the life of man, and an atheistic one, where god is not personified but considered a state one may experience. (Atheism, much as it denies the existence of a god-person, is not irreligious, though witness Buddhism.) Take Christianity as an example - there the priesthood asserts the unquestionable dominance of the One God (monotheism), yet simultaneously you find people preferring to pray to Jesus and even more to the Virgin Mary and their local saints (because a local saint with healing powers seems a safer bet than an abstract God which is polytheism), and again simultaneously you find the Christian mystic who after experiencing a god-state in his unio mystica , considers god beyond description (atheism), is therefore deemed a heretic by the priesthood and dutifully burnt at the stake. Similarly Hinduism and Buddhism, both essentially atheistic, abound in demon cults and half-gods (polytheism). Yet they don t go as far as considering a single deity to govern man s fate entirely (monotheism). In the long chapter on Soul and Body we encountered various psychological models - that of the German white magician Franz Bardon, of the Hawaiian Hunas, of Hinduism and Buddhism, and last but not least that of Hubbard - all of them atheistic! We didn t come across a single monotheistic one like Judaism, Christianity and Islam. This omission obviously calls for some further investigation into the subject. So we will briefly summarize what we know already on the subject of atheism, then add some thoughts on monotheism and all along draw comparisons with Hubbard s teachings. ATHEISM Franz Bardon has the concept of an ever so subtle stratum of akasha (which he actually refers to as god), manifesting itself individually as man s immortal spirit or I . Akasha forms the mental body of man, his most subtle level of existence. On a grosser plane, there is the astral body and further down, the physical body. These three bodies are connected by mental stuff . Likewise the Hunas who see the infinite aspect of man (higher self) as tied to the game of life (middle self), and identified with body and GE (lower self). Communication between these three bodies occurs through shadow stuff (mana) and

postulates. Man s middle self appears to hang in a web of tiny invisible lines connecting him to objects, events and people of his past, present and future; simultaneously, above the level of mana, his higher self is interconnected with all other infinite beings - an overlapping as infinities as we said of thetans in their static state. Further parallels to this trinity system appear in the Vedas, the source of Hinduism and Buddhism. In Hinduism, above all worldly things stands atman , the immortal spirit of man. Part of atman is identified with body, mind and ego and so lives in the world of duality. This aspect of atman is called jiva . Atman is the source of thought; jiva identifies with thought. Jiva thinks he is his mind; atman is above the level of mind. Atman corresponds to Hubbard s static, the unmanifested potential of a thetan; jiva would compare to the thetan actualizing himself as beingness and energy pulsations. Atman is but a manifestation of brahman , the absolute, the infinity beyond thought, language or imagery. Brahman, in Hubbard s terms, would be the coexistence of static (Ax. 25), a nothingness with a quality, a potential 1. In order to attain nirvana and make atman merge with brahman (make the thetan return to static), jiva, the urge for ego , is obviously in the way and needs to be overcome. Now does this mean that at the point of enlightenment (samadhi) one gets snuffed out like a candle and becomes one with some huge anonymous nothing? It doesn t. Of the relationship between individual static (atman) and general static (brahman), the 7th century Indian philosopher Shankara said: There must be an existence, a reality, which perceives the ego-sense and its coverings and is also aware of the void which is their absence. (. . .) He who experiences is conscious of himself. Without an experiencer, there can be no self-consciousness. The atman is its own witness, since it is conscious of itself. The atman is no other than brahman. 23 Which is to say that thetan and static are of the same quality, they are sat-chitananda , the absolute joy (ananda) of absolute awareness (chit) and absolute beingness (sat). The following quotation wraps this up very beautifully. If one replaced the word being by static it would sound like a lecture on Hubbard s axioms, yet in fact the writer is Maharishi Mahesh Yogi: The basis of thought-energy we call the state of Being. Thus, Being and the Absolute are synonymous. (. . .) Underneath the subtlest layer of all that exists in the relative field is the abstract, absolute field of pure Being which is unmanifested and transcendental. It is neither mana nor energy. It is pure Being, the state of pure existence. (. . .) Existence is abstract; that which exists is concrete. (. . .) although the nature of karma and the nature of Being are incompatible, it is possible (. . .) for a man to live in the field of action and yet to live simultaneously a life of eternal freedom in bliss-consciousness of absolute Being. It is possible for man to act with full interest in the world and yet to live simultaneously in God-consciousness, thereby uniting the values of absolute and relative existence. When the conscious mind transcends the subtlest level of thought, it transcends the subtlest state of relative

experience and arrives at the transcendental Being, the state of pure consciousness or self awareness. 24 So according to Maharishi and Shankara we aren t all one on the level of the absolute, of static. Hubbard would agree. In characteristic terseness he puts it this way: A thetan (i.e. static) is simply you before you mocked yourself up. In plain English this means that what you appear to be is way below of what you really are. And regarding one-ness and being one with the universe , Hubbard says: People have had the idea that there was a main body of theta and everybody became one when you got to the top of the emotional tone scale. Fortunately that isn t true. But you go down tone scale and everybody becomes one. And the oneness is mest. There is no individuality whatsoever in mest. One of the control mechanisms which has been used on thetans is that when they rise in potential they are led to believe themselves one with the universe. This is distinctly untrue. Thetans are individuals. They do not as they rise up the scale merge with other individualities. I So apparently we are not one big static soup. The thetan, aware of being aware, is always himself - even when he has left his ego behind. Now what s the point? What s this static up to? The creation of effect , says Hubbard (Fac. 1) - but of what effect? Hinduism coolly answers that all individual atmans taken together, as they play their games and create the illusion of a real world (maya), are but brahman playing with himself ( lila ). This quite surprisingly corresponds to Hubbard s Axiom 39, again put rather tersely: Life poses problems for its own solution. Now if the ultimate truth is a static (Ax. 35) and if the game of life is played for the sole purpose of playing a game - what sense does it all make then . . .? (This really taxes one s havingness, doesn t it?) And now to another form of atheism, to Buddhism - as its fundaments are the Vedas we find familiar principles if only with some difference in terminology. Buddhism, being rather tightlipped compared to flowery and exuberant Hinduism, doesn t speak of atman and brahman or of attaining union with god, in fact one generally doesn t speak about what cannot be spoken about. For example when one wakes up to one s true Buddha nature , one simply finds emptiness (shunyata). And one cannot actually attain one s Buddha-nature as one has it anyway; one can only wake up to it. This is called bodhi , awakening . The term Buddha refers to this experience - a Buddha is an awakened one . Yet despite all attempts of Buddha to keep it simple, various differentiation s were made and so we do find our trinity again. The primal emptiness (shunyata) came to be subdivided into three spiritual bodies, the highest one denoting absolute knowingness (dharmakaya), the middle one denoting the joy of realizing absolute truth (sambhogakaya), the lowest one denoting the application of truth and ethics in the world (nirmanakaya). Tibetan medical philosophy, a Buddhist discipline, is as well built around the idea of a trinity . Highest is chi , a principle beyond space and time (static) and constituting the potential for all that might ever be, the second shara , the will to create and form, the third badgan , the substance which is to be formed. The

combination of chi, shara and badgan is the prerequisite for life - now a familiar formula to us.25 MONOTHEISM Catholicism and Islam, rooted in the Old Testament, can be considered variations of yet an older monotheistic religion Judaism. Both the New Testament and the Koran are indebted to the Talmud26. They agree on the One God who is not so much a principle, a nameless power potential like brahman, but a definite personality and quite a demanding one, too, who doesn t permit any other gods next to him, transmits moral codes through his prophets, punishes and disciplines the believer and imposes trials on him to test his faith. Certainly the true name of the Jewish god, JHVH, is both unspeakable and ungraspable, yet despite that plenty of policies emanate from him, governing the life of the believer in all detail. So even in monotheism, the appearance of god is manifold - there is the God of the Genesis who created the world, the God of Moses who made the Israelites his chosen people, the wrathful God of the prophets One God each time, certainly, but is it really the same one? The three monotheism s agree further in that they believe in a system of relay points between God and man, running from God to an archangel who tells a prophet what God wishes to communicate to the people; after the prophet s death, a priesthood takes over from him to interpret God s word to the parish. Many relay points, obviously. Whereas Hinduism and Buddhism permit realization of one s true spiritual nature through one s own efforts - for example by practicing yoga and meditation monotheism teaches that there is a fundamental duality between man and God which is impossible to bridge by the religious seeker, because there is one ingredient he cannot do anything about, and that is the grace of God . The grace of God ( bechinam in Hebrew) comes when it comes, one cannot influence its coming. Yet despite all dogma and doctrine, free thinkers and mystics always and against all the rules found ways to experience god and they didn t find a specific personality called One God in Heaven . Very dangerous people, indeed (from the viewpoint of the priesthood). In Judaism, these were the Qabalists, in Islam, the Persian Sufis. (Right across the border from Persia is India a mere coincidence?) By their practices these mystics managed to transcend the apparent duality between man and god and arrive at a certainty of being in god - the mystical union so hard worked towards by medieval Christian hermits, too. The mystic with the longest-lasting impact is of course Jesus Christ himself. Let s not speculate whether he really was a historical personality, whether he studied with the Essenes who in turn received their knowledge from Buddhist monks, sent to the Middle East around 250 B.C. by the emperor Akosha, or whether Jesus Christ merely denotes a state of consciousness. No matter if the New Testament is a factual account or a grand metaphor, what counts is how it differs from the Old Testament, from Judaism, Catholicism and Islam. There is a distinctly Buddhist flavor to some of Jesus words, a bafflingly atheist touch. Just listen: Foxes have holes, and birds of the air have nests;

but the Son of man has nowhere to lay his head (Mt 8.20). Nowhere - is that the emptyness (shunyata) one realizes after bodhi, one s awakening? Or take this one: Believe me that I am in the Father and the Father in me (Jn 14.11). Replacing Father with static or dharmakaya would make this sound rather buddhistic indeed, definitely not old-testamentarian! Or perhaps this one: I am the way, and the truth, and the life; no one comes to the Father, but by me (Jn 14.6). Well, quite! If Christ-consciousness is a state, then there is no other way to attain one s awakening but to go through it (through the state, not through the person of Christ) - a thought echoed by the 14th century Christian mystic Meister Eckhart who says: Seeing God is seeing like God , who speaks of God as luther nicht (sheer nothingness) and who sees himself unable to describe his unio mystica except by Zen paradoxes. Very heretical indeed! STATIC AND DYNAMIC To summarize: mystics east and west agree on a static state which, in itself unmoving, causes dynamic motion and so brings about the ups and downs of life. Although this state is usually referred to as god in western literature (on the background of 2000 years of Catholicism) it may not necessarily be identical with the deity mentioned in the Old Testament. We saw before that god, brahman or dharmakaya represent a vast supraindividual one-ness, the co-existence of static . To the degree that one falls away from static and enters the realm of affinity, reality and communication, one becomes a confused and forlorn spirit. Affinity is a scale of attitudes which falls away from the co-existence of static, through the interposition s of distance and energy, to create identity, down to close proximity but mystery. (Explanation: By the practice of Beingness and the refusal to Be individuation progresses from the Knowingness of complete identification down through the introduction of more and more distance and less and less duplication (. . .) to NotKnowingness (Mystery). (Ax. 25) These lines are yet another formulation of the downward spiral of the Factors. For practical reasons, Hubbard structured the game below static to comprise eight dynamics, thus subdividing life into eight playing fields of differing magnitude and responsibility. As we ll need this concept further on in this book, we ll have to sketch it briefly. Read from the top down, the eight dynamics describe the evolution of a universe and so parallel the Factors. The static, an infinite potential, primarily manifests itself as thought. He can create, alter and uncreate thought. This is the most subtle of dynamic actions one could possibly undertake; it s the 8th dynamic. It results in beingness , in the thought-being we call thetan (Ax. 1, 2,11).

I, the thinker, being the cause of my own thoughts, am outside them. I am a static outside all dynamics. By forming postulates and concepts (thoughts) I create my game, thus drop out from being a pure static and become a thought being, a thetan. I am in fact both - at least as long as I do not forget (Dn Ax. 1, 2; Ax. 25). Next, desiring to create visible effects, I produce theta quanta and thereby mental mest (7th dynamic). Through interaction with a number of other thetans co-creations are made. When the question Who has created what? isn t answered due to irresponsibility, theta quanta will continue to be misowned and mental (or astral ) creations will accumulate and condense. By further agreement and partly out of helplessness their solidification is driven further and further, eventually resulting in physical mest (6th dynamic). Combining spiritual entities such as the GE and the thetan (7th dynamic) with material objects such as bodies (6th dynamic), we get organic life (5th dynamic) which is organized on the 4th dynamic as large populations of different species and on the 3rd dynamic as smaller subgroups within a species. In order to physically perpetuate the race into the future, bodies get together and create new bodies (2nd dynamic); these usually start out as egocentric little individuals (1st dynamic), before they begin to work their way upwards again, towards infinity. Each dynamic is modified by two considerations - ethics and aesthetics. Ethics means as much as making the right choice within a given context , thus finding optimum solutions which ideally would satisfy all parties concerned (Dn Ax. 193). The order resulting from such a solution will be optimum within the context in question and therefore appear aesthetical. Some compositions of Bach and Mozart, some paintings of Durer and Rembrandt, some Indian, Japanese or African sculptures consist of a series of right choices. If you d change one note or one dab of paint, the result would be less convincing than the original. Which proves that ethics (right choices made within a given context) lead to aesthetics. One follows from the other. As these two modifying considerations have dynamic strength of their own, Hubbard termed them 9th dynamic for aesthetics and 10th dynamic for ethics . TWO BASIC RIGHTS Now what choice is a right choice? If one were to measure choices solely by the satisfaction or dissatisfaction it produces in the participants of a specific game, and given that a) most games (except sports) have no rules and b) satisfaction and dissatisfaction aren t always enlightened in character but c) most commonly based on self-righteousness and pigheadedness, the chances are fabulous that one, on this background, might arrive at some rather pitiful optimum solutions - self-righteous, moralistic and shortsighted ones which will prove fatal in the future and make one wade knee-deep in bad karma. Certainly not optimum for anyone, not even the decision makers.

So by what standards can ethical rightness be measured? Hubbard formulated them as Two Rights of a Thetan : 1. the Right to Self-Determinism, and 2. the Right to Leave a Game 27. Joining a game never is a problem but leaving one quite often is ! Therefore any thought or action taking away one s self-determinism and one s freedom to leave a game, would have to be considered strictly non-ethical. The way back to Cause, to static, must not be obstructed for anyone under any circumstances. And as we all meet on the static plane, each thought counts, of everyone - not our actions only! Each of us, by thinking thoughts, contributes to the flavor of the game we are all players in. If we wanted to have an ethical and therefore aesthetic game, one that is easy to enter, easy to play, and easy to leave, we would have to make sure that all postulates within that game were aligned with the Two Rights.

CHAPTER 2 Scientology Science or Science Fiction? 2.1 Auditing Compared to Traditional Practices MEDITATION AND AUDITING * SHAMANISM AND DIANETICS * ON ENERGY TRANSFORMATION AND UN-CREATION MEDITATION AND AUDITING Philosophically, Hinduism, Buddhism and scientology seem quite comparable. But in practical terms, do they have anything in common, too? Meditation practitioners for example often don t find out anything about their past lives and the karmic reasons for their present life; they don t always recognize the contents of the evil fumes they burn up by the light of their mantras. In the self-realization systems of Yogananda and Maharishi this is no shortcoming; it simply isn t considered necessary - in auditing, however, one couldn t do without seeing the picture exactly as it is, with sight, sound, smell, own motion, motions of everybody else, exact time, place, form and sequence of events. Seeing it as it is is the prerequisite to dissolving the unwanted emotional energy in it. It is known in both disciplines that the more attention one gives to a picture the more energy is fed to it and the more it is blown up. In auditing this is desirable as one literally restimulates the hell out of a picture till the auditee has looked at it in all respects, has gone through all painful dramatizations connected with it, found out that he can t be frightened by it and finally laughs out it. In meditation, blowing up pictures to full size is unwanted as it will distract the meditating person from his mantra. He is supposed to stay with his mantra and keep producing a safe loving space within which the picture will melt like a wax doll of the devil in front of an electric fire. One might suspect that the mantra serves as a cushion keeping one from directly facing the pictures from one s bank the way it s done in auditing; on the other hand one might defend mantra meditation by saying that without the mantra the bank wouldn't be activated at all - either way, auditing as well as meditation work on the principle of havingness. Havingness, to repeat, is the ability to have what comes to your senses or your mind, without trying to run away from it or act against it. You just have w hat s happening; like any good surfer, you go with the wave instead of against it. Like any other ability, havingness is not either there or not there but rather more or less there. Meditation and auditing both enhance havingness. They increase one s havingness with respect to one s inner world. And so, despite all methodical differences the final result seems the same: both practitioners wind up being able to let mental masses go up in smoke simply by noticing them.

This is an affinity process. As you don t resist these energy masses but voluntarily tune in to them and causatively duplicate their resonance band, they dissolve. It works purely by duplication of vibration Bringing the static to create a perfect duplicate causes the vanishment of any existence or part thereof (Ax. 20) All you need is Love. Although the results may look the same on the outside one question remains, and from the viewpoint of an auditor it s a very important one indeed: what role do postulates play in meditation? In auditing, a process is considered complete as soon as the postulate in the incident has been found, as it is through this postulate that the thetan compulsively re-creates misemotions and body pains. Once a postulate is pulled up from the dark depth of unknowingness into the bright light of knowingness, the thetan will not fall into its trap any longer. With the postulate found and known, the aberration will be gone- for good, because it s thought that creates unwanted habits and psychosomatic symptoms. Thought precedes everything. During mantra meditation one builds up affinity on an ever-expanding scale and dissolves whatever may come one s way. Are postulates part of this process, too? Does one become aware of them, see them for what they are and cancel them? (As all thetans overlap on the 8th dynamic through the infinity of their thoughts, canceling individual non-survival and non-ethical postulates would naturally affect and change general thought vectors. Therefore the question posed above is of supreme importance; particularly in view of what you are going to read in chapters 3 to 6.) SHAMANISM AND DIANETICS All healing systems we have referred to prefer the thetan out in order to facilitate healing. The Huna, the hypnotherapist, they want direct contact with the GE; from their viewpoint, the thetan is only in the way. In auditing, however, the thetan is expected to stay in the session and be part of the process. It is he himself who has to look at the pictures, resolve them and take responsibility for having contributed to a non-optimum physical or emotional condition. Dianetic-style auditing in particular brings thetan and GE in touch with each other. Dianetics works dia nous - through the mind , not through by-passing the mind and opening a direct communication channel between the practitioner and the patient s GE. Ch i therapies, acupuncture and shamanic healing aren t intended to make the patient aware of how he is himself responsible for his troubles. Much as during a Ch i healing process engrams are opened and long-suppressed grief is discharged, the underlying incidents are usually not worked on until all charge is erased and the postulate found (making it likely that the mental masses and psychosomatic illnesses just gone will return one day).

Hubbard considers a high emotional tone level to be the prerequisite for sane interaction between thetans, between thetans and demon entities, thetans and GEs. It is a basic tenet in scientology and dianetics that the chronic position of a person on the emotional tone scale allows precise predictions regarding that person s future sanity and health. Therefore Hubbard defines auditing ( processing ) thus: Anything which raises a person s (emotional) tone can be considered legitimate processing. Processing achieves permanent rises in tone. 2 A healer doesn t address so much the thetan but the body (or the GE, to be precise); an auditor in contrast addresses the thetan yet doesn t do anything for him or his body but rather aids the auditee to do something for himself. Seen this way, shamanic techniques wouldn t be considered processing in the definition of Hubbard - a conclusion which in no way should belittle the achievements of shamans, healers and hypnotherapists. Their results validate their work just as an auditor s results validates his. It all depends on one s purpose - the healer wants to heal a suffering person as fast as he can; the auditor wants the thetan to recognize his role in the interplay between himself and telepathic messages from other thetans, demon entities and the GE and eventually raise his responsibility to a point where he becomes independent of doctors, priests, psychologists, shamans, healers - and auditors, too! ON ENERGY TRANSFORMATION AND UN-CREATION The Caucasian mystic Gurdjieff (1873-1949) defined the purpose of mysticism as transforming energy and thus gaining relevant insights and powers28. His definition seems widely applicable - witness those Tibetan monks lifting stones with their music, those occultists and shamans evoking nature s elemental spirits , those yogis mastering the heat of glowing coal, the cold of Himalayan winters and (by levitating) the laws of gravity. As soon as one mentions occult energy transformations one is automatically into the subject of siddhis - spiritual powers. I n the East faquirs and saddhus make a show of their siddhis; usually they are poor people making their living by turning themselves into a circus show. This, however, is not to be mixed up with the siddhis one begins to possess as a natural side effect of one s honest spiritual purification. (A sincere yogi would never show off!) Nevertheless, even without any particular spiritual cleansing one can learn to master certain magic tricks making one appear spiritually advanced. Some examples in Yogananda s Autobiography show how a secret mantra, given to an unworthy individual, can not only evoke considerable magic powers in that individual but as well make him wreak equally serious damage to his environment! For this reason certain mantras are kept confidential and handed from guru to chela (disciple) for generations. Quite apart from such precautions their secret is as well self-contained, because reading them off a piece of paper doesn t make them work - it takes knowing their correct

pronounciation at the right time of day or night and under the proper astrological constellation before they will produce the desired effect29. Yogic education on this rather practical level of performance shares common elements with shamanism; firstly, an initiation where one is supposed to go to heaven to speak with divinities and then go to hell to speak with devils; secondly, healing people and saving them from near-death by wrenching them off the claws of demons; third, walking on fire29. Practically all shaman healing is done through the GE. Once I had the opportunity to watch an African voodoo healer; he held a chicken in front of an ill person, made the demon creating the illness go into the chicken, then killed the chicken and had the dying chicken s GE take the person s demon with him. This is engram healing affected through establishing resonance between two GEs. ( Voodoo , by the way, means spirit .) Hypnosis works directly from hypnotist to GE, Bach blossom healing, homeopathy, you name it - they are all based on energy transformation. Even channeling , the modern-day equivalent of the old time trance medium contacting the dead, works that way; even there the Genetic Entity is used! It serves as a sounding board to the telepathic impulses from some entity or thetan, its voice circuits permit the message not only to be worded but even pronounced with mannerisms typical of the defunct beloved - whilst the medium s thetan is gone, left the body, out to lunch, doesn t know a thing when the session is over. Energy transformation again. For all of this - evocation, transformation, levitation, divination, harmonization, necromancy - energies like akasha, prana or ch i are used. They are considered preexisting. They are already there , one uses them as one needs them. Once I had a major argument with a Transcendental Meditation teacher about this; he flatly refused to accept Hubbard s thesis that the thetan, on being restimulated, each time newly recreates his mental image pictures along with their attitudes, emotions, sensations and pains. To him these pictures, once created, become part of the akasha and aren t literally re-created, rather they are plucked off the akasha , as it were. This of course I couldn t accept; the battle went on to a standstill since neither of us could prove his point convincingly. From this I learned that there seems to be a fundamental difference between Hubbard s view of creation and that of some older schools of thought, in that Hubbard does not speak of energy transformation but maintains that the thetan creates mental mest newly each time he puts attention on something, and that he un-creates it immediately afterwards unless the creation is done in a low tone level and based on a bum postulate which of course would make that creation persist. But even though, it can be undone; each auditing session proves this - even to the point of restoring each theta quantum to its rightful owner. This experience (an esoteric experience by all standards) which in a way confirms Hubbard s assumption about the creation and un-creation of mental mest, is highly significant insofar as Hubbard s entire universal un-creation

game is founded on it. Shifting energy from one state to the other is a different game altogether. Knowing this one may understand why Hubbard was on bad terms with the wisdom of the East . Just to remind you of what he said about present time being the result of the thetan responding to the rhythm of the universe - that s just as true as it could be dangerous if one fell for the siddhis that would go along with smoothly tuning in to that rhythm for the sole purpose of showing off. We saw earlier that Hubbard, just as clearly as he advocates undoing and uncreating, warns against becoming one with the universe . Falling in love with energy transformation - because of the powers it gives one - might actually draw the thetan into the mest universe rather than out of it. The following quotation would have to be understood in this context, I believe: India and join Nirvana has given us techniques which are guaranteed to glue a thetan to a body as thought riveted and tied with iron bands. So beware of mysticism and its techniques and yogism. Your hardworking author has been over the jumps and through the hoops of more mysticism than is ever suspected on the ground where mysticism first hit Earth - India, and I can guarantee you that these practices and hopes are a sort of theta trap to keep men in their bodies, in apathy, ill and tied to superstition. 8 Sounds a bit harsh perhaps, but there might be some truth to it, too. It might be a good idea to go back to this quotation and reevaluate it after having gone through this book as far as chapter 5.

2.2 Hubbard s Space Opera SCIENCE FICTION * SCIENTIFIC FUNDAMENTALS * SCIENCE VERSUS MYTHOLOGY * THE AXIOMS * THE ELECTROPSYCHOMETER (E-METER) * FACT OR FICTION? * SCIENCE FICTION So far, this book was written on a fairly conservative note; hopefully it didn t contain too much one could disagree with. Demon entities, the Genetic Entity, life force, ghosts, theta quanta, the thetan and his abilities - unscientific as all of this may appear, it has yet been experienced by too many people throughout too many millennia as to be simply brushed off. From chapter 3 on we ll change gear, though, and the book in front of you will turn positively incredible and sufficiently ridiculous as to rightfully deserve being called unscientific . Because what you are going to read sounds pretty much like a blend of The Hitch Hiker s Guide to the Galaxy , the Lensman Series and the film Star Wars , with a bit of Lord of the Rings thrown in. However - what s scientific and what isn t? We ll have to find an answer to this, else we cannot stamp Hubbard to be a mere science fiction writer who fell prey to his own fantasies and turned into a religious guru without being rather rash and supercilious ourselves. Sure enough, Hubbard was a science fiction writer and successfully so; after all he financed his young years and his research that way. He may not have churned out literature but he was a professional in the sense that he made his money by writing. He calls Robert Heinlein his dear friend and between 1940 and 1950, along with Asimov, wrote for the Magazine Astounding Science Fiction 31. Several hundred titles appeared under Hubbard s various pen names. Do Hubbard and his fellow writers suffer from overly developed and slightly bizarre imagination, borderlining the paranoid, or do they draw from a common well? Perhaps they elaborate dull memories of actual events and conveniently put them into the future, memories that are concealed by screens of improbability? Yet just because something is improbable doesn t mean to say that it never occurred in the past or won t ever occur in the future. Improbability is too weak an argument as to call anything merely fictitious or unscientific . Science fiction started with Edgar Allen Poe and Jules Verne around the time of the Industrial Revolution, a time when the environment changed radically and became factory-oriented instead of agricultural, when unheard-of substances were discovered and machines invented that made transport and communication breathtakingly fast - in short, a time likely to restimulate earlier similar times on this planet or others. Astronomy explored outer space, the military invented horrific killing machines, the restimulation caused thereby became more and more ubiquitous and severe - and eventually found its articulation in a new genre of literature, a genre that reached its peak during the 1940s in the golden age of science fiction .

Speaking as an auditor I can say with absolute certainty that any part of a book, any scene in a film that a person remembers well and feels fascinated or horrified by, must have touched a charged area in a past life of that person. When you audit and the auditee, on the question: Is there an earlier similar incident? , comes up with something from times past or other worlds and then says: well, I only read that in a book the other day , you can be sure that below that is a real incident, an incident the auditee (or one of his entities) experienced himself, and that this incident when found and discharged, will cause the disappearance of the auditee s difficulties and a major change in his life. Conclusion: the fact that science fiction has such an enormous audience means that it presses the right buttons in people and evokes their memories - not enough for full recall yet sufficient for them to be either fascinated or horrified. (The reverse is true as well, by the way: a person with no charge on his time track doesn t particularly respond to such buttons. He d know anyway how it really was.) SCIENTIFIC FUNDAMENTALS Let s begin this section with a rather surprising little quotation: Hubbard, as an engineer, has tackled the problem of the mind from the scientific method. Basically, that method is: 1. Gather all available data that is, or appears to be, relevant. 2. From the data, form a hypothesis. 3. On the basis of the hypothesis, make a prediction. 4. Experiment to check the validity of the prediction. 5. Vary the experiments, and collect more data. 6. When the new theory breaks down, take the now collected data and formulate a new hypothesis. 7. Go back to step 3. This is taken from the editor s introduction to the May 1950 issue of the magazine Astounding Science Fiction ; the editor was John W. Campbell. He goes on to say: Most readers of this magazine are fully accustomed to that method; to those who are not, the above described process is not circular; it is spiral. Each turn of the spiral sweeps in more and more territory. It is the turning of precisely such a spiral process that led from Dalton s early atomic hypothesis to Bohr s original theory of atomic structure, to present quantum-mechanical analysis of nuclear forces. It has led to aircraft that fly, automobiles that work, and radio that covers the planet. It is also the logical process that led to the present theories of dianetics. Now there is an interesting thing about a scientific theory; the scientist always rather vaguely hopes the theory he is working with is true, but knows that it does not need to be. A scientific theory is a useful tool; it need not be true so long as it is useful. Dalton s theory implied atoms were hard little balls; it was incorrect, but it advanced chemistry. Therefore it was a good theory. The present theories of dianetics may or may not be true; that s unimportant, provided the techniques described actually work. (. . .) There is one, and only one scientific argument with, for or against any scientific theory: experimental evidence. (. . .) The only scientific method of examination is to have many

scattered workers repeat Hubbard s experiments, using precisely the methods Hubbard specifies, and record results. Campbell s demand, expressed in the last sentence, has actually been complied with a good forty years later. Many scattered workers do repeat Hubbard s experiments, in fact in each auditing session - because it is the auditing session which serves as a testing ground for the truth or untruth of the hypothesis the auditor works on. What hypothesis does the auditor form, why and how? Simple. He wants to solve his auditee s case problem and doesn t do so by sheer trial and error but by analyzing the data given by the auditee, deducting from them a hypothesis, devising a step-by-step session approach (the experiment ) and predicting a certain result for each step. Should a given step not obtain the result predicted, another step has to be devised; if this one doesn t work either, the auditor will have to go back a step and form a new hypothesis on the case. In this he doesn t start from scratch but works from a general theory, from a basis of experiences and agreements regarding certain phenomena and their cause compiled by earlier auditors in other words, he draws from Hubbard s model of the mind, i.e. all the stuff we went through in the first chapter. This model is most concisely expressed in the Axioms of Scientology already quoted here and there21. About the axioms we ll speak in a moment; let s first simplify and summarize what has been said about science so far: science permits prediction. That is it in a nutshell. Anyone observing and gathering phenomena, analyzing them, finding common denominators, rules and laws and on that basis predicting further and perhaps even yet unknown phenomena, is a scientist- Science permits prediction. You couldn t make a cup of coffee if you didn t take for granted that a gas flame heats water, that coffee powder and sugar dissolve in water, that a cup will hold liquids without melting - and only because you consider all these phenomena and the rules and laws pertaining to them can you safely predict that a cup of coffee will be served within the next few minutes. Very strictly speaking, anyone making a cup of coffee is a scientist. A useful and reliable scientific model explains a maximum of phenomena by means of a minimum of hypotheses and theories. A theory is established when from a senior and general hypothesis lesser and more specific hypothesis can be deducted. When a theory has been sufficiently consolidated by observation and experiment, when rules and laws have emerged and when these rules and laws tie in with the rules and laws of other theories, forming one comprehensive whole, we have arrived at a scientific model. The ideal scientific model would be large enough to comprise all phenomena in the macrocosm of astronomy and the microcosm of molecular biology and explain them without contradiction. SCIENCE VERSUS MYTHOLOGY

In one of his essays the famous physicist and astronomer Stephen Hawking agrees that a theory only serves to explain the phenomena we observe, that a good theory explains a large number of phenomena and even predicts yet unknown phenomena; then he adds the intriguing comment that it makes no sense to ask if a particular theory coincides with reality - because one doesn t always know what reality it is supposed to refer to! 32 This means basically that science builds a world of its own by its own observations, agreements on observations, explanations of observations and agreements on explanations - and with a swift and unexpected turn we are right back to Hubbard s Reality is the agreement upon perceptions and data in the physical universe (Dn Ax. 113). Now as it seems that in order to call an activity scientific , all it takes is a) having an all-explaining theoretical model and b) predicting results on its basis, one might well call yoga, meditation, shamanism and indeed scientology, too, scientific! One set of myths (that of western science) is as good as the other (that of the yogi in his cave) as long as within a circumscipt universe results can be predicted and actually obtained. Truth or untruth is wholly beside the point. It may seem peculiar to use the expression myth in context with science - but look at the many things science only assumes or purports to know but in fact has no explanation for! For example the Big Bang , widely proclaimed by the media to mark the beginning of the universe. But not even its date is firmly agreed on - supposedly it happened somewhere in the rather wide time span between 5 and 15 billion years ago (10 to the power of 9) - let alone if it really occurred. Insiders to astronomy have heatedly debated it; for example Sir Fred Hoyle in 1946 suggested an alternative, the Steady State Theory , whereby the cosmos is seen as one huge energy field which every now and then creates out of its particles, new galaxies (akasha again!). And it s existed not for a mere 5 billion years only but for a good thousand billion years ! (They are getting closer to the Hindu idea of cosmic time cycles . . .) There are more examples and one doesn t even have to go far to find them. How come clouds carrying millions of tons of water stay aloft? How come the droplets in them freeze only at minus 40 degrees Celsius and not at the normal freezing point of zero degrees? Where does the water go after the gigantic cloud banks of a cyclone have dissolved? Meteorology doesn t know. Or take the ozone hole: we are made to worry about it by the media, yet all we can safely say about it is that it exists, and we can be sure of that only because meteorology finally have the instruments to observe it. We are told that we caused it in recent years, but actually no one knows how long it has existed. It s been known about since 1934, by the way - did it perhaps exist before that date and nobody was worried because they couldn t observe it? And physics, to give a final example - although they know how to calculate the effects of magnetism and gravity, they don t know what it is. They can t explain it. And so on, and so on. We are dealing with myths, not with hard scientific facts. The suggestions and theories of science are turned into actual facts by engineers

developing technologies, and at a public level, where wandering around knowing you don t really know how anything works is such a drain on havingness, we cheerfully make assumptions and believe what we are told no matter that it may be complete fiction. THE AXIOMS In the past chapters frequent references were made to the axioms of scientology and dianetics. As we happen to be in the science department just now we might as well spend a few paragraphs on the definition of axiom . Axioms are the ground a science stands on. According to the dictionary, they are self-evident truths ; Hubbard says they are self-evident agreements . Both statements amount to the same thing in that we are dealing with phenomena that can neither be proved nor denied. They are so basic that one can only say: Yes, this is so without knowing why. Take Axiom 10, for example: The highest purpose in this universe is the creation of an effect. One cannot deny that this is so as one cannot behave otherwise, and yet one cannot explain why. It is impossible to argue about axioms, because if one could one would manage to think on a logical level below them - and then they wouldn t be axioms any longer! Axioms are the bottom level of agreement; all logical deductions, experimental hypothesis and scientific theories are derived from them. This is why they are the ground a science stands on. (Interesting enough, no science but mathematics has axioms. So in terms of scientific workmanship it s quite a feat that Hubbard founded scientology and dianetics on them.) A good axiomatic system has two requirements: 1. they must not contradict each other; 2. they must be complete as well as independent from each other. Complete means that valid statements concerning the subject the axioms refer to, can be derived from them; independent means that each axiom stands for itself and none can be derived from the other. This latter requirement necessarily limits the number of axioms to the bare minimum. If both requirements are met, the resulting axiomatic system is considered aesthetic. (As long as nobody proves that Hubbard s Axioms do not meet these requirements, one would be justified in considering them an aesthetic whole.) THE ELECTROPSYCHOMETER (E-METER) Practically all information on the subject of thetans, entities, Genetic Entities and their various time tracks, gathered in hundreds of thousands of auditing hours, were dug up with the help of Hubbard s magic little box, the electro-psychometer or Emeter. An E-meter is a box with a dial and a needle and some knobs for adjustment. It contains a battery like that of a flashlight. The client holds a pair of ordinary empty food cans, one in each hand, connected to the E-meter by copper leads. A very low-voltage

current runs from the meter through the auditee s body and back to the meter where the circuitry measures minute variations in the current, which show up on the dial. In the 50s this was an absolute novelty (called skin galvanometer or lie-detector ) yet today similar devices are used in New Age style counseling, even in the more off-beat forms of psychotherapy and medical diagnosis. As it plays such a large role in Hubbard s investigations into the mind we mustin the name of science - understand its function so as to properly evaluate the information one may get by means of it. When a button is pushed in the thetan by an environmental restimulator, charge is built up and leads to uncontrollable emotional reactions such as blushing, blanching, giggling or crying. Usually one can detect another s charge by direct observation. Very fine charges, though, do not always show on a person s face or body, and to detect them the auditor needs his E-meter. It works like this: the theta field around the auditee s body, consisting of his own mind, his entities and his GE, is influenced by the emotional condition of the person and therefore fluctuates continually. As soon as the E-meter is switched on, an electromagnetic field builds up. The two fields - that of bodyplus-person and that of the meter - interact; changes in the auditee s emotional field are picked up by the E-meter s field and so register on the needle. (It has nothing to do with one s hands sweating and drying.) The auditor, whilst listening to his client, keeps an eye on the meter, steers the session into highly charged areas and as much as possible keeps it there. Supposing the subject the client wanted to work on was feeling like a fool , the auditor might ask: Recall the earliest time you can when you felt like a fool . Now although the client may not recall anything off hand, the meter may show a read and so the auditor will feel justified in insisting that the auditee should look further. How can the auditor be so sure? Because he knows that the tension between knowing on the one hand and pretending not to know on the other, that is, the tension between a games postulate and its counter-postulate (GPM), produces sufficient emotional energy to register on the meter. If he d let the auditee off the hook after the meter read, he wouldn t do him a favor at all, because he d accept the auditee s pretense not to know instead of rehabilitating what he really does know. The needle and the controls on the meter provide a lot of valuable information about the auditee and his case. A read on the needle means: On this question, answers are available. (In that it resembles the pendulum or the dowser s rod.) The TA knob , indicating the auditee s resistance against what he is about to discover, tells the auditor how far the auditee is off the mark. (The higher the resistance, the further the auditee is off the mark.) With the sensitivity knob the auditor can set the meter to read coarse or fine mental vibrations as needed. As correct interpretation of the E-meter s responses to the auditor s questions as well as the auditee s answers permits the auditor to keep his auditee right on the main line of his thoughts, emotions and pictures, traumatic incidents can be found and erased much faster with an E-meter than without. Metered auditing is therefore much more

efficient than non-metered auditing. (This of course depends on the skill of the auditor. The meter is not a must, but it helps a lot.) FACT OR FICTION? With all the swiftness and directness of approach the E-meter offers and with all the corresponding relief the auditee feels afterwards, one nagging question remains: is it true what the auditee said? In his sessions he spoke of past lives, of extraterrestrial civilizations engaged in galaxy-wide space battles - fair enough, it seemed to help him that he could talk about this, but still: is it true? Well , says the experienced auditor, it read on the meter to start with, and when the auditee spoke about it further, he dramatized all sorts of pains and misemotions whilst the meter showed a lot of discharge and in the end the needle floated , indicating that he was in a state of inner harmony regarding the subject - so of course it s true! This certainly is good and practical thinking but unfortunately not scientific. To give an example: someone wants auditing because every time he reads something on political suppression, world conspiracies and Tesla energy devices he feels such pains in his solar plexus that he actually has to drop the book. He is an engineer, has a family; his life looks perfectly fine except that he feels that he never quite does what he ought to be doing. In the session it turns out that his present life is his very first visit to Earth, that he came as a thetan exterior (with no body) from some friendly planet somewhere in this galaxy with a mission to help Earth people with their energy problems, that he got caught by an enemy ship and was implanted to keep him from doing or reading anything that might remind him of his mission. Too painful to continue. After having found this out, the auditee has some huge realizations about his true identity and his political mission; he knows that from now on he can pursue it without any discomfort and actually does so in real life. He joins a scientific society dealing with alternative energy sources, gets active politically, etc. No further pains in the solar plexus. That he feels good and purposeful now - does that make his story true? Well, naturally! , some may say. There was charge on an area, the area was handled to a cognition and a floating needle, the auditee s discomfort has disappeared, he can act in life as he desires, and therefore it is true what he found out in session. Nonsense! , argues the opposing party. All that happened in session is that the auditee created the sort of pictures he considered to be a good explanation for his problems, and if it had to be as farfetched as being a missionaire from outer space - that s fine; as long as it makes him happy. Everybody has a right to his own paranoia. The poor chap just needed someone to listen to him and now that he has got his weird dreams off his chest he feels normal again. Just because he had certain mental image pictures and felt relieved after recounting them doesn t necessarily mean that what he saw is objective truth. The meter reactions are a natural side phenomenon; after all, the auditee

considered his story important. In plain terms: first he fooled himself into bad health then he fooled himself back into good health. From a strictly scientific viewpoint the second argument would have to be favored. The engineer s story doesn t indeed Suffice to prove that there are things like extraterrestrial civilizations. But what can one prove anyway? Can you - without witnesses or documentation - prove that you have lived yesterday? Can you prove that yonder house was your childhood home? Well, I have some photos showing me as a five-year-old in front of that house! You are 55 now - are you trying to tell me that this child on the photo was you? Doesn t look like it at all. Prove it to me! It could be any child! To add yet another angle to the debate, in favor of it s true : speaking from a very common-sense psychological viewpoint, would that engineer really go through ten to fifteen auditing hours, hours of pain, sweat, sickness and hardship, and would he pay good money for this, if he were but suffering from a childhood fantasy left lying about in some dusty corner of his mental attic? Would it not be much closer to human nature to assume that what he dreamed up deliberately he would let go of equally deliberately, with perhaps as much assistance as a good old chat with a friend? It seems hard to imagine that someone would have to go through the labors of an extended session sequence to get rid of something as light as a truly self-made imagination. (Mind you, the E-meter reads on fancy images, too, but cleaning Them up is a matter of minutes. No comparison with the above. And if someone really needed such a contrived grandiose dream to boost his self-confidence, the auditor ought to pay attention not to the actual dream, but to the reason why.) We don t seem to get anywhere with our argument; obviously we need more data to come to a satisfying conclusion. So let s extend our example (it s a true one, actually): a few months after the successful session with the engineer someone else comes in for auditing, an intelligent woman who turns all foggy and robotic the moment she has to do any type of responsible work and so lies way below her actual potential. The session reveals that in her last life she was a scientist (a man) who had made some remarkable discoveries in the field of physics, attracted the attention of certain power groups, refused to cooperate and was eventually killed by the secret service. The general story of that life can be found in any encyclopedia yet the auditee fits in data which couldn't possibly be known to anyone except the scientist involved. Yet the important part happens after her death. As she leaves her body she feels magnetically attracted to a spaceship orbiting Earth, and gets electric shocks every time she acts on a thought of her own. This way she learns that thinking is no good and that following orders like a robot is the survival thing to do. (A thetan identified with his own energy field can indeed be treated with electronics.) Great, one may think, just goes to show how fruitful her imagination is. Doesn t prove anything! The point of the story: in both cases, that of the engineer and the lady, it was the same space ship! Time, place, circumstances and description of the crew were closely

resembling each other. Two coinciding statements made independently! Phew, you could say, that s just telepathy; the second auditee somehow picked up the story of the first one and turned it into something else, or perhaps the auditor who is a science fiction buff telepathically inspired both stories. Obviously, not a true word. But the lady had her problems all her life! Would she find relief by telepathically picking up somebody s weird story and turning it into something private? Apart from the fact that using telepathy as an explanation isn t particularly scientific either. Now what about this example, an entirely different one: on March 19, 1992, a solo-auditing session was done because of headaches and tremendous difficulties in concentration. A Russian space ship was spotted, it had frequency generators aboard which would muffle one s wakefulness. The auditor handled the disturbance caused in his personal energy field (GE plus own theta field) and telepathically told the spaceship crew that they shouldn t continue causing such effects. His headaches disappeared. Later, after the session, the auditor heard on the radio that a Russian/German space shuttle had been on its way to the Russian space station Mir. So was it true what the auditor found or wasn t it? Reminding ourselves of the fundamentals of science outlined above observations leading to theories, rules and laws, and these again to explanations and predictions - we must conclude the following: if a sufficient number of people, in their sessions, make a sufficient amount of comparable observations regarding certain phenomena, if common denominators can be found, hypothesis be formed and tested out with other auditees in future sessions, and if this procedure makes people feel better one by one, then we are talking about a scientific procedure. Whether the type of universe extrapolated from the information yielded by this procedure is fact or fiction ... Well, who is to say? After all, reality is what we agree on. In this spirit, chapters 3 to 6 will have to be understood. Hubbard s account of galactic confederations and interstellar wars was consistently confirmed and added to since 1968 by thousands of solo-auditors who never met each other. The restimulating materials revealed to them (called the Operating Thetan Levels ) didn t always fall on grounds well-prepared by plenty of space-age literature since many of these people were not science fiction fans. So they certainly didn t invent their personal variations to Hubbard s theme for their own creative enjoyment or to do Hubbard a favor, no, they simply found them. Their amassed experience is recounted in the next chapter, entitled The Xenu Myth . Why myth ? Well, because certain features typical of humanity were never satisfactorily explained by traditional religions, psychologies and sociologies. And a myth, after all, explains things. Says the dictionary: Myth applies particularly to a story connected with the religion or beliefs of a primitive civilization. Myths are told about gods or superhuman beings and are invented to explain beliefs or rituals or something in nature. The point is not whether there is academic truth behind Hubbard s Xenu myth or not, but rather that people respond deeply to its imagery and improve in strength and well being after having come to terms with it in their solosessions.

And even if the following chapters were only a collective invention it would at least give one hell of an explanation for the religions and beliefs of the primitive civilization of this planet!

CHAPTER 3 The Xenu Myth 3.1 A Global Catastrophe WARNING TO THE READER * A GALACTIC POWER COUP * BATTLEFIELD EARTH * A PLACE OF EVIL * ON BTs AND CLUSTERS Some old scientologist who started in scientology in the 1970s, 1960s or even before and grew up within the secrecy-mindedness of the Church of Scientology, may think it overly risky and daring, if not irresponsible, to reveal hitherto strictly guarded confidential data in an open-to-all pocket book. But there are a number of reasons which seem to make it alright to do so at this particular stage of the game, the main one being that the incidents which will be described, and their perpetrators, have been worked on so thoroughly by so many auditors over several decades that their restimulation potential has been exhausted considerably. This is proven by the fact that in 1968, when the following materials were released to the public, people showed extremely strong reactions when exposed to them - for some solo auditors it took years to audit out their charge - whereas nowadays their effect is comparatively weak. So there seems to be no harm involved in presenting these hitherto confidential data to the public. Please feel free to reject any or all of this, to see it as allegory or science fiction, as the raving of a madman or a cunning scheme to con money out of the gullible. As Hubbard kept emphasizing: Only what you have observed yourself is true for you . Someone may argue that putting it all out in the open would make people copy the esoteric contents of the Xenu myth and make solo-auditing a shallow experience. Against this one may hold that reading about an esoteric truth isn't quite the same as experiencing it oneself and understanding it. Those who aren't ready for the pertinent experiences won't have them - even after reading whole libraries about them. In a way, this serves as a self-protecting mechanism which keeps the mind from getting damaged. However, just to make sure, take this warning: Warning: Anyone reading on beyond this point does so at their own risk! Should you take the risk despite this warning and feel any discomfort, nausea or sleeplessness at any point, this is what you can do: 1 . Take vitamin C, E, B 1, calcium and magnesium in large doses. This serves to fortify the body's energy field and keeps the energy impulses produced by awakened entities from affecting the Genetic Entity (which would result in sleeplessness and nervousness).

It is possible to use tranquilizers or beer to get on top of the effects, but this is not recommended as it only submerges them. 2. Do physical work, complete physical cycles of action, keep your attention extroverted. Do not go into the contents of the pictures you may see. Don't act against them either; acknowledge their existence, but keep your attention outwards. 3. Use the Reader's Restimulation Remedy in the appendix or find an auditor and get the restimulation handled in a session. A GALACTIC POWER COUP The following quotations are taken from the so-called OT III materials ; so they are solo-auditing instructions pertaining to the Operating Thetan Course, Level III. They were handwritten by Hubbard in a rather sketchy way on the 28th of October 1968: The implant is calculated to kill (by pneumonia etc.) anyone who attempts to solve it. This liability has been dispensed with by my tech development. (...) In December 67 I knew somebody had to take the plunge. I did it and emerged very knocked out but alive. Probably the only one to do so in 75 000 000 years. I have all the data now but only that given here is needful. Other useful sources of information on the OT III implants are tape 10 of the Class VIII Auditor Course of October 1968 and Hubbard's film script Revolt in the Stars of the mid-70's where he does not treat the subject confidentially at all, quite the contrary! Loads of gruesome details are revealed. (When referred to, these materials will be abbreviated OT III , Tape 10 and RITS . All quotations without any further indication of their source are OT III .) The first page of the OT III materials starts with the memorable words: The head of the Galactic Confederation (76 planets around larger stars visible from here) (formed 95,000,000 years ago; (very space opera) solved overpopulation (250 billion or so per planet -178 billion average) by mass implanting. (. . .) His name was Xenu. He used renegades. Now let's look this over bit by bit and comment on it. A Galactic Confederation is mentioned. According to RITS, its 76 planets belong to 21 stars: Sirius, Canopus, Alpha Centauri, Vega, Capella, Arcturus, Rigel, Procyon, Achernar, Beta Centauri, Altair, Betelgeuse, Acrux, Aldebaran, Pollux, Spica, Antares, Formalhaut, Deneb, Regulus and Sol (our sun). The distances are considerable: for Rigel and Deneb, the systems furthest away from Earth, it's 500 light-years. Closest to Earth are Alpha Centauri with 4.3 light-years and Sirius with 8.5 light-years The rest is somewhere in between. Yet distance didn't seem to be an obstacle. According to Tape 10 it took nine weeks to cover the 400 light-years from Polaris to Earth. The galaxy we are in is roughly 10.000 light-years thick and 100.000 light-years across. Our next-door neighbor is Andromeda, a galaxy 2.7 million light-years away. As we learned above, the Galactic Confederation was formed 95 million years ago, i.e. 20

million years before the catastrophe, and lasted through various modifications until today. Incidentally, the names of these stars are strikingly identical to those one finds listed in astronomy books under The 21 brightest stars in the Northern Hemisphere . Did Hubbard just copy them off from somewhere because he expected the potential watcher of Revolt in the Stars to be familiar with them? Are the real stars of the Galactic Confederation perhaps different ones? After all, this datum is taken from a film script, not from the actual OT III materials. But never mind, this won't change any of the events that are about to be narrated. Too many auditors found evidence for them as to worry about the actual star names - particularly as the names revealed by entities do not correspond to any Earth language and are often hard to make out. What did those 76 planets look like? Some like Earth today, some a bit different, but all in all they would have appeared quite familiar by today's standards. A civilization like in the 1950s, says Hubbard on Tape 10. People had bodies, houses, cars, jobs, wives, husbands, children, telephones, television, and of course interstellar space flight based on space-energy and controlled gravitation. Earth itself was considered sensationally beautiful and pleasant - tropical plants could be found even north of today's Arctic circle. There were dinosaurs and other spectacular creatures. Small wonder that this planet was a tourist resort and attracted people from all over the galaxy to spend their holidays here. The local population was predominantly white, like today's Europeans; other races were represented, too, mainly by tourists. Are 178 billion people average possible? Well, if you were granting each person - man, woman and child - 25 square meters living space, 25 sq.m. working space and 25 sq.m. recreational space (that's 75 sq.m. per person), and if you were constructing a building according to these specifications so as to accommodate the 6 billion people who live on this planet currently, it would cover 450 thousand square kilometers. That's about the size of Spain. All the 6 billion people currently on this planet could live in Spain on one floor. If you built the building in the style of a condominium three floors high, it would cover 150 thousand sq.km, the area of England (without Scotland and Wales). If you built it nine floors high, it would cover a mere 50 thousand sq.km, the size of Holland, Denmark or Switzerland. So all the people currently living on this planet could be accommodated in an area the size of Switzerland and have the rest of the planet for agricultural purposes and as a nature resort. Of course this would demand advanced solutions regarding energy supply and transport, solutions not based on carbon-based fuel or atomic fission, but that shouldn't worry anyone. Since Nicola Tesla the necessary inventions have been made; all one would have to do is take them out of the security lockers of oil and electricity magnates and actually use them. And food certainly wouldn't be a problem either, if one reformed today's wasteful feeding habits (with agriculture already efficient enough to throw part of the harvest away so as to keep the prices up).

Now on Tape 10 Hubbard mentions up to 250 billion people populating Earth. That's a good 40 times more than the current 6 billion! A three-story condominium according to our specifications would comfortably cover an area the size of Australia; a nine-story one could be easily put up within the boundaries of Mexico. If you built 90floor skyscraper condominiums - why, you could accommodate all of the 250 billion in Italy! Still a lot of space left to grow food on and take one's holidays in. And there's is no reason why such buildings should look ugly or be inhuman . For those who on hearing these figures start suffering from claustrophobia: in this scheme the population density per square kilometer would be about 4000 - less than that of Frankfurt or New York including their surrounding areas. Please note that the population density of Monaco is 20,000 per sq.km. And nobody runs away from Monaco! So 4000 seems quite tolerable, really. The above scheme is by no means utopic. Between 1930 and 1950 the architect, engineer and inventor Buckminster Fuller de signed 12-floor buildings that could be flown to their location by helicopter floating cities shaped like Egyptian pyramids holding one million people each, and even spherical air-borne cities who were to be kept aloft by sunlight alone33. In the light of this, Xenu's claim of solving overpopulation was mere pretense, a superficial cover-up for the crime to ensue. Xenu, as we shall see when more is revealed about him, had something else in mind than just kindly reducing the population of his 76 planets. He had an ice-cold, unfeeling greed for total control. He caused people to be brought to Teegeeack (Earth) and put an H-bomb on the principal volcanoes (. . .). Certainly a very humanitarian means to reduce overpopulation ! One would immediately assume that these volcanoes didn't exist then. Too long ago. But they did! A geological map showing Earth 75 million years ago doesn't look all too different from today 22. The continental drift is too slow as to create a major change even during such a large time span. Then as now, the same geological plates were working against each other. The volcanoes weren't in exactly the same places, but they were there - Mount Rainier, Mount Hood, Mount Shasta, San Georgino, Kilimanjaro, Krakatowa, Mount Washington, the volcanoes of Hawaii, Japan, Indonesia, the Philippines, the Himalayas, the Andes. Imagine H-bombs to be dropped into their craters! Anyone having witnessed the outbreak of Mount St.Helens in California in 1980 can imagine what the world would look like after that. Regarding the date of the incident, 75 million years ago geologists have discovered a layer of rock containing Iridium, a metal which can't be found in this particular distribution elsewhere on the planet, and called it the Alvarez layer . It is said to have formed 63 million years ago, the time when the dinosaurs disappeared. One doesn't know what happened exactly but there is an agreement that it was something catastrophic. Neither does one know how long it took - some speak of a few thousand years, others of a few days22. Even the exact date is doubtful! Despite modern dating equipment, measuring errors of ten million-years are to be expected when it comes to magnitudes like 60 or 70 million years ago, as one geologist told me.

Well, someone might say, how come no human bones were found? They found dinosaur skeletons, but no human ones - that proves it that no men were around then, doesn't it! Fair enough, but the question is asked the wrong way. Human bones have been found, plenty of them, but dating them - that's the difficulty! For dating, anthropologists generally use the radioactive carbon isotope C 14 contained in bones. But as one needs a good 2 kg of bone to do a proper measurement and most bone samples don't exceed 300 g, and as the error rate for dates older than, 10,000 years is 80% (!), the reliability of this method is exceedingly questionable. Control experiments testing the validity of radiometric dating techniques verify this concern. A single sample of organic material, such as a specific layer of wood from a single tree-ring layer, when submitted to the same laboratory as different samples, is often given widely different dates, off by as much as 500 to 3000 years. Again we are not talking about truth or untruth but about how correct the tools of science are34. So why shouldn't it have been Xenu's bombing that created the Alvarez layer and made dinosaurs as well as men disappear? After all, the date of 75 million years ago was found because E-meters reacted to the charge of people regarding that date, and one might rightfully ask where that charge came from if nothing had happened at that time. Xenu used renegades, we heard. You could buy them with promises of money, drugs and sex. Renegades to what? To the constitution of the Confederation, in use for some millions of years already. A special task force wearing dark blue uniforms watched over it; Hubbard refers to them as officers loyal to the people . This constitution stipulated that a Supreme Ruler was to be elected by the Loyal Officers. They were Xenu's main enemy in his attempt to usurp this democratic system and turn it into a dictatorship with himself as supreme dictator rather than Supreme Ruler. He placed secret agents in high political positions who undermined the power of the Loyal Officers and weakened the Constitution- The system had become degraded by identity cards, credit records, fingerprints, passports and income tax - all unconstitutional! Consequently, there was a rise in insolvency, poverty, prostitution and criminality, unheard of before. In Tape 10 Hubbard makes it a strong point that today's insolvency, poverty, prostitution and criminality are nothing but a dramatization, a compulsive repetition of the situation back then. (Earth, by the way, was the least affected by this. Other planets were worse off.) The growing unrest and rebelliousness amongst Loyal Officers, artists, intellectuals and the population in general became a problem. Xenu had to act fast, because he was at the point of being un-elected. His coup was to happen in three phases. Phase one: the slaughter of every Loyal Officer in the Confederation. Phase two: the destruction of the main defense base on every planet. Phase three: the abduction of minorities and unwanted elements to Teegeeack and their extermination. Billions of thetans were taken to Earth and its volcanoes H-bombed. Still, Xenu didn't make it to supreme dictator: Loyal Officers (to the people) captured him after 6 years of battle and put him in an electronic mountain trap where he still is. They are gone. The place (Confederation) has since been a desert. The length and brutality of it all was such that this Confederation never recovered.

An electronic trap is a device which pins a thetan (i.e. the energy field he created and identifies with) to a fixed place by electronic means. This was done to Xenu. However, it is debatable that he is still there . He might have gotten out. There is evidence for as well as against it. One, a dialogue quoted from RITS: Newscaster: How long will the power last (...)? Electrician: About seventy-four million years, I think, possibly more. Long enough. Against that speaks Tape 10 where Hubbard mentions an eternal battery . Two, a conversation between Hubbard and Robertson, a close staff member, around 1968 which Robertson told me about in 1985. Hubbard wondered if he should make it part of the OT III materials that Xenu had actually escaped and was active again or if that wouldn't be a bit too much for people. OT III was considered dangerous enough anyway; it had to be done with a doctor at standby as one was afraid people might die through over-restimulation! So, according to Robertson, Hubbard decided to cushion the message a bit and wrote that Xenu was still in his trap. On the other hand, Otto Roos, like Robertson an old-time associate of Hubbard, says that Hubbard personally showed him a mountain on Madeira within which Xenu was supposed to be held captive. In view of the third piece of evidence, a philosophical consideration, both might actually be true. You can certainly lock a thetan up by trapping his field electronically, but there is nothing to keep this thetan (if he's powerful enough) from re-constituting himself in the course of time, because after all, being the source of his theta quanta he could create a second field at will and rejoin the game. The trapped part of course would remain trapped - his own attention literally held in place by electronic devices. So you could always get at him through that trapped part. The fourth bit of evidence is that Xenu was actually audited telepathically by Robertson and his associates between 1986 and 1988 and at that time, he seemed very active indeed; one didn't seem to audit only a locked-up portion of him (more in chapter 6). Was the Confederation indeed a desert since? Personally, I found no session evidence by any solo-auditor to support this. Earth is no desert (except spiritually) and what I hear (in auditing) from recent arrivals from some other of the 21 stars of the former Confederation, makes it seem that their home planets aren't that badly off either. After all they are advanced enough to come over and help us out, something we couldn't say of ourselves. BATTLEFIELD EARTH The H-bombing incident is generally referred to as Incident Two or ' Inc.2 . There is a much earlier one, too, called Incident One (Inc.1); it will be spoken about later. For now we'll just look at Incident Two and use Hubbard's 2nd Note of 28 Oct 68 to do so. This incident is over 36 days long. (That's the actual implant done on Earth.) Capture on other planets was weeks or months before the implant. Those on Teegeeack

(Earth) were just blown up except for Loyal Officers who were (shortly before the explosion on Earth) rounded up. Now how can you implant someone after his body has been torn to shreds in an atomic explosion? And before that, who was captured, taken to Earth and implanted? Bodies or thetans? The answer to both questions is: thetans . You can implant a thetan even when he has no body. He has an energy field, and that's what you can pin him down with and then force pictures and concepts on him by electronic means or by using theta energy. And regarding transport- one can ship plenty more thetans per space flight than bodies. We'll come to that in a moment. First, though, we have to take a closer look at what an implant is. 1. a painful and forceful means of overwhelming a being with artificial purpose or false concepts in a malicious attempt to control and suppress him. 2. an electronic means of overwhelming the thetan with a significance. 3. an unwilling and unknowing receipt of a thought. An intentional installation of fixed ideas, contra survival to the thetan. 1 The mechanics of this have been covered in the chapter 1. They are the same as in forming a ridge. The thetan (no matter if with or without body) is exposed to an effect he cannot have, such as electronic vibrations, electric shocks or physical pain, perhaps whilst he is drugged or hypnotized. Sentences are beamed at him, spoken or played off to him. He is shown pictures or receives concepts (postulates) through electronic transmitter beams. He pushes energy against this to defend himself; this acts like a wax plate and the information streaming in on him is stenciled in it. His theta quanta defense shield does the opposite to protecting him: it serves to record the incident for all times. As well he makes a succumb postulate which keeps the whole thing in place and makes it becoming re-created everytime he thinks of that postulate. Perhaps he receives some foreign postulates during the implant and a false date for it, too, as a precaution against nosy auditors finding out about it. And he gets a forgetter-command, just to make sure: I cannot remember this. I forget! Forget! Forget! If done properly this sticks for good. The thetan now has an information package consisting of self-created energy, foreign postulates and pictures and on top a self-made postulate to seal it all up and make it inaccessible. From now on one can rely on this thetan not to go near any games which might remind him of any part of this information. Too painful! Which is precisely what the implanter had in mind achieving. Here is the complete sequence of Inc.2: 1. Capture (being shot). 2. Freezing. 3. Transport to Teegeeack (sometimes via a relay point). 4. Being placed near a volcano. 5. Hydrogen bomb dropped in or on the volcano. Explosion. Terrific winds. Thetan carried over peak. Electronic ribbon came up. He stuck to it. It was then pulled down and he was (as part of a group) implanted with R6. ( R6 is Hubbard's technical name for this implant.) 6. Beginning implant (. . .). 7. Various picture sequences. 8. The 7's and CC & OT 11 materials. (More technical names of implants.) 9. 36 days of picture implants which give a vast array of materials and 3 (false) explanations for the bombing. 10. Transport to Hawaii or Las Palmas for packing up into clusters.

The pictures contain God, the Devil, Angels, Space Opera, Theaters, helicopters, a constant spinning, a spinning dancer, trains and various scenes very like modern England. You name it, it's in this implant. We call it in it's entirety 'R6' Let's break the Inc. 2 sequence down to individual steps. (Unless mentioned otherwise, the data are taken from Tape 10 and padded with solo-auditor reports.) Re 1: The capture consisted of selective and later of mass killings, done by bombing, machine gunning, poisoning. Blast weapons on the basis of electronic beams and lasers were used, no gunpowder. The strength of the impact and its suddenness where usually such that it happened to dozens and hundreds of people at the same time. Billions and billions were killed on various planets; they were all taken to Earth. Re 2: In order to transport them, they had to be frozen. Not the dead bodies as such but the thetans escaping from the dead bodies. How do you freeze a thetan? You spray the area with a mixture of frozen alcohol and glycol. Very cold! So cold that it paralyzes all electronic-type vibration near it - for example a thetan's energy field. Especially when he does his utmost to defend himself with his theta energy! The more he ridges the easier he is to spot and capture. In the end, you had blocks of ice with thousands of thetans stuck to them. Re 3: These were transported to Teegeeack. The space craft had cooling chambers. Given their huge payload capacity and the large number of thetans one could freeze into an ice block, not many flights per planet were necessary. Flight duration to Teegeeack was several weeks only. The space ships actually looked like DC-8s without propellers (an example of today's civilization copying the incident). The relay point mentioned was Coltus, a planet of a political system near the North Star and not part of the Galactic Confederation. Xenu had his personal outpost there. Perhaps this is where he received his atom bombs from. It took nine weeks from Coltus to Teegeeack. Loyal Officers captured on other planets were taken to Coltus alive, implanted there (with body) in the style of brainwashing, i.e. there were turned around ideologically, sent back to their home planets and made to send their own troops against the people or worked for renegade troops whilst wearing their original Loyal Officer uniforms. This made it look to the population as if the Loyal Officers were behind the blood bath, which of course added to the confusion. Re 4: Thetans were ferried in by the billions and billions and billions. Space craft came in and dropped their load of iceblocks near the principal volcanoes of Earth. This didn't always go smoothly. Some were dropped in the sea or in the wrong place. Many mistakes occurred. The renegades were good at shedding blood but bad on discipline. When the entity of one bomber pilot was audited who had been so drunk during his flight that he crash landed his craft against the side of the volcano and of course was bombed and implanted along with everybody else. (Prior to auditing the actual incident a drug handling had to be done, to relieve his fogginess.)

100

Re 5: The bomb was dropped; it exploded, ripped the volcano open, and the combined force of bomb and volcano eruption created up draught winds of such force that the thetans were whirled about and carried over the peaks. The ice blocks had of course melted already. To make sure that nobody would be blown off the planet and get away, an electronic ribbon had already been installed. In Tape 10 it's called a standing wave above the volcano. It looked like an umbrella. Thetans were whirled up and stuck to it. Around each volcano, funnels formed and down these funnels the thetans would run from umbrella to ground level like condensed steam off a window pane. This is how they got channeled down. Re 6 and 7: Now they were packed up and moved along inside some sort of pipeline or tunnel equipped with projector machines all around it. They were exposed to sound and color pictures. The implant started about three days after the bombing. Re 8: The 7's and CC & OT II materials are implant packages named after the auditing actions Hubbard devised to crack them. Re 9: The key implant lasted 36 days. It was done as a super colossal, threedimensional motion picture containing everything which in this civilization on Earth, is dear to our hearts: a white-haired and bearded god, devils, hellfire, archangels like Gabriel or Michael, religious symbols, archbishops complete with crosiers and all the pompousness of Roman Catholicism, a cross with a man hanging from it, the type of theaters still in use today with spectators' boxes left and right from the stage, sexual torture done in leather costumes with whips and chains, perversions such as sex with children, war pictures with crashing helicopters (dramatized in Vietnam), space ships, skyscrapers, in fact the whole architecture of Manhattan and other modern banking and business centers, the whole of Hollywood complete with motion pictures, writers, forever glorious film star types like Marilyn Monroe or Clark Gable, psychiatrists doing their electric shocking (a truly piquant picture is that of a crucified psychiatrist), surgeons senselessly dissecting bodies down to the bones - and to top it all, exploding bombs are shown. In addition to the actual bomb explosions on the volcanoes, pictures of bomb explosions are shown, just to make sure that some day somebody will have the good idea of blowing the whole planet up once again. The more we progress , the more we are copying the type of civilization implanted during the 36 days. Planetary suicide is programmed therewith. Re 10: After the implant a large number of thetans from each volcano were boxed up, taken to Las Palmas (Canary Islands) and Hawaii and packed together; some packages were shot into space, others dropped into the depth of the ocean. The remaining thetans were left to drift about the planet - always inside the electronic ribbon, of course. A PLACE OF EVIL

101

Let's take a breather at this point and look the situation over. Earth was wiped out. Clouds of dust and smoke, black skies, severely dropped temperatures, radiation. Nuclear winter. No life. At least no life on the surface of the planet. Sea life probably wasn't quite as severely affected since water is an excellent radiation protector. Only a few meters of surface water would protect ocean life quite well. Of course clean waters might have gradually become diluted with contaminated waters but to what extent and with what implications for sea life is a question left to be answered by a marine biologist and a radiation expert. Perhaps the Loch Ness monster is older than we all think (if there really is one). Irrespective of what happened under the sea, Teegeeack became very badly reputed after Incident 2. It came to be known as an evil place. It was cut off politically. Nobody wanted to have to do with it. Mutineers, deserters and criminals were occasionally dumped here. (The British Empire used Australia for the same purpose, obviously a dramatization.) Some space pirates voluntarily took cover here - they knew nobody was going to come after them! Not only in biological but as well in spiritual terms, a gigantic catastrophe had occurred. Hubbard rightfully refers to it as the 4th dynamic engram . Usually one would refer to the 4th dynamic as all mankind . Here, however, the populations of 76 planets were involved- 76 4th dynamics! Billions and billions of thetans were brought here and were implanted. They are still here. Hubbard calls them Body Thetans or BTs because they are thetans who cling to bodies in swarms. Bodies are a stable datum for them and a very much soughtafter item indeed. Usually one doesn't notice them. One unknowingly identifies with the pictures and postulates of Body Thetans, which cling to one whilst one walks about on Earth. As they all had the same incident they believe they are one , and you, not noticing them, believe you are one with them. This may lead to tremendous restimulations and dramatizations on a personal as well as cultural level. The majority of Earth population, 250 billion, was killed as a consequence of nuclear winter setting in. Even after death there was no escape because of the electronic ribbons. They as well are still here They are not Body Thetans but simply thetans in search of a body as a chance to incarnate. (After all, there were 250 billion people on Earth back then, today only six.) ON BTs AND CLUSTERS Let's see how a Body Thetan (BT) was formed. At the Capture on of the 76 planets, and even before they were murdered, thetans attempted to defend themselves

102

against the horror scenario by pushing energy against the incident. They formed ridges. Then their bodies were killed and they left them. A moment later, at the Freezing, not only these ridges but as well the complete theta fields of thetans and GEs stuck to ice blocks and were transported away. These lumps of theta quanta arriving on Teegeeack, are called BTs. A Body Thetan therefore is not a live thetan but just a ridge disconnected from his its maker (the thetan proper) and containing all information about the identity of the original thetan. A thetan, to remind you, consists of a set of postulates and on their basis creates mental energies and masses, his vibrational field. He is alive to the extent that he can do this. Due to the* overwhelmedness did the thetans involved in Incident 2 not immediately recreate their vibrational fields after they had been stripped off them. Some did this after a certain time had passed, others stand paralyzed up to this day. In either case a BT would be but an entity, if a very complex and potent one. In contrast, a thetan whose body perished on Earth during the catastrophe is not an entity but a real thetan - a rather weak and discouraged one, though. The owner of a BT, after recovering from his shock (which may take a long time!) might re-create an energy field anew. His ridge, however (the BT), would remain here on Earth as it would be kept energized by the GPM formed during the incident. So the owner-thetan might take a body and start a new life up on his home planet - but he surely would have a lot of compulsive attention on Earth! After all, a large packet of his attention units is held captive here. They cannot be retrieved unless this faraway thetan looks at and duplicates the whole incident. Due to the implanting this is made very difficult. And even if he tried, it might act back on him telepathically and make him dramatize the implant on his home planet. A perfect galaxy-wide spiritual contamination ! Clusters are BTs grouped around a shared picture. They all have the same incident. One Cluster for example consisted of a whole school class plus their teacher; their bodies were destroyed simultaneously the instant a bomb exploded in the school house. BTs in a Cluster believe that they all had the same incident at the same time and in the same place - which obviously isn't true as they didn't all die within the same split second and each of them had a different location in space when it happened. As soon as each of the BTs forming a Cluster recognizes that he had his own position in space and time, the Cluster will fall apart. A person with BTs and Clusters on him will unknowingly identify with them, that is they think they are him and he thinks he is them. Clusters are dramatized in a tendency of people to stick together in groups, to go with the crowd, to share opinions unthinkingly, and in the enjoyment of being one like during rock festivals or football world cups. BTs and Clusters strongly react to violence and in turn, when restimulated into action, cause violent behavior; this is why people when exposed to atom bomb explosions on TV will experience peculiar body sensations and an inexplicable fascination, or why they will go crazy at catastrophe alarms in closed areas and

103

stampede each other to death. They are easily overwhelmed. They may actually fear crowds (the opposite to the above!). Restimulative incidents as well as new accidents and injuries, cause new Clusters to form or old Clusters to cake up with each other ( cumulative Clusters ). In auditing, one breaks cumulative Clusters by finding each instant of their caking up from late (the present) to early (long ago) along the time track. We saw above that most of Teegeeack's population died of the natural consequences of the disaster. They weren't exploded, they weren't implanted - they simply died because the whole planet had become a dark, cold desert. So the indigenous Teegeeackans didn't become BTs. They were simply very confused, very ridgy thetans with no bodies and nowhere to go, and they stayed that way. They are still here. Yet you, the reader, most likely didn't experience Inc.2 yourself. Supposing you were one of the original Teegeeackans, you would have become so restimulated by these lines that you would have dropped the book long ago (which you didn't). If you had suffered Inc.2 as a foreigner, a non-Teegeeackan abducted to Teegeeack, you'd be a BT (which you can't possibly be). Which permits one to conclude that you have come only recently to this planet, at the most a few thousand years ago. Many others did, too, from either side - some to help in re-civilizing the place, some to police it and keep it suppressed. This vast amount of BTs, confused Teegeeack-thetans and newcomers would explain the queues for new bodies. World population keeps growing and there is still such a shortage of bodies that thetans fight over them. Strong thetans, usually newcomers, will manage to get good bodies in well-to-do families; Teegeeackans who suffered the incident but weren't implanted, make it up to ordinary citizens with absolutely no spiritual ambitions; BT's, the worst grade, wind up running bodies at the bottom of society; quite often many BTs and Clusters will share one body and command him about which leads to some very irrational behavior, particularly in places where violence, criminality, drugs and pornography abound. Scarcely any free theta but full dramatization of Inc.2.

104

3.2 Of Gods and Angels INCIDENT ONE * IMAGINARY UNIVERSES * A MAGICAL MULTI-MEDIA SHOW * THE END OF SINGLENESS * THE BEGINNING OF TIME * GAMES PREPARATIONS * TRAPPING ATTENTION * XENU RECRUITS HIS TEAM * THE GAME TAKES OFF * A NETWORK TO CONTROL ALL INCIDENT ONE Xenu s activities date a lot further back than a mere 75 million years. Then, with himself as Supreme Controller, he only repeated the attempt to make a very old intention of his come true the intention to control all thetans, to be their one and only master, their god. Bizarre as this may sound we will eventually see that he got surprisingly far with this plan. His first very definite impact within the framework of this universe - a universe defined by theta quanta games - he made eons ago when he staged Incident One. The handwritten OT III script says this about it: Incident 1 occurred about 4 Quadrillion years ago + or -. It is very much earlier than Inc. 2 which occurred only 75 000 000 years ago ( a bit less). Incident 2 is only peculiar and general on this planet and nearby stars, whereas Incident I is to be found on all thetans. To be found on all thetans - quite a statement! It ought to be modified, though, to all thetans who were here at the time . Only those who were in this universe at that time received it. Those who entered this universe later did not receive it but became contaminated with it. It s part of the agreement of being here. Inc.1 is the basic unknown agreement concerning the universe we live in, its prerequisite and its fundament. To clarify the time span: 4 quadrillion, that s a 4 followed by fifteen zeroes. Compared to 75 million, it means going back a huge span of time. Supposing one million years were one millimeters 75 million would be 7,5 centimeters. And on the same scale, 4 quadrillion would be four thousand kilometers. 7,5 cm in relation to 4.000 km! That s the length of your index finger compared to a bee line between Lisbon and Moscow. Here is the sequence of Incident 1: Occurs at Start of Track. Loud snaps. Waves of light. Chariot comes out, turns right and left. Cherub comes out. Blows horn, comes close. Shattering series of snaps. Cherub fades back (retreats). Blackness dumped on thetan. These two quotations are pretty much all Hubbard ever said about Incident 1. It was considered super-restimulative and therefore given highest security ratings. In Tape 10 it was merely mentioned but not discussed. To get details we have to rely on the reports of solo-auditors. Their data form the background material to the following text.

105

106

IMAGINARY UNIVERSES Incident 1 occurs at start of track . To explain why this incident marks the beginning of the time track, we ll have to look first at everyday life 4 quadrillion years ago and then at the actual occurrence of Inc.1 itself. There were no bodies then, no organic life, no planets and no physical universe. There were thetans and theta creations, and that s all there was. Thetans looked like invisible or perhaps slightly colored energy fields. They weren t entirely amorphous but had, depending on their wishes, definite shapes. Some actually made their fields look like human bodies. Back at the beginning of time, everyone s mental images and creations would have been noticed by everyone around. Nothing was real in the sense of today s mest universe solidity. Yet an imagined table was to the thetans then, with their superior theta perceptions , as real, visible and tangible as a wooden table would be to you. Any mental image picture was visible to everyone. Thetans would individually create three-dimensional light objects and play with them. Or they would co-create things. Everything consisted of conglomerations of theta quanta. One thetan would create something, show it to another who would add to the creation or change it and they would play with it. Finally they would get bored, drop their toy and go away. Whole universes were dreamed up that way, gigantic and complex games cycles, and as well everyday things such as bodies and plants and houses. Thetans played real life in the same way as children do today - all make-believe with no consequences. Much of what was dreamed up then came true as our history, our life today and our future, too. In the course of time, things became more and more solid- the way they are now. As we know from chapter 1, there is only one way to take a creation apart for good (to un-mock it): restoring the individual theta quanta to their rightful owners. Anything else is but a transformation of energy into other forms or states. But one didn t always bother to unmock the things one had created, and so they stayed and became more solid. To give an example: imagine theta quanta to be little colored plastic building blocks. Supposing ten children each had differently colored blocks and were building a toy house, with each of them adding his blocks to this co-creation. When they get fed up with their game, they leave the creation and go elsewhere. The house is left standing. Any attempt to undo this co-creation, like burying it, burning it, crushing it to powder or dumping it, wouldn t work. Only when each of the ten creators feel accountable for their individual building blocks, take them back and make them vanish, would the creation disappear. They have mocked those blocks (theta quanta) up, now in order to end the cycle of action - they would have to un-mock them. But usually they

107

didn t. Why? Because the more thetans play with a creation, the more theta quanta are added to it and the more tedious it becomes to take the thing apart again. So instead of un-mocking creations it was much less trouble if one dumped them. No shortage of space, after all. And no shortage of theta quanta, either, since all you have to do to get them is create them. A thetan, as we saw, is an energy-space production unit . There is no scarcity unless he considers it so. If he doesn t, there is unlimited supply. This wide-spread irresponsibility was to lead to a lot of trouble. Yet without Incident 1 it wouldn t have become as bad as it did. Inc.1 plays a key role. A MAGICAL MULTI-MEDIA SHOW Above we have sketched the general picture: unending space with thetans busily playing their games and usually having a lot of fun. Then, roughly 4 quadrillion years ago, word spread that Xenu had prepared a marvelous super-gigantic multi-media show. Absolutely smashing! One had to have seen it. All about angels, as usual ( Don t we know old Xenu ), but really worth attending. A must. So you went there. It looked like a huge circus-tent floating in space. (Circus tents are indeed a dramatization of this.) As you came closer, frequency detectors picked up your personal energy pattern and played music to you that harmonized perfectly with the vibrational fabric you consisted of. An aesthetic experience of sorts! Smiling lackeys ushered you in and you took a seat in the most unbelievable of all possible attractions: an artificial body of impressive and unheard-of solidity! (Today we wouldn t even see it, so transparent it was. As if made of glass. But to thetans then it was as solid as a shop window dummy would be to us.) The function of this astral doll body was very important in that it gave you a definite location. Lacking that, the things to come wouldn t have been possible. The show went off as described in the introductory quotation: first loud cracks or snaps shocking everybody, then lovely waves of light, then a three-dimensional light chariot with a mighty angel on it holding a trumpet and blowing it as he drew nearer. All very novel and exciting. Then a second, shattering series of snaps, more shocking than the first one. Then the cherub faded back and all went black. This imagery is familiar to us because it was dramatized since. Look at Roman chariot races, at high priests and god-kings standing tall in their white garb; look at renaissance paintings and baroque churches - they contain enough chariots and trumpeting angels to do another Incident 1 with. But where is the implant? The show seems fairly soft, doesn t it; so where is the bad part? The truth of the matter is, they didn t even know it was an implant. In fact

108

some thetans queued up for a second and third treat and afterwards told their friends about it. Such a good show! Really shocked you all the way through. Very impressive! THE END OF SINGLENESS The implant part of the show is cleverly hidden indeed. It occurred during the snaps . Imagine yourself sitting in a movie theater just before the movie starts. Your attention isn t focused anywhere in particular. Suddenly there is a loud snap, like of a gun. You d turn around to see where it came from, wouldn t you? Then, as the show starts, you concentrate on the screen and become absorbed by what you see - and suddenly another series of snaps! Panic and confusion break out. And the lights don t go on! All black. This is what happened during the snaps: theta quanta were stuck to the thetans in their doll bodies. To compare this with the movie theater example - it s like someone in the middle of all this confusion would stick a piece of chewing gum to your coat. You wouldn t notice. You might not even notice afterwards, if the piece were small enough, and nobody else would, either. Of course you would take your coat off eventually and be free of the blemish, but - and here is the catch - thetans can t take their coats off. They are their theta fields or theta bodies . The chewing gum had become stuck to them, it had become embedded in their very vibratory fabric. It consisted of theta quanta. Prefabricated lumps of theta quanta were shot at the thetans during the snaps, at thetans who had taken the position of a doll body for the duration of the implant show and therefore had a definite and known location. (That thetans took their viewpoint inside a foreign-made body at this occasion instead of using some other shape or form serving the same purpose, is extremely significant as it eventually led to the condition of today where one walks about inside a solid flesh body and doesn t usually get out except at body death.) At the end of Incident 1 there was blackness. It wasn t literally dumped on the thetans, although it felt like it. The sensation of blackness stemmed from total withdrawal, from trying to evade the shocking snaps. If you pulled in your attention units from all around, there would be but blackness. THE BEGINNING OF TIME Let us return to the enigmatic sentence right at the beginning of this chapter: that Inc. 1 happened at start of track . Before Inc. 1 there were individual cycles of action. There was no common time because there was no common reference point. Time, after all, can only be measured with regard to a reference point, because time implies change. And change can only be perceived if you can observe two points in relation to one another. Observing one single point only gives the impression of no time .

109

Before Inc. 1 everybody had their own cycles of action, their own changes, their own time cycles. Time was a strictly subjective phenomenon. After Inc.1 time came to be an objective parameter - because everybody had Incident 1. A fundamental change in the relation of thetans to their universes had been created. Before, you could unmock things you had created, if you cared to. You got the whole gang together and said: Let s take this to pieces again! And, with a bit of grumbling perhaps, they did. After Inc.1 this wasn t possible anymore. Because everybody unconsciously had a tiny, foreignmade, hidden creation (the prefabricated theta lumps) sitting on himself. Therefore anything he created, be it alone or together with others, had a foreign ingredient that remained imperceptible. Each thetan unknowingly kept adding something to his creations that wasn t his and therefore couldn t unmock them any more. They would stay! (Unmocking something involves seeing the entirety of it exactly as it is; see Ax. 12, 16.) Likewise it went with space. Before Inc. 1 it had been insular , restricted to the dimensions of the playing field one shared with one s friends, it was private as no other thetans noticed it let alone participated in it, and after the game, this space was simply made to disappear. After Inc.1, this became impossible. Insular spaces, once created, would stay and eventually add up to one great common space - akasha. Things became solid. Mental image pictures, theta creations, visions of universes - they became increasingly solid. The age of the mest-universe, composed of real matter, energy, space and time, had begun. (Should you feel any restimulation you ought to consult the Auditing Notes following the Reader s Restimulation Remedy in the appendix. Their numbers conform with the step-by-step approach of this text; at this point, for example, Auditing Note 1 would apply. The restimulation one feels usually isn t one s own but that of a BT being awakened by this text. It follows that in solo-auditing one doesn t audit oneself but BTs and Clusters the eye-witnesses of the catastrophe.) GAMES PREPARATIONS Sometimes a BT might have suffered even earlier, similar incidents the so-called pre- 1 incidents . Taking Inc. 1 as a common reference point for measuring time, one might say that the pre-1 incidents are before the beginning of time. In the pre-1 incidents, the pre-fabricated lumps of theta quanta mentioned before were designed and tested out. This project was started approximately 17 quadrillion years ago. It was Xenu s idea, of course. (You may wonder how it is possible to assess such time spans. Easy. When you, after a lot of auditing, have gotten used to 4 quadrillion as a reference point, you have no trouble thinking in multiples of 4 quadrillion.) All pre-1 incidents are friendly implants . They don t hurt. They always follow the same pattern: you were shown luminous images of gods, angels, heavenly judges

110

(Xenu just loved these images), and whilst you were absorbed by your impressions, prefabricated bits ( prefabs ) were stuck to you. It s not that you always watched as a spectator what happened on stage, no, you sometimes participated yourself, like in a theater. After all, the imagery and the actors (luminous images) were about as solid as you were yourself! But of course you knew the difference between an animated creation and a real thetan, and you d play along with the imagery and have fun. In one incident, a white-bearded god had the thetan kneel in front of him and touched his head with something like a bishop s crosier, quite in the fashion of a medieval knighting ceremony. At this point the prefab was transferred to the thetan without him knowing. Imagine someone (unknowingly) swearing eternal allegiance to Xenu! Yet it was done. (This is dramatized even today, for example in some of the rituals of Freemasonry.) (See Auditing Note 2.) TRAPPING ATTENTION Now where did Xenu get those prefabs from? Quite simple - by hoovering up theta quanta and putting them in a bag. Thetans, as we saw above, loved to create. They had started doing so much earlier than 17 quadrillion years ago, naturally, long before the first pre- 1 incident. And, to repeat, they were too easy-going as to really make up their minds and un-create what they had put together. Result: loads of dumped creations floating about. All you had to do is hoover them up and use them. This didn t just give you some colorless, neutral energy units no! Because theta quanta are never neutral. They are attention units. They are what a thetan perceives with. As well he can use them to create something. Therefore, in each creation, the attention of its creator is tied up and so, when you have caught someone s attention, you have caught him! The method: you sucked them in, sent them through a few spins and stored them as energy spheres . From this reservoir you could scoop up bits and stick them on thetans. XENU RECRUITS HIS TEAM Back in the beginning days of Xenu s game, long before Inc.1, long before the pre-1 incidents or the hoovering, many thetans genuinely admired Xenu and felt persuaded to follow him. And indeed, at the start of his game, Xenu didn t coerce - he persuaded. Compared to his initial lightness and cunning, Inc.2 was a brutal and bombastic power show. Do not imagine Xenu as a dark power. He was that at the time of Inc.2, yes - yet in the early, early days he was a mighty, brilliant, radiant thetan, endowed with a

111

fabulous ability to envision grandiose games, whole universes of games, and to draw people into them by his sheer charisma. Of all thetans, he was the most fascinating and alluring. A very few only managed to escape his charms His plans may have been dark, but his appearance was as impressive as the Milky Way in the night sky. His recruitment method was exceedingly simple. He just engulfed you with the gentle, irresistible wave of his power, until you felt hypnotized like a rabbit facing a cobra, and then sweetly said: You are just the sort of person I always needed . . . And you would say: What, poor humble me needed by you, mighty magician? And he d reply: Indeed so , and bestow a few of his glittery bits upon you, fine and shimmering like fairy dust, or perhaps a medallion or a hand-signed photo. And you d grab them and hold them close to your thetanish bosom as your most secret treasure, and feel elated. And that was your downfall. By identifying with Xenu s theta quanta (because remember, everything then, be it fairy dust or medallions, was made of this material), by identifying with his theta quanta you voluntarily and by your own decision joined Xenu s game. Identifying with them meant identifying with him! No specially staged incident took place, where someone would slyly stick prefabs on unsuspecting thetans. No, they took them by their own volition! And so a bond between them and him was installed, a bond of theta quanta welded together by postulates. Any thought of Xenu, any intention he wanted executed was transmitted through the telepathic link established by this bond. Xenu s followership was very devote. They wanted this experience, wanted to know what it would feel and turn out like. Why would these bonds last forever? To uncreate some particle you have to see it totally as it was made ( as-is ). But in this instance a) thetans were delighted to own something from Xenu and wouldn t want to destroy it; b) they had no idea it was harmful; c) in order to unmock it they would have had to duplicate not just the appearance of the creation but the creator s viewpoint as well - which means that they would have to have been able to be as powerful as Xenu, and able to completely understand him and his intentions. Quite a tall order! (See Auditing Note 3.) THE GAME TAKES OFF As Xenu s followership grew in number, he designed the project we know already and delegated them to his executives, such as hoovering up dumped creations, such as staging innocent little theater plays, such as finding ways how best to stick a prefab to a thetan. When it all had matured to perfection (which lasted from 17 to 4 quadrillion years ago), he staged Incident 1. It was done in more than one circus tent, by the way, and they were all slightly different from each other, but the show was basically the same. And all thetans in the universe came to get the implant. Why did anyone play along? What made Xenu so exceedingly attractive?

112

Well, not all thetans were equally large and gifted at that stage of their development. Some had left the state of pure static longer ago than others, some had played their games more successfully than others. Some very old ones even drew from the insights and results of past games cycles earlier than static! Because static in its pure form, as pointed out in the philosophical chapters, is but a transitional state. There were old and young thetans, experienced and inexperienced ones, winners and losers. And there were the bored ones, too, those in need of inspiration. They had played within the confines of universes created by themselves and adhered to rules designed by themselves; either they had been alone or with others, but because they had no trouble reading the minds of those others, things had become just too predictable and tedious. There was a thirst for bigger games, for novel ones, a thirst for greater freedoms, barriers and purposes. Xenu offered the game of games: universal control. Control of all thetans. Games rulership. Oneself a cause point, everybody else an effect point. This was sensationally desirable! Because all of Xenu s recruits had had games losses and had gone down at least to boredom on the scale of emotions, and perhaps even down to grief. (Thetans do have emotions! Even the bodiless ones. They have energy fields, and emotions are an energy manifestation.) They had learned by their own experience that staying successfully at cause was difficult and that being effect was hurtful. And they knew that winning was better than losing. They decided to join what seemed to be the winning side. And so Xenu s game gained momentum. (See Auditing Note 4.) A NETWORK TO CONTROL ALL To summarize: to prepare for Incident 1, theta quanta were hoovered up from wherever one could find them, mixed and stored. In the pre-l s and the actual Inc.1 they were re-distributed by clandestinely sticking them on thetans. All of this was planned by Xenu and executed by him and his helpers. It took roughly 13 quadrillion years (from 17 to 4 quadrillions ago). The result of Inc. 1: theta quanta of all thetans sitting on all other thetans. All thetans were unknowingly connected with each other by stolen theta quanta. A gigantic control network had been established. Xenu s very own theta quanta, and not too few of them, were mixed in as well. And he most certainly did not have a prefab sitting on him. He was in the safest possible condition, because he could causatively reach anyone anywhere through his communication lines but couldn t be reached himself (such was his logic). His intentions, his will would from now on, unbeknownst to the thetans involved, penetrate all theta worlds, all minds, all creations.

113

Xenu, the thetan to control all other thetans; Xenu, the Supreme Controller. He had made it. So he thought.

114

3.3 Before Time Began THE AKASHA CHRONICLE * LUCIFER AND HIS DISCIPLES * AN ENERGY PRESERVATION CONFERENCE * GAMES ALTERNATIVES * TWO CONTESTANTS Xenu had misjudged his game because of a fundamental error, a naive error, one might say: he had believed that he could get thetans to play with bits of energy and that way make them forget their power to postulate their own freedom. He had underestimated the importance of the dynamic of thoughts and postulates, the 8th dynamic. He had misjudged the knowingness of thetans, their inborn wisdom and the intensity of their desire to return to the static state. The longer he played his game, the more tension built up between what was (fixated theta) and what should be (static theta) and the more he had to stop, stop, stop. Instead of comfortably leaning back and enjoying his game from the outside, he was drawn in more and more. The controller became the controlled. Towards the end he needed something as heavy and brutal as Inc.2 to keep the game the way he wanted it. How come this downfall? THE AKASHA CHRONICLE Any action, as we know, starts with a thought. Before and beyond a thought is the thinker, the static. Thinking, postulating a game, is the first condition of existence (Ax. 11), and it means falling away from the co-existence of static (Ax. 25). To understand Xenu s game fully, we must begin with Xenu s first postulate, with the thought that made him fall away from the co-existence of static and by which he created his existence and that s a lot earlier than the hoovering incident 17 quadrillion years ago. The story has become known through debriefing theta quanta in auditing sessions. Each theta quantum is an eye witness insofar as they record everything from the moment they are created. Any theta quantum contains two pieces of information: the postulate at the moment of its creation, i.e. the reason it was created, and the creator s emotion at that moment. This information can be read off it. Theta quanta feel invalidated by being misowned and looked at as raw material for thetans games. They want to be unmocked and be free again - static. But for reasons we already know they weren t unmocked, and the longer they existed the more convenient it became to use them for all sorts of purposes - e.g. for storing knowledge in, building communication lines with or adding energy and power to activities. They became the akasha, prana and ch i mentioned in the beginning chapter

115

of this book. In their totality they form the akashic record . Any datum you ever wanted to know about anything anywhere: ask them. They have it on file. Yet they were never happy with that. They are waiting to be called off duty by their creators and be made to vanish. As all theta has the built-in tendency to be static, the moment it is placed somewhere the tension between being a somethingness and wishing to be a nothingness begins. This is the charge registering on the E-meter, the essential charge built into Xenu s game (Ax. 45). LUClFER AND HIS DISCIPLES The concept of using theta quanta came up about 25 quadrillion years ago. Xenu was the first to use energized theta in the form of minute quanta. It was his idea. Theta quanta mean space, communication, light, energy, life - a new games dimension, incomparable to what was known before. Xenu was a lightbringer (Latin: lucifer). His first postulate was: I m here! , and to define what here meant he used dimension points (which are theta quanta). An absolute novelty. Everybody came to see what here looked like. To do so, they needed dimension points, too. All of a sudden they had become part of a game. They found they were here , too. Everybody was suddenly here and now . A shared postulate. What a lovely thing to have in common, they thought. They didn t know it was to be their trap. And of course they didn t ever unmock their theta quanta, because had they done so, they would have had neither space nor existence any more. And as beingness seemed more fun than non-beingness, a game more fun than no game, they left their theta quanta in the game and added to them and added to them and added to them. It was a new experience. You agreed to having solid particles (Fac. 13) and whew! - you had solid particles! It was something you could have. Very pleasant! Having something is so much more pleasant than having nothing. Solid theta quanta are so much more entertaining than just pure thought. Fascinating! It wouldn t have come to a bad end at all had Xenu not started his hoovering and re-distribution project 17 quadrillion years ago. This brought mest - at this stage purely mental - into a turbulent, enharmonic condition; it became disordered, enturbulated 1 and therefore un-dissolvable. Mest as such is a fairly tolerable condition of existence, but enturbulated mest is infinitely worse, because it s next to impossible to unmock. (By comparison, it s hard enough to take an intact watch apart, but it s near impossible to take a watch apart after a truck went over it.)

116

Before the hoovering incidents, mest wasn t durable. It was unstable. It didn t last. A thetan could simply withdraw his attention and the creation would vanish. Not that they did, but they could if they wanted to. No chance to control anything. Enturbulated mest, however, was durable. It lasted. It made control possible. This is what Xenu wanted. Nobody else wanted this, though. So Xenu had to pretend there was a serious situation, a problem, and then find a solution . AN ENERGY PRESERVATION CONFERENCE The mest game had been going on a good 5 quadrillion years, when Xenu, around 20 quadrillion years ago, called a meeting. Elron attended it (Hubbard), and some others. Imagine, Xenu said, if people just kept on creating the way they do, with no-one cleaning up - what would that lead to! A great problem, no doubt. So one had better preserve energy and keep this create-create-create business down a bit. The obvious solution, Xenu said, was to make mest durable. You trap theta quanta, Xenu said, and disengage them from their source, the thetan, by enturbulating them through a spinning motion. You command them to conform to basic geometrical patterns (reminiscent of crystal lattice structures or the geodesic domes of Buckminster Fuller34). They mutually hold each other. They are forced together, can t return to their owners but want to. There is tension. Postulates like we are one , we are all the same , we are different from our owners are implanted in the captured theta quanta. As well: We must help . Thus helping becomes more important that returning. Theta quanta become self-determined , must be independent from their creators, must help them. More tension builds up. In the end you get a self-contained, nearly spherical energy field. Now that energy is self-contained you don t have to keep creating it. Just tap it. Practical, isn t it? It s all done for you now ! These were Xenu s suggestions at his energy preservation conference. Those attending the meeting were puzzled. What was Xenu on about? From the beginning of the mest creation game nobody had minded creating; in fact it was the whole point of the game! Neither did anyone think that creativity was a vice and scarcity a virtue. There was no problem. Xenu knew that there was no problem. Therefore he had to pretend that there was one and convince people of it. And he succeeded. Imagine , he said, if this went on forever! We needed limits, he said, fixed procedures. Look at what I have worked out for you and he presented to the attendees of the conference a model of his EnergyField Production Unit containing the whole cycle described above. As he demonstrated

117

it (hooverspin-field), one stared at it attentively, lost one s theta quanta into it - and he had one. Now one was convinced . His model was an attention trap. As he demonstrated it, it did precisely what he was saying - it trapped the attention (theta quanta) of the attendees. GAMES ALTERNATIVES One alternative to Xenu s mest game, the game preceding it and still running parallel to it, is the beingness game . It s based on being and knowing but doesn t involve viewpoint definition by theta energy interaction. Pure 8th dynamic. This way you fall away from static, too, but not very far. You keep your space a knowingnessspace not a mest-space. You play thought games in the sense of selectively co-being but not co-acting. There are no communication lines . No quanta are used. Every now and then you un-think your thoughts and rejoin static. A gentle undulation. Xenu threw an ego-thought ( I m here! ) into this placid world, noisy and glaring like a rocket against the night sky. A far cry from co-being. Pure Ego! It made you protest. How would anyone dare . . .! One must take up a position against that! To hell with serenity. And down you go. Lost your poise. End of undulation. Stuck in the game. The current games cycle is definitely Xenu s Games Universe . All games within this universe - as they are based on theta quanta - are master-minded by Xenu. Despite the fact that there are alternative Games Universes there seems to have been a need for this one, a need to experience both mental and physical mest. Everybody who joined, wanted to join. One cannot blame this on Xenu. Certainly, with all the implanting he did he made it the toughest game ever played, but those who complain may blame themselves. After all, it offers everybody an opportunity to undergo the experiences they consider necessary to experience - for the sole reason to have experienced them. Well done, Xenu! TWO CONTESTANTS Xenu and Elron both understood the principle of unmocking by means of assigning correct authorship to a quantum (Ax. 29) but used this principle in opposing ways. Whereas Xenu worked towards misownership, condensation, solidification and ultimately total control, Elron championed assigning correct authorship, taking personal responsibility and ultimately attaining total freedom - which means rejoining static. As soon as Elron had joined the game for real (after the conference) he became Xenu s senior games contestant.

118

This contest has not ended yet.

119

CHAPTER 4 Earlier than Atlantis 4.1 Twelve who are Thirteen A THIRD CONTESTANT * GAMES NAMES * THE PHI PROJECT * THE CONVERSION PROGRAM * TlMELESS CONCEPTS * YATRUS At the end of the last chapter we spoke of Xenu and Elron as the two contestants in this mest game. Well, there is a third one. He was well known to all and at the same time remained unheeded. His influence was so subtle that nobody noticed. He used the 8th dynamic, that of postulates, in contrast to Xenu who used the 7th dynamic, that of mental mest. This way both controlled their areas of influence on the lower five dynamics. Perhaps Xenu never realized how much his own game was modified by the 8th dynamic, by the concepts of others mingling with his own - particularly those of the third contestant in this game. His name is Yatrus. Apart from Elron, Yatrus is one other thetan Xenu couldn t control. Not that Yatrus, like Elron, would play towards freedom certainly not! He played a suppressive game of his own within that of Xenu; it still runs. In the attempt to come to terms with Yatrus, Xenu staged two further large-scale implants after Inc.1. Of one, Inc.2, we have heard already, and roughly in the middle of that vast terra incognito of 4 quadrillion years between Inc. 1 and Inc.2, there is yet another one. Yatrus and this third implant, the Middle Implant , are the subject of this chapter. A THIRD CONTESTANT Before the actual beginning of the mest quanta game, about 25 quadrillion years ago, there was something one might term the conceptualizing game . Theta quanta didn t play a role yet. One flashed concepts at each other, or rather, one was these concepts. It felt like sitting in a hot-air balloon and floating through an electric storm blackness above, blackness below, blackness all around, no orientation points, no shapes, no forms, but an incessant fireworks of lightning s flashing from all corners at once. A game of concepts, of what one could Be and Do and Have without anyone actually becoming serious about it and making it real . This is what Xenu did by introducing theta quanta. He made it have consequences; he made it real. A postulate, a concept, a thought - they are by nature unlimited in space. They do not contain energy, matter or time. They come as fast as they go (Ax. 11). And so, at the time we speak about, nothing lasted - but still, there were agreements and

120

disagreements about concepts, there were concept originators and concept followers. In a word, there were thought vectors - thoughts going in certain directions. When Xenu originated and demonstrated his theta quanta concept, others voiced their opinions and comments. This way thought vectors were established. One was: Those that aren t as skilled in this game as others should have the opportunity to be taught. Let it be a fair game. Another: Whatever you do with your quanta, whatever you create - just make sure it s aesthetic ! Elron s was: Above all, keep order! And that of Yatrus: See how far you can go with it. Yatrus postulate seems innocent enough, but it s in fact so cunning that one might argue that Xenu s game was actually run by Yatrus and not by Xenu himself. To start with, see how far you can go with it contains the idea of unchecked expansion, of everybody expanding uncoordinatedly and eventually against each other; unlimited egotism and utter irresponsibility are implied. Well, I just wanted to see how far I could go with it and as nobody stopped me . . . - you see? No own responsibility. Egotism unlimited. Most tricky of all is the following: the more someone takes a game to its limits and perhaps perverts it, the more someone strains a relationship and humiliates his partner, in a word, the more someone puts his own ideas in action without considering the effect it may have on others - the more he fulfills the postulate of Yatrus. Believing in doing his own thing he actually does his thing: His own ideas are modified by Yatrus games concept. Xenu himself fell for that, with his unlimited and uncoordinated production, solidification and implanting of theta quanta - let s see how far we can go with it. Hubbard, too, by the way! Witness how he went over the top in running his church. game.

Any game, if played on the basis of that particular postulate, is really Yatrus

And so the whole mest creation game went out of hand. Before the mest game, in the beingness game (we spoke about it at the end of the last chapter), one blended in, one undulated between static and beingness, one wasn t important - and now: the more ego the better. See how far you can go with it. End of undulation. GAMES NAMES The end of the last chapter demonstrated how the thetan incarnated as L.Ron Hubbard began to play his part in Xenu s game long before he took his recently deceased Earth body. To avoid confusion, we have already once or twice called that other Hubbard by his games name Elron. Many thetans, at least those who are causatively influencing this game, have games names for their identification. Xenu is one, Elron another, Yatrus a

121

third one. A games name is the vibrational pattern of the thetan s energy field put into sound. Games names are not restricted to the high and mighty only; indeed, quite a few auditors have found theirs, too - usually when they realized their personal games purpose. My games name is elkin . Very useful for pseudonyms. THE PHI PROJECT Back to the narrative. The effects of Yatrus s games postulate were mainly felt after Inc.1, because before, one didn t easily experience the consequences of what one was doing since mest wasn t a problem yet. So let s briefly take stock of the situation after Incident 1, 4 quadrillion years ago: thetans had been implanted with tiny little masses, didn t notice them, carried on playing as if nothing had happened but discovered fairly soon that things appeared a trifle more solid than before and were difficult to un-make. By implanting these tiny little masses which were in fact prefabricated theta lumps, that is, theta quanta stolen from innumerable originators, Xenu had successfully blocked all attempts to undo theta creations. It wasn t any longer possible to uncreate them by a mere decision as one could before. As long as there was a place to dump one s creations one didn t have to worry, really. Quite soon, though, the disorder became both noticeable and embarrassing. It isn t quite that thetans ran out of space at a given point - because space is limitless. The irksome part was rather that they, all-causative and powerful creators, found themselves unable to cause a change in their very own creations. This was against the order of things and cried out for some scheme of action. To really un-create things it would have taken an understanding and the application of the philosophical principles laid down in the Axioms, yet it is doubtful that they were known then, in those days, in the explicit formulation Hubbard gave them. They were known implicitly at best - intuitively, as it were. Given the particularly complex conditions after Inc.1, this was completely inadequate for dissolving things. Instead, the solution found was an aesthetic one - to take those useless and undissolvable creations and give them shape and form. What best to do with all this rubbish? Why, turn it into art! And so the physical universe came to be made. To start with, the physical universe was of course no less flimsy and transparent as the creations it was gradually fabricated from. It wasn t nearly as solid as it is today. Inc.1 furthered solidification, true, but it still took quadrillions of years until the suns, moons and stars appeared which we commonly associate with the word universe . We are going to refer to the creation of the physical universe as the Phi Project . Phi is a Greek letter and Hubbard s convenient abbreviation for physical universe (Dn. Ax. 10). The Phi Project is part of the Conversion Program which we ll hear about in the next chapter. To design the Conversion Program and supervise its execution, the Council of the Twelve was formed. To the Twelve belong some of the thetans who had attended Xenu s energy preservation conference long before Inc.1, and some others. Certain fundamental features of the physical universe governing

122

the interrelation of particles - such as magnetism and gravity - one had actually to postulate; they didn t occur by themselves . A huge mechanism was set up this way, lasting until the present. (It isn t quite clear yet if Elron was a member of the Twelve, an advisor to them or an executive of their plans. He seems to have had all three functions at various times.) The Council still exists, actually. It was never dissolved. Some of its members are physically represented on Earth. The Twelve still have conscious control over their existence both inside and outside the mest universe. They consider themselves pure postulated beingnesses (8th dynamic) who simultaneously - by taking on viewpoints and from there extending and withdrawing theta quanta - operate on the level of mental mest (7th dynamic). The Twelve, as management body of the Conversion Program, would have had to maintain their positions on a postulate level above this game in order to properly supervise it. Yet they didn t. They behaved like board members who show up once a year and spend the rest of the time with their hobbies. Result: no supervision of the Program. The Middle Implant and Incident 2 could only happen because the Twelve were not on post. They weren t interested enough to prevent from above what was going to happen below. THE CONVERSION PROGRAM The Conversion Program consisted of a number of projects which eventually, in a very roundabout way, were to restore all misplaced theta quanta to their rightful owners. Participants in it were, and are, all thetans, collectively called the life static or theta . The life static is engaged in a conquest of the physical Universe. The symbol for the Life Static in use hereafter is the Greek letter Theta. A fundamental operation of theta in surviving is bringing order to the chaos of the physical universe. (Dn. Ax. 1, 7, 8, 9.) To attain such order, the formation of the physical universe as assorted lumps of dead matter wasn t sufficient (the Phi Project of the section before). True enough, the mest universe provided a great playground. It was fun for thetans to go into a mountain, a desert or a waterfall, then withdraw and be outside again; it was exciting to create thunderstorms or avalanches, throw planets out of their course or make them crash against each other - but to attain the ultimate goal of making mest conscious of itself, of being composed of masses of minute theta quanta, and making them return to their individual owners, mest had to be endowed with life, organic life. The project designed for this purpose we are going to refer to as Lambda Project . It appears in Hubbard s work as the Dianetic Axioms , which reflect fundamental agreements pertaining to organic life and to organisms. In the Dianetics Axioms, life is abbreviated by the Greek letter lambda . A life organism is

123

composed of matter and energy in space and time, animated by theta. Symbol: life organisms are going to be referred to by the Greek letter Lambda. Lambda is the intermediate step in the conquest of the physical universe. (Dn. Ax. 11, 15.) The purpose of the whole program in one sentence: Theta, via lambda, effects an evolution of mest. (Dn. Ax. 17.) In short, the idea was to create a playing field (6th dynamic, phi), put life forms on it (5th dynamic, lambda), amongst them humans (4th dynamic), and then have thetans (7th dynamic, theta) use these to convert the chaos of the mest universe back to theta and dissolve it (static). Therefore we will refer to this program as the Conversion Program . Its formula: phi - lambda - theta. The Conversion Program has one very obvious and a second less obvious shortcoming: firstly, it is designed to have too many intermediate steps before the actual result can occur, and secondly it has built into it a tendency to perpetuate itself, because: The effort of lambda is towards survival. (Dn. Ax. 19.) And this is precisely why it didn t work. We are still in the middle of this program. (Plus thetans like Yatrus fiddled with it and made it worse - we ll come to that in a moment.) Understandably, Elron was aghast at the plan; he would have preferred the direct method of each thetan taking care of his own bits and pieces and that way undoing Xenu s trap (and later that of Yatrus). But it wasn t to be. The Conversion Program was put into action. Parallel to it Elron developed his own methods of redirecting theta quanta to their individual sources. Only in 1950, after the Twelve had to realize that the Conversion Program had failed, were these methods officially put to use on Earth. And so, theoretically at least, the conversion of phi and lambda to theta might finally take place - provided that auditing is done voluminously enough, that the number of participants is sufficiently great, that the technology is applied diligently, etc. Many ifs and buts. But perhaps Elron has a chance to succeed this time. Before Inc.1 there were thetan associations of varying duration but with no consequences. One met, played and went. After Inc.1, when everybody was irreversibly connected with everybody else, only a long-term, closely controlled program had a chance to undo this super-complexity. A real product was wanted! Part of the trouble the Twelve were in was that they suffered from a chronic lack of information, didn t overview the game and therefore had no basis for decisions. TIMELESS CONCEPTS None of the fantasies which solidified after Inc.1 and surround us today as household objects were actually thought up after that incident. They had been there before, all of them, but now that they couldn t be undone any longer, they became embarrassingly real. One couldn t simply ignore them and so had to use them somehow. Our world today, with its trees, flowers, animals, houses, gardens, airplanes, factories, men, women and children, our world existed as concepts before Inc. 1, as a world of

124

thought, and it will continue to exist until these concepts have all been played through or are considered unnecessary and dropped. That, and only that, would truly be the end of the need to have a mest universe. The mest universe exists because there was a need, a curiosity, a games desire to express thoughts as shapes and forms. This desire was (and is) shared by all thetans in this game, that s why they joined it. That Xenu cemented it in the end is, despite all its gruesome implications, only one particular feature of this game. Only when the desire to put thought into form has been fully satisfied, will there be no further need for a mest universe, be it made of mental or of physical mest. Nothing you could see when you look around is really new conceptually, it s been there all along. There is no time to thought, therefore all concepts exist at the same time. Yet they are made real only when their time has come - for example in our future. YATRUS The Twelve, in supervising the Conversion Program, had to take something like public opinion into consideration - thetans, proud of their creative ideas, wanted to see them used in the big plan. One imagery in particular had entered the fantasies of the day - that of life forms. Even before Inc. 1 one thought of them, but now that things didn t dissolve any longer, permanent life forms were possible: self-organizing, selflearning automata that could be formed out of dumped theta creations and be powered and programmed by theta energy. The thetan who really pushed this imagery was Yatrus. He managed to convince even Xenu of bodies being a good idea - demonstrated by the fact that glass bodies were used during Inc. l to place thetans in. Even then Yatrus had his unseen hand in the game. He was not a member of the Twelve but gained their trust sufficiently to mislead and betray them and thereby determine the course of the Conversion Program decisively. Yatrus was the thirteenth amongst the twelve , the traitor. Many mythical parables derive from that, mentioned not only in Christianity where Jesus has twelve disciples (makes thirteen) and the thirteenth is a traitor, but as well by Franz Bardon who speaks of a hierarchy of senior spiritual entities, the top echelon being twelve plus one master (makes thirteen), and by Rudolf Steiner who referring to the Vedas says that the fate of the world was determined by twelve Buddas sitting around Vishva Karman, their central master (thirteen again). The Icelandic Edda mentions twelve gods residing in Asgard with Odin, their senior (total thirteen), all of them but manifestations of an almighty All-God (static). Significantly enough, solo-auditors who can recall the Council usually speak of twelve or thirteen, not sure . This is a correct observation insofar as Yatrus was somewhat part of the Twelve but at the same time wasn t.

125

Subterfuges like this are typical of him. In contrast to Xenu, Yatrus always worked from the back of the stage. He never put himself in the limelight, he never went openly in opposition, he never attacked. He didn t implant thetans, he didn t stick theta lumps on thetans to control them. Instead he persuaded them, swamped their thinking with his own thoughts, cunningly twisted their purposes until they absorbed his whilst still thinking they were operating on their own. When he was dealing with thetans, Yatrus used postulates and so operated on the 8th dynamic - one dynamic up from Xenu who used energy and so played on the 7th. (Yatrus did use theta energy, too, but only when it came to implanting Genetic Entities, not thetans. This was a lot later, though.) One of Yatrus most outstanding characteristics is that he had absolutely no qualms about breaking each and every promise he ever made. He starts off with an outwardly friendly and winning approach, thus gaining the trust and agreement of his victim, proceeds to suck the life juice out of him, drops him like an empty shell and considers this perfectly alright- simply because what s good for oneself can t possibly be bad. See how far you can go. Yatrus wouldn t even notice the condition of his victim, but would be genuinely surprised when accused of being reckless and irresponsible. Responsibility was no concept to him. Do what you like was his only law. He pretended love only to get his way. Xenu never even pretended love; he was a clearly visible, out-front enemy who used his catastrophic effects openly and calculatedly. In this respect he was reliable and predictable. Yatrus was neither of the two. Operating on the sly, using persuasion and treachery, he depletes one s havingness - anytime you think you have him by the scruff of his neck, you find your hands empty. Then as now he was difficult to deal with which shows in particular when one attempts to audit him. To reduce their characteristics to two fundamental traits: 1. Xenu played an overt and openly destructive game; Yatrus worked on the sly. 2. Xenu installed secret little control monitors in the space of people to make them do what he wanted; Yatrus perverted the intention to help, inherent in all thetans, so that they would destroy by helping.

126

127

4.2 The Binding of Spirit and Soul ONE PLUS ONE MAKES THREE * NEW TOYS FOR THETANS * SURVIVAL WORRIES * SEXUALITY * PARADISE LOST * CATCH YOURSELF A THETAN * BODY SERVANTS Yatrus goal was the control of lambda, of organic life; he eventually attained it by infiltrating and permeating Genetic Entities (the energy fields governing bodies) and by distorting the information they contained and adding his own. However, at the point on the time track where we have got to now - shortly after Inc. 1, with the Twelve all engaged in the Phi Project and the Lambda Project only slowly coming up - there is no sign of GEs yet. How they were constructed, tested and eventually mistreated by Yatrus is the subject of this chapter. Yatrus used the confusion created by Xenu s Inc.1 to his advantage; quietly and steadily he worked on his private Lambda Scenario within the general Lambda Project. Whatever he did, it had to do with Lamba, with life energy. Some of the steps he undertook will be described now, in the chronological sequence they seem to have occurred in. That no time tags are attached to these incidents is simply due to lack of extensive cross-confirmation. The data you are going to read have only fairly recently been found (see chapter 6.3). And as long as an insufficient number of auditors have confirmed a specific type of incident as occurring within a certain time bracket, one cannot rightfully say that 63.2 billion years ago all snakes were purple and played mandolin . So please regard the following as single frames scattered over a film roll a few hundred miles long, and even these may become interpreted differently as more certainty and data accumulate. ONE PLUS ONE MAKES THREE To start with, Yatrus suggested that thetans get together in pairs, give each other energy and help each other to purify their energies so that they might once again enter the state of godliness they had had before Inc. 1. The Twelve were delighted by this suggestion. Purifying energies was very acceptable to them as it seemed to fall in line perfectly with the Conversion Program. But - Yatrus being Yatrus - there was some trickery involved there. One is that one had to obtain energy from another instead of simply generating it oneself. That way, energy was made to look scarce and therefore valuable; it contributed to thetans believing themselves lesser than energy. The second trick: by making thetans compare themselves with the angelic images they had seen in Xenu s Inc.1 and the pre-1 incidents, Yatrus simply and slyly used Xenu s imagery of gods and angels for his own purposes. And, third trick, by encouraging thetans to get together in pairs to purify each other he put the seed of a new idea into their minds: that of the 2nd dynamic.

128

The 2nd dynamic, in its early stages without bodies and later with bodies (5th dynamic), is Yatrus special field of operation. You and I Forever , We are so Good, Clean and Pure that We shan t Ever Part are postulates found at that early time, an ideology of sweetness and light . Only much later, once bodies were added to this, did lust and sexual desire play a part, too. Twosomeness, love as an exchange of sweet vibrations, bodies, sex - it went in that sequence. Heaven according to Yatrus. In one of the first ploys to promote the idea of a 2nd dynamic, two thetans formed an eternal pact and had it hallowed by Yatrus, their great inspirer and patron, by their taking a shower of light richly saturated with Yatrus theta quanta. Each quantum carried the postulate I Need You! . This way the eternal bond with a cosmic mate had become indispensable for one s survival as a thetan (which is an absolute paradox, but there you go). After taking their shower, thetan A and thetan B made their energy fields ( theta bodies ) overlap so as to form a third field, C, which consisted of the theta quanta of A and B in fairly equal proportions and was granted a life of its own. A 2nd dynamic creation! Naturally, it led to ownership problems and unending quarrels, because one couldn t manage to dissolve it any more and so it stayed in existence. These thetan offspring s were to form the raw material for Yatrus fabrication of GEs a long time later. NEW TOYS FOR THETANS The Twelve were unsuspecting. Responsible thetans, observing what went on, had handed in their reports and notes of concern, but to no avail. Yatrus had pulled the wool over the eyes of the Twelve. They wouldn t listen to anyone else after he had offered his help. About 2.7 quadrillion years ago the Twelve had the first Genetic Entity prototypes built. One used theta quanta as building material. So the dumped creations of pre-Inc. 1 times were put to twofold use: to build both the physical universe and the life units populating it. One collected them in the now traditional way of 1. hoovering them up, 2. imparting information to them whilst spinning them around, 3. storage or immediate use. (Xenu obviously had become a good example !) The information imparted on GEs during the spinning step consisted of two parts: one, to maintain the ideal form and function of a specific body type; two, to make it survive under all circumstances. Immediately after they were released they became fair game to a few entertainment-hungry thetans who engaged in all sorts of rough horseplay with them, threw them about and distorted them with their energy beams, blanketed them with energy sheets, tried to own and run them and generally did everything with them that wasn t part of their program. The lesson the GEs learned during this time was that thetans are bad news for GEs. Mistrust had been established. Soon after, body prototypes were put on the market. They weren t literally clay as Genesis has it, but consisted of condensed yet still transparent theta energy.

129

They had definite shapes - fairly human actually. In contrast, the GEs animating them appeared rather amorphous. Bodies suffered the same fate as GEs. The ruffians and rowdies amongst the thetans thought it so much fun to throw them about, mutilate them, wreck them and see to it that all efforts of the GE to run a body was frustrated - it was ever so entertaining! Modern car engineers running crash tests on dummies have about as much feeling for these dummies as those thetans back then had for real bodies. (Perhaps they are the identical thetans still busy finding out how far you can go with it !) Some thetans did not give any more attention and care to this type of creation than to their pre-Inc.1 theta creations. Whether one was dealing with luminous space structures made purely of mental mest, with GEs or with bodies - they are all made of theta quanta after all, so do with them what you like, why worry! Even today body crashing is considered fun as can be seen in dramatizations like Tom & Jerry cartoons where cat and mouse cause a dozen deaths for each other and still come out unscathed. In a way this reflects the times we are describing here. These were hard times for GEs as one can imagine. In the end, it was they who had to do the repairing. Up to this day this information is available to them through the GE Pool. Never Trust a Thetan , they thought. SURVIVAL WORRIES We have now arrived at about 2.5 quadrillion years ago. The time bracket from 2.5 to 2 quadrillion years ago is decisive for the events to come later, because it is then that Yatrus was asked by the Twelve to took full control of the Lambda Project. (Lambda stands for Life, to remind you.) He knew that GEs were built to be controlled by thetans; all he had to do was to turn the vector around - and make thetans be controlled by GEs ! He hoovered up existing GEs and saturated them with images of plants, landscapes, animals and human bodies. He impressed Mother Nature on them. He never implanted thetans but certainly GEs. Here is how he did it: there is a tube, a tunnel, something like a linear accelerator; GEs are sucked through this tunnel in a spiraling motion at incredibly high speed, they pass through a fine layer of Yatrus theta quanta loaded with pictures and, equally important, postulates like We are All One or Only United We Survive - which naturally served as a stable datum at a moment of maximum confusion. These postulates stuck well. The essential GE idea of Must Survive! backfired in that it rubbed off on thetans, too. Because after all, GEs are made of recycled and mixed-up theta quanta, and, as a result of Inc.1, all thetans were on an automatic and compulsive phone-link with each other. Must Survive! therefore started to permeate all minds. It became the new ideology - something unthought of so far. Why would a thetan, the immortal source of life, worry about survival? Never mind, this is the time when he started to do so. Scarcity was now introduced. Must Survive! implies scarcity as well as a time

130

concept, a future. One had to preserve, protect, be careful and economical. No further creations just for fun . Tightness instead. SEXUALITY Up to this point, there hadn t been any sexuality. Bodies had been ivory-pale, sexless, elf-like. Thetans demanded them faster than they were produced. (Yatrus who had a monopoly on them, kept production at a low rate.) High demand, slow supply what to do? Bright idea, proposed to the Twelve by Yatrus: multiplication through sexual procreation. This made it unnecessary for the Twelve to decide on anything and relieved them no end. No project had been planned for this at all. Up to this point GEs had been something like jelly-fish floating and drifting in lukewarm water. They were homogeneous, as similar as one egg to the next, and very bored. No games with each other, only enforced ones like running bodies in which thetans could have fun . by thetans. Yatrus suggested to them that they should differentiate within themselves and have two poles. That way they would be able to procreate and have offspring s - because Life is only Possible through Duality . With this Yatrus took extreme advantage of a principle Xenu himself had used way back at the beginning of this whole game, when theta quanta were separated from their originators. Even without that, duality is a primal experience for any thetan at the moment he drops out from the co-existence of static. True to his motto, Yatrus just went to see how far one could go with this. He had each GE form two poles, one at either end, and so two chakras appeared: the first and the seventh (crotch and crown). Between them an energy flow occurred, a flow of life force (kundalini), which of course Yatrus graciously provided. Since, Yatrus owns life force. It s his monopoly. Anyone doing chakra meditation and getting the energy manifestations typical of it, has got in contact with Yatrus Lambda Scenario. The easier and therefore more common way, though, to get a kundalini hit is by means of the sex act. One might say that orgasm is a tribute to Yatrus. The GE likes this, of course; to it, sex means life force, expansion, power over thetans. (Note that the two-pole principle is not unknown to biology. The forming of an embryo is not a mechanical process but an electromagnetical one. After the sperm has entered the egg, two poles form on either side of the egg. The electrical charge generated between them provides the power needed to start the force fields needed for cell subdivision and multiplication - the growth process 35.) PARADISE LOST In their sexless state bodies had been fairly transparent (although to thetans they felt as solid as real flesh would feel to us). Yet with the introduction of sexuality the physical angel-like quality of bodies had to be sacrificed. Out of the original standard

131

body , two versions were modeled. (Genesis again: God forming Eve out of Adam s rib.) Bodies grew up and stayed at an optimum age, somewhere between 18 and 25 years old (by today s standards). Their maintenance circuits were tuned to keep them going forever, unless they died by accident. Before the advent of pregnancy and birth, sex was seen as mere fun with no consequences. Any kind of hetero-, homo- and bisexual sex acts in any extreme of variation were thoroughly tested out. No real flesh and bones yet, for sure, but real enough to have experiences and make them stick. The GE began to build its corresponding banks - and thetans did, too. Anything Yatrus would suggest would be stored by both banks, by thetans and GEs. This attitude of sex with no consequences , sexual enjoyment of a body with no unpleasant after-effects such as pregnancy and birth is broadly dramatized in the playboy and playgirl fantasies not only of modern America, a dramatization resulting in abortions and men running away from their pregnant women because we didn t mean that to happen! The new system of sexuality and procreation through children had its disadvantages. Paradise areas where resources such as fruits and nuts abounded naturally and where the climate was pleasant, soon became overpopulated. As the GE/body units expanded towards the edges of such areas, they experienced hunger and had to work in order to exchange with the environment so as to provide food and shelter for the bodies they were responsible for. But as GEs weren t programmed for that. they suddenly needed thetans to manage them! The GEs self-sufficiency was lost. This was a new stage in Yatrus scenario: to make GEs need thetans. It resulted in plenty of accidents and deaths because of the high-risk attitude and carelessness of thetans. But thanks to the new reproduction method (sexuality) there was no shortage of them. They provided nice sensations, and one didn t really need them. So it seemed alright to waste them. CATCH YOURSELF A THETAN The GEs selected nice pretty bodies and attracted strong powerful thetans by signaling willingness to cohabit ; at the same time they withdrew, thus making the thetan be interested and reach for them. The GEs would yield only if sufficient admiration was given. This way, by the thetans throwing admiration particles (theta quanta) all over the body of their choice, a bond was established between thetan, GE and body. (Perhaps we should speak of the GE as she - like in Mother Nature - and of the thetan as he to keep us from getting mixed up in this text.) Thetans at that stage still strongly distinguished between GE and body. Their games were with the GE; the body was only considered a vehicle. As a next step, a control pattern consisting of seven energy modules was stamped into the GE whilst a thetan was riding it. Today, these modules are known as chakras . The stamping

132

was done through the thetan s energy body, from behind. Thetan and GE were now closely tuned to each other, closer than ever before. An interface like that between computer and printer had been installed. This went along with subliminal suggestions like You and I Forever , Never Alone Again , etc. They became hooked up with each other on the basis of mutual must have postulates. Not all thetans and GEs got stamped, but it spread through copying. In brief: the GE attracted a thetan, he blanketed her (wrapped himself around her like a blanket), then the chakra-stamp, then compulsive togetherness. From now on, when a stamped thetan decided to own a GE, the GE in fact owned him. The GEs, of course, loved it: control of thetans, revenge. Yatrus kept whipping up emotions by inciting the GEs to get even , become thetans, too and be greater than them . The GEs fell for his sweet talk until they found out that they had in no way become the masters of thetans but were instead (through the chakras) misused as go-betweens, as the carriers of Yatrus commands to other thetans. Yet they obeyed for fear of getting atomized (Yatrus constant threat to disobedient GEs), that is, to get sucked up, disintegrated, be taken out of the game with no identity - the worst that could happen to any piece of theta, however tiny. The longer thetans were fed Yatrus concepts through the chakras, the more they introverted on the subject of energy. Energy became holy, valuable, it existed in its own right. That one might possibly produce it oneself was out of the question, was sacrilegious; instead one partook of the all-prevalent abundance of life force , drank from it, swam in it - and felt one with creation . Yatrus, the dictator of GEs ( We are but his Slaves ), was now even senior to the thetans themselves. Capable of reaching thetans via their GEs he had come to the same result as Xenu but on a different route. BODY SERVANTS The next step in the plot led up to thetans pitying bodies and culminated in the line: You must help those bodies! This ended the times when smashing bodies was good fun. Playgrounds were established where you smashed bodies according to certain rules and then - this is the game - healed them as fast as you could. A thetan-GE team would be matched against another thetan-GE team. Who is the fastest, who does it the best? The trick was that the thetan had to take the viewpoint of the GE to help her do the healing. When he did so, the concept of oh, that poor body! was flashed to him. After repeated exposure to this thetans came to believe that they had committed an overt act; they got the impression that smashing bodies was a misdeed, began to feel sympathy with bodies and considered them a scarcity which needed preserving well. With this ideology well installed, Yatrus - via the GEs - dominated the game even more. Instead of being their masters, thetans had become servants of bodies.

133

Any quarrel within a thetan/GE team as to how one should heal a certain body, was handled by asking Yatrus personally. When Your Thetan doesn t Listen, Ask Yatrus , was the lesson the GEs learned this way; and they began to accept him as the great healer. He had once again gained their trust. ( Iatr , by the way, means healer in Greek.)

134

4.3 Setting Cosmic Law TWO RIVALS * OLD ABILITIES NEWLY IMPLANTED * HOW TO IMPLANT * CROSSED-OVER PURPOSES * A SECOND SWITCHBOARD * COSMIC LAW * A LESSON IN BASIC GEOMETRY TWO RIVALS The Middle Implant ( Clearing Course implant or CC in Hubbard s terminology) occurred roughly 1.5 quadrillion years ago. By the same comparison we used before (one million years being one millimeter), it would be as far away as 1500 km from where you are whilst reading these lines. It is the first implant ever done on the combination of thetans and GEs and had the effect of sealing the binding of spirit and soul , approximated already by Yatrus devious plans, for all time. After it, exteriorization became harder and harder. Strategically speaking it is the last stage of Yatrus s Lambda Scenario; nevertheless it was Xenu, the master-implanter, who executed it. To the Twelve it was sold as an Educational Project and they granted permission. Before it began, huge lightshows projected images of god against the sky; the public relations pitch made it out to be something secret and religious. (Definitely Xenu s handwriting!) One was supposed to be reminded of things long forgotten, and be let in on deep mystical truths. Yatrus, clad like a bishop and holding a crosier, gave fiery speeches to GEs impressing on them that without thetans they d continue being nobodies forever and that this was their one chance in eternity to be safe and taken care of by strong and responsible thetans. Rumor had it that all GEs and thetans who participated were going to be interconnected through a vast network and Unity was going to be achieved. All were eager to participate! The oftener you had experienced it, the better, but ten times was the limit. And don t jump the queue, please! Space stations from Andromeda appeared in many places to administer this Initiation to Truth and Unity . The implant didn t take long to do. You could service large numbers of thetans within a short time. Implant stations from Andromeda - now that s a sure sign that Xenu was behind it. His stronghold, as auditors found out repeatedly, was always somewhere in the Andromeda nebula. Implanting thetans is typical of Xenu; Yatrus would restrict himself to GEs. Yatrus would coax, persuade and flatter to bend people his way; Xenu liked quick direct action: Just slam some masses on them, and that s that! He wouldn t ever have bothered using GEs for control purposes. That Xenu enters the scene at this point suggests that there must have been some close cooperation between him and Yatrus. Or some great jealousy perhaps? After all, both had come a long way in their control of thetans. Did Xenu want to keep this upstart

135

from growing too big and powerful? Did he wish to keep a hand in on a game he himself had started but which seemed to be usurped by Yatrus? No definite answer can be given, yet some events further in the future do suggest that there was rivalry between the two. Xenu saw it necessary to emphasize his supremacy over Yatrus more than once - but actually didn t stand a chance. Because what remedy is there against a thetan whose only motto is see how far you can go with it ? The harder you try to beat him the more he ll be the winner! As an aside - mythologically, traces of Xenu and Yatrus can be found all over. Xenu, the script writer of a show called One God & His Angels , Xenu, the cold, intellectual Light Bringer reappeared in the cults of Mithras, Lucifer, Apollo, and in the dictatorial One God of the old testament; his counterpart, Yatrus, one finds symbolized as passionate Ahriman, the dark, lustful god of the old Persians, as Baal, as the hairy, cleft-footed Pan of the Greeks, as Dyonysus. The images of both were blended and became the Devil, Satan, or Baphomet, the occultists hellish master of evil demons, depicted as goat-headed, hairy, with female breasts and male genitals, a hermaphrodite. Whether pope or priest, emperor or king - each dramatizes either Xenu or Yatrus or a combination of both. The pair never ceased to inspire artists and writers; they even appear as caricatures like for example Shir Khan (Xenu) and King Louis (Yatrus) in Disney s Jungle Book . OLD ABILITIES NEWLY IMPLANTED How solid their machinery actually was (space ships, implant implements, etc.) is difficult to tell, because looking at things with the perceptiveness people had back then, they appeared just as solid as our world to us - although, were we confronted with the objects of those days at our current level of perception, we might not even notice them. Too transparent for the naked eye. Rolling chambers moved along horizontally and took you through an endless corridor with screens left and right. Then zap - zap - zap, concepts flashed across. (For technicians: it was done on the basis of scalar waves, the man-made equivalent to telepathy.) One peculiar feature of this implant is the re-occurrence of a light - perhaps to restimulate the waves of light of Inc. 1. This is significant insofar as many religious and esoteric cults since indulge in worshipping light phenomena. They believe that light is holy. Those who came out the other end were overawed and hushed and went right around the corner to line up for the next round. They felt like a big brotherhood on the basis of We all Know the Same . Thetans and GEs all knew the same now. The GEs were ever so chuffed about finally being equal. They had been let in on the same secrets as big thetans, they were As Good as a Thetan now - emancipated . Not all GEs looked at the results of the Middle Implant as favorably as that. Some experienced brutality and overwhelm and felt that a thetan had been forced on

136

them and actually into them - into their heads ! It seems that this is the time when the thetan became firmly soldered into the 6th chakra (forehead, third eye ), began to view the world from there and gradually un-learned to exteriorize. The Middle Implant consisted of a number of sections, clearly set off against each other by content and purpose. It is Hubbard s great merit to have found the complete set of implant commands; they cover a good 25 typewritten pages. The commands quite cleverly refer to abilities thetans and GEs had anyway, each in his own way; therefore they sound perfectly innocent, like to be nobody - to be everybody , to be myself - to be others , to do much - to do little , to have all - to have none , to stay back - to stay forward , to be an animal - to be animals , etc. These are basic theta abilities; nobody hearing them as commands would suspect any evil. HOW TO IMPLANT The trick is that implanting an ability, innocent as it may appear, naturally leads to a disability. To give an example of the present: take someone who loves swimming. Beat him unconscious and have a tape play I love swimming all the while. The concept of I love swimming is now associated with pain and unconsciousness. To make double sure you now take the opposing concept, too, strap your victim back down in the chair, beat him unconscious and have the tape play I hate swimming . Now a polarity between two intentions has been established, and both ends of it are associated with pain and unconsciousness. Next time the victim goes swimming he will experience pain and a degree of unconsciousness; even at the thought of swimming he will experience this - and forever after will withdraw from the subject of swimming and live in the Sahara desert. As soon as he thinks of one goal he can t help thinking of the counter-goal; indecision, pain and unconsciousness set in; he feels massy. The problem arising out of two opposing goals creates a mass - so we are dealing with the implanted variety of a Goals Problem Mass or GPM. The Middle Implant was by no means as brutal as the example just given may suggest, since bodies were not mistreated at all. They didn t even play a part in this implant. It was just attended by thetan and GE; two joint energy fields walking hand in hand, as it were. This implant contained no coercion, instead it aroused interest and curiosity; one felt persuaded to participate. The working principle of it wasn t violence but plus-randomity , a Hubbardism meaning that more went on per time unit than one was able to predict. One was hit by unexpected things from unexpected angles at an unexpected rate. This of course made one attempt to either hold on to something that was withdrawing too fast or to hold off something that was intruding too fast. By this intense use of one s attention units, one s theta quanta, one of course created ridges with mental image pictures on them. One duplicated the concepts one was exposed to not merely on a postulate level but additionally by creating a mass at the moment of receiving these concepts.

137

Therefore, at any later time when one had a thought which faintly resembled one of the Middle Implant concepts, one would to some degree re-create the mass originally created during the incident itself - and feel appropriately encumbered, disabled, slowed down, massy. And as the implanted GPMs covered the entire range of concepts a thetan would conceivably concern himself with, it was to have quite an effect. CROSSED-OVER PURPOSES The whole idea of this implant was to make it unpleasant and undesirable for thetans to execute their most basic abilities regarding the control of matter, energy, space, time and theta, i.e. their power to intend and create. Simultaneously the same limitations were set for the GE, because thetan and GE experienced the same implant jointly. Not only did the Middle Implant result in disability for thetan and GE but as well in a crossing over of disabilities and abilities. Some commands - for example to be an animal - would more commonly apply to a GE rather than a thetan, but as both had it now, the thetan would begin wearing the hat of the GE and vice versa. A given situation would be handled by both of them and they would get in each other s way. Through the implant the two became reactively identified with each other in terms of their jobs. Either of them would tend to do the job of the other as well as his own and not even notice. Result: confusion, friction, struggle, indecision. Thetan and GE had become a problem to each other, and the more they would try to resolve it the deeper they would get into it. This of course put them on a downward spiral which took us to where we stand today - most people are firmly soldered into their bodies and the thetan, unaware of himself, follows the dictate of the GE. Yatrus has won. A SECOND SWITCHBOARD At the time of the implant, it was seen to be a grand thing. One was part of a network now ! Thetans and GEs could go different ways after the implant and yet be in communication at any time. Each thetan could be in communication with each other thetan, each GE with each other GE. This was fantastic! One was more now than before. More connections, more power, more games. Before, one was a nobody; now that one could be on everybody s communication lines, one was somebody. Glorious as it might have appeared to them - the facts were rather sobering. Neither did anyone remember that before Inc.1 they could do that sort of communication anyway, nor did the embarrassing circumstance bother anyone that now, after the Middle Implant, one couldn t switch oneself out of the network any longer. It is true that thetans and GEs could use the network as much as they liked - or had to! - but they couldn t get on top of it. The only one able to do that, the only one

138

able to enter commands into the network from outside (via the GEs) and thereby whisper his secret insinuations into everybody s ears simultaneously, was Yatrus. A second switchboard was installed. (With Inc. 1 the first one had been built.) COSMIC LAW Of particular significance is the implant section called Confusion GPM . A sample: Creating to destroy the Now - destroying to create the Now , creating to destroy Time - destroying to create Time . And so on, all the way through the concepts of matter, energy, space, time, life, existence, etc. Dozens of commands. Result: a philosophy of do! - do! - do! Never mind creating or destroying, as long as you do something! How to resolve a problem? Create or destroy! No middle way. Ever since, creation and destruction were felt to be eternally linked. Creation and destruction of mest came to be seen as the basis of life itself - as if one couldn t just create life out of nothing and make it vanish into nothing, standard feats before Incident 1. As a result, phi, lambda and theta formed a closed system - interactive, yes, but with no escape from it. Mest, the GE and thetans were firmly welded up with each other. Matter, energy, space and time came to be seen as pre-existing. Life and death were considered to be based on the polarity between creation and destruction These are the eternal opposites considered cosmic law by some esoteric schools - including not only psychology where it is taught that the mind is the product of matter as well physics where theories on energy preservation and conversion are preached (but where one hears nothing about energy creation and un-creation) and where a Big Bang is believed to be the cause of the cosmos. The thetan, as source of life, has sucessfully been pushed into the background, into obscurity. His creation has gained a life of its own, and he, the creator, has come to feel subservient to the effects he once created himself. A LESSON IN BASIC GEOMETRY Regarding the subject of mest, the Middle Implant has more in store yet. In its last section, called the Objects , one is shown basic geometrical forms, first as twodimensional outlines, then as three-dimensional bodies. First they rush away from one, then they rush in on one. The exposure is extremely brief. As one tended to hold them back before they rushed off (in order to have a better look at them) and hold them off when they moved in (as they seemed to crush one), one made a mental image picture of them twice. Thus an identical patterning for GE and thetan alike concerning certain geometrical principles was created. The Objects were gleaming, bright, luminiferous, powerful, promising, significant, majestic; you wanted to grab them, own them. A deep, unearthly hum

139

accompanied their apparition, the hum of boundless energy. (Perhaps it was then that the Aum, the sound that keeps the universe together , was installed in the mind.) Impressive as they appeared to be, the Objects were actually old stuff; they were based on constructional principles of the times way before Inc. 1, originally demonstrated by Xenu at his Energy Preservation Conference . Not even to the GEs they were news, really. They recognized the Objects as familiar shapes, because after all GEs consisted of theta quanta which originally, before Inc.1, had been part of theta creations. After having been dumped, these creations were hoovered up to be raw materials first for the mest universe and later for the GEs. And that s why GEs, at the sight of the Objects, were reminded of something important. The Objects were home to the GE. They gave them the pleasant recall of having been something special and made them feel closely related to thetans. An inner bond between the two was reestablished through the exposure of the Objects. Once they were agreed upon, the Objects enforced certain constructional principles, expressed for example as Euclidean geometry . One doesn t only find them in architecture and engineering but as well in the basic building plans of rocks and minerals, in the actual phi structure of the universe - indicating again that they date back to pre-l times. They are very old agreements regarding the structure of energy and matter. Lambda, however, does not always correspond to their pattern. Organic tissue, i.e. the stuff the GEs were governing, rarely grows geometrically. They rather align with fractals and the corresponding formulas. Recently mathematicians made it possible to create organic forms on the computer screen. Fractal formulas seem to come very close to the actual GE programs. Perhaps the people who discovered them only rediscovered them! Are they the same people who designed the original GE programs some 2.5 quadrillion years ago? Perhaps. Why I m bringing this up here is that Xenu seems to have wanted to superimpose his own non-organic geometrical principles on the fractal-type programs of the GE. And why? Because Yatrus was getting too powerful. Rivalry again. The Objects had one other important and far-reaching consequence. Two types are shown: first the hollow ones, then the solid ones. In contrast to the luminous and inviting hollow ones the solids are presented as dark and mysterious. They feel threatening. Relief is felt when they go off, menace when they come in. This is how the opposing principles of black and white were laid into the mind which in later times, found their expression as the two varieties of magic. And it was the strife between wizards and black ones which ultimately brought the culture called Atlantis to its fall.

140

4.4 A New Culture YATRUS BIO-LAB * SIGNS OF DECLINE * OUR ATLANTEAN HERITAGE

The conjoining of Thetans, GEs and bodies, cemented by the concepts and pictures of the Middle Implant, manifested itself in a new life pattern, in a new culture which evolved within the trillenia to come. Its specific imagery and style - beautiful bodies. paradisical landscapes, fairy gardens with gnomes and elves, gleaming castles, fair knights in love with equally fair ladies, communication by telepathy, conversing with animals and plants, crystal healing, battles between black and white wizards, energy supplies drawn straight from quartz blocks, etc. - this imagery was not implanted but occurred as a consequence of the implant, making the best of it, as it were. Today this culture is referred to as Atlantis . It wasn t located anywhere on this planet, no - the whole of Earth was Atlantis. It lasted a very long time, possibly until roughly 200 million years ago when a split began to run through its single supercontinent, perhaps due to oversized energy-experimentation s which changed the angle of the Earth s axis. (This is what Franz Bardon reads in the akasha chronicle10.) Considering that even with our mild attempts of today we are doing quite well when it comes to producing man-made earthquakes, one may rightfully assume that they did a lot better back then19! Be this as it may, geologists assume that with this split the continental drift started, and as it widened, the Atlantic Ocean was formed22. Atlantean imagery is so deeply ingrained in the memories of man (and his GE) that it came to be dramatized only recently - a few thousand years ago - in the pyramid cultures surrounding the Atlantic Ocean. Man had just recovered from the nuclear winter of Inc.2 and worked his way up to halfways civilized standards - and what did he do as the first thing if not dramatize his glorious past, the time long before the cataclysm. YATRUS S BIO-LAB Two types of thetans populated Atlantis: those who had gone through the Middle Implant and those who hadn t. (Not all thetans, like in case of Inc.1, had had it.) Those who hadn t were still in great command of their spiritual abilities; they could change the shape of their bodies, create illusions visible by anyone or create objects out of thin air. They were cause over life and cause over mest (a state Hubbard calls Cleared Theta Clear ). At about 750 trillion years ago (half way between the Middle Implant and now), Atlantis seems to have reached its peak. Because its culture was founded on GPMs and because thetans were still very powerful, good and evil in the extreme existed side by side: black and white magic, spiritual healing and horrifying biological experiments, constructive and destructive

141

engineering. In the end Atlantis broke down ethically. The state of Cleared Theta Clear, fairly common in the beginning stages of its culture, was misused for evil purposes and eventually vanished. Earth was the favorite laboratory of Yatrus. Here he experimented with the now filmy amalgamated thetan-GE unit. His attitude was simple: All Thetans are Bodies . He didn t care about thetans at all, his main point of interest was finding out what one could turn a body into and how much one could distort the programs of the GE with the body still functioning. One particular outgrowth of this were man/animal chimeras and other biological and zoological impossibilities. (Look at the sphinx, at Egyptian murals and Aztec relief s and you get the idea.) That thetans - no longer being able to exteriorize - were sometimes locked up inside these abominations, was just part of the fun. Yatrus attempted to expand his Lambda Scenario (i.e. his biological laboratory) across the whole galaxy and further. Andromeda however, our next-door galaxy, was against it; Typical Xenu: he didn t like body experiments. Of course, even there they walked about in bodies, but Xenu didn t want to know of any particular experiments and refinements in true Yatrus style. But just as Yatrus s body concepts couldn t be kept from permeating across into Andromeda, Xenu s implanting concepts found their way to this galaxy, and both took from the other what they considered SIGNS OF DECLINE At a much later stage, around 4 billion years ago, things had become almost as real and solid as we are used to them today. Planets were planets and people were people. Earth was the center of the already corrupt Atlantis culture. Other planets had been expanded to, conquered, given the Atlantean magic, sex and drugs civilization, and were either populated or depopulated by means of biological experiments. Sex, drugs and violence were not an invention of the Incident 2 implanters, no those implant designers drew their inspiration from decaying Atlantis and simply implanted what was around them. There were high beings, paragons of serenity, wisdom and justice, there were sadists of unspeakable brutality, there was erotic sweetness beyond description and harder pornography than any video shop on Earth today would dare to offer. It all went into the 36-day implant of Inc.2. Drugs in fact played a rather large role in Atlantean times, because they were a sure way to undo the enforced tie with ones GE, permitted one to go exterior and made one feel as free and powerful as one was before the Middle Implant. And for the same reason they are used at present. Life had higher highs and lower lows than today but it seems that people didn t take death as seriously as today. Despite the impact of the Middle Implant there was spiritual awareness beyond what s currently imaginable on Earth. And there was abundance: abundance of life, of death, of bodies, of food - and of energy. Free

142

energy in terms of Tesla principles was certainly not a problem then. This is perhaps the most significant difference between Earth before Inc.2 and after. Before, there was abundance of all, of the good and the bad alike; since, there has been scar city. And the longer time goes on, the more scarcity there is, particularly regarding energy. Due to Inc.2 the number of bodies on this planet are construed to be a problem, providing food and housing for them is construed to be a problem, death is construed to be a problem. And energy is construed to be the biggest problem of them all. Some billions of years closer to the present and due to Yatrus s persistent experimentation s, body types had diversified and races had formed. On Earth they were mostly of light Caucasian complexion whereas those of other planets in the galaxy looked different. People increasingly turned away from the white magicians who spoke of forgiving, loving, undoing the bad deeds of one s past, uncreating and dissolving mest, etc. They were considered great bores. The Conversion Program was not fashionable for the simple reason that thetans preferred a good and solid somethingness to a flighty nothingness. And so, at this comparatively late stage of Atlantis, people had degraded themselves to loving black energy masses more than light ones - because black masses were more solid. All that white magicians had in mind was purifying one, and one left them with less than what one started out with; black magicians on the other hand added masses to one; they offered more ! And eventually we find dark temples with black entities lurking in the corners, chorales containing obscenities, black Masses in Catholic style. They didn t use incense, they were high on real dope. And they didn t eat their god figuratively to feel united with him, but for real. They tore up his body, ate his limbs raw and drank his blood. The white wizards stood no chance against such delights. In more recent times, like within the last few hundred million years, no fundamental changes occurred. Interesting with regard to the transports during Inc.2 (thetans in ice blocks) are their fore-runners: space transports where one would deepfreeze bodies or preserve them in alcohol - both of which gave the GE a problem because the bodies were neither dead nor alive, so the GE could neither leave them nor re-animate them. As well one ought to mention the times when centaurs and other chimera dominated Earth and enforced sex on humanoids (with no offspring but again giving a problem to the human GE). Later came the gorilla invaders whose males enforced their sexuality on Earth women with unimaginable brutality. In contrast to the centaurs the gorillas did produce offspring, and perhaps this is the reason why some anthropologists claim that man s ancestors were monkeys or that Africa was the cradle of humanity, and why the film King Kong is an everlasting success. About 90 million years ago huge numbers of GEs were caught by extraterrestrial invaders; they were evacuated, frozen and kept. No evil intentions were connected with this; it was done to preserve life forms specific to Earth when some global catastrophe was threatening. In fact, some of these shelved GEs seem to have been used for repopulation programs after Inc.2. Perhaps Inc.2 was the global catastrophe and someone foresaw it. (What actually occurred couldn t be revealed by the informant , one of the

143

evacuated GEs, because she hadn t been here between 90 and 70 million years ago, i.e. she was brought back here after Inc.2.)

OUR ATLANTEAN HERITAGE Before Incident 2, Earth was a very Yatruscan place; it had a body culture characterized by sex, drugs, biological experimentation and an enjoyment of voluptuous sensuality as well as bloodcurdling cruelty. The machine & military culture so typical for Earth since Inc.2 is definitely a Xenian feature. Let us briefly summarize Atlantis and see what we have inherited from it, what traces of it can be found in modern life. Parallel to the sexual perversions already mentioned, there was a Great Mother cult with moon and fertility rites, female priest hoods and matriarchal political units - all very foreign to Xenu s way of thinking. In our times, druids, witches and shamans still continue this line; small wonder that they were severely suppressed by Xenu s descendants, be they Roman soldiers, Spanish inquisitors or British colonial officers. In a way, traditional as well as modern healing techniques are part of our Atlantean heritage, too. Basically they consist of treatments with heat and cold or by electrical and chemical means and are applied for example in form of hot water bottles, ice bags, electrical stimulation of organs, herbal concoctions or medical drugs. This restimulates the GE and reminds it of old Atlantean experiments, of bodies transported in ice blocks or alcohol, of paralyzing the body by electrical means, of keeping it in a drugged state to allow the thetan to be exterior. These treatments work because the GE springs to attention and builds up strong survival impulses against these heavy engrams. Temporarily, it rises in emotional tone. If the treatment is kept light, the GE will pull the body through, if it is overdone, the GE will be overwhelmed by the restimulation, become apathetic and let the body collapse. In the following chapters we will turn to the more recent history of Earth since Inc.2, see how this planet has become a Golden West to extraterrestrial prospectors and see what defenses have been brought up against this.

144

CHAPTER 5 The Fate of Earth 5.1 Earth since the Cataclysm A BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE WHOLE TRACK * EDUCATION BY IMPLANT * A LOBSTER-POT FOR THETANS * THE DEMON PLANET * MISSIONAIRES OF MANY SHADES * THE MARCABIAN CONFEDERACY * RE-CIVILIZATION PROJECTS * HIGH TECH FOR MR. CAVEMAN * A NET TO CATCH THEM ALL * THETANS ON A LEASH * THE MARCABIAN IMPACT * R6 DECO After having traveled through such vast time spans (25 quadrillions of years) and learning so many bizarre and novel details, we should perhaps review and summarize the major events on this whole track (as Hubbard calls it) before going on and taking a look at the more recent fate of Earth, at the events during the 75 million years that have passed since Inc.2. With that in mind we will briefly look over the historical cultures and civilizations of the last eight to ten thousand years, and then concentrate on the question of to what extent Earth at present is under the sway of extraterrestrial powers. A BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE WHOLE TRACK Before there was a common notion of time, before there were space, energy or matter, at a stage of pure beingness, the idea of playing a game on the basis of theta energy quanta was born by Xenu. To start with, there were no particular disagreements with this concept and so the mest game began to be played. Only when Xenu was seen to play dirty did an opposition built up; it was headed by Elron. This happened in the time span of 25 to 17 quadrillion years ago. The mest game consists of producing theta quanta in order to communicate and create; to do so, one needs a viewpoint. It goes like this: there is a static who by postulate decides to be a player (8th dynamic), takes a viewpoint and extends from it dimension points, anchor points and attention units (all theta quanta) and so creates space, energy and matter on the 7th dynamic. The liability of this mest game is that in the course of time (time does exist now) the static - who is beyond all dynamics - will increasingly tend to identify with his concept of beingness (8th dynamic) and, worse, with the fluffs of energy he produces

145

from his viewpoint (7th dynamic) and begin to consider these assets as himself . He is now what we (in this book) call a thetan a static who partially or wholly forgot about his staticness and exists mainly as mental mest (7th dynamic). At this stage he can easily be pinpointed and identified. Xenu used this to his advantage, recruited thetans for his game and attached Xenu glitter , his very own theta quanta, to his recruits. They in turn embraced this glitter as their one and only treasure, because it made them be like him . The glitter, once mixed with their admiration quanta, made the most fantastic glue of all times and formed an everlasting bond between them and their master. About 17 quadrillions years ago, Xenu and his followers collected abandoned theta creations ( hoovering ), mashed them up by running them through a spin, kept them as self-contained energy spheres, eventually portioned them off and attached them to unaware thetans. After several experimental stages this method was made foolproof and could be used for the benefit of the public at large. A great show was staged and pre-fabricated lumps of theta quanta were attached to the audience. This is Incident 1, 4 quadrillion years ago. Not many noticed what had happened, and if they did, they were mostly incapable of freeing themselves from the louse in their pelt . Soon their ability to uncreate their own creations weakened. Things became more solid. The Council of Twelve was appointed to resolve this situation and decided upon an aesthetic solution - a physical universe with stars and planets (phi, 6th dynamic) populated by life forms (lambda, 5th dynamic). In context with the Conversion Program thetans were to live in and control these life forms, in particular the human form, and slowly restore the intermingled theta quanta of trillions of owners to their creators - basically an auditing process. Elron thought that this was much too roundabout an approach as to be successful. Things were made worse as the Twelve, didn t exert any administrative control. Additionally there were struggles and intrigues amongst the Twelve, caused by Yatrus. Back at the beginning of the mest game, Yatrus had added his own games postulate to that of Xenu ( let s see how far we can go with it ) and ever since played an underhand game within that of Xenu who considered him a rival. Because of the effects of Inc. 1., Yatrus could go very far indeed. He came to be the trusted all-round-man of the Twelve, a position he could gain by his immense ability to persuade and con people. His foul play consisted of instilling his own postulates into the newly created life units (the Genetic Entities). About 1.5 quadrillion years ago, the Middle Implant ( CC for scientologists) was staged. It consisted of implanting native abilities to thetan and GE jointly, of establishing a create-destroy polarity as the only solution to any problem of existence, and of impressing basic geometrical patterns and objects (black and white ones) on the mind of the implantee. During the following trillions of years there was a general coming-to-terms with this new condition, and, thetans being thetans, they made the best of it and at about 750

146

trillion years ago a definite culture had emerged, characterized by images commonly associated with Atlantis. Based on polarity from the start (GPMs), the contradictions within the Atlantean culture and particularly the opposition between white wizards and black magicians were such that Atlantis went downhill on a long sloping trend until, in the final stages, lightness had been replaced by massiness, love by pornography, wizardry by high tech and esoteric teaching by implants. With that, we are down to roughly 200 million years ago. Atlantis slowly sank into oblivion and what emerged on Earth was a normal civilization of usually whiteskinned men, women and children, with cars, planes, trains, spaceships, anti-gravity devices, Tesla gadgets, etc., the sort of stuff described in the science-fiction by Asimov, Heinlein, A.E. Van Vogt and many others. The cities were huge - after all, they had to house some 180 billion people - but not drab and gray. They were colorful, sparkling and clean and looked somewhat like gigantic honeycombs - quite different from today s architectural pattern of large horizontal boxes for housing, skyscrapers for banking and smoky industrial sites in the periphery. A special Earth feature was the combination of high tech with biological beauty, zoological rarities and geographical marvels, a combination so unique that Earth was the tourist planet of the galaxy, the place to see dinosaurs, be seen by them and perhaps even get eaten by them if you weren t careful. This is the setting for Incident 2. EDUCATION BY IMPLANT Why was Earth to be the site for Inc.2? One can only guess about it at this stage as evidence doesn t exactly abound. For one thing it seems that Xenu tried to keep Yatrus activities within certain limits. This shows in many details - to give just one: a Yatruscan space station (a flying psychological laboratory), commissioned by the government of Teegeeack (Earth) to do some research on the improvement of female sexual performance by means of drugs, was once, long before Inc.2, shot down by a Xenu fighter unit. Pure jealousy? Earth was Yatrus s favorite bio lab from the beginning (is this perhaps why Earth abounded with peculiar plants and animals?), it had been the center of the Atlantis civilization and the platform for Yatrus s expansion. So Inc.2 could be interpreted as Xenu s attempt to deal a deathly blow to his competitor. Xenu, representing blackness, military-mindedness, stubbornness and control of thetans and minds, matched against the shady, quicksilvery, ever-smiling and devious Yatrus, the creator and distorter of organic life. A brief review of the actual incident: it went capture - killing hoovering up thetans as well as GEs - attaching them to super cold iceblocks - transport to Earth placing near major volcanoes - H-bomb into volcano - terrific winds whirling the former thetans about (now mere Body Thetans or BTs) and taking them above the peaks - an electronic ribbon keeping them from drifting away. Then they got pulled down and ended up in some sort of tunnel where they received a long implant. Concepts were

147

flashed at them at an incredibly high rate, causing overwhelm and so identification with the implanted materials. Small wonder that some fundamental customs and behavior patterns of planet Earth can only be understood in relation to these implants. They consisted of two parts, if you remember: first, the 7 s and CC & OT II materials ; second, the 36 days. We glossed over that at the first mentioning of Inc.2, because clarifying the term CC took one whole chapter. (We called it Middle Implant .) Now that we properly understand the significance of CC , we may look at the line quoted above in detail. It means that the 7 s , the first section of the CC materials, were followed by the rest of the CC and then by a set of implant commands called OT II . It means that the Inc.2 implants were started off with a repetition of the CC. It means that the contents of the Middle Implant (CC), originally implanted at about 1.5 quadrillion years ago, were given again 75 million years ago. It was done twice. They had kept the reels and tapes in their basement for a long, long time. The first time, the CC was done individually on curious thetans and GEs; the second time on a thetan/GE compound, a disoriented, confused, panic-stricken mass of degraded Body Thetans (BTs) and Clusters. And without a stop it was followed up by the OT II materials . OT means Operating Thetan , a term referring to the activity of the soloauditor in session. He operates as a thetan, not as a body. OT II refers to one soloauditing level in a sequence of three; they are called OT levels I to III . They are done after attaining the ability called Clear . (In 1965 one used to audit the complete Middle Implant on the Clearing Course , the CC, to go Clear , but this isn t always done today as the Middle Implant turned out not be the real reason for people not being Clear. The real reason, as Hubbard says on Tape 10, is Inc.1, yet this wasn t known in 1965.) OT II consists of implant commands comprising 120 typewritten pages and, like the CC, is based on GPMs (Goals Problems Masses, meaning that opposing concepts are implanted). OT II is composed of bits of old implants done variously since the Middle Implant - a rather crazy mixture. It covers a lot of ground with regard to aberrating life but isn t by a long way as existentially fundamental as the Middle Implant. Nevertheless, some parts of it shed such a light on certain agreements typical for Earth that they deserve quoting. (Note that they aren t quoted in the sequence they appear during the actual implant but are grouped according to subject. Some of them are very long, others only brief impressions. This will be indicated.) The figure of a bearded man with a long robe and staff appears in the sky, surveying the universe.

148

Appearance of a huge Being in the sky. 1a. You must survive! lb. You mustn t survive! 2a. You should survive! 2b. You shouldn t survive! (And so on. It goes on for pages.) One implant impresses the actual rainbow colors in combination with a createdestroy polarity: Creating red destruction. Destroying red destruction. Creating redness. Destroying redness. And so on, in the sequence red, blue, green, yellow, violet. These are the colors associated with the chakras. Violet in particular is a sacred color in some religions. Overt GPM: This is a very early implant and contains a mirror which the being is being held in front of It is made to appear as though the being is speaking to himself. The implant operator plays a recording behind the mirror. Then at the end, the mirror is taken away and the hooded implant operator speaks the last part to the being: God will punish you for your sins. Hell is forever: You will receive back what you give out. You have done wrong, you will suffer from it. Then ten electric shocks. The mirror is then waived and the operator speaks: See what you have done to yourself: For every evil act you commit, you will get it back ten times or burn forever in Hell. One might think the concept of karma were implanted here, mightn t one? There are more implants of this kind. In the following one, a mirror arrangement gives one the impression that one is doing something destructive to another: Here is a lesson. It is if you do something to another that is harmful or damages him in any way you get it back a hundred fold without fail. This is your action. You are doing this to a helpless spirit who was good and kind in order to ruin him forever and degrade yourself. Now watch this and see what you are doing to him. Now an electronic explosion occurs, followed by a series of implant commands like: To catch. Never to be caught. Keep it! Keep it! Keep it! To be caught. Never to catch. Copy it! Duplicate it! Picture it! To imprison. Never to be imprisoned. Keep it! Keep it! Keep it! To be imprisoned Never to imprison. Copy it! Duplicate it! Picture it! And so on for 34 commands. Then the mirror arrangement is changed so that one gets the impression that the former victim is doing something to oneself now. The consequences of your having done that are terrible, because you did that. It is now two and a half years later These are the consequences. Watch this and see what happens to you. Because of what you did to the poor fellow he s now giving it back. Watch out. The same explosions and implant commands as above follow, except that one is receiving it this time. You see what happens because of what you do. When you do something bad to another you get it back later: You are the cause of all your suffering. Overt actions do not pay. Wake up dead, forever. Some other implants address mental operations or one s relation to bodies. For example: You must construct a picture machine. You must not construct a picture machine. You must eradicate a picture machine. You must not eradicate a picture machine And so on, seventy commands long. Small wonder taking pictures is a large industry on Earth! A similar one: To build a postulatingness machine. Not to postulate yourself. To build a thinkingness machine. Not to think yourself. This one goes on for 96

149

commands. Afterwards there is virtually nothing that wouldn t be delegated to the circuits of the reactive bank. No thetan left, all bank. Here is one regarding bodies: To love a body. To not love a body. To hate a body. To not hate a body. And so on, for 76 commands, covering pretty much everything good or bad one could do in relation to a body. Next in the Inc.2 implant sequence: the 36 days. As we saw in the chapter 3, the 36 days contained enough violence, pornography, drug abuse and religious symbolism as to well satisfy the needs of this planet for the past 75 million years and for future millions as well. The imagery used was by no means novel. It gave a true picture of what life was like in some parts of the galaxy, particularly in those under the command of Xenu. All one had to do to get a good implant together, was to take a few videos of daily life on Andromeda and reel them off to the implantees of Inc.2. To summarize: the inhabitants of 76 planets - thetans and GEs were forcibly abducted to Teegeeack, and once they had arrived a Xenu-inspired imagery was stamped on them and their GEs. There was no chance escaping the ordeal - neither before, during or after it - because of the electronic ribbon. Hubbard never mentioned the role of the GE in context with Inc. 2 but nevertheless that thetans and GEs were hoovered up, is of utmost importance. Because it means that all sorts of GEs, from 76 different planets, were transported and kept here since! This was to have considerable consequences for the later recivilization of Earth. As soon as life came back to this planet, there were GEs at work, and what would they dramatize if not their time track from the moment they were created originally - and therewith Yatrus s postulates and intentions? And the thetans here what would they dramatize if not all the implants they had received since the beginning of Xenu s game? Out of this, a big agreement on how to live life emerged. The fantasies of both Xenu and Yatrus have been widely dramatized since. Both have won. Hubbard calls this bank agreement agreeing on principles hidden in the reactive mind. It is this that keeps Earth from improving. As well it creates monotony, sameness, uniformity. Take fashion - all around the world one wears suit and tie in political and business life and a standard type uniform in the military. Traditional variations disappear. Take superstition - the worst form of it to be found in the Educated West where people have been conned to believe in a Big Bang as cause of the universe, in bacteria as the reason for diseases, in psychiatric drugs as a cure for the mind, and in life insurance s as a way to take care of life after death. Use a credit card for easy shopping and permit your bank to register where you spend your money. All your personal data are on computer, so you d better be a good

150

citizen. Drive carefully but don t worry about accidents as your friendly policeman can do a full check-up on you via his portable computer anytime. And next time you see your physician for a routine check-up, trust him not to inject a crystal-based monitor into your bloodstream which makes you detectable by satellite anywhere on the planet. Watch your TV, listen to your headphones 20 hours a day and none dare call this electronic population surveillance. The wonder world of your friendly implanter society. We are here to entertain and protect you. From Xenu with love. A LOBSTER-POT FOR THETANS The ribbon , a standing wave according to Tape 10, wasn t limited only to the area above each single volcano. It actually went around the whole planet. One might compare it to a screen or perhaps a net, 26.5 km up. The whirled-up thetans stuck to it. Nobody was to get out, neither then nor later. Imagine Earth to be a green watermelon inside a large children s balloon. Between the surface of the watermelon and the skin of the balloon there is some empty space. This skin is taut but quite flexible. It can be pulled down to the surface of the watermelon. At ground level a pulled-down bit of balloon skin would run into a point; further up it would widen into a funnel. Looked at from the outside, the balloon would show a dimple. Now imagine planet Earth being enveloped by this electronic screen. The screen is pulled down around each volcano. After the thetans were blown up into the atmosphere, they hit the screen at a height of 26.5 km and rolled down along the outside of these vortexes like condensed steam off a window pane. Around each volcano such funnels were formed. After the operation was over they were allowed to snap back, the balloon lost its dimples and took on its evenly roundish form again. This standing wave has been up there ever since. It doesn t let thetans out. It lets them in, though. It s a one-way screen, a lobster-pot for thetans. THE DEMON PLANET This is Earth after the cataclysm: the battle following Inc.2 is over, the Loyal Officers have won, Xenu sits in jail, Earth is a heap of smoldering radioactive ashes with its sun darkened by heavy layers of cloud. It s dark and cold. Nuclear winter. Little or no biological life (except perhaps in the deep seas.) There is spiritual life, though, if only in the poorest of states. The space between the surface of the planet and the Screen at 26.5 km is crammed with BTs and Clusters imported from other planets. Former inhabitants of Earth proper, such as thetans and human, animal and plant GEs whose bodies had died naturally in the catastrophe, drift about. An most unhealthy place since those BTs and Clusters will cling to any body walking about on Earth, particularly to human ones.

151

There are more homeless thetans, BTs and Clusters hovering about than the current number of two-legged bodies on this planet could accommodate. They are all waiting. This explains where all the new souls come from as world population increases. The reason that animals seem so pure and innocent to us is that they are not controlled by Body Thetans. BTs, having formerly been thetans, will try to control human bodies or thetans living in human bodies. Animals are usually operated by GEs only. As they are able to learn within the limits of their basic programs and as each of them leads a life of its own, they do turn into individuals during their life. But they are GEs, not thetans. You do find the occasional animal, though, that seems strangely human, perhaps even evil or demonic - well, that one probably has a stray BT sitting on him. You could compare the situation of Earth to a big stew of lost spirits steaming along in their juice like inside a pressure cooker, held down and kept from escaping by the Screen. All thetans and GEs who were here before Inc.2 and most that came afterwards, are part of that stew. Apart from affecting Teegeeack and the other 76 planets involved, Inc.2 had a much larger effect than only paralyzing a few hundred billion thetans. Why worry, one might say - after all it involved no more than a mere handful of planets within the vastness of the physical universe and its many galaxies. But perhaps one ought to look at this from the viewpoint of the 8th dynamic, of the dynamic of thought, of postulates Most thetans, as we know, are their postulates by identification with them, and as they overlap as infinities , each thought formed anywhere immediately communicates straight across to all other thetans. Nothing can be kept a secret on the 8th dynamic. Now imagine for some hundreds of billions of thetans to be paralyzed, to be fully introverted into their lost and stolen identity with no other game going on for them, to be totally spun into mest with all their attention glued to that BT-part of them, down on Teegeeack - wouldn t that create ripples on the 8th dynamic? Wouldn t that create a huge negative bias, a vector of we can t cope , it s all over , no hope and such like? And wouldn t that immediately affect all thetans, even those not involved with any of Xenu s incidents? Incident 2 dirtied up the 8th dynamic. That s the major damage it did. The planet stayed spiritually contaminated because the information contained in the Inc.2 implants never got lost. The Screen contains a mechanism to reinforce the R6information forever. Anyone touching the Screen after death will re-experience the R6 data because of the BTs and Clusters he unknowingly carries with him. The Screen boosts the information they contain and so strengthens the agreement the thetan has with it. Any piece of bank a thetan picks up or creates during his Earth life gets boosted inside the Screen, confuses the thetan and makes him return to Earth. (The exact mechanism will be described later.)

152

Whether one gets caught or not depends entirely on one s awareness and spiritual purity. Some people have migrated in and out many times without any hindrance from the Screen. When you audit such a person you usually find that there is very little to do. Some slight difficulties in their present lifetime, perhaps, but good recall of their past lives, an awareness of the Screen and a familiarity with the OT III materials beyond what they could have read anywhere. So a very aware person may manage to live life on Earth without contacting any Earth bank or creating more own bank by non-ethical behavior. But as soon as his awareness decreases, BTs will get stuck to him and load him with implant information. He won t manage to leave Earth again, because he doesn t fit through the meshes of the Screen any more. One way in, no way out. A lobster-pot for thetans. This is the fate most missionaires to Earth suffered, no matter of what galactopolitical persuasion: they came, looked about, did their mission and left - perhaps once, perhaps twice, perhaps a dozen times. Sooner or later they got caught. MISSIONAIRES OF MANY SHADES Who does those missions ? Various parties, one of them the Galactic Patrol , a para-military police organization formed after Inc.2 by surviving loyal officers. Not much is known about that time, about who started the GP (as most Galactic Patrol members call it), how it is organized and what exactly it is meant to do. Although data on this are sparse, the reality of the Galactic Patrol keeps being confirmed. Occasionally a solo-auditor may find himself in contact with a GP ship or recall the exact nature of his personal mission as a GP missionaire to Earth. He may become aware of his GP rank and even of a promotion after some particularly daring or clever solo-auditing action in context with countering Xenu s Game. As countering Xenu s Game is the first barrier to overcome in order to execute the Conversion Program as it was originally postulated by the Twelve (i.e. undoing the physical universe) one might conveniently state that the Galactic Patrol serves a Valid purpose on a lower administrative level within that program. Auditors who discover themselves to be GP members usually are quite inconspicuous, normal people living a quiet and ordinary life, and they are usually surprised by such recognition s. But no matter how hard they may try to suppress and reject this by means of scientific skepticism and a realistic viewpoint on things , they won t succeed and actually feel worse. However, once they accept their mission, they feel they have finally found their way back to their fundamental purpose line as thetans (not as mere Earth dwellers ). Their lives tend to pick up speed and momentum and become more satisfying and exciting games than before. That it doesn t take Hubbard s weird inspirations to break through to such recognition s is confirmed by the following: On March 20, 1956, 10 p.m., a thought of

153

very remote possibility entered my mind, which, I fear, will never leave me again: Am I a spaceman? Do I belong to a new race on earth, bred by men from outer space in embraces with earth women? Are my children offspring of the first interplanetary race? (...) Many matters of my existence have, with this question, fallen quickly into place, having been uncertainties only four days ago; the temptation to answer the above question in the positive is irresistible. However, I shall postpone final decision until the facts have spoken. In the meantime I shall proceed on the assumption: It is not beyond actual possibilities that men from outer space have landed (or will in the future land) on earth and have begun to breed here for what ever reason they may have had. Wilhelm Reich said this, Sigmund Freud s pupil (emphasis by Reich37). He didn t take into consideration, though, that most missionaires (including himself) didn t land on Earth physically but came down as thetans without bodies. An afterthought on Reich - in chapter 1.2 we learnt that he claimed that many phenomena of life were caused by a bio-energy he called orgone (something others would call prana or ch i). Yet Reich not only postulated this - he actually worked with this orgon. Experimenting in the Arizona desert, he found layers of deadly orgone or dor keeping plant growth down. With his cloud buster he managed to convert dead orgone into live orgone whereupon the desert turned green within days. His cloud buster (a simple set of metal pipes) served to crack clouds which would otherwise have sailed on, and make them rain off, or even produce clouds right in the blue sky. With this, Reich attracted the attention of extraterrestrial UFOs patrolling the area; he discovered that it was them who actually produced the dor. Reich found that he could shoo them away with his cloud buster, alerted the military to this and was initially assisted by them. His career came to its end, though, after he had built a therapeutic device he called orgone accumulator . The FDA (Food and Drug Administration) declared that the concept of orgone was unscientific and not only prohibited any further use of the orgone accumulator but had all of Reich s writings containing the word orgone confiscated and burnt. Reich protested and was put in prison for two years. In 1957, two weeks prior to his release he mysteriously died of a heart attack . To go back to the Galactic Patrol - it was engaged in the execution of three consecutive projects: first, re-population of Earth to make it inhabitable physically; second, re-civilization in terms of its technological, philosophical and religious education; third, political education so as to allow the people of Earth by their own choice to become part of one of the existing political communities in this galaxy. Not that the GP were the only force working on such programs. One auditee told me that he had come down with roughly 20 000 others in the 1950s, to help build up Maharishi s Transcendental Meditation movement. Some groups, though, have altogether opposing aims. The most notable amongst them are the Marcabians . They want no emancipation and free thought but the opposite: planetary control, a One World dominated by One Thought, One Religion, One Government, One Bank. Needless to say, they are supporters of Xenu. What they feel like has been very aptly described in books like Momo by Michae Ende and Haroun by Salman Rushdie. THE MARCABIAN CONFEDERACY

154

Xenu s career since before Inc.2 in a few words: an invader force from Andromeda had begun to infiltrate key positions in this galaxy a long time prior to Inc.2. Xenu was their leader. Separately to the Galactic Confederation he established a military and political bridgehead located near the North Star. (This is where the Coltus-implant mentioned in chapter 3.1, was done.) They had a heavily industrialized high-tech civilization and indulged in implanting as a method of education. Police control, thought control, brainwashing, psychiatry, electric shocks, identity cards, electronic surveillance of one s every move, everybody part of the secret service and spying on everybody else. One is reminded of Stalinist Russia or Mao s China. Their fashion very much resembled that of the 1940s and 1950s on this planet. From his Polaris base Xenu slowly managed to work his way up to becoming president of the Galactic Confederation. And then he solved overpopulation (which wasn t a real problem anyway) by mass killings of bodies and mass abduction of thetans and GEs. And then 36 days of R6 materials. ( R6 is Hubbard s scientology name for this particular reactive bank.) But things didn t quite go according to plan, as we know. Xenu was jailed, escaped, and apparently was accepted as a political refugee in the Marcab Confederacy , located in the constellation of Pegasus. The Marcab Confederacy isn t much older than 200 000 years and was formed out of the fragments of older political units. Hubbard s description of Marcab is strikingly close to that he gives of Xenu s original bridgehead near Polaris: In the last 10,000 years they have gone on with a sort of decadent kicked-in-the-head civilization that contains automobiles, business suits, fedora hats, telephones, spaceships. A civilization which looks almost exact duplicate but is worse off than the current U.S. civilization. 1. One might think it s the same place - if it weren t for the fact that Marcab is quite in a different part of the galaxy than Polaris. Perhaps the Marcabians evolved out of the Polaris culture, perhaps they were implanted with R6 materials to make them similar to what Polaris was like 75 million years ago and what Earth has come to be like during the last few decades. Be that as it may, Xenu never gave up and found for himself a position of power again, if only at a lower level than ever before. Only recently, in a session, a well-meaning Marcabian citizen who had managed to escape to Earth (this is his first life here) gave me a debrief. He had wound up on Marcab by mistake (he had been betrayed), didn t stay there long enough to get any implants worth mentioning and so wasn t a died-in-the-wool Marcabian but could freely speak about it. According to him, Marcab could be compared to a huge industrial plant; whole planets of their system are factories, others mining sites, and so on. They use robot bodies equipped with a programmed theta field acting as GE ; the thetan identifies with that field. It s all done on an implant basis. For private purposes they have flesh bodies, too. They leave their robot bodies and go home to their flesh bodies, or perhaps get awarded a flesh body when they have worked a few hundred years in a robot body. Or when they get promoted to higher administrative ranks. When a robot body breaks, its governing field is sucked up and preserved; the thetan is immediately

155

channeled into the next robot body. They don t sleep and eat. There is no death. There is only mechanical work, tedious and unchanging for centuries on end. Their awareness of theta phenomena and the corresponding ability to control thetans is way beyond what s imaginable on Earth. Much as it all seems to work on a mechanical basis, they do understand fundamental theta principles - but instead of using them towards more freedom, they use them for more slavery. For example, in a rather brutal procedure they tear off part of a the tan and lock it up in an electronic vault before they allow him to go on an off-planet mission or to a space station. Through the encapsulated portion of theta quanta they control him and tweak him when he gets liberal ideas. (This mechanism was referred to as body in pawn by Hubbard8. The expression refers to theta bodies as well as flesh bodies being held captive; both types were found in sessions.) With Marcab as his new base, Xenu was determined to get even with those Loyal Officers who had dared to thwart his purposes. Some of them were on Earth, trying to re-build it. Earth became Xenu s target. RE-CIVILIZATION PROJECTS Here is a brief history of the projects outlined above: To start with, the inhabitability of Earth had to be ascertained. Spacemen came down to register the level of radioactivity, caught their BTs and Clusters that way and exported them to their home planets. With their heavy space craft and energetic acceleration they could pass the Screen both ways, sure enough - but part of them got stuck here, and part of here clung to them. Witness today s astronauts - seemingly they have no problem moving through the Screen. But quite a number of them became religious fanatics or alcoholics. So one may assume that shreds of their attention were caught by the Screen, some of their BTs were awakened, spilled their contents and aberrated their hosts . It could happen to anyone; you don t have to be an astronaut. I remember one auditee telling me that he dozed off during a routine passenger flight at 10.000 m, went exterior and was snatched by the Screen right away. He had been in a troubled state of mind before he fell asleep and when he came to, he found himself not only in a more troubled but as well in a quite confused state of mind! Getting out without a body is the difficult part, as we can see. Small wonder that Earth acquired a bad name. The cursed planet . It took some millions of years before radioactivity was down sufficiently for life to emerge from the oceans and crawl ashore. The record of that is contained in the memory banks of the Genetic Entity.

156

The slow evolvement from plankton upwards doesn t account for all life forms, though. On Tape 10 Hubbard says that 20 million years ago a body line was started on Earth. Human, animal and plant bodies taken from other planets were imported here, to accommodate the various GEs whose programs needed the right type of species and environment to get started up. They needed to feel at home to become active. This way the peculiar animal worlds of Europe, Africa, Asia and Australia could develop. This way the human races could develop. Their particular affinity to certain areas corresponds to their home environment- people (GEs) from desert planets feel at home in the Atacama, Ghobi or Sahara deserts, people from tropical planets prefer the jungles, those from icy planets go to Alaska, and so on. The same is true for animals and plants. Look at yourself - which climate, which natural environment would suit you most? Well, that s where your GE belongs, or at least, that s what she is dramatizing. It s not necessarily an area the thetan would choose - it s the GE s choice! The thetan can play games anywhere; regarding environmental conditions he is independent and flexible. The GE isn t. Bodies were bred in body farms on other planets, frozen and taken down here. Some of these body farms, particularly those run by Yatruscans, were mere female fertilization factories with more brutality in the process than you wish to imagine. Gang rape in the name of science. A peak point of their dramatization was reached in recent history with Hitler s Lebensborn camps, breeding centers for a purely blond and blue-eyed race, and only last year we heard about mass rapes in Yugoslavia to impress Serbian characteristics upon them . During the first phase of the re-population project, Earth bodies were run by very aberrated thetans or even BTs. Nobody else was there to run them. Thinking, planning and acting revolved around extreme dramatizations of Inc.2, always at the expense of the GE; they mutilated and killed each other by violence, sex and drugs. Not that this pattern would have changed much since. Most bodies even today are run by aberrated thetans in combination with BTs, some even by Clusters alone, accounting for the astonishing consistency of aberrated behavior on Earth throughout its recorded history. Sex, drugs and violence - they just love it down here. And it pays! Best way to make money. HIGH TECH FOR MR. CAVEMAN In order to educate and civilize these maniacal body/GE/BT/thetan composites, the next program was activated. Teachers carne. White gods in fiery cars descended from the heavens, switched the engines of their space ships off and taught people the simple survival skills of plant medicine, yoga, meditation, acupuncture, architecture, etc. The Chinese know that their realm was founded millions of years ago by the five emperors ; the last one of them, 4000 years ago, wrote the famous I-Ching, a book of wisdom. The Irish, the Japanese, the Australian Aboriginals, the Polynesians, the Celts - there is hardly a race that doesn t recall in their legends that they descended straight from the gods. Read Daniken, Buttlar, Charroux and other authors; the historical

157

and archeological evidence they have compiled makes it almost silly not to assume that man s civilization was imported from elsewhere35, 38, 39. Look at the dawn of recorded history, some five to ten thousand years ago, at the civilizing impact of the Vedas, the early Chinese traditions, the Sumerians. Look at 500 years before Christ - there is Buddha, Lao-Tsu, Confucius. In contrast, during the centuries around Christ s birth - religious confusion, self-denial and what not, all across Europe and Asia Minor. Then the 8th and later the 16th century - art and philosophy in full bloom all around, be it in Europe, in India, Persia, China or Japan. Again in contrast the 19th century - Industrial Revolution, smokestacks, assembly lines, man a cogwheel. Why are certain periods in the history of man bright, others dark? Why is it that a culture does not evolve evenly throughout the centuries? Why its flowering and withering? Why no steady peaceful progress? Well, says the educated historian, it s the zeitgeist at work. ( Zeitgeist , taken from German: the characteristic thought or feeling of a period of time; literally spirit of the age .) Fine, Mr. Historian, but who creates that zeitgeist? Answer: missionaires of many shades. They are not all from the same side of the game - some were partisans to Elron and the Galactic Patrol, others to Xenu and his Marcabians, others to Yatrus. The re-population and re-civilization projects weren t executed by the GP alone, not by far! There were plenty of groups fighting over the bone. They have in common that they all contributed to the great impulses in history, each to their own advantage. Somebody started something somewhere - a new religion, an empire, a scientific discovery - and immediately everybody else would jump on the bandwagon, try to steer it his way or at least benefit from it. And depending on who made it on a pope s seat, an emperor s throne, a professor s chair, the world would be steered towards an age of brightness or one of darkness, respectively. To give some examples, taken from auditing sessions: One missionaire, as a member of the Galactic Patrol, had assisted in putting the Nazca lines there for the purpose of guiding incoming space vessels to a space port. The Nazca lines are huge images of birds and other animals engraved on the Peruvian Nazca plain. They measure the size of several football fields each and (a puzzle to scientists) can t have been constructed from ground level. The GP staff got the cooperation of the local priesthood, used the religious concepts of the area and made people participate in a sacred ritual under the PR cover of the gods want you to draw those lines . And they did. Less lucky was a missionaire 17,000 years ago who was to establish a civilization in South America yet failed, because the natives proved hostile when he started to demonstrate how one can outdo the local magician by building electrical batteries and other fancy devices way beyond the stage of that culture. The missionaire got killed, left the body, went up to his stationary space ship, was reprimanded because

158

of acting against specific orders and demoted. (They usually have spare bodies up there, for those who come back after leaving their Earth body.) Several such attempts were made and seem to have failed, because it was as late as about 10,000 years ago that decent civilizations were begun to be built here, to start with in India and China, later in Central and South America. A NET TO CATCH THEM ALL Foreign specialists usually came down as thetans (like the unlucky GP man above) and took a body here, usually a baby body (but not always, depending on the urgency of their mission). They keep coming to this day. I audited some who arrived (i.e. were born) between 1938 and 1956; they had no past lives on Earth but a clear knowledge of the mission they had to fulfill here - and there is no reason why more of them should not have come since. This is perhaps one of the largest area of omitted data in the whole field of UFO research where it is believed that the technical advisors to mankind came here physically. Well, some did for sure - but most came the non-hardware route, by thetan migration . They dropped their bodies wherever they were, be it on a Space station 25,000 km up or on their home planet, traveled down here as thetans exterior and took a baby body. Or, for those who were on an urgent mission, they took the body of an adult when they found him exterior - when he slept, was drunk or ill, or right after an accident. Lacking that they might have simply knocked him out of his body. The key missionaires to this planet - and you may call up any name in the Who is Who of medicine, engineering, art, philosophy, religion, cartography, chemistry, physics, geology, astronomy, etc. - they all came down as thetans exterior. Perhaps they had to live here for a few lifetimes before they got started on their missions or before they managed to complete them, but at any rate, that s how they came and went. But little do these migrating thetans know what awaits them: the Screen. It installs forgetfulness and evokes the exact patterns of the implants quoted further up, of karma, god in the heavens, must be good, mustn t be bad, lovely violet colors, oh god is nigh, but oh no you aren t ready yet, been a bad boy, here s your register of sins, must take a body, go down and make amends; yes sir, I will, poor sinner that I am - and he gets linked up with a GE and down the tube and pictures of father and mother having intercourse and - wham! - back in the womb. St. Peter, knocking at heaven s door, the Book of Reckoning these images were seen by many in their sessions when they recalled after-death experiences. But the sins read out to one aren t one s own, it s a false register, it s all the entities one has ever picked up speaking in chorus - and so it would take forever to get redeemed. One can t make amends for what one hasn t done. And one gets confused about one s real past lives as well.

159

The Tibetan Book of the Dead has all the stages of it worked out, it even says that it is all make-believe and one shouldn t get caught up with it 40. It emphasizes that the apparitions one sees are entirely dependent upon one s karma and one s religious education. This statement would account for the continuing differences between the many god and demon cults all around the world - one dies, sees what one has in one s mind anyway, goes back to one s familiar tradition and continues it (a conclusion modern after-death researchers have come to as well 41,42). But underlying all cultural variations there is a sameness - that of Xenu s implants. The white light , the most common and moving after-death experience - doesn t that remind one of the waves of light of Inc.1 and the lights seen during the Middle Implant? One s own implants and boosted-up entities are played back on oneself and seemingly (but falsely) stabilize one s confusion; that s what this is. Much as the Tibetan Book of the Dead claims that the between lives procedure should take 49 days, this has not been confirmed by auditing results. Some thetans don t lose their heads as much as others over the images they envision, resist the enthrallment and deliberately choose a new body in a family of their choice. For some the journey takes longer than a mere 49 days; they may be gone for years or even decades. Others who left their body in a state of panic and shock may be back in a new one within hours, since a body provides the stable orientation point they need the most in such a condition. Those who come here for the first time usually have no clue what s going to come their way. No briefings, no instructions were given to them when they left. They may arrive with the idea that they will be welcomed and that they won t even need a body to communicate with Earth people. They expect to be noticed without a body, just as they are used to wherever they come from (at least a missionaire from Arcturus said this to me). The spiritual degradedness, density and solidity of this planet is unimaginable to them. So they come down like shooting stars through the vastness of space, take a break to gaze at the brightness of Earth, hover about like a feather in a summer breeze, touch the Screen - and are drawn into something so subtle, interesting and pleasant that only a few become suspicious. First they are serviced by what appears to be some sort of Planet Earth Tourist Information Center. It starts out with lovely colors and goes on with heavenly gardens populated by exceedingly beautiful men, women and children dancing on green meadows, their bodies light and subtle as sun rays; then long, drawn-out nature movies of beautiful Earth landscapes are shown. To the extent that the thetan feels attracted to these scenes he may actually, in his later, real life, wind up meeting the people and live in the places he saw. It s absolutely hypnotic. The moment one doesn t pay attention one falls for it. The joke is that they see what they expect to see, or that visions of their own past, of the places they just left, are played back to them. Everybody sees something different. The Screen only boosts what s there; it doesn t actually give new information. It reads the incoming thetan s vibrations and turns them into a holographic picture show of such lifelikeness that the newcomer doesn t notice that it s only a show but actually thinks he is on Earth already!

160

Last in the show are pictures of copulating couples, often one s own parents, and - swoosh! - one wakes up inside the womb. At this point the thetan has already, without noticing, been coupled together with a GE and sees what the GE sees. More unlucky visitors might be caught by an enemy patrol ship before contacting the Screen. They might get pulled in and receive a little bias implant - not enough to make them go off their mission but sufficient to give it some sort of bias so that they pursue it without any success. Supposing they had the task - like for example Nicola Tesla or Wilhelm Reich - to assist Earth people in developing non-fossil and non-nuclear energy devices, they would certainly do so but somehow wind up in the hands of the wrong people with the result of their planet-saving inventions locked away in bank vaults (Tesla) or them being killed and their work ridiculed (Reich). And after that bias-implant: the Screen, same procedure as usual. To summarize: on one s way in, one may not become aware of the Screen as it simply plays one s own purposes and expectations back to one. Therefore one feels one has come to the right place. On one s way out, the Screen reinforces the 36-day implant (R6) and by association other parts of Inc.2 as well. A thetan goes up there with a string of BTs hanging around his neck (one doesn t lose them after death), gets a light shock on contacting the Screen, his BTs come to life and so do their Inc.2 images. During the sexpictures the thetan gets teamed up with a GE, and down he goes again. The oftener he does this the fatter he gets (in terms of BTs attached to him) and the smaller is his chance of ever getting out again. That the Screen only boosts what the thetan brings along anyway, might be an explanation for the fact that many people get re-born in the same area generation after generation. They are shown what they are used to and return to it. In the 1920s, the psychoanalyst C. G. Jung, a pupil of Freud, discovered that primeval symbols can be found in the minds of all men on Earth and postulated that there was a collective unconscious . He considered these archetypes to be benevolent as they dealt with such elevated images as gods and angels - yet little did he know that he had found but the implant pictures held in place and perpetuated by the Screen. That Jung failed to interpret the phenomenon correctly does of course not diminish his merits in having discovered it for the west. (Jung was actually quite familiar with the Tibetan Book of the Dead.) Although the Tibetans don t actually refer to the Screen as such, it was described variously by others. Once, for example, I saw a Brazilian shaman, an Indio; he said he could leave his body and go towards the stars, but not further than the spider web . That was his limit. What a wonderfully descriptive name! The Screen appears as well under the apt name of Erdguertelzone (Earth belt zone) in Franz Bardon s autobiography Frabato and is described to contain various gods, demons and other apparitions. And it seems that Hiranjaloki, the world of spiritual frolicking so rapturously described by Yogananda, may be nothing else but the Screens play-back of the Atlantis-inspired heavenly gardens found on the time track of thetan and GE alike. Similarly Xenu s demons trumpeting angels and devils mentioned in the Old Testament and as well in the Koran; similarly, and specific to the Islamic world, the Yatruscan

161

ideal scene of 72 virgins (huris) attending to the needs of any male who makes it to heaven, and in their arms there shall be forever bliss without fatigue (so says the Koran) The sobering bottom line to all this is that the thetan, as soon as he exteriorizes from his body, goes into a state of ecstasy (literally a state outside ) or attempts to extend his space to the utter limits of the cosmos, gets caught by the Screen and sees what Xenu and Yatrus taught him to see during the past trillenia. And he, satisfied to have found religious truth, falls back elated. THETANS ON A LEASH Yet another installation impedes the efforts of well-meaning thetans trying to do something positive about Earth. Xenu made a long-range plan to take care of that, a masterpiece of precaution. Hubbard s materials state that at the very end of Inc.2, after the 36 days, BTs and Clusters are taken to Hawaii and Las Palmas for packaging ; on Tape 10 he adds that they were shot into space or sunk into the sea. Auditing sessions have revealed how the story went on. This is how: BTs and Clusters were packed up and stored away for later use, some on this planet (under the sea), some off-planet (on Mars, for example), some even back on the 76 planets the thetans had been abducted from. They were kept in iceblocks or electronic spheres. When needed, a portion of these tightly packed ridges was broken off, unfrozen and selectively attached to thetans so as to monitor their every move and to whisper distracting thoughts in their ears. We ll refer to them as monitor-BTs from now on, or simply as Monitors . They were trained on their man by means of shocks and concept flashes. No taking chances. A missionaire would be approaching Earth and - zap! - a Monitor was shot at him. The ever-watchful Marcabian ships took care of that since the recivilization projects had shown results and Earth had become interesting again. Not only non-Marcabian missionaires suffered this fate. Marcabians, not trusting anybody, put Monitors on their own people, too! Since all Marcabian troops and operators were implant educated, they weren t much good at creative and constructive thinking and so had to be watched over by Two-Way-Monitors for observation and control. Any Marcabian agent or non-Marcabian missionaire operating on Earth - be they high-ranking church officials, businessmen, politicians, scientists, artists - any of them has his set of Monitors on him. And up in stationary space stations, on Mars or even in the Pyrenees operators sit at their screens day and night and record each and every move of their targets. (How this was discovered out about will be revealed in chapter 6.) Monitors may sit on a series of different hosts in sequence. One auditor followed a monitor from the moment it was reawakened in some undersea station on Earth, trained on his man by electronic shock and postulates, put on the man, and then

162

by remote control was made to change hosts and thereby impart the information package he was implanted with, to various targets. Being theta creations, Monitors are not dull lumps of mass but able to make flexible, intelligent decisions within the narrow range of the program implanted into them. They master the basic theta abilities of reaching and withdrawing and of evaluating importance s with regard to a prescribed course. At a given cue, they will jump into action and influence their host as they were trained to do. Doing this grants them existence, doing it well ensures their survival into the future. For fear of further implanting they are usually unwilling to talk and give their makers away. Better some game than no game, better some sort of existence than no existence. Therefore, from their own viewpoint, they are trying to help within the context of the game they were forced into; usually they are even convinced that they are supporting their boss in his game! They identify with him and their host with them unknowingly, of course. This is what makes it so hard to detect them. In general one doesn t find single Monitors but a number of them, often a dozen or more. They are connected in form of horizontal and vertical communication lines forming an organizational pattern of administrative ranks and command/feedback channels up and down the ranks. Such Monitor organizations are used to control important personalities or coordinate the actions of agents operating in different parts of the planet. This is Xenu s control network- an organization of BTs and Clusters. It makes playing grand politics on this planet as easy and predictable as staging a puppet show. THE MARCABIAN IMPACT Take Joseph Stalin - there s a good Marcabian for you. Very male, very black leather, very police state, very control-minded. No religion, no free thought. Stalin, Franco, Mussolini, Hitler and their henchmen - Marcabian missionaires. A field day for them, a field epoch! It had started earlier, of course. 19th century, Industrial Revolution! Assembly lines, mine shafts, factories, black soot, smoke, ill health, men, women and children treated like robots, paid by the hour, thrown away when exhausted and exploited. Towards the end of the 19th century the impressionists were the last ones to paint sunlight and flowers and portray the gentle, cheerful sides of life before darkness set in in the form of two World Wars. Art nouveau was the final death throe, and then there was extinction. Music went a similar way - its stability and balance in the 18th century, the well-temperedness of Bach, Mozart and Beethoven, gave way to an age of increasing ambiguity, and as the 20th century began, music fell apart into tonality and atonality 43. It isn t for no reason that the atonal composer Schoenberg should say in

163

reference to his 2nd string quartet of 1908 Ich spure Luft von anderen Planeten ( I feel the air of other planets ). Which planets, one wonders? Only a year later, in 1909, the writer Marinetti in his futuristic manifesto spoke out against any tradition, convention and beauty and actually called for the destruction of it. Then the First World War. Then, in 1924, the birth of surrealism, defined by Andre Breton as a psychic automatism whereby the subconscious discovered already by Freud - was to be expressed without critical censoring, without thought and without any intention towards morals and aesthetics. Dreams and associations were given a higher reality (surrealism) than anything felt by one s senses44. The world was in turmoil. Freud discovered deep-seated sexual urges in the subconscious, C.G. Jung his archetypes - it was obvious that man was neither master of his own mind nor of his world, because witnessing the destruction and bestialities occurring between 1914 and 1945 one could only conclude that powers way beyond one s control were at work. What really fell in those years - under the bombs from allied war planes on German cities, under the A-bomb mushroom above Hiroshima and later, under the ax blows of Chinese cultural revolutionaries wasn t just a considerable amount of old masonry, no, what fell were stable orientation points, familiar skylines, honored traditions and a whole life style. And what rose to hitherto unprecedented heights, to uncontrollable power, was one very Marcabian manifestation - world banking. World banking consists of the well-known Xenu method of hoovering up vital particles (money), storing them in places where one can t easily retrieve them and turning the sum of them over to a huge dictatorial apparatus that depletes people of their energies, prescribes their every step and ultimately paralyzes them; it consists of attaching small prefabricated particles such as ID-cards and taxation numbers to bodies and making thetans identify with them to a point that they don t even notice how much they are under surveillance. R6 DECO The Marcabian impact, after bringing the world into a state of turmoil, found its cultural expression after the Second World War in what I would suggest calling R6 deco - decorative art in true R6 style. It s a play on words derived from art deco , a decorative style following art nouveau in the 1920s, and R6 bank , the technical name for the Inc.2 bank. R6 deco - that s black police uniforms, black sun glasses with no smiles below them, rivet-studded black leather, strobe lights in discos, heavy metal, punk music, James Bond life style accessories, Barbie dolls, types like Marilyn Monroe and Humphrey Bogart, Las Vegas, the decoration on one-armed bandits and pinball machines, Tibetan religious kitsch, Hindu religious kitsch, Italian religious kitsch, the pope and his pomp; it s Madonna (pop star) suggestively dramatizing the time-honored

164

combination of whore and cross - witness the witch processes of the middle ages where healer-women were made whores by their inquisitor priests and burnt at the stake; witness the burning crosses of the Ku-Klux Clan and the R6-madness of the American government burning David Koresh s family , including 15 women and 17 children, in Waco, Texas, 199379. Our world today. R6 deco is not a new thing at all, the same types, the same images keep reappearing throughout the ages. Perhaps it is more pronounced now than ever before but what about trumpeting angels and chariots on renaissance and baroque paintings? What about Michelangelo s Sistine Chapel and Beethoven s 9th symphony? Hieronimus Bosch? Salvador Dali? What about St.Peter and Santa Claus? R6 deco all the way. The Screen forever. When did it start? With Xenu s Control All! compulsion, followed up by the body-oriented fantasies of Yatrus and his delights in sex, drugs and torture. Xenu contributed mind control and crime. Yatrus sex, drugs and violence. Trillions of years of separate experimentation went by, and then all of that was packed together in one complex data bank brought about by a 36 day super-implant the likes of which were unknown before, preserved as mental energy and mass and re-inforced each time a thetan extends his space up to the region of the Screen at a 26.5 km altitude. is.

Sex, drugs, violence - the R6-bank. A huge agreement. Turns Earth into what it

165

5.2 Masterminding History WHOSE ONE WORLD ? * XENU S MONOLOGUE * ONE WORLD, ONE VOTE * A WHITE PLANET In the last chapter it was implied that history didn t simply evolve out of itself and that the zeitgeist resulted from the intentions of extraterrestrial powers striving to conquer and subjugate Earth. One dominating intention was said to be expressed as Xenu s One World plan, executed by Marcabian agents against the resistance of a Galactic Patrol who are determined to make Earth a member of the Galactic Confederation by increasing galacto-political awareness in its population. (Of which this book is one example.) In this chapter, we are going to investigate if this One World concept holds true if tested out against longer historical periods. (So far, only the last two centuries since the Industrial Revolution were considered.) WHOSE ONE WORLD ? About 4000 years ago, a man called Abraham was spoken to by the One God who said: I am God Almighty; (. . .). And I will make my covenant between me and you, and will multiply you exceedingly. (. . .) Behold, my covenant is with you, and you shall be the father of a multitude of nations. (. . .) And I will give to you, and to your descendants after you, the land of your sojournings, all the land of Canaan, for an everlasting possession; and I will be their God. (Gen 17.1-8) Only two generations later, Abraham s grandson Jacob saw a ladder going up to heaven and the One God spoke down to him and said: The land on which you lie I will give to you and to your descendants; and your descendants shall be like the dust of the earth, and you shall spread abroad to the west and to the east and to the north and to the south; and by you and your descendants shall all the families of the earth bless themselves. (Gen 28.1314) Next in line to receive the message, at a time when Israel was troubled by Egypt, was Moses. He saw the One God in a burning bush, was furnished by him with the convenient ability do miracles (Ex 4.1-9) and so very convincingly told his people that they were chosen to rule the world as a theocracy run by a priesthood (Ex 19.5). Much as they became that and much as the One God kept asserting to be singular ( you shall have no other gods beside me , Ex 20.3), the Israelites weren t all too convinced; the moment Moses turned his back - and much to the wrath of the One God - they preferred to cast a golden calf, dance around it and have a fertility party in good old Yatrus tradition (Ex 32). The One God surely had a hard time winning against people s Yatrusmindedness. As long as two thousand years after Moses he still saw it necessary to appear to St. John in exemplary R6 god fashion - his head and his hair were white as white wool, white as snow; his eyes were like a flame of fire, (. . .) and his voice was like the sound of many waters; in his right hand he held seven stars, from his mouth issued a sharp two-edged sword, and his face was like the sun shining in full strength

166

(Rev 1.14-16) - and spoke out loud and hard against Yatrus, the beast 666 , the whore of Babylon (Rev 13.18). Ezekiel is full of this, too - R6 pictures by the truckload, angels, trumpets, cherubim s, and the clear message that the One God isn t fun-minded but wants obedience to the letter. Yet the Israelites, a stiff-necked people (Ex 32.9), didn t seem to want to learn. Perhaps Xenu s One World claim sounded like too much hardship to them - and in that they were right, as their woeful future history amply shows. Perhaps it is because of this claim to world-ownership that Jews are looked at with suspicion by other races quite undeservedly so considering how greatly many Jewish geniuses contributed to the cultures that hosted them. Not all who adhere to the Jewish religion are One Worlders, naturally, just as not all Moslems are Fundamentalists and not all Christians Jesuits - but still: who was Moses? Whose side did he represent? Who is the god who spoke to him, to Abraham, Jacob, Ezekiel, St. John? Now to the Roman Empire. With its pax romana ( Roman peace ) Rome is seen to have brought civilization to the barbarians - yet of what value was the peace they brought? True enough, with their roads, aqueducts, defensive walls and the Latin language, they created a military, civilian and linguistic communication network holding a vast empire together, a One World - but who counts the corpses? Divide et impera - split them up and thus rule. Polarity as a political method. If there isn t any, you create it. Incidentally, Mr. Caesar, what did you do to the druids, their magic, their naturespiritedness? There goes yet another minority wiped out by Roman sword blades. But who would need Yatrus inspired female-oriented cults anyway? Rome, very male and military, didn t. They replaced small ethnic units managed by tribal or family chiefs with a huge and impersonal organizational superstructure; their cities they laid out chessboard-like, in the fashion of a military camp. Whatever religion and philosophy they needed to satisfy the practical needs of people, they copied from the weakened, Yatrus-dominated, homosexual Greek culture; all else they uprooted27. Very Marcabian, indeed. In the end Rome, full-bellied, drunk and over-sexed, fell itself pray to the R6 bank, went down and who would come if not a cult built around the very cross the Romans used for executions? A cult cherishing the idea of victimizing oneself, of suffering for the sins of everybody, for the woes of the world. Very R6. Sorry Mr. Jesus Christ, you were a most misunderstood man - when you said god you didn t mean the One God. But instead of absorbing the philosophical simplicity of the Sermon on the Mount, people went wild on the R6 deco of a man dying on the cross and turned the centuries after Christ into a pageant of self-abnegation and theological animosities where Christians slaughtered Christians in greater numbers than the Romans ever managed27.

167

When this after roughly 600 years seemed to flatten off, thing needed heating up a little and lo! - a man in the deserts of Arabia was spoken to by the archangel Gabriel who had his orders straight from the One God himself, and so that man went and dispensed with the female goddesses people had actually been quite content with for the last few thousand years, declared that there was no god but god, and emphasized the point by engaging upon a military quest that made him take half of Europe within decades only, driving his followers as far as India. One World, this time under the halfmoon flag of Islam (yet another R6 symbol). The Roman Church which by rights should have taken its wisdom from the New Testament, somehow mistook the old-testamentarian command towards One World rule given to the Israelites to be referring to Christianity, therefore felt entitled to challenge those under the half-moon banner and, in a mad attempt to be right, drew the Middle Ages into an orgy of blood. Crusades in the name of the Faith. A Catholic One World, headed by kings who as representatives of the One God himself, couldn t be but right no matter what aberration might have crossed their minds Spain, safely back in the hands of Catholic kings after the moors had been driven out, sends Christoph C. to sail to India in 1492, and he finds the Americas. Others are soon to follow. To make Aztec civilization crumble instantly, gold-greedy Cortez had but to show the cross to native kings and priests - such is the magic of that symbol. Particularly when combined with white ships coming up from behind the horizon, white ships carrying white men, white men evoking the images of white gods in fiery chariots, of missionaires from outer space, and last but not least, of the R6 gods embedded in the reactive bank. Now the race is on: a Spanish One World, a Portuguese one, an English one, a French one, a Dutch one, a German one. Jesuits as the vanguard, hypnotizing the cross into the minds of the infidels, followed by soldiers and their cannons. First magic, then murder. Standard procedure. Hypnotized people are bad fighters. In the early 17th century half of south Japan, so far quite happy with Shintoism (a female-type nature religion), kissed the feet of those bearing the cross only a few years after they were shown it. The shogun had the intruders killed and ordered Japan to shut itself off - until British cannons opened the clam in 1853. First the cross, then the cannons. Very Marcabian, very R6. XENU S MONOLOGUE 19th century - is the world taken yet? Not really. Bad show, Xenu, bad show too many claiming ownership! Too much infighting. Religiously, it s Jews, Christians and Moslems against each other; commercially, it s the English, Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese and French. Those agents of yours - are they too overloaded with BTs and Clusters, do they touch the Screen too often during their extended stay on Earth? Or is it the old polarity principle again; setting your own guys up against each other, is that it? After all, you did manage to make the planet governable on the basis of three or four languages only, all of them European, all of them (including English) based on Latin and so One Language, really. Did you plan that already 2000 years earlier when you had

168

Caesar create the Roman One World? Has your long-range intention been effectively at work again? Not too bad a show then, considering . . . Now what are you going to do about America? New territory, seems to get out of hand a bit, people go there to be free, no controlling them, too far away from pope and king, what to do? Polarity, let s use some polarity - but how? Well, what have we got there are the Jews, they have a banking network, they have money. There are the Freemasons, they have a political network, they have money. Anyone who is anyone in 18th century Europe is either Jewish (if a banker) or a Freemason (if a royalty). Now, let s see . . . There s the Bank of England, lovely institution, controls the British Crown and through the Crown the better part of the world. And there s Mr. Rothschild (Mayer Amchel), has just set up shop in Frankfurt and is already friends with the local royalty. And there s his son Nathan, gifted chap, let s send him over to England, he ll open a bank there. Now old Mayer Amchel Rothschild, he s ever so well connected, very useful indeed - we ll make him finance Adam Weishaupt and set up a new lodge, supersecret, lots of R6 symbols, the Illuminati , 1776. Now let s have Weishaupt use old Rothschild s connections and get all the royalty into the new lodge ... Done. (It was no problem as we promised them we would snuff out the Catholic Church; royalty loves that. Polarity always works.) And now that we have made the key Freemasons secret members of the illuminati, we can easily slip our agents into all leading positions in Europe. And in the US. It worked! They have put our symbols on the Great Seal of the USA. 1782. Novus Ordo Saeculorum . The New World Order. And now that they have declared their independence, we can set them up against Europe. Polarity always wins. And what did Nathan Rothschild do in the meantime? Took over the Bank of England, 1815. Good man. Now what about China? Already 1840 and still not appropriated by anyone? Well, let s have our English agents pump some opium into them, that ll fix them. Brilliant idea, very R6. It works, too. China, a deflated giant. Now what do I hear about France and Germany - despite the French Revolution they have gone back to royalty? The masses like their kings, it seems. Polarity, we need polarity . . . What s the time down there, anyway -1848? Alright, here s the plan: fire a mission off to Germany, have our Illuminati friends set up a new cult - let s say communism ; sounds good, sounds like everything for everybody, and everybody as much worth as everybody else. Actually an idea stolen from Yatrus, but never mind; the main thing is that the masses like it. The masses are run by their GEs; GEs fancy food, drink, sex, lazyness; they fancy being equal and feeling united against big bad individual thetans. Communism will appeal to GEs. The masses up against their leaders. Now who do we hire to write something up about it ... Mordechai Marx Levy? Why not. Never heard of him. As long as he can write. Call him Karl.

169

Now over on the other side of the Atlantic - what s the scene? Rothschild s people tried to found the Bank of America so we have someone posted to print our money, and some American president didn t like that? Polarity, polarity . . . Oh, goody, look at all those Negro s they have down south! Black and white, south and north, polarity built right into the country itself - let s set them up against each other, civil war, shake them up a bit, make times look dangerous, find a reason to introduce paper money, make them forget those awkward gold coins. Shoot Lincoln after it s over. Great stuff! Now we need to put some stability there and make sure it stays in the hands of the right people - Bank of England, you pump Rothschild money into the US, build up Rockefeller, Carnegie, Harriman. Now, at long last, this Earth is becoming a decent Marcabian planet, all robots and machinery, oil, steel, railways. And their politicians, in particular the US presidents, all proper Illuminati-style Freemasons? Good, good. Continue, down there. And make those Rockefellers control the money flows, will you? Shouldn t allow money to touch the hands of simple politicians or the people, of all things. Too precious for that. Federal Reserve System, Chase Manhattan Bank, that ll do. Oh - on banks: make them your temples, make them like the old one back in Jerusalem (and I still hate that Jesus for kicking my money changers out). Build them nice and high. Build skyscrapers. Makes our Marcabian missionaires feel ever so much at home. New York and Marcabian - twin cities. Now what about Russia and their Czar? French revolution and the First World War didn t touch him? Illuminati network almost non-existent? No decent control over their banks yet what with them having more gold in their coffers than paper money in circulation? What polarities do we have here .. ? Hmmm, neither Europe nor Russia really took to communism, didn t seem to work - but there s this Lenin, and he s got an ax to grind with the Czar! Was kicked out of the country when he attempted to introduce communism to Russia in 1907. Now Mr. Rothschild s you have Max Warburg and Jakob Schiff give that Lenin a handful of millions, same with Trotsky, and send them both back to Russia. Communism - that s the thing, that s exactly what they don t need in a rural society. Lovely polarity, that- That Czar won t last a minute. If a world war didn t do it, this will. And before I forget, tell Stalin to put his boots on and get ready. Those Russian peasants need teaching a lesson. 1917 is a year they won t forget. What s this report - our agents had some fanatic Jews warm up their ancient goals under the name of Zionism ? And the Rothschilds got the British to back it up, all under the guise of the right to return to the country of our forefathers ? Brilliant! From now on we ll have some real polarity going down there. 1917 is a year even I won t forget. And later on we ll get Zionist bankers like Schiff and Warburg to finance Hitler, and Hitler will kill all the Jews, protected by the Vatican. One World Zionists against innocent Jews - what a joke! What a fantastic polarity!

170

Takes a Second World War to get this done, but never mind. And afterwards the world will be split in two blocks and be down to a singular polarity, a major polarity to cover all minor polarities: East and West, Communism and Capitalism, Dictatorship and Democracy - sounds so sweet one might even think it s true. Newthink and newspeak to get them educated. True Marcabian poetry. Like Council of Foreign Relations (CFR), for the organization which feeds Rockefeller s money to the media to create One World enthusiasm. Like World Bank , to ensure that non-one in the whole world has any money. Like Food and Drug Administration (FDA), so they use psychiatric drugs and Worthless food. Like World Health Organization (WHO) to supervise and facilitate heroin deals and the spreading of epidemics. Like Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) to encourage farmers on the northern hemisphere to throw food away so that people on the southern hemisphere may starve better. And like Ministry of Defense , for the guys who build the atom bombs at a rate to blow their planet up a thousand fold. Hmmmm - what a treat! Atom bombs for export. Nuclear weapons forbidden by galactic law; nobody has them- but I do! And once they are exported, the galaxy is mine. Have to speed up the NASA on their space program, though, to make sure I get the goods before those dramatizing Earthlings wipe themselves out. It s all arranged already - plenty of nuclear warheads on either side. The place will be a graveyard with a lot of grass grown over the story before those stupid Galactic Patrol characters will become nosy again. And even if they did - there are my welltrained monitor BTs and Clusters, there s this magnificent Screen; should Earth ever recover they ll once again dramatize H-bombs dropped down volcanoes and they ll blow themselves up again - and again - and again. They ll never find out!45-49,80 There is just one sore spot - Tibet. Buddhists - ugly people, don t believe in the One God, don t believe in me. 1950 . . . isn t that when they expect their next Buddha to come, the Maitreya? Better put a stop to that right away. Tell you what - we ll give them to their efficient next-door neighbors, the Chinese. Good old Mao will deal with them. As from 1950 they ll forget about their Nirvana - and they ll get to know me! But - what in the name of the R6 gods is that?!? Do I see Elron down there? With an E-meter? Oh no . . . !! What a spoilsport! Wrecks my game just when I thought I had won it! 1968 - a black year. But perhaps - perhaps I could simply take his church away from him? Put some of my agents in there . . .? ONE WORLD, ONE VOTE Put in a nutshell, how is this One World to be attained? By educating people over thousands of years. Recipe: one, take their stable data away (family, job, government), thus creating confusion; two, put false stable data there (Marcabian ones), thus settling the confusion. Make life difficult; make problems seem unsolvable; make politicians look foolish and untrustworthy. Introduce - at the point of maximum confusion - a gigantic

171

new stable datum: the helping hand from outside the planet. Prepare the public mood by means of sci-fi films and toys. Make Earth population look with hope at those shiny black Marcabian space ships, representatives of a well-meaning, technologically advanced civilization who want all the best for the people of this planet. (Big PR act, TV, the press, public events, applause, cheers.) And then the people of Earth, overwhelmed by the timely appearance and the unending goodness of their saviors, will join the Marcab Confederacy by popular vote (represented by the UN, their planetary government) - a voluntary decision on a democratic basis, precisely as stipulated by the Galactic Constitution. And no Galactic Patrol or Galactic Council can do or say; anything against it, because it s legal. (As an afterthought - someone was nice enough to send me a clip from the fairly classy German weekly paper Die Zeit , of Feb 26,1993. A front page headline referring to an article about who was to be Germany s next president, read (in English): E.T. for President .) A WHITE PLANET Very noticeably - as historians like Carroll Quigley and Will Durant would agree - the major driving force in this One World scenario is the white race. Durant actually heads one chapter in Volume Two of his Story of Civilization with The White Danger and frankly calls whites pirates 50,51. Before answering the question how come? , we should perhaps take a brief glance over the involvement of the white race with world developments, that is, of the race of light-skinned, non-negroid, non-mongoloid Earthlings. We already saw above that 4000 years ago - coinciding with the beginning of the Iron Age in Asia Minor - the One God appointed white Israelites to conquer the world for him; around the same time, white Aryans invaded the Indus valley, forcibly replaced the local female gods with their male gods whilst driving away the aboriginal darkskinned population (up to this day Brahmins, the highest caste in India, are white); white explorers such as Phoenicians and Vikings discovered America long before Columbus did; Sumer and Egypt built world empires; Rome was founded by Scandinavian hordes corning to Italy around 1000 B.C. and, when it reached the peak of its self-satisfied debauchery 400 years after Christ, Germans and Goths, an-other lot of northerners, came down to pluck it like an overripe cherry. From then on not only the whites but specifically the blond and blue-eyed ones were to be the tool of history, the fulfillers of the zeitgeist s requirements. After the death of the Roman Empire it resurrected as the Roman Catholic Church. Same style, same thetans, same corruptness. The Latin world became a Christian world, and the Christian world some crusades and genocide s later, was white. For a brief spell in the 15th century, luck favored dark-haired, brown-eyed Spaniards

172

and Portuguese, long enough for Columbus and Magellan to make their fortunes, but once the New World was discovered the blond ones took over stronger than ever, rooted out the bronze and black ones and created the Americas and Australia in the image of the white man. Following Quigley s argumentation s, three centuries were most significant in this development: the 18th, 19th and 20th. In the 18th the Agricultural Revolution made food production so efficient that one could afford to put farm laborers into steel mills where they built railways and trains; this led to the Transport Revolution and this consequently to the Industrial Revolution of the 19th century. The Transport Revolution came to be exported to non-white countries (colonies) who had had no Agricultural Revolution, who suffered from food problems despite all their labor being tied up in farming and who therefore had no free labor to produce steel themselves but nevertheless loved to possess a railway system, too, even for the price of going into debt to the industrialized nations. Yet being the proud owners of steam engines still didn t resolve their food problems and having neither manpower nor capital they were in no position to set up the Industrial Revolution characteristic of the 19th century. Deep in debt they hopelessly lagged behind. (With the exception of Japan.) Due to the Agricultural Revolution then - it began in England in 1725 - England became the nation to eventually dominate the world. The ball was clearly in the field of the blond and blue-eyed ones, and those of other hues were set up for dependency from the start. Examples of this abound. To give just a few: when captain George Vancouver came in sight of Burrard Inlet in 1792, he declared the whole area British property without as much as setting a foot on land. New Hampshire, Maine, the Carolinas, New Jersey, Pennsylvania each belonged to individual proprietors, members of the English gentry who had received the land as grants from the king. To just mention the case of Maryland - Charles I granted Cecil Calvert (Lord Baltimore 28,000 square kilometers for a token exchange of as much as two beaver skins per year. As a further boost to this imperialist development, the rediscovery of Pythagorean geometry made European physics and mathematics take off the ground. Pythagoras considered geometry as a way to take one s attention off the world and direct it the eternal, to intellectual perfection - and in that vein Europe began to look at pure science as a religious discipline. From now, man served science and not the reverse. (Knowing what we know about the Middle Implant with its Objects one may only wonder whose eternity Pythagoras had become entangled with and on what intellectual basis Europe s new science was formed!) Apart from the Industrial Revolution, the 19th century saw plenty of explorers, adventurers and discoverers traveling the African jungles, cartographing the Himalayas, putting flags on the North and the South Pole, counting and cataloguing practically all plant and animal species on both hemispheres, visiting and describing primitive societies, writing dictionaries of their own and foreign languages, digging the ground to find traces of Greece and Rome, delving into the atomic and sub-atomic worlds, inventing novel chemicals and medicines, and so on. The whole planet was measured in its length and breadth, mapped out in detail, analyzed regarding its natural resources

173

such as metals and minerals - a general inventory had been done to prepare for the industrial, commercial and military exploitation of Earth. As well, the 19th century saw the advent of a new science. Branched off from psychiatry it was called experimental psychology where the reflexes of dogs and rats were investigated with respect to certain stimuli . This led to the recognition that one could actually condition these reflexes and therefore predict behavior. These findings of Wilhelm Wundt and Ivan Pavlov were interpreted as applying to man as well, and as a result man was no longer seen in the image of god but in the image of rats; he came to be defined as a body, and psychology as a study of observable behavior patterns, whereas before it had been a science of the mind (literally translated). Rockefeller Foundations popularized these materialist concepts widely and took care of introducing Educational Psychology into all schools with the result that - guided by stellar personages like Stanley Hall, John Dewey, James McKeen Cattell, Edward Lee Thorndike and some others who used class rooms as well as rat cages as their laboratories - today s school graduates have become unable to read and write53. Eventually, mechanistic white psychology (and medicine) drove truly soul-centered technologies like witchcraft and shamanism to near-extinction. The 20th century - well, don t we know. America one superpower, Russia the other, Germany in between, England outside and above, two World Wars, the Cold War with its threats of atomic annihilation. Being officially split in two parts (and secretly governed from central lodges), the white, blond, blue-eyed, Christian world had come close to being the One World, boastfully (if prematurely) announced by President George Bush on the occasion of the Gulf War against Saddam Hussein in 1992. All by accident? Chance twists of fate? A blind zeitgeist at work? If that were so - how does Albert Pike fit in, Grand Master of the Ancient and Acquired Scottish Rite (the top Masonic Lodge) and senior Illuminate of America, who designed a world plan in a letter written to a close collaborator in 1817, a world plan involving a first world war which was to break the power of the czar and bring Russia under the control of the Illuminati followed by a second world war to be caused by tensions between Zionists (i.e. Jews who turn their religion into a political ideology) and German nationalists, and rounded off by a third world war between Zionists and Arabs after the enforced installation of a Zionist state (today s Israel). Mind you, this was written in 1817! So was it prophecy, prediction - or a plan, the plan of a cool and calculating mind with unimaginable power at his fingertips?48 And how would those who favor the theory of the zeitgeist but blind fate , interpret the predictions of Zbigniew Brzezinski high-ranking Illuminati-brother and advisor to US president who says in his book Between two Ages , written in 1970, that there will be technologies in the near future permitting secret non-military wars by deliberately caused weather changes and earthquakes, and who foresaw a technotronic era , his ideal of sensible humanitarianism where an elite is to keep tight and minute

174

control over the population by means of electronic data banks? What does that look like in retrospect, now that 24 years have passed? Prophecy or plan?48 Not to mention a media world controlled by just a half dozen people, most of them white (Warner Brothers and Rupert Murdoch in the West, with Li Ka-shing & Son distributing their products through Star-TV in all of Asia), a media world promoting the Illuminati-designed and Rockefeller/Rothschild-sponsored One World ideals into every household via satellite TV. Pure chance or cool planning? To quote Quigley (p.950): There does exist, and has existed for a generation, an international Anglophile network which operates, to some extent, in the way the radical Right believes the Communists act. In fact, this network, which we may identify as the Round Table Groups, has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so. I know of the operations of this network because I have studied it for twenty years and was permitted for two years, in the early 1960 s, to examine its papers and secret records. (. . .) in general my chief difference of opinion (with it) is that it wishes to remain unknown, and I believe its role in history is significant enough to be known. Why was the white world chosen to be flag bearer of Xenu s One World? How come that impulse, that driving power to found New Marcabia on this Earth? Whence that greed for dominance? To remind you - Earth population before Inc.2 was predominantly white. Neither those thetans nor their Genetic Entities ever left this planet. They were caught inside the Screen. And now that they walk about in bodies again, they want their planet back. They consider other races as later imports , as foreigners imposed on them through a galactic foreign aide program, as minor , as below them . They, the whites, consider themselves the master race of old. It goes a long way back - think of Atlantis. And it can be dramatized with grand pomp as well as blood-curdling brutality - think of Hitler. The Marcabians cleverly used this unreasoning, immoderate impulse, this instinctive self-righteousness, to drive their wedge in on this planet, to get a foot in the door and eventually take over. All it took was channeling a few thousand agents of the thetan-to-body variety to Earth over the past ten thousand years, and attaching a few hundred thousand Monitors to key personnel of the opposing side, i.e. the Galactic Patrol and other competitors (who used the white race as well, naturally, and for the same reason as the Marcabians). And thus we get the rivalries, the bloodshed, the ups and downs, the dynamics so typical for this planet - eventually leading to impressive amounts of sophisticated weaponry but hardly any humanitarian progress.

175

5.3 In the Hands of Extraterrestrials YATRUSCAN DELIGHTS * A PIGGYBACK SCENARIO * LIZARD MEN * UFO MANEUVERS YATRUSCAN DELIGHTS Having concentrated in the last chapter on Xenu s role in the fate of Earth, we should now take a look at Yatrus. His influence, comparable to that of Xenu in magnitude, still differs in method in that he uses GEs instead of Monitors to control thetans. Because of the great identification of thetan and GE, this is an even more cunning trap. Where an alert thetan may still spot a foreign intention being played off on him by a distant Monitor (located in the space around the body), he will not as easily detect the GE to be the source of weird thoughts and pictures, because the GE and him pretty much share the same space! As her thoughts and pictures come from within, the thetan will naturally mistake them to be his own. In the remote past way before Inc.2, Yatrus used gentle persuasion in recruiting new collaborators; he never implanted the thetan, as we already saw. By offering unique opportunities to fulfill the professional dreams of his eager and often unsuspecting followers (for example within the context of the Conversion Program) he tickled their intention to create, contribute and help but then slyly infiltrated and permeated their minds with his own purposes - if only with his seemingly supportive see how far you can go with it which would distort anyone s intentions however clean they might have been initially. But as this is very hard to notice onself, the thetans under his sway were and are not conscious of doing evil. They are ideologically convinced of their rightness, no matter what cruelty to man, plant or animal they may be committing. Inverted help is the recipe of Yatrus; destroying by helping. Today one may expect to find Yatruscans mainly in the fields of medicine, organic chemistry and biology. The more glaring outgrowths of their work are vivisection, animal experimentation and of course, genetic engineering, yet not all they do meets the public eye. Many of them were in Yatrus s service since the days of Atlantis. Take a scientist who wildly wishes to experiment with bodies - not in order to heal but only to lustfully live out his bizarre and horrid fantasies. Such a person may still be dramatizing his pre-Atlantic body smashing experiments or his post Atlantic body engineering inventions. He never was through with that. Incomplete cycle of action. Well, give the man a concentration camp and you ll have a very satisfied scientist. And I m not talking about the Nazis alone; any concentration camp would do, be it British, French, Spanish, Dutch, American, Japanese, Chinese or Yugoslavian. To be fair it ought to be said that not all of those working in the medical or scientific field follow that sort of description. For every Yatruscan missionaire there is a counter-missionaire for sure - just think of the scientists mentioned in the section on Fringe Medicine in chapter 1.2, of great doctors winning victories over deadly

176

diseases, and of countless men and women sacrificing their life and health as nurses in times of pestilence, war and catastrophes. Now supposing one were Yatrus and wanted to attain total control over bodies and thereby thetans, too, one wouldn t like such people. What would one do about them? Simple! One would use their intention to help and pervert it by making them work on wrong targets so hard and self-sacrificingly that they wouldn t have a spare moment to notice which way they are going. This is being done in the daily routine of the modern physician in his practice or in his clinic. Most of them feel that practicing medicine in the way they do, is far from the ideals they had as young students. But they can t put their finger on what it is that s so wrong! Further, and again supposing one were Yatrus, wouldn t one prefer to see all herbal healing eliminated? Because that wisdom certainly counter-acted one s plans of total GE control by means of artificially produced, non-organic drugs. So what would one do? Again simple: one would make sure that all ethnic groups are murdered who know anything about it (Red Indians, witches, shamans) and then extinguish the plants themselves by de-naturalizing their habitat, even to the extent of cutting down whole rain forests (containing vast amounts of forgotten healing substances). To trigger this in the thetans involved (because, after all, it s thetans doing the actual destructive work) one would have to go through the GE Data Pool mentioned in chapter 1.2. To remind you - all information of the past including those on Atlantean lion-bodied, man-faced chimeras, are contained in the general GE Data Pool as engrams . The act of making a chimera was connected with pain, unconsciousness and overwhelm and therefore recorded as an engram; it went against the basic survival programs of the GE (precisely the sort of thing Yatrus enjoys most). Therefore, to get a thetan to have that sort of fantasy and actually make such things as chimeras, human clones and mutants, one would simply have to trigger the engram information recorded in the GE Data Pool and get the GE to dramatize them. (A clone is an artificial twin produced by manipulating cell division.) In particular thetans with a comparable past of their own in Atlantis would be receptive to that sort of imagery and promote the idea that one should do weird body experiments. War scenarios are very useful for this; they permit all sorts of studies under the pretense of healing and even allow this often perverted help to be called charity 78. Instead of protesting such aberratedness, Earth people naively assume this to be superior knowledge, welcome Yatruscan scenarios in the hallowed halls of universities and inside the security premises of psychiatric wards, consider it progress - and thereby sanction vivisection, animal experimentation, in-vitro fertilization, chimpanzee mothers bearing human embryos, personality modification by brain surgery and brain transplantation, chemo-therapy, radiation therapy and genetic engineering. They even give such Yatruscan predilection a religious status, build sphinxes, paint animal-faced gods on Egyptian murals and feed virgins to bull-headed deities inhabiting mazes on the isle of Crete. That s older than R6, that s Yatrus - the odd sides of Atlantis and before. Any energy cult , whether black or white, essentially attempts to draw power from the GE Pool and channel it to one s individual GE in order to gain control over

177

one s body, one s health and over other people. Be it meditating on one s chakras, performing sex magic in the style of Aleister Crowley or perhaps of Tantra, doing Reiki healing - any attempt to be one with nature or one with creation sets up an immediate resonance between one s individual GE and the Pool. It s like a betrothal between one s personal GE and Yatrus, making him everybody s forever bridegroom. Energy cults give one the impression that one were part of something larger than oneself and therefore lesser than energy. Although one s apparent command over nature through magic may reach superhuman dimensions, the magician as a thetan may in fact be kept nice and small. He himself is not the source of energy, so he believes, but something else is - prana, akasha, heavenly favors, mother nature. Good trick, that. Real magic, actually. To give but a modest example of Yatruscan delights, take satanic rites in the style of Aleister Crowley, one of Yatrus representatives on this planet, take the bloodand-sex orgies staged in Prague, Berlin and Vienna in the 1930s, where kidnapped women and children were drugged, hypnotized, slaughtered, cut to pieces and then used for the sexual satisfaction of honorable upstanding citizens who wore outfits resembling those of Roman legionnaires which in turn go back to the decorative uniforms of early Atlantis. (This incident is taken from a session report.) Closer to the present one may find examples like that reported by the human rights organization Terre des Femmes , whereby over the last few years, 40,000 young South-East Asian women and children were found to have been kidnapped and forced into Thai brothels. When they become useless they are often killed by cyanide injection. Nearly all victims were Aids-infected. Not enough auditing on the subject of Yatruscan scenarios has been done yet as to estimate to what degree they caused the modern plague of AIDS or the great plagues of the Middle Ages. They do bear a familiar handwriting, though - infiltration and permeation (the infiltration of viruses into organisms, the permeation of organisms by evil fluids ). Infiltration and permeation certainly show in blood plasma processing where the blood particles of many donors are hoovered up , mixed together in a centrifuge, kept in a container and then distributed to other owners than the original one. A very ancient procedure indeed! If one really wanted to one could easily use this blood as a carrier of special information such as Aids viruses, for example. Not a far cry from that is organ transplantation. Again the infiltration of foreign entities into a closed organism. Survival by any means, no matter which ones. Full identification with the GE. The recent examples of mothers, brain-dead for months but giving birth to healthy babies, is yet another demonstration of how Yatrus-dominated modern medicine has become. The simple ways of nature are made needlessly complex. Speaking from a Yatruscan viewpoint, an area of operation is the better the more secret and invisible it is. See how far you can go with it. Genetic engineering offers marvelous opportunities for this - think of plant and animal mutations caused by radiation, think of the recent applications to patent 2750 man-made variations to human DNA sequences, of artificial fertilization inside a test tube, of embryo splitting whereby one can produce a good dozen identical twins, use what one needs and store the rest in

178

the deep freeze for later. Delightful, isn t it? Put your sperm in the deep freeze, get sterilized, have as much sex as you like with no consequences - and if you really feel like it, your friendly nurse will produce a baby for you, in the test tube, of course; and if need be, a good dozen identical twins, too. Whenever you like. No inconvenience to the ladies. Very ancient procedures indeed. The urge to have sex with no consequences a very old dramatization as we know from chapter 4.2 - popularized the antibaby pill. Innocent as it may appear, this little pill has had the rather surprising consequence of making men infertile, and not only men but even fish, whales and crocodiles. For 30 years genital deformities in men and the animals mentioned have been observed to be increasing, along with a lessening of sperm production and fertility. The pill has been on the market for a good 40 years. Ingested by hundreds of millions of women, it is excreted through their urine, enters the sewage system, the drinking water, the rivers, the sea . . . A very clandestine effect; very Yatruscan indeed! A PIGGYBACK SCENARIO Yatruscan operations have the body, it s health and its procreation as their target; these are areas represented by the GE. In scientology terms one would refer to the 2nd and 5th dynamic. In contrast, the targets of Xenu are control of groups and mankind (3rd and 4th dynamic). Some further observations will show that two usually ride piggyback; usually those of Yatrus are carried along by Xenu s activities. Yatruscan sexual liberation , for example, goes well with the Marcab-enforced estrangement of people from each other. People who are not firmly embedded in social sub-units such as families, tribes, villages or even clubs lack a sense of belonging, ancestry and history; they lack stable orientation points. The fashionable trend of being single can be seen as an expression of this rootlessness and certainly does not further a development towards true individuality. Singles are easy to control - by giving them some (false) stable data one relieves their confusion and they will follow one as if hypnotized. That sort of thing won t happen with a person who knows his worth, his background, and has a viewpoint of his own. In order to reduce such unwanted steadfastness, the Xenian side provides mental uniformity by soft implanting in the form of TV, video games, etc. This works right into the hands of the Yatruscans who assist by blending races, destroying ethnic subgroups and weakening family cohesion. So Xenu, in the attempt to dominate the 7th dynamic (thetans), makes the 2nd and 5th dynamics (families and bodies) a logical target for Yatrus. As a result of this, marriage has become a bad joke as it is followed by divorce more likely than not, female emancipation has left countless children without a home, homosexuality gains equal rank to normal sexuality and in some countries is even granted marriage status. Instead of doing anything about it, psychology as well as sociology keep themselves busy explaining how the system brings about new trends . Xenu-type dramatizations like mass executions, prison camps, special police interrogations, psychiatric treatment by electric shock, slave trade, genocide s of ethnic

179

subgroups and other everyday occurrences - they always go along with Yatruscan dramatizations such as rape, mutilation of the sex organs or at least with inadequate living conditions leading to illness, starvation and a drawn-out, painful death. Brutal cattle transports, the fate of battery hens etc., belong as well in this category. One has to use a body; one cannot help it. For most people on Earth, there is no way around this. Using a body means suffering. Add to that BTs and Clusters leading to aberrated games and aberrated games leading to further suffering, to GE restimulation, to more suffering, and you get the picture. Yatrus benefits from anything Xenu s implants may trigger. He rides along piggyback. Take the USA as one particular example: slave trade and genocide, both Xenian Inc.2 dramatizations, were followed up by the very Yatruscan process, drawn out over generations, of Whites, Blacks, Indians and Chinese becoming intermingled. A new race, the blended Californian , was created thereby (ironically against the original intentions of the early settlers who considered North America an Arcadia of the white man, by the will of the One God). This shows how see how far you can go turns an intention into its opposite, provided one waits long enough. Too much slave trade over too long a time began to affect the slave traders themselves - not the thetans, but their bodies, their genes and that way their GEs! The changes worked by Yatrus are slow, almost imperceptible - but of astounding consequences. That such developments aren t always being left up to chance can be concluded from books like for example Paneuropa , written in 1923 by the Austrian Kalergi, member of the Zionist B hai B rith lodge. He imagines Europe to be populated by a Eurasian-Negroid future race with typical Yatruscan characteristics like uninhibitedness, shiftyness and untrustworthyness, a weak-willed race to be dominated by the Select Few - a plan not dissimilar to those of Xenu-representatives like Pike and Brzezinski. Piggyback scenarios can be found anytime in history. Take the development of trade and science in the 18th and 19th century as a backwash to the conquering of the planet by the white races there came a flood of unknown drugs to Europe; a veritable drug revolution took place! Where before one was restricted to alcohol or, more esoterically, to the odd toadstool and deadly-nightshade, one was now free to use tea, coffee, tobacco, opium, morphine, LSD, heroin, cocaine. What would the world be without chemistry! No poison gas for the First World War, no bacterial weapons, no fun for the Yatrus-infected generals of Xenu. And electronic surveillance, traditionally the domain of Xenu has come to be usurped by Yatrus, too! Inserting small computers into the brain to increase its efficiency isn t just a prediction of the World Future Society - it was probably tested out by the military already, and without anyone knowing! (Like most sensational developments, before they meet the eye of the public.) A similar nicety has been thought up by the city council of Hong Kong where it was decided for the year 1994 that the entire dog population of that city (roughly 165,000 dogs) is to be implanted with micro

180

chips containing medical data on each animal - for hygienic reasons, of course. What a good idea. Who is next? Or rather - who has it already without knowing? Another example of Xenu s mind control attempts playing into the hands of Yatrus is sodium fluoride, an innocent and harmless substance added to drinking water and toothpaste, allegedly to facilitate teeth growth in children. Because of the tremendous problems this caused for people s health in general (ulcers, acne, cancer, teeth and bone diseases, disfigurement, death), fluoridation of drinking water has been banned in many countries, fortunately - but in our context of clandestine scenarios it s still worth looking at it. Why would anyone prescribe such a fatal substance under the guise of it being healthy ? For an answer, one has to look for the money trail . Sodium fluoride is a byproduct in the manufacture of aluminium. There was more of it than one could easily get rid of in form of rat and bug poison, particularly in the 1920 s and 1930 s which saw a skyrocketing in this industry. And so - bright idea! - Dr. Gerald Cox of the Aluminium Company of America (ALCOA) addressed dentists in 1937 on the wonders of fluoride and dentition. He was even published in the 1939 Journal of Dental Research. Yet this isn t all of the answer; there is a yet more sinister side to it. Prior to fluoridation ever being actually introduced to the public health System, it was known that Soviet studies had determined that fluoride ingestion could cause a docile, almost sheep-like obedience and demeanor in the general population. The Soviets had actually tested this in their Gulag Archipelago (a chain of concentration camps). Similar research was conducted by German Scientists as well, particularly in the chemical plant I.G. Farben. One witness to this gave the following evidence: The German chemists worked out a very ingenious and far-reaching plan of mass control which was submitted to and adopted by the German General Staff. This plan was to control the population in any given area through mass medication of drinking water supplies. (. . .) In this scheme of mass control, sodium fluoride Occupied a prominent place. (. . .) The real reason behind water fluoridation is not to benefit children s teeth (. . .) The real purpose behind water fluoridation is to reduce the resistance of the masses to domination and control and loss of liberty. (. . .) Any person who drinks artificially fluoridated water for a period of one year or more will never again be the same person, mentally or physically. 54 On the subject of mind control through electronic means one could go on forever. However, that is Xenu s department; it has been broadly reported on already by other authors55. Let us therefore stay on Yatrus side of the game and not speak about thetans and minds but bodies and GEs. The 1992 Gulf War incidentally gives a good example of a Xenian/Yatruscan piggyback dramatization, insofar as the anti-tank ammunition fired from airplanes contained atomic wastes (uranium) which of course caused radiation diseases in some soldiers. Added to this side-effect on body and GE were drug experiments on American soldiers done by American authorities. A doctor who refused to administer these drugs to unsuspecting soldiers, was put in jail for 30 months78.

181

In this context the many war victims of this 20th century come to mind, a particularly sad chapter. At probably no other time in history were so many people killed within a hundred years. Starting 1894 when Japan attacked China, and ending in this year of 1994, the death toll is astounding: Japan against China, 22 million; civil war in Russia plus Stalin murdering peasants, 20 million; First World War, 12 million; Second World War, including ethnic genocide s and prison camps, 52 million; Mao making China safe for communism, 50 million; forty wars around the world since 1945, 5 million. Total, 160 million. Who needs those dead bodies?

182

LIZARD MEN In 1992, two auditors who, in their past lives, had experienced the same incident from different angles, reported on it independently from each other. It occurred in the late 1930s. One observed that dead bodies wrapped in plastic bags were taken to an underground factory in a western-US desert, to be put in huge cauldrons and boiled. The operators, although having humanoid bodies (arms, legs, etc.) were not Earth people. The bodies were boiled down to the consistency of protein jelly and then turned into small cubes. In color and material they looked like transparent soft plastic dice. The other of the two auditors, in that particular past life a US navy pilot, transported cassettes from Germany to that same underground set-up somewhere in the desert, western USA . When he found out what load his plane actually carried, he committed suicide. The cassettes were made in a mass extinction camp in the far east of Germany or perhaps in Poland. Healthy and strong young men and children were singled out and killed slowly with electric shocks. Their GEs of course ridged up tremendously during this brutal treatment and threw all their survival-energies against it. In the end the GEs were so energized that one could pluck them and preserve them in cassettes . The auditor could not explain this properly in terms of electronics but the fact remains that the life power, the living GEs of these young people were trapped in cassettes and taken to a US underground base by the planeload full. (This is before the US entered the Second World War against Germany.) Any UFO buff will immediately think of the secret subterranean laboratories for human experimentation near for example Dulce, New Mexico. They make chimeras there, as eye witnesses reported - men with snake heads and such beauties. That the US government knows of this can be concluded from the fact that the NASA deem it necessary to have an E.T. Law (1211.100 Title 14) prescribing a quarantine to people after exposure to extra-terrestrials56. As well, UFOlogists report on abductions. Here is a session report on this: a 34year old woman (let s call her Sue) found out that her sister was abducted by extraterrestrials in 1973. The girls had slept in neighboring rooms but could see each other. She was 14 years old then, her sister 17. Sue s body was in deep sleep at the time, the thetan was gone far away - yet her GE, always watchful, recorded the incident. The extraterrestrials somehow materialized in her sister s room, took her away and brought her back later. Her sister s GE had ridged up considerably; obviously something unpleasant had happened to her body. Sue s GE, in close contact with her sister s GE, had copied the information, and so Sue was able to read the data off her own GE in her session. Her sister had been taken to a space station and her ovaries were operated on. Six weeks later the girl was abducted again. A few years later she went mad and since then has spent her life in a psychiatric ward. The E.T.s looked reptiloid. That extraterrestrials are predominantly interested in GEs can be seen from this session report of July 1994: A 36-year old woman asked for some auditing because her whole head and back were cramped and at night she ground her teeth with such force that she not only awoke from the noise but as well feared for her teeth. Her dentist had

183

told her that the whole thing was psychological. The following emerged: On 14 July 1990 she was alone at home. At 3 a.m. a tall, dark figure appeared outside her window, entered her room by passing through the wall, picked up deeply sleeping body and it outside where a space vehicle awaited the two. She was put on an operation table, her head immobilized within a helmet and her body sedated by drug injection. A thin tube was passed through her right nostril into her stomach. Through this five electric shocks were given, accompanied the words: Now you belong to us! This terrified the GE extremely and she decided to accept the lesson learned. (Incidentally the whole film was recorded by the GE as the thetan was present at the time of the incident which was during deep sleep. Then an operation was done and a tiny metal plate embedded in the upper right-hand jaw. There was no blood. The plate served as a device for locating and influencing the auditee. High frequency vibrations, continuously broadcast from the space ship, were to be picked up by this antenna , which the GE would decode as fear and thus to influence or even overwhelm the thetan. After the operation was over, the woman was taken back to her room and bed. He as well as other crew members were described as unusually tall, slim and angular. They had only one eye in the middle of their forehead. In the morning the woman woke up and almost didn t get out of bed. Of course she knew nothing of the night s events. She felt very sick and miserable. For two years she suffered from diarrhea and lack of appetite. A wart grew in her right nostril. She lacked concentration and experienced a general fearfulness, something entirely unknown to her previously. For days after the abduction she experienced strong aches in the jaw. Occasionally she tasted a secretion in her mouth which seemed to come from her jaw. She consulted her dentist on this who had her X-rayed but couldn t detect anything except a tiny spot in her jaw behind her right nostril which he didn t know how to interpret. (The day after the session she asked the dentist to show her X-ray photographs of her jaw taken before the incident in 1990. On these the spot didn t show.) During the 6-hour session it became obvious that the space crew was monitoring the auditing and attempting to influence the GE via the metal plate. This made it hard to audit the GE. The crew were told that we were rehabilitating the Two Rights of a Thetan in context with Elron s game and that they should keep off. Giving these orders was accompanied by considerable discharges on the E-meter, which was interesting insofar as the auditee had no clue about the deeper significance of the words she was asked to give on. After this, continuing the session was no problem. When the engram was erased the GE felt correspondingly relaxed and saw no further reason to resist the metal plate in the jaw. As her thetan was now fully informed about the incident, the GE felt she could rely on his watchfulness in the future and go back to routine activities. The dramatization was over; the fearfulness, secretions, backache and tooth grinding ceased. The broadcast vibrations certainly hadn t ceased as they were destined for more than one target person, but the GE wasn t restimulated by them any longer.

184

The reason why this woman had been made a target was evidently that her husband is active in the field of Tesla research. As he couldn t be got at personally (he is a good solo-auditor) attempts were made to stop him by influencing his wife. Back to reptile men. They were seen more than once. On 3rd August 1992 a solo-auditor reported having spotted a space fleet from Sector 15; all staff and officers were lizard types. Auditing them on R6 materials, Inc.2 or Xenu connections didn t cause any response. The name of Yatrus, however, did produce discharges on the meter. Their job was to put their ships in a stationary orbit and to radiate microwaves towards circumscribed areas. Microwaves affect any water compound and therefore make human bodies vibrate. By resonance the GE/entities/thetan composite is affected emotionally. People are tuned down to hatefulness and start killing each other. Yet they don t do so with a quick stab of a knife or a bullet in the neck, they do it slowly and painfully. All the pre-Atlantic body cruelties are awakened in their GE-banks, played off on the thetan, and he behaves accordingly - in Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia, the Belgian Congo. Incidentally, at the time of the session the Lizard ship was working the area of Yugoslavia. Their reason for making death drawn-out and torturous is the same as given above in the example of the Nazi death camp: they want the GE to ridge up until she has reached maximum energization at which point she gets plucked , i.e. hoovered up into the load of the space ship waiting high up. The auditor found out that the GE programs of the Lizards faulty which necessitated their feeding on the GEs of other races in order to keep their bodies going and be able to procreate. According to their own statement, they have been grazing Earth for 2600 years. One Lizard fleet commander, after a lengthy session, debriefed on their background. (Session date 28 September 1993.) Originally, until about 14,000 years ago, they had humanoid flesh bodies. Then a team of Yatrus experimenters, headed by a certain Sham-Too and disguised as cultural advisors to the government , arrived on their planet, promised eternal youth and propagated a planet-wide youth cult . Bodies were supposed to be immortal, always healthy and forever young. People of course responded positively to this. Illness, old age and death was not foreign to their planet at all. The cultural advisors - with the agreement of the people and its government stationed a few satellites around the planet. Their microwave radiation activated any and all reptile-type programs in the GE Pool of that planet, and as people were open and receptive to the purportedly beneficial vibrations they were taken unawares, the vibrations went in well and within a few generations of this treatment people turned half lizard, half human. Exposed to radiation for decades, their very genes eventually deformed and the lizard characteristics became hereditary57. It was not a perfect mutation, though, because Lizard men need to feed on foreign races GEs to support themselves and procreate. They have to make up for their own lack of life force. In a way this is not different from our absorbing the life force of a carrot or a meat roast, except that we, needing to chew and digest things, do it on a less

185

direct route than them (they just slurp it up); but in principal it s the same process. Occasionally Lizard men will eat or by skin contact absorb actual body tissue, but more important to them is the living energy of the GE. They prefer GEs of their own former body type which resembled the Caucasian type of Earth (white race). Earth people always had an inkling of this bio-fusion programming on and dramatized their fears of it variously - for example in their vampire legends. Vampires are known to drink one s blood and make one become part of them . How true! Except it doesn t work by a bite in the neck but by more sophisticated means: vibratory responses between one s GE and the beams sent out by a Lizard ship build a bridge between one s own GE and their GEs, resulting in an information exchange between the two GE programs to the benefit of the Lizard GE and the detriment of the human GE, because the human body, as its sap is being depleted, grows old sooner and develops bone weakness, psoriasis and neurodermitis (skin diseases resulting in scales, very lizardy). Clients as well as solo-auditors with skin diseases found them healing after they discovered that they had been subjected to this mechanism and unknowingly tuned in to Lizard GE frequencies. (This is not to say that all psoriasis is caused by Lizard attacks. After all, some engrams have to be there to get the disease triggered in the first place, and many nutritional, medicinal, mental and electromagnetic stimuli in one s environment may trigger them off, too. Lizard attacks may be considered as one contributing restimulator, though.) UFOlogists are probably reminded of animal mutilation incidents at this point. Perhaps Lizards not only use human GEs and tissue for their procreation experiments but animal GEs and tissue, too. There has been no session report on this yet. However, it may be an explanation for the creature storms recorded Since 200 A.D. when it literally rains not only cats and dogs but as well lizards, insects, fish and frogs77. To slightly change the subject to the size of dinosaurs: although dinosaurs went extinct in the course of Inc.2, dinosaur imagery of course is still plentiful in the GE Pool of this planet. Time doesn t make it disappear. Most cultures have dragons as part of their fairy tales and their nature religions. There have always been youth cults, a yearning for eternal health and visions of physical immortality. On top of that, reptile toys and films have been intensely promoted for several years now. Knowing that it is in the survival interest of a race of lizard people to make us feel positive about reptiles, one may rightfully ask who really inspired films like Victory of 1984 (Earth people defending themselves against a reptile take-over), or the more recent and specifically pro-reptile Ninja Turtles and Jurassic Park . Not that scaly invaders hadn t been observed even earlier! They are known for longer than 5000 years. Ea or Enki, the oldest city in Sumeria, bore its name in honor of Oannes or Oe, a god of wisdom and patron of mankind. He was thought to live in a submarine palace. Surviving fragments of the Babylonian History written in Greek by the priest Berossus describe him as follows: The whole body of the animal was like that of a fish; and it had under a fish s head another head, and also feet below, similar to those of a man, subjoined to the fish s tail. His voice, too, and language, were articulate

186

and human; and a representation of him is observed even to this day (...) When the sun is set, it was the custom of this Being to plunge again into the sea, and abide all night in the deep; for he was amphibious. 22 A long time later, around 200 B.C., the Greek traveler Pausanias could still see a pickled triton exhibited in the temple of Dionysus and described him thus: Their bodies are bristling with very fine scales like a roughskinned shark. They have gills behind the ears and a human nose (...) From the breast downwards they have a dolphin s tail instead of feet. A similar specimen, but female, was seen by Pausanias in a different temple22. UFO MANEUVERS In the section above, abductions were mentioned - a UFOlogist term meaning UFO crew kidnapping Earth people. One famous, inexplicable and therefore much thought about abduction was that of Frederick Valentich who disappeared together with his cessna over the sea area of Adelaide, Australia, on 21 October 1978. Valentich, then an Air Force pilot, was exceedingly interested in the subject of space ships, found out one or two things - and was admonished by his seniors not to overstep the line. He seemed to have put his finger on something hot. A while later, during a private flight in his Cessna, Valentich reported through his radio that he saw some strange object and checked with civilian as well as military air control towers if they had noted anything. Their answer was no . Valentich stayed on the microphone and described further what went on. The object pulled him up spiral-fashion, then one heard a metal-to-metal clank through the mike - and then silence. And that was the end of Valentich. No part of his body, no scrap of his plane were ever found. It may seem peculiar that Valentich s seniors told him to hold back a little on the subject of UFOs and that he should have had an accident shortly after. Not so peculiar if one knows the end of the story. It was found by FW in a 6-hour session on 28 February 1993. In 1981, FW was on a passenger plane to Melbourne. In the area of Adelaide the plane went through a CAT (Clear Air Turbulance), shook violently but wasn t damaged and soon after landed in Melbourne. FW got out, went to a book shop, was magnetically drawn to a book on Valentich s disappearance three years earlier; whilst reading this book he suffered extreme stomach pains and head aches. This happened anytime later when he read a book that made him think. CATs are assumed to be left-overs of UFO activity in a certain area. Very true, as it turned out. Because inside the CAT, FW contacted the ridge Valentich had made during his abduction - which explains not only why FW had this uncanny interest in a book on Valentich but as well his stomach pains and head aches (as we shall see in a moment), and made it possible to discover what really had happened. Valentich was pulled up by a space craft, his plane clanked to the body of the craft and stayed there by magnetic adhesion, Valentich is put on an operating table and undergoes some sort of surgery executed by a biotechnical robot in the presence of an Australian army officer. A control chip is put in the back of his head; at his solar plexus

187

(GE focus) the concept Don t think by yourself is beamed. Then he is put to work in the space craft. He cannot move his body except on being commanded to execute specific jobs. The rest of the time he stands there as stiff as a window dummy - like many others who suffered the same fate. Any attempt to think own thoughts is immediately punished with extreme stomach pains. Some of the craft s crew have fish heads . (Discovering all this during the auditing action discharged and dispersed the ridge and resolved FW s pains.) In a similar fashion, data about the famous Rosswell crash were found out. On 2 July 1947, a farmer saw a space ship crashing near Rosswell, New Mexico, alerted the press and the next day it was all over the papers. Small people with slit eyes were found near it, dead. They were Greys , as UFOlogists would say. Greys, although of human shape, are physiologically built like insects and have facet eyes. The military immediately ordered this to be hushed up and started a disinformation campaign on it. A few days later the press said it had been a weather balloon. In a session on 9 November 93, more data on this came to light. Whilst traveling through New Mexico years before his session, a solo-auditor had picked up the ridge one of the Greys made before his death. Here is the story: the Gray ship collided with another space craft resembling the Adamski type . Their gravity fields somehow got in each other s way. No aggression was involved; it happened by accident. They were in fact allies. The Greys, being insect-like robots and seemingly created for this job by genetic experimentation on some other planet, were much less emotional about the affair than the crew of the Adamski craft, consisting of one Earth man (described by the auditor as a Nazi type ) and some rather outlandish looking blond and blue-eyed ones, certainly humanoid but too beautiful to be true. As the ridge of the Adamski crew was lumped up with that of the Gray and read well on the meter, the auditor could get a full debrief. The Nazi was upset about the crash because he was afraid that their secret scenario was going to come out in the open. It consisted of infiltrating the humanoid beauties (sometimes called Venusians by UFOlogists) into the U.S. society, making them speak of love and peace and so distract from the real intention - which was to take over Earth at long last. (Mind you, it was 1947, two years after the end of World War II.) This plan was to be executed by raiding the US with space craft stationed in Antarctica, in alliance with Greys acting as technical instructors . The background of this is that George Adamski, in 1952, had observed and photographed a certain type of space craft looking somewhat like a tropical hat of colonial times (which then came to be called Adamski craft ). He claimed to have had personal contact with their crew, exceedingly beautiful blond and blue-eyed men and women who persuaded him to believe that they were Venusians. Amongst other symbols they used swastikas for their identification. In a later session by the same solo-auditor, on 26 March 1994, the origin of these Venusians was recognized as different from the one stated by them. It looks as if they were the product of cloning experiments done with fertilized human ova (eggs) on Mars.

188

The ova are taken in a deep-frozen state from Earth to Mars. They are hatched on Mars; the whole pregnancy period is entirely artificial. As Mars doesn t have a human GE Pool to feed energy to the growing embryos, GE power has to be hoovered up from Earth by space craft, similar to the technique described before with regard to Lizards but apparently executed by non-Lizards. It isn t quite clear who does it; they might even be humans, because this story was discovered through auditing the ridge of an American Air Force pilot who was abducted, brain-operated to robotize him and make him forget , taken to the artificial Mars moon Phobos and put on duty there with no chance of ever returning. All of this was done by Earth agents. Sounds crazy, doesn t it? But in the light of a few more data, it might even ring true. In-vitro fertilization , done for many years on Earth, means that a number of ova are taken from a woman s ovary (who cannot get pregnant by ordinary means), put into a test tube and fertilized with the sperm of her husband. Of the fertilized ova, some are put back into the woman s womb and with good luck she goes through an ordinary pregnancy and has a baby like any other mother would. Some other eggs, though, are deep frozen just to be sure; in case we need them for you later . As long as this is done between the 16th and 32nd cell division, the embryo can later be defrosted and cloned. What happens with these embryos? Hundreds and hundreds of them are put into the deep-freeze year after year. Once the woman has become a happy mother, she won t ask for them any more. The medical trade papers have noted (with alarm) that biological experiments were done to take such embryos through a full pregnancy by putting them into sheep or chimpanzees, or even create entirely artificial test-tube babies. Such experiments were successful but were interrupted for ethical reasons . Well, well. At any rate - it can be done. And still the question remains: where do the rest of them go? Thousands of deep-frozen human embryos - to Mars? And regarding Antarctica - in 1938, the German Captain Ritscher undertook an expedition to Antarctica at the order of Hitler s field-marshal Herrmann Goring; having arrived there, Ritscher legally annexed 200 000 sq.km and named it New Schwabenland . Heavy mining machinery for building underground tunnels was transported there every few months over many years. In 1945, the last year of the war, German submarine production reached a peak point. Some hundreds of submarines could never be accounted for after the war was over. Where had they gone? A former crew member gave evidence that a continuous stream of submarine parts had been transported by submarine to unknown locations. In 1946/47 another expedition was done, this time ordered by the American government and led by the seasoned polar explorer Richard Byrd. Disguised as an exploration, it was in fact a military expedition - Admiral Byrd had 3000 men and an aircraft carrier under his command. Looking at his air route (you can see it in old school atlases), he seemed to be interested in New Schwabenland. Only a few months later, in March 1947, he withdrew and told the Chilean paper El Mercurio that the security of the poles was of supreme importance against a possible invasion. He had met extraterrestrials of the Venusian type and lost four planes in combat with them.

189

In 1953, Byrd went a second time to Antarctica, this time with track vehicles and a few thousand men, allegedly to cross the continent via the South Pole but more likely (as rumor has it) to yet again attempt entering New Schwabenland. Again he was beaten off. And since then there is the assumption that the Nazis have underground space stations in Neu Schwabenland. Yet - and this is no rumor- the Nazis did have working flying saucers driven by turbines. Anti-gravity discs with tachion-generators were in their experimental stages. Called Haunebu they were expected to travel at 6000 km per hour and more, stay aloft for 55 hours and be fully space-worthy . Technical drawings of them make them look surprisingly alike Adamski craft (of which there are actual photographs) ... So all the bits mentioned above somehow fall into place. (And that the Germans were good at building underground fortifications was proved more than once during World War II.)58, 59, 60, 61

190

CHAPTER 6 Defense by Telepathy 6.1 The Magicians War OCCULTISM WHITE AND BLACK * A FORMATION OF FORCES After hearing so much about evil powers holding Earth in its grip, some readers may perhaps feel a bit discouraged. Yet it isn t as bad as it seems. The fact in itself that the events and circumstances of the previous three chapters could be discovered at all, means that no secret remains one forever, no intruder undetected. Defense is possible - even attack! Because although a person, attempting to free himself from some unwanted attitude, emotion, sensation or pain by means of magic, shamanism, meditation or auditing, has it in his mind to defend himself, he does in the same instance attack, too. And he would even have the cooperation of his attacker! since at the bottom of their hearts all thetans want to rejoin the co-existence of static outside all evilness. Defense by telepathy is neither a new thing nor is it restricted to practitioners of certain schools of thought. It is in fact as old as the Vedas. Yoga and meditation, carried forward throughout the millennia by the Buddha s, gurus and swamis of the Far East and practiced by hundreds of thousands, has helped to clear the air on this planet and prepared its spiritual recovery. All along, meditation was the best defense Earth had, and possibly the only one, too - because before this age of nuclear power and space flight no-one would have been able to grasp that we were once wiped out by atom bombs and are now controlled by spacemen, and so no-one would have thought of attacking extraterrestrial powers. Through the advanced understanding of the cosmos brought about by the 19th and 20th century, it became at long last comprehensible that aggressors from outer space might exist for real, and that they might be planning to colonize and exploit this planet. During the golden age of science fiction in the 1940s and no doubt with the help of some friendly missionaires - this new comprehension was widely communicated to the people of Earth. It was only science fiction , of course - but a gigantic leap forward compared to the earlier religious fiction with its fiery gods descending from the heavens . By devising his particular methodology it is perhaps none other than Ron Hubbard who shifted gear from defense to attack. Whereas before one had had no other means except sitting down and burning up the masses wafting about one, Hubbard s approach to the mind in combination with new scientific paradigms made it possible to

191

find the source of those masses and engage in eye-to-eye (or rather mind-to-mind) combat with hostile thetans on their space craft. To appreciate Hubbard s work one would have to understand against the background of an age long, universal struggle between black and white magicians in the best tradition of old Atlantis, a struggle that culminated in World War II with its atom bomb, symbol of Marcabian supremacy. It would go far beyond the limits of this book to prove in all detail that World War II a war between magicians, and that its military battles were the esoteric expression of enormous tensions between esoteric forces. But at least we can hint at it and refer the interested reader to further literature62, 65, 80 OCCULTISM WHITE AND BLACK When the Illuminati-brother Albert Pike, his letter and plan for world dominance from 1817 were mentioned earlier on, we did already get in touch with the games context leading up to World War 2. It went on in 1860 when Robert Wentworth Little founded the lodge of the Rosicrucians in England. By this act, Little merely announced officially that this already centuries-old brotherhood existed indeed, because Rosicrucians allegedly take their name from their founder in 1484, Christian Rosencreutz. This knight had traveled the Orient and was initiated into the secret lore of the Arabs, heavily suppressed by the Catholic Church. As a secret brotherhood and intimately related to the Freemasons, the Rosicrucians continued the general European tradition of Greek, Egyptian and Qabalistic occultism. That one of their 16th century exponents was the cosmologist Dr. Robert Fludd, said to be an incarnation of Hermes Trismegistos and reappearing recently as Franz Bardon, seems a clear indicator that Rosicrucians are representatives of white magic . In the 18th century, though, their alchemistic lore had become forgotten and they reduced their performance to fairly embarrassing symbolic rites. 0ccultism became the fashion of the day. In the 1880s, all sorts of secret societies were founded in France, England, Germany and America; most notable amongst them the Theosophic Society of Helena Petrowna Blavatsky. Madame Blavatsky, then roughly 50 years old, had spent a great part of her life traveling the East and saw Egypt, Africa and India; she had even gained entrance to Tibet, then off limits to all foreigners. This adventure-hungry, chain-smoking and hashish-loving lady who Claimed that the world is governed from the Himalayan caves by a small number of mahatmas (supreme spiritual teachers), brought new impulses to western occultism; she added the flavor, the terminology and the practices of the East - white magic again. Right at that time the opposing forces landed a hit, too - quite unexpectedly in the seemingly clean and rational world of science. In 1881 Michelson and Morley proved in a fairly short and superficial experiment that the concept of ether was utterly unscientific . The experiment was repeated at various times and directly caused Einstein s to abandon this concept in 1905. But perhaps they landed only half a hit, really - because good old European ether, just shown the door by infallible science, reentered the scene through a back door, with a little help by Madame Blavatsky and disguised under the name of akasha . (Morley s pupil Dayton Miller demonstrated in 1933 how spurious the Michelson-Morley experiment really was; he used the same

192

experimental set-up and proved the exact opposite! But although the ether was allowed back in now, and although Einstein wrote positively about it, nobody seemed to want it. Unscientific proved to be a good and lasting label. Space was empty, and that was that!63) Helena Blavatsky died in 1891. From now on, two other persons representing different sides of the game, gained in importance: Rudolf Steiner, then 30 years old, and Aleister Crowley, then 16 years old. Four years before Madame Blavatsky s death, in 1887, the occult society Golden Dawn , a Rosicrucian splinter group, was founded in England. Some of the best minds of Britain, such as poet W.B. Yeats or the president of the Royal Society, Sir Gerald Kelly, were its members. Twelve years later, in 1898, Aleister Crowley as well joined the Golden Dawn. Crowley, financially independent and never married, was able to devote all his time to adventurous traveling and experimenting with occultism. Perhaps his main characteristic was an insatiable greed for sexual satisfaction, no matter in what way. Small wonder that he should feel attracted by the O.T.O, the Ordo Templi Orientalis, founded by Carl Keller in 1901. The order s secret was sexual magic, performed as sado-masochistic satanic rites, black masses and sex orgies complete with blood, excrement, oral, anal, homosexual and bisexual intercourse and sodomy with animals. Black magic in best Yatruscan style. To pick up the other thread: Rudolf Steiner, in 1902 general secretary of the German section of the Theosophic Society, joined the O.T.O, too, and in 1906 became leader of its German branch, but then withdrew from it to found his Anthroposophic Society in 1912. In other words, he decided for white magic and right in the same year (1912) Crowley took leadership of the English section of the O.T.O. One might well construe this to be a sundering of magic camps - particularly in view of the fact that around that time, three eminent white magicians descended to Earth to take bodies and get active: in 1909, Franz Bardon; in 1910, Mr. Mahesh (later Maharishi); in 1911, Ron Hubbard. That players of such importance assembled at this time can only mean that things were expected to come to a head. The next confrontation between magic camps occurred between 1920 and 1922 when Crowley founded Thelema , his monastery in Sicily, and became head of the complete O.T.O. - whilst at the same time Yogananda began his lecture tour in the USA. No greater difference between two exponents of magic could be imagined! Crowley, under his motto: Do what thou wilt shall be the whole of the law; love is the law, love under will lived a life of lust and wantonness on Sicily, prided himself on being the vile beast 666 of St. John s Revelation (Rev 13.18) and in fact did his utmost to live up to that reputation. On the one hand he helped himself to generous quantities of opium, cocaine, ether, morphine, heroin, hashish, laudanum, veronal and alcohol in order to keep his asthma down and his depressions in check, on the other he saw himself as a world teacher , a spokesman of cosmic powers, an avatar , i.e. a god in human form (perhaps Yatrus in person?). Even if one were willing to read all manner of

193

philosophic finesse into Crowley s dictum of thelema (Greek for will ), one would have a hard time defending it in new of what Crowley factually did in order to subdue the world under his demonic visions64. Love was a mere cover for him to have his will - very Yatruscan indeed! And quite a contrast to Yogananda, the chast Hindu monk who after years of study with his guru Sri Yukteswar, came to the USA in 1920. Appearing on the stages of large assembly halls in dozens of cities, giving lectures and initiating some hundred thousand students into yoga, he took the nation by storm. When he had an appointment with Calvin Coolidge in 1927, he was the first Indian swami (wise man) to be received by an American president. With his book Autobiography of a Yogi he gave an unprecedented and broadly published account in popular language of the philosophy and practice of Hinduism right into the teeth of a world preparing for war. The next clash between warring camps of magic - and this time not only as a temporal coincidence but in form of the physical confrontation between two magicians came in 1941 when Franz Bardon was taken prisoner by Hitler s henchmen and asked to support Hitler. This demands some explanation. Let s begin with a few words on Hitler - he was fascinated with mysticism, occultism, yoga and magic. Various political as well as occult power groups worked through him to attain their ends62, 65. Occasionally he suffered from powerful telepathic visions, served as a spiritualistic medium to unknown entities and often broke down physically under the strain. All sorts of spirits and demons seemed to use his body as a communication vehicle. He built strong links with certain Tibetan monastic groups of the black magic variety; when Berlin fell to the allied troops at the end of the war, they found about a thousand dead Tibetans in German uniforms amongst the debris of the Fuehrer s head quarters. The SS was organized on the strict pattern of the Sociela Jesu (Jesuits); group meditation exercises in Tibetan fashion were routine. To ensure the Endsieg (final victory), any half way promising technique on the esoteric market was tested, etc. though these same techniques were forbidden to the people. Astrologers, spiritulistic mediums, pendulum experts, Indian tattva yogis and Japanese Zen monks were kept in secret research centers and utilized to pre-divine the run of the war, influence it fortuitously or work out drills to enhance the obedience and endurance of soldiers and officers. (The allies considered the occult background of the Third Reich important enough to raid all German libraries after the war, remove these materials and keep them locked and sealed to the present day46 62). The political stage at that time was stuffed with Xenian and Yatruscan props, perhaps with a disproportionate amount of Yatruscan ones. Mass killings during military actions, mass evacuation and extermination of civilians were certainly reminiscent of Inc.2 and therefore Xenian in character - but what about man farming to breed the blond and blue-eyed, the new man , the coming race ? What about the vril society (vril being something like cosmic prana)? What about the smithy of Hitlerian ideology, the Thule Order , where Tibetan black magic was blended with the mythology of Nordic races, specifically of the idolized Aryans? ( Aryan means noble in Sanskrit.) Isn t that tantamount to a yearning for the high days of Atlantis, for the Yatruscan glories following Xenu s Middle Implant? And of re-establishing the

194

supremacy of the white race by literally breeding them, extinguishing other races and by dominating the rest of the world by brute force? Hitler belonged to a super-secret lodge called FOGC or the Ninetyniners . FOGC means Freemasonic Order of the Golden Centuria . There were only 99 such orders, each having 99 members; usually these were wealthy and influential people interested in even more material wealth and using black magic to that end. They specialized in telepathic combat and even used tepaphones , a telepathic device producing tremendous heat in the body of the victim, literally boiling him inwardly and eventually killing him. It worked over any distance. Understandably, this know-how was of tremendous importance for Hitler; it was the thing to eliminate enemy leaders with and so win the war. Yet he seemed to need the co-operation of the other FOGCs but didn t seem to know how to contact them. He offered Franz Bardon, who had made himself a name as a real magician in the 1930s, any rank and office in the Nazi government if he d only support Hitler and, most importantly, give him the locations around the world of the remaining 98 FOGCs. Bardon refused, was tortured, still refused and then was sentenced to death - yet escaped because Breslau concentration camp was bombarded before the execution could take place10,66. A FORMATION OF FORCES In 1945, when atom bombs announced Xenu s victory, a rather amusing gettogether between Hubbard and Jack Parsons, a Crowley disciple, took place in California, showing that confrontations between magicians hadn t stopped occurring yet. Hubbard had wanted to snoop about in the enemy camp, it seems, and considerably embarrassed Crowley 64 72. Of higher importance, though, were the 1950s (incidentally the beginning of the age of Aquarius). They saw a tapping of hidden spiritual resources and a formation of forces against the now firmly established position of Xenu s Marcabians. In 1950, Hubbard stepped into the limelight by publishing his Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health , thereby declaring war against the Xenu- and Yatrus-inspired psychiatry of his day, a psychiatry indulging in cures like electric shocks, cutting out parts of their patients brain and drugging them into unconsciousness. (Please note that literally translated, psychiatrist means mind-doctor , not brain doctor .) In the same year, the Chinese healing gymnastics called tai-chi were made publicly available and introduced to the west. Before that, tai-chi was a secret tradition within a few families only who handed their particular styles down from father to son and taught their art under strictest confidentiality. That the Wang family decided to popularize tai-chi might be viewed as a definite move against the fully mechanized and soul-less Yatruscan medicine of Europe and America. In 1956 Ravi Shankar arrived in America and initiated countless westerners not to meditation but to classical Indian music, right at the time when beat music , jazz and rock music began to form. Thanks to Ravi Shankar s beneficial influence (in particular on the Beatles), the mechanized Marcabian, four-beats-to-the-bar humdrum

195

rhythms, threatening to take over all music, were kept within limits67. (What they can do to life forms was demonstrated by the plant experiments referred to in chapter 1.2.) A further revelation of knowledge so far kept confidential, was the appearance of Franz Bardon s three books on magic in 1957 68, 69,70. He had received the order to write and publish them he had received in a vision about twenty years earlier; it was given to him by Urgaya, according to Bardon a manifestation of the creator of the universe who with the help of twelve sages, guides the fate of the world from somewhere in the Earth belt zone . Bardon was told to reveal the first four pages of the Book of Wisdom to the world - a demand so unexpected and shocking that he initially rather felt like refusing than complying. One year later, in 1958, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi came to the west and found America and Europe already prepared and ready to receive eastern knowledge - thanks to Madame Blavatski, Ravi Shankar and of course, Paramhansa Yogananda. Of those two great Indian meditation teachers, Yogananda and Maharishi, we should speak some more. Yogananda taught Kriya Yoga, a technique entrusted to him by his teacher Lahiri Mahasaya who again learned it from his guru Babaji. Originally Kriya Yoga was kept a strict secret and only to be used by swamis, i.e. people fully dedicated to attain spiritual awakening. The saint Babaji is said to have retrieved this technique after it had become forgotten and lost. Babaji is quite a mythical personage - neither his real name nor his birth and death dates are known; he has lived secluded in the Himalayas throughout hundreds of years (so says Yogananda) without any need to incarnate and reincarnate, since he is in full control of prana (life force) and thus able to create a body out of thin air when he needs one, or to permanently keep the one he has at a set age. Towards the end of the 19th century he told his main pupil, Lahiri Mahasaya, to spread Kriya Yoga far and wide whilst living the life of a householder-yogi , i.e. a man who fulfills the societal duties of having a family and a job and at the same time progresses on a spiritual path - quite a novelty within the spiritual tradition of India! Lahiri Mahasaya followed his master s command and spread Kriya Yoga widely within India and initiated hundreds of people. With the agreement of Babaji, he entitled Yogananda to export this technique to America and beginning in 1920, Yogananda did again an unveiling of secret lore to all the world. A similar story could be told about Maharishi Mahesh Yogi and his guru Swami Brahmananda Sarasvati, usually called Gurudev , a grand old man in the strictest tradition of Hinduism. Gurudev had left his parents at the age of 12 to become a yogi, withdrew into the jungle for forty years and meditated. During this time he developed the mantra meditation technique now known under the name of Transcendental Meditation (TM). Around 1925, after his graduation in physics, Maharishi (then only Mr. Mahesh) was drawn into the circle around Gurudev, eventually accepted Gurudev as his guru and took on the title of Maharishi ( great seer ). At the behest of Gurudev, Maharishi was to take TM into the world. He arrived in Hawaii pretty much without a penny, and from there began his missionary work which soon spread all across the US

196

and finally reached Europe. When the Beatles became his disciples, he had it made. Thousands came to his ashrams (meditation centers) in India, America and Europe asking for their initiation. Maharishi s aims are not limited to merely taking individual che las (disciples) to their samadhi (enlightenment) but to relieve stress on a planetary scale. He works on the same theory as Hubbard in that he says (speaking in Hubbard s terms) that as soon as the balance between free theta and enturbulated theta is in favor of free theta, negative forces will be out-maneuvered and positive developments can set in without being stopped. Says Charles F. Lutes, president of the U.S. branch of Maharishi s Spiritual Regeneration Movement : Maharishi s plan of action and aim embrace the whole world. It is his stated objective to redirect the course of humanity by means of the widest possible propagation of the knowledge and practice of Transcendental Meditation. To this end centers of meditation have been established in the major cities of most countries of the world. 24 Not a far cry from Hubbard s Clear the planet! However, Hubbard being Hubbard didn t quite word his aims as politely as the above; in his particular style it sounds like this: I m not from this planet. Now if I can take it on that it would be a very good thing to clean up this planet, you who were here can damn well share in the responsibility and not say, it s all up to Ron! The 1950s apparently were the decade of clearing the planet . The next two chapters will deal with Hubbard s part in this project and that of his successors.

197

198

6.2 Hubbard's Attack CLEARS IN TROUBLE * THE OT III BREAKTHROUGH * HUBBARD RECRUITS LOYAL OFFICERS * A BLUNTED ATTACK CLEARS IN TROUBLE It took Hubbard a good thirty years to devise his techniques; after his death his work was continued by some of his followers. About this research, its difficulties, complications and results you are going to read in this chapter. ( Scientology is not a new name, by the way. Already in 1934 it was used by the Austrian Dr. A. Nordenholz as the title for his book Scientology - a Science on the Nature and Validity of Knowledge ( Scientologie - Wissenschaft von der Beschaffenheit und der Tauglichkeit des Wissens ). Perhaps the word research , sounding rather grand and impressive, ought to be clarified before presenting the results obtained through it. Any research done, whether by Hubbard or (outside the Church of Scientology) by his successors always concerned the alleviation of unwanted attitudes, emotions, sensations and pains. It was rarely done as a thing in its own right but rather served to find more practical approaches to cracking cases and relieving the complaints of auditees. Therefore, when contacts with extraterrestrials are mentioned in this text, the auditor in question neither decided to go out space ship hunting that day nor was he after paranormal psychic abilities, rather he simply wanted to get rid of something that bothered him. He didn t feel quite as well that day as the day before, called up his case supervisor, asked for instructions and sat down with his meter to audit. This way unknown periods on time track were contacted and unheard of incidents found. In 1950, Dianetics is published and becomes a bestseller Hubbard had audited 273 cases to gather the experience necessary to write this book 72. Although Clears were made, they proved to be very shaky Clears, and Hubbard was exposed to considerable ridicule. What had gone wrong? Various auditing reports of witnesses to the early days make it appear that Hubbard did some sort of telepathic intelligence activities in the late 1930s, whereby he devised methods to make a thetan leave his body and go off spying on Xenu and Yatrus type scenarios. The auditor in question (HJ) found himself engaged in three different investigations taking place in three different sites: one in Tibet where he witnessed heavy mining machinery being installed by German engineers, probably to find Uranium. The second site was Vienna where HJ slipped into the body of a man enjoying the Crowley style blood-and-sex orgy described earlier, and co-experienced it with him. The third site was in the Nevada desert where electronic devices inside a cave were to be investigated. The instruments, however, were of such type that HJ as thetan exterior

199

was spotted, hauled in and implanted. This was the end of the co-operation of HJ with Hubbard (until he came to get audited in his next life, i.e. his present one). PS, another auditor, found out that he died in the course of an experimental session in the late 1940s. This explained his somewhat strained relationship with Hubbard in this life. A third auditor, TJ, died in 1957. His report of the situation is so comprehensive that it s worth recounting in detail. Although TJ wrote it in 1992, before doing OT III, some details he mentions go beyond what is covered by Hubbard s OT III materials of 1968. Which means that already in 1957, at the time of TJ s death, he knew more about OT III than what was officially released ten years later. In his report TJ confirms - without having read any biography on Hubbard - that Hubbard had gone through all sorts of rituals and rites to find out how they did it on Earth, had drawn out of them what seemed useful and eventually devised the rudiments of what was to become dianetics . They met in 1947 and began to co-audit each other. TJ s name then was Robert Fuller. To begin with, past lives, thetans and exteriorization were not part of their procedure. Between 1949 and 1952, though, these concepts evolved in gigantic forward leaps, largely because an oscilloscope was used - a huge machine, no dial and needle, just a tube with a fluorescent line that was either flat or showed peaks when charge was contacted. The technique was simple - you just followed up each and every peak to find its source. This way incidents far below the ordinary awareness level of people were found, amongst them implants. There was no peak that one wouldn t follow up. Lacking both proper procedures and experience one contacted huge bubbles of charge that way but didn t always deflate them. This caused considerable physical and emotional strain on the auditees involved. Beginning 1950 the whole scene around Hubbard seemed to be under some sort of inexplicable pressure. One day Fuller received a strong electric jolt during a session, like a stroke of lightning going through him. The jolt seemed virtually aimed a him. They became worried. Dead bodies would be the worst PR one could imagine! Hubbard s group was rocked by other inexplicable phenomena, too. Certainly, spectacular results were attained through auditing; for example chronic psychosomatic complaints would disappear within minutes - but were followed shortly after by emotional crashes, body pains, even loss of memory. Engrams would be erased, only to re-appear again. Auditees and particularly Clears were confused, scared, shocked. Some simply disappeared, never to come back. People felt that auditing made them feel worse and that they were better off without it. This discouraging phase went on till 1954. To explain these ups and downs Hubbard surmised that one dealing with dramatizations of old implants. But as they had already audited huge implants from trillions of years back (see History of Man ) - what could be left that might be even more powerful? Fuller assumed that they were dealing with a strong control mechanism active in the present, not only influencing single people but also interacting

200

between people, and that this control mechanism is based on entities/ridges activated from outside via waves. Clears appeared to be purposely suppressed by control entities but didn t have sufficient training and awareness to counteract this influence. Hubbard developed techniques to make the thetan go exterior and fight the enemy, such as technique 8-80 and 8-8008 . The results seemed promising - but not for long, because the people up there in their control stations became aware of what was going on here on Earth and increased their control. The situation seemed hopeless. In 1954 they decided to change over to lighter processes in order to make it easier on the public. The research group, consisting of no more than three members, separated as they felt they were drawing too much attention from whoever it might be. They pretended to be non-existent. After a pause of three years, in 1957, there was a last meeting. They agreed to make it appear as if scientology was going the wrong way and did not function at all, in order to mollify the controlling powers and make them less watchful. Hubbard proposed that one of them should be sacrificed to mislead the enemy, after the tune of key scientology researcher commits suicide out of frustration about scientology being a huge error . After heated discussions Fuller agrees to be the one. He has no children, his wife died a few years earlier. The decision isn t easy on him because firstly one doesn t know who is behind the attacks, secondly one can t be sure if the ruse is going to work, thirdly Fuller would have preferred to continue their research by more ordinary means. In 1957 he jumps off the Hoover Dam, kills his body, exteriorizes and receives the Standard Screen Treatment for Thetans on Their Way Out . This includes a high court questioning him on his sins, sitting in judgment over him and sending him away again. It includes the impression of being bodily strapped to a chair, getting pictures of houses, cars and landscapes with a voice randomly uttering engineering-type information and simultaneous heat/cold/electrical treatment to his illusory body. Sometimes the chair spins wildly. The voice gives good advice like Be calm. Be quiet. Sleep. Towards the end of the treatment he tries on various bodies of soft plastic material with definite sex organs and receives pleasurable sexual titillation s. This way he is joined up with a GE. Then he is exposed to pictures of thetans being transported to Earth in ice blocks. He is funneled inescapably in the direction of his body, enters it (no choice) and is born. This report and the ice cubes mentioned by Hubbard in History of Man would mean that Hubbard became aware of Xenu-type installations as early as 1952, i.e. fifteen years before OT III was released to the public. It is likely, however, that he was misled by the Screen at that time and didn t perceive the totality of Xenu s control scenario yet. Hubbard did know of Yatrus, though. TJ wrote a letter to me in early 1989, at a time when neither I nor anyone I knew had ever heard that name, and described the games constellation he saw himself involved in the 50 s. He mentioned Ron, Xenu, Yatrus (he called him Heliatros ), himself and some further players and opponents. It would indeed make sense that Hubbard knew Yatrus. One doesn t have to go back as far as the Conversion Program to assume that (when the two were at loggerheads with each other). The mere fact that Hubbard wrote Dianetics speaks for

201

it, because Dianetics , as it aims at freeing the thetan from the burden of an aberrated GE and making him Clear , essentially attempts to reverse the effects of the Middle Implant when GE and thetan were forcibly married for all time to come - the scheme of Yatrus. THE OT III BREAKTHROUGH So much on Fuller s report. The next few decades of research, from 1957 to 1978, are covered fairly well by Hubbard s books, tapes and bulletins. The story in brief: dianetic auditing turned out to be too crude a tool for reliably making Clears. Telepathic enemy cross-fire added unexpected complications. Hubbard then assumed that it would be sufficient to exteriorize a thetan from his body to make a Clear but found that a thetan despite being exterior was still connected to entities and that the reactive bank therefore wasn t limited to the engrams of the GE bank. He had to recognize that there was a thetan bank, too, and that this thetan bank was dragged along by a thetan from life to life and body to body. He discovered that thetan banks are built on the principle of opposing goals creating a mass when restimulated, and named them Goals Problems Masses or GPMs . Researching GPMs led up to the Middle Implant and so, with the release of the Clearing Course in 1965, a culmination point was reached. GPMs were worked on by scores of auditors, each auditing hundreds of hours on them. Yet neither dianetics auditing nor exteriorization processes or running GPMs really brought the expected result. Clears were never fully cause over mental mest as the definition of this state required. Their state was brittle. Indeed, some bank imagery could be successfully recognized and handled by them but apart from that they seemed to be affected by something yet unrecognized. Hubbard took his attention off Yatrus and the GE/thetan connectedness and concentrated on the strings thetans appeared to hang on. The breakthrough came in 1968 when OT III was released. Xenu and his implants - that was it; that seemed to be the real reason for the troubles one had had. Thousands of solo-auditors around the world located and audited BTs and Clusters, thus thinning out the dark masses around this planet. And there were Certainly enough of them to keep one busy. The attack was on. Hubbard s job seemed done and his mission fulfilled. He took a break from researching and for the next ten years (1968-1978) summarized the tech in form of loose-leaf bulletins and taped lectures. As well he wrote two science-fiction books, Battlefield Earth and Mission Earth , and the film script Revolt in the Stars . HUBBARD RECRUITS LOYAL OFFICERS The research for OT III, its release and subsequent delivery to the public were to put a stamp, a branding mark on Hubbard s Church which was never going to be

202

removed. Some peculiar features, adopted then, stayed with it for good. To start with, OT III research had been done on a small fleet of ships, the Sea Organization . The public had to go there to do their OT III. Hubbard purposefully had chosen dark-blue uniforms when he started the Sea Project in 1966 - because similar uniforms and the Sea Org emblem (a five-pointed star embraced by two laurel branches) had been worn by loyal officers during Inc.2. Hubbard s purpose was to evoke memories of Inc.2 and awaken some of his staff to their old goals. The Sea Org motto We Come Back! speaks for itself. Not only was the Sea Org started on a calculated restimulation the public was addressed in the same way. On the dust covers of any scientology book you can see R6motives: spacemen loading boxes into a space craft, an image of the R6 god, angels, an exploding volcano, a railway train, and so on. Hubbard expected to get people going again - and the ruse worked. In fact it worked for both sides! Both parties involved in the old battle were magically attracted by the Sea Org and its uniforms, and the recreated tensions between former loyal officers and former Xenu renegades nearly tore the Church of Scientology apart more than once. Battling is all they had in mind, on either side. Their confrontation was made complicated, because during Inc.2 (as you may remember from chapter 3.1) many loyal officers had been captured, taken to Coltus and given an implant turning them against their own cause - therefore, seeing Sea Organization uniforms would evoke the reverse vector in them. They would join the Sea Org and do the exact opposite of what they were supposed to. Perfectly incomprehensible! A lot of the super-security and paranoia of the Church of Scientology can be put to this explosive mixture of fanatic obedience, mission-obsessedness and treachery. It would as well explain the vast amount of mistakes that were made, the hairraising incompetence and the harsh humiliations Sea Org staff were prepared to suffer from the hand of Hubbard. To top it, Hubbard himself had appeared at this particular historical point to make up for the omissions of his own remote past, and he certainly was all determined to succeed this time. But he couldn t go about it in a leisurely fashion at all - since he saw himself engaged in a race against the atom bomb! It was either auditing Inc.2 real quick or Inc.2 all over again. This might explain the urgency, impatience and illtemperedness for which Hubbard was feared. Considering these circumstances one can well imagine that scientology, its Church and particularly the Sea Org, consisting mostly of freshly awakened loyal officers, looked somewhat odd to the ordinary R6-happy Earth citizen. (It still does.) A BLUNTED ATTACK Despite Hubbard s high-flying expectations of 1968, OT III didn t clear people as brilliantly as predicted. The level had splendid results in many cases (and still does) but it didn t handle all of the case. Unwanted masses and energies still pressed inexplicably on thetan and body.

203

One reason for this can be found in Hubbard s having taking a break. His withdrawal from OT III supervision caused a severe set-back, because he had left without proper instructions concerning the supervision of solo-auditors. Perhaps he had relied too much on the ability of those few he had trained personally on the ship, when he sent them to the Advanced Organizations around the globe to introduce OT m there and hand on what they had learnt. From the results they obtained one can only surmise that they had not learned enough. Hubbard s message did hit home and all of scientology went OT III crazy - but results were not uniformly attained. Within ten years, the practice of OT III solo-auditing became but a shallow imitation of what it had been originally. What was promised was not delivered. People broke with scientology in frustration. On lower levels, below Clear, auditing was sufficiently successful for the Church to expand hugely in the 70 s - yet concerning the OT levels the picture was bleak indeed. Supervisors were so badly trained that they failed to help their soloauditors as soon as the going got rough. The Church of Scientology, Hubbard s instrument for fighting Xenu, had become so confused and tense, so affected by the very level it was supposed to deliver to the world that it became almost useless. The attack had become blunted.

204

6.3 The Battle Goes On A NEW CHURCH * EXCALIBUR * GALACTIC ADMINISTRATION * XENU IN SESSION * A NEW TYPE OF CLEAR * YATRUS GETS AUDITING * THE GE POOL * "GERD" * THE PHI MATRIX * DEPROGRAMMING THE SCREEN * THE "M-SHIP" IN ORBIT * FUTURE PROJECTS A NEW CHURCH In 1981 Hubbard disappeared from view, withdrew to his ranch and remained there till he died. Concurrent with his disappearance, a team of executives usurped the Church of Scientology ( CofS from now) in an overnight power coup. As Religious Technology Center (RTC) they commenced their reign with the excommunication of a good 2000 veteran staff members many of whom had known Hubbard personally, amongst them a lot of auditors. The reason for this bloodletting is perhaps that they attempted to exterminate the living memory of the great leader and replace it by their own indoctrination - done in the form of splendid, glittery and expensive events not dissimilar to the political shows of Hitler, Stalin and Mao or perhaps the American presidential election campaigns. Rows of officers in white uniforms, huge OT symbols and CofS crosses, a stage bathed in light, the idolized speaker on the rostrum, the enraptured thousands at his feet - who wouldn t think of Xenu s best times as Supreme Ruler of the Galactic Confederation or, even earlier, of some Grand Ritual of the Atlantean priesthood? Not that Hubbard hadn t foreseen such developments. He was never all too happy with his Church (witness several volumes of management policies), yet even before there was a Church he could see the dangers involved in the organized application of his own brain child. In 1952, during lecture 20 of the Philadelphia Doctorate Course, he said this about scientology: It s a servant of the mind, (. . .) it s not a master of the mind. Scientology will decline and become useless to man on the day when it becomes the master of thinking. Don t think it won t do that. It has every capability in it of doing that. Contained in the knowable, workable portions before your-eyes there are methods of controlling human beings and thetans which have never before been dreamed of in this universe. Control mechanisms of such awesome and solid proportions that if the remedies were not so much easier to apply, one would be appalled at the danger to beingness that exists in scientology. (...) Did you ever read poor old George Orwell s 1984 ? Yes, that s wonderful. That would be, could be the palest imaginable shadow of what a world would be like under the rule of the secret use of scientology with no remedy in existence. EXCALIBUR Those that were kicked out of the CofS carried on outside. Many small centers formed around individual auditors. In terms of research William Brenton Robertson, a

205

long-time Sea Org member, carried on along the line of Hubbard s intentions. In 1985, on the basis of existing OT levels, he developed from it a process which detected and handled the BTs and Clusters forming Xenu s suppressive monitor installations. Finally the cause of so far inexplicable phenomena bothering OT III and NOTs solo auditors was found. In honor of Hubbard s novel of 1938, Robertson called this process Excalibur . Because of his former CofS connections Robertson and his associates were in the position to put together an impressive list of ex-CofS auditors all around the world, contacted them and taught them the new method. Soon the old Galactic Patrol fighting spirit was alive again and gained momentum. Xenu s network, now the target of sessions all around the globe 24 hours a day, was being torn from all corners at once. Hubbard s old OT III battle of 1968 had received a fresh impetus in 1985, seventeen years later. To start with, Excalibur worked simply like this: BTs and Clusters were found, audited and dissolved into clouds of theta quanta; these were made to vanish into nothingness. No problem. Not very different from auditing OT III - except that BTs were sent right through the 36 days, something severely warned against on OT III proper so as to avoid over-restimulation. But on Excalibur it was a safe thing to do and this way a lot was found out confirming everything Hubbard had ever released to the public about this particular imagery and often going beyond it. The next generation of BTs were different. Although they could be made to disappear during the session (often after a good 5 hours of hard work on a single BT or Cluster), they grew back over night - as if they had never gone away! Auditing them again (and again and again, day after day) revealed that each one leaving was replaced by identical installations within some hours only. It dawned on Robertson and his associates that one was not dealing with the dead remnants of 75 million years ago but with an alive and awake control system. It was at this time (still in 1985) that the term Monitor was coined. Soon the Monitors organizing scheme began to show. One would begin with the BT that had cut in on one, audit it until the next one up the line, in the attempt to keep the one below from communicating, came to view and audit that one. One carried on this way until one had reached the top holder in the system. Once the top holder was audited, one would go down the line again and mop up the rest. Their stories were near-identical: Inc.2, packaged on Hawaii and Las Palmas, shelved, prepared for use by a special implant ( trained on their man ), and sent off. The conclusions Hubbard and his associate Fuller had to come to in 1950 were reciprocated by Robertson in 1985. The difference was that after almost 20 years of OT III auditing having occurred all around the globe (1968 to 1985) the sheer amount of BTs and Clusters was considerably reduced; Robertson wasn t faced with quite the same resistance as Hubbard.

206

With that advantage and recognizing that one was engaged in a live battle, one could concentrate on fighting the actual enemy instead of his ammunition, the Monitors (which despite all the auditing already done still seemed inexhaustible). For example in the case of Monitors being replaced overnight the auditor would extend his attention to the originating end of the communication line to find out who was doing the replacing and discover control stations! Some on space stations, others on Mars or remote planets outside this solar system, some even on Earth (Pyrenees). These stations weren t BT imagery, no figments of imagination - they were real, manned by real thetans. Instead of merely auditing the BTs and Monitors sent to Robertson and his auditors, they proceeded to audit the operators supervising them on their computer screens. They helped these thetans to get rid of their own control entities which kept them in line, made them switch off the power supply, leave their bodies and go off. This was easy insofar as their job satisfaction wasn t particularly high (what with ten thousand years on the same post), and since their understanding of what they were doing was limited due to instruction by implant exclusively, it didn t take much to convince them that there was more fun to be had elsewhere, with more ethical purposes. Leaving their bodies was no problem to them as they didn t use flesh bodies. Yet these were no friendly conversations by any means. On first contact those operators had absolutely no intention to be in session. Auditors had all the enemy propaganda against them. At one stage the operators were trained in what to do when caught by an auditor and how to behave in session to get out unscathed. That didn t work, of course, because thetans like truth - a major advantage over their implantdistorted minds. In 1986, after one year of Excalibur auditing all around the world, there were signs of the enemy s morale weakening. It was often sufficient to mention that one was working for Elron to get a resigned Oh, not again! , and key people of the opposing side would agree to be audited without any further resistance. This continued throughout the hot phases of Excalibur between 1986 and 1988. Every three months the case would present a different pattern, because the enemy had worked out something new to cross Robertson s purposes. This would be reported to Robertson and communicated by telephone to all other auditors, and so one was prepared for the novelty to come up. Or one would bump into a novelty, not know what to do, phone Robertson and learn that he already knew about it from his own or another s sessions. This system worked very well. GALACTIC ADMINISTRATION During this time, a lot was found out about the organization and administration of this galaxy. It was usually Robertson who originated these data, but since they were confirmed by others who hadn t been briefed on them, it seems safe to say a few words about this.

207

It seems that the galaxy is divided into 12 sections (pretty much like a birthday cake), with each section cut in half. So there are twelve sectors on top and twelve on the bottom, making 24 all in all. Our sector (within which Incident 2 took place) is Sector 9. Sector 0 is the administrative unit in the center of the galaxy; so strictly speaking there are 25 sectors. Sector 0, the Galactic Council , is to the galaxy what the UN is to Earth - wellintended, infiltrated, inefficient. They do not interfere by police or military means unless someone complains about someone else. One reason why they didn t ever do anything about Earth is that nobody from Earth complained. We know why - the Screen didn t let any Earth people out; Earth was and is politically to disorganized and spiritually to unaware as to even think of complaining; in galactic terms it s nowhere land anyway. Missionaires who do manage to come back from Earth tend to report in a confused and unreliable manner; it s like you were sending an agent into a disaster area and he came back all drunk and unable to speak sensibly. For this reason direct telepathic messages by auditors (and others, one should assume) are not immediately acted upon but left to accumulate. Only when a large enough pack of data accumulated would it be interpreted and acted upon. Therefore, regarding Earth, decisions are slow. (This may have changed after one auditor who is a Galactic Council member on Earth duty - he got stuck here, never got away again - gave a direct debrief to his colleagues on 12 March 1994.) Some in the Council believe that the best solution for Earth was letting it go to hell or actively wiping it out - but fortunately they know that this wouldn t be the end of the problem but actually spread the contamination and make things worse. The Galactic Council consists of 12 members. They appear awe-inspiring and wise but are not entirely free of the reactive bank. Their bodies are somewhat transparent, not nearly as solid as ours. The Council is not a democratic but an aristocratic body in the true sense of the word - aristocracy meaning rule of the noble ones . Nobility again isn t a matter of heritage but of ethical performance, of contributing to the common good in high volume. Each of the 12 governs two Sectors but doesn t represent them as he wasn t voted into his seat by the people . He has worked his way up to this seat of power and once in it, he stays there forever- unless his integrity weakens. XENU IN SESSION The peak event of Excalibur, already within a year after this action had been launched, was the auditing of Xenu himself. In due course, after losing so much manpower and machinery, the Black Master himself had to show up and interfere personally. About six auditors I know of, had direct confrontations with him. They had all known him before, either as Loyal Officers during Inc.2 or long before that. Robertson as supervisor coordinated the action. Auditing Xenu was quite exhausting indeed. After the session one felt like one had been hanging on to a high-voltage power line for some hours, with one s feet in the bath tub. When one dealt with his troops or even some of his suppressive BTs, one

208

might have been hit with energy discharges strong enough to make one hop about the room whilst sitting on one s chair, but with Xenu it was different: there was some mighty and far-reaching power behind him, quite beyond anything one was used to from his staff. To start with, Xenu showed up in the sessions of Robertson and his closer associates only; later, as he and his network became weaker and weaker, he started appearing in the sessions of other auditors, too. In 1993 his basic games postulate was discovered and audited (see chapter 3.3). Since then he is out of the game with no intention to start on it again. But of course, the spirit of his game is carried forward by all who share this postulate and identify with it still - it s the need to have a mest universe. A NEW TYPE OF CLEAR By the end of 1988, the Excalibur battles had seen their peak times. Holes had been cut into Xenu s network; the global and even galactic connections one had encountered before whilst following up a specific BT organization, were a thing of the past. The remaining BTs, Clusters and Monitors were merely part of people s individual cases. Auditing them was still exciting to new solo-auditors, but compared to before it had become a cushy job. Those who experienced the proper end phenomenon of this level of auditing saw their thoughts and actions not interfered with any further by BTs, Cluster, Monitors or any other kind of entity. Their awareness was trained sufficiently to detect and handle such phenomena even without an E-meter and even before an incoming entity had the chance to settle down in their theta space. People who finish Excalibur properly are more themselves and, as their GEs don t get continuous cross-fire from entities gone wild, their bodies are healthier than before. Their own thinking and acting, unencumbered and unbiased by foreign influences, can come to the fore now. They are Clear on the 3rd and 4th dynamic and so their ability to live and think sanely on these dynamics generally proves to be on an upward trend. YATRUS GETS AUDITING 1989 brought new developments. In summer a solo-auditor (MH) came up with the name of Yatrus for the first time ever. This was during a routine Excalibur groovingin session. She felt connected through her abdomen (!) to some mighty power source in the area of Betelgeuse controlling her by means of a theta string . We identified the source, got the name of Yatrus , handled him to what seemed a disconnection and dismissed the whole thing as routine. We didn t know then that auditing Yatrus is like trying to lift water with your open palms. With Xenu it s like running against a solid wall, with Yatrus it s different. An excellent description of his character is given by Ruth Minshull when she describes

209

covert hostility in her book on emotions74. Pretends to comply but doesn t, cringes, all my fault, so sorry , does it again, wheedles his way back into your trust, betrays you again, and so on. That s Yatrus. He kept on bothering HM. She couldn t handle him solo; and every time I went in session with HM to support her, Yatrus didn t show up. Again a live battle, like in the prime days of Excalibur. We weren t dealing with entities of old but with a clever and flexible adversary, a real thetan. It was ever so frustrating - no target! We didn t realize, then, that HM s Genetic Entity was the affected part and that we had gone beyond the scope of Excalibur proper (which deals with monitoring entities, strictly speaking). The next mentioning of Yatrus was in TJ s letter (already mentioned before) of October 1989. Then, from this October on - as if a plug had been pulled - data about Yatrus, Atlantis and the Council of the Twelve bubbled up and gushed forth from all over the place. This went on for years and continues actually up to the present. (The whole of this research was done by Postulate Auditing , a method described in my previous book Scientology - A Handbook for Use .) New auditors came along who weren t very interested in Xenu, Inc.2, BTs and Monitors; they did away with that in a dozen hours or so (instead of, during the heydays of Excalibur, a few hundred!) and then bumped straight into Yatrus - usually because they, attempting to handle some body trouble, found themselves auditing on the track of the GE and sooner or later got a direct line to the Great Perverter of Life Force. Some auditees contacted him even within the first ten hours of auditing they ever had. Most found his name without prior instructions; they pronounced it variously as Yatrus, Heliatros, Iatrox, Yahu or Haoo. Yatrus, like Xenu, received more auditing than he ever asked for. In particular TJ, HJ, BW and TC deserve thanks for helping to open the GE bank, discovering Yatrus lambda scenarios and getting him cornered personally. The final blow fell on 2 October 1992, when Yatrus games postulate was found and canceled. (Once it s exposed it can t be kept up any more as exposing it breaks the identification thetans have with it on the 8th dynamic.) He didn t appear ever since. The effects he caused on GEs can be audited out very easily now; individual GEs as well as the GE Pool have become very approachable. To begin with GEs were extremely wary of being talked to by thetans ( never trust a thetan ), now they appreciate the attention and generally desire auditing. Suppressive GEs have not been found yet - but GEs suppressed by thetans, plenty. Much as GEs control thetans through restimulated engrams, no evil intention from the GE is involved. Much rather the dramatization is a form of communication. All they have in mind is survival for the body - even in the inverted sense of cancer. The more growth the better, see how far you can go with it . (Yatrus old games postulate again!) THE GE POOL

210

After 1990, difficulties and problems involving the GE increasingly became the subject of sessions. Auditees and solo-auditors were working on the 5th dynamic, on lambda, life itself! Xenu s game, i.e. controlling mankind as a whole and groups within mankind, occurs on the 4th and 3rd dynamic. Yatrus game, controlling life, takes place on the 5th and on the 2nd - because the GE not only runs the body but plays the key role in one s sexual life. Suddenly auditors came up with incidents of wild sexual perversions and atrocities, none of this recorded on their own track but on that of the GE and the GE Pool. At certain points in his auditing the auditor would be put through from his personal GE to the senior data banks of the GE Pool. To meditation practitioners it is perhaps of interest that the GE Pool can be approached through the 7th chakra (on top of one s skull). Being experienced in kundalini meditation I once experimented with the chakras, draining each of its charge and taking them to a floating needle on the E-meter. Immediately after obtaining this result on the 7th chakra a two-way valve opened and life force streamed down on me from the unending reservoirs of the GE Pool, the life force of my own GE simultaneously flowing up into those reservoirs. A prana exchange process. In contrast to my pre-scientology experiences with this I didn t feel blissfully overwhelmed and in a state of heavenly rapture but instead perceived how contaminated the Pool actually was, what useless, incoherent and contra-survival incidents and postulates came washing down on me, and so I extended the process to auditing the Pool to a floating needle, too (i.e. as much as was available to me at the time). This procedure, if done by enough people, would have vast and beneficial consequences, needless to say. It may be assumed that precisely this was done by meditation practitioners through the millennia. They put themselves there as prana purification devices , not for their own benefit only but for a supra-personal purpose, too. By helping themselves they helped others, same as in auditing. The GE Pool contains the totality of all GE energy and information pertaining to the history of this planet and its life forms. Held in place by the Screen it forms its inner lining (and so compares to Bardon s Earth belt and Sheldrake s global morphogenetic field). Whatever unusual death or illness occurs anywhere, to any species, is relayed up there, gets immediately copied and distributed and then rains down on the GEs animating bodies of that particular species. However, the GE Pool isn t merely a local affair, that is, restricted to this planet alone. As the theta quanta composing it are much older than a mere 75 million years (the age of the Screen), data on the GE as such are available as well, on its formative and developmental stages, and it is from this source that most of the revelations concerning Yatrus Lambda Scenario were taken. Incidentally, one may contact people through a GE-based communication line. It goes own GE to GE Pool to other person s GE. We are all connected through our GEs as long as we have bodies; a heritage from the Middle Implant. One may conveniently use this to one s advantage, like in voodoo where this is commonplace.

211

How the actual Screen functions was put together from reports of solo-auditors and auditees recalling their between-lives time or their arrival on this planet from elsewhere in the cosmos. It was found that the GE Pool plays a decisive role in stamping sexual patterns on the GE the thetan passing through the Screen is getting teamed up with. One possible pattern is homosexuality. The previous life of the thetan plays a large role here, because after all the Screen does nothing but warming up old karma. GERD During all of this activity, an auditing process took shape for guiding one through the various complexities one encountered when auditing the GE. It was simply named GE-Rundown or GERD for short. ( Rundown is scientologese for any auditing process containing a number of steps which are run down from first to last.) The GERD results in a separation of GE and thetan in the sense that they both take care of their specific part in running life. They become team mates, good partners. The thetan plays his games for which he needs a body, the GE looks after the body in terms of energy supply and coordination and thereby assists the thetan. The thetan in turn does his best to support the GE by taking care of the body (food, drink, exercises, healthy environmental conditions) and does the occasional auditing session when the GE feels too restimulated to be able to cope with it herself. More usually, though, the GE will be able to handle its own restimulations; part of the end phenomenon of the GERD is that the GE learns to solo-audit in a fashion. She doesn t let engrams come up as long as she can help it. Quite a range of somatics, some of them chronic, can be handled by the GE alone, simply by the thetan asking her: Can you fix this? and she d say: Yes, boss , and go ahead and do it with no more than some steady and supportive attention from the thetan on the body part in question. (One may have to study the anatomical and physiological aspects of symptoms, though, and get a clear idea of the processes involved, before positive results can be seen to set in. As one is, in auditing the GE, addressing functions and the coordination of functions one is well advised to primarily study the bodily structures these functions pertain to. Only then can one expect to communicate with the GE with the necessary reality on its working environment and turn misfunctions back into proper functions.) On the basis of this partnership the thetan can be routinely exterior to the body, because he knows the GE will look after it whilst the GE can be assured that the thetan will not dream up some neck breaking fun which the GE then would have to repair. Both can rely on each other, to put it briefly. This may result in para-normal abilities like withstanding cold air or water comfortably or feeling added lift whilst walking. Degrees of this have been observed and could be turned into genuine siddhis with further practice. Here we have a Clear on two further dynamics, the 5th and the 2nd. This expanded Clear probably corresponds to the Theta Clear postulated by Hubbard in 1952.

212

THE PHI MATRIX Research is an ongoing side activity as people who have reached a certain end phenomenon get used to that level of perception and awareness and, led on by their interest and curiosity, reach up to higher dynamics. In 1993 two solo-auditors independently from each other contacted the mest universe as such and thereby followed up what had been pioneered by Robertson in 1986 when the first tentative approaches into this field were made. Contacting the physical universe from the inside is a definitely different experience to seeing it from the outside , that is, before entering it. This latter impression was reported by a small number of auditors as they recalled dropping out of the static state and taking a viewpoint outside the physical universe, then zooming in on it and finally being inside it. From the outside it looks very small and glittery perhaps like a city way down in a valley as one looks at it from a mountain top at night but as soon as one enters it, it becomes huge. To begin with one feels in contact with everything up to the farthest corners of it, and equally with past, present and future. It narrows down as one becomes used to one s viewpoint and one s game. The rehabilitation of the initial sensation of all-connectedness was achieved in Robertson s 1986 research sessions and again in 1993. Making such contact has the effect of breaking loose one s theta quanta, fixated since eons in mest, and making them stream back on one. At least within the history of scientology, these are the first if only faint attempts to actually lighten up the physical universe in the sense of the original Conversion Program. What Robertson had envisioned in 1986 might become a routine ability to many. Perhaps one should refer to this vibratory field (probably the akasha , in Hindu terms) as the Phi Matrix , because it contains all information pertaining to mest from the moment the first theta quantum was created just as the GE Pool contains all data since the creation of the first GE. Although both data reservoirs produce the sensation that one is in contact with all , the Phi Matrix (6th dynamic) feels very different from the GE Pool (5th dynamic). The two experiences are quite distinct. Speaking on a practical level, contact with the Phi Matrix makes one rather sensitive to what Hubbard calls enturbulated mest or enmest . Smashed-up car fronts or walls torn down by bulldozers literally feel upset! The theta quanta composing them were arranged to remain in a certain way and dutifully were it for a while, and then suddenly, without any warning, their togetherness was violently disrupted. Likewise, a new building aches because all the new bits put together from many sources in a short time, haven t got used to each other yet. This is why it takes a few years for a building to settle down and become one whole. I was told that in the old days a stone mason would build a wall by placing the stones in the way they had been together in the mountain side before they were broken.

213

He felt the energy lines in his hands. So apparently, listening to mest is quite a natural ability to some people. Another practical result is that one may reach any person anywhere telepathically as long as one has an object or a photo of that person. The Indios of the South American Andes know full well why they don t like their photos taken by tourists - they fear for their souls! So do other non-civilized races. In Chinese, taking photos is called she yang (taking one s shadow), and in the last century when Earth was charted by the whites, it was near-impossible to take photos of Chinese peasants. Purposefully using the 6th dynamic as a means of communication by loading it with one s intention - has quite a tradition; not only the old lay lines in Britain still speak of it, the Huns had a similar system, too. By its help one could telephone from stone to stone over hundreds of kilometers. And some holy places like the famous spiral inside Chartres may originally have served as navigation points for space ships, the same goes for the energy grids Bruce Cathie detected around the planet 18. The Phi Matrix is a fairly unexplored phenomenon as yet, but on the basis of the few sessions so far it can be said that the physical body as such can be audited, i.e. the actual flesh, bones, hair and teeth part of it. The GE, mind you, is not the body, it only runs it. The actual mass of the body is part of the 6th dynamic. It s dead matter made to come alive by the GE. But not so dead that it couldn t be audited, because after all, even inorganic matter is composed of theta quanta. It seems that the GE comes to its limits when the physical body doesn t play along and that this is yet another area of tension, one floor down from the GE/thetan interaction. No definite results have been had yet, but as an end phenomenon of Phi Processing one would expect to have a Clear on the 6th dynamic - someone stably exterior to the physical universe who doesn t get affected by the postulates and masses contained in it and who has, on further practice, the ability to create illusions or even actual mest objects. This would correspond to the Cleared Theta Clear , again postulated by Hubbard in the early 50 s. DEPROGRAMMING EARTH S SCREEN Parallel to the mainstream of research that started with Excalibur and currently extends to the 6th dynamic, an extremely important side activity took place between June and November 92, when BW contacted and analyzed the Screen. Due to his efforts, the Screen became known for what it is. Only after BW had managed to de-program the Screen did first-timers appear, missionaires and tourists who had transversed the Screen on their way to Earth and could debrief in detail on its content. BW found the Screen to agree in principle with Hubbard s description of it being a standing wave . It is a layer or perhaps a grid of standing waves containing a high proportion of scalar waves and vibrating at around 2 Gigahertz (between 1.6 and 2.2). It seems to consist of plasma spirals working in opposing directions, thus giving stability to the construction. There are about 49 grid-crossings per square meter, making the

214

whole thing look like a honeycomb. Each cell has six sides and is some 300 m meters deep. (So that s how thick the whole Screen is.) The cells contain a copying mechanism and a device for follow-up programming whenever needed. As a whole, the Screen consists of a large number of entities resonating at a frequency sympathetic to a thetan, so he would consider this is a familiar structure and not notice it - like one were getting into a bath tub with its water at exact body temperature. Anytime a thetan contacts one of the honeycomb cells, the cell empties its energy-embedded content on him, whereupon the surrounding cells immediately feed energy to the depleted place and smooth out the irregularity. The thetan, on contacting the Screen, will identify with whatever it evokes in him and become forgetful of his own past. There is something eternal about the whole event, a never-changingness as it were. A further purpose of the Screen is the coupling of a thetan with a GE. Inside the Screen, as its lining and facing the surface of Earth, one find the GE Pool for this planet. As a thetan approaches the Screen the GEs wake up and attach themselves to him through a resonance process triggered by the thetan himself. The Screen was put there by 78 production robots just before Inc.2. The project was kept an extreme secret; the PR-line fed to Earth population said that a detection and defense shield was being installed around Earth. The destruction of the Screen was initiated by feeding a counter program through one particular point. As the Screen structure is equipped with an instant copying and distributing mechanism, a computer virus seemed to be the way to destroy it. (BW is a computer expert.) The plan was to put attention on one of the honeycomb cells, thereby trigger it into action and, by taking advantage of the usual Screen mechanism, drain the surrounding cells of their energy content. Draining them was achieved by simply spotting and acknowledging the information of the cells neighboring the one addressed when they sprang into action, thereby temporarily exhausting them. It had already been found by BW that a small time lag occurred before the automatic repair and refill programs of the cells next to the emptied ones would cut in. This time lag was used for counter-programming the Screen. The first step, as we saw, was emptying a central cell and its surrounding ones of their content; the second step was charging the central cell with standard Excalibur-type anti-Xenu information, like: Xenu s game is over. The Two Rights of a Thetan are about to be re-established. You all (addressing the theta quanta making up the Screen) have the right to your self-determinism and to leave this game. You may return to your creator and dissolve into nothingness or be free to do whatever you like. You have played this game very well but you don t have to be the Screen any longer. Simultaneously a wave impulse was started in the central cell towards all of the six cell walls and the neighboring cells, diffusing the information evenly to all sides. Thus the copy mechanism was set off in an outward motion, away from the central cell, and began to spread the anti-Xenu instructions all across the Screen. Of course this took

215

several repetitions and a lot of unwavering intention, but it seemed to work. The counter-program began to run by itself, permeating the Screen with anti-Xenu information. The final check-up on this was done in November 1992 and the erasure process found to be running on its own. The deprogramming of the Screen seemed complete. Throughout October a number of auditors reported feeling pressed down by something gooey like honey and that it evoked the sort of masses one knew from Excalibur auditing. It turned out that the Screen, as its cells were dripping out , released a final restimulative potential which of course was noticeable to those who habitually extended their space up to that region. Although each of these auditors (who were uninformed of BW s actions) had cleaned off their personal entities on Excalibur, their GE-related restimulation potential was still there of course, therefore this Screen activity affected the Inc.2 pictures recorded in their GE-banks. In January 1993 an auditor (VA) who knew nothing of BW s operation, called in to tell me that she had encountered two visitors in her last session who asked her when scientology was going to be for export. They were clothed in energy bodies only, having left their solid bodies on their space vessel parked somewhere outside the 26.5 km zone. They commented that moving in and out seemed easier than before. THE M-SHIP IN ORBIT A curious little incident occurred during this action of de-programming the Screen. During the five months of his operation, BW occasionally felt acknowledged by Sector 0 (the Galactic Council), by the Galactic Patrol and Elron himself. This in itself is not sensational. Acknowledgments from Elron (Hubbard in his non-Earth manifestation) have never been a rarity. Auditors who did well and felt themselves closely tuned to the intention line of the old man , quite often felt Elron patting their backs or giving them messages with regard to their missions. To carry on with the curious little incident : On 17 October 1992, BW perceived the Galactic Patrol Main Ship very far away, pretty much at the edge of our solar system. He saw it as a huge sphere of more than two hundred kilometers (201,6 km) in diameter, its inside coated with an atmosphere 5.3 km thick containing machinery, work space, offices, housing etc. Towards the center the atmosphere thins out. Rotation of the sphere creates the gravity needed for one to walk about on its inside. Nothing curious about this, either. A number of people who didn t know about BW s activities, perceived the M-ship at that time. The curious part of the story is this: months after his observation, in January 1993, BW learned from the papers that in November 1992 the Max Planck Institute in Heidelberg, Germany, had by means of their telescope in Spain photographed the most distant body in our solar system ever observed . 1992 QB 1 , as it was called, had originally been discovered by a Hawaiian telescope in August 1992 and was estimated to be moving in an orbit beyond that of Pluto, the furthest planet of our solar system (more than 6 billion km away). It

216

was considered to be one of the hypothetical small planets at the far edge of the solar system and to have a diameter of 100 to 200 km. So why look through telescopes when you can get your data by telepathy and exteriorization? FUTURE PROJECTS We are approaching the end of this chapter. What was done since the early days of Hubbard s investigations has been said; the state of the art as much as I can picture it, has been described. Perhaps to end off we should look at future developments. For one thing, what has been achieved by some within a few hundred hours of auditing each, can and should be achieved by many. The improvement resulting from this - for the world in general - could be expected to be considerable, because what that handful of auditors mentioned here did, was no more than driving a wedge in- now what would happen if the whole block was made to burst? Secondly, one may wonder what levels of awareness come next. We already spoke of Clears on the 5th, 2nd and 6th dynamic. In More than a Cult? I extrapolated what the results of further clearing on higher dynamics might be and extended these projections to the 7th and 8th dynamic. As four years have passed since that book was written and a lot of experience was gathered in the meantime, a new evaluation of the matter seems possible, correcting some of my earlier views. As the 7th dynamic is that of theta-as-energy, a Clear on this dynamic would remain unaffected by any flow of attention from anywhere and anyone except by choice. We are not talking about something as gross as pictures or entities, about remnants of the past, no, we are referring to individual theta quanta, to attention units created now. Any faintest bit of attention directed towards one from any source should be immediately noticed by one in 3D and stereo. A thetan, whether he has a physical body-plus-GE or not, habitually carries with him a theta energy body, his personal briefcase as it were, containing ,all the circuits he needs to translate postulates into action. This, in essence, is the thetan s analytical mind 1. A convenient device, but it brings with it a considerable disadvantage since it makes one recognizable. It is because of the analytical mind - or rather because of thetans habitually and unthinkingly identifying with their analytical mind - that Xenu could attach his pre-fabricated little clusters to them. Had they been fully aware and causative on the 7th dynamic they would have noticed that bit of foreign matter, that flea in their fur, and eliminated it. A Clear on the 7th dynamic should have such perceptiveness and apart from that be able to create, change or uncreate a mind at will. And he wouldn t worry about someone stealing his mind or holding it or parts of it

217

captive by electronic means, knowing that he can always create another one any time (and uncreate what was taken wherever it is held). Further on, on the 8th dynamic, being Clear would mean remaining unaffected by the postulates of others. The 8th dynamic is defined as theta-as-thought. Perceiving pure thought, pure thought without even the faintest picture attached to it, is the most subtle of abilities. It would make one able to read another s past and future - not by viewing his energized pictures but by perceiving his will, i.e. his thoughts, postulates and intentions. The beginning of this mest universe game, of Xenu s game, was marked by thetans exchanging thoughts, by their interacting with each other on the basis of pure postulates, of non-energized concepts. Being identified strongly with their own thoughts - and totally engrossed in their aesthetics - they ceased differentiating between themselves as the sources of thought and their actual products. They became thought and thus stepped down from static to beingness. In this stage they were already unaware enough to absorb thoughts of others without noticing - to the point of believing that those foreign thoughts were their own. This way thought vectors determining subsequent actions, were formed. By having shared the thoughts of others and made them their own, thetans weren t quite the individuals any more that they - based on their own thoughts only - would have been. A Clear on the 8th dynamic would very much notice the difference between his own thoughts and those of others, and stick to his own. As well he might knowingly and willingly control and change thought vectors by contributing his own thoughts. And, seeing himself as a static rather than a thought-defined beingness, he should have the ability of either deliberately thinking a thought and be a thetan, i.e. a defined beingness, or withdrawing all thought and be static. It ought to be emphasized, though, that attaining all this is a matter of ethics, not of merely clocking up lots of auditing hours. Certainly, auditing some hundreds and perhaps thousands of hours clears one s mind regarding one s basic purposes and the barriers one has put there oneself to keep oneself from attaining them - but once this has been understood one has to act in the real world to actual]y execute one s goals, purposes and plans and fulfill them optimally. All the auditing in the world doesn t move one up the line if one is tied to the ground by the dead weight of incomplete cycles of action relevant to one s personal mission. (So the Buddhist choice to return and help the others isn t a free choice at all, really; it s a necessity.)

218

CHAPTER 7 The Future MARCAB CRUMBLING * A BODY CULTURE * THE FRIENDLY PLANET * POLITICS * SCIENCE AND ART * THE ATLANTEAN LIABILITY

Whether the results and findings reported in this book are important and what their implications for the sanity of man might be, can of course only be estimated in terms of factual global changes; and so, as but a few decades have passed since meditation and auditing became mass movements, one can only, at this point, formulate some cautious future predictions and await the test of time to see if they are correct. If it is true that Xenu s and Yatrus games are over, that the Screen has been dismantled what consequences will this have for the future of this planet? Did it suffice to expose the great leaders of this game and have them cancel their games postulates in order to make the world change its course? After all, the planet doesn t look exactly promising... Let s take stock of the situation. On planet Earth Xenu s Marcabian control scenario with its One World intentions interacts with the Yatruscan scenario of medical experimentation and genetic engineering. The Marcabians pin one down through mind, money and energy control, the Yatruscans through medical, food and birth control. No escaping from it. Fortunately the effect of these scenarios is cushioned by the third force in this game: the teachers, the missionaires, the restorers of a culture worth living in. We spoke of them in earlier chapters the Vedic sages and their successors who came from motherly Yatruscan India to the White Masculine Marcabian West. They softened the hard edges of the R6 bank; in their meditation they and their disciples vaporized whole cloud banks of ridges around the globe for millennia on end. They prepared the stage for Elron and his final showdown with Xenu. Hubbard alone wouldn t have managed, he needed his auditors. And his auditors wouldn t have managed - witness the dramatic events between 1950 and 1967 - if ten thousand years of meditation hadn t already lifted the fog sufficiently for one to actually see and fight the enemy. That Xenu and Yatrus fell was not the merit of Hubbard alone. It was worked at by many for a long, long time. But did it change anything? MARCAB CRUMBLING

219

Let us take 1988 as a key date, the year Xenu gave up. To be sure, Xenu s men are still operating today - naturally so, because one wouldn t expect that eliminating the mastermind behind the Marcabian One World Scenario would make the whole project come to a grinding standstill. But luckily Marcabian agents on Earth - and even Illuminati! - know as little about their true descent as anyone else, thanks to the Screen. They are cut off from their top source and if they do get news via a monitor BT then it s only the stereotype The Great Marcabian Empire Is Winning As Usual . And so those solitary agents continue on their old plans and orders until they find them unworkable and they become confused. And indeed, the planet has become tremendously confused since 1988! A huge stability, the artificially created polarity USA/USSR, broke down in 1989 and ever since individual nations and ethnic groups have asserted their self-determinism and their right to leave the One World game by breaking away from political conditions enforced on them during the colonial times of past centuries. And of course the Big Powers incite wars to prevent this - but they aren t successful. Another huge stability, that of communist China, begins to wobble, too; now that individual wealth is permitted they just love making money, show off with it and bask in the splendor of their newly-acquired R6-deco such as vaudeville women, rock music, American cigarettes, etc. Sorry, Mr. Mao, the world doesn t like marching in the rhythm prescribed by the One Worlders but swings along to the familiar tune of R6. Perhaps so far the R6 bank itself was the saving grace for this planet - in the face of it, nobody got anything done, neither Xenians, Yatruscans, Galactic Patrollers nor anyone else. Now supposing its power were diminishing - what would happen? Contact a Marcabian ship these days (like on 2 March 1993), and you ll find them turning off as soon as you give them the latest news on Xenu s game; it doesn t even take auditing them any more. (This particular ship had the mission to keep the trouble in Poland, the GUS, Czechoslovakia, Rumania and Bulgaria going by means of telepathically heating up whatever monitors were available - of which there are still plenty left!) Although the Marcabian wave is still washing around the planet, it is being broken by all sorts of unexpected little barriers, by a phenomenon thought long dead individuality. Pride, a sense of personal value, a recognition of one s racial history, an appreciation of ethnic customs and craftsmanship, that s what individuality ought to mean by rights - quite a different definition from the Marcab-enforced one of an individual is a social production unit at some stage between body birth and death . Too many Clusters were broken up since 1967; the dramatization of compulsive togetherness of people, races and nations has lessened. If a disagreement like that voiced by Salman Rushdie in his Satanic Verses can challenge mighty ayatollahs to the point of imposing a death sentence, if the power of Islam is demonstrated only by the bombs of a handful of fundamentalist terrorists, if the pope has to worry about people turning their backs to Catholicism, then the weakness of the strong begins to show.

220

Even Marcab, Marcab that founded its power (regarding Earth) on that of the Roman Empire, established its worldwide rule with Weishaupt s Illuminati in 1776 and presently manifests itself as a World Bank, as the R6-deco banking temples of New York, Frankfurt and Tokyo - even Marcab has become destabilized. Confusion reigns politically, militarily, financially. Not only on Earth, but on Marcab as well. When you watch the evening news and see armed police clobbering people - well, it could be on Marcab. A civil war goes on there, a population rises up against a police apparatus controlling their very thoughts; their government uses wave generators to quell the mutiny and paralyze people into fear and submission once again. (An auditor s report it was PH - from August 1992.) Marcabians, too, want freedom and a rehabilitation of their Two Rights; all the implanting in the universe can t drive that out of a thetan. And with their leading genius gone there isn t much to hold them in line any longer. But look at all the wars around the world - isn t that bloodshed terrible? , one might think. It is. But anyone knowing the scale of emotions will understand that hate and anger are lighter tones than fear, terror and apathy. It s going upwards. Better alive and fighting than already dead. A planet in turmoil is more hope-inspiring than the apathetic silence impressed on it by military threats, electronic surveillance and drugs the R6-inspired ideal scene. A BODY CULTURE Regarding Yatruscan activities (food, medicine, genetics), there doesn t seem to be any perceptible change yet - but after all, their grand master left his game only in 1992. And mind you, his game is trickier than that of Xenu as it s based on personal conviction not force. It is fairly easy to free Marcabians once one has managed to make them see the control mechanisms they are subjected to - but try free a Yatruscan ... Very difficult! because there is nothing holding him except his own conviction of being very right, very innocent and very harmless - and he ll tell this whilst injecting the brain tissue extracted from aborted embryos into the brain of a mentally handicapped person. To cure him. All in the name of pure science , naturally. Many postulates relevant to this scenario will yet have to be found and canceled before a stable change can be expected to set in. Earth, by its ancient Atlantean tradition a Yatrus-dominated planet (in fact his favorite bio-lab), was only recently (75 million years ago) touched by Xenu s machinations. One would expect it to return - naturally as it were - to its bodycentered, fun & sex loving culture of before Inc.2 relatively soon, now that the Screen, Xenu s icing on the cake , has been cracked. Then as now one is using and appreciating soft flesh bodies as a mode of experiencing life, and this won t change so soon. 200 years of Marcabian education attempting to make man a robot, proved fruitless. A whole culture, a whole pattern of enjoyment is built around body sensations. Be it in music, painting, sculpture,

221

architecture, food, drink, sports, sex, the receptor mode is always the body and his senses. The world is perceived through the senses; the vibrations emanating from art, music or food are ordinarily (that is, in the case of most people) received and absorbed first by the body (phi body), then the GE (lambda body), then the thetan s energy field (theta body, mind), and then only by the awareness of awareness unit called thetan. A step-by-step transmission. Reversely the thetan communicates to the world not by direct thought but by producing the mental energy manifestations called emotions, thus affecting the GE s programmed emotional patterns, thus the body (muscles, nerves, glands, etc.) and thus his environment. This shows in social perception and interaction, particularly in mating behavior. One perceives a body, assesses its sexual attractiveness, electricity crackles, sparks fly two GEs in tune with each other; two GEs in full control of their thetans. It s a timehonored procedure; marriages are made that way. Allegedly over the top of that, thetans are in communication with each other . Are they really? Even a thetan with no reactive banks of his own, routinely operating mentally and in direct telepathic interaction with others would suffer from this. No matter how well advanced he may be - the impulses he has to put into his environment to play his game in the visible world would still be modified by his GE responding to the environment and the degree of structural intactness and dexterity of his body. Who would, in social interaction, perceive the thetan as such? A rare occurrence, a sign of highly educated awareness. The body, as long as one cares to use one, is a relay station to be reckoned with. Talking about Earth and its future, one has to bear this in mind. Small wonder then that no pure thetan culture was ever to be found anywhere on this planet. Look at law - they punish bodies lock away bodies, execute bodies; in doubtful cases they have bodies filled up with drugs at the psychiatrist s. And more often than not it s psychiatry deciding a case, by suggesting that the criminal can t be held responsible for psychiatric reasons . The question isn t any longer how wrong was the thetan? but how right was the bank? Who would recognize, let alone educate, the thetan who permitted the bank to control him? Psychology certainly doesn t cater for this. To be on the safe side one concentrates on the body and its GE-banks. It s a body culture. What do people talk most about if not the weather? Now the weather isn t the thetan s business, it s the GE who feels affected by it. A body culture. Look at pre-Marcabian Celtic Europe, look at the very Yatruscan. Asian cultures, for example at Indian music, Tibetan yogis, Chinese food, Balinese dancing, Japanese prison camps - and what do you see? Sensual enjoyment, perfect GE control, refinement of food, sex and torture beyond any post-Marcabian European imagination. Thetans - who cares?

222

This was a Yatruscan planet and it still is. Atlantis still lives in the minds of people, in their folklore, their fairy tales, their naive art. Ireland is full of it, Tolkin s Lord of the Ring is nothing but it, the King Arthur legend lives off it and so do India s folk tales of Krishna and his milkmaids, of dark, blood dripping Kali, so do the dreaming myths of the Australian Aborigines - one could go on and on finding examples. Earth people have managed to continue an Atlantean tradition despite the 36-day implant of Inc.2, despite the omnipresence of the Screen, despite Marcabian imports like motor cars, atom bombs, electronic surveillance, computer games and hard rock. They had the creative impetus to turn R6 symbology into R6 deco and make it part of their culture. Next time you happen to travel through southern Germany, watch the spires of their Catholic churches and you ll see a gilded cock on top of a cross. They value a fertility symbol (the cock) higher than an R6 emblem! GE senior to thetan, Yatrus senior to Xenu - it shows everywhere. It isn t for nothing that Xenu s very own monks made their lasting fame not through their high spirituality but through fabricating potent spirits such as wine, beer and liquor, very Yatruscan stuff indeed. And right under the eyes of tiara-robed One God representatives you find the peasants sacrificing bulls (Spanish bullfights) to the greater glory of Yatrus, you find them worshipping Virgin Mary - a woman ! The One God for the lips, for the head perhaps - but the Celtic White Goddess for the heart. Celtic Easter: a fertility ritual in spring, everybody fornicating everybody else. Christmas, nine months later- the babe that s born at the hour of the winter solstice is to be king of the tribe. Now look at this picture: the Celtic god-king as a child in his crib, a holy woman his mother, ox and ass watching them how more Yatruscan could it get? Neither Xenu nor the Catholic Church managed to change that. And not that they didn t try witness the inquisition, the witch burning, the suppression of femality, of the GE and, as its consequence, our current ulcerous and cancerous Male White Western World. Religions always followed the Yatruscan path, they never deviated. Look at their religious festivities such as birth, marriage and death - what do they celebrate if not points decisive for the GE, not the thetan? Look at the Far East - what are they cultivating if not harmony between the male and the female; what power do they evoke in their chakra meditation if not that of the GE? Now what about entities, demons, evil spirits, BTs, Clusters and Monitors? Well, they do exist, don t they, but just build up some prana, open your seventh chakra, tune in to the GE Pool, let that exhilarating wave of 5th dynamic ch i energy flow all over you and those demons will feel mollified, will fall into a deep slumber. As they don t stand a chance against such sweet treatment anyway - why bother auditing them? Even Freud in the West- what did he announce to the startled Viennese bourgeoisie if not that the power of the GE s life force, a power he termed Libido , would beat any coolly calculating Marcabian mind with its sex pictures? And Hubbard, didn t he start likewise? It took him a good fifteen years before he switched over from the GE s banks to the thetan s banks with their BTs, Clusters and Monitors. And who wants to know anyway? Hubbard the maniac, Hubbard imposing his case on innocent

223

people, just look at the New Age guys, how peaceful, why not burn incense and have some Tantra sex, do we really have to audit . . . Scientology isn t popular on this planet. Too heady. More fun to act subumbilically (i.e. below the navel). Marcabian militarism, money-mindedness and thought-control already weakened, witness the tumbling American colossus stands no chance against this. Earth men love their body pleasure, love following the demands of their GEs, detest too much thinking, hate political control. Samoa for everybody - that s the motto. Pleasant climate, no work, pretty bodies, food grows right into your mouth. THE FRIENDLY PLANET With the Screen gone, there will a growing influx of missionaires, there will be an intense interchange of news with other galactic cultures (now that one can get out), there will be a growing awareness of the galactic-political context Earth is operating in (and we are, whether we know it or not), there will be diplomatic ties with Sector 0 and sooner or later a decision as to where Earth belongs. A new self-confidence followed by a political confession. And Earth will be considered The Friendly Planet again (travel agent s sales pitch), well thought of and worth visiting, because much of the negative attention tied up here in the form of BTs and Clusters has already been audited out and the rest will gradually leave now that no Screen is in the way. Some of the thetans on the 76 planets whose complete theta fabric was abducted and implanted in the course of Inc.2, may well have re-constituted themselves long ago but would still feel nagged and haunted by pictures emanating from their personal theta bundles held captive on Teegeeack. They will want to learn how to audit and clean up the remaining bits themselves, and they ll be free from these bundles and free from dramatizing their contents. There is definite interest in seeing auditing technology exported; solo-auditors have been asked more than once when they are going to start working off-planet. So one future role of Earth may be a galactic auditor s training academy - if scientology makes it through the ongoing struggle within its own ranks without being distorted beyond recognition. If. But supposing it did and were accepted by society; supposing auditing was done in great volume - this could have the interesting side effect of bringing to light quite some amazing data about the history of this planet and its cultures. After all, most witnesses to past epochs are still walking about, and getting them to recall is no difficulty. Foreseeably, text books on history, anthropology and archeology will have to be re-written! POLITICS

224

Much as the One World idea was decried in this book, it is in fact the only hope for the survival of this planet - yet not as a false solution clandestinely imposed on the people of Earth by extraterrestrial foreigners. What with webs of air traffic lines, computer networks and satellite TV wrapping this planet up with scarcely a bare patch left, a central coordinating body is overdue. Yet establishing it shouldn t be left up to the World Bank alone, to the Rothschilds, Rockefellers and their globe-engirding humanitarian foundations. Historically, this planet always was run by a very few, by chieftains, kings, emperors, popes, industrial monopolists and banking magnates; it was a playground for warring intentions. And the people had to put up the money for these wars; more often than not they paid with their blood. Today, at this time of false democracy, it isn t any different yet. Earth is still run by the wealthy few, not by those who would excel in wisdom, practical skills and ethics, not by those who prove by actual products that they deserve to be leaders. The power is in the hands of the military and the military in the hands of bank consortiums. Any thetan with only half a brain who succeeds in grabbing an embryo in a royal house or a big banker s family, has got it made. That s all he has to do to be in clover, have power in plenty and let his aberrations go rampant without anyone checking him. What this leads to we have seen for some millennia now and we are quite satisfied that we ve seen enough of it. To be efficient -. and yield optimum solutions, an Earth Government cannot be manned by hereditary money or hereditary titles, it cannot be manned either by means of media-controlled democratic voting procedures nor by charismatic leaders spouting ideology but only by competent, practical, pragmatic people, models of civil behavior. To build up to such moral standards it would take reviving a sense of honor, decency and integrity among all citizens of Earth, a rehabilitation of almost forgotten virtues, an honoring of an ability to think, of knowledge ability, willingness to bear responsibility and own up for one s errors, readiness to control one s immediate environment (instead of leaving it up to another). John F. Kennedy called it civil courage . The anti-authoritarian ways fashionable today, the laissez-faire attitude propagated by certain schools of psychology have amply proved their disastrous consequences and therefore won t serve to build a functioning social unit of the magnitude we are envisioning here. Whether those Earth Governors themselves ought to be actual citizens of Earth is a moot point - because who is, anyway? Most leaders, no matter of what persuasion, came from elsewhere. And what prerequisites would make one an Earth citizen? After how many lifetimes would one be considered naturalized ? (Perhaps one ought to audit Earth Government officials on a few delicate questions before admitting them to their seats - such as: What did you do during Inc.2? During Inc.1? What s your relationship with Xenu? With Yatrus? What galactic lobby do you represent? And so on. Should be interesting.) There are two significant differences between a One World dictatorship and a pragmatic, aristocratic Earth Government: one, the latter would seek optimum solutions

225

with reference to the survival of the planet and all life on it (instead of exploiting it and working into its own pocket, like the former has proved to do); two, it would take individuality fully into account instead of suppressing it. The roughly 150 official nations on this planet are artificiality s. Marcabian inventions created since 1492 in the process of carving up the world map; yet the fact of the matter is that one is dealing with hundreds of ethnic units, thousands of regional sub-units and a corresponding amount of languages, dialects customs and life styles. They are individuals and they all have a right to exist as such! Yet the Marcabian solution was rooting them out, educating them to extinction or at least suppressing them; the Yatruscan solution was blending them with other races, bereaving them of their distinctive features and rendering them unrecognizable. This is unwise for more than one reason. First of all, keeping races, languages and customs distinct creates a sense of home and therefore of orientation; it builds strength from the roots of society upwards and thus would contribute to the revival of civil courage - and civil disobedience, too. (Reversely, tribal and family structures are unwanted when the power is supposed to come from the top downwards; therefore they must be diluted or even destroyed.) Secondly, individuality makes for variety and picturesqueness and would assure the planet s attractiveness for future interstellar tourism (what with other planets being homogenous units in terms of race, language, culture and industrial specialization). Lastly, racial and ethnical distinctiveness would facilitate rehabilitation of lost thetans and GEs by providing familiar body types. True enough, in this mobile society there is no way of keeping people from interbreeding - but one doesn t have to enforce this the way Yatruscan scenarios are currently implementing it. If it went by its own pace, it would be just fine. If it is true that the white race, dramatizing its former ownership of this planet, strives to re-appropriate it, if it is true that the Marcabians used this driving force for their own purposes, and it it s true that the Marcabian gambit has been crossed, then the consequences for the future of the white race will be rather drastic. Lacking extraterrestrial back-up it will stand alone with its whites only attitude; finally it will have to come to terms with the fact that other races quite undeniably do exist here and that one can t simply extinguish them by means of mass starvation or spreading diseases (modern equivalents to Nazi gas chambers). Concurrently one would expect those other races to get an up draught through the lessening of the white race s false selfconfidence, and to make their claims known - see the recent rise of Japan, China and some smaller Asian countries. Races, as we know, are a product of Yatrus s bio-lab; after all, back in preAtlantean days all bodies were white. And so there might exist, on the side of non-white races, some instinctive consideration that the white man somehow is the better man but even if that was so it has nothing to do with thetans but with bodies only. The fact that thetans fall for this is the result of Xenu s predilection for implanting white bearded gods into people s minds, and therefore shouldn t be unduly exploited by those who happen to correspond to that image, to gain advantages.

226

SCIENCE AND ART The people of this planet want their basic problems solved - nutrition, shelter, energy supply, medical care, personal safety, education, meaningful jobs. They are sick of being guinea pigs to extra-terrestrial experimentation. The solutions are all there. They were worked out by scientists and sages already decades ago, even centuries ago. They lie in the drawers of those who won t let them be used. This could be a planet of plenty, of abundance. There is plenty of food, plenty of energy, plenty of money, plenty of medical and educational technology. Scarcity is artificial. Danger of overpopulation is a myth, a misinformation scenario to control people. The problem is not overpopulation but disorganization and bad management on a governmental level. Along with a turn in science - science as a servant of man instead of the military - would have to go a re-orientation of the arts. At its present stage, art either nostalgically glorifies the past, critically portrays the present (thus adding to the tristesse) or outright worships the R6-bank; neither of that is hope-inspiring with regard to the future. And that, I believe, is the role the artist should play in society; he should be an inspirer of hope, courage and strength, a visionary dreaming up better worlds, worlds that seem both desirable and attainable2. THE ATLANTEAN LIABILITY The dangers of a Yatruscan bio-lab continuing unchecked on a planetary scale are obvious. I should imagine that no-one would volunteer to have himself turned into a man-lizard chimera, walk about with the brain of his recently deceased neighbor in his own skull, know that he had a chimpanzee for a foster mother during the inter-uterine months of his life or learn that his mother was a homosexual wanting to bear a baby and actually did so - yet another miracle of modern medicine, condoned by the European Parliament s approval of homosexual marriages. None of this is a product of this author s horrid fantasies, not at all, it s already in its experimental stages, it s for real! And agreement with it is certainly not beyond imagination, because after all we have already volunteered, on a more commonplace level, to being addicted to alcohol, coffee, cigarettes, household drugs, psychiatric drugs, street drugs, etc. Small wonder that we did, after all we are dealing with old habits from long before Inc.2. A Yatruscan tradition perhaps - but still against the basic programs of the GE. There is an agreement based on age-old dramatizations that this should be done. It will take a lot of GE auditing, a lot of work in the actual GE Pool to undo the addiction potential that was built up through triennia of mis-programming through drugs, genetic mutation experiments and direct GE-implanting. This is going to be a fairly extensive auditing project.

227

As a preliminary measure against Yatruscan control scenarios. losing one s fear of death would serve. The bizarre and often inhuman solutions practiced by western medicine to preserve life under all circumstances can only be popular as long as people are afraid to die. The decent honorable death of yesteryear, the decorous death in one s own bed, the preparedness to face one s afterlife, have been replaced by shameful, degraded weeks and weeks in a clinic, with the body drugged and attached to machines, the thetan long gone and the GE as unhappy and restimulated as she can possibly be. There is no harm in dying. The GE is immortal, the thetan is immortal, even the theta quanta the body is composed off, are immortal. So who would mind dying? For the GE a gentle death with the body all in one piece is perfectly acceptable. Part of the program. And after death there is no danger nowadays, now that the Screen has holes in it, neither for GE nor thetan. You go, you come back. No Screen. Or you say good-bye and go elsewhere. Should you ever wish to come back - no problem. Anytime. There is no shortage of bodies, not on this planet. Put two bodies together and they ll produce a third one; it almost always works, thanks to Yatrus. So give death a chance, give the clinic a miss, and the experimentation boys will have less of a market. Life on this planet could be easy if we only reminded ourselves of the Nature of Things, of the basic programs inherent in the phi- and lambda-worlds, and live with them instead of against them. Politically, with Xenu gone and Marcab dispersed and confused, the next twenty years will see us through the worst, but in terms of de-aberrating a body-oriented culture and elevating it to its former Atlantean heights without any aberratedness, elevating it to the ideals of the Vedas, we are talking about a few more years. Perhaps two thousand? Not really a lot, considering. Four quadrillion years of implanting ought to have taught anyone a lesson, one would hope, and perhaps make it agreeable to clean up at long last, each taking care of their own bits. The phase of Making The Game is over, and with the Games Makers gone, we are entering a new phase - that of Un-making the Game.

228

Epilogue One of the dangers connected with writing books is that people may start believing what one says. Anything written may lead to quoting the author, and that to agreeing with him and agreeing with him to underestimating one s own experiences. Out of this, superstition is born, after the tune: Not what I say is true, but what he says . Because he is bigger, better, holier or cleverer than me. So he must be right. Why? Because he wrote a book. But that s all he did, after all, didn t he? And perhaps that s the only difference between you and him, really. He splattered his viewpoint all over the place, you didn t. So what? Nothing in this book is true for everybody . It s the truth some people found for themselves at a specific time. As there are common denominators between what they found, one is inclined to take this as the truth . Fair enough - but perhaps one ought to call it, more cautiously, a passing agreement on what was and what is . A possibility. Example: Was there a World War II? Yes , you might say. Well, how do you know? Did you actually experience it? And if you did, how do you know others had comparable experiences elsewhere? But they told me! , is the answer. And it s documented in films, photographs and many books. So? All you are saying is that you are in agreement with a certain source of information. What is true about World War II is what you agree is true. It s a truth you have arrived at by selecting information according to logic, plausibility and within a mental framework you feel comfortable with. Perhaps everything in this book is an invention, an example of how the combined madness of a number of people as inspired by their chief madman, L. Ron Hubbard, can result in a few hundred printed pages. Perhaps you were introduced to an artificially created universe that s continued to be created by Hubbard s followers. But why would they do such a thing? Wallowing in the mysteries of the whole track, elevating Xenu to a mythological being is no solution to anything, except perhaps that it serves to balance out one s inferiority complex (because now one knows a secret ). There is only one yardstick to judge auditing by: does it make .a person more able to enhance the survival of himself and his fellow men and women? If not, it s pure theta cosmetics to smooth out the wrinkles in one s halo; it s a mind trip, something to get high on, a substitute for living life and exposing oneself to the judgment society brings down on one.

229

Whatever is said here about Xenu, Yatrus and the developmental stages of the universe might be conveniently used by someone to explain why he cannot cope in life, as a good reason to be inefficient, a victim, a pain in the neck. So let it be said loud and clear: nothing in this book is important . What is important is expanding one s own happiness and well being and at the same time that of one s fellows, it s creating effects that can be tolerated by others with oneself being able to tolerate any effect, it s finding solutions that do not backfire and therefore won t ever nail one down to one s past. Some solo-auditor may have a swollen chest because he just knocked a handful of Marcabians off their ship; his next door neighbor, in the same time span, may have been tending the cabbages in his garden. Who is righter ? Who is more ethical? Perhaps this gardener didn t need to do any solo-auditing, because he never made the sort of mistakes this auditor made and so doesn t have to clean anything up. Perhaps he is a gardening missionaire with particular attention to cabbages, straight from the M-ship, and has no Earth case yet that would need straightening out. Perhaps he is an enlightened being from outside the physical universe who only arrived two weeks ago with the intention of setting an example of simplicity and serenity and borrowed that gardener s body. Who is to know? Everything in this book is true with relation to the frame of mind of the people who found these data. And it s true for anyone who can relate to that frame of mind. So it s relatively true. For anyone else, it s nonsense. If this book contained any absolute truth and the reader were able to see it as it is, the world (including this book) would crumble away around him and dissolve into nothingness.

230

APPENDIX A. Glossary (Words printed in italics within a given definition are part of this glossary and defined at their proper alphabetical place.) Aberrated, aberration. Non-optimum, irrational behavior based on compulsions, repression s and fears; behavior not conducive to optimum survival. Taken from Latin, aberrated means literally having wandered off the path . Anchor points. (See theta quanta.) Attention units. (See theta quanta.) Auditee. The person who is audited by an auditor: In scientology jargon usually pre-clear or pc . Auditing. The activity of making someone face the traumatic incidents of his past so as to bring about a higher level of causativeness, ability and joy. Auditor. A listener (literally). He aids the auditee in focusing his attention on traumatic incidents. Awareness of awareness unit. Hubbard defines the thetan as an awareness of awareness unit who creates his thoughts, emotions and mental space and is aware not only of these but as well of the thoughts, emotions and mental pictures streaming in on him from the environment and of his responses to those. He is aware of being aware . If one could have and hold this position of awareness one would remain just as unaffected by thoughts and emotions as a mountain top by rain clouds. This state of causing motion without moving oneself is the essence of static-ness. Basic. The earliest incident on a chain of traumatic incidents, holding all later ones in place and being the cause for aberrated behavior and psychosomatic complaints. Charge. Negative emotions such as grief, fear, anger, hate and rage are signs of charge. Charge is an inner tension, its source being the friction between a games postulate and its counter-postulates. Clear. A person who can control certain areas or categories of mental mest or at least can distinguish between himself and the mental phenomena attempting to blind him; someone who doesn t identify with mental phenomena not created by himself. The state of Clear and its corresponding abilities evolve on an expanding scale, depending on one s inherent abilities and the amount of auditing and general education a person has had. Cognition. A fundamental realization about one s life, usually going along with a change for the better. Cognition s often refer to those basic postulates and attitudes one unknowingly identified with. Dianetics. Literally translated, this means through the mind . L. Ron Hubbard s original method of dealing with psychosomatic interaction as contained in the book Dianetics, Modern Science of Mental Health , published 1950. In 1954, Dianetics came to be comprised within the much broader philosophical structure of scientology. (See there for further data on dianetics.) Dimension points. (See theta quanta.) Dramatization. Compulsively and unknowingly playing the role of one of the people involved in a traumatic incident one has suffered oneself or has telepathically come in contact with.

231

Dynamics. The game below static is conveniently structured as eight dynamics, thus subdividing life into eight playing fields of increasing magnitude and responsibility (counting upwards from dynamic one). They are: first, one s private self; second, sex, family, children; third, the group; fourth, mankind; fifth, organic life including one s body; sixth, inorganic matter and energy, the physical universe; seventh, spiritual activities based on mental energy (theta, lambda); eighth, pure thought activity with no energy attached. Engrams. Recordings of moments of physical pain of life-threatening magnitude. Such incidents are video-filmed and complete with all perceptions, stored in the memory banks of the Genetic Entity. Engrams are the single source of psychosomatic ills. The information contained in them will when restimulated and dramatized, distort the internal co-ordination of the body s energy flows and subsequently its neural and endocrine systems. Emotions. Vibrations produced by thetan and Genetic Entity and emanating from their combined mental energy fields. ( Emotion , Latin, means a motion emanating .) Emotions have frequency and amplitude. The lower the frequency, the lower is the emotion; the lower the amplitude, the weaker is their volume of expression. Emotions are not simply passing moods but basic and fairly persistent attitudes towards life. They function as filters for one s perceptions (inflow) and actions (outflow). Entity. A ridge not made by oneself but by another person during some heavy incident. It s another person s ridge that wandered over to one, getting from the other fellow s space into one s own. Entities have demonic qualities insofar they may produce apparitions at night, speak to one like inner voices or make pictures fall off walls. Game. Consists of goals, freedoms and barriers. Genetic Entity or GE. The bio-energy field surrounding and penetrating the body. It feeds life energy (lambda) to the body and contains basic programs for growth, maintenance and procreation. The term genetic doesn t refer to genes but (based on a Latin word) to the act of bringing forth . The Genetic Entity is really a life generating entity . The GE responds to the thetan by emotional resonance (affinity) and vice versa. Although created by thetans long ago, it has been granted a life of its own and within the framework of its programs operates independently from the thetan in the field of body control, using the same mode of operation as the thetan, namely postulates and theta quanta. Thus it can create ridges (engrams). The GE s survival programs are counter-acted by the contra-survival data contained in engrams. The GE is not an individual like the thetan but a temporal emanation from a general GE Pool whence it comes at the moment of fertilization and where it returns after body death. Goals Problems Mass or GPM. Unknowingly putting attention on goal and countergoal leads to a problem which eventually results in a mass (and ultimately in psychosomatic illness). Havingness. The ability to have everything as well as nothing without ducking, evading, attacking, ignoring or any other mechanism. One would take it as it comes without losing one s good humor and serenity and sense of well being. Havingness at its best is expressed as unconditional love. Implanting. Just as one can implant foreign tissue into an organism, one can - by using the combination of pain, drugs, hypnosis and perhaps electronic means - implant an idea into the mind of a person. It means overwhelming the self-determinedness of a person and robotizing him. Implants degrade thetans to such a state of victimization that they

232

see their only survival chance in identifying with the implanter and becoming him . They will now do to others as he did to them. Lambda. The life-generating energy used by the Genetic Entity. Although both thetan and GE basically operate on the basis of theta quanta, it is convenient to distinguish between the categories theta, lambda and phi. Mental image picture. They aren t only a visual impression of past incidents but as well contain any other mode of sense perception. These may be played off separately, for example only the smell, only the body pains, etc. (See as well ridge.) Mest. Acronym composed of the first letters of the four words matter , energy , space and time . Although all mest is essentially a residue of the creative activity of thetans, one conveniently distinguishes between mental and physical mest. Mind. The platform wherefrom the thetan (as static) acts. The mind is his briefcase , his electronic notebook , consisting of the postulates he keeps continuously energized so as to put a number of activities on automatic. That part of the mind he creates consciously is termed analytical mind , that part he is not aware of (because he doesn t like to) but still reacts to, is the reactive mind (synonym: reactive bank). Most usually the thetan doesn t identify with his static aspect but with this mental energy field called mind. Phi. The residues of past theta creations (made of theta Quanta ), solidified to the density of the physical universe. Postulate. A thought containing an intention to be, do or have. A postulate in itself is not energy; the reverse is true: because of a postulate, energy is created in the first place. Postulates are senior to mest. There are (positive) games postulates and (negative) counter-postulates. The friction between the two generates charge (GPM). Reactive bank, reactive mind. (See mind.) Restimulation. The evoking of buried memories through elements in the environment similar to those in a past incident. The restimulation mechanism, to be exact, is not set in motion by the outside influence itself but by the thetan s putting attention on his games postulates or counter-postulates. (Usually because he has failed to differentiate, has chosen to take the similarity as an identity.) Ridge. A mass of mental energy containing all data of an incident, when it was formed, who was there, how it happened. A ridge contains action, emotions and postulates. Scientology. Literally translated this means study of wisdom . A therapy and selfrealization method based on the philosophical principles laid out by L. Ron Hubbard and their application in auditing. One part of scientology is dianetics (literally through the mind ) where psychosomatic ills are remedied through addressing the thetan and aiding him to take responsibility for the condition of his body and GE. This is achieved by reviewing traumatic incidents in the auditee s or another s past in order to alleviate the charge. In contrast to dianetics, scientology concerns itself with improving spiritual awareness and developing corresponding abilities. (This is why it is categorized as a religion by some.) Scientology is applied in various ways by different groups or sects world wide, some being entirely practical, others fairly ideological. The Church of Scientology is the largest of these sects and actively suppresses the others by legal means (on the issues of copyrights and trademark violations) and personal harassment. (For the history and philosophy of scientology, see Scientology - More than a Cult? ; for the actual procedures, see Scientology - A Handbook for Use , both by L. Kin.)

233

Static. The all-causative aspect of the thetan, the originator of thought, emotion and action. Much as the thetan tends to identify with thought, emotion and action, he in fact never ceases to be static. (See awareness of awareness unit.) Theta. Thought power . Theta appears as pure non-energized thought and, in energized form, as mental mest. It s the building block for being, doing and having (see theta quanta ). Thetan. The thought being , i.e. the agent causing thought and operating by thought as well as mental mest, its derivative. On one level of experience (8th dynamic) a thetan may be defined as the sum of his postulates and counter-postulates , on a lower level of experience (7th dynamic) as the sum of his theta quanta habitually fixated in time and space . Depending on his degree of identification or non-identification, a thetan may appear static, a thought being or a mental mest being ; he may even become his Genetic Entity. Theta quanta. Minute quantities of theta, produced by the thetan whenever he uses energy in his operations. Depending on their use, theta quanta may be called attention units (produced anytime one concentrates), dimension points (to create and demarcate space), or anchor points (to hold the thetan habitually within a certain space). Theta quanta add up to mental mest and, if sufficiently condensed, to physical mest. Time track. The consecutive record of thoughts, emotions and efforts since the beginning of time. A thetan has the potential to recall anything that s of relevance to him. The time track is a mental creation which exists only as long as the thetan wishes to look at it. Thought. (See postulate.) Universe. The totality of everything a thetan ever created, no manner if he considers it important or unimportant, knows it or has decided to forget it, is willing to face it or not. There are three universes: firstly one s own, a closed system, secondly that of another, again a closed system, and thirdly that where the two (or more) overlap or interface. The first and second universe are only real from the viewpoint of their respective creators; the third universe is considered common reality . The degree or magnitude of the interface depends on communication and affinity. Valence. (From valens , Latin, meaning force .) A person in a traumatic incident whose role one may dramatize long after the incident is over. Because of the precision and completeness of data in the recording of an incident one is able to create for oneself a force field sufficiently similar to that person s so that one becomes that person to a degree for as long as the restimulation may last. One goes into his valence . In its extreme form this may be studied by observing the behavior of patients in psychiatric wards. (If one does it voluntarily and intentionally enough, e.g. during magic rituals, one can actually contact and draw power from the thetan/GE unit concerned.)

234

B. Reader s Restimulation Remedy INCIDENT 2 When you, whilst reading this text, feel restimulated and get pictures streaming in on you and feel your body going massy, it isn t actually you personally who is restimulated but your BTs. You most likely weren t there when it happened, but they were. When taking walks, doing practical work or sleeping it off doesn t help to make you feel better, you must audit them. (This works without an E-meter, too.) However, do take vitamin C, E, Bl calcium and magnesium in large dosis. This serves to fortify the body s energy field and keeps the energy impulses produced by awakened entities from affecting the Genetic Entity (which would result in sleeplessness and nervousness) 75, 76 To audit, go back in the text to the sequence steps of Inc.2. Starting with the Capture, go through steps 1 to 6, adding Go to . . . to each step. ( Go to the Capture! ) This turns the step into an auditing command and forces the restimulated BTs through the incident. It reduces their charge and makes them disappear (blow). In all this you must keep a narrow enough beam of attention so you re dealing with one at a time. Sometimes you won t get individual BTs but whole clusters of them. Clusters don t respond as well as BTs because they are many but believe they are one, because they are stuck in the same incident. You can simply ask: Is this a BT or a Cluster? and the reaction will tell you. You will find out that they have leaders . Address your cornmands to the leader or cluster chief and go through the sequence steps as described. The Cluster will fall apart when you get to the step when it was forrned. It may be any of the steps 1 to 6. This is the process: 1.

Locate the source of the pictures or masses you are experiencing. Point to it with your finger. Estimate the distance to it as correctly as you can. The source is of course a BT or Cluster. With a bit of experience you will feel magnetically drawn towards them.

Direct the commands of steps 1 to 6 to them, with good intention. Some people do this silently, others murmur or even speak loudly; this supports their intention. Intend each BT or Cluster through steps 1 to 6. (Do not use any of the later steps!) Do this repeatedly on the same BT or Cluster until you get no more pictures.

235

The BT may blow (disappear) at this point. You can quite distinctly feel a blow by the sudden absence of what your attention was directed to. Instead of a somethingness there is now a nothingness. Acknowledge it and find the next BT. (Step 1 of this Remedy.) In case of a Cluster it will break up into many BTs as soon as you have come to the point in the Inc.2 sequence when it was formed. Handle each BT of that Cluster individually, as described.

If the Inc.2 pictures weaken but the BT doesn t go, repeat taking it through steps 1-6. If it still doesn t go, it needs to be taken earlier on the time track. Charge depends on the basic incident on a chain of incidents, and the basic incident is always the earliest one. Give the command: Go to Incident One! If don t know yet what Incident One is, with any good luck the BT may know. So it s worth trying this command to see what happens, without first reading the chapter where Inc. 1 is explained. When your command produces no result, you will have to study the chapter on it before continuing the auditing of your BT. BTs are in such a state of shock and unconsciousness that they cannot easily recall. That s why the auditor has to intend them through their incidents. As soon as you know the sequence of Incident 1, you can do this. Just follow the instructions given in the Auditing Notes below.

General rule: Run Incident 2 repeatedly on the BT found until its charge is reduced. If the BT doesn t blow, run Incident 1 and earlier similar incidents till you get the basic for that BT. Then it will blow. Always be nice to them. Have a friendly and interested attitude. Being nasty to them because they seem to be nasty to you doesn t heIp a bit. It makes the ridge even bigger! They are in a worse position than you are. After all, you are the one helping them to become free, and not the other way round. By helping them you are helping yourself.

Good luck! INCIDENT 1 Auditing Note 1: By adding Go to . . . ! to the sequence steps of Inc.1 (beginning of chapter 2.2, second quotation) you can take a BT through Inc.1 (similar to what you did on Inc.2).

236

In particular you must direct the BT s attention to the snaps and have it find out what happened during them. This way it will disconnect from the prefabs (prefabricated lumps of theta quanta) and be free. It will eventually be only itself and consist of only one brand of theta quanta - those of the original creator. At this point it usually disconnects from you and blows. All the different bits peeled off it will return to their original creators by themselves. (You can intend them to do this as a final clean up.) Auditing Note 2: When your BT does not blow after running it through Inc.1 a few times, it obviously isn t quite free to go yet. There are foreign theta quanta and the intentions tied up in them, holding it. Check for earlier similar incidents? or pre-1 incidents? . Ask either of these questions repeatedly. Even though you may not get any pictures (too subtle), the BT will be led down a chain of incidents to the first one and blow. Auditing Note 3: If your BT did not blow after running the pre-I chain, he is for sure stuck in a recruitment incident. Just ask for it. How did you ever come to agree with Xenu? When did you first decide to play his game? He will tell you. Make sure you have him find the exact moment when he went for Xenu s precious glittery theta quanta, get his contact with the first one of them, get him to spot the admiration he had for Xenu and the postulate he made then. This will free him. (You aren t auditing a BT any more, actually. You are now in contact with the thetan behind the BT. Whereas the BT was just a dot in space, the thetan feels big.) Auditing Note 4: After running your BT through its recruitment incident, you have attained the result that no further foreign theta quanta are attached to it, neither of Xenu nor of others. It is basically itself, meaning that it consists only of one brand of theta quanta - those of the original creator. It may blow now. But if it is an unhappy BT, it won t blow. Should its creator have had a loss or failure in an earlier game or an earlier universe, his theta quanta will bear the marks of this and you ll have to audit it. To remind you: all theta quanta contain an imprint of the emotion and the postulate at the moment of their creation. When you get both and duplicate it exactly, energized theta will vanish and transform itself into static theta. This mechanism makes auditing possible. Ask: Failure in an earlier universe? Get all data and the exact failure including the postulate made then. Continue with: Earlier similar failure? When this doesn t cause any further response, the aspect of failure has lost interest. Time to look at positive aspects. Give the command: Go to an earlier universe where you were happy or fully causative or successfully did your own thing . Get the data and repeat the command if no joyfulness occurs, taking him even earlier.

237

This is an orientation step to happier times and gives the BT (and its creator) an idea what sort of game he could go back to. It rehabilitates causativeness. Note that this chain of earlier universes? may go to static and earlier. The really good and successful games of that particular BT or thetan may have been before static! As a result of these two commands, the BT (and its creator) will feel relief and the last quanta connecting you with the thetan behind the BT will finally blow. Of all steps on this procedure, it will be on this one at the latest that the original BT becomes a thetan. The original BT, witness to all sorts of terrible incidents and dirtied up by foreign theta quanta, is now stripped down to a handful of simple and homogeneous quanta pertaining to a single owner and serving as a communication link between two thetans: you and him. You are in touch with a live thetan on the other side of the BT, you are in touch with a being, and he will be huge. There will be mutual recognition of this circumstance, thankfulness and words of good-by - and then, when the last of his theta quanta has been dissolved, the line will disconnect. You can t blow a thetan, you see. You can be in touch with him via a number of dimension points, by an interchange of attention, and you can stop being in touch with him. But you can t blow him. General note: When your BT has blown and you still feel soupy around the head, the theta quanta which were disconnected from the BT by the auditing may still be there. The original BT has gone but the bits that were added to it during the pre-l incidents didn t. Usually these bits (theta quanta) are in a state of disorientation and don t quite know where to go. Some of them may even be your own. Because it is your own theta power which held the BT in place - in your age-long effort to keep it away! Stray theta quanta are easy to deal with. Do this: 1.

Locate them. Have your attention scan around like a radar beam and encompass them in your space. They feel like a loose cloud.

Give them the Two Rights of a Thetan . They apply to all theta, not only to thetans proper. Each theta quantum suffers when it is stuck somewhere. By its nature theta strives to be static. So tell them: You have the right to self-determinism. You have the right to leave a game. This has two obvious implications; add them, too: You are free to do what you like. You may join your creator and dissolve into the static state. Or you may

238

help in a game of your choice. Repeat these instructions while scanning your space until they cause no further change. 3.

Most of them will have blown now. Allow them to blow inwards, too, i.e. towards you! Because your personal ones will come to you (that s an inflow), whereas foreign ones will go elsewhere (that s an outflow). Blocking this inflow may cause new masses! Those who don t blow must be stuck in some incident. Either it s the original hoover/spin/energy-sphere incident, or it s a later one. After all, once they were in existence as pre-fabs all sorts of people used them! One thetan might have lost them and the next one picked them up. You must account for that. The earliest incident of overwhelm is that of hoovering. Therefore ask: Hoovering incident? and take them through the three steps of hoovering, spinning and storage. No response to that, ask: Stuck in some other incident? Get all incidents later than the hoovering (complete with the postulates which might have been impressed on them) until none are left, then run the hoovering as the earliest. This will clean up your space to full brightness.

(Note that the auditing procedure recommended here goes far beyond the original OT III method. It was developed by Bill Robertson in 1985 whilst researching Excalibur . Note as well that OT III can only be successfully done in combination with OT I and II and if based on the ability called Clear . The above is only meant to serve as a remedy for the reader.)

239

C. Excalibur Occasionally - and in particular before OT III and after - one finds entities that don t respond to Inc.2 or Inc.l, at least not immediately. This is because either they are prepared as control entities (trained on their man) and won t give away their secrets on a direct approach, or because they were not created in context with Inc.2, Inc.1 or any incident within Xenu s game. They need a very individualized approach - the Excalibur procedure by Bill Robertson. THE PROCEDURE A. Short Form for weak and fairly ego-less entities, for undefined bits and lumps, interfering fields and screens, etc. 1.

Face the entity with loving admiration and become aware of its particle structure.

Tell them: You all have the Two Rights of a Thetan, namely the right to selfdeterminism and the right to leave a game.

The game you were created for, is over. You have done a fantastic job. But now that it s over you may all go home.

Each of you please return to your own moment of creation! You may rejoin your creator, dissolve into nothingness or help in some other game.

Normally you will find the entity lightening up at this point or even dissolving. The remaining ones you may ask: With what postulate (for which job) were you created?

Acknowledge their answers and do steps 2 through 4 until they have gone.

Should it hang up, you would have to repeat the postulates given by them, pay attention to the incidents washed up that way, and run them in the narrative style (beginning to end, beginning to end, etc.) until they are discharged. (See the chapter on Postulate Auditing in A Handbook for Use .)

If all this doesn t work, use the Long Form.

B. Long Form for entities with a lot of ego-power or for the bits remaining after the application of the Short Form. Can as well be used for thetans in their capacity as players of specific games, to get them out of these games. (Not to be used for the GE as one doesn t want to dissolve it nor disconnect it from one. One wants the GE to function

240

optimally and make it take care of the body as it should. To do so, one cleans it up by auditing the engrams it dramatizes. Excalibur doesn t serve for this.) 1.

Where are you? (The entity may have an entirely different opinion on this than the auditor!)

What are you? (Job, task, mission, purpose, role. Must read on the meter! Example: I m a flower pot. ) Result of step 2: correct definition of the being of the entity.

a) As a flower pot, what are you trying to attain (in particular on me)? b) As a flower pot, what are you trying to prevent (in particular on me)? (Repeat 3a and 3b alternatingly until no further answers come. No FIN on the meter needed. - F/N means floating needle and indicates a state of inner harmony. Result of 3: correct definition of the doing of the entity.

a) As a flower pot, what have you actually attained (in particular on me)? b) As a flower pot, what have you actually prevented (in particular on me)? (Repeat 4a and 4b alternatingly till no further answers come; no F/N on the meter needed. Get real events that you know have happened in your life, time, place and circumstances. You want to find out when and how this entity interfered with your life.) Result of 4: correct definition of the having (products) of the entity.

When have you been put on me? (Answer not really relevant for the entity but for the solo-auditor who usually has big realizations about his life at this point. For handling the entity further, no answer is needed here. Should one get a good answer it s worth finding out what in-between hosts the entity had before it got to the solo-auditor, and where it originated from.)

After gathering all these data one may have to re-formulate the answer given in 1. If the answer given in 1 had a weak read on the meter or if that answer doesn t seem to go well with the data received so far, ask again: Now that we know all

241

that, what would be the correct wording for what you really are? - Example: A meat-eating plant. (Instead of a mere flower pot .) Result of 3 through 6: Relationship between entity and auditor has been cleared up; the entity has begun to trust the auditor and is well in session . Only now one can - starting with the next question - begin to handle the actual case of the entity. 7.

How did you become that? (For example a meat-eating plant .) (Repeatedly run through the incident in the narrative style until the incident is discharged and the point found when the entity or rather the actual thetan in the incident - decided and agreed to be what he is now, for example a meat-eating plant . This step, as the first and only one so far, must F/N on the meter.)

No F/N at this point: the entity isn t fully cleaned up yet and is still connected with some masses. Inc.2? - Inc. 1 ? - Earlier similar incidents where foreign masses or particles were stuck to you? (Run narrative to F/N.)

F/N but no blow, i.e. the entity/thetan doesn t dissolve or leave. This is due to disorientation. No masses - but what now? It takes rehabilitating earlier games and purposes, particularly those the thetan was in full agreement with, when he was free and self-determined. Handle in the fashion of the earlier universe steps suggested in the Restimulation Remedy. (This step adresses the thetan behind the entity rather than the actual entity itself.)

10.

Handle any stray theta quanta with steps 2 through 4 of the Short Form. This will F/N. HOLDERS

At any point in the above sequence you may find the entity becoming unresponsive and unwilling to talk further. Usually it is kept from communicating by a senior entity, the holder . Find (telepathically) the line to the holder and audit him on steps 1 through 10 above. Rule: never cut an entity short and prematurely look for possible holders. This may lead to over-restimulation and too much charge as to audit anything. Run each entity as far as you can get with it, reducing as much of its charge as you can, and only ask for holders when there is no other way. Once the top holder is found and blown, you may come down the line again and audit all lower entities in sequence. This will be easy now that the suppression from up top is gone. RESISTIVENESS

242

Some entities or thetans are perceptible but entirely unresponsive. They don t answer back; they resist any of the above approaches. To crack them, the Power Processes (Pr Pr s) are suggested, in particular Pr Pr s 4, 5 and 6. They are a fairly tedious but reliable method to deal with resistiveness. Each Pr Pr is audited repetitively on the sequence of commands given as long as there are answers or meter reads or (ideally) both. One process leads to the next; they don t have to F/N each. The main point is to find the central incident the entity or thetan is stuck in and identified with; this usually happens during Pr Pr 6. At this point one would change over to the narrative style. (This application of Pr Pr s doesn t entirely conform with that used on auditees in the flesh .) Pr Pr 4 (Source): 1. Tell me a source. 2. Tell me about it. 3. Tell me a no-source. 4. Tell me about it. Pr Pr 5 (Conditions): 1. What is? 2. What isn t? Pr Pr 6 (Existence): 1. Tell me an existing condition. (A condition that exists right at this very split second.) 2. How have you handled it? (In the past, particularly the very first time you encountered it. This question will eventually lead to the central GPM the entity/thetan is stuck in.)

243

D. Bibliography As tbis book goes to the multi-lingual European community, all titles are listed in their original language edition so that the reader may inquire for translations into his specific language. All definitions of English words are taken from the Thomdike-Barnhart Advanced Dictionary, 1974. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

L.Ron Hubbard, Technical Dictionary of Dianetics and Scientology, 1975. L.Ron Hubbard, Science of Survival , 1951. Both quotes from the Australian magazine Nexus , December/January 1993. See The Code of Honor in the book Scientology 0-8 by L.Ron Hubbard, 1970. L.Ron Hubbard, Scientology 8-8008 .1953. Paramhansa Yogananda, Autobiography of a Yogi , 1977. Rupert Sheldrake, The Presence of the Past , 1989. L.Ron Hubbard, A History of Man , 1952. Max Freedom Long, The Secret Science behind Miracles , 1954. Franz Bardon, Frabato , 1979. Dieter Ruggeberg, Theosophie und Anthroposophie im Licht der Hemmetik , 1988. Karl Freiherr von Reichenbach, Der sensitive Mensch und sein Verhalten zum Ode , 1854. David V. Tansley, Radionics Interface with the Ether Fields , 1979. Peter Tompkins / Christopher Bird, The Secret Life of Plants , 1973. L.Ron Hubbard, HCOB 15 May 1963, The Time Track . The German Journal Implosion Nr.13, 1959. The book referred to is A lost Technology by Henry Kjellson, Sweden, publication date unkown. Ajit Mookerjee, The Tantric Way , London 1977. Quoted from Bruce Cathie, The Energy Grid, Harmonic 695 ,1990. Nikola Tesla, Colorado Spring Notes 1899-1900 ,1976. Albert Einstein, Das Raum-, Ather- und Feldproblem der Physik , 1934; quoted from Dr. h Rolf Schaffranke (alias Rho Sigma), Forschung in Fesseln , 1994. L.Ron Hubbard, Scientology 0-8 ,1970. Francis Hitching, Atlas of World Mysteries , 1978. Shankara, Crest-Jewel of Discrimination , 1970. Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, The Science of Being and tbe Art of Living , 1966. P. Cyrill and K. Krasisnki, Tibetische Medizinphilosophie , 1953. Will Durant, The Story of Civilization , volume 3 ( Cesar and Christ ), 1944, and volume 4 ( The Age of Faith ), 1950. According to Bill Robertson, this is taken from Hubbard s Philadelphia Doctorate Course, 1952. J.G. Bennett, Gurdjieff, a very great Enigma , 1984. W.Y. E-ans-Wentz, appendix to The Tibetan Book of Dead , 1960. Julien Tondriau, Du yoga au fakirism , Brussels 1960. L.Ron Hubbard, introduction to the novel Battlefield Earth , 1982. Stephen W. Hawking, Black Holes and Baby Universes (Essays), 1993.

244

33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70.

Buckminster Fuller and Robert Marks, The Dymaxion World of BuckminsterFuller , 1973. Robert Charroux, Histoire inconnue des hommes depuis cent mille ans ,. 1965. Robert O. Becker, Cross Currents , 1990. L.Ron Hubbard, Lecture 33, Philadelphia Doctorate Course , 1952. Wilhelm Reich, Contact with Space , 1957. Erich von Daniken, Strategie der Gottei , 1990. Johannes von Buttlar, Adams Planet , 1991. The Tlbetan Book of the Dead, see 29 Luigi Moraldi, L aldila dell uomo , Milano 1985. Raymond A. Moody, Life after Life , 1975. Leonard Bernstein, The Unanswered Question , The Norton Lectures at Harvard, 1973. Conroy Maddox, Dali , 1983. Heinz Pfeifer, Bruder des Schattens , 1971. Dieter Ruggeberg, Geheimpolitik , 1990. Des Griffin, Descent into Slavery , 1980. Des Griffin, Fourth Reich of the Rich , 1979. Gary Allan, None Dare Call It Conspiracy , 1971. Will Durant, The Story of Civilization , volume I ( Our Oriental Heritage ), 1935. Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope , 1966. Alfons Rosenberg, Durchbruch zur Zukunft , 1958. Paolo Lionni/Lance Klass, The Leipzig Connection , 1978. Dr. Thomas Levy, MD, in Extraordinary Science , Jan/Feb/Mar 1994. The evidence quoted in Levy s article (and in this book) is taken from American Mercury Magazine , November 1959, p.l34. Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control , 1978. G. Andrews, ET among us , 1987. For the use of microwaves to create calculated effects on human DNA and brain functions, see Symposium on Microwave Resonance Therapy , Kiev, Ukrainian Republic, May 10th -13th, 1989. O. Bergrnann, Deutsche Flugscheiben und U-Boote uberwachen die Weltmeere , 1988. Haarmann, Geheime Wunderwaffen , Teil I-m, 1983-1985. Michael Hesemann, UFOs - die Kontakte , 1990. Elian Lian, Der Pandora Aspekt . Louis Pauwels/Jaques Bergier, Le Matin des Magiciens , 1962. Dayton Miller, The Ether Drift Experiment and the Determination of the absolute Motion of the Earth , 1933. John Symonds, The Great Beast , 1971. A. Carmin, Guru Hitler , 1985. Lumir Bardon, Erinnerungen an Franz Bardon , 1992. Ravi Shankar, My Music, my Life , 1968. Franz Bardon, Der Weg zum wahren Adepten , 1957. Franz Bardon, Die Praxis der magischen Evokation , 1957. Franz Bardon, Der Schlussel zur wahren Quabbalah , 1957.

245

71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78.

L.Ron Hubbard, Tape 6810C01. Jon Atack, A Piece of Blue Sky , 1990. Russell Miller, Bare-faced Messiah , London 1987. Ruth Minshull, How to Choose Your People , 1972. See GUK Bomb in 1. Serge King, Imagineering for Health , 1981. Serge King, Mastering Your Hidden Self. A Guide to the Huna Way , 1985. TV documentation by British journalists Tessa Shaw and Christine Ward Pearce, POW TV, Channel 4,1994. 79. The Australian magazine Nexus , June/July 1994. 80. Lincoln, Baigent, Leigh, The Holy Blood and the Holy Grail , 1982.

246

L.Kin Volume 4 __________________________

From the Bottom to the Top (The Way Out)

Contents Contents

Preface

Chapter One: Some General Considerations

The Anatomy of a Thetan ........................................................................... 9 Auditing and Other Practices ..................................................................... 13

Chapter Two: Getting Started

Step One: The Interview.............................................................................. 21 Step Two: The Program............................................................................... 23 Step Three: Postulate Auditing .................................................................. 25

Chapter Three: Moving Upwards

Ruds, Grades, Repair Lists, Rundowns, etc. ............................................. 34 The Auditor´s Three-Drawer Toolbox....................................................... 39 Three Types of Bridges ............................................................................... 42 Meter Reads and Truth ............................................................................... 44 Session Control ............................................................................................ 46 KRC-Auditing .............................................................................................. 48

Chapter Four: Going Solo

How Clear is a Clear?.................................................................................. 53 Each His Own Bridge.................................................................................. 56 The Solo Practical......................................................................................... 60

Chapter Five: The Solo Levels

Materials ....................................................................................................... 66 Prerequisites................................................................................................. 69 General Description..................................................................................... 71 Solo 1............................................................................................................. 74 Solo 2............................................................................................................. 76 Solo 3............................................................................................................. 81 Excalibur....................................................................................................... 87 The GE Rundown (GERD).......................................................................... 103 Auditing MEST ............................................................................................ 120 An All-Purpose Trouble-Shooter Checklist............................................... 123 The Self-Exploration and Perfection Program (SEPP).............................. 125 Warning: Black Shadow Thetans (BSTs) ................................................... 133 Higher Echelon Hats ................................................................................... 138

Epilogue

140

Appendix

141

A. A Homage to Ron ................................................................................... 142 B. The Parabolic Tonescale ......................................................................... 148 C. Auditing Essentials ................................................................................. 150 D. Notes on Supervising ............................................................................. 155 E. Theory Course for Auditors (Checksheet) ............................................ 159 F. Practical Course for Auditors (Checksheet) .......................................... 168 G. The Solo 2 Checksheet ............................................................................ 178 H. The Solo 3 Checksheet............................................................................ 180 I. The Excalibur Checksheet........................................................................ 183 J.Auditing and Nutrition ............................................................................ 184

Preface This book, which I assume will be the last volume in the L.Kin series, deals with the solo route to case completion. Case completion means there is nothing left to be audited. Except perhaps out of curiosity, but not out of need. You are aware of the significant events of your past track, those that have formed your present, and you have discharged them. The charge is gone, the information is left. You are aware of entities, i.e. other people´s ridges flying about (and there are lots), and you don´t fall for them any more. You are aware of the Genetic Entity looking after your body. Through auditing it you have learnt to live with it rather than against it or in ignorance of it. You become aware of other thetans´ thoughts and postulates even before they can interfere with your own. You are aware of your game, your purposes, and of the mission you have to fulfill before you can calmly leave this planet and go elsewhere. You know the mission and what it takes to fulfill it, and are working on it. You can plan out your next incarnation with certainty. The usual veil of forgetfulness won´t lay itself upon you in the between-lives area. The future is yours. In short, you are a happy, healthy and purposeful person.

At this stage you are straight up against life. No charge of the past creeping in, no old bad karma making you stumble. It´s you and life eye to eye. No filters. The only recourse from there on out is keeping your TRs in and applying the ethics conditions. Tough stuff. (But with maximum rewards.) Volume 1 was on the philosophy of Hubbard, volume 2 on its practical application as far as attaining the ability of Clear. Volume 3 was on the sort of stuff you may run into in the OT 3 band and beyond. Like it or not, one can´t seem to avoid getting involved with galactic politics. This present volume puts the first three together and suggests a route towards case completion (a "bridge", to use that term). On one´s way there one will experience the phenomena described in volume 3. Eventually, towards the end, one will leave such phenomena behind. Because after all, any of these experiences are only theta adventures. They are something one may have to go through, yet by themselves they are not important. As well, this fourth volume reflects the way I work personally. I speak for myself rather than let Ron Hubbard speak (as I did in the previous volumes). What follows in this present book, then, is what I myself do with Hubbard´s technology, how I personally use the basic tools and concepts of Class VIII. (They were described in volume 2, the "Handbook for use".) Much as Class VIII constitutes a fairly high level of accomplishment and skill, it is also a level of great simplicity. It reduces the complexity of the tech to two simple concepts: one, look at people as composite beings consisting of a thetan, his bank, entities, a GE and a body; two, get this multi-dimensional interaction sorted out by the simplest of means. That´s standard tech Class VIII style. It will coincide only rarely with the rather rigid version of "standard tech" as practiced in certain places. That sort of "standardness" turns auditing into a ritual and the auditor into a robot. It makes auditing become a soul-less, lifeless pursuit. It makes it ineffective. Which is a sad thing to happen. For many users of Hubbard´s technology, this ritualistic standardness became unbearable. As a solution they dropped dianetics and scientology, perhaps claimed that their involvement with it was an error of their young days, got involved with one of the derivatives of Hubbard´s work (like Soul

Retrieval, Dianasis, TROM, Belief Changing, Avatar, Metapsychology, etc.), and then announced that this was ever so much better than "scientology". Wheras in fact they may never have come close to the real thing in the first place! It was denied to them by those who purported to administer it. Likewise there are those who totally turned away from Hubbard´s teachings and found a new spiritual home through contacting some guru or healer or telepathic genius. They are likely to report that just one session with their enlightened master relieved them of their suffering, and that he therefore did something that dozens of hours of engram running didn´t do. Which - in their opinion - goes to show that dianetics is all wrong. Yet I ask again: did they ever come close to the real thing? Or were they perhaps let down by certain "experts" who, misled by their own selfimportance, believed themselves to be competent? I´d be the first to admit that Ron Hubbard´s work can be put to many uses, as this is what I´m doing myself and is what this whole book is about. Yet although one may have to use fancy names for legal and PR reasons I suggest that one shouldn´t omit referring to one´s source, and that one should do so in a respectful way - instead of denying altogether that one got it from Hubbard or speaking about him spitefully or slanderously. If Ron hadn´t put his system there, we wouldn´t be where we stand now. It´s as simple as that. I´d be the first to admit as well that there are indeed enlightened masters about, and that one can find them in many different disciplines. One session by such a master may cure what neither the medical doctor nor the dianetic auditor manages to cure. I know that. Nevertheless one cannot rightfully use this as an argument against Hubbard and his teachings. Because all it means is that one has a lot to learn. Having to consult an enlightened master may be very exciting, yet at the same time it proves that one isn´t quite enlightened oneself. The strong point in Ron´s work is this: that apart from helping one to get rid of things it also helps one to become aware of things. It teaches awareness. This is what auditing, particularly solo auditing, is all about: increasing one´s awareness of being aware. It´s a training action rather than a case action. In the end one is in the position to help oneself. At least one should be. It´s a long way. The point is: one can do without the enlightened master. Even without Ron Hubbard. And that, I think, is a fantastic achievement.

I´m aware that - in view of the battles raging on Internet and in the courthouses of the world - it may seem slightly naive to say anything positive about Ron Hubbard and his work. Yet in my view there is only one single reason for these battles, and it has nothing to do with "the tech" as such. It is this: people were lied to. Promises were made but not kept. "If you can´t get the technology applied then you can´t deliver what´s promised. It´s as simple as that. If you can get the technology applied, you can deliver what´s promised. The only thing you can be upbraided for by students or pcs is `no results´. Trouble spots occur only where there are `no results´. Attacks from governments or monopolies occur only where there are `no results´ or `bad results´." I bet you´ve heard this before. It is from "Keeping Scientology Working", HCO PL 7 February 1965. There was always a haze of wishful thinking around promises of states and abilities, but, dodgy salesmanship aside, when the auditor has good results, people are perfectly happy with Ron and his tech. No legal battles. So let´s all have some good results on others and ourselves, and make this world a better place, shall we? (Note: To my three previous volumes I´ll refer like this: (LK1/p. 96). This would mean: "L.Kin, volume 1, page 96". Or: (LK3/ch.1), meaning "L.Kin, volume 3, chapter 1".)

Chapter One: Some General Considerations

THE ANATOMY OF A THETAN Man, as he lives on this planet, is a self-contained interactive system interacting with other self-contained interactive systems. So a lot of interaction takes place. The theoretical model we are using to come to grips with this is as follows: there is a state outside games (static) and inside games (dynamic). Both interact through the thetan. For the purpose of interaction inside games the thetan creates postulates and energy. This, through non-attention, may lead to solidification: to the thetan´s home-made ridges (GPMs) and his identification with foreign-made ridges (entities). Further components in this model are the mest universe, the Genetic Entity (GE) with its somatic banks containing billions of engrams, and the body. Part and parcel of this model are certain considerations: that of reincarnation (past and future lives), of individual time tracks being linear, of the law of cause and effect ("karma", to use an old term), and of one´s present and future being the consequence of one´s past. None of this is true in the absolute sense. It´s only part of a workable model. A "model" is a way of looking at things. So what we´ve got here is a useful way of looking at things. As one puts this model into practice one clears out the bad karma of one´s own past and that of others in order to improve one´s future. One concerns oneself a lot with the past. Why? Because a person suffering from bad karma won´t achieve his goals. For various reasons: firstly, earlier unpleasant experiences (his own Goals Problems Masses) make him feel uncertain and inhibited; secondly, his middle management (the entities) actually falsify his intentions; thirdly his work crew (GE) goes on strike (activated engrams), rendering the body useless. Add to that the interaction with other thetans´ opinions, other thetans´ banks, other thetans´ entities and other thetans´ body/GE-units, and you get the picture. Yet despite all of this interaction going on, the thetan is supposed to be the boss. What goes on is his responsibility. Auditing is designed to handle this wildly uncontrolled interaction so as to re-establish the thetan on his post. It does, in fact. If done right.

What auditing is good auditing? Any auditing that gets a thetan peeled out of the above. To repeat: what goes on in the system totally and utterly depends on the thetan´s considerations and agreements. That many of his considerations and agreements are suppressed, ignored and not-ised doesn´t change the matter at all. It´s his responsibility. It´s he who made the considerations, he who went into agreement, he who identified himself with lousy conditions. His fault. Who built that bank? He did. Flow zero all the way. This is the way to build a bank: First one fails to succeed and thinks up a negative thought (counter-postulate) of one´s own. Second step: On the basis of this personal GPM the losses, considerations, and the charge of others can be pulled in and be identified with. Foreign GPMs are added to one´s own. As the last step, this unwanted accumulation of twisted postulates and mental mest is taken out on the GE and through it, on the body. One´s own incidents and postulates and one´s entities´ incidents and postulates send their aberrating impulses and commands down to the GE, and the GE starts operating in a fittingly aberrated way. It dutifully pulls out engrams which somehow seem to suit the requirements. It tries to communicate what it finds upwards, to the command level, but nobody seems to listen. So what can it do but release the engram contents downwards, to the body, and - behold! - the body gets ill. Small wonder, indeed. So the reason why we put old soup cans into the hands of that body, is to measure what goes on further up the line. GE energy fluctuations cause changes in skin resistance. That makes the meter read. And from the read and the TA position we can tell that thetan, entities and GE are not in a state of harmony with each other. You may look at this in terms of little gnomes and elves working away inside the body trying to do the thetan´s bidding or, more abstractly, as vibrations and resonances between the interactive fields of thetan, entities and GE. Either way it comes down to the same phenomena.

There seems to be a limited number of modes of perception available to man. No matter what classical esoteric school of wisdom or contemporary New Age fashion you wish to follow: it all boils down to perceiving by means of positioning viewpoints, and to the interaction of viewpoints thus positioned. One may perceive as a thetan from inside or outside one´s body; one may perceive through another´s viewpoint; one may perceive through the GE (human, animal or plant); one may perceive through mest. That´s about all one can do. Which is why no "new" esoteric trend ever comes up with anything novel. The Four-Layered Case What does the above mean for the practice of auditing? It means that any situation the auditee wants to see resolved can be addressed on four levels. Firstly, one may address the situation on the time track of the person concerned, of the auditee himself. When did it start, where, and how? Finding this out exactly will lead to either a key-out, a release or an erasure. Secondly, one may address the situation with respect to the auditee´s entities: how did they contribute to the trouble and complicate it? Thirdly, one may address the situation with respect to the GE and its engrams: to what extent did they play a role? Fourthly, one may address the situation with respect to the body: by recommending medical care, food, sleep, vitamins, exercise, and by suggesting the auditee stay away from drugs, poisons and electronic pollution. In practice, these four layers of case do not necessarily follow each other in this sequence! You can´t help starting with what the auditee offers you as an entry point. But whilst working on one layer you have to also be aware of the others so as to account for "weird session phenomena". Nothing weird about them when you know that the session runs on four layers simultaneously. This shows you in essence what a "bridge to total freedom" would have to consist of: it would have to handle the four levels of thetan, entities, GE and body in whatever sequence, so as to eventually put the thetan in full control of his shop.

Only then, with a healthy body, a known ideal scene and no entities or telepathic interferences keeping him from attaining it, could a person be considered free.

AUDITING AND OTHER PRACTICES The Thetan, Your Neglected Friend I believe that Ron Hubbard has contributed to the advancement of spirituality on this planet Earth in two ways: by emphasizing that thetans (i.e. all of us) are the source of space, energy, matter and time (and that therefore mest doesn´t exist as independent of thetans), and by discovering the thetan´s bank, in particular the bank characteristic for this planet, the R6 bank. Everybody else (yoga, meditation, aikido, tai chi, shiatsu, shamanism) concerns themselves with investigating and improving the thetan´s relationship to energy, but the thetan himself they take for granted. To live life better they use strict ethics and rigorous training. Ron alone made the thetan himself the subject of investigation.By auditing his foreign-made GPMs (implants) and self-made GPMs he found psychological abysses hitherto unknown. He attempted to rehabiliate the thetan as the "source point" he sees him to be. (That he didn´t succeed with this in all repects doesn´t diminish the value of what was actually achieved.) I have actively participated in various methods that teach a thetan to handle organic energy ("lambda", in Hubbard´s terms): meditation, yoga, tai-chi, aikido, shiatsu, etc. I have audited some people who were highly adept in these methods. Despite their adeptness they would still respond to auditing. They found implants they wouldn´t have dreamt of. Why? Because much as these methods teach a thetan how to control energy they don´t make the thetan look at himself (in particular at the implants he has received or associated with energetically). They don´t actually handle the case of the boss in the system. They leave him unchanged. Take shiatsu: an accomplished master of this art can not only heal but actually re-mould bones and vertebrae. Of course, it isn´t the man doing it himself, it´s him influencing his patient´s GE and appealing to that GE´s ideal scene and its programs. I was told by an authority in that field that after some months or years of such treatment the actual mass of the bone will have taken on its proper shape and form again.

It works only as long as the patient doesn´t put counter-postulates there. Part of the reason shiatsu takes so long is that the healer has to slowly change the agreements of his patient with regard to the patient´s body so as to key out counter-intentions. But he doesn´t actually get the patient to analyse his GPMs and as-is them. This is where auditing is different. The difference lies in what´s done with the charge one has detected: the shiatsu practitioner smoothes it out, the auditor finds its source. The shiatsu practitioner goes for key-out and release, the auditor for as-ising the underlying conflict (GPM). But not to forget, there is some great virtue in disciplines like shiatsu, aikido or tai-chi, in that they strengthen the "body org" consisting of thetan, GE and body. They strengthen it internally by harmonizing the energies of these three "business partners". Thus they make the "org" relatively immune to disturbances from the outside such as radiation or "telefighting". Auditing in contrast furthers the thetan´s natural tendency to look outwards. Particularly solo auditing serves to establish "external security". Tai-chi, shiatsu and aikido masters are specialists in GE matters, auditors are specialists in thetan matters. The difference between these two approaches to mental health could be used for their mutual benefit. It seems to me that Ron Hubbard at the time he wrote "Dianetics", worked from a viewpoint similar to that of the eastern disciplines mentioned. Back in the 1950s he thought that the thetan was essentially a clean being, only interfered with by pictures from the somatic banks of the GE. He thought the body was the problem. His idea was to calm down the GE by auditing most of its key engrams. With this unwanted interference gone, the person was expected to be "clear". In those years of the past (until 1952), Ron seemed to have known very little about past lives, let alone entities. He didn´t seem to know that the thetan had a bank of his own. He thought there was only a GE bank. The GE bank consists of the recordings of death or near-death incidents received by human, animal or plant bodies in the past. Only later did he discover that there is a thetan bank, too! The thetan bank consists of one´s own GPMs (ridges) and of others´ GPMs one unknowingly identified with (entities).

A Novel Type Of Meditation Ron´s most significant technical innovation (in my opinion) is this: that he expanded the concept of meditation so as to include two people. TR-0 is meditation for two persons being there with each other. This is one step up from Gautama Buddha´s idea that one should just sit down by oneself, hold still, watch the flow of one´s breath, not attach oneself to passing attitudes, emotions, sensations and pains, and see what would happen. With that, Siddartha Gautama cut through the complications accrued throughout some two or three thousand years of vedic practice. He told people to keep it simple. In the same vein Ron - by saying that one should sit down with another, hold still, not attach oneself to passing attitudes, emotions, sensations and pains, and see what would happen - cut through the complications accrued throughout some two thousand years of Buddhist practice. Yet again someone had to come along and tell people to keep it simple. Rumour has it that Ron was Buddha. To my knowledge, Ron never claimed to have been the Buddha of 500 B.C.. Ron Hubbard was not Siddartha Gautama. They were two different persons entirely. However, Ron does claim (in "Hymns of Asia") to be the coming buddha, the Maitreya. It was mentioned above that eastern practices take one to a very high state of release and energy control. They release you from the bank and make you able to handle matter and energy way beyond the wildest assumptions of western science. Think of their healing powers! Their martial arts! Their control of telepathy and the "paranormal"! Fabulous stuff. Yet seductive, too! Which is why Hubbard used strong words against it (LK3/ p.114). One particular discipline doesn´t concern itself with energy at all, though, and that´s Zen Buddhism. Up to the present day, Zen masters keep emphasizing that nothingness (static) is the source of all things. So by Hubbard´s standards they could probably be considered ok. Ron Hubbard A Clandestine Zen Monk? It´s quite intriguing to look at Hubbard´s technology in terms of Zen Buddhism. Zen Buddhism is very much a "now!" discipline. Ron refers to this as "stay in present time!" or "doing what you are doing whilst you are doing it" (his

definition of power). Using that as a maxim of course bypasses all auditing and leads right over to the subject of ethics. It aims at the static aspect of the thetan, at the awareness of creating one´s actuality by postulates alone For example, if one maintained that the ups and downs of one´s life were entirely due to oneself having fallen prey to suppressive persons in one´s past, and if one maintained further that this condition was going to be improved by auditing sometime in the future, one would forget that the condition is now, that it is being created now, and that from the viewpoint of ethics the past is no excuse for not making it go right in the present: there is only "now". This principle actually underlies Objectives Processes. They are merciless in that they don´t permit bank to be an excuse for bad performance. "Touch that wall!" - "Thank you!" - "Let go of that wall!" - "Thank you!" - "Touch that wall!" - "I have a headache!" - "Never mind, just keep going. Touch that wall!" - Etc. The most fascinating process command Ron ever came up with was: "Change your mind about it!" Auditee: "I hate being lonesome, ugly, ill and a total failure." Auditor: "Fine. Just change your mind about it!" Doesn´t work. Demands an ability one may command at the top end of the bridge, not before. But nevertheless: this is what it´s all about. Why look at explanations? Why look at the past? Just change your mind about it! The picture is not the thing. So why be afraid of pictures? Why be afraid of something oneself or another is mocking up? Why be the slave of one´s own considerations? You, the static, should be able to change the thing you have constructed (your mind) to suit the job better. "There is beingness yet man thinks there is only becomingness". You remember this from the Factors? Not a far cry from "one´s all-pervading Buddha-nature is ever present". Auditing in a way compares to contemplating a Zen koan. The auditor (the "authoritative master") takes up an item the auditee (the "disciple") has originated previously. The auditee focuses his attention on it, makes it the most important thing in the world, builds up mind-bending tensions, associates blood-curdling thoughts and pictures with it, eventually realizes what he is doing there - and laughs about it. This is the static playing games with himself.

The good thing about eastern disciplines (and this is where scientologists have a lot to learn) is that a master guides a disciple. They don´t permit the blind to lead the blind. It´s not "the tech" that does it. It´s the wisdom of one´s guru. Creating Nothingness A further Zen-Buddhist feature in Hubbard´s work is his concern with the duality of somethingness and nothingness. In order to keep communication flowing, the auditor (or indeed anyone) must create nothingness (a vacuum) between himself and the other terminal. He does so by TR-2, acknowledgement. Acknowledgement leads to as-isness, no matter if the terminal is a thetanmind-body composite or consists of thetan plus mind only. (It´s telepathy in both cases anyway.) The thetan creates his viewpoint and stays centered. That´s TR-0. He extends a comm line. That´t TR-1. Along that comm line he receives an inflow. That´s a somethingness. He acknowledges (TR-2), and again there is nothingness. He is ready for the next load to come in. No overwhelm. Thetan and GE: A Loving Couple Let´s have a look at eastern practices with "ki" or "chi" as part of their name: they focus the practitioner´s attention on the area just below the navel (called "hara").By focussing on this point the thetan creates his space via the main command post of the GE. He works "through the navel", as it were. This means they make the thetan consider and include the GE in what he his doing. He acts "in step" with his GE. His power and that of the GE combine. That gives him a lot of power. Very wise indeed! In contrast, Hubbard takes his approach not through the navel but through the forehead (6th chakra), the major command post of the thetan. He goes "through the mind" (dia nous → dia-noetics → dianetics). This emphasis on the mind unfortunately made the whole subject of scientology very head-oriented. So much so that body and GE became ignored, if not despised. Very unwise indeed!

The thetan loves logic and KRC. He thinks in the linear mode, he thinks in terms of cause and effect. He likes to focus his attention to a narrow beam. The GE loves emotional warmth and ARC. It "thinks" in the lateral mode, in terms of broadly sweeping associations. It tends to spread its attention all around. Both are useful, depending on the situation. This has nothing to do with the left and the right half of the brain "doing" anything. As usual, the brain just reflects "theta electronics" in the form of mest electric discharges. Right or left brain predominance in certain people just shows who is the boss: thetan or GE. The closest Ron ever came to handling the GE directly, is the Touch Assist. The Touch Assist doesn´t work "through the mind" but through GE and body. To be more exact: it works through putting the thetan´s attention on two energy flow lines which run up each leg from the heel, pass the spine on both sides, continue up the back of the neck, circle the head like a crown and unite at the forehead. Anyone familiar with yoga or shiatsu knows these lines. By putting the thetan´s attention on them, knotted-up energy is released and made to flow again. Ignoring body and GE is nonsense, of course. Because it would mean ignoring what´s there. Next time you do TR-0, try do it through the navel, i.e. include the GE in the process. Notice the difference! The art of confronting is often misconstrued to mean taking things on "with your forehead" ("frons", Latin, means forehead). Perhaps this is the reason why scientologists, particularly on a group level, often act like bulls in a china shop when it comes to confronting their environment and the people in it, all in the stalwart effort "to make it go right". Whereas followers of eastern practices tend to be very mellow in their social interaction. Often to the point of getting nothing done! I´m sure we can learn from each other. West Meets East The innermost ruin of an auditee usually cannot be handled by lower level auditing alone. It takes the whole bridge to do so. And more than that, as we´ll see in a moment.

After removing his own charge, one would have to remove his entities first (on Solo 3 and Excalibur), then unburden the GE of its engrams (on the GERD), and eventually undo the auditee´s games postulate fabric (on the SEPP). Now that´s a long way to go. Yet one cannot always wait that long! The auditee - particularly if that innermost ruin was in restimulation for a long time - may be in need of urgent help! So what to do? Answer: proper nutrition, proper exercise, proper relaxation. For this I warmly recommend yoga, meditation, tai-chi, aikido. No better way to smoothe out and harmonize body, soul and spirit! Works only on a key-out basis, yes, gives great releases but no erasures, yes, doesn´t touch GPMs, yes but provides a platform successful auditing can stand on. "Squirrelling"? No. This is not mixing practices. This is using the right practice for the right job at the right moment. We have to take a holistic (wholesome) approach. Looking at one part we have to consider the whole. What do others have to offer that might help us to fix things? You have a tooth ache? See your dentist. Broken arm? Get it put in a plastercast. Overweight? Go on a diet. Stiff like a log? Take up yoga. Aura all spotty? See a tai-chi or aikido master. Bottom line: get the GE purring like a cat by ordinary means, then use auditing to handle the thetan. Instead of wasting loads of good auditing hours on the fruitless effort of running rudiments or engrams on a chainsmoking workoholic who never sleeps and eats properly.

Chapter Two: Getting Started

STEP ONE: THE INTERVIEW Now supposing you had a client and wanted to get him started, what would you do? Or rather: what would I do? (Because, remember, this book is about my way of working.) First thing I´d do is an interview. E-meter, cans, pre-session checklist, pen, worksheets. The whole sacred ritual. And a good long thorough interview it should be, until I understand what the person wants to get handled, until I know his timetrack with all periods when things went well for him and when they went off the rails. With all reads and TA-motions noted. May take an hour or two. Or three. It is centered around the following: what does the person want handled? How is he doing physically? Sexually? Does he have a goal in life? And lastly: his life with all its ups and downs. (For specific interview questions see LK2/p. 177.) And all along I speak to the auditee in plain language. I don´t use technical terms. I explain everything I do with reasons why. I make this whole thing look like born out of functional necessity, not dogma or ideology. I tell the auditee that his TA is high when it´s high, and what that means. Although he may be totally green I make him wear his hat as a solo-auditor from the first moment he holds the cans. How else is he going to become a reliable team partner in session, particularly when the going gets rough? We are doing what we are doing because there are practical reasons for it. This is what I´m getting across to the auditee. I gain his trust. He may not even know that I´m using Hubbard´s methods. As long as he doesn´t ask there is no need to tell him. No need to run an advertisement campaign for scientology. After all you wouldn´t expect a doctor or psychologist or architect or tax consultant to explain to you the complete key terminology of their trade including who they had studied with and what leading figurehead they favoured, before they start on the job. All you´d want as their client is to sit down, explain what you need, and see it getting done. It´s the same with auditing.

As a general rule, I challenge the auditee´s answers (whether in session or in an interview). I never invalidate what he says, I never evaluate it in terms of his case, but I do ask: how can this be? How does this fit in? Does it add up to what we know already or does it contradict it? What does this really mean? Make sure to get it from the auditee´s viewpoint, from the reality of his universe. Don´t go into social agreements with him when you only think you understand. You must fully understand. Don´t agree, don´t commiserate, but get to the bottom of it. "My wife has beaten me up!" he says. "What´s wrong with that?" you ask. "She might´ve killed me!" - "Ok - what´s wrong with that?" - "Well, I´d be dead!" - "And what´s wrong with that?" - "Well, look, I´d stop existing!!" Blowdown on the meter. Now you´ve got an item! Lockscan "times you thought you´d stop existing". It´s likely to take him down to a major whole track implant. A Rule Of Thumb Here is a rule of thumb for interviews as well as 2WCs: 1.

Find out what exactly the auditee is upset about, what exactly he wants to see changed. Get a real "itsa", i.e. BD on the meter and certainty in the auditee.

Find out what he did to resolve his difficulty and how come he failed. This will give you the "can´t do" consideration, the SerFac. And that´s your entry point into the case.

In brief: have you auditee define the situation (1) and trace the underlying GPM (2). That´s all. Easy as pie.

STEP TWO: THE PROGRAM Now that you have done the interview you study and analyse it and write a two- or three-page thesis on it, leading up to a sequence of steps regarding the handling of this case. In a word: you make a program. You consider the totality of the person in front of you (as reflected in the interview), you consider what his attention is on the most, and on the background of your conceptual understanding of the tech and the mechanism of the mind and work out a program. Normally you would put the biggest reading area on top of the list, because that´s where the auditee´s attention is fixated the most (LK2/p. 185). Now here is a major addition to or deviation from, this procedure: when the auditee mentions a postulate in the course of the interview, you take up that. With preference. Example: biggest area of charge is pets in general and cats in particular. Second in line a compulsion to clean things and keep them supertidy. Third: attics, cellars and other dark places ("fear of the dark"). Then, last item, an occasional asthmatic fit. And amidst all that the reading statement: "I´m so busy, I can hardly catch a breath!" "I can hardly catch a breath!" is a postulate. It´s a SerFac. It´s used by the auditee as a reason for his failures. And although it may not have had more than a sF (which is a lot less than the added-up reads of the other areas), this is what you pick up with preference. Postulates First! A postulate is a phrase referring to an intention to be, do or have, or avoid being, doing or having. It´s worded in present tense. ("This kills me!" - Not: "I´m afraid that this might kill me one day.") The best ones refer back to the person speaking (i.e. they contain the word "I" or "me"). Some postulates may look like mere descriptions of situations. "I can hardly catch a breath" would be an example of that. It´s the emotion and the read on the meter which tell the tale. Not all situational descriptions are postulates. "I sit on a chair" is not a postulate. Neither is "I´m overweight". So how does one tell? By looking at the

accompanying emotions and reads, as I said above. By looking at the type of statement it is: it could be a fairly neutral description, a general conclusion or a dramatic new comprehension ("itsa"). And lastly you can tell by looking at the auditee´s life. Because a true postulate will determine the run of the auditee´s life, and in his life it will show if what he said was a postulate. So a postulate you take up with preference. You invite the auditee to briefly talk about it (2WC). You ask him to give you some examples of how and when this sort of thing shows up in his life (repetitive recall). You get him to find the earliest time when this happened and have him come up to present time (lock scanning). And after this, you have him repeat that postulate (repeater technique). You´ll find that each incident that´s washed up by repeating the postulate has either to do with cats, a cleaning compulsion, fear of the dark, or asthmatic fits. The whole case may be hinged on that one postulate! Had you handled the various areas of attention by means of ruds, prepchecks or engram chains you might have gotten there eventually as well, but it would have taken longer. Working through the postulate is more elegant. The direct route to the core of the case. More exciting for the auditee, too. Keeps him in session like you wouldn´t believe. Plus you don´t need to explain to him the complexity of rudiments or other high tech approaches beforehand. The Positive Postulate We are used to looking at charged postulates as negative, because usually they come in form of second postulates (negative) which lead off the path defined by the first postulate (positive) or even stop an activity entirely. Yet occasionally the auditee mentions a positive first postulate, and more often than not it will be charged! How come? Because statements like "Alertness always pays!" or "There is nothing I couldn´t fix!" immediately bring to mind times when that person failed to be alert or failed to fix something! Such postulates are highly charged because they are connected with losses. They are often used as an "affirmation", a remedy for a half-recognised situation, and most likely will be a generalisation, and not worded precisely. So don´t ignore them just because they sound positive. As long as they aren´t pronounced with an F/N, there is something behind them (see LK2/ch. 4.4).

STEP THREE: POSTULATE AUDITING The procedure outlined above is described in LK2 as "Postulate Auditing". Why Postulate Auditing as the first and major part of the program? Well, you don´t have to start this way. You may start with TRs. If coached well, by an experienced auditor, TRs may be as intense an experience as an auditing session! A very important step indeed. You may as well start with CCHs or other objective processes. If done sensibly, with proper attention to gradients and by staying well in communication with the auditee, they work wonders. You may start with rudiments or the Grades. You may start with anything as long it is what the auditee in front of you needs. There is no other rule. Why then do I suggest Postulate Auditing as the first part of the program? For various reasons. First, because it satisfies the client´s wish for therapy. That´s what he came for, after all! He has undesirable AESPs and wants you to help him getting rid of them. That´s therapy, at least in the client´s understanding of the word. (Therapy, by the way, is taken from the Greek and means "service", in the sense of "something done by a servant".) Second, because it allows the auditee to explore his mind in depth. It sends him on a usually unprecedented mental adventure tour. After that he´ll understand that he´s in for much more than a mere psychic repair job. He´s in for exploring the terra incognita of his mind! When he has understood that, you have found a partner who it is fun to work with: someone with a purpose, with self-determinism and the intention to get to the other end of the tunnel. Third reason: now that you have turned the auditee into a partner, into someone who understands the route and accepts you as a guide, it will be a lot easier to explain to him that he should do some TRs or objective processing, that he should put order into his life (ethics program), that he should stop smoking and drinking, take a break off work, sleep, look after his nutrition, and so on. He will accept this as a necessary part of the way. He won´t feel that some weird ritual is enforced on him by the overpowering authority of a therapist or some expert in esoterics. He´ll see that what´s done is based on functional reasons, not dogma.

So after a dozen hours of Postulate Auditing I might branch off into a nutritional handling, suggest that the auditee put order in his life, or put him on TRs or Objectives. In my experience Postulate Auditing really is the simplest and yet most exciting tool for both auditor and auditee. This is because it combines the basic yet powerful techniques mentioned above: 2WC, repetitive recall, lock scanning, narrative, repeater technique. It traces and cracks GPMs with full control of the procedure and always on the right gradient. I´m using it more than anything else. At the time LK2 was written, Postulate Auditing had already been researched by me for a good three years. And now, four years later, I´m still in favour of it. Teaching the method to auditors made me realize that some points need further clarification. Which is why I´m going to go into this for a moment. "Item" Defined An item is more than what it says in LK2. It is more than an AESP (attitude, emotion, sensation, pain). It could also be a terminal (person, animal, plant, place, thing). It could be an activity ("my job"). Or it could be a state of being, doing or having. Lastly and most senior to all, it could be a postulate. A Gradient Approach Whatever item you choose to audit, have the auditee look at it on the gradient suggested above: 1.

2WC to find an item or to get the auditee warmed up to an item found earlier.

Then have him give you examples by repetitive recall procedure: "Recall a time when such and such happened to you". Answer. "Thank you. Recall another time when ... " Answer. "Thank you." And so on.

When the repetitive recall flattens off, or when the auditee starts wandering down the track all by himself, change over to lockscanning: "Earliest time that comes to mind just now, when this happened?" Answer. Acknowledgement. Then from there to PT. Then back to the beginning: "Earliest time that´s available now?" This takes the auditee down to a basic incident on a really smooth ride.

When the basic incident has been contacted: run it through repeatedly to erasure (narrative). Make sure you get the actual beginning. Keep asking: "Is there an earlier beginning to this incident?" Also get the games context. How on Earth could this have happened to him? How did he manage to get involved in that sort of situation? Sooner or later a games postulate (positive) or a counter-postulate (negative) is going to show up. Either is part of the GPM you are going for. You want a postulate, either as the decision to play a role in a game or as the decision to change that role. The latter is the lie he told himself (and keeps telling himself) to justify failing. Perhaps the basic incident found wasn´t the incident when this particular counter-postulate (or altering postulate) was made originally. The auditee might only have found an incident when that postulate keyed in. That´s a "relative basic"; it´s as much as the auditee can see at this time. He can´t look any deeper. That´s fine, don´t worry. The next gradient will get him there: repeater technique.

Use repeater technique. It will pull the auditee towards the absolute basic like an elevator going down with its cables cut. More than one incident will come up on the way to the absolute basic. Some will be his own, others those of others. The auditee will drop valences like a snake shedding old skin. Each incident is taken to F/N by narrative style auditing. Then once again repeater technique on the postulate. Next incident coming up. Narrative to erasure and F/N. Again: repeater technique on the postulate. Next incident. And so on, till the postulate itself F/Ns whilst the auditee repeats it.

That F/N means: a GPM postulate has been looked at with full awareness, has nothing left associated with it, and can now be put in proper perspective or be cancelled. That´s a major case change. The beauty of it: you get no stuck TAs like in running engram chains earlier similar, earlier similar, earlier similar. Because you are always dealing with one incident only. Keeps it simple. There is no need to take each of the various actions of this gradient approach to F/N separately, such as 2WC, repetitive recall, lockscanning. You do erase incidents to F/N, yes. And you take the item to F/N, certainly, the item the

auditee originated, the item that started this search for incidents - but there is no need to get a formal F/N on each of the methods involved! Narrative Style Explained Let´s look at the narrative style a little closer. How often do you have to go through an incident before it can be considered erased? Three times, five times, thirty times, fifty times. As long as new data come up or old data are being corrected, as long as the TA moves, you are in business. The auditee will move up the tonescale as he narrates the incident, he will go through the boredom band and dramatize boredom, but you don´t pay attention to that, you keep right at it and have him run the incident a few more times. It may F/N in between or at the end. Keep going. Until it´s erased and the postulate has popped up. How can one tell that it´s over? Easy. When he started out it took him five hours to confront the incident - with full dramatization of misemotions and physical sensations and somatics. Now, twelve hours later and after fifty times through the incident, he can go through it in two minutes and giggle about it. What a difference! How do you get him there? Here´s a trick: when the auditee gets bored telling you the incident, ask him to speak to you eye-to-eye, to tell you his incident straight into your face. "Tell me the whole thing again, but keep looking at me!" When his attention is still locked up inside the incident, his eyes will wander off and he´ll get drawn right to the points that need looking at further. This breaks the old beginning-to-end tedium. And it adds a sportive note to the session: "Well, try again. Perhaps this time you´ll manage to get through the incident without any distraction." When he is through eventually, you´ll know it. And so will he. How To Turn On A Picture Now supposing the auditee contacts something awful and unspeakable deep down the track and hasn´t a clue of what it might be, with the TA rising menacingly - how does one get him to run it? Four steps will take him there: 1.

Have him describe anything he sees or feels. No censoring of pornographic details, no screening off "unimportances". Any sensation or somatic should be taken into account. When the somatic strip gets

going, the auditee will get answers via body and GE long before he has any pictures. Just take the viewpoint that anything he sees or feels from the moment he first contacts the incident, is part of the dramatization of this incident. Follow that trail! That´s what you have a meter for. 2.

Have him get oriented inside the incident. Does the scene take place indoors or outdoors? Day or night? Summer or winter? How many people there? Where is the camera posted? From what angle is the film taken? Who is the camera? Is it the auditee from the viewpoint of his eyes? From an exterior viewpoint with him seeing his own body? Is it filmed from the viewpoint of another?

Now that you found out about time, place, circumstances and the identity of the observer of the incident, you´ll find the picture starts moving. What seemed a still picture turns into a movie. Now the sequence of events starts showing up all by itself.

Have the auditee run the incident from wherever he began, to the end. Then only have him find the beginning. And through to the end. And then: earlier beginning? And run it through to the end. And so on. Easy as pie at this stage.

Now what about the postulate? In many cases it will be voiced as unexpectedly as a fish jumping out of water. Often the auditee will have voiced it without knowing he did. This is where the auditor has to be extremely alert and quick with his pen! So that he may indicate the postulate to the auditee after the F/N has occurred (if needed) and verify its correctness with him. This is crucial for the rest of the procedure which after all depends on repeating the postulate. How To Get The Postulate F/Ning A typical situation: no further incidents are being washed up whilst you are using repeater technique on the postulate, and the auditee starts wondering why he should repeat the postulate any further. But no F/N in sight yet. What to do? In order to get the postulate F/Ning you may apply the same trick as on narrative procedure: ask the auditee to give you the postulate repeatedly with good TR-1 and to keep eye contact with you all the while. Supposing the postulate was "It´s useless!", you get the auditee to make that statement straight into your face with full conviction! He has to say it as if he

believed it! That´s very important. That´s vital. Only this way will he as-is it in the sense of fully ending cycle on it. He as-ised it when he made it originally, at the beginning of the cycle (creation). Now to end the cycle he has to as-is it again (un-creation). Asking the auditee to keep eye contact with you will produce three effects in sequence. First effect: the auditee will find some further incidents, usually minor ones, and blow them by mere inspection. Second: he will start giggling and line charging. Third: he will say cheerfully, with mock conviction and a grin on his face: "It´s useless!", and he will be F/Ning. He will be saying it with a sense of present-time identity and disconnected from his past. He will be saying it as himself, in his own valence, which makes it obvious how he permitted himself to shift into a different valence at the time. No further resistance. Not further associations. No karma. F/N. To start with, when the auditee discovered this postulate, he considered it enigmatic or sinister and ruinous. He took it seriously. At the end he knows it´s just something he created, and he can laugh about it. It´s like saying to a child: "I´m Santa Claus". Although you know that you aren´t, you still say it with full conviction in order to be impressive. In a way it´s like the famous process "Tell me a lie!" Once you see the joke of it you get an F/N. Likewise, in repeating a postulate there is a point when the auditee knows that this second postulate is an untruth. (Whereas the first postulate is the truth. At least his own.) So he knows he´s telling a lie. And since he knows that, he can fully feel in harmony with it, whatever he might say. And that´s expressed as an F/N. GPMs are the static play-acting with himself. In order to have a game, he mocks himself up as a thetan and has himself experience traps, losses, and misemotions. He makes counter-postulates and identifies with them with full conviction in order to be impressive, if only to himself. When he comes to realize this in session or otherwise, he can´t but laugh. Because he has contacted himself again: himself as source, not as that little play-thing down there.

Original And Derived Postulates Repeating postulates lead to incidents, as we saw. Yet those incidents may yet again contain postulates! They may be re-phrasings of the original postulate. Or they may be new and different postulates in their own right. And they may have even bigger reads than the original postulate you are using as the auditing item! What to do? Easy: put them on a postulate list for later use. Work with them (starting with the biggest reading one) as soon as your original postulate has F/Ned. Not before! Because that´s your major cycle of action, that´s what you want to complete before you do anything else. So here´s the rule: First the original postulate to F/N. Then the derived ones, in sequence of read size, each one to its own F/N. You must of course ensure that the auditee is interested. This usually shows as soon as he has repeated that particular postulate a few times. It will either bite or F/N on"no interest". TA Trouble Usually each incident washed up by repeating the postulate, will F/N. You should work towards that EP by all means. However, occasionally a second incident (B) will slide in as soon as you have reduced the first incident (A) sufficiently. Once A has lost power the door is open for B, although A isn´t properly erased yet. Consider that they are "all around" the auditee, waiting to slip into the next slot that opens and enter the auditee´s awareness. Incident A was reduced, B has slipped in and taken A´s place. So you go off A and handle B. No matter if it´s the auditee´s own incident, that of an entity, a valence or the GE: you handle what the auditee´s attention is on. (Applies just the same for solo, of course.) The consideration of "them hanging about the auditee waiting to catch his attention" describes the actual relationship between thetan and case a lot more aptly than the time track model which makes it look as if the auditee had to "go down the track", or as if incidents were "lined up along a track". This is alright as a metaphor but strictly speaking it isn´t true. Case exists to the extent that it is mocked up. And it isn´t mocked up down the track somewhere, but right in present time and in the vicinity of the auditee´s body. For which reason he looks grey and massy and has a high TA. The auditee, as a thetan, doesn´t move. He just watches his mental screen and its many programs, each showing a time track of its own. He may zap from

one channel to the next and back, sure, but it´s still happening on the screen. He himself doesn´t move. So when B shows up and A dives off, you handle B. And then C may show up, submerging B! Fine. Handle C to F/N. And then go back to B, taking it to F/N, and then to A, taking it also to F/N. Just finish cycles of action. It starts with a read, it ends with an F/N. What happens in between may be very straightforward or very longwinded, but never mind. As long as you don´t lose track of what you are doing, it will all come out well. Conflicting postulates create masses. They work like a magnet pulling the auditee´s attention units towards them. All you have to do is follow the auditee´s interest and all will be well. So always audit with the bank, never against it. Just make sure you complete cycles of action.

Two Levels Of EP An auditing EP must be in accordance with both aspects of Axiom 38. The auditor must get the exact time, place, form and event as well as the exact consideration (the postulate). An erasure of charge from a situation of the past (a "blown picture" as the jargon has it) accompanied with full recall of that situation and an F/N on the meter is a 7th dynamic EP. It means mental mest has been as-ised. A postulate found and rendered unworkable by stripping all associated pictures and energies from it (by means of repeater technique), is an EP on the 8th dynamic. Here a thought, a concept, a consideration has been as-ised.

Chapter Three: Moving Upwards

RUDS, GRADES, REPAIR LISTS, RUNDOWNS, ETC. Now what about all the other tools of the auditor? What about Ruds, Prepchecks, L&N, D/L, Rehab? What about the hallowed Grades? What about the "standard" set of rundowns considered indispensable by some, like the PTS RD, Drug RD and Int RD, not to mention "standard" case assessment lists such as C/S 53 and Green Form? What about all of those? One doesn´t need most of them. Mind you, Ron didn´t devise them for the auditee but for auditors in training. So once one can audit expertly one can do without those crutches. This is what he says: "Well, you know the fundamentals ... If you were capable of applying the axioms of scientology immediately to the problem of another fellow human being, you theoretically could dream up enough processes to satisfy adequately every single condition which you would meet. But it has been found by experience that auditors do not do this. So we have codified processes." (From "The Fundamentals of Auditing", a tape of January 11, 1955.) So let´s keep it simple. All auditing tools fall into two distictly different categories: number one is "basic tools", number two is "combinations of tools" or "packaged tools". Basic tools are those that can´t be reduced to anything simpler. They are: 2WC, repetitive recall, recall by chain, narrative style, repeater technique, and "single item techniques" (such as assessment, L&N, D/L) in combination with "indication of a correct item", i.e. strong TR-2 (LK2/ch. 4). Packaged tools: All rundowns consist of combinations of basic tools, put together for certain purposes. Ron Hubbard did that. Senior auditors in the Church of Scientology (such as David Mayo) did that. Postulate Auditing is such a package. I did that. Every auditor has the right to put together a rundown from basic tools for a certain purpose. Nothing wrong with being creative. "For God´s sake, get busy and build a better bridge!" - remember that line? It´s the last one in the book "Dianetics". Rudiments are packages as well. Look at the complexity of an ARCX handling, for example! It contains assessment, 2WC, recall by chain, even narrative (when a large secondary is contacted).

Each rudiment is a specific mixture of basic tools and has to be run accordingly. (There lies the art of running ruds.) So what tools should one use, and when? As this book is about how I work, I´m going to give a personal answer to the question: basic tools I use fully and extensively. It would be impossible to audit without them. In terms of techniques, they are the very stuff auditing consists of. Use good TRs and those basic tools, and you can audit anything. Packaged tools I use sparingly only. Rudiments and prepchecks, yes. Grades, no. No "standard" rundowns, either. Repair lists, never. (And why should one, anyway? Just ask the auditee! He knows what´s wrong. Good 2WC replaces repair lists anytime.) So what do I do? I ask the auditee what he wants handled, and that I handle. Pretty much by means of basic tools only. When several areas of attention need handling, I put them in a sequence and handle them one by one. Biggest reading one first. And it´s basic tools all the way. As most of these basic tools are combined in Postulate Auditing, I use Postulate Auditing nearly all the time. Handles anything: drugs, PTSness, outInt, high TA. It´s always the same routine: 2WC, get a reading item, repetitive recall, lockscan to a basic, narrative on the basic, erasure with postulate off, repeater technique on the postulate. Life-changing cognitions ensue. At certain times Postulate Auditing is not useful. This is when the auditee gives you no AESP as an item, but a terminal or activity he feels unhappy with. Father, mother, the taxman, cats, dogs, cars, buildings, countries are terminals. Going to work, swimming, doing the laundry are activities. Usually an AESP is mentioned in context with the terminal or activity, if only as general an attitude as "I don´t like him". In which case you could go right into the Postulate Auditing sequence. However, occasionally an auditee will mention a reading terminal and complain about him, yet his complaints may not read. So although he voices AESPs in connection with that terminal, they don´t read. Situation: no reading AESP but a reading terminal.

This is the moment when one should use rudiments or the prepcheck. Rudiments Are Real Auditing! Rudiments are a very direct action, like pointing at something with your finger. The prepcheck, by contrast, has a more sweeping quality. Rudiments require good conceptual understanding from both auditee and auditor, as well they require excellent session control from the auditor. The prepcheck is much easier on both of them. Use what you or the auditee feel most comfortable with. Both serve to poke about in an area and find useful items, in particular postulates. With experienced auditees I don´t go through the ruds one by one but assess them. Supposing the item was "school teachers" it would go like this: "Regarding school teachers, do you have an ARCX - a problem - a mw/h - an overt - feel invalidated - evaluated?" Note all reads. Take the biggest one up first, audit that rud to F/N. And then re-assess! Don´t go back to the reads from the first assessment but re-assess. By removing one lump of charge from that area you have destabilized it. It will re-assemble differently from before. Therefore: a new assessment each time, till all ruds F/N. Each rudiment is handled by the gradient approach pointed out earlier: 2WC, repetitive recall, lock scan, narrative (till the postulate pops up). However, they aren´t all audited the same way. There are distinct differences. (See as well LK2/ch. 4.3.) ARCXs are 2WC´ed until one has understood what happened, only then are they assessed. With any good luck they key out on the correct indication of the charge and F/N. When they don´t you´d normally go earlier similar - and risk running down an endless chain! Because what part of the earlier ARCX is being compared to the ARCX at hand? It could be anything! It´s much better to get the postulate in the ARCX with a brief 2WC after correctly indicating the charge. "At the moment your affinity was refused, what did you feel like then?" - "Well ... I felt like a lonesome child, really." Blowdown on the meter. That´s the valence he is in! "A lonesome child"! Now you´ve found an item you can safely and successfully work with. First repetitive recall, then some lock scanning down to the basic, narrative on the basic, postulate, F/N, repeater tech on the postulate.

Problems: Usually the auditee will give you a surface difficulty as the first answer. You have to find the postulate / counter-postulate structure behind it. That´s the 2WC part. This may take quite some time, mind you! And it´s well worth investing some time here, because without an item you can´t do any sensible auditing. Example: "I hate my job", says the auditee. Sounds like the answer to an ARCX but it read as a problem. (This is presupposing that the auditee knows what you are talking about when you say "problem".) So you 2WC this. He thinks people make life difficult for him at work. More 2WC. He wants to leave but can´t leave. Fear of unemployment. We are getting closer! More 2WC. Finally: "Well, without work I´d be as good as dead!" BD on the meter. That´s the attitude that ties him down and makes it impossible for him to choose freely! Now that you´ve got an item you can do your gradient approach of repetitive recall ("Just give me some examples of when you felt as good as dead!"), lock scanning to basic, narrative of the basic to postulate and F/N, repeater tech on the postulate. Overts and missed withholds: They are run the same way. (You can´t talk about one without mentioning the other.) So let´s say mw/h read. The charge is on someone having missed the withold, thereby restimulating it; the actual handling is different, though: first you handle the w/h (which usually takes you down to the overt behind it), then you handle when it was missed, i.e. you discharge all the encounters when people acted in a strange way towards the person and he felt found out. Again you start out with 2WC to get into the first part. This brings to light what wasn´t said and what the actual overt behind it is. There is no system. Just explore each read to get the full picture. Find time, place, circumstances, sequence of event, who was there, etc., etc. Says the auditor: "Now that we know everything about your sexually molesting your teenage daughter, let me refer back to the auditing question and ask you: where in all that is the actual missed withhold?" You see, the charge the auditee got off so far was on the moral side of things. It was on him knowing that what he did was forbidden. Yet he was brave and managed to tell you. Lots of reads and TAA. He went through the incident three or four times to get all details. But where is the missed withhold? That´s what read, after all, and he hasn´t answered up to it yet.

So you ask him: "We know now what you did. But what is it you withheld?" If he felt alright about it there wouldn´t be any charge. So there must be something beyond the circumstantial and moralistic stuff that bothers him, a transgression against his own code of honor, a rock bottom Ser Fac, and it must have the form of a w/h. Because that´s what read. His answer: "I didn´t know how to love her!" He breaks down on this, sobs, tears. Now we know what it´s all about! We have discovered the rightness beneath all that wrongness. He loved his daughter, couldn´t express his love, felt rejected. It´s a withhold of love. He wanted to give love and withheld it. Until the tension erupted and was dramatized as sexual molestation. He managed to bury the charge for thirty years (that´s the withhold), now it was restimulated for some reason or other (that´s how it was missed). How it was missed and who missed it isn´t really important. That´s just a chain of ARCxs on the basis of his fear of having been found out. To change that person´s attitude it is much more important to detect the real reason for his misbehaviour: the postulate. This is easy, because now that you have found a decent item you are once again on the main line of your gradient approach: repetitive recall on "not knowing how to love her" (whosoever "her" may be), lock scan, basic, narrative, postulate, repeater tech. And then, if still needed, you can have the auditee look at who missed that withhold. Evaluation, invalidation: They are not a hard job. Usually the postulate falls into your lap. 2WC who or what invalidated him or made him feel evaluated for, and get what he felt like just then. And there is your item. (Similar to the ARCX handling above, yet with no assessment.)

THE AUDITOR´S THREE-DRAWER TOOLBOX So far, we have spoken of the auditor as someone who restricts himself to giving a session. There is a lot more for him to do, though! Because in order to free a person spiritually, it doesn´t suffice to have the auditee look down his time track and recognize the reasons for his bad habits. If you did only that, your auditee would be left in a state of no havingness, of disorientation. To get a complete job done, one must as well build up new habits. For this reason the auditor has to be as well a coach and a supervisor. He must coach his client on TRs, on Objectives, and on the theory and practice of auditing (should the auditee want to become a solo auditor). As well he must teach his client the admin scale, the org board, and the principles and conditions of ethics. And not only must he teach that, but demand results: he must ask his client for a demonstration of competence. He must look for visible life improvements: does his client have a stable 2D, a good income, is his mest is in good shape, does he know and work along his purpose line, etc.? It may take years to get there. Years. Years of care, of interest, of intention. Nothing to do with auditing only. It´s building a new attitude towards life. Taking down the old one, building a new one. It takes some work to do that, for client as well as coach. Doesn´t happen automatically. And auditing is only a small part of it. Certainly, a few hours of auditing or training will give a person a big win. But a big win is just that. It doesn´t mean much in terms of life changes. Same goes for a big cognition. What follows from it? One has to make it real in life, that´s the trick! So it takes auditing, training and ethics to take a person from where he stands to the fulfillment of his dreams. Did I say "fulfillment of his dreams"? I did indeed. It may take a whole lifetime. Or several. What does auditing do? It rehabilitates beingness: the willingness to be, to fill one´s chosen role. It´s the state of mind permitting one to recognize one´s hat. From that follows doingness: the willingness to do. "Doingness" doesn´t mean "doing something". It means: "a state of mind permitting action".

It is at this point (not earlier) that training becomes possible. Because the chief prerequisite for training is doingness: the willingness to confront the actions ensuing from the hat one has chosen to wear (beingness). Training teaches one to wear that hat. Training without a willingness to wear that hat, is pointless. Now that one has recognized one´s beingness (the many hats that add up to one´s beingness), now that one is willing to confront the pertinent activities and is trained to do so, an even higher willingness comes into play: havingness. Havingness in principle means: able to confront something or nothing with serenity (LK2/p. 123). In our particular context here the emphasis is on "confronting something". Therefore the definition of havingness is: "a state of mind permitting the production of actual products". Doing a lot and keeping oneself busy, doesn´t necessarily lead to results! It takes an even higher confront ability than mere beingness or doingness to get good products in acceptable quantity that are appreciated by others and exchanged with them for support, money or goodwill. It takes havingness. Havingness is the hardest one to confront. Because the quality of a product is always painfully obvious. Doingness is easier, it leaves ample space to pretend or find excuses. Beingness again is totally non-comittal. You think you are the saviour of the universe? No problem, that´s fine. The proof of the pudding lies in the answers to three questions: Is he actually behaving like that? Is he acting in the context proper to a saviour of the universe? Is he having the sort of products one would expect from a saviour of the universe? Once you are down to observing products, judgement becomes possible. Because a product is always compared with the ideal scene pertaining to it. And all of a sudden ethics conditions apply, since ethics conditions measure the gap between an existing and an ideal scene. They are hard to confront - but great for growth. Auditing is a karma catalyst. It speeds up working off one´s old debts but it doesn´t replace the living of life. To conclude, the auditor has three drawers in his toolbox: one, auditing for the rehabilitation of his client´s beingness; two, training to build up his client´s

ability on the basis of his doingness; three, ethics and admin coaching to have his client produce within the limits of his havingness.

THREE TYPES OF BRIDGES Theoretically, as being, doing and having are inseparably interwoven, three ways of spiritual evolvement (three "bridges") could be thought of, all leading to the same end point. One of them would work through rehabilitation of beingness, the other through rehabilitation of doingness, the third through rehabilitation of havingness. The auditing bridge suggested by Ron Hubbard works on the principle of rehabilitating beingness. The bridge suggested by me, in this book, works on the same principle. In this approach, doingness and havingness are expected to increase pretty much by themselves, once results on the beingness front have been obtained. In contrast, what would a bridge based on the principle of doingness look like? It would demand that a person be able to confront action without asking what sense it makes. Objective processes like Opening Procedure By Duplication work on the basis of this principle. But to actually transfer this microsituation into the macrosituation of life, it would take a bigger process than OPBD: a more lifeconsuming process as it were. What one could do for example, is set oneself the task of getting up every morning at 5 a.m. and take a 20-minute walk. Yet as this could be excused as a health exercise we´d really need something more senseless to make it juicier, like the task of getting up at 4:30 a.m., go outside equipped with a shovel, dig a hole somewhere and then fill it up again, and unfailingly do that each and every morning for exactly 423 days, no more, no less. Undoubtedly this would get one´s whole case rebelling, fully orchestrated with emotions, sensations and somatics. If one broke through that, one would end up a very wise man. A bridge based on the principle of havingness could be worked out in two different ways. One would be by exposing oneself to all sorts of pleasant or ugly sense perceptions whilst keeping one´s serenity. It´s taking TR-0 bullbaited to its extremes. In tantra meditation this is actually done. A serious tantra yogi wouldn´t think twice about sitting for a full night inside the decaying corpse of a long-dead cow and meditate serenely. (Sex is only a side line in tantra meditation, although in the west it´s made out to be the main thing.)

The other way of building a havingness bridge would be by demanding that one produce something valuable every day, unfailingly every day, something that´s needed, wanted and exchanged for by someone. And the higher one could reach on the dynamics, the better one would be getting at it. Without doubt such exercises, too, would get one´s case rebelling and, should one survive it, leave one a very wise man. However, as I grew up in the traditions of Ron´s beingness bridge, I won´t ask you to spend your nights inside decaying cows. Luckily this beingness bridge somewhat incorporates the other two. It demands that one confront the often absurd and questionable incidents one comes across in auditing (doingness), and it demands that one devotes the greater part of one´s life to creating the spare time and money to pursue this path at all (havingness). In this way one´s doingness and havingness are quite thoroughly tested. Perhaps not sufficiently so as to satisfy a tantra monk but good enough for us softies of the western world. What´s a bridge good for? Ultimately, to be able "to change one´s mind about it". To get out of the ruts one postulated for oneself in the distant past and consciously create oneself each day afresh.

METER READS AND TRUTH Auditing serves to turn vague intuitive inklings into known certainty. It serves to help the auditee get oriented in his own universe. It serves to find one´s personal truth. The meter is built to react on intuitive inklings. The auditee has a vague notion: and the meter shows a read. Did the auditee find a truth just then? To a degree he did. At least he approached some truth. A read means: charge goes off. Charge means: something was never seen the way it is. So a read doesn´t stand for a truth found, it merely means that the auditee is approaching some truth. Something has become available for further inspection. Only the F/N indicates truth. An F/N stands for inner harmony. No contradiction, no friction, no charge. Harmony. F/N. Example: the auditee says: "As I came down here from Arcturus I was waylaid by a black spaceship and implanted." No read. Therefore untrue? No! Simply not available for inspection. May be true, may be not. And if it read? Is it then true? No! Simply available for inspection. The auditor´s computation right then: "Did it really happen to him? Did it happen to another, and "I" is a valence talking? Or did it happen to him but due to non-confront he has turned F-1 and F-2 around and thinks he has suffered the motivator whereas in fact he committed the overt? Let´s inspect this further." Inspection is done by 2WC and narrative style auditing. Lots of TAA, in the end the incident is discharged. Final statement: "I came down here from Arcturus at the beginning of my last life. In the between-lives area before this present lifetime I hit the Screen in the attempt to leave the planet. That´s when I connected up with an entity made by another person who was waylaid by a black spaceship 2 million years ago and implanted." F/N. True? Yes! In order to take his auditee there, the auditor must never ask any leading questions. He must not formulate questions which imply the sort of answer the auditor would like to hear in order to prove his think about the case or his current model of life, the universe and everything. He must ask open, nonevaluative questions. He must be curious (3.5 on the tone scale) and be prepared for the unexpected.

Yet at the same time he is expected to direct the auditee´s attention. Quite a tight spot to be in! Because you can´t do the one without also doing the other. Any question an auditor asks is bound to direct the auditee´s attention and is therefore (by definition) evaluative. This is a bit of a tightrope walk, and I suppose that´s where the difference lies between auditing as an art and auditing as a mechanical ritual. To end this section in perhaps a sobering fashion, the following ought to be added: madmen will F/N within their own games framework, although this may have nothing to do with the real world. (Their world seems somewhat parallel to the real world.) All in all I have interviewed three people who by psychiatric definition would fall in the category of paranoid schizophrenics. Each of them had lovely F/Ns within their self-constructed parallel universes. Each was of the opinion that he didn´t need any auditing as he was perfectly sane (which I politely acknowledged). True? Yes. At least in the way they see it. Which goes for any sort of auditee, after all.

SESSION CONTROL All session difficulties can be traced to ARC difficulties. All ARC difficulties can be traced to out-TRs. Therefore all session difficulties can be traced to difficulties with TRs 0-4. Or TR 9 (positive leadership)! Tight needle, dirty needle, no TAA, high TA? TRs are out. TRs don´t work in the absence of ARC. ARC means understanding, lovingness, granting beingness. The more the better: universal understanding, universal love, universal granting of beingness. Making the auditee in his chair or that entity out in space purr like a cat, that´s TRs. The auditor creates the session. He creates the flavour of the session by his TRs. How clear is a Clear? He is as clear as his auditor challenged him. Auditing could be likened to TR-0 bullbaited. How good is a student´s TR-0? As good as his coach challenged him. It´s the coach´s (and auditor´s) TR-1 and TR-3 that makes the difference. "Charge is removed from the case only by the comm cycle pc to auditor", says Ron in HCOB 13 April 1964. Auditing is not "easy", even though it is often made to look that way. In its essence it is the naked, unadorned encounter between two thetans, one needing help and the other providing it. This takes trust and skill, understanding and competence, in a word, the supreme combination of ARC and KRC. The auditor "listens and computes", as the definition of his activity has it, and indeed he does just that. Nothing else. Any attempt to audit "with the tech" instead of keeping a straight line from person to person, is condemned to fail or at least stay superficial. Don´t hide behind the tech so as to keep yourself from confronting the uniqueness of the auditee you are facing. Only when the auditor has fully understood all his theory principles conceptually, has made them his own without having to think about them, has excellent TRs and - to top it - is able to actually create the session from one moment to the next, will he have the sort of vitality needed to match his auditee's vitally felt desire to change. Only then will the auditee be "in session".

And that goes for any tool the auditor happens to pull out of one of his three drawers, be it the auditing drawer, the training drawer or the ethics drawer. It takes ARC and KRC, it takes compassion and competence, and it takes conceptually understanding the underlying principles to get the auditee through. The same applies to solo. A solo course is a complete auditor´s course, not just some cheap replica of it "for the public". I can assure you: there is no lonelier thetan in the whole universe than the auditor who is in session and gets stuck because he doesn´t know his tech.

KRC-AUDITING A person wanting auditing sits in a muddle of counter-postulates. It is the job of the auditor to help the auditee undo this self-created disorder so that he may eventually find his way back to his original, positive games postulates. Many scientologists inside and outside the Church look at upward progress in terms of ARC. Is the person becoming "nicer"? That´s what they want to see happen. But that´s only half the story. Because an auditee shouldn´t move up on the emotional side only (tone scale, ARC) but as well on the scale of ethics conditions (KRC). From his abyss of confusion he will eventually make it to the summit, to knowing certainty, to the recognition of his own game. He will recognize that his actions have consequences (out of treason), he won´t be an enemy to himself any more, will have no doubts about his destination, will have made up for the errors of his past (liability). He´ll be all set to start afresh (non-existence). A person who knows what he wants and is determined to get it, isn´t always comfortable to have around. Therefore, judging a person´s progress by his increase of ARC only may be the wrong yardstick. Anyone out to win his game will create enemies. So the higher he gets on the KRC-scale the more he is likely to be called a "suppressive person" by those whose toes he trod on. He wasn´t "nice" enough for their taste. Yet ARC and KRC go hand in hand. A high-toned person may permit himself to become quite heavy-handed when the success of his game depends on it. The higher-toned, the heavier. More horsepower. The wise man combines compassion and competence - that´s the meaning of the scientology symbol (two triangles). The Auditor - A Data Evaluator How does the auditor get the auditee to the point of knowing his game and play it with a winning attitude? Obvious answer: by handling the losing attitude. By detecting and cancelling all counter-postulates. Yes. But how is this done?

Certainly not by rote processes. Not by playing the patient listener. It´s done by being a detective! The auditor has to compute. He gathers and evaluates data on two points. One: what´s this thetan doing here on Earth? What did he come for? Two: what keeps him from knowing and successfully doing it? In true fact, the auditor is a data evaluator. He goes for the Real Why: the postulate. The auditor has to be curious. He must have a built-in bullshit-detector, a sense for data contradiction. By looking at the plausibility of the auditee´s data within the context at hand, he must tactfully challenge the auditee´s data and statements (without breaking the auditor´s code!). Can it have been the way the auditee says it? Could it possibly have been otherwise? How did he get into this mess in the first place? What considerations did he have? What games context was this happening in? First the motivator: what trap did he get into? Then the prior overt: how was he responsible for it? This is the auditor´s attitude to the auditee: "Given that you are an allknowing, all-responsible and all-controlling being - how did you manage to end up in the mess you are in?" KRC all the way. Other practices are strong on the affinity side. "Good vibes" and all that. Scientology is strong on the reality side: "No messing about, mister, what´s the Real Why?" That sort of approach. That´s why scientology appears "unloving". The auditor must get data from his auditee. Loads of data. That´s his first job. They may not always fit in logically with each other. They may not make sense. Contradictions show up. Wrong sequence. Unlikely time factors. Some statements may not read. Some may have a rising TA, others a dirty needle. And so on. Something very fishy going on! These are outpoints. Outpoints are deviations from the ideal scene of plausible, correctly fitting data. The auditor must be on top of this ever-increasing mass of data he gets from his auditee and evaluate them against each other and the ideal scene of full plausibility. He must be able to smell outpoints. That´s his second job.

Yet he must also detect pluspoints: well-reading statements, clean needle, TA moving up and coming down again, well-related, plausible data - these are pluspoints, because they mean that the auditee is getting someplace. The first job: get data. The second job: evaluate them. Yet despite all of this data evaluation going on the auditor would never put the auditee´s goodwill and trustworthiness in question! Because when their mutual trust goes, the session goes. The auditor doesn´t mistrust the auditee as a person. But he mistrusts the auditee´s data when there is a good reason for it. Quite an important difference! The Auditee Has No Case In Session The auditor works with the auditee. They are a team. And funnily enough, the auditor shouldn´t permit his auditee to have a case in session. At least I don´t. I´m expecting my auditees not to "go banky" in session. I´m expecting them to do their work properly, i.e. do their bit in the auditing communication cycle, and I´m expecting them to dramatize (would be terrible if they suppressed it), but I´m at the same time expecting them to keep the job going despite all dramatizations. I´m addressing a thetan, not a bank. I´m not auditing his bank, I´m auditing him. I´m listening to him and I´m trying to make sense out of what I hear ("computing"). Example: auditee sits writhing on his chair, foam frothing forth from mouth, nose and ears, and I would ask him: "Hey, that´s interesting, isn´t it? Now let´s see - what sense does this peculiar phenomenon make in context with the problem we are trying to solve? How does it answer up to the auditing question we are working on?" Let him dramatize, that´s fine. The auditee must be allowed to dramatize, he must allow himself to dramatize, because dramatizing opens the inflow valve from the bank. Suppressed emotions, sensations and somatics blowing through the pipes. Great! Yet at the same time I would expect the auditee to stay outside the dramatization and be able to look at it. Speaking very philosophically, when you address your auditee on his highest level of cause you are in a zone of no case. When you consider him the source of his own case and actually approach him that way, you are in a zone above that of by-passed charge. It´s the

interaction between two games players, or rather two games makers (auditor and auditee), agreeing on a common game (that of auditing). If the auditor only for a moment were to take the auditee´s case seriously and commiserate, the session would break down. Certainly, on a social level the auditor appears to take a case seriously. But speaking to the auditee from source to source, addressing him as a static on a level above and beyond the predicaments the auditee created for himself, speaking to him on that level then, the auditor can´t take his auditee´s case seriously. Neither can the auditee, on that level, take his own case seriously. Commiserating with the auditee is a grave invalidation of the auditee´s static quality. On the 8th dynamic you get pure postulated knowingness. On the 7th dynamic you get mental energy phenomena ("pictures"). On the 6th dynamic you get a meter needle, a pendulum or a dowser´s rod reacting to the phenomena on the 7th dynamic. Likewise, on the 5th dynamic you get your body reacting to 7th dynamic phenomena. The reaction on the 5th and 6th dynamic confirm that something is going on on the 7th dynamic. And that again confirms that on the 8th there must be a postulate. The postulate triggers what goes on below. A postulate one can only know, not see or feel. It´s pure knowingness. The phenomena below that level one needs to remind oneself that one knows. This is how the thetan fools himself. He might as well know right away! But as he pretends that he can´t, he needs auditing. This describes the game that goes on in a session. Given that the auditor can play his role of an unswaying truth-seeker, of a merciless detective and data-evaluator with compassion and competence, his auditee will eventually come to understand the background of his unwanted performances in life and break through to new, desirable performances. He will have had very exciting and rewarding sessions. And the auditor will as well! And what´s the point? Why should one put order into one´s mind? So that one may put order into the world, of course!

Chapter Four: Going Solo

HOW CLEAR IS A CLEAR? A Clear, says Ron, is someone who has realized that it´s him who keeps the bank mocked up, that it´s him who keeps his aberrations in place. Yet "having a Clear cog" is one thing, acting like a Clear quite another. What´s the proof of the pudding? That he can unmock mental mest by actual demonstration. For example by auditing solo with an E-meter. Clear is not a state. It´s an ability. You have to do something to go Clear and you have to do something to stay Clear. A person who cannot knowingly and willingly control his own bank, his entities, his telepathic interactions with others and his GE by means of an Emeter, at least in a rudimentary fashion, isn´t a Clear yet. Clear is a matter of competence, not status. The meter is an auxiliary device only. The more one can keep oneself clean without a meter, the more of a Clear one is. That´s the cream on the cake. It´s an ability that grows with practice. It takes about 40 to 70 hours to get there, the way I work it. Around that time, delegating the session responsibility to the auditee becomes both possible and advisable. 40 to 70 hours, that´s only counting Postulate Auditing. It´s not counting hours spent on TRs and Objectives. If you added another 30 to 50 hours for TRs and Objectives you´d arrive at something like 70 to 120 hours total. So, to give an average, after about 90 hours of auditing and coaching the auditee might be expected to start working solo. The longest time I actually audited a person (including TRs and Objectives) was 250 hours. She had psychotic fits, unfounded fears, compulsions, repressions, depressions, irregular heart beat, weakness, nausea, was addicted to pharmaceutical drugs, couldn´t leave the house to go to work - the lot. This was my heaviest case. There were other ones, less heavyer than that. There were light ones. And there were what Ron aptly calls "Cadillac pc´s". The real test for the auditor - and for the workability of Ron´s tech - are the heavy cases populating the waiting rooms of psychologists and psychiatrists. Yet they only rarely appear in the auditing room. Why? Various reasons. One is that treating them was (and still is) heavily discouraged by the Church of Scientology. So it has become a "tradition" not to deal with such cases. Which

means that most auditors wouldn´t know what to do with them except call them "PTS Type III" and send them home. One other reason is that people in that condition can only rarely afford auditing. If the services of auditors were subsidized by health insurances we´d get to see a lot of those heavy cases. And I think we should accept the challenge. Because it´s one thing claiming that we have the best tech on the planet, and quite another proving the point. As it stands at present, we are usually dealing with fairly capable people who are socially well-adjusted enough to be able to pay the auditor´s bills. After all, according to Ron Hubbard the auditor is supposed to make the able more able (and with regard to planetary suvival, that´s the only chance we have). It´s to these able people that the average of "all in all 90 hours" applies. That´s not a lot of hours, particularly as they spread out over no more than a half a dozen long weekends. Which means that within the time span of two to three months a person may progress from his very first session ever to the point of starting his solo training. And as the checksheets in the appendix of this book can be studied within a few weeks only even at a leasurely pace, one might safely expect a person to advance from auditee to solo auditor within no more than half a year (time and money permitting). Such progress in so short a time span - how come? Well, let´s look at the changes the auditee went through since he started. He started out believing he is a body. Running prenatals and past lives cured him of that. He believed he was a single being. Connecting up with the time tracks of others by running valences and entities, cured him of that. He believed he was suffering from old engrams personally. Recognizing that engrams are body incidents stored by the GE, cured him of that. He believed the real problem was mental energy. He believed that fighting and channelling ridges, engrams, entities and hostile thetans was the issue. Understanding the role postulates play, cured him of that. With this, the auditee has demonstrated that he can tell where it´s coming from: own track, entities, GE, body, other thetans. And with regard to erasing incidents he has progressed from doing hard and sweaty work to running lightly, even to blowing by inspection.

That´s quite some progress! The auditee has experienced these phenomena and has shown convincingly that he can distinguish between himself and them. So one may rightfully call him a "Clear on the first dynamic". He knows: "Here is me, and there is the bank, and there is a difference." As a result of this, his auditor has become increasingly superfluous. This auditee can carry on solo. What a Clear on this level can´t do yet, is actually handle the stuff he is aware of. To do that he needs some know-how. He´s got the ARC (understanding) but is lacking in KRC (competence). Put him on the solo course! Don´t bother declaring him Clear or having him attest to the fact that he thinks he is. (I have come off that, which is a change to what it says at the end of LK2.) The word doesn´t matter. What matters is the performance. A person who can solo-audit demonstrates that he is not overwhelmed by his bank. So he is a Clear. Not all parts of his bank are accessible to him. Some he is fully identified with. So he isn´t aware of them and therefore cannot audit them. But those he is not fully identified with he can communicate to, control and have. Which means he can audit and as-is them. And as he goes on as-ising them, new aspects of his case will become apparent, and he can address and as-is those. Like peeling an onion layer by layer.

EACH HIS OWN BRIDGE Awareness And Havingness The spiritual evolution described on the previous pages amounts to this: one becomes increasingly aware and able to have. This evolution is what we call a "bridge". A bridge shouldn´t be prescribed by another. It ought to be put there by the auditee himself. Personal evolvement, personal growth. Self-determinism. This is the way it should go: a person becomes aware of something bothering him. He registers a deviation of the existing scene from the ideal. So there is charge. He sits down and audits the matter to a condition of loving comprehension (full ARC), at which point there is an F/N on the meter. He keeps finding more and more phenomena of the same kind. That´s the awareness aspect of the bridge. He becomes aware of certain case phenomena on a particular level of awareness and audits them. Eventually he can confront and have all phenomena on this awareness level. At this point he won´t get the phenomena any more. None of them. That´s the havingness aspect of the bridge. With this he has reached an end phenomenon on the level of awareness he was concentrating on. No inner friction left, no uncertainty. Instead: harmony and certainty. Havingness. F/N. "A thetan basically knows", it is said. On a lower level of performance, a thetan needs pictures to convince himself that he knows. Pictures, on that level, are considered "proof". He will need those pictures exactly as long as it takes him to feel certain that he really knows. He will then F/N on knowing what he knows even though he may not have a single picture to support the data. The game of auditing occurs on three levels of operation simultaneously. On the 7th dynamic it´s pictures, entities, ridges, it´s energy phenomena and their consonances and dissonances. It´s ARC: love and hate. On the 8th dynamic it´s postulates, pure conceptual thought, as-isness at the moment of creation and of destruction, survival computations at the highest possible games level. It´s KRC: ethics.

On the level of static it´s pure knowingness. Because after all one knows that a certain postulate or picture was created by oneself or another, why, where and when it was created, etc. If one hadn´t known it in the first place, one couldn´t have forgotten it and then found out about it in session. A thetan is a "thought being". He exists through thought in the first place and energy in the second place. Deep down he knows that he created his existence that way. In that sense he is outside his own existence. He is aware of being aware. That´s the static aspect of the thetan. He knows that he knows. At all levels of auditing one has to be wary of implants. There are biological implants (5th dynamic), material implants (6th dynamic), picture implants (7th dynamic) and concept implants (8th dynamic). Implants serve to force control on a thetan, reduce his self-determinism and make him un-know what he knows. From Other-Determinism To Pan-Determinism The lower bridge is characterized by the more obvious life problems of the auditee. At this level he takes other viewpoints as his own and identifies with them. He is largely other-determined and oblivious of his own role and responsibility as a thetan. As he doesn´t differentiate between himself and the correct owner of a viewpoint, he is not protesting against anything. His TA will be in normal range even in the event of misownership of charge. The middle bridge is characterized by a certain condition only to be found on planet Earth: the OT 3 case with its R6 bank. At this stage the auditee realizes how other-determined he really is, and strives for self-determinism. The name of the game is differentiation. His TA is often high, because he is in a fighting mood. The upper bridge is characterized by rehabilitating one´s goals and purposes, and one´s general destination as a thetan. At this level the auditee becomes so certain of himself that can be aware of and have anyone´s viewpoints as well as his own. He can even accept the viewpoints of others as his own, knowing that any viewpoint he might decide to have is for that amount of time "his" viewpoint. He doesn´t have to garrulously emphasize what´s "his own" and what´s "theirs". Such is his havingness. He is pandetermined. He isn´t "himself" any longer, at least not in the narrow sense of the word. He doesn´t play his game because "he" wants to play it but because within a universal context this is what needs doing.

In this understanding of a bridge, "lower", "middle" and "upper" refer to the growth of a person´s awareness and havingness. The higher he gets the more will he be able to take on. As each person starts off at his own level of ARC/KRC they´re all going to experience different things and have different results as they go along. There are certain EPs to be expected, yes, but you cannot compare two people. In the following paragraphs this bridge is looked at through the magnifying glass and in slow motion. It may not sound all too familiar to you, so please bear in mind that this is what I do. The Lower Bridge What´s being audited: A mixture of own case, foreign case, and GE case. The auditee runs past lives, entities, engrams. The auditor doesn´t enforce any sequence on this. He takes it as it comes. (Postulate Auditing makes for a natural evolvement anyway. Priorities get sorted out all by themselves.) EP: The havingness level of the auditee has increased so much that he can easily confront and differentiate the various mental phenomena he encounters. He is not impressed let alone scared by them. He starts auditing solo. He keeps and improves his level of awareness and havingness by means of his solo sessions. Ethics: He has roughly found out what tasks he has to accomplish as a thetan; he has realized the outlines of his mission. He is not in confusion any more as to what his own game might be. He knows his playing field, he knows where he is. As well he has come to understand that his actions have consequences on himself and others, so he is not going to act irresponsibly. He knows it will fall back on him if he does. He knows that he is, that he plays a part in a game. He even knows what he has to get done, he knows his hat. So he knows who he is. He´s out of the enemy condition. The Middle Bridge What´s being audited: Exclusively foreign stuff, i.e. the Earth case, to the extent the person got identified with it. That´s OT 3 with its BTs and Clusters. OT 3 is finished off by Bill Robertson´s Excalibur with its space ships, alien crews, Xenu-partisans, monitoring entities and control stations on far-away planets. With all entities gone, the GE will mightly move into the focus of the solo auditor´s attention. Before, it was held down and obscured by the OT 3 case. It can now be run without any interference by a nutty "middle management"

(entities). On the side, telepathic connections with thetans playing the Yatruscan game will show up and be disconnected from. That´s part of the GERD. EP: Identifications with pictures, energies and masses on the 7th dynamic have been recognized and as-ised. Any kind of entity or telepathic link by theta energy has become unimportant to the solo auditor. He can have it with a yawn and won´t be trapped again by that sort of stuff. He can keep this level of awareness and havingness by means of further solo-auditing, for example by flying ruds every now and then. Ethics: He has handled all doubts with regard to his role and the hat he wears. Insinuations and suggestions by wily entities don´t bite on him any longer. He has found out who his friends are (the other players in his game), has delivered a decisive blow to the enemy of his game (by auditing hostile entities and thetans and disconnecting from them), and by his auditing and life performance he has demonstrated his goodwill and intention to pursue an ethical path. He is out of the condition of liability. The Upper Bridge What´s being audited: Own track again, but not so much with attention on incidents but on the postulate fabric one has created for oneself as a thetan, and by which one is interwoven with all other theta worlds. It´s strictly 8th dynamic auditing, leading to the experiential (not only intellectual) recognition of oneself being the source of one´s postulates, games, and aberrations. (Done on the SEPP, as described later.) EP: Own game and admin scale entirely understood and accepted. Unnecessary postulates detected and cancelled. No superfluous stuff hanging about. Abilities and skills relevant to this admin scale are rehabilitated through auditing and actively worked on in life. Ethics: With full integrity attained, the long-interrupted production along the lines of one´s true game can finally be resumed. In terms of ethics conditions one is on one´s way from non-existence to power.

THE SOLO PRACTICAL Training and C/Sing Now to the practical side of it. How would I (the author of this book) train and C/S a solo auditor? Well, when he has demonstrated his ability to detect and discriminate the four sources of charge to his own satisfaction (self, entity, other thetan, GE), and is willing to take on the responsibility for handling his case solo, I do a brief 2WC on this hat turn-over. When he F/Ns on this he may start auditing solo. Not a word of Clear. (As I already said, this is a major departure from the procedure described in LK2.) He may have done his auditor training already a while back (for checksheets see the appendix). It is perfectly alright for anyone to do an auditor´s course at any time. One doesn´t have to get the permission of one´s C/S for that! In terms of methods applied there is absolutely no difference between auditing solo and duo. It´s the same set of basic tools for both purposes. Therefore a course graduate may start auditing right away, and he may audit anyone he likes to. Except himself. For that he does need the guidance of his C/S. To groove him in on solo auditing (after he completed his course), have him hold the solo cans and ask him to observe the meter whilst you have a little chat with him. Have him keep notes of the talk and of needle and TA motions. He will soon see that the meter works as a feedback device. When he can do this easily he may then do his Solo Practical. As for C/Sing him - that´s simple. All he has to do is complete the program he was on before. He is still on it. He simply phased over from duo to solo. There is a whole postulate list to be taken to F/N by repeater technique - a very undemanding action at this stage, and just right for the beginner. So as the first thing the newly-hatched solo auditor takes his own program to completion. That´s his Solo Practical, his solo interneship as it were. When he is through with his postulates and other remaining program steps from before, he audits the C/S sequence for the Solo Practical on his course checksheet (see appendix). After that he is going to be a very good auditor. In all respects.

I always do my C/Sing over the telephone, by the way. When the auditor is well-trained and understands the viewpoint of the C/S, a brief technical dialogue will do to describe situation as well as remedy. I would expect a solo auditor to do his own routine C/Sing within the framework of the program he is on. No need to see the folder when all goes well. Handling his case and reporting properly is the solo auditor´s responsibility, after all. And if the C/S can´t trust him to do his job reliably and report decently, then either the C/S didn´t turn his hat over well or the auditor isn´t worth his salt. So shoot the C/S or train the auditor some more. Or both. The EP of the Solo Practical is: demonstration of auditor presence. And that means: good TRs, technical flexibility, admin ok, can complete cycles of action from read to F/N (see appendix C). Solo auditors can and should do TRs whilst on solo, by the way. I would expect a solo auditor to be able to confront his case no matter where he stands on the bridge. The more TRs the merrier. With TRs you are drilling auditor presence. Therefore I cannot see why TR-0 should be a dangerous thing to do even whilst one is on Solo 3. It´s right against the definition and purpose of TR-0 that anything should key in whilst doing TR-0. And even if it did: you can always handle that on the cans. Solo! A solo auditor may stay on his Solo Practical for years, if he likes. No need for him to go up any pre-fabricated set of Solo Levels. He may stay on his Solo Practical as long as he likes and really show that he can act like a Clear. There will be a point when he gets bored, though. Because running ruds and prepchecks on the charge of the day doesn´t make for case progress in the long run. At a certain point things will F/N all too easily yet life stays the same. The Solo Practical is going flat. Time to move on to Solo 1 to 3. Handling the Composite Case On The Solo Practical Yet even before the Solo Practical goes flat, Solo 1 to 3 may actively call for the auditor´s attention. Indicators: TA keeps going up unexplicably and can be brought down only temporarily. Needle tends to go tight and dirty. The solo auditor seems to be fixated on re-occurring items or areas of charge without ever arriving at a satisfying key-out or release. Reason: loads of entities wanting to be audited.

This can be handled temporarily with C/S instructions like: "Address all the entities around. Big TR-0, big space. Give them their Two Rights Of A Thetan. Tell them: You will all get your session when it´s your turn. Meanwhile would everybody please run their own incident from earliest beginning to end! Each incident is correct by itself yet in terms of time and place it is different from all others!" Have the solo auditor repeat this until it goes flat and F/Ns. Or this one, for example: "We are auditing this particular incident right now and no other. Similar incidents are true for different beings at different times and places, but this one is this one and we´ll complete it. Then the next one in line. Would everybody please wait till it´s their turn?" This will give good reads and after some repetitions will take the TA down and make the needle float. One has to get the solo auditor used to the idea that his case consists of a multitude of entities who all throng up wanting auditing, and that he has to address them lovingly, firmly, and sensibly in order to control them. Like a kindergarden nurse trying to keep a few dozen five-year olds in check. It´s on that level of communication and control. This establishes him as the boss. He won´t be succesful on Solo 3 and Excalibur when he doesn´t manage to keep control of his case. This is not a tech matter but an administrative matter. What when he gets stuck? High TA, dirty needle, nothing reading, feels massy, black smoke billowing out of his ears - what then? Simple: you C/S him out of it. You don´t give him a review session. You C/S him out of it, on the appropriate gradient for his level of skill. No "review sessions" needed, no "specialist rundowns" like "OT 3 Int RD" or PTS RD and what not! Get him to spot what it is and suggest the right basic tool to handle it with, and - bingo! - there he flies again. At the most I would give him a supportive session to help him do the scouting. No review session - a supportive session! Big difference. And when the scouting is done and he has found what it is I´d delegate the job back to him. Look, it´s so simple: what creates his condition is either a protest of his, a protest of some entity, a protest of some other thetan. Or a protest coming from the GE, in other words an engram in restimulation. Protest means: something happening one doesn´t like. The only problem: one hasn´t spotted it yet in terms of content and source, hasn´t recognized it yet for what it is. All one has to do is spot it. And then get your basic tools out and the sparks will fly.

Speak Out Loud! One note on session control: the solo auditor must write down his own observations and the originations of the terminal he is auditing (entity, GE, thetan, himself). To give a lower level example: imagine an auditee sitting in front of the auditor, sitting, thinking and not saying a word: TA goes up, needle tightens. Wouldn´t work, would it! The auditee mustn´t run the incident silently by himself, he must speak it out loud. For all the world to hear! Then and only then will you get TAA on your auditee. Same with the solo auditor auditing an entity (or whatever), except that he doesn´t have to voice anything but must write down what his "auditee" says. Speaking out loud or writing down serve as a lightning rod transporting the charge from the first to the third universe where that charge is earthed. It´s asising by exact duplication on all levels of communication. Only with a lot of experience will one become able to blow things by mere intuition. I actually encourage my trainees to "educate their case" by giving their commands in a half-loud voice, and to be silent when they need to withdraw into their "ivory tower" to make C/S decisions. They should be able to think up the next command, write it down, and underline it without a stir on the needle! And then, in a murmur or a loud voice, they reach out into their space and - bang! - there is their read. Giving commands in a loud voice supports the solo auditor´s TR-1. Your Daily F/N Whether at the tail end of one´s Solo Practical or at any later point when one isn´t working on any specific program: one ought to get one´s daily F/N. This is excellent practice for the auditor and the best way to keep mental hygiene. It also makes one discover things that aren´t described in any book known to man. It´s a voyage of discovery and adventure! Have a sportsman-like attitude about this. Sit down with meter and cans, switch the thing on, check needle and TA. TA high? There must be a reason for it. Find it! TA in normal range but no F/N? There must be a reason for this also. So go ahead and find it! The meter is a mental feedback machine. It shows you if your system is in harmony or isn´t. So use it! It´s good for you.

When I hear someone natter about Ron and the tech and see his meter all covered up with dust and cobwebs, I know what to think. So don´t talk about it - do it!

Chapter Five: The Solo Levels

MATERIALS In this text I´m generally using the term "Solo Levels" to replace the old "OT levels". Occasionally, though, I´m going to say "OT 1-3" when I mean the actual written materials. Yet when I´m referring to the auditing actions suggested by me, I´ll say "Solo Levels". The auditing actions I´m going to suggest may not coincide with what´s done elsewhere, by other C/Ses. My background on this is first St.Hill UK and then Bill Robertson. The term "OT level" is actually quite well-chosen in that "OT" refers to the telepathic aspect of solo auditing, to actions one does as a thetan and not by means of a body. Since one becomes increasingly aware of oneself operating as a thetan (both in and out of session) as one moves up these levels, they are rightfully called OT levels. But in order to emphasize that the procedures described in this text are my personal way of going about it and don´t purport to follow anyone´s idea of "standard tech", and since the exaggerated claims by the Church of Scientology´s propaganda machine have distorted the word OT beyond recognition, I personally prefer the rather modest term Solo Level. Each of the Solo Levels 1 to 3 consist of an instruction and an auditing action. The instruction refers to the bank segments to be audited and how to audit them. They should be studied in the handwriting of Ron Hubbard (at least those of OT 1 and 3. I have never seen the C.C. and OT 2 in Ron´s own hand). This is the traditional way of studying OT 1-3 so as to guarantee the authenticity of the materials. Unfortunately these materials are not on sale in your local bookstore. But there are ways of getting them. (The handwritten materials of OT 3 were quoted in their entirity in the "Pied Pipers", LK3/ch. 3.) The steps above Solo 3 don´t require any materials beyond what´s covered in this book. A Historical Review Various "bridges" have evolved inside and outside the Church of Scientology. The first bridge (1950) was auditing Dianetics until you had a Clear. Then followed Mest Clear, Theta Clear, Cleared Theta Clear. Then Grade

I to VII, with Grades I to IV being the usual, Grade V being Power, Grade VI being R6EW and Grade VII the Clearing Course Materials. Grade VII was Clear. This bridge was extended in 1968 to include OT I to III. A few years later it was extended to include OT IV to VII. These levels, the so-called "old" OT levels, were mainly OT drills. You were meant to take on the viewpoints of people and animals, getting the feel of them and getting them to follow your intentions. These "old" OT levels presupposed that the auditee was through with his OT III to the point of not a single BT left. They didn´t work because nobody was really through with OT III to the required extent at the time. So in 1978 the top end of the bridge was changed, to be replaced by "new" OT IV to VII, namely NOTs ("New Era Dianetics for OTs"). NOTs does not (as the promo suggests) make one "Cause over Life", neither does it really handle OT III to its end. Again later the Church of Scn bridge was extended up to OT VIII, something one has to do on the Sea Org´s ocean cruiser. OT VIII yet again does not take one through to the end phenomenon of OT III but restricts itself to some OT drills based on objectives and certain L&N processes designed to drill holes into one´s case. Concurrently, after the independent scene separated out from the Church of Scn in 1982, various other attempts were made outside the Church to build a better bridge. One was Captain Bill Robertson´s Bridge to "caselessness" which went up through the usual OT levels I to III, then jumped a gap to Excalibur as OT 8, then from OT 9 to OT 16, and finally to OT 48. Excalibur does handle OT III to its end. It was Robertson´s answer to NOTs. He tried to handle what was left unhandled after Excalibur by forever envisioning and adding new OT levels, in the attempt to eventually attain the promised "caselessness". One problem with Robertson´s bridge was that he never tested his OT levels out (not even himself) before handing them over to the public. He simply envisioned them. Robertson died in 1991. Parallel to that, Irene Mumford developed "Dianesis", essentially a GPM process which is done solo after attaining Clear. As much as I know, Dianasis has no definite end phenomenon like "full OT" or "case completion. It seems that one can go on and on with it. Irene Mumford died in 1994 (I believe). Again parallel to that, "Metapsychology" was formed. ("Meta" means "one level above".) David Mayo had run his AACs (Advanced Ability Centers), delivering the Church bridge from Clear through OT 1-3 to NOTs, until he was sued by the Church and had to close down. He got together with Frank Garbode, a psychiatrist and old-time scientologist. Together they founded "Metapsychology" which basically consists of lower level Hubbard-materials.

These were re-written to get around the copyright problem and be able to approach the general public without the scientology stigma. To my knowledge Metapsychology doesn´t go into whole track GPMs and implants at all. Yet again parallel to that (a lot happened between 1982 and 1985!) Harry Palmer got together with a number of disenchanted Class VIII and XII auditors and founded "Avatar". It includes a three-step personal evolvement based on Hubbard´s early objective and creative processes. An avatar, in Hindu mythology, is an enlightened being from a more subtle realm of existence who comes down here endowed with miraculous powers to help us Earthlings on. He is not just a re-incarnated person. I fail to understand why Harry Palmer chose this name for his movement except that perhaps his processes reflect the high-level awareness of an avatar as they imply the concept of "why don´t you simply as-is it just like that?" Lastly there is the bridge suggested by me and described in this book. It is based on Hubbard´s Clear-to-OT-III bridge and features Robertson´s Excalibur as its central component. The processes above Excalibur were researched between 1989 and 1995 by me and the solo-auditors assisting me. At the time of the writing of this book (1996) they can be considered well-tested. (For a further discussion of the subject of "bridge building", see LK2, the chapter on Clear near the end of the book, and LK3/ch.6.)

PREREQUISITES Don´t expect people to handle on the Solo Levels what ought to have been handled on their Life Repair. The Solo Levels do not replace handling by ordinary means (basic tools) the auditee´s attention on his life and his body. As long as the auditee can specify an area of concern and as long as that area has charge on it, it can be handled by ordinary means - be it duo or solo. Don´t ever put anyone on Solo 1-3 as a life remedy. "Your case is so special, there surely is some upper level charge involved". Oh no! His life is remedied before Clear and during Clear on the Solo Practicals. Certainly, upper level charge quite definitely and severely monitors people´s lives, yet the point is: they won´t be successful on the rather subtle upper level stuff as long as their attention is fixated on rather gross, commonplace items. The grossness of these commonplace items subdues the subtle commlines to the world of BTs, entities in general, disincarnate thetans, etc. Very frustrating for a solo auditor to have done Solo 1-3 with no results. Don´t do it! Very bad PR. Do a good job from the bottom upwards. It may take years. But they are years well invested. Quickie solutions never made anyone happy. When you hit problems on a certain level, there are three possible explanations: one, not the right action at this point in time. The person´s interest is elsewhere. Two, not properly introduced to the peculiarities of the level he is on. Three, general auditing skills are lacking. It´s always one of those three. Clears And OTs As Newcomers When "old" Clears and OTs come on lines I treat them like any newcomer. I do a full interview (as per LK2), I ask them at what point they attested Clear, how it felt running OT3, how their perceptions were, how skilled they are as auditors. I have them do demos of auditing techniques with me as a dummy auditee. After all, if I am to take responsibility for them - in particular on a longdistance comm line - I must know who I am dealing with! Some "Clears" were told to attest over a private cup of coffee and without a single hour of auditing, by "C/Ses" who "just knew the guy is a Clear"!

Some people attested to OT 3 without ever having contacted a single BT or Cluster! So I do the usual interview analysis and work out a program and then I sit them down and audit them as I would audit anyone else. And when they are indeed up to the level they attested to they will demonstrate it by handling the charge that showed in the interview in the fashion typical for that level. Someone on Solo 3 may certainly have charge on various aspects of life, but when audited on it he will immediately spot entities and assign correct ownership of charge. And then of course he should continue solo. On the other hand, people who can´t do that get audited like anyone else. This handles the personal charge that should have been handled a lot earlier already. After that they may have to do their Solo 3 or Excalibur a second time all over again. That did actually happen! It´s as if the first time through they hadn´t really been there. It was an automaticity auditing the case, not a thetan. Doesn´t work.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION Solo 1 - 3 deal specifically with the Earth case, the sort of case that´s typical for down here. Because it is planet Earth that took the brunt of Incident II, 75 million years ago. So anyone walking about on this planet is liable to get spiritually contaminated without his knowing, something that wouldn´t happen to him quite to that extent on any of the 76 other planets involved. When you audit people originating from places like Aldebaran, Sirius or Arcturus you get an idea of what life on planet Earth might have been like before it got hit, and what it will be like once it´s been restored to normal operation. Although Incident II involved 76 planets around 21 stars, it seems that life in those places wasn´t quite as severely affected as down here. Of course, they do suffer from the particular aspects of Inc. II indigenous to their planets (and of the cross-restimulation they receive from their Earth-trapped ridges), but that´s nothing compared to here. Also they have bodies and GE aberrations, and then they have their Incident I which every thetan in this particular universe has in one form or another. For most thetans Inc. I served as an entry ticket to Xenu´s game (for the fun of it); whereas for a few it was a serious issue and their reason for coming to this universe in the first place (referring to the more involved pro-Xenu and contra-Xenu guys). Having a body, a GE and a Xenu connection through Inc. I, are features shared by all beings who physically live on planets. Those that never incarnated but stayed aloft, still have an Inc. I problem. They are extremely easy to audit, though. Occasionally one bumps into one of them as one follows up a particular line of interest on the meter. All they need is receiving an R-Factor on the matter ("Xenu´s game over" etc.) and being asked a few questions pertaining to their personal first involvement with Xenu, and - whoosh! - there blow the connecting theta quanta. They just never thought about the matter in terms of having become otherdetermined. It never bothered them sufficiently as to notice it. Freeing beings in this fashion is of extreme importance not only for their personal well-being but even more so in terms of universal politics (which is one step up from galactic politics). Because anyone who has recognized his Xenu-connection is not in Xenu´s valence any longer and can make decisions which are not part of Xenu´s scheme, i.e. decisions which won´t contribute to

further condensing theta quanta by gravitational pull, eventually turning everything into solid rock. Anyone not in Xenu´s valence will evaluate things differently. In fact, strictly speaking he isn´t even part of this universe any more! He will be in touch with other universes existing parallel to this one. All of which would help getting this one sorted out. The experiment has lasted long enough, after all. Hubbard A Fruitcake? It has been said that the materials of OT 1-3 reflected Ron Hubbard´s own case, were a dramatization of his personal past, were sloppily researched, and so on. Be that as it may. As a C/S I don´t expect anyone to "believe" these data. I dont want people to believe them! I just want these data to be duplicated, understood, and used in session. With all due skepticism. Each time I put someone on Solo 1-3 I can´t believe that he gets reads, pictures and all the rest of it! It´s a surprise each and every time. So do they get their reads on a fantasy movie they have mocked up in their mind? Perhaps they do. But even then it would be well worth flattening the button that was hit, because somehow it resolves real charge and very positive changes result from it, "true" or not. Any reading item must be taken to an F/N, irrespective of all possible interpretations. That´s the long and short of auditing. So whether you consider Solo 1-3 fact or fiction, there is no way around running it when it reads on you. Mystical Traditions Anyone who understands traditional esoterics will immediately see that OT 2 and 3 are an initiation of the highest calibre. To sell these levels on the front counter at throw-away prices doesn´t do them justice. Look for example at Mozart´s opera "The Magic Flute". It contains an exact description of a top notch Freemason initiation. And with that it relates back to the ancient Isis cult. In either case it is expected of a person that he should be courageous enough to expose himself to terrifying scenes play-acted especially for him by prior arrangement, such as being alone inside a tomb with skulls rattling about, that he (more importantly) should be able to stand up to the pictures thereby restimulated in his mind, and that he (most importantly) should come out with the recognition of the spirit being stronger than mest and of spiritual survival being tied up with sticking to one´s guns and not violate one´s honour and integrity.

And what does one find in the "Magic Flute" if not the very archetypes all initiations deal with, namely Xenu and Yatrus! Mozart represents them as the Queen of the Night (Xenu) who has to surrender her realm and power to Sarastro (Yatrus). It´s almost like Mozart had read "The Pied Pipers" before composing his opera! (The Freemasons of his day didn´t particularly like Mozart´s revelations. Too close to the truth. Mozart was killed soon after the "Magic Flute" was put on stage in 1791.) To evaluate Hubbard´s work fairly, it has to be understood in this context. His OT levels are an initiation to the most hidden compartments of the mind of Earth-dwelling homo sapiens with the intention to produce a full-blown restimulation of his reactive bank. And as it goes with all initiations: the person who isn´t ready for them won´t get anything out of them. One doesn´t even have to keep them a secret! Reading a datum with one´s eyes is one thing, yet being prepared to receive it into one´s mind, quite another. (Which makes it alright to write about it.) Bill Robertson´s Contribution. After this brief glance over the philosophical, political and historical ramifications of the matter (extensively covered in LK3), let us turn to the practical side of things and look at the peculiarities of each of these Solo Levels from the bottom to the top. Please bear in mind that this is the way I do it and perhaps not the way it´s done in other places. But doing it this way, I can assure you, will give you results. I did my OT 1-3 at St. Hill U.K. in the late seventies, and it was a very unenlightening experience. The subject was so hushed up that not even the supervisor would answer questions! I didn´t understand anything. And did it all wrong, needless to say. (Quite by accident I had a win, though. Probably wasn´t intended.) Things started brightening up for me when I met William Brenton Robertson ("Captain Bill") at the beginning stages of his Excalibur research. Robertson introduced me to the way he had done his OT 1-3 on the Flagship sometime in the late sixties, as C/Sed by Ron Hubbard, and that opened the door to a new and fruitful understanding of the matter. Bill died in 1991, but amongst us OT folks that doesn´t really matter. So thanks, Bill! Good job you did there.

SOLO 1 Solo 1 consists of 13 steps. It is done outside in crowded places. The solo auditor walks about counting people, comparing people with each other or himself, comparing individuals with groups, etc., as stated in the 13 instructions. Each step is done "to a cognition", as the instructions say. The action is started on the meter with "rudiments to an F/N". As it´s a major action you don´t want any distraction, so you have the solo auditor start with an F/N (not just a TA check as the materials state). Next the solo auditor is handed the sheet containing his instructions. The 13 steps are best kept inside a plastic wrapper covered by a blank sheet of paper so that one can´t read them. The solo auditor is given the following instruction: "Go to the nearest supermarket or shopping mall or airport, wherever there are plenty of people, and study these people with respect to certain characteristics until you have a cognition. Take a note pad along so you can keep worksheets. Once you are there you pull the blank cover sheet off instruction number 1, study the instruction, and do what it says. It may tell you that you are to count men with red noses until you have a cognition. So you just do that and no more." "A cognition" in this particular context does not mean that the solo auditor´s case will explode in smithereens. It doesn´t have to be a cog of the mindshattering variety at all. "A cognition" simply means: the first thought that comes to mind whilst doing the action. It does not have to be a new realization. It may be a realization the solo auditor has already had before. He may have already noticed years ago that men with red noses more often than not smell of booze, but this may not come to his mind immediately as he reads his instructions but only after counting 35 men with red noses. Good. So he writes on his note pad: "Counted 35 men with red noses. Realized they all smell of booze." This way he goes through his 13 steps. Should the solo auditor actually have a mindshattering realization he would end off at that point and return to his auditing room. Doing the remaining instructions might spoil it for him. So he goes off and does that. When he comes back you tell him this: "Now sit down at your meter and review what has happened whilst you were outside. Scan over the various experiences and realizations you have had. Rehabilitate some aspects of it as needed. Handle any out ruds. End off with an F/N. Don´t

try to make any sense out of this. Explanations will be given when you are on Solo 3. Just take it easy." Only that last F/N is truly the end of his session! The session began with him getting an F/N, it continued with him walking about doing his instructions, it ended with an F/N. When he is through with all that he hands his folder in. You, as C/S, study it. You will detect sentences like: "Individuals are nicer than groups", "all people are different", "I´m not like other people" and such. It invariably happens that way. What sense does that make? Well, it´s the boss thetan giving indications to his congealed mass of entities who all think they are one. Or it´s the boss thetan picking up the originations of his congealed crew and acknowledging it. In either case a long-forgotten stable datum is put into the system: "You are all individuals! You are not all one. You may be part of a mass, but you are not the mass!" This puts fine hairline fissures into the solid concrete block called the R6 bank that the solo auditor (along with most thetans on this planet) carries around with him. Technically, it works by the basic tool of "indication of a correct item". These fine fissures won´t appear if the person has his attention riveted on the problems of his immediate life. Too subtle! But as these fissures are the necessary prerequisite to the next level to come, Solo 2, you must make sure that the lower bridge of that solo auditor stands on good and strong foundations!

SOLO 2 Theory Solo Level 2 cracks the solid block of congealed entities the average Earthdweller is identified with, and breaks it to pieces. These pieces are then auditable individually. This is done on Solo 3. Solo 1 drives fissures into the block, Solo 2 cracks it, Solo 3 cleans up the debris. Excalibur goes a step further and cleans up the bits stuck to the back of one´s coat. It undoes the specifically personal identification of the solo auditor with the R6 bank, and it handles "theta electronics", i.e. transmitting devices connecting one with groups one would prefer not to be connected with. The congealed mass of entities referred to came about this way: the C.C. implant 1,5 quadrillion years ago was done on individual thetans. It was repeated 75 million years ago as part of Incident II and was the first implant after the explosion. Yet at that point it was not done on individual thetans (as before) but on groups of BTs. Very messy indeed! It was followed by a further implant series called the OT 2 implants. Then followed the 36 day marathon implant containing all the facets of "modern civilization" dramatized today. What you get as a result of this is a very congealed mass of very solidly packed-together theta quanta. This is what needs breaking up as a prerequisite to auditing the actual Incident II story. The level of OT 2 gets its name from the "OT 2" implant mentioned above. It used to be audited straight after Solo 1. Yet since 1978, when Dianetic Clear and Natural Clear were announced, people were put on OT 1 and OT 2 without having done their C.C.. This is a skipped gradient as well as a disastrous mistake. Before 1978 it was thought that Clear was to be the result of auditing the Clearing Course Implant (C.C.). By the definition of Clear, this cannot be the case. The ability of Clear is one thing and the GPMs of the C.C. quite another. No reason to assume that auditing the C.C. should make Clears. One doesn´t necessarily lead to the other.

The C.C. is just one particular segment of the bank, that´s all. Anyone able to hold the cans without fainting, can do it. Which means that in order to do it, one would have to be pretty clear already! Ron at that time worked on the theory that a thetan is basically a pure being except for his being soiled by dirty engram pictures from the GE. So he assumed that all one had to do to make a Clear is disentangle the thetan from the grips of the GE and its engrams (LK1/p. 159). This entanglement started 1.5 quadrillion years ago when the C.C. implant was given originally. At the time it was already commonplace for thetans to own GEs. So the C.C. was the first implant given to thetan and GE simultaneously. It welded them together (LK3/ch. 4.2). To get back to our argument: before 1978 everybody had to do the C.C. materials. It could take hundreds of hours. Then, with the announcement of Dianetic Clear and Natural Clear, the C.C. was called off and people were put right on to OT 1 and OT 2. Apart from the fact that they were badly prepared casewise (and quite often not even Clear in terms of ability) this constitutes a skipped gradient: the C.C. was left off. Look at the chain of events: earliest, the original C.C., 1.5 quadrillion years ago. Then, 75 million years ago, its repetition during Inc. II. Then, only moments later, the OT 2 implant. You must run this entire chain from early to late so as to crack the implant aspect of Inc. II. This is done on Solo 2. Only this way can you break through to the actual story of Inc. II (which is then run on Solo 3). Consequently Solo 2 consists of two sections: first, running the C.C.; second, running the OT 2 GPMs. Practice This is how you do it: as you know the contents of this chain of implants you already know the basic on the chain (the original C.C.). So you don´t have to start late and go earlier similar as one would ordinarily do it in dianetic auditing, no, you can actually start at the basic. The method used is not listening-style auditing (narrative) but "indication of correct item" - one of the basic tools of auditing mentioned earlier. The structure of the C.C.: it consists of five implant sections (designated "A to E" in the materials) which were given 10 times in this sequence (10 "runs"). This is what you study on your Solo 2 course (see the checksheet in the appendix).

Start your first solo session on Solo 2 with a big friendly TR-0, space wide open, and speak the following words to the tens of thousands of congealed entities all around: "Hello, all of you! We are now going to run the C.C. implant that occurred 1.5 quadrillion years ago. Each of you please go to your own first item in the first run of the first GPM!" This often produces good reads, even BDs. In this case repeat the instruction to flat (no further reaction) or F/N. Then you take your platens, covered with a blank sheet of paper, pull the sheet down a bit, read the first line, give it to "them" with good TR-1 and note down all reads. You as the solo auditor don´t have to believe a word of this. It is perfectly alright to consider this mere fantasy. That doesn´t matter. You´ll get reads anyway, provided you keep your auditor presence with good TRs and no attempts to invalidate anything that´s coming to you. Maintain an open attitude and keep your opinion on the matter to yourself as you would in any session. And you will get your reads. Quite often pages of them. It´s like TR-0 bullbaited. The implant commands as listed in the materials (called "platens") hit a button in you. Or not. If they do, the button is repeated until it is flat. On TR-0 nobody wants to know why the student is reacting. That´s beside the point. What matters is that the button causes a reaction, and that the repetition of the button flattens that reaction. With the Solo Levels - and any other auditing, actually - it isn´t any different. No matter how bizarre the story may sound: if it reads it´s run. That´s the duty of the auditor. It´s actually part of the code. You don´t have to believe what the auditee tells you, whether he is an incarnate thetan, a disincarnate thetan or an entity. You don´t want to know why there is charge, it´s quite enough to see that there is charge. You help the auditee handle his charge. That´s the long and short of it. After all it´s his universe, not yours. Keep It Light! When you audit on Solo 2, do it lightly.The idea is that there is this huge charge hung up in mid-air and you have to some extent identified with it, and now that you are addressing it, it will gradually deflate and that shows on the meter as reads. Like letting the air slowly out of the inner tube of this huge truck tyre now that one finally found the valve.

So audit it lightly. It ought to fall into your lap. Don´t force it. Don´t exert even more pressure on those entities than they have to bear already! Your meter will sieze up if you do. When you don´t get reads on the first command on the platen, go on. Go down a half a dozen commands, see what happens. Go down a dozen. See what happens. Once it starts reading you can always go back up to the top and pick up the reads that will be available then. That´s part of the tech of it (see the C.C. instruction book for details). It´s either something or nothing: charge or no charge. When it´s something, you drain all the charge out of it, to F/N. When it´s nothing, you acknowledge the fact that there is no charge and get an F/N on that. Either way you get an F/N. To say it again: keep it light. One doesn´t have to have that sort of case, not necessarily. Some have it more than others. It may not be your personal case anyway. Perhaps you weren´t there when it happened. Perhaps you connected up with this particular data bank fairly recently only. Or perhaps you just never connected up with it at all! Depends entirely on your level of awareness and havingness, as pointed out further up. So it´s alright not to have reads and not to have that part of the case - but then you should have a clean F/N on that fact! If not, there is something fishy. F/Ns And The EP F/Ns play a special role in this sort of auditing. You call a command off the platens, you get reads, TR-3 on the command, more reads, TR-3, more reads, TR-3, no reads. You go down to the next line on the platens. And so on, in this fashion. When the reads begin to thin out, you go up a few lines and start working downwards from there. When you get an F/N you simply leave that line and go on to the next one down, honoring the little key-out that occurred there. When you come up to that same line later on, having jumped up from a few lines further down, you simply carry on after this F/N. And if you did only that, if you just followed this little rule of "when I get an F/N I go down to the next line on the platens", you would sooner or later get

the following phenomenon: you call a command off the platens, you get reads, TR-3 on the command, more reads, TR-3, more reads, TR-3, F/N. Next line, you call the command off the platens, you get reads, TR-3 on the command, more reads, TR-3, F/N. Next line, you call the command off the platens, you get reads, TR-3, F/N. Next line, you call the command off the platens, you get reads, F/N. Next line, you call the command off the platens, F/N. Next line, F/N. Next Line, F/N. Next line, F/N. Don´t take it further. That´s it. Don´t force it. That´s the EP. The solo auditor usually feels like "something cracked in my space". Rehab in case of overrun (which will occur if you try to squeeze more reads out of the action than it readily gives). Note that the EP may occur whilst doing the clay demos on the checksheet. Some people get extremely emotional on these demos. The C/S must take this into consideration when looking at the ensuing session phenomena of that person. When the EP has occurred on the original C.C. at 1,5 quadrillion years ago, you don´t need to audit the repetition of the C.C. at 75 million years ago. You cracked the basic and that´s it. However, you do have to run the next implant on that chain, the one that was given right after the repetition of the C.C., and that´s the OT 2 implant. Same procedure as described for the C.C.: first an R-Factor (with "Inc. II" and "75 million years ago" replacing "C.C." and "1,5 quadrillion years ago"), and then running each line till the whole thing F/Ns. That´s the end of Solo 2.

SOLO 3 After Solo 2 the huge congealed mass encrusting your aura, consisting of theta quanta, ridges and entities, has broken up into chunks. On Solo 3 these are called up and audited one by one. Ron Hubbard called them BTs and Clusters. Auditing Style On this level a different auditing style is used. On Solo 1 and 2 it was auditing by direct indication of charge. On Solo 3 this is done also (on each step of the Inc. II and I sequence), but on each incident it might broaden to a narrative, and of course one goes down a chain (from Inc. II to Inc. I, earlier similar incidents and earlier universes). All these are basic tools packaged up for a specific purpose. You as the solo auditor know the contents of the Inc. II story, at least in its general framework as stated on the OT 3 platens. You don´t have to find it out from each individual BT or Cluster. The story consists of a sequence of six steps. You simply add "Go to ...!" as a prefix to each step and intend the BT through the incident (LK3/appx. B). What you are actually saying to that BT is: "There is this incident 75 million years ago and it started with a capture, remember? Everybody got shot and then they were hoovered up. And then the freezing, remember? And the transport, remember?" And so on. Each time you say "remember?" you get a read, ranging from tick to BD. You are indicating to the BT: this is what has happened. The BT will follow your indications all the way down the story of the incident and blow (disappear, disconnect, evaporate, as-is). Which means all the theta quanta it consists of return to their owner, wherever he may be at the time of your session (either on Earth or on one of those 76 planets). If the BT doesn´t blow, you go through the story a second and perhaps a third time (that´s the narrative aspect of Solo 3 auditing). And if he doesn´t blow then, or if going through it repeatedly was the wrong action, tightened the needle and drove the TA up, you go earlier and take him through Inc. I (that´s running chains). Use the same method of adding "Go to ...!" as a prefix to the Inc. I sequence described in the platens.

And if the BT doesn´t blow then, you ask: "Earlier similar incident when little foreign-made theta bits were stuck to you?". When that reads you TR-3 the question and keep TR-3ing it until its flat or you feel a blow with an F/N. Still no blow: "Earlier universe? A time when you were self-determined and purposeful and winning?" TR-3 to F/N. In either case you don´t need answers or pictures. It´s alright to do it by needle response only. Note that the needle may not have the time to actually F/N as the next BT or Cluster is sitting right there already, wanting to be noticed. Kills the F/N, see? Such a throng! So you ask: "BT already blown? Next BT already there?", and run him through his Inc. II. Standard And Trouble Shooting Questions On Solo 3 there is no fix you couldn´t get out of by asking a few simple questions. There is a limited number of possibilities only, and when things don´t go smoothly you just check through these possibilities in a yes/no pattern. The needle tells the tale. Here is the standard sequence of questions: "Anyone for Inc. II?" Read. Locate the entity. It reads when you have found the exact spot in or around your body or in the space around you. "Is it a BT or a Cluster?" Whatever reads, take it up. In either case you run Inc. II. A Cluster will break up sooner or later. It might happen on any step of the Inc. II sequence. You don´t run a Cluster through Inc. I! Inc. I was done on individual thetans. A Cluster you run through Inc. II until it breaks up, if need be repeatedly. Should you miss that moment the needle will tighten and the TA rise. "Cluster already broken up?" BD. Great. And then: "A BT for Inc. II?" Read, locate, run II, I, E/I, E/U, blow. Repeat the questions until all the BTs from the Cluster just broken up are through. Questions goes flat. Return to "Anyone for II?" and proceed as before. Any trouble like needle going tight and TA rising, just ask (depending on where this happens): "Should Inc. II be re-run?" - "Inc. I available to be run?" "Should Inc. I be re-run?" - "Earlier similar incident available?" - "Earlier universe?"

Or: "BT already blown?" (F) - "Different BT on the line?" (sF) - "Go to the capture!" Etc. Or: "More than one BT on the line?" (LF) - "Alright, which one wants running first?" (F) - "Ok, go to the capture!" Etc. Or: "Is this BT really a Cluster?" Or: "Is this Cluster really a Cumulative Cluster?" (That´s several clusters caked up with each other. See the explanation further down.) Or, when all else fails: "Overts on Inc. II (or Inc. I, respectively)?" (sF) - "Ok, run Inc. II from the overt side", and just go through the steps as usual. At some point he who was involved in the overt part of it to start with, made a mistake, his craft crashed and this way he got into the motivator side of it. The motivator side will run out after the charge on the overt side was recognized. That´s all it takes. When they become difficult and want individual handling, use the Excalibur command sequence on them. Here is a little clean-up process in case Solo 3 starts to go sluggish. Sluggishness is a sign of BTs having jammed up. They are ready to blow and just wait for a final acknowledgement. A BT bottleneck! To let them rush out, start with the earliest incident: 1. "Anyone for an earlier universe?" - Read. - "Rehab it!" - TR-3 this to flat or F/N. 2. "Anyone for an earlier similar to Inc. I?" - Read. - "Run through the incident" - Take each BT to blow/FN, if need be by going earlier. 3. Repeat question 2 to flat or F/N. 4. "Anyone for Inc. I?" - Read - Run the incident. Take the BT to blow/FN, go earlier as needed (as in 2 and 1 above). 5. Repeat question 4 to flat or F/N. 6. Now you are back to normal and go on with the usual: "Anyone for Inc. II?" Don´t worry about no pictures. It´s alright to run Solo 3 by meter read and faint images only. Or without any images at all. They will turn on good and juicy on Excalibur. Always do. And don´t worry about all of this being "science fiction". You give your commands, you get your pictures, you run them out. A button has been pushed, you repeat it till it´s flat. Same routine as TR-0 bullbaited. Just because some Earthlings cannot confront Incident II doesn´t mean it didn´t happen.

Don´t go into the 36 days so to avoid cross-restimulation and freewheeling. You push one BT too far, beyond the implant image called "the pilot", and the rest of them may go off like firecrackers. Means sleepless nights for solo auditor as well as C/S. Handle overrestimuation ("freewheeling") by: "How many BTs and Clusters in restimulation?" Get the figure with a read, indicate it (TR-2), get another read. Then: "Each of you go to your own capture!" TR-3 till flat. Repeat this little process till flat. Then go back to the standard sequence of questions. Take lots of vitamin C and B1 ("GUK formula"). Take niacin. This strengthens the energy field of the GE and keeps the entities at a distance. Still no sleep: don´t take valium, drink beer! And good luck. It might be tough. What´s a Cumulative Cluster? It´s Inc. II clusters caked up with each other because of later similar incidents restimulating Inc. II, such as explosions, fires, heavy impact, shock, atom bombs on TV, whatever. When you get a read on "Cluster?" at the start of the sequence and the Cluster doesn´t run well on Inc. II, you suspect it´s a Cumulative Cluster, ask the question on the meter, get a read, and then run the chain of mutual incidents (when they awoke and clung to each other) from late to early: "Latest mutual incident?" - Picture flashes up. - "What was it?" - Picture becomes clearer. - "When was it?" / "Where?" each to LF or BD - "Is there an earlier mutual incident?" - "What? When? Where?" - "Yet an earlier one?" - "What? When? Where?" - "Yet an earlier one?" - And you arrive at running Inc. II quite naturally, because that´s when Clusters were originally formed, and you can handle the separate Clusters in the standard way. The Solo 3 Program General note: There is no need to start a session with an F/N. The next lot of BTs have already lined up for auditing, so of course there won´t be an F/N at session start. Another note: When there are distractions from the program by trouble in life: Run 6 ruds on the situation or the terminal and determine ownership. Then go back to the step on the program you are on. (From this stage in auditing checking ownership of charge must be part of normal procedure regardless of what action is run.)

After doing the clay demos on his Solo 3 course the solo auditor´s BTs and Clusters are wide awake and eager to be released from their 75 million year captivity. The clay demos have caused sufficient restimulation for a whole load of them to be ready for auditing. So all one has to ask is the starter question: "Anyone for Inc. II?" - read - locate where it is - read - "BT or Cluster?" - read - "Go to the capture!" And so on. You simply carry on like that. Break up Clusters by taking them through Inc. II. Individual BTs you take through Inc. II and Inc. I, earlier similar incidents (E/Is) and earlier universes (E/Us) to blow. You carry on till the starter question goes flat. No further reads on it, F/N.

"Any BTs or Clusters in or on my body?" Travel with your attention through your body, scan through skin, inner organs, bones, limbs. You´ll feel attracted to certain spots. When they read on the meter: "Is that a BT or Cluster?" And there you go. Until question 2 goes flat on the meter.

"Any BTs or Clusters in the space around the body?" Locate and run. Until the question goes flat.

When your attention on the body flattens off (2) you will feel quite naturally drawn into the space around you (3). When that flattens off you will feel drawn back to the body. So keep alternating 2 and 3. Just go where your attention goes. Until that´s flat and you get a definite and final F/N on questions 2 and 3.

"Any BT´s or Clusters being my body or parts of it?" That´s asking for full identification with the body or a body part. Quite different to question 3. Locate and handle as usual: Inc. II - Inc. I - earlier similar to Inc. I - earlier universe. Never change that routine.

"Any BTs or Clusters being my space?" Very interesting stuff! They look like soap bubbles, sometimes encapsulating one´s entire body.

"Any BTs or Clusters being me?" Or: " ... being Joe?" (Put your own name in.) Locate and run as usual.

This one is a little more complex: a) Go in session and make a list of drugs, medicines, injections and alcoholic drinks you have taken. Just note down anything that comes to mind and how big the read is. b) Take a brief break and establish the sequence of the items by the size of their reads. c) Take each reading item up with the question: "Regarding aspirin (for example) are there any BT´s and Clusters in restimulation?" Locate and handle. Repeat the question till aspirin (or whatever) F/Ns. Then go to the next

reading item. The EP should be an F/Ning drug list. (Don´t use any old drug list from years ago! Make a new one.) 9.

Another complex one. It works on the theory that any incident that traumatized the body may cause BT´s and Clusters to wake up and cling to the picture of that particular incident, thus forming new clusters or Cumulative Clusters. This process is called "Milazzo" in the OT 3 platens, after the Sizilian harbour town where it was developed. a) In session, make a list of illnesses, accidents, injuries, unconsciousnesses, operations, anaesthesia. b) Take a break, establish the sequence of the items by the size of their reads. c) Pick up the first item with the question: "During this incident, was a Cluster formed?" - Read. - d) Scan over the incident to re-familiarize yourself with it, in other words flatten it on your own time track. - e) Then do a Date/Locate, finding the exact point in the incident when that Cluster was formed. This should give you a BD which means that the Cluster has broken up. - f) Then ask: "Any BTs or Clusters for Inc. II?" and do your usual routine until the question goes flat or F/Ns. Then return to step c) regarding the next item on your list. And so on until all items on the list have F/Ned.

10. This is the last one. Picks up any remaining yet undetected charge of oneself, BTs, Clusters, other people or bodyless thetans. a) Assess 6 rudiments with the prefix: "Regarding Solo 3, is there (rud)?" - Read. - b) Check for ownership of charge: "Whose charge is that? BT? Cluster? Another´s? My own?" - c) Run what reads the biggest, to F/N. Then back to a) and re-assess. Repeat steps a) to c) as often as it takes to F/N all ruds with regard to Solo 3. And then you know that you are through. No question.

EXCALIBUR Excalibur on the one hand is a method by which one may audit any type of entity at any point on the bridge. This is Excalibur as an auditing procedure. It is fully described in the appendix to the "Pied Pipers" (LK3). On the other hand, Excalibur is a solo level in its own right. It ties in with the sort of awareness and havingness a person has after the completion of Solo 3. As such it is described in this text. History Excalibur was developed by Bill Robertson in 1985 as a result of his attempt to make sense out of the NOTs materials. He wanted to co-audit NOTs. He found the materials to be rather superficial. They didn´t seem to be an extension of the purposes Ron had in mind when he devised OT 3. Robertson had done OT 3 "on the ship" with Ron Hubbard close by. So he put everything together he knew of OT 3, added PTS/SP tech and the power processes, combined this with some NOTs principles, and out came "SuperNOTs" - which later came to be called "Excalibur". The materials generally referred to as "Captain Bill´s Excalibur" mainly consist of the so-called "Tech Briefings", specifically number 4, 7 and 8. They are taped lectures given at a briefing in Frankfurt in 1985. Bill broke the news concerning his latest discoveries to a group of about a dozen of his closer associates. The lectures reflect Bill´s excitement and contain a lot of personal information about his recent sessions in order to illustrate the novel phenomena he had found. They don´t make the tech of Excalibur very clear, though (partly because at that time, it wasn´t clear anyway). Consequently, over the ten years that have elapsed since, Excalibur became a rather superficial imitation of what it was in its formative stages. So in a way, Bill´s Excalibur suffered the same fate as Ron´s OT 3: once released to the general public and due to insufficient instruction and supervision, it went down the drain. What´s Being Audited Excalibur deals with BTs and Clusters wearing a "special hat". They (or rather the thetan they are an energy residue of) "agreed" to wear this hat under the extreme duress of an implant. "Better be that (whatever they identified with) than be nothing", they thought.

The solo auditor is closely identified with these specialized BTs and Clusters. In contrast to the "usual OT 3 fluff" one is liable to pick up as one comes down to Earth to take one´s incarnation here, the Excalibur BTs and Clusters were glued to the thetan for eons. They are running his life. He is in their valence. For this reason they don´t come up on routine Solo 3. It´s on Excalibur where you encounter the SP BTs that are mentioned in the OT 3 pack but rarely found on routine Solo 3. Excalibur is not a "fits all sizes"-level like Solo 1-3. It´s tailor-made for each individual solo auditor. It focuses on the specific stops and inhibitions the solo auditor may encounter in running his life, attaining his purposes, fulfilling his mission, accomplishing his ideal scene. Therefore it starts with an interview. This is followed by an audited section since the technique of Excalibur is a lot more demanding than any previous solo level. It takes getting used to. The Interview In the interview the solo auditor is given the chance to re-evaluate his life in terms of the Solo 3 experience. He doesn´t look at himself any more as the onelifetime obsessed earthling who once walked in from the street to get some therapy, no, he has grown in size and usually feels responsible for larger affairs than just his own private life. He has touched dimensions beyond the scope of Earth life. His level of ARC/KRC is a lot higher than ever before. He may not have actually talked or listened to his BTs and Clusters yet. Perhaps most of his auditing was done on the meter without any live communication from his "auditees". He may not even believe the whole story of OT 3 to be true. He doesn´t have to! But nevertheless, what has become real to him without question is the fact that there is charge on the subject, that the charge is not his, and that the whole phenomenon cannot be explained away by saying "I´m only imagining this and that´s why it reads on the meter." The Excalibur interview is no repetition of the rather broad and general Life Repair interview at the bottom of the bridge. It´s more elevated than that. It is the attempt to define the auditee as a player of a self-chosen game within a larger and more general games context. And although he may not be able to define his game in full yet, he sure knows what situations in life do not correspond to the ideal scene he imagines for himself. They simply "feel wrong". So at least he knows what his game is not. The interview is built around questions like: "How are you doing in life? What senior goal do you pursue? What ideal scene are you trying to attain?

How is this reflected on each of your 8 dynamics? How do you get on with it? What works, what doesn´t work? What is fun, what isn´t? Major obstacles? Personal inhibitions you keep bumping into? Regarding your game, who do you consider friends? Who do you consider enemies?" Freely 2WC these questions until the auditee sees his various life situations clearly and unequivocally in front of him. In general, on each question, work towards a clearly defined Itsa with large reads. On the last two (friends/enemies), get individuals or groups, have them named. Interview Analysis And Evaluation The reading statements of the interview are grouped according to subject. Their reads are added up to get the total TAA per subject. As an example, let´s say that four subjects emerge: there is charge on cats, dogs, pears and stovepipes. As a general rule you´ll find that the many reading statements in the interview boil down to no more than three or four subjects. In Excalibur terminology these are called "stacks" (because Robertson picked up Ron´s statement from the NOTs pack that "each case is stacked differently"). Which means (following the example above) that there are four situations in the auditee´s life, four departures from his ideal scene. To do a proper data evaluation, the auditor in his role as C/S needs a bit of cleverness, courage, and human understanding. Luckily he cannot go far wrong as long as he stays in comm with his auditee. When he is doubtful about his analysis he can always get some more data or the auditee´s opinion by doing another brief interview. To carry on with our example: The auditee mentioned cats five times with a TAA amounting to 1.5, he mentioned dogs seven times with a TAA of 0.9, pears have 1.8 TAA, stovepipes 0.4 TAA. Is pears the top stack then, with a TAA of 1.8? Or do cats and dogs combine to "pets", adding up to 2.4 TAA and therefore forming stack 1? When in doubt, ask the auditee! Finding The Stack Wording Now let´s say the auditee was given a brief follow-up interview on the matter of cats and dogs and said it all came down to pets. He has always had pets, not only cats and dogs but canary birds, rabbits, and guinea pigs. But he was never successful with respect to this area of his life. Solo 3 didn´t help to

change this. Actually, this is why he wanted auditing in the first place: problems with pets. It got touched on many times before but was never fully handled. "Pets" is the problem. A big GPM: he wanted to make it go right and couldn´t. This has the most charge, this is stack 1. The theory of Excalibur has it that the auditee (or any person, for that matter) is identified with all sorts of entities, some of which may be OT 3-type BTs and Clusters whereas others were created at other times on the track. "Being identified" means: one doesn´t notice. One has become one with these entities. Same viewpoint. No distance. All viewpoints have collapsed into one viewpoint. To make a thetan the boss again, his own viewpoint must be peeled out from this blend of viewpoints. The stack wording reflects this blend. Therefore, finding the stack wording is the crucial operation in Excalibur. The success of the whole action depends on it. Finding the stack wording is done in session with an auditor. The auditing tool is L&N. The auditing question is: "Regarding the situation you described with regard to pets, who or what would live in such a situation?" With this the auditee is asked to define his games role, his hat, regarding a specifically troublesome area of his life. He is asked to take a distance and look at himself. It may take quite a while before he comes up with a final answer! You can coax him along by paraphrasing the question. For example: "Supposing your life was a novel, what would be the right name for the role of the leading character?" Or any other variation to keep him going. It may take an hour before the auditee comes up with the desired BD/VGIs/FN item. On the way there he will mentally touch all the entities, BTs, Clusters and valences that come to play in this particular, aberrated area of his life. As he touches them (unknowingly!) he´ll get their particular aspect of the affair and each time will voice a tentative wording. Indicate charge as he goes along to keep him oriented. Don´t sit like a log with a frozen layer of TR-0 on your face. Be active, be part of the process! It is a spiralling motion: the auditee gets in comm with all associated entities, waking them up as it were, mentioning tentative wordings, slowly spiralling

down to the central wording - and then there is this grin on his face, big read, he giggles and says: "Well, I feel like a miniature lion tamer!" BD, F/N. With regard to the area of pets, he feels like "a miniature lion tamer". That´s his stack wording. Often the wording comes in two parts. The auditee may start out saying: "Well, in a funny way I feel like a lion tamer!" LF on the meter. "This reads well," says the auditor, "perhaps you could qualify this a little? What sort of a lion tamer?" So the auditee keeps looking for another little while, and up comes the complete wording. Technically defined, the Excalibur stack wording is formulated as a beingness, a role, a hat, an identity. It is not formulated in any other way. (For the experts: I´m aware that Robertson didn´t do it this way. Which is the reason for many failed cases. It took me five years of research to arrive at the procedure described here. It works.) Grooving-In Sessions After the stack wording has been found, you take a brief break as the auditee may have had quite a win on finding it. Then you continue the session with the standard starting question: "Anyone connected with `minituature lion tamer´?" - Read. - Locate. Get the direction and the distance. - Read. - "BT? Cluster? Some other entity? A thetan?" - Identify and indicate with good TR-2. - Then follow the Excalibur procedure as described in LK3, appendix: "What´s your hat? What do you call yourself?" And so on. (The basic tools used most frequently on Excalibur are repetitive recall and narrative style.) This is done until the auditee gets the hang of it and takes over from you as the auditor. Now that he feels certain on the procedure, the auditee becomes the solo auditor once again. This may take anything between 5 and 15 hours of audited Excalibur. Usually I phase people over on a gradient: first auditing them across the meter shield, then sitting side by side with the auditee watching the meter, then the auditee auditing solo with me standing by, then him solo by himself. Up to now (on his Solo Practical and Solo 1-3), the solo auditor has dealt with fairly harmless situations or with routine operations. Now he gets vivid pictures combined with a full set of emotions, sensations and somatics turning on. And not only will those BTs and Clusters start talking to him, they are even out to control him and do him in! And some, as it turns out, aren´t even entities but real thetans! Quite horrifying, really.

This certainly takes getting used to, both in terms of experience as well as technical skill. Takes shrewd thinking, too. Sometimes you have to actually outwit these guys! You definitely can´t rely on some procedure to do the job "for" you. In the course of Excalibur, you´ll find yourself growing. Your enemies will become bigger. But you will become bigger, too! And this is important: because you cannot audit a being that makes you feel small. Out of this the game of "out-bigging" derives. Before starting the process, you must make yourself bigger than the terminal. Make your space bigger than his space, look at him "from above", if need be, and fill his space with admiration, no matter how awesome he seems to appear to you. You can win this game because he works from a fixed consideration whereas you, the auditor, don´t. The odd thing about Excalibur is this: it gets people in touch with space ships and galactic politics. It always does, whether C/S or solo auditor believe in it or not. In this way Excalibur confirms OT 3. It isn´t all "Ron´s case", as some said (mainly the disappointed ones). It´s really like he said! Fact. Auditing Procedure First some theory: An entity is a double-sided ridge. It was formed by another some time in the past. You have put enough of your attention on it to become aware of it, yet not enough to as-is it. So it stays with you. The ridge has now two owners: the originator and you. (This is the 7th dynamic aspect of it. There is an 8th dynamic aspect as well, see LK3/ch. 1.1). The Excalibur auditing procedure breaks down to two parts: first the solo auditor handles his non-confront on the entity by finding out what it did to him whilst it was with him (questions 1-5). Then - with all ruds between auditor and "auditee" in - the moment of creation of that entity is addressed (questions 6-9). If need be, the history of the ridge has to be audited from late to early: who used it and for what purpose between the time it got together with the solo auditor and the time it was created? How was it used and mis-used? Only after clearing this chain of incidents will it be possible to get the final answer to "How did you become that?" The general viewpoint one ought to take regarding BTs and Clusters is that they, much as they act like SPs, are really just very PTS. They went into

agreement with SPs at a moment when they were at the point of "being made nothing of". (Remember that command on the PTS rundown?) They had the choice between either being annihilated as thetans or identifying with one of the valences suggested during the 36-day implant. They did the latter. They became stuck in an enforced viewpoint. So they are out to help - even if in an aberrated fashion. They are basically good. Bear that in mind when you audit them. Be patient. When in session you audit the entity in front of you by Excalibur procedure until it blows. This is the rock-bottom auditing principle of Excalibur. A blow may occur anytime - on any step of the procedure. Please note that on Excalibur it is safe to go through the 36 days in all detail. There is no danger of cross-restimulation like on Solo 3. In fact, at times you must take the entity through the 36 days. This is because the answer to "how did you become that?" requires finding the exact moment of identification with the viewpoint the entity is stuck in - and this may have occurred at some point during the 36 days! When the BT doesn´t blow but is interrupted or kept from communicating to you, you find out if some other entity is interfering. This entity is called a "holder". You audit the holder by the exact same Excalibur procedure until it blows or is interfered with by yet another holder. And so on. This is the way you find out about the core point of Excalibur: the BT "org board", the active and working interconnectedness of entities. When you have reached the top holder (the first one on this chain of entities to actually blow), you then audit your way down again to the entity you started out with. You audit the whole chain in reverse sequence, from top to bottom. This is usually very easy and effortless. It feels like charge was draining off like water from a bath tub after you pulled the plug. (For this reason this whole organized structure of BTs and Clusters was jokingly called a "plug" by Robertson.) As you go along auditing on Excalibur you´ll find more and more often that top holders turn out to be thetans. You go from a BT to a monitor BT and from there to a spaceship crew member, i.e. to a thetan. It always goes that way. Because as one´s awareness and havingness grows, one takes on bigger enemies.

No matter what you get, whether entity or thetan: use the Excalibur procedure from beginning to end. It´ll take you through. When you meet a very resistive entity or thetan, meaning someone who is definitely there but not willing to communicate, use power processes 4, 5 and 6 (LK3/appendix). Run each process as long as it produces change. The idea is to get down to power process 6, i.e. to the condition the entity is stuck in perennially, crack it, get a full dramatization and phase over to narrative style auditing. You can as-is ("blow") an entity - but not a thetan. A thetan you can only disconnect from after handling his aggressiveness. Ask him what hat he wears with regard to you, i.e. in what games condition he is with respect to you (first question of the procedure), take this wording up, run him through the Excalibur procedure and eventually find out how he became that. Because at one point he must have decided to be that, either on his own volition or by receiving an implant. Helping him to re-discover that decision takes him off this compulsive viewpoint. And as soon as he has recalled earlier, happier and more self-determined universes, he´ll be on his way. You have turned an enemy into a friend. On a very high plane of awareness (KRC, not ARC!), all thetans are basically friends. Except that the going got a bit rough here and there, and one forgot about this underlying friendship. Rules Of Thumb When an entity disappears from view, there are four explanations: One, he has moved to a different location in your space. Two, he has lost so much charge that he dived off (submerged). Three, he has disappeared into thin air. Not a good and strong blow but a gradual fading away. Four, another entity keeps him from communicating (a holder). When your "auditee" is an entity or a thetan, in other words a real terminal, use Excalibur Long Form. When you are dealing with stray theta quanta ("loose fluff"), use Excalibur Short Form. And after each session make sure to use loads of admiration on all

theta quanta left flying about. This ends cycle on Xenu´s game for them as well as for the thetans they are an extension of. They came into Xenu´s game to get admiration and they never got it. Now they are getting it, and so they may leave. When your terminal is definitely there but won´t respond and is not suppressed by a holder, use power processes 4 to 6. (The methods are explained in LK3/appendix.) Rudiments Don´t run ruds on Excalibur. They soften up the stack you are working on. Take the viewpoint that inside as well as outside a session you are dramatizing the stack you happen to be auditing on. So in case of no F/N or even a high TA at session start: don´t worry. Just look for BTs, Clusters or thetans associated with the stack wording. As soon as you have found one, the TA will come down. It was high because there was enough of your attention on him to ridge against him but not enough for you to be fully aware of him. This always works - provided the spacing of your sessions isn´t too far apart. You should audit minimum two sessions a week. If you don´t, life may throw some other stuff at you and that may break the particular dramatization of the stack you are working on and get some other, lesser stack restimulated. Should you really go out-ruds "on life", you will find that you simply cannot audit on your stack as your attention is pulled elsewhere. Well then, you have to take this up. But don´t handle it by ruds but by Excalibur technique: make a brief list of the real-life terminals you feel unhappy about, and audit the reading ones by Excalibur procedure: your boss, your husband or wife, your insurance salesman, your business partner. Find out about the games context you share with them. Ask them telepathically, on the meter: what hat do they wear with regard to you and your game? That´s the first question of the usual Excalibur procedure. And then go through the rest of the procedure. No person in your life is there by sheer accident. You drew them into your space by emanating the specific blend of vibrations you are sending out continuously: your own plus that of your "crew". They felt attracted to you by affinity resonance (7th dynamic) and, on a higher level, by comparable postulates (8th dynamic). Whilst on this level, the same technical approach unvaryingly applies. Not only concerning disincarnate BTs, Clusters and thetans you happen to be

connected with, but as well to the very real flesh-and-bones people in your social environment. It´s a telepathic connection in either case, naturally. Games Teams As a result of Excalibur you´ll find some of your friends, colleagues and acquaintances leaving, to be gradually replaced by other friends, colleagues and acquaintances. This is why: not one person in the universe is a single individual. Each thetan knowingly or unknowingly is the representative of some games team. The game of this particular universe was started some 25 quadrillion years ago. Not all players entered this universe right at the beginning. Many dropped in whilst the game was already going on. They all had something in mind doing here. They joined others with comparable purposes, or were sent by those outside this universe to see what went on inside it. In either case, thetans are representatives of games and teams. And you as a thetan will be surrounded by exactly the sort of people corresponding to the vibrations you put out. This works by the laws of affinity, reality and communication, as usual. In engineering terms one might say that it works by resonance. But you are not alone, you have a bank with you. The BTs and Clusters of your case represent certain thetans who in turn represent certain games teams. As long as you are in a state of identification with these entities, they are blended in with you and each other. This results in a common vibration. This vibration, by the laws of ARC, will attract people into your life: into your marriage, your office, your club. It is the manifestation of ancient games conditions you had with one set of people being dramatized today between you and a different set of people. (They may also be the identical people!). So look at the people surrounding you as representing games teams. Define their hats with relation to you (in session) when you have charge on them, and audit them telepathically. And even though you may not have audited each one of them, you will notice that the less desirable people around you leave you, to be replaced by other, more desirable people.

In the final stages of Excalibur you will find yourself mainly auditing your connections to thetans and their games. BT´s, Clusters and other entities will appear less and less. In auditing thetans telepathically you´ll find them to be "around you" or "with you" rather than "over there" (as you know it from BTs). Do use Excalibur procedure as usual, but use it on the games hat those thetans wear with regard to you. Don´t audit "them". Audit the function they represent. And don´t expect them to blow. Thetans don´t blow. They disconnect as soon as they have cognited on the error of their ways. They leave you alone - or indeed you would have to review your own ethics in the relationship. Excalibur changes your overall vibration. It makes you vibrate as yourself, not as "yourself plus entities". So what´s left in the end is you as yourself with the right people surrounding you who support your central purpose. And with you supporting theirs. C/Sing Excalibur Don´t do your Excalibur straight after Solo 3. Let some time go by. Allow yourself to settle in on the new level of awareness and havingness of Solo 3. Just fly your ruds occasionally. Learn to control your mental environment on this particular level of perception (of BTs and Clusters). Only go on when this gets boring and uneventful, and when you feel ready to explore new horizons. Or when your TA goes up and doesn´t come down and you feel you are up against an impenetrable wall. In either case it´s time for Excalibur. Have your C/S or auditor do your interview. After the interview has been analysed (as described) and the first stack on the case been isolated, you as the auditee are grooved in until you can go on by yourself. Go home and complete that stack auditing solo. The technical EP for each stack is: the stack wording F/Ns when the solo auditor calls it out. In our example: "Anyone connected with `miniature lion tamer´?" Nothing connected with it any more. F/N. To make dead sure about this EP, run 6 Ruds on the stack wording. Do make sure to assign correct ownership to each read. When the solo auditor feels certain about his EP, it is confirmed by another auditor (or the C/S) acting as examiner. He gives the solo auditor the starter

question. Nothing should happen, though. The F/N should appear just the same. However, two intentions are stronger than one and it is not unusal for some more entities to be found. This doesn´t invalidate the F/N of the solo auditor. It just means that a deeper layer of the case has been reached. The solo auditor handles this solo to EP, and the EP check is repeated. And so on, until it´s F/Ning on both counts: solo and duo. When the wording of a given stack has F/Ned, the solo auditor must come in to get another interview and a new case analysis. Although the first interview might have shown a sequence of four stacks, they are not simply worked off one after the other. This is because auditing the first stack may have touched on components of the other stacks, partly discharging them and therefore making them either unnecessary to look at or changing their sequence. It is perfectly alright and actually desirable to let some time pass between stacks so as to allow the thetan to settle in to his new case situation. So after F/Ning a stack, the solo auditor comes in for a new interview. One asks him what life feels like after the EP of his recent stack. Then one looks over the stacks one found in the original interview, and in 2WC with the auditee establishes their importance in the light of the latest data. The second stack is filtered out, and a wording is found. And then off home to audit it. (People aren´t good at finding their stack wordings solo. I have tried it. Doesn´t work. Too much identification. Takes a second terminal, i.e. another auditor.) Stack by stack the case is taken to pieces. Eventually life will be under control. The solo auditor will know his ideal scene and be certain that he can attain it. No further major departures from the ideal scene, no further Excalibur items, F/N. The final two C/S instructions on Excalibur are these: 1.

"Find out about your own involvement with Xenu´s game. Run your own Inc. II and Inc. I, or whatever earlier incident your involvement started with." (Both incidents to F/N, with full sound and colour, dramatic effects and postulates, please!) This conforms with the last C/S Ron suggested for OT 3 on the handwritten materials. After getting rid of all body thetans, one is

finally free to run one´s own Inc. II and I (with nobody left to disturb one). a) Run 6 ruds on each beingness found during Excalibur, i.e. on each stack wording. Assign correct ownership of charge on each read. (You should have actually done this after each stack, but sometimes this isn´t possible. So do it now if it wasn´t done before. If it was done before, go straight to b.) b) Now switch over to lock scanning your own track and find out how and when this beingness was created. This is the basic. Yours! It´s usually something you did, not something that was done to you. Switch over to narrative and find the reason for creating that beingness, i.e. get the postulate that created it. (Omit this step if you found this out already on the ruds.)

The EP of Excalibur Now, with all BTs and Clusters gone, with his own involvement in the two key incidents and Xenus game in general clarified, in short, with the R6-bank rendered powerless, the solo auditor may go off to live life and face its realities in an uncushioned way (with no thetan-bank in between). He has recognized entities and old telepathic games connections, and has dissolved them or disconnected from them. He is in control of his space on dynamics one, three, four, six and seven, so much so that new entities don´t even come close let alone have a chance to settle in. Ethical and administrative sanity in life set in as proven by stats and products. This is the ideal EP, needless to say. Unfortunately it doesn´t occur often as it´s watered down by body problems. Most people have body problems. Therefore, as his whole track entities and games conditions become less and less important, the solo auditor´s attention will be drawn to a different source of charge: the body and the entity managing it, the Genetic Entity. For this reason the solo auditor may not have enough free attention to run the two final C/S-instructions on Excalibur just given.Don´t worry, it will be done later. What´s up now, is obviously the GERD.

Possible Dangers of Excalibur One possible danger of Excalibur is that the solo auditor may get hung up in spaceship hunting or 7th dynamic goo. The more they fight this 7th dynamic goo they more they get sucked into it. Like you walked in the mud and your wellies were pulled off your feet. Leaves you helpless. This will happen invariably when the stack wordings aren´t correct, when the solo auditor has no stack wording to work from, or when he most adventurously decides to go off on a wild chase of his own. "Let´s go get those bastards!" He fancies himself to be fighting for a noble cause, but most likely he´s just in for the thrill, acting out some whole track "knight in white armour" valence. It may go as far as this: that a C/S will feel called upon to assist a struggling solo auditor by auditing that person´s case telepathically. I´m not in favour of this at all. It´s the role of the C/S to train his solo auditors so that they may handle their case solo. It´s their case, they are responsible for having it, they have to work their way out of it. So hat them and delegate to them, but don´t bypass them! The handling of space ship hunters and 7th dynamic do-gooders is as follows: call them in for an interview and have them word the situation they are dramatizing by such activities to BD/FN, then send them off to audit that stack solo. As long as Excalibur items can be found, Excalibur is the right tool to use. Excalibur doesn´t make one look much at the overt side of things. It is primarily concerned with motivators. It investigates what those nasty entities did to this pure innocent little thetan (the solo auditor). It does free the thetan of added entities, but it doesn´t ask what that thetan did to attract those entities in the first place. This leads up tp the "knight in white armour" syndrome. For entities to be able to latch on to a thetan he must have put something there for them to get a hold of, some sort of adhesive tape as it were. The general technical answer to this is of course: it´s his own Incident I particles! That´s what constitutes the adhesive tape for all later stuff to stick on to! Well spoken. So that´s the mistake he made: got involved with Xenu´s game and never got out again. But what´s the postulate behind that? Why did he join? (First postulate.) And what altering consideration kept him from being able to leave? (Second postulate.)

100

These aspects of the case are handled during the last two C/S instructions of Excalibur and on the Self-Exploration and Perfection Program (SEPP) following the GERD (see later sections).

One Xenu Each At some point during his Excalibur the solo auditor will tell the C/S that he found Xenu himself as the top holder of the "plug" he is working on, and what should he do now? Such statements have to be evaluated with some caution. Surely, Xenu is the mastermind behind the construction of this particular universe we happen to be sharing. He is as much present in it as he has poured his theta quanta into it (lots of them!). To the extent that one perceives these one will feel connected to Xenu "personally". And one is indeed! Because connection and interchange between thetans is done solely by means of theta quanta (see Factor 11). At least on the 7th dynamic. However, correct as the observation may be (that one is connected to Xenu via his theta quanta) it would be wrong to construe this to mean that "Xenu is after me personally". It´s like saying: "I´m connected to the World Bank via my credit card". Or: "In his recent letter the Minister of Finance has asked me to pay my taxes". Both statements are true, but then again they aren´t. I guess you know what I mean. The C/S must bear in mind that during Excalibur, the solo auditor is still up against his own yet unresolved Incident I or earlier Incident I, in other words the incident when he connected up with Xenu´s game by agreeing with Xenu´s games particles. Whether these were enforced on him or grabbed by him out of curiosity, is beside the point. One way or the other, a connection was made. That´s the point. So he is up against the glue he himself has put out to bind Xenu´s particles to himself. As long as these remain he will of course encounter Xenu as the top holder of his BTs. He has put him there himself eons ago, and he still does at present! How to resolve this situation practically? Don´t do anything unusual at all. Stick to your ordinary Excalibur routine. "So Xenu is your name? Ok, as Xenu, what do you want to attain? Prevent?"

101

Etc., etc. And should the terminal prove to be unresponsive, use power processes 4-6. Mind you, not everyone who claims to be Xenu, is in fact Xenu. It could be anyone, trying to make himself look more impressive. So do your usual routine, and all will be well. On Excalibur you are paddling about in a sea of theta quanta. Anybody who you ever have put attention on or who has put attention on you (below 2.0 on the tone scale), will come alive on this level and "haunt" you.

102

THE GE RUNDOWN (GERD) Let´s take a look at the solo auditor´s mental condition at the start of the GERD: after Solo 1-3 and Excalibur, all "old" entities are gone. The only components of the composite case left are the thetan and "his" GE. With no further influence from BTs and Clusters the somatic banks of the GE can now be addressed without any distraction. This is done on the GERD. Put in a nutshell, the GERD is something like Book One auditing on a higher level. It has been said before and I´d like to repeat it once again: the GE isn´t "just another entity". It is the vital intelligence of the body. It´s a decision-making unit in its own right. The word "genetic" doesn´t refer to one genes (DNA, hardware) but to the morphogenetic field and its survival programs (software) permeating and surrounding the body. "Genetic" is derived from a Latin word meaning "to bring forth". So the Genetic Entity is that agency in the body that brings forth life. The GE, Your Obedient Servant The GE, to remind you, will take orders from anyone. It doesn´t discriminate as to the legitimacy of an order as long as it comes from the top - no matter if the originator is an entity or the thetan himself, no matter if the order given is sane or insane. The GE is always going to try to oblige. For any information package she gets from "up top" she will try finding the right somatic. An "information package" would be a postulate in combination with a picture. The GE will obligingly attempt to "orchestrate" this information package by finding suitable somatics. Example: a man´s execution; his head is about to be chopped off. Postulate: "I´m a total loser". Anytime this thetan feels frustrated in a future life, he will unknowingly activate the postulate and re-create the picture of the incident. The mocked-up picture will directly press on the person´s neck area, producing a light sensation there. Yet that´s only one part of the story. The other part: the GE running his present body becomes also activated! The energy mass of the thetan´s picture resonates with the energy field of the GE (the usual ARC mechanism), thus triggering the GE´s endless somatic banks.

103

An engram containing the sort of somatic that suits the execution incident will be contacted. That somatic will be much more intense than the sensation produced by the picture mass that was mocked up by the thetan himself. He develops an acute and perhaps chronic somatic in the neck. The same mechanism would of course apply to entities. They can only work on the body via the GE (as long as the thetan is in an unconscious and uninspected agreement with them and lets them do so!). So it is not sufficient to get the thetan´s viewpoint on a certain incident and take it to F/N. One must also get the GE´s view of the matter to do a good and clean auditing job. The thetan´s views - and those of his entities - were taken into consideration right from the beginning of the bridge up to the end of Excalibur. Yet the thetan´s identification with the GE was never looked at! This identification is caused by non-confronting his overts against bodies and GEs all along his whole track. Now - finally! - it´s the GE´s turn. That she wasn´t taken into consideration earlier already, is one aspect of the ARC-break a GE may have with "her" thetan. That he didn´t always look after his body properly constitutes another aspect of the ARC break. And that earlier similar thetans did similar things earlier on, of course adds to the ARC break. It´s the "never trust a thetan" syndrome. End Phenomenon Of The GERD This situation of ARCXs between thetan and GE with subsequent engram dramatization, is addressed by the GERD. Its EP is based on two subproducts: Subproduct one: The thetan is aware of the GE and can audit her. A workable commline has been established. The engrams and implants of the GE´s bank are cleaned up through auditing (narrative style to erasure). Subproduct two: Through auditing the GE, the thetan recognizes how much he was in the grip of the GE and dramatized the below-zero part of the tone scale ("eat", "sex", and all that). He peels these valences off and yet again becomes "more himself". End phenomenon: A self-sufficient and independently operating GE that has been fully rehabilitated with regard to her hat of making the body survive optimally. A de-aberrated GE that permits her thetan to freely play his games,

104

knowing that he in turn will act responsibly and not let her down by playfully hurting the body. An efficient and loving team, co-operating successfully in terms of health, sex, and longevity (the GE´s hat), and in terms of large-scale games (the thetan´s hat). When this EP has been attained, auditing engrams on the meter becomes superfluous. Ordinarily a brief dialogue with the GE should be sufficient to remedy the situation, along the lines of: "What is it? Can you fix it? Till when?" And it gets done. I believe that these results were strived for in early dianetics when it was believed that the thetan had no bank and the only influence on him consisted of engram pictures from the somatic mind. Yet this EP could not be attained in those days as multitudes of entities were in the way. Now, with the entities gone, it can be attained. Prerequisites To The GERD It obviously makes no sense putting someone on the GERD who is still in a games condition with entities or his body. You want someone who is free of entities and takes care of his health. Coffee and cigarettes are drugs. Without a question. So is sugar (sweets, cakes, jams etc.). The auditee, after having done his Purification Rundown ten times over, is supposed to have gotten rid of all of his street and pharma drugs - yet at the same time he fills himself up with coffee, sugar and cigarettes! And his only form of "physical" exercise are computer games. What nonsense! So don´t fall for the "Purification Rundown myth". Look at your solo auditor as he lives now. Handling the somatics of such a person by auditing is fairly pointless unless you manage to get the auditee´s ethics in on his body. Of course, erasing some of the engrams his attention is on, will help to get him started on an upward swing - but as long as he doesn´t actually discipline himself to make this upward swing persist (better food, no drugs, plenty of exercises), more engrams are going to get restimulated. It´s like trying to audit a man whose foot is caught between the jaws of a pitbull terrier: as long as the dog doesn´t let go the pain won´t end, no matter how intensively one may audit the man. Auditing is also hopeless as long as the aberrative commands of entities or the thetan himself affect the GE. You audit a dozen engrams and the somatics

105

are still there! That´s because the postulates backing up the engrams haven´t been found yet. They keep triggering more engrams. So there is no point auditing engrams unless you go for the postulate in the incident! If you don´t, you might as well leave it. The postulates of thetans and entities act as permanent commands to the GE. The thetan is the boss. When he is aberrated he isn´t much of a boss because he dramatizes his own GPMs as well as those of acquired valences and entities. Unbeknownst to the thetan and due to his non-confront and identification, these postulates keep certain commands in place. It´s like the thetan was telling the GE: "Please produce a somatic that fits the bill!" And the GE most obligingly does so. (This, by the way, is the mechanism behind Service Facsimiles.) You have to get at the source, not work on the effect side. The source of engrams in restimulation is the thetan and his entities, and the postulates of both. People with lots of somatics will naturally need dianetics to start with (for example by means of Postulate Auditing). Yet this may not be sufficient to handle their somatics for good. They may have to go through the Solo 1-3 band to handle the entities contributing to their somatics, they may need Excalibur to get rid of SP entities - until finally they are ready to address the GE as such. And then, on the GERD, the as yet undetected engrams on the case can be dealt with. To get there may take some two hundred or three hundred hours all in all (duo and solo). Which somehow fits in with the sort of prognosis Ron did on some of the early tapes: "This case will take six hundred hours to clear." Sure thing. It does take a lot of work. Anyway: don´t get anyone started on the GERD who is busy fighting entities and keeps messing up his body! You´ll clock up loads of hours without a real result. The Thetan´s Responsibility That a thetan got entities at all is his own fault. Anything going wrong with the body is ultimately the thetan´s fault. Don´t blame it on the GE. The GE is only trying to orchestrate somatically what she perceives as coming from higher up. You might say she speaks to the thetan through her

106

engrams. It´s her way of acknowledging the thetan. When the thetan doesn´t listen, the engrams turn on worse. Example: thetan angry, frustrated, overworked, stressed. Lots of tension affecting the GE and thereby the body. The GE cannot win. All her energy supplies are being drained empty. And he never stops, keeps fighting, keeps being frustrated and stressed. Result: stomach somatic. Why the stomach? Because that´s the power point of the GE. It´s the third chakra: physical power. The GE is organized as 7 chakras (energy node points), and she will "talk through them" to the thetan. (The 7th chakra is above the head indicating thetan exterior, witness certain Buddha statues.) Depending on the situation at hand, any chakra that´s irritated will create ridges or dispersals where there should be flows. This in turn affects the organs in the vicinity of the chakra. A headache equals too much thinking equals 6th chakra. Thyroid hyperactivity means something wrong with communication, that´s the 5th chakra. Emotional trouble, losses etc. affect the heart, that´s the 4th chakra (often resulting in breast cancer). The stomach chakra is the central command post (power through food), that´s chakra number three. Sexual power: 2nd chakra. Basic survival functions during comatose state before body death: first chakra. Chakras 2 and 3 are the most powerful as body maintainance and procreation are the major drives of the GE. One´s Personal Org Board To summarize: in one´s personal org board the command line runs thetan/entities - GE - body. As a general rule the body is ill because the GE has engrams in restimulation. Illness isn´t caused on a direct line from thetan to body since the GE is in between. The thetan works on the GE, so do his entities. The GE works on the body. The body is what it´s all taken out on. Outside factors such as infection, radiation, poison, pollution, bad food and water do play a role, of course. Ilnesses stemming from that wouldn´t usually be called psychosomatic because "it´s the environment doing it". However, on closer inspection it does have to do with he thetan, too, in this case with his lack of awareness of what his GE is going through and his subsequent lack of GE control. Or with his agreements with the mest universe.

107

If the thetan had good control he would tell his GE not to worry, and so damage due to outside factors could be kept within limits. This may sound utopic and like some advanced paranormal ability but in fact everybody does it. If they didn´t, everybody would get ill at the same time whenever a flu is about. And feats like walking through fire wouldn´t be possible. People often mix up body and GE. They say things like: "But I do sports and exercises regularly! And I´m on a macrobiotic diet! And I only drink imported spring water straight from Nepal." Fair enough. But that´s not looking after the GE, that´s looking after the body! The body is the hardware, the GE the software, you see? Provided you are in good communication with your GE, you should be able to survive well on drinking London council water, eating hamburgers, and having no more exercise than taking your dog for a walk. Because ultimately, one survives through tapping the cosmic ether streams (prana, chi) rather than by eating food. As long as the thetan doesn´t cut his GE off from this endless power supply, his body is bound to live forever. (Sounds really good, but I´m still waiting for someone to demonstrate it.) It is amply demonstrated in hypnosis that the GE can be made to dramatize all sorts of physical phenomena at the hypnotist´s behest. As soon as the thetan has handed his authority over to the hypnotist, the GE is under the hypnotist´s control. Now if it is true that thetans can control GEs it follows that the GE be better controlled by the proper owner of that body instead of another, and that this owner ought to build up the necessary ARC/KRC to do so. The Steps Of The GERD The steps of the GERD are briefly: 1.

Do an interview on the solo auditor´s relationship with his GE and body.

Handle the out-rud situation between thetan and GE (and vice versa).

Handle all engrams in restimulation.

Run out all the postulates accrued so far by repeater technique.

Run the Clearing Course implants from the viewpoint of the GE.

Run out your own involvement with bodies, GEs and the whole Yatruscan game.

108

Step two and three may have to be done in reverse sequence, depending on the situation. Too much attention on the body due to unwanted sensations and pains: do step three before step two (engrams before ruds). Reversely, when the body feels alright but it isn´t quite the ideal scene yet: do step two and then three (first ruds, then engrams). The following sections expand on these steps with added hints and suggestions. One: The Interview One way of bridging over into the GERD from Excalibur may be by finding a stack wording for the non-optimum situation the auditee sees himself in with regard to his body. This could be considered a central situation, a stack. Have him find a wording for the beingness he is dramatizing in this particular games condition with his body. After solo-auditing all entities connected with this situation he will eventually find himself talking directly to the GE. So you do an interview and analyze it as usual. Yet this time the questions don´t focus on the thetan as a player of thetan games but on him as a team-mate of his GE. Ask the auditee what he would imagine the ideal scene of the body to be, find out how far the existing scene is off the mark. Get him to tell you what his life is like on the 2nd and 5th dynamic (sex, family, children, health, body condition). Ask specifically: "Do you feel you have the right body at all? Too large, too small, wrong sex?" As well 2WC the GE-related parts of the tone scale from 0.0. to -8.0, i.e. from "being a body" at death to "hiding". Does this pertain to the auditee´s life? You will get plenty of reads. (For further notes on the tone scale see appendix.) The answers you are getting may sound like the thetan was talking, but in fact it will be the GE talking "through" the thetan. The GE will talk through the thetan as long as the thetan is identified with it. Same mechanism as earlier on, on Excalibur, regarding the relationship between thetan and entities. To say: "I´m hungry" is a GE-statement, really. A thetan isn´t hungry! It´s the GE talking through the thetan. The thetan usually doesn´t notice this, such is his degree of identification. The correct statement, taking all hats on the org board into consideration, would be: "My GE is reporting that this body needs feeding."

109

The trouble with the thetan/GE relationship is that you are talking to two overlapping energy fields both of which are wrapped around the body. The GE is the "inner lining" as it were, the thetan the "outer lining". He may of course stop being the outer lining, for example when he is exterior, but the normal working relationship is: two fields wrapping up the body. In session the auditee (or solo auditor) may mistake the GE´s track for his own. He may think that he is giving you his own answers or pictures when in fact he is voicing those of the GE. He will become convinced that he still has a huge dianetic case complete with atrocious sex overts and motivators, and that this had been left untapped all along the bridge. Just when he thought he was approaching case completion! To avoid confusion and frustration it is therefore vital to discriminate correctly between the authorship of the pictures coming in. It always is. But here, on the GERD, it´s perhaps more difficult than before, because the images don´t seem to come from out there, like in the case of entities, but from within! Two: Rudiments Whether one starts the GERD with ruds or engrams, in either case one would have to create a comm line to the GE as the first thing. One may proceed as follows (referring to an auditor grooving his auditee in): 2a. Feel the space inside and around your body. Where would you locate the GE?" (Some people will immediately focus on the solar plexus, others will have the impression of being wrapped up in an energy field, others again will experience the GE as hundreds of busy little dwarves and gnomes working away on their different tasks, with one of them, usually located around the navel area, being their representative. In either case it feels entirely different from the Xenu-type entities one got used to on Excalibur. 2b. Some further help to get in touch with the GE: Have the auditee recall a pleasure moment in sports, sex, or any other physical activity. At such times a thetan is usually exterior and, as an auditee, can recall viewing his body from outside. Then run this command bracket repetitively until the auditee feels confident about his perception: a. "From where could you communicate to your GE?" - b. "From where could your GE communicate to you?" (Should end with an F/N.)

110

2c. Have the auditee concentrate on the space of the GE and address the GE Have him run this bracket repetitively: a. "Look at me, who am I?" - The GE answers; usually it´s something not very complementary (like: "You are the guy who wrecks this body by drinking and smoking"). - b. So you say: "O.k., I´m Joe, the thetan operating this body. Is it alright that I audit you?" Run until the GE has blown off enough steam (due to pentup anger) and agrees to be audited. 2d. 2WC between auditee and GE. Have the GE establish what she feels responsible for and what the thetan should be responsible for. In short, have her define the hat of each. Get her to state the ideal state of cooperation from her viewpoint. Big read with perhaps an F/N even. 2e. The auditee asks his GE: a. "What have I done to you?" - b. "What have you done to me?" - Repeat a and b to flat or F/N. This handles for the GE motivators it has received from the thetan and overts it paid back to him. For example the GE may have made the body fall ill in order to stop the thetan´s high-risk games! This doesn´t seem to conform with the theory of "the thetan is the boss", yet from the auditee´s subjective viewpoint - and as long as there is a games condition between him and the GE - it does look as if the GE had committed overts against him. 2f. Optional: when not too many overts spoil the scene you may invite the auditee to ask his GE if the scene between the two ever actually matched the ideal, and if so, have her rehabilitate it and find out what went wrong. What accident, injury, poisoning etc. occurred that keyed engrams in and put the two on a less optimum course? Either here or on the next step, solo-auditing becomes possible. From 2a through 2e it takes an auditor to monitor the process, but as from step 2f communication and willingness have been established sufficiently to continue solo. 2g. You can now run rudiments on the GE. Addressing the GE, the solo auditor asks: "Do you have a (rud) with me?" They usually do, due to having been mishandled from before birth. This may go back E/S a long way (or it´s ruds of long duration) having to do with thetans in general mistreating GEs in general. Do make sure to filter the key postulates out of the basic on your rud chain! Because repeating those postulates on step 4 will get you down to

111

the really gory and nasty stuff. (This is how the data on Yatrus were found out, by the way.) Three: Engrams This is where you handle engrams. Always get the postulate in the incident and put it on your list for later use! What follows now isn´t a strict sequence of C/S instructions but rather a loose set of suggestions. 3a. In case of an immediate painful somatic, perhaps accompanied by a high TA, one may ask the famous Book One question: "What engram would resolve this case?" On the level of awareness the auditee has now, this actually works like magic. Try it also on chronic somatics. 3b. In case of a rather complex pattern of somatics one might ask: "What traumatic situation in the life of an organism would create that sort of feeling?" Take any utterance, any sensation or somatic, any "weird idea" occurring instantly after the question, as an answer. So don´t split it up into AESPs! Quite often it´s a single incident in full-blown restimulation that creates the whole pattern. 3c. Equally you might ask: "How many engrams are in restimulation on this (somatic)?" - Catch the figure that flashes through your mind (for example "25"), catch the read on the meter, acknowledge by indicating to the GE: "Regarding this somatic, 25 engrams are in restimulation!" Then: "Which one is the worst and ought to be run now?" - Get the picture, run it out by narrative style. Run it to erasure and F/N and find the postulate. Don´t go earlier similar! That will surely get you into trouble. One set of somatics, one incident accounting for it, erasure. Somatic doesn´t fully disappear? Same procedure again: "How many engrams in restimulation now?" And carry on as above. This way you´ll always catch top priority items. Until the somatic is gone and the GE feels confident that this area is under control. The GE has to feel confident! Not just the thetan. This is a GE-Rundown. You are the boss, up on the 15th floor. They are the work crew on ground level. The company won´t run just because you personally, as the boss, feel confident! Unless they feel confident, too, nothing in the shop will move.

112

"They" (the GE) have to be willing and trusting in order to work reliably. Which requires understanding and competence from the side of the boss (you). Emotional understanding, clear orders. Positive leadership. And no hidden command lines either in the form of old standing orders (counter-postulates) or 3rd party coming from entities. To get a good and clean erasure, always run all available viewpoints (LK2/p. 58). That´s a general rule. On the GERD you must specifically address the body parts that were affected by the accident or injury. That´s where the impact was received and recorded, that´s the actual engram. Although it happened way in the past, to a different body (not even your own), it feels like the impact was still sitting right there at the same spot in your own body. (That´s why some new age type healers believe that pictures are stored "in the muscles".) You must address the actual cells that received the impact, no matter if you are working on a this-life incident or a past-life incident. This way you get the GE talking. It talks through somatics, mind you! The GE is likely to respond not with pictures but with the somatic strip turning on (see DMSMH). So when you aren´t getting any somatics, you are probably running too broad and shallow. You must focus your attention on the actual cells to break through to an engram. To audit chronic somatics you may have to study anatomical and physiological charts so as to understand the optimum functioning of the system. Only then - by "inner viewing" - may you be able to assess where things go wrong and why. You can audit as far down as the level of viruses. It has been done. When you are through an engram (a true engram, as above) and have reduced its charge, don´t ask for "postulate?", although this is what you are looking for. The GE doesn´t respond well to this question. "Postulate" seems a word more fit for the thetan. Better ask: "What was the lesson learnt?" or some such thing. You´ll get answers like: "Heat means burns", or: "Great heights mean death", etc. These are the typical survival lessons learnt by the GE. Although their future application is meant to preserve life, it only results in the famous A=A=A. Everything in the present becomes identified with everything in the past.

113

As the thetan feels stopped by his body malfunctioning, he feels misunderstood and counter-acted by the GE, and vice versa. So GE and thetan are at loggerheads with each other. This is dramatized as psychosomatics. Occasionally you may bump into heavy GE implants with the GE refusing to confront them. Mind you, these are implants on the GE proper, not on the thetan/GE/body composite! As in all cases of resistiveness and unresponsiveness, power processes 4 to 6 (done on the GE) will help. Four: Repeater Tech on Postulates This is the standard Postulate Auditing step after extracting the postulate from an incident. It´s run by repeater to as-isness. Applied to the GERD this means that you run all the postulates you have found and put on your list by repeater technique. Handle each incident that comes up to erasure. Carry on this way until the postulate itself F/Ns (un-creation, as-isness). Five: The C.C. Again To complete the GERD the solo auditor runs through the C.C. implant once again, but this time from the viewpoint of the GE! Remember, she was there, too, when it happened. Run each single C.C. implant command to F/N (which is very different from what one did on Solo 2!). You will get the actual story of the C.C. as described in the "Pied Pipers" (LK3/ch. 4.3). Six: Yatrus Connections 6a. 6 ruds "on Yatrus", check ownership as needed. Go through all ruds repeatedly until each one F/Ns on call. 6b. Straight recall: "To what extent was I involved with Yatrus´ games and if so, how come I became involved?" Run the incident to F/N, extract the postulate! The EP, to remind you: thetan exterior to the GE. He can operate independently of the body, knowing the body to be in good hands. The GE in turn feels well looked after by her considerate boss, the thetan.

114

Running The GERD On E.T.s. Extraterrestrials aren´t quite as well-off and capable as the movies have them. Often they are mere biological robots. If sentient, they actually suffer from their condition. In particular lizard people, much as they need terrestrial GEs to feed on, aren´t particularly happy about that fact - them having been humans a while back, and turned into mutants. When you get an alien entity (with a thetan running it) desirous of changing its biological status, you can help by either auditing him on the GERD or educating him how to do it, or both. This desire for change usually sets in after you have handled the thetan´s hostile intent, usually through Excalibur procedure. Their main trouble is finding a commline to their own GE. Usually some "soft implanting" was done to make their GEs inaccessible to them. By "soft implanting" I mean the sort of indoctrination one gets from watching world news or science features on TV and believing it. Makes you go soft in the head. That´s the sort of treatment they used to get at the time their GEs were programmed. So this is what you do: 1.

Have them find a commline to their GE by whatever means. Use basic tools and be inventive. Have them establish a trusting relationship to their GE. (Goes a lot faster than with Earth dwelling thetans as those up there have no R6 bank.)

Have them find out from their GE what the original design for their type of body was and what ideal scene it was programmed to maintain.

Find major departures from that ideal scene and trace them to their point of origin. Take the biggest reading one first, as usual. The source for the mutation is not a DNA change but somebody´s postulate and intention that this mutation should occur. First thought, then function, then structure, as usual. (The DNA is structure.) Find out who was behind that change, enforcing it. Get the beginning of the incident, narrative style, repeatedly through to postulate and erasure. The usual procedure.

The GE knows! It has recorded it all. (Rough seas ahead: you may run into GE implants here.)

115

After auditing one of the aliens, say the space ship commander, to a win, they will be eager to get training and make this tech widely available. Training occurs by downloading concepts. Those guys out there are really fast on the telepathic pick-up. The moment you have mocked up the concept of how to do something it goes swoosh! and they have it. (I once stayed in touch with a lizard ship for some weeks checking up on their progress, and they did fine. This progress was also noticed by other solo auditors. See appendix J.) High TA On the GERD, a high TA at session start usually means "engram in restimulation". You may have handled something to F/N one day, yet the next day your TA is high: the next item in line has boiled up overnight. Just find out: "What engram is in restimulation now?" and audit to erasure. After the end of the GERD, when thetan and GE are in smooth co-operation, a high TA may not be caused by an old engram in restimulation but by the GE attempting to shield the body against evil influences from the outside (spaceships beaming down information via microwave, general radiation, hostile intentions, telepathic attacks, etc.). Usually the GE is more aware of such factors than the thetan. This is because the thetan tends to focus his attention on the game at hand, at the exclusion of a great part of his sense perceptions, whereas the ever-watchful GE keeps her attention span wide and sweeping. The GE´s attempts to defend her home (the body) drive the TA up - as long as the thetan hasn´t noticed. Yet as soon as the boss has noticed that the red lights of his early warning system are flashing and takes action (first on the meter, then in real life), the TA will go down. If this is not caught in time it may turn into psychosomatic complaints. When the GE sees no other way of getting through to the thetan, she will use somatics. Auditing Yatruscans Auditing Yatruscans is like trying to catch the soap whilst sitting in a bath: slippery stuff. When they come as flesh-and-blood auditees, one quite often wonders why they want auditing in the first place. Do they really desire any change? Are they willing to take responsibility in life and support the insights gained through auditing by discipline and rigour?

116

When one contacts Yatruscans telepathically it´s even worse. All one has is a thin comm line which they usually withdraw as soon as you come too close to the truth and they start feeling uncomfortable. They don´t really put up a fight. And they have absolutely no overt consciousness. Anything they do is sort of alright and sort of happens and one thing sort of leads to the next and everything is sort of vague, really, and does anything matter at all, except how one happens to feel from moment to moment? Telepathic contacts can be audited by Excalibur procedure concerning the hat that thetan wears. Usually Yatruscans are chatty, yet after a while you´ll realize that chatting is their way of not responding to your question! So the old rule applies: when a terminal is unresponsive, use power processes! This works alright as long as the comm line isn´t withdrawn - in which case you can´t do much but wait till the terminal re-appears at a later time. Simply pick up the action where you left off. Very inconsistent, very unpredictable. But there you go: that´s Yatruscans for you. Yatruscans as auditees, i.e. as flesh-and-blood people in front of you, perform not very differently from telepathic terminals. Either of them get TAA and F/Ns, and anytime you think that they ought to be having the cognition of a lifetime, they invalidate the whole action. Or they appear to have that sort of cognition, yet in their next session it is as if that cognition had never happened. Or out in life they behave like they never ever had had a session. Try this: 2WC "Do you actually have a problem?" Try to make them pinpoint a specific problem. Not a difficulty, not a misemotion, no, a real problem: an area of life where the intention of the thetan is outweighed by a counterintention, leading to inactivity. This presupposes a fighting mentality which most Yatruscans do not have. So when they actually come up with a real problem, you know you are getting someplace! Here is a question to test how seriously they take that particular problem: "What would happen if that problem was resolved? What ideal scene would suddenly be attainable? And would you actually go out of your way towards attaining it?" And then, when a real problem combined with an intention to solve it have been defined, it´s green lights all the way. Use Postulate Auditing.

117

This is a good one, too: 2WC: "Any time in your life when you were doing things just to find out far you could go with it, and for no other reason?" - Get some examples. If it reads well: "What would you call that sort of attitude?" Get a well-reading wording. And then Postulate Auditing. Supportive measures Keep an eye on the body: food, sleep, exercises, no drugs, etc. Goes without saying. In order to stay in touch with the GE and learn to feel and use its lambda forces, I can only recommend eastern exercises such as Aikido or Tai-chi. Both teach you to stay aware of your body energies at all times and use them harmoniously so as to ensure health and longevity. Thetans tend to run away in their mind, leaving the body behind. It´s like an engine with too many horsepowers shooting out of the bonnet and leaving the car behind in a heap. Aikido and Tai-Chi teach you how to expand as a thetan and yet stay in step with the body. Morehei Uyeshiba, the founder of Aikido in 1913, was a genius in that he found a fighting technique that exactly duplicates the Yatruscan principle of winning by not putting up a fight - except that he used this principle to create harmony between the contestants. No tricks involved, no treachery. The exact opposite to Yatruscan methods. Uyeshiba´s system is based on finding the optimum solution. "Aikido" means creating harmony (ai) between the all-pervading cosmic ether force (ki) and one´s own activities (do). It´s like TR-4 transposed into physical action. It´s a "both win"-system, not a "one wins, one loses"-system. It´s fighting Yatrus with his own principles but different intent. GERD, Possible Dangers In the course of the GERD one becomes very sensitive to the GE - not only one´s own, but the GE in general. One may tune in to the criss-cross chit-chat between GEs, no matter if they happen to run human, plant or animal bodies. One may become so susceptible to this that the GERD turns into a never-ending rundown! Anytime one sits down with the meter one finds oneself having picked up yet another, new and different commline to some close-by or faraway GE that unloads its somatics upon one. Quite uncomfortable, really! The reason for this is the same as that for an endless Excalibur: no decent program to work from. The solo auditor who only occasionally goes in session

118

without a proper C/S, "just to have a look around", will of course find all sorts of things he could possibly latch on to or has already latched on to - and there you go! Endless. Rather than being a tech problem, this is an ethics and admin problem. Obviously your personal organisation (consisting of thetan, GE and body) is wide open for unsolicited incoming communications. So if you cannot simply command your GE to stop accepting and opening any "mail" coming her way and concerning herself with its contents, and if you yourself, as a thetan, can´t help being overly curious - well then, word the beingness you are dramatizing to BD/FN and find out who or what is connected with it (Excalibur style). You may encounter some rather interesting terminals that way - not entities (that´s over since Excalibur) but GEs and thetans acting as GE-controllers. When you run out of terminals connected with you through that particular beingness - why then, fly ruds on it and see if that takes you down your own timetrack. Because after all, in order to have that composite beingness you must have mocked up the core of it yourself to start with. In the course of this one may encounter Yatrus face to face - or what one considers him to be. Have another look at the section "One Xenu Each" at the end of the chapter on Excalibur. It applies equally to Yatrus, except that Yatrus works through the GE and a thetan´s identification with it, whereas Xenu worked through theta quanta.

119

AUDITING MEST So far on this bridge we were dealing with a person´s 1st dynamic (before Clear), his 3rd and 4th dynamic (Solo 3 and Excalibur), and his 2nd and 5th dynamic (GERD). As auditing is a 7th dynamic activity in that it deals with various configurations of mental mest, this dynamic was considered all along, and gradually put in order. What´s missing on the list is the 6th and the 8th dynamic. The 8th will be sorted out with the SEPP. The 6th is what we´ll be taking up now, in this section. When I talk about auditing mest I mean addressing the theta quanta one has embedded in the mest universe since the beginning of one´s sojourn in it. I don´t mean as-ising the cup in front of you, I only mean as-ising that part of the cup that´s yours. There is no real rundown for this. It very much depends on the solo auditor´s interest and level of awareness whether he gets into mest auditing or doesn´t. Usually one´s progress towards higher levels of awareness and havingness is monitored by what the bank offers. One is actually "pulled up the bridge" as layers upon layers of charge peel off and offer themselves for inspection. One basically goes along taking opportunities. Not that one could do much about it anyway. After all one cannot audit against the bank! It´s like the bank was a magnet and one´s attention was iron nails getting irresistibly pulled towards that magnet. Most people move from one solo level to the next in a sliding way, phasing out of one and phasing into the next. (Takes good C/Sing to catch this whilst it´s happening so as to avoid overruns!) However, some enjoy actual rest points between solo levels where they can take the chance to investigate areas that seem promising and arouse their curiosity. So either one feels drawn towards auditing mest by one of those "bank magnets" at some point or the other, or one looks at mest as soon as such a rest point comes up. For most this happens at the tail end of Excalibur or after completion of the GERD. Do take the opportunity when it offers itself!

120

It feels like suddenly the mest universe in its totality was talking to one. Not as a gigantic generality called "physical universe", no, it´s the cups and saucers in front of you, the table you are sitting at, the walls of the room. Many people have experienced this as a result of prolonged objective processes on the lower bridge. Yet at the advanced level of awareness and havingness we are talking about here, this perception of mest doesn´t come as a sudden insight but as a prolonged experience, as an actual state of awareness and havingness. During it, communication and all mechanics of ARC and KRC are applicable. How to trigger this process off? Hard to say. It seems to come when a person is ready for it. It may not be a needed thing for everybody. To get it started you need two prerequisites: interest and a rest point between major actions on the bridge. Or you may do it after the SEPP when all bank magnets are gone and you are free to pick and choose your areas of investigation. Now supposing someone was at a rest point and really wanted to use his time talking to mest, finding out about the origins of mest, make mest quanta return to him and thereby lighten the density of things if only by the tiniest degree, well then, here is a possible C/S: 1.

Do a 2WC on each tone of the bottom end of the tone scale (-8 to -40) and find out relevant AESPs. They may appear to be your "own", but in fact may be your mest-embedded theta quanta talking through you.

Extract well-reading items, handle by Postulate Auditing.

When you get something going on this apppraoch it will show as an inflow. Let them flow inwards, to you, not outwards as in the case of an entity blowing. When you block that flow by unawareness, you TA will be stuck good and high. The TA goes up on your blocking the inflow of your own theta quanta wishing to be as-ised through you by "going" through you. Like you were the chimney of an open fire place and the sparks where getting sucked up below and thrown out at the top. They go free by going through the chimney. You try stopping that and you´ll be getting a lot of smoke: high TA. How to handle? Expand your TR-0 full scale and let them pass through. "Full scale" would include the table in front of you as well as the outer reaches

121

of the mest universe. Let your attention permeate these vast spaces. Contact your forgotten theta quanta. Call them back home. It´s a group process: "Each of you go to your own moment of creation, each of you recall their own creation postulate, and then return to static through me". Repeat to F/N. This may last for days. Once you get this going you may find your TA being up for some days because of your blocking the inflow through non-attention, and it coming down on this R-Factor the moment you are in session. As well out of session. Just give the R-Factor and let them all pass through you. (Use "Excalibur Short Form" in LK3/appx.)

122

AN ALL-PURPOSE TROUBLE-SHOOTER CHECKLIST Supposing you had a high TA and a sticky needle at session start or during a session (this is from Solo 3 upwards) and it doesn´t change through applying the processes you happen to be on, what would you do? I´d suggest you go through the following checklist: "What´s causing this high TA? A BT/a Cluster? Some other entity? Genetic Entity? Engram in restimulation? A thetan? Somebody protesting? An overrun? My own charge?" Handle what gets the needle moving. For each category of charge there is a slightly different approach. BTs, Clusters, entities: Find what it is, where it is, find the incident when they were formed, run narrative to erasure. If any difficulty in this direct approach, if any fine points need getting into: use Excalibur procedure. Thetans: Find the specific games hat they wear with respect to you (second question of Excalibur) and run Excalibur procedure to get them to the point when they agreed to wear that hat. When you´re encountering someone as light and easy as a curious thetan looking in from some strange part of the universe: find the protest that´s driving his TA up. It may be simply on your not having noticed him. When it´s down, fly six ruds: "Between you and me, is there (rud)?" and determine whose charge it is (yours or his). Now that his curiosity is satisfied, he will happily leave. GE: How many engrams in restimulation? Which one specifically? Own charge: Solo 2WC, get the needle moving, get the TA moving, detect what it is and handle with the usual basic tools. It´s bound to be some protest or O/R. "More than one terminal or incident in restimulation at the same time?" When you add this, the list is complete. That´s actually all that can go wrong in a session. In any session! Be it solo or duo. Behind the multitude of possible and impossible incidents there stands only one reason for charge: protest. ("GPM", "engram in restimulation" and "overrun" are subdivisions of protest). The sources of charge number only four: self, thetans, entities, the GE. (In theory it comes down to "self" since having a case is one´s own fault. In the practice of auditing knowing this doesn´t really help, because confronting the

123

totality of one´s case would require the havingness of a saint. It would require having already attained what one is only striving to attain.) There is is one specific subdivision to "own charge" that might drive the TA up (as covered in the section on auditing mest): it´s theta quanta wishing to return to one, the theta quanta one has parked oneself inside the mest universe in the course of the trillenia.

124

THE SELF-EXPLORATION AND PERFECTION PROGRAM (SEPP) Let´s review where the person, the solo auditor, stands at this point: he has come to understand his personal mission and the ups and downs along his timetrack, he has disconnected from BTs, Clusters, and entities in general, he has come to terms with his GE. He has called back his theta quanta embedded in the physical universe. He has put order into seven of his eight dynamics. But at himself he didn´t fully look yet. The fabric of postulates he has created himself with (as a thetan) has so far remained uninspected. Yet it is on this fabric that the whole case he has just cleaned up was stencilled! Without it, no foreign entity or valence would ever have had a chance to get a hold on one. So it´s the 8th dynamic that the solo auditor hasn´t taken into consideration yet. This is done on the SEPP. The goal of this program is to do away with beingnesses one postulated for oneself in the past. Some of these beingnesses may of course have been successful. Nevertheless, at present they may not be useful for attaining the ideal scene one is going for. They don´t serve a purpose any longer. The idea is to travel lightly: to remove all the old coats and uniforms from your wardrobe that you don´t actually need on your further journey. In a sense, all auditing is aiming to restore trust in self. The SEPP results in a final restoration of trust in oneself as the creator of oneself. You can face life without the need for protective devices, warning signals in form of somatics, serfac "blinkers" designed to precisely avoid problem situations, and prejudices which allow you to stop short of clear perception. You grow up strong and trusting in your abilities. (The absolute trust the auditor needs to engender relates to this. Trust, absolute love, honesty, safety.) Theory According to Axiom 25, the departure from the "co-existence of static" begins with a postulate. Thus an identity is created. This is the step from nothingness to beingness. There is no energy yet. Just pure postulated beingness.

125

To this primal beingness further beingnesses are added later (by postulate, of course). Some, because one was winning, others, because one was losing. The point is: one never as-ised them. They are the old coats in one´s wardrobe. All those added beingnesses are variations of the primal one and were postulated to support it. One wanted to be the ruler of the universe but somebody had to run the PR show and as nobody was around one did that oneself and became one´s own PR agent, and then something went wrong with the camera so one stepped in as a camera man, and then a cable broke so one briefly played the role of electrician. All of a sudden one had a number of added beingnesses to that of "ruler of the universe": PR man, camera man, electrician. And one was even good at it! One might easily have ended up spending several trillion years as an electrician, and one never quite found one´s way back to becoming the ruler of the universe. Mind you, we are not talking about the identification with valences or entities! We are talking about beingnesses mocked up by oneself for a good reason. For a good reason! Nothing to do with losses, GPMs, implants and such heavy stuff. One did it because it helped one to win! And after the situation had passed, the beingness stayed. Often one kept operating on the lowest rung of the ladder. (Xenu´s game made it even harder to find one´s way back up - which was the whole point of that game.) Purpose Of The SEPP At this stage of one´s evolvement (after Solo 3, Excalibur and the GERD), one´s state of being is usually this: one has more potential beingnesses than one may ever need. Some of them are shady and rather cumbersome, some bright and glorious - and most of them useless. Why "useless"? Because one tends to live through them instead of confronting life directly. Because they comfortably suggest pre-fabricated solutions and so narrow down one´s dimensions, one´s space and one´s expansion potential. Earlier on the bridge one couldn´t deal with this. Too many entities and valences in the way! Now is the time to finally look at oneself. On each run through the SEPP a beingness is identified, discharged, and either cancelled (if useless) or kept (to eventually end the cycle it was created for). Because they aren´t active one is not aware of them. No friction, no dissonances, no charge.

126

For this reason the first section of the SEPP serves to scout for such beingnesses. In the second section one audits and un-creates them. End Phenomenon No further beingness actively in operation or potentially in store than one wouldn´t actually need to fulfill one´s primal postulate as a thetan. Freedom to create and un-create any beingness as a temporary aid as one goes along. (See as well definition of "Cleared Theta Clear", Tech. Dict.) This freedom to reach out and look at things is the normal state of affairs after completion of the SEPP, by the way. One´s reach and withdraw is all freed up. No further bank magnets left to attract one compulsively. Prerequisites The prerequisites for the SEPP are verified in an interview. Those that haven´t been attained fully in one´s solo sessions should be audited duo (with an auditor), because quite often the solo auditor finds it difficult to look down his own track with the precision required here. Yet as soon as he sits down with another and is asked a question or two, it all comes to mind in rapid flashes. When these prerequisites are not in, the SEPP will not be successful. Here they are: 1. The solo auditor has investigated all beingness-items of Excalibur (stack wordings) as to when, how and why they were created by him, or how he contributed to or agreed with them. (This is done by a) 6 ruds on the beingness, and b) straight recall of the moment of posulating it.) 2. The solo auditor isn´t troubled by entities. He is definitely above that particular vibratory band of mental mest (7th dynamic). No games condition with BTs, Clusters or any other sort of created entity. 3. He has run his own Inc. I. To be more specific: he knows when and why he contacted Xenu, how he identified with his theta quanta, and has freed himself of them. (Ideal EP of Excalibur). When the solo auditor gives his account of this in the interview, it must F/N (and be narrated with full sound and colour!). If there is no F/N or if the action hasn´t been done yet, this is the C/S: "Regarding Xenu, does anyone have (rud)?" Fly six ruds until all six of them F/N. Sort out ownerships as usual. And then, straight recall: "What was your involvement with Inc. II? With Inc. I? And how did you get into Xenu´s game at all?" Each question is run narrative to F/N.

127

This C/S may be done solo, prior to the interview, but the F/N must be checked up on by the interviewer. The 6 ruds as well as the accounts of the incidents in question must F/N. 4. The solo auditor lives with his GE and body in peace and harmony. He doesn´t get involved in the type of games conditions expressed as "engrams in restimulation". Further, he has recognized his games connections with Yatrus and undone them. (EP of the GERD.) If this EP has not been attained, do this: "Regarding Yatrus, does anyone have (rud)?" Run six ruds to F/N, always assigning correct ownership to the charge. Then: "How did you get involved with the game of Yatrus?" Straight recall to F/N. Should this have been been done solo it needs checking on the meter as part of the prerequisites. 5. The solo auditor knows his primal intention as a thetan, his destination or vocation, and is certain that he is on his way to attain the ideal scene connected therewith. He is not any further in a low integrity condition with regard to his game. The wording of his primal intention F/Ns. If this prerequisite has not been attained already, and should the auditee on a straight question not recognize his primal games postulate, a special program would have to be worked out for him by the C/S (2WC, find an item, do Postulate Auditing or ruds regarding it - whatever suits the purpose). 6. Philosophical prerequisite: To be successful on the SEPP, the solo auditor must have an easy and matter-of-fact comprehension of philosophical basics such as Factors, Axioms, Dianetic Axioms, Logics, Admin Scale, Ethics Conditions, Code of Honor. Procedure You don´t need pictures on this rundown. It´s very fast and works by knowingness. Waiting for pictures to "prove the point" slows the process down. Follow your line of interest and intuition. This counts more than a read because usually the reads follow your intuition and confirm what you know rather than leading you to it. This rundown is very fast. Hard to do it duo, but should be done duo at least once for demonstration purposes.

128

F/Ns occur very often, not only at the end of answering a question but as well during an answer. By themselves they are not a sure sign of an EP. They need to be accompanied by the certainty that one has answered the question fully and satisfactorily. Zero: Before one begins the sequence of steps with Step A, an F/N with TA in range must show on the meter. No F/N: fly enough ruds to have a stable F/N. When one has interrupted the program in one session and resumes it in the next session, an F/N does not have to show at session start. One simply continues with the next step on the program. High TA at session start: don´t continue the program, don´t fly ruds. Find out what´s causing that high TA (see the All-Purpose Trouble-Shooter Checklist). Step A. Assessment: "In order to attain my primal intention as a thetan (fill in the wording found earlier), 1. is a furthering beingness available? 2. is an inhibiting beingness available?" -> Indicate charge. Step B. Question: "To what dynamic would that beingness relate the most?" -> Assessment of the 8 dynamics till it´s clear which one is the most charged (assessment by elimination) -> Indicate which one it is. Step C. Assessment: "Was this beingness postulated during the interaction with a thetan - an entity - the GE ? Was it postulated by myself solo?" -> Indicate what it is. Step D. Assessment of CDEINR-scale: "Is there curiosity with regard to realizing this beingness? A desire to realize it? Enforced realization? Inhibited realization? No realization intended? Refused realization?" -> Indicate biggest charge. Step E. Describe the beingness completely by summarizing what was found so far, for example: "It´s an inhibiting beingness, was created by myself solo, relates to the 4th dynamic, its realization is refused." Step F. Finally, the ten million dollar question: "What is it?" -> L&N, exact wording of the beingness to BD/VGIs/FN. Step G. Should a terminal have been mentioned on Step C (instead of "created by myself solo") and if this terminal is available to be spoken to, the

129

first thing to do is clean up his charge and disconnect from him (thetans: ruds; entities: Excal short form; GE: engrams). Only then can one turn to F-0 and work on one´s own causation of the matter. One may have to do step G right after C, if that terminal presses in too hard and absorbs too much attention (TA goes up). Through handling that particular terminal and one´s interaction with him at the time of postulating the beingness in question, one may already begin to contact the creation incident (which is the whole purpose of the program), and carries right on with Step H. Step H. No other terminal needs considering (or was disconnected in Step G). One is free to look at F-0: "How did I create myself to be a (fill in L&N wording found in step F)?" -> Narrative style until creation postulate has been found and the incident F/Ns. In case straight recall fails to take one down to the creation incident, one may have to approach it gradually by lock scanning: "When did I ever act as a (beingness)?" This naturally will take one down to the first time. When the basic incident and the creation postulate were found but there is no F/N, continue with Step I. Step I: Use repeater tech on the postulate so that all associated incidents can be washed up, discharged and F/Ned. This way the basic incident will come to an F/N, too. Keep repeating the postulate until it F/Ns by itself. Before going on, handle all other postulates that might have come up in the process of this step, in the same way. Step J: The beingness is now discharged and can be inspected so as to be accepted or rejected. If things don´t quite fall into place yet, one should run 6 ruds "regarding that beingness". Should that beingness be useful and should one want want to keep it, one ought to do a solo 2WC on the ideal scene implied by that beingness and what one would have to actually do to make it come true. Do a sketchy admin scale regarding that beiness, and take it to F/N. The EP for this particular run through the steps has now been reached. Start afresh with Step Zero. The technical EP for the SEPP on the whole is an F/N on questions A-1 and A-2 and the certainty that nothing could possibly keep one from realizing the ideal scene of one´s games concept in the real world.

130

SEPP, Final Step After the technical EP above there is one further step and unless one did it before in some other context, one must do it now: 1.

6 ruds on Ron.

Straight recall: How did one get involved with his game? Run the incident narrative to F/N, get the postulate, repeater technique, asisness.

That´s the real end of the SEPP. SEPP, Ability Booster This is an ability booster to help you make it go right en route to the postulated ideal scene. It consists of two sections, the first one subjective, the second one objective. They may be done in either sequence. Do what you feel drawn towards. Section One. Auditing question: "What abilities would I consider important to attain my primal purpose?" Make a list in session. Start with the best-reading one, give it a well-reading wording, then run 6 ruds on it. An extremely simple action yet at this stage it goes a long way. One keeps doing this little action here and there as one goes along. There is no end to this step. Anytime one feels one doesn´t quite do what one ought to do in order to come close to fulfilling one´s ideal scene, one can name the desired ability in question and proceed as above. In each case the EP is "a rehabilitated ability", i.e. a subjective certainty that there is nothing keeping one from actually doing that sort of thing. Which takes us to Section Two . Section Two is a must if Section One is to be successful. Section Two. Do whatever training you have to do to play your game convincingly and successfully. Become a professional. Demonstrate certainty objectively. Mind you, you don´t have to wait till you get to the end of the bridge before you may start getting trained. Do it anytime. The earlier the better! Any training is better than no training, just as any auditng is better than no auditing.

131

As a side note: it´s well worth having another look at the objective processes in "Creation of Human Ability" at this stage. Some of them are real thetan boosters. On the lower bridge these processes are usually sold under value since there is too much bank in the way as to allow stable gains on the level of operating thetan. But up here, after case completion, they can be mind-blasting! Case Completion Case completion is the state of having none of one´s attention fixated on the first universe so that one isn´t kept from playing one´s games in the third universe. One finds one´s games and problems out there, not in the back of one´s mind. One cannot have further gains through applying auditing tech any more but has one´s gains in life through the application of ethics and admin know-how. One demonstrates competence observably. This finally is the point where "positive thinking" can come to its fruitition. Before, most good thoughts (first postulates) were coupled with bad thoughts (second postulates) and smothered by them. Now the good thoughts can really do their work!

132

WARNING: BLACK SHADOW THETANS (BSTS) The TA may go up during or after Excalibur or the SEPP and just never come down again, no matter what you try. The reason for this may be an odd variation to the categories of the AllPurpose Trouble-Shooter Checklist mentioned further up, namely that the charge is that of a very special sort of thetan, indeed: a Black Shadow Thetan, a "BST". (To be precise one ought to say that the charge is one´s own really, due to oneself unknowingly interacting with a thetan one hasn´t spotted yet. It´s always one´s own protest creating one´s charge, not that of another.) A BST is a thetan shadowing you. He makes himself part of your space. He makes his theta energy field fairly exactly overlap with yours. He is not "out there". It´s not a telepathic connection to some theta energy field in some other place. It´s right where you are. Like hand and glove. You can´t tell that a BST is around by location and distance, not by the usual "something funny flowing in from over there". You can detect him by a change of quality only, by your space not quite having your own quality. It´s like ink in water: put one drop of ink in a glass of water and stir, and all of the water goes blue. Now where is the ink and where is the water? You can´t tell. But for sure the water has taken on a different quality. You may get this phenomenon already on Excalibur, but the more usual place is the SEPP. Because on the SEPP you are dealing with very subtle stuff, with the finest aspects of mental mest and even beyond that, with postulates. You are dealing with real thetan stuff, then. But again, even on Excalibur you may get this very characteristic phenomenon: high TA and no means to get it down. You check for "BST?" - and there you go: you get a D.N. or even an R/S. Someone is trying to stop you. Someone is trying to keep you from going free and freeing others. That´s the job of a BST. BSTs were originally discovered by Bill Robertson during the later research stages of Excalibur in 1986. He called them "Black Static Thetans" which philosophically speaking, is a bit of a misnomer. So I changed that to "Black Shadow Thetan" which is not only an apt description of what these fellows do,

133

but as well keeps the abbreviation alive, it having become generally used by Robertson´s followers. Robertson contrived a rather far-fetched and bizarre explanation for this BST-phenomenon. It rested on his personal insight alone and was neither logically tenable nor independently verified by anyone. That people then found in their sessions what Bill had told them they would find, doesn´t so much prove the validity of his explanation but the strength of his authority (and the willingness of his followers to be impressed). Nevertheless - and typical for Bill - he had gotten hold of something that was indeed true. That he fell for the red herring explanation graciously provided for nosy auditors by Galactic Implanting Unlimited doesn´t diminish his achievement. I must apologize for discussing this at such length, yet I cannot pretend to have discovered something when I didn´t. Neither can I leave those readers puzzled who are aware of Robertson´s story and hear me tell a different one. This is what I found in the ten years (1986-1996) of working with Robertson´s data, by evaluating them critically and comparing them with what others found independently of me (meaning they came up with it without me having briefed them first): The stronghold of Xenu´s empire since long before Inc. II (probably since the Middle Implant) was situated in the galaxy neighbouring ours, in Andromeda. Anything that went on over here since Inc. II was of course acutely monitored from over there. So when Ron came officially out with dianetics in 1950, it was immediately noticed (LK3/ch. 6.2). Something needed doing real fast to counter him! Special agents were trained and sent over to shadow the leading characters of Ron´s game: the BSTs. Their training was simple: they were made to go exterior by brutal means (electric shock treatment whilst holding E-meter cans during a mock session), were forced to stay exterior and told to go off to work. No chance to ever get a body again. Condemned to stay exterior for the duration of the universe. (This somewhat compares to the way Ron trained his closer staff in the late 1940s and early 1950s: he made them go exterior and spy on the enemy. Except that his means were less brutal.) In a way BSTs were to Xenu what the SS was to Hitler: a task force of superloyal, superdedicated, unswaying and unthinking killing machines with grey cold quicksilver in their veins instead of red blood.

134

Some BSTs were found to have been loyal officers from Inc. II times who were implanted and served the enemy since. Some of the actual people who worked with Ron since the 1940s were abducted after death (as thetans exterior) and taken to Andromeda for instruction by implant, to be sent back here. Senior officials of Hubbard´s church were (and still are?) BSTs incarnated on Earth, or good-willed missionaires run by BSTs. The whole point was to mock, thwart and distort the efforts of Ron to get the antidote to the R6 bank into the hands of Earth people. One way of getting this done, apart from shadowing Hubbard´s key personnel by specially trained thetans, was attaching false time tracks to them. Attaching a false time track to a thetan misleads him regarding his own past and future, and makes him go for false goals and ideals. A well set-up distraction indeed! In practice this means that apart from getting the story of that BST´s "education by implant", the solo auditor may as well get pictures of future incidents, of pleasures as well as brutal incidents and painful deaths (accompanied by a full set of somatics). The solo auditor may unknowingly be hung up in several of such "false futures". Some may appear to be his own. Others may be the future accidents or implants of people he knows or has heard about. The mechanism is this (and I´m not saying that the following wasn´t bizarre beyond words): over in Andromeda there is some sort of giant computer producing virtual realities for specific people considered dangerous by the management of Andromeda (Xenu´s staff). The past track of the target person here on Earth is scanned telepathically, copied and stored. It is then linked up with comparable past tracks and potential futures of other people, and fed back to the target person. This way a virtual reality for that person is created. Target persons may come to believe themselves to have entirely different identities to their real ones. They may experience other people´s somatics which they (the others) are extrapolated to have at some point in their virtual future. They may see other people´s past incidents with a false time label stuck to them, putting these incidents decades or even centuries into the future. Extremely confusing! Making a "mind copy" of a person is typical for the sort of implants the Marcabians used to do, particularly on Coltus. The implantee is tortured by

135

electric shocks administered to the brain (unless it´s done without a body on an exteriorized thetan), certain buttons are pressed in him, he creates a mental energy mock-up of his past, the people he knows, his general knowledge or the mission he is on. A copy of this mock-up (or picture) is made and stored away for later use, for example when he doesn´t behave according to plan. Most of this works through computerized feedback loops and doesn´t take a lot of attention by actual operatives. To cross-relate the mind copies of individuals and put false time labels on them, makes it nearly impossible to get time and ownership right and so form a major obstacle in as-ising something. This then is Xenu´s Virtual Universe Computer Game which in combination with BSTs, served to hold Hubbard´s movement down. And it did. Of course the back of this has been cracked along with the rest of Xenu´s game, and Andromeda isn´t any longer what it used to be (to my knowledge that computer has been switched off) - but the damage has been done, and the dynamics of that game are still strong. Just because the leaders went home doesn´t mean that their troops wouldn´t continue executing their orders. Andromeda stopped operating but they couldn´t be bothered calling their troops back. So you are still likely to encounter the occasional BST here and there. BSTs are usually very unwilling to give data or get involved in any sort of two-way communication. Due to the implanting they received they hate the sight of an E-meter. The only way to get them into session is by power processes 4 to 6. After cracking their "education implant" on power 6 you switch over to narrative style and reduce or even erase the incident. Then you get them to run their Inc. II, Inc. I, their personal first incident of agreeing with Xenu, their earlier universes, etc., if need be by Excalibur procedure. The idea is to a) handle their implant, b) generally disconnect them from Xenu´s game, and c) get them to carry on with something more positive. Virtual Universe Computer scenarios are detected by making a list (in session) of such stories that don´t quite "feel right". One must assign correct ownership to them (for example by checking for "BST?" or "false time track?" and indicating the charge with good TR-2). Mind you, we are not talking about single incidents but whole time track portions extending into the past or future. It´s decidly not related to being out of valence to BTs, entities or the people one knew in one´s childhood.

136

If this recognition of ownership doesn´t key the false track out, one must run the other person´s future or past incidents to erasure. Or the BST´s "educational implant". (Note: In context with these data it may be useful to read the "Montauk" series by Preston Nichols and Peter Moon, published by Sky Books in New York since 1992. The "Montauk" series makes Xenu´s Virtual Universe Computer less far-fetched than it may appear at first glance.)

137

HIGHER ECHELON HATS One important feature of the bridge I´m suggesting here is the recognition of one´s hat and the decision to wear it. Which of course puts one immediately into a condition of danger. As long as one was confused, in treason, in enemy or doubt regarding one´s hat, one was as well non-productive on it. In a word: one was below non-existence. Now that one woke up to one´s duties one has become a pain in the neck of one´s enemies. And so one becomes a target (for them). One is in danger. Moreover one finds oneself connecting up with new and old team mates and colleagues. The various parties on the playing field (friends and foes) become clearer and better defined. Particularly during and after Excalibur the solo auditor will discover "that he is", namely that he is a player who people count on. I´m not referring to one´s social definition on planet Earth only, but also to higher planes. One´s connecting up with new and old team mates occurs on various theta wave bands simultaneously. For example: one may have been crew on a space craft or is an emissary of some far-away planet, and people out there are anxious to find out how and why one got lost. They wait for one´s debrief and expect one to resume one´s duties. On a plane above that one finds disembodied thetans exerting their influence on various game aspects within this mest universe, and one finds oneself interacting with them. Above that one enters the echelon of senior management bodies of other, parallel universes, and encounters rather high and lofty thetans looking in on this universe. Above that reside the Twelve, the rulers and arbiters of games and universes (LK3/ch. 4.1). And above that is the realm of pure thought, of unmanifested, non-energized thought, of postulates - the 8th dynamic. Any pure thought, of anyone, will support or weaken one or the other of the various games vectors which on the level of the 8th dynamic exist as concepts (postulates) and from the 7th dynamic on down, as mest (mental, physical, organic). To the extent that a being is able to create, detect and influence 7th dynamic vibrations, he has power on that dynamic. Yet when he is able to create, detect

138

and influence conceptual thought (postulates), he has even more power. He has 8th dynamic power. Bearing this in mind the solo auditor in his gradual expansion of awareness, should be wary of what particular "management echelon" he is extending his attention to, and ask himself: how does my hat fit in with the goals, purposes and ideal scenes of that particular level? What am I expected to be, do or have "up there"? When he doesn´t do that, he´ll be in a condition of treason on that particular management echelon. So always find out where you are, that you are and who you are as you progressively expand your awareness. Your expansion of ARC (space) must be paralleled with an expansion of KRC (competence). One slight lessening of your ethics presence, and your space will collapse. A few weeks ago someone asked me what I had gotten out of all the solo auditing I had done. What was my win? This is it: I know where I am, that I am and who I am on the levels of awareness open to me.

139

Epilogue That´s the end of this book. It´s as well the end of my hat write-up. I have shown you what I do. There is some more to come in the appendix, but anyway, this is basically it. You may take it or leave it, use it, misuse it, change it for better or worse, apply it, misapply it. Do whatever you like with it. It was my way of freeing myself. You may follow it to free yourself, too. You may find your own way. You may find a better one. Anything goes. But take nothing on trust: only you know your own truth. Any route that takes a thetan out of this universe is alright. Provided he is prepared to leave the game and does so on his own determinism.

140

Appendix

141

A. A HOMAGE TO RON An Anecdote (Told by Mary Sue Hubbard in "Ability Minor " 3, April 1955.) "I remember one time in Spain, I had spent the whole morning shopping in the market and the whole afternoon preparing dinner on one oil burner and a charcoal fire. This was a difficult process for one used to supermarkets and a gas range. Ron had gone to the park. Dinner time passed. The food got soupy from reheating and the charcoal supply got nil. My patience wilted and I went to the park. I found him sitting at a sidewalk cafe, a middle-aged Spaniard with him. He motioned to me to sit down and be silent. He was processing. The fellow had been in the Russian army, had fought in the battle of Stalingrad and then had been forced into servitude in Siberia. His legs had been so badly frozen that they would not bend at the joints. This peglegged walk was to carry him through life and to deny him work because of his slowness. After Ron had finished, we invited him home to dinner. He walked naturally again. His realization of what had happened to him did not come until he walked to the door to leave. He suddenly stopped and began shouting, "I walk - I walk!" A Second Anecdote (Told by Peter Moon in his book "Encounter In The Pleiades: An Inside Look At UFOs", Sky Books, New York 1996.) From Madrid, I was put on a plane to Casablanca in Morocco where I boarded the ship longer than a football field that housed 350-400 people. Hubbard was a relentless worker and didn´t meet the various individuals who came aboard. A guide was assigned to me after I boarded, and he gave me a complete tour of the ship. I got several glimpses of Hubbard. One of the first questions I asked my guide was if they ever encountered any UFOs while they

142

were sailing. He was a former Buckingham Palace guard and was very meticulous about his answers. Having been aboard the ship practically since its inception, he carefully scanned his memory. "Only once," he said. "One time at sea, someone on the bridge had spotted a couple of flying saucers in the night sky. He turned to the Commodore (referring to Hubbard) and asked if he saw what was in the sky." He said that Hubbard shot back immediately without any hesitation and said, "Flying them quite badly, aren´t they?" Hubbard was quick like that and his range of perception was wide. One heard countless anecdotes like this when aboard the ship, but no one collected them for posterity. A Biographical Sketch (This article by Peter Moon appeared under the heading of "L.Ron Hubbard", in the appendix to "Montauk Revisited" by Preston B. Nichols and Peter Moon, available from Sky Books, Box 769, Westbury, NY 11590. It is reprinted here with kind permission of the publisher.) "An incredible amount of nonsense has been written about this man. I will be as brief as possible and stick to the salient points based upon my own personal knowledge and insights. Hubbard was extremely wide read and had an acute aptitude for the paranormal. His experiences were not those of a "normal" person and he was continually finding that nobody believed him. Various authors and courts have condemned him for being a compulsive liar. I definitely found this not to be true in my own experience, but if he was a compulsive liar to some, it was partly because no one believed him when he told the truth. Why not just tell them something that works? Hubbard believed in workability beyond all else and he was extremely effective in his pursuits. He hated the establishment because it furthered stagnation and was a hallmark of ineffectiveness. The Navy carreer of L.Ron Hubbard is checkered with ambiguity. His actual naval records will not be released although there is an agreement that he worked in Naval Intelligence. This being the case, disinformation as to his whereabouts and duties would have been fabricated as a matter of due course. It is known that Hubbard studied the psychiatric records of Navy personnel and had information on the cutting edge procedures of the day. This included narcosynthesis and regression techniques. He took what he learnt from psychiatric research, plus his earlier studies, and formulated Dianetics. This

143

was the first major regression therapy applied on a broad basis and was designed to be easy for the layman to use. Hubbard also studied Aleister Crowley and found him fascinating. Crowley´s principles are to be found here and there throughout Hubbard´s work, but they are not one and the same thing. Hubbard developed his own techniques and was more of an innovator than a copycat. Hubbard´s popularity grew and he never had to look back as far as money was concerned. The Church of Scientology grew out of this popularity and it was incorporated as a legal religion in 1954. Hubbard had constant difficulties running organizations and found he couldn´t openly trust others to "just go do it". He formulated his own administrative system and set it up to be effective. The purpose was to sell books and get his Dianetics and Scientology processes to the public. He honestly believed this would save humanity. The Government waged decades of war against Hubbard and much of it was unconstitutional. I believe that they were angry at him for breaking security with information he had obtained while with the Navy. His organization was also perceived as a threat to J. Edgar Hoover, Richard Nixon and other establishment forces. I first saw Hubbard in 1972 and Scientology was a growing and dynamic movement at that point. He had definite health problems, but they were not exaggerated nor did they seem to hamper him. These were not hidden from the crew. He considered himself an experimental guinea pig and what he released as standard Scientology was watered down (as far as being dangerous) and foolproof as far as he was concerned. Hubbard is often described as a temperamental hot head who always had to get his way. He had extremely high expectations and they were not often met. Very often, he didn´t get his way and nothing was done about it for a long time or sometimes not at all. Of course, there were plenty of times when he achieved what he wanted, but he was mostly busy researching. Hubbard did not constantly police anyone. At times he would keep to himself but he never ignored the crew. I only saw him get angry a couple of times and this was after a person had repeatedly acted like a fool. Hubbard said he had no idea he would become so popular and become such a figurehead. Had he known, he would have led his life quite differently. It was wild and filled with outrageous aspects. In fact, he told a friend of mine in the early 1970´s that he would prefer to die. His body was worn out, and he felt he had to keep it alive because he had become an important symbol to so many people that followed the movement.

144

Government agents reportedly used to take bets on how fast they could put Hubbard in prison. Although they were not successful in this regard, I believe he was under constant psychotronic attack during the time the Montauk Project was in operation. He even ended up on Long Island during most of 1973. The Church of Scientology grew to be a very large organization by the early 1980´s. Despite high officials going to prison for conspiracy against the Government, the movement was highly popular and growing. In 1981, at what was probably the height of the Church´s popularity, Hubbard was no longer directly involved. He was hiding so as not to be served with a subpoena. Several people thought the movement had been infiltrated by the CIA pitting one Scientology faction against another. There was tremendous infighting within the organization during this period and the majority of the people I knew left. The organization totally changed its operating basis and hasn´t been the same since. Hubbard passed on in January 1986 at the age of 74. He called his confidante, Pat Broeker, to his room a few days before he departed and told him that he would be leaving his body. Hubbard was concerned that people might grieve and cry over his departure. He said this wasn´t necessary and that people would cry only because of their own self-invalidation. In other words, people would be crying over their own belief system that they themselves were not immortal. I´ve tried to be as objective as possible about this short biographical sketch of Hubbard. It is important to realize that this man had incredible knowledge. He wanted the entire world to access it. If he were clearly interested in money and power and that was all, he would have led a much more extravagant life style. Most of the time, his quarters were not as plush as the average three bedroom house. His life was also filled with pits and valleys and he would have been the first to agree. The man has simply not been accurately portrayed in any biographical accounts of him. I believe that the real clues to this man´s role on Earth have to do with his involvement with Jack Parsons and his heritage with the Wilson clan. His activities there are still shrouded in mystery." Hubbard, The Druid The somewhat cryptical remark in the last three lines of Peter Moon´s article needs explaining: the Wilson clan is a family of highly initiated Scottish witches. Members of this family went abroad and settled in the USA. Ron Hubbard´s father Harry Ross Hubbard was a Wilson really and had been

145

adopted by a family named Hubbard. Which means that Ron grew up in fairly elevated spiritual circles. (I should think he chose a family to suit his purposes as you´ll see in a moment.) I´m taking this from a chapter on the Wilson family in "Montauk Revisited". Preston Nichols, like other authors before, tries to explain the relationship of Hubbard and Crowley by saying that Hubbard learned from Crowley and that the link between the two was Jack Parsons who Hubbard did experiments in magick with. (Jack Parsons was a rocket engineer and a disciple of Crowley. See the chapter on him in "Montauk Revisited".) This never clicked with me. Firstly, Hubbard didn´t spend a lot of time with Jack Parsons. Secondly - and more importantly - all the session data that went into the "Pied Pipers" clearly show that Hubbard as "Elron" was in dead opposition to Yatrus. Given that Crowley at his time was the senior representative of Yatrus on Earth, it wouldn´t make sense that Hubbard should seriously study Crowley´s magick - except perhaps to find out what the enemy was up to. The answer to the riddle fell into my lap when at an auditor´s convention in 1996, I met a solo auditor who was also a druid. This puzzled me. How would a druid be a solo auditor on Solo 3 or vice versa? He told me that druids consider themselves to be the keepers of spirituality in Europe. They keep a low profile since the Catholic Church to this day is up in arms against them. Druids are interested in any new development to find out what it´s worth, and perhaps to influence it. Hubbard´s teachings are of particular importance to them. Because Hubbard (he said) was by education a druid. He was entrusted with the task of making druidic knowledge available to mankind in popular language. How would my druid friend know this? Because his teacher told him. So I rang the teacher on the phone (a very long-distance call). He confirmed the story and said he had been told it by his teacher who as a child and a young man knew Hubbard personally, at a time when Hubbard was already in his fifties and sailing the Mediterranean in his Sea Org ships. I asked him if Ron hadn´t told this young man some tall story to impress him, because (don´t we know?) Ron loved to create his PR image to suit the demands of his environment. No, said the druid teacher, the story was again confirmed by his teacher´s teacher who studied druidism right at the time when Hubbard studied it - in the 1930´s. They didn´t study in the same place but knew of each other.

146

So for better or worse, here is the full story as it was given to me: Ron, born into a clan of magicians and witches, received a druid education from late childhood on. It lasted some 15 years. He was entrusted with the task of rendering Crowley powerless since Crowley was into black magic, and black magic is not what druids favour. Further, and as his masterpiece, he was to rehabilitate druidic knowledge in the eyes of the world. Ron was excluded from druidic circles when he founded the "Church of Scientology" in 1954 since it´s against druidic policy to start a religion.

147

B. THE PARABOLIC TONESCALE Students quite often wonder about the significance of the figures at the right hand margin of the tone scale. Why is antagonism at 2.0, anger at 1.5, fear at 1.0, grief at 0,5, and how come there are so many "microtones" such as 1.15, 1.02, or 0.375 in between? Putting the tone scale on a graph answers the riddle. Put the tones with equidistant spaces in between on one axis, the positive ones above zero, the negative ones below zero. Put the numbers from zero to plus 40 and zero to minus 40 on the other axis. Mark the coordinates of tones and numbers with dots. Connect the dots. What do you get? A hyperbolic curve (see graph on the next page). This hyperbolic curve shows how theta slides in first on life and then on mest from a theoretical state of positive infinity, assumes the various states of theta, lambda and phi described by the tone scale and know-to-mystery scale, and slides out towards a theoretical state of negative infinity. A development from free "fluidity" to fixated "solidity". "The mest universe is the right hand of this parabola. And over here on the left-hand side of this parabola, we have what: self." (Tape Lecture of November 16, 1952.) In his book "Scientology 8-8008", chapter "Affinity, Communication and Reality", Ron explains that the tone scale consist of a series of flows, dispersals and ridges. This becomes obvious when you use theta quanta (attention units) to define a thetan´s space, and when you assume that size and shape of his space unavoidably follow his emotional state. One´s emotional state, one´s space and one´s point on the ARC-scale are entirely tied up with one´s attention: is it flowing, dispersing or ridging? Understanding this is extremely important to the auditor, to anyone coaching TRs, and to anyone trying to keep his sanity intact amidst the insanities of life.

148

See some examples below. (By the way, this is how the clay demo on the theory checksheet should be done.)

149

150

151

152

153

C. AUDITING ESSENTIALS The checksheets following later in this appendix cover a lot of ground in terms of theory and practical application. As their end result they amount to mastering the essentials of auditing. Whether one has arrived at this level of skill by studying my two first volumes with these checksheets or in any other way, doesn´t matter. What counts is ability. Here is a list of what I consider auditing essentials: Basic Auditor Requirements 1.

The auditor understands the function of all the buttons, mechanics and electronics of the E-meter.

He understands the significance of the four TA zones: One, low TA below 2.0 ("What´s the auditee identified with?"). Two, normal TA from 2.0 to 3.0. Three, ambiguous TA from 3.0 to 3.5 ("Which way is this developing?"). Four, high TA from 3.5 on up ("What´s being dramatized and not confronted right this minute?").

He understand the difference between a false and a real high TA.

He can read TA and needle off fluently, can differentiate between sizes of reads, recognizes a BD and knows how to note it down on his worksheet, can tell the difference between reads caused by body motion and mental impulses.

The auditor can see an instant read. He knows to interpret the auditee´s originations in terms of the instant reads accompanying it (see "Meter Read Interpretation Table" two sections further down and LK2/p. 79).

He can easily recognize and master the five basic situations covered by "Session Tactics" below (next section).

154

He can steer the auditee into charged areas by means of meter reads and hold him there by means of his TRs alone (not by forcing some tech on him).

He can do an Assessment by TA (EMD 23), an Assessment by Instant Read and an Assessment by Elimination (both EMD 24), and a Whole Track Dating Assessment (EMD 25).

The auditor recognizes a D.N. (dirty needle), knows what it means (faulty connection on the comm line), and can clean it (by 2WC).

10. He recognizes a Rock Slam, knows what it means (fluctuation of charge between maximum and zero because of some victim bouncing between total resistance and total annihilation), and knows how to handle it (by 2WC on the invalidation or by power processes). 11. He understand the wisdom: "When the TA moves, do nothing, when the TA doesn´t move, do something", as a general principle applying to all auditing (ref. EMD 8). 12. The auditor understands that there are gradient approaches in auditing independent of the item he is working on, and that he should be aware of the gradient his auditee is comfortably prepared to operate on. These gradients are: 2WC - repetitive recall - running chains down to a basic narrative style to erase that basic - repeater tech on the postulates found (LK2/ch. 4). Session Tactics 1.

Question or origination with no read: means the item is not available. Don´t pick it up. Instead: TR-2 on "nothing there" to F/N.

Question or origination with a read: means the item is available. Pick it up.

Question or origination has read well, session has been going on for a while, TA has moved up into a higher range (no matter how high) but there is still TAA: means session dynamics have increased, auditee is merrily battling away. Keep going, don´t change anything, drain all charge off reading originations by getting relevant data, use plenty of TR-2 and TR-4. The TA will eventually come down again.

Question or origination had a read, the session proceeds in a normal fashion, but then the needle goes tight, the TA goes up, and there is no

155

further TAA: means the auditee is resisting, so it´s protest or nonconfront on the actual item or incident, or something else is cooking simultaneously. Ascertain by 2WC whether it´s a non-confront on some aspect of the item in question, a protest, or charge coming in from something entirely different, or a combination of the three, and handle accordingly (LK2/p. 151). 5.

Questions or originations don´t read at session start, TA is high, the needle tight: means that independently of what the auditee says, one or more things (simultaneously) aren´t being confronted. More than one button is in restimulation. Find out what it is by 2WC, follow up all Ticks by steering the auditee, get the needle moving, define the nonconfronted item or the various competing items, handle to F/N on the disturbance (ideally). At least handle till the needle moves and the TA is in range again and normal operation can be resumed. Then go back to where you were before the trouble started and end cycle on the original item. Basically this is a drawn-out TR-4. (See as well the All-Purpose Trouble-Shooter Checklist.)

Meter Read Interpretation Table Supposing the auditor was asking his auditee a question like: "Did you ever steal something?", he may observe a whole set of different phenomena on the meter and the auditee, each needing its own interpretation and handling. They are listed here. "sF" stands for a small Fall on the meter. "X" stands for no read. "Origination" stands for statements referring to the auditee´s emotions or sensations. For the purpose of this example they are not meant to be a dramatization of the item being worked on (like for example: "I had a bad dream last night") which would raise the question: does one have to take them up or not? (Originations that stand in an obvious relationship to the session situation are of course considered part of the process. They are a dramatisation and must be taken up.) The examples given refer to situations when the reads on question as well as answer are of equal size so that one has to analyze the matter. Otherwise the usual rule applies: "biggest read counts". (The table you find on the next page.)

156

Question

Answer

Interpretation

Handling

Yes, sF

Meter says "yes" to both question and answer: "It is so."

Take it up

Yes, x

Meter says "yes" to the question but "no" to the auditee´s answer: "Uncertain".

Take it up cautiously, make sure you get reading answers.

Yes, sF

"No" on the question, "yes" on the answer: "It is so."

Take it up

No, sF

Contradictory. "Yes" on the question and "yes" on the denial. The first read may point to a hot item, the second may indicate a protest against the question or a misunderstanding.

Do a cautious 2WC to establish what´s what. Clean up possible misunderstandings. Then take up the question or the protest, depending.

No, x

The meter says "yes" on the question but "no" on the denial. The question is hot but the auditee hasn´t contacted an example yet.

Take it up cautiously. Make sure you get reading answers.

No, sF

"No" on the question and "no" on the denial: "It isn´t so."

Acknowledge to F/N. If needed, take up the protest and run it to F/N.

Silent, x

Uncertain.

Assess the three buttons. Ack if there is nothing, to F/N. Ack if there is something, run to F/N.

157

Yes, x

Uncertain.

2WC. Assess three buttons. Still no charge: TR-2 to F/N. If charged: run question to F/N.

No, x

Uncertain.

Handle as above.

Orig., x

"Yes" on the question, "no" on the origination.

TR-4 and take question up.

Orig., sF

"Yes" on the question, "yes" on the origination.

2WC. Handle according to biggest reads. You may have to handle the origination by auditing or even for real before going back to the item.

Orig., sF

"No" on the question, "yes" on the origination.

TR-2: "No charge on the item", take up the origination, run to F/N.

158

the

D. NOTES ON SUPERVISING All that needs saying about the art of supervising is clearly and broadly stated in the "Supervisor´s Code" and "Supervisor´s Stable Data" in "Scientology 0-8". The supervisor must know the stuff he is checking the student out on through having had years-long experience concerning it. To be creditable, a theory course supervisor must have a few thousand hours of practical auditing behind him. Otherwise it´s the blind leading the blind. A checkout must consult the student´s understanding. That means it must take the student where he stands and aid him to combine data in new ways, to make him gain a heightened understanding of the matter at hand. Good supervising must lead to cognitions. The only way of learning is by cognitions, because cognitions are self-created knowledge. Rote learning and imitation learning is learning by accepting otherdetermined knowledge. If you want to make robots, do it that way. A good check-out may take hours. It can have the form of an enlightened dialogue between a master and a disciple. The master has data authority (if he didn´t, he wouldn´t be a master), the student has an eagerness to fully comprehend the data he has learned (if he didn´t, he wouldn´t truly be a disciple). Example: The examination checkout I do with students at the end of the theory course checksheet usually takes a good six hours non-stop. Or longer. To fully comprehend something means one arrives at having a conceptual understanding of it. One doesn´t "think with it" any longer, one knows it. "You see, our success in clearing this planet depends upon the success of our courses as this is where we train our auditors, C/Ses, supervisors and administrators, and that is the whole team!" (HCOB 30 October 1978) "When study tech isn´t in full use (...), overt products are produced. Orgs are actually in the hands of and at the mercy of course supervisors (...)." (HCO PL 30 October 1980)

159

On Clay Demos Clay demos are the most valuable tool the supervisor has to check up on the student´s understanding. They must never be pooh-poohed as children´s stuff, they must never be taken off checksheet because people had bad experiences with them earlier on. They beat computer-supported interactive learning by miles. A clay demo is a challenge to the student in that it demands of him that he create examples parallelling on a mest level the high-flying theta concepts he carries about in his personal universe. This teaches him two things: one, how hard it is to create; two, what his universe really looks like. This is painful. Why? Because the act of creating restimulates implants. It asks the student to do something which he and all of his entities were implanted not to do, and that is: to create one´s own universe. This has become increasingly unpopular since Incident I! It is also painful in that the student will see his misunderstood words, twisted concepts and foggy ideas become embarrassingly apparent on the clay table. He simply can´t help putting his unverse there! A clay demo will never be any better than the mind creating it. It´s the job of the supervisor not to be fooled by a rote clay demo, but to ask: "Why?" "Why should that part of the demo lead over to the next part? Look at life, look at how people feel and act, look at how the mind works - and then show me the real thing in clay, not some symbolic abbreviation." Cracks glibness like you wouldn´t believe. The clay shows the thing. It shows a story, not a row of symbolic representations. Any five-year old should be able to read the story content of a clay demo (although the significance hidden in that story may be beyond him). Do not use "clay icons" for your representation of concepts, just because those clay icons have become a course room tradition. Don´t represent a thetan by a clay ring. That´s not what you feel like to yourself. A thetan is a 7th dynamic energy manifestation. He has attention, intention and emotion. Show him as such. Show him as a little clay ghost with arms and legs and a face. A static may be shown as a clay ring, yes. But that´s a different matter. That´s the thetan´s aspect beyond the eight dynamics. And do differentiate between thoughts (postulates) and mental image pictures. Thoughts are 8th dynamic, they are beyond mental mest. So you can´t rightfully show them as clay pictures. Show them as spoken words written with clay letters and label them "postulate". In contrast to that, mental image pictures and mock-ups are mental mest (7th dynamic) and must be shown as clay pictures.

160

It´s a creative act all along. Create what goes on between people and other people, between people and their minds, between people and their bodies. Create it on the clay table to the best of your present understanding. Don´t use time-worn clay icons which don´t mean a thing but were some past supervisor´s subterfuge for passing your clay demo without revealing his own m/u´s (misunderstood words). Why does one have to stick labels on one´s clay models? Because a universe consists of created masses and of created significances attached to those masses. A clay demo must parallel that. If it doesn´t, the supervisor can´t read it. A well-put clay demo problem will be fun to work out. It will lead to major cognitions. The student will be so immersed that he forgets the tedium and degradation of earlier times at the clay table in earlier but hopefully not similar institutes. Example: The examination clay demo at the end of the theory checksheet takes two full days. And never a dull moment. And when you as the supervisor see that your student doesn´t work cheerfully and fluently but hangs about staring at the empty clay table with a frown on his forehead, why, sit down and work with him. No need to let him simmer away and turn into pulp. Do it as a co-action! Have fun with each other! Be lively about it! The knowledge we are able to transmit is too valuable to be wasted. On TRs The auditor creates his auditee and his session by his TRs. TR´s 6-9 mean: control, guidance, firmness. TRs 0-4 mean: smooth verbal interaction based on understanding. It´s the old combination of KRC and ARC. One doesn´t go well without the other. A session will be as good or bad as the auditor comprehends and masters his TRs. To arrive at that sort of understanding TRs must be done often and repeatedly. As usual, the rule of gradient approaches applies: run them lightly on an ever-increasing gradient. And don´t do them rotely! Evolve them out of the underlying concept as stated in Factors 1 through 11. But don´t mistake an EP on the drill to stand for an EP in life! A vast difference! People doing them perfectly as a drill don´t always manage to transfer them to life.

161

The real schooling ground for one´s TRs is life. The mark of good TRs is: they are not noticed. They are natural. They get things done without anyone realizing how come. On TR-4, use loads of tone scale drills. If the coach cannot mock up emotions convincingly, the student won´t learn anything on TR-4. And to settle an old argument: the way I teach TRs is by going over them repeatedly, each time to a win on each TR on the student´s gradient. Six days of TRs done sensibly in this fashion result in greater cognitions and abilities than six weeks of TRs "the hard way" as taught in certain places. And do watch, discuss and be interested in how the student is learning to apply them in life, so you can develop coaching situations that are appropriate.

162

E. THEORY COURSE FOR AUDITORS (CHECKSHEET) Name of Student: Commencement of Course: Purpose: To obtain full understanding of the fundamental philosophy of Ron Hubbard´s philosophy, and to gain the ability to recognise and apply the data in daily life and in session. Prerequisites: The "Mini Study Course" (consisting of a thorough checkout on the relevant pages of "More than a Cult" or the VMH). Length of Course: 3 to 5 days depending on the degree of preparation (see "Note" below). Course Materials: The course is based on the book "Scientology - More than a Cult?" (LK1). Chapters 1 and 2 of the "Pied Pipers" (LK3) should have been read as well as they elaborate on various theory points mentioned in LK1. The following books by Ron Hubbard should be available to look up source materials as referred to in LK1: the Technical Dictionary, Scn 0-8, Dianetics, History of Man, Science of Survival. (Note the typographical error under (1) in the bibliography of LK1: "Scn 08008" should read "Scn 0-8"). Note: This checksheet is divided into three parts: a study/checkout section, a supervisor examination, and a clay demo section at the end. The study section may be done at home with partner-checkouts. The checksheet may also be used as a study guide for studying solo (if one feels confident). Eventually the clay demos will demonstrate the effectiveness of one's study. They must be checked out by the course supervisor. If one has studied at home and before one does the clay demos, one receives a broad general checkout on the definitions of all terms printed in bold letters in L.Kin 1. This is not a repetition of all the

163

checksheet questions already studied but aims to broaden the student's ability to "juggle the terms about" and connect each term with each other flexibly. The course supervisor may (in line with study tech) insist on further reading and extra demos if he considers it necessary. Where "essay" is stated, a formal essay is not required; merely bullet points which can be used as reference in conversation. A. Overview 1. Read the book "Scn - More than a Cult?" to get a broad idea of the subject. 2. As "Cult" refers to the author's opinions and conclusions, it is recommended that one look up source references as one encounters them in the text of LK1 so as to develop one's own ideas with the aid of the original Hubbard texts. They are listed below. The numbers refer to the bibliography of LK1. This can be done at the student's discretion. It is not compulsory, unless one wanted to solo audit after completion of the practical course or become a professional auditor. p. 11, paragraph three: see "Code of a Scientologist" in [1]. p. 14, paragraph one: "Dianetics", part 1, chapter 5, or in [1]. p. 19, paragraph two: see "a description of Scientology" in [1]. p. 23, paragraph two: Foreword in [5]. p. 24, paragraph one: Foreword in [5]. p. 30, paragraph one: Chapter 6 in [5]. p. 32, paragraph three: Chapter 5 in [5]. p. 33-4 paragraph four/one: Chapter 1 and 3 in [6]. p. 51, paragraph three: "Professional Auditor's Bulletin 2" - see Tech Volumes. p. 51, paragraph three, second quotation: "Creation of Human Ability", chapter 9, under "This is Scientology". p. 65, paragraph two: "Dianetics" part 3, chapter 1. p. 65, paragraph three: "Dianetics" part 3, chapter 10. p. 71, paragraph three: "Fundamentals of Thought", appendix: "The Aims of Scientology". p. 89-90: Pan-determinism to forget: "The Volunteer Minister's Handbook", chapter K, see Robotism. B. Study Applying study tech, now study the whole book thoroughly. The checkout questions suggested here follow the gradient approach of the text. Therefore a

164

supervisor should not demand more than what is covered in the relevant section of the book. Use of demo-kits is required whether directly specified or not. This section may also be used as a study guide for people studying solo. I. Part One 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Explain "The dynamic principle of existence: Survive!" (p.14). Checkout on all bold printed words (p.13-16). Show why one's case is caused by oneself (p.16). Define the words "Dianetics" and "Scientology" (p.13 & 22). Checkout on all technical terms (p.23-33). Demo the quote on p. 32, paragraph 3 ("beings......) (see also summary on p.35).

II. Part Two Ref: "A Frustration Scale" 1. What is a gradient scale? 2. Demo: Show how charge builds up along the Scale of Frustration. Ref: "Reach and Withdraw" 3. Demo: Show how the Frustration Scale consists of Reach and Withdraw. 4. Essay: Give five examples of action, and discover whether they really can be reduced to reach/withdraw. 5. Checkout on technical terms. 6. Demo: Show how a ridge is created and how it is restimulated. Ref: "Game Theory", and "The Emotional Tone Scale" 7. Essay: Give three examples which demonstrate the decline from pandeterminism to oblivion. 8. Study the Emotional Tone Scale and both versions of the Effect Scale in the book "0-8". 9. Essay: Name a game and analyse it with regard to the three components of a game. Explain what would need to occur for the games condition to become a no-games condition.

165

10. Demo: Show how the relationship between enturbulated and free theta determines one's position on the Emotional Tone Scale. What effect does this have on the flexibility of one's attention? Ref: "The ARC Triangle" up to "Communication" 11. What are axioms, and what is their significance in a science? (p.94-96). 12. What do "static" and "dynamic" mean in the spiritual sense? (see also p.188). 13. Essay: a. Using two examples, show how understanding can be increased or decreased using the component parts of ARC. b. Describe the relationship between theta and ARC. 14. Essay: Place two people you know on the emotional tone scale (both chronic and social levels). Evaluate by observation, giving examples of their use of ARC in relation to the Effect Scale to substantiate your analysis. (identities need not be revealed). 15. Demo: Show the relationship between affinity and mental space. 16. Demo: Show why reality is the result of agreements. 17. Demo: The Axiom of Communication. Ref: "Confronting" 18. Demonstrate how poor confront leads to mis-duplication. Ref: "Postulates and Considerations" 19. Checkout on all technical terms. Ref: "The Cycle of Action" 20. Demo a cycle of action being complete because it was completely executed in real life. 21. Demo a cycle of action which remains incomplete because the individual has not acknowledged its completion to himself. Show how he feels about it. 22. Demo a cycle of action which is complete because the individual declares it complete (even though some uninvolved person would consider it incomplete). 23. Demo how incomplete cycles of action can lead to hectic activity and the feeling of having no time.

166

Ref: "Goals Problems Masses" 24. Demo the sequence from as-isness to not-isness using an example of your choice. Ref: "Mental Matter Energy...." (Note: Do look up the actual Factors in "0-8" as you find them mentioned in the text, to get used to their rather abstract phrasing). 25. Define physical MEST. How are tables, chairs, air, water etc. MEST? 26. Give examples of ridges occuring in nature. 27. Explain what vibrations are and give examples. 28. Define "resonance", "harmony", "consonance", "dissonance". Give examples for both the physical and the mental manifestation of this (refer to Chapter 1 of the "Pied Pipers"). 29. Essay: give five examples of be-do-have. 30. Demo: Choose one of the dynamics 1-4, and name the terminals who are essential to you on this dynamic, and who therefore represent the anchorpoints of your space. These may be in the past, in present time, or in the future. Describe how you push your dimension points towards these anchor-points; how you withdraw from them, and thus how your space changes through this action. 31. Demo theta quanta as prerequisites for the perception between two beings and for their communication (common space). (See Factors 1-4 and 11). Ref: "Mental Universes" 32. Demo how all the three universes play a role in any communication. Ref: "Restimulation" 33. Using theta quanta, demonstrate how a mental image picture is created, how it is recorded, restimulated and subsequently erased (see also p.88); both above 2.0 on the tone scale and below 2.0 on the tone scale. 34. Demo: Havingness is the ability to have everything as well as nothing. Ref: "Engrams" up to "Secondaries" 35. Define all technical terms. 36. What does unconsciousness mean with respect to a body and with respect to a thetan?

167

37. Demo: How an engram and a GPM could be recorded at the same time in an accident. 38. Add to this demo: How, following the incident, a secondary and a lock could be created on two parallel time tracks - that of the GE and of the thetan. Ref: "Valences" 39. Define all technical terms. 40. Give an example of a valence situation and demonstrate the relationships involved. Ref: "Analytical Mind..." 41. Demonstrate the difference between the static, the thetan, the analytical and the reactive mind, and show their relationship with each other. Ref: "Key-in..." up to "The Composite Case" 42. Define all technical terms. 43. Demonstrate the composition of a chain of engrams, secondaries and locks. 44. Demo: a key-out, and a release. 45. Demo: an erasure. 46. Demo: a cognition. Ref: "The Dynamics" 47. Essay: Give three examples for each of the 8 dynamics; what one can be, do and have on them. Ref: "A Theory of the Bridge...." 48. Demo: According to Factor 28, show what is the basic principle of a bridge. Ref: "Contemporary Definitions" and "Future Projects" 49. What is the meaning of Clear, OT and Case Completion (p. 170-1). Ref: "The Rudiments" 50. Define all technical terms; demo to show that the sequence of the rudiments is not accidental but logical. 51. Essay: "Using as-isness as a guiding principle in life".

168

Ref: "Motivators..." 52. Demo the overt-motivator sequence. 53. Demo a Service Facsimile. 54. Demo how the violation of one's own integrity leads to further overts on other dynamics. Ref: "Ethics" and "Competence" 55. Essay: "The difference between ethics and morals." Show that under certain circumstances a moral action can be unethical, and reversely that a decision which may appear immoral can nevertheless hold an optimum solution. 56. Define all technical terms. 57. Demo, with reference to the KRC Triangle, the difference between potential and actual worth. 58. Essay: Give an example of the functioning interdependence of ARC and KRC. Give also examples of an imbalance, with a lack of either ARC or KRC. 59. Why is the KRC triangle the upper one? 60. How to recognise a suppressive person. Ref: "More Than..." and "Beyond.." 61. Essay: Name several games situations and show why fair games are based on the Two Rights Of A Thetan. Show why this is not so in unfair games, especially in the case of implants. C. Verbal Examination Should this checksheet have been studied at home, the supervisor examination mentioned on page 1 would be done at this point. It is done from the viewpoint that the student has studied it all and in principle knows it all. Therefore it isn´t a page-by-page checkout but an "educated dialogue" lasting some hours. It ascertains that the clay demos following next won´t pose a problem to the student in terms of his general understanding. (It helps to use the "Glossary" in the appendix to LK3!) D. Clay Demos 1. According to Factors 1-7, clay demo how a static "turns into" a thetan. (See also Axioms 1-4, 25, 44-46). To differentiate between thetan and static, see

169

LK1/p.136 and relevant passages in LK3. (Use clay balls to represent theta quanta/dimension points; to represent the direction of intention and attention use arrows.) Note: From here on please do all clay demos using theta quanta/dimension points whenever appropriate. Feel free to move them around demo-kit fashion so as to demonstrate various aspects of the question at hand. Particularly in clay demo 1, 2 and 3 will this be necessary in order to avoid making too many clay "frames" for one´s clay "comic strip". 2. Demonstrate how the emotional tone scale results from the actions of reaching and withdrawing. Show how the space of the thetan changes. Do a clay demo on this, showing how the emotion levels from 4.0 to 0.5 evolve from each other. Note that these levels can be demonstrated as flows, dispersals and ridges (see the first few pages of the chapter "Affinity, Communication and Reality" in "Scn 8 -8008".) 3. Demonstrate the communication cycle as in Factor 11, Axiom 28, and the communication formula: a) Show how a thetan perceives another thetan; i.e. includes him in his space (also use dimension points in this example). b) Show how he intends to send a communication to the other and that it should be duplicated and understood. c) Show how he actually carries out the communication. (Make him do this with strong intention). d) Show how it is duplicated by the recipient. e) Show how it is understood by the recipient. f) Using the clay demo, show to which of the three universes the various parts of the demo belong. Also show which parts represent an "actuality" and which ones represent a "reality". Note: The clay demos following now form one huge clay demo resulting in a full demonstration of the composite case. A large space is required for the demo. Show thetan, GE and body separately as required. 4. Clay demo: The Scale of Frustration, starting with the highest point "know", and show how reach turns into withdraw as one moves down the scale. 5. Change the above clay demo so it reflects the sequence from as-isness to not-isness. 6. In your clay demo, make it clear how a GPM is formed out of postulate and counter-postulate.

170

7. Show how a thetan uses his energy quanta when trying to withdraw from the incident or when trying to resist it, thereby creating a reactive mental image picture. (Show the difference between the real incident and the mental picture). 8. Show the thetan with a destimulated (dormant) GPM. 9. Clay demo the exact procedure of restimulation of the GPM: a. As a secondary. b. As a lock. 10. Add a physical trauma, illness or accident to the existing sequence of events, and show how the GE records the engram. 11. How this engram is later restimulated and dramatised as a secondary. 12. If not shown yet: point out the possible criss-cross restimulation between the engram and the GPM, showing how they add force to each other. (If adding this to your clay demo is too complicated, you may show it to the supervisor by simply pointing it out.) 13. Add to the existing clay demo how the auditee adopts the valence of a person from his past. 14. Add an entity which was created as the result of an implant: How it is created, how it joins with the thetan, how he then goes into its valence and dramatises the implant (see p. 183-185 and 27-30, also LK3/ch.1). 15. Using one of the parts of the composite case on your clay table, show how a second as-isness occurs (that of erasure) and show that this is caused by gradual duplication as in an auditing session (see Ax. 12 ff.). 17. Clay demo "havingness" in both definitions of the word. 18. Explain in view of your complete clay demo the abilities of a "Clear on the first dynamic" and what aspects of the case are audited on the lower, middle, and upper bridge. E. Attest I have studied and fully understood the above materials, and I am happy to apply the data in everyday life. Date:

Signature:

Statement (in writing): "How the knowledge I gained from this course relates to me and my life."

171

F. PRACTICAL COURSE FOR AUDITORS (CHECKSHEET) Name of Student: Commencement of Course: Purpose: To learn how to audit. As this can be achieved at different levels, the checksheet is divided into several sections developing from each other. They can be combined according to one's purpose, e.g: 1. Assists and Self Analysis procedures: parts I, II, III. 2. Objective Processing: parts I, II, IV. 3. Postulate Auditing: parts I, II, V. 4. Solo Auditing: parts I, II, V, VI, VII. 5. Professional Auditing: parts I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VIII. 6. C/Sing: parts I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, IX. Prerequisites: The Theory Course based on L Kin's volume 1, "More than a Cult?" (This does not apply for the study of assists, section 1 above. Here, a checkout of "Auditing" and "Man, Soul or Thetan?" in volume 1, part 1, would be sufficient). Course Material: Volume 2 by L.Kin, "Scientology - a Handbook for Use". Volume 4, "From the Bottom to the Top", wasn´t used for this checksheet but should be referred to as needed. In L.Kin 2 frequent references to original Hubbard bulletins are made. Though it isn't always clear whether these HCOB's were written by Hubbard himself or by others, they do provide deeper insight into the subject and allow critical comparison, which one should definitely go for. Should these bulletins not be available, one may bypass these checksheet points and merely refer to the "Handbook". Essential books which must be at hand are the Technical Dictionary and the "Book of E-Meter Drills".

172

Section I: TRs 1. 2. 3. 4.

Study the "Introduction". Checkout: What does "auditor presence" mean? Study "The Training Routines (TR's) - Basic Elements of Communication." Do TR's until you have a major stable win. Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed

the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section II: Basic Auditing Principles 1. Study: "Auditor And Pc - An Introduction". 2. Checkout on all technical terms. (Also refer to "The Key Terms of Auditing" from Volume 1). 3. Demo: "The Auditor's Code", points 1-22. 4. Demo: The Communication Cycle in auditing. 5. Demo: How perfect duplication results in As-isness. 6. Demo: The three rules of auditing (auditor + auditee > bank, etc.) 7. Demo: The Auditor's Code, point 25 (that auditing should be mainly done for spiritual gain not healing purposes). Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section III: Simple Procedures 1. Study: "A) Simple Techniques". 2. Drill the assists with various coaches until confident. Do your admin afterwards. 3. Drill Self Analysis with various coaches, until confident. Do your session admin afterwards.

173

4. Checkout: How could you help someone by using the techniques of Self Analysis even when not in a formal session, and without the list of questions at hand? Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section IV: Objective Processes 1. Study "B) Objective Processes". 2. Checkout and demos on the text. 3. Clay demo: a. How circuits become restimulated and mass builds up in CCH 1. b. How the EP occurs and how it manifests itself. 4. Drill CCH 1-4 with various coaches, until confident (from instructing the auditee to auditing the procedure with an EP). Do your session admin afterwards. 5. Drill Opening Procedure by Duplication with various coaches, until confident. Do your admin afterwards. 6. Study the relevant HCOB's to get to know further Objective Processes (not obligatory). Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section V: Postulate Auditing 1. Study "Postulate Auditing". 2. General checkout and demos. 3. Demo: What happens in the auditee's mind during: a. 2WC b. Repetitive recall.

174

c. Lock-scanning. d. Narrative style auditing. e. Repeater technique. 4. Clay demo: "The difference between an absolute and a relative basic". 5. Add to the demo: "How incidents are connected with each other by concepts (postulates), and how repetition of a single postulate can lead to the restimulation of several incidents". 6. Drill: each step of Postulate Auditing: a. without admin or E-Meter. b. with admin (also mock up a postulate list for this auditee). c. With E-Meter and admin (for those using an E-Meter). Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section VI: Solo Auditing 1. Study "The Many Roles of the Auditor" 2. Checkout. (Main emphasis on the sections "Auditor" and "C/S".) 3. Study: "The Language of the E-Meter" up to the section "Dirty Needle" 4. E-Meter Drills 5-26. (Always work with the correct sensitivity setting for the coach, regardless of instructions as per the drill. If not, the drill will not compare to real session situations. As well keep in mind that these are drills and not real auditing; therefore the coach should produce reads by squeezing the cans.) 5. Study: "Three buttons..." up to the end of Chapter 2 6. Demo: a. How a read comes about. b. Show when the three buttons should be used, and what happens in the auditee´s mind for a read to occur. c. What happens in a auditee's mind when a false read occurs. How to handle this.

175

d. Why the auditee's answer must read, and what the danger is of taking up an uncharged answer. 7. Drill: a. How to use the three buttons. b. How to handle a false read. c. How to get the auditee to look for something else when his answer did not read. d. How to acknowledge charge, and how to acknowledge when there is no charge. 8. a. Define "flat" and "cognition". b. What is the difference? c. Why does a FN almost always occur after a cognition, but very rarely after a flat point? 9. Clay demo: What is an EP? 10. Study "3) Preparing the session" 11. Drills: a. The pre-session checklist. b. Putting together a folder. 12. Study "4) Introduction" 13. Checkout and demos. 14. Short drill of each auditing method to clarify the differences between them. Always use the same item, such as "fish" or "birds" or "apples". 15. Study "4.1) The Prepcheck". 16. a. Checkout. b. Demo: How does this method affect the bank? How does the EP occur? What has changed between the thetan and the bank when the EP occurs? c. Demo: Why would it be correct for the auditor to assume that the auditing question is charged when it reads on the meter, when the auditee is only inventing an answer to illustrate the auditing question? (NB. This applies not only to prepchecks, but to all auditing commands). d. Drill: The Prepcheck without meter and admin. The coach indicates reads by means of a pen or his finger. (Accurate session form is kept in this as well as all further drills). e. With the E-meter. (Reads are produced by the coach squeezing the cans).

176

f. With the E-meter and admin. (First write down the command, then underline it, then ask it whilst noting down needle and TA - this way you are all set to receive the auditee's answer when it comes!) 17. Study: "4.2) The Repair List". 18. a. Checkout. b. How does this method affect the bank? How does the EP occur? What has changed between the thetan and the bank when the EP occurs? c. Drill the Repair List (L1C) without meter and admin. d. Drill the L1C with meter (reads produced by squeezing the cans). e. Drill the L1C with E-meter and admin. 19. Study "4.3) The Rudiments". 20. a. Checkout. b. Demo: Each of the six rudiments and their EP's. c. Clay demo: "All ARCX's stem from missed witholds". d. Clay demo "The Cycle of an Overt" (from the Tech Dictionary, & Volume 1 page 16). e. Drill the six rudiments without E-Meter and admin (normal ruds and LD ruds). f. Drill the six rudiments with E-Meter (with reads produced by squeezing the cans). g. Drill the six rudiments with E-Meter and admin. 21. Study "4.4) Rehabilitation Procedure" up to "Rehab by Key-out, command sequence". 22. a. Checkout. b. Demo: How does this method affect the bank? How does the EP occur? What has changed between the thetan and the bank when the EP occurs? c. Drill Rehab by key-out without E-Meter and admin. d. Drill Rehab by key-out with E-Meter. e. Drill Rehab by key-out with E-Meter and admin. 23. Study "Rehab by Counting" 24. a. Checkout and demo. b. Drill Rehab by counting on the gradients suggested above. 25. Study "4.5) Dating and Locating".

177

26. a. Checkout and demo. b. Drill Dating and Locating. 27. Study "4.6) Listing and Nulling". 28. a. Checkout and demo. b. Drill Listing & Nulling in such a way that you get the item already on listing without doing any nulling. Nulling is not optimum as it means the auditor´s TR-0 and TR-2 are out. 26. Study "The High and the Low TA" 27. Checkout on materials and demo. 28. Clay demo: What causes a TA to rise? (Parts of the incident not being confronted; protest; overrun; E/S in restim; or several incidents in restim.) Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section VII: The Solo Practical Comment: The EP of the Solo Practical is the ability to assume the role of an auditor in session. Its purpose is not, to find charge at all cost where there is none. The sole purpose of the Practical is to locate where there is charge and where there is none, and to acknowledge this. In either case the result would be the same - an F/N. So if there are no reads, please do not dig around and search. If there are reads, audit to F/N; if there are none, acknowledge to F/N. When it runs easy it runs well. C/S's for the Solo Practical: 1. Following standard auditing procedure (this applies to all the C/S's in this section), do S.A. List 1 on the meter, altering the standard auditing question to: "Is there a time when I was...?" When you get a read, look "down" your time track to find an incident which also reads. Audit a number of questions until you get an F/N. (No need to get an F/N on each question separately.)

178

2. Audit all postulates on your postulate list by repeater technique to an EP for each one. 3. In session, make a list of charged terminals that come to mind. Assess by elimination to a single reading item (EM-drill 24). Prepcheck this terminal. False reads occurring at this stage often come from entities. Check for ownership: "My charge? An entity´s charge? Another thetan´s charge?" Should "entity" read, handle with rehab by counting. If it´s another thetan: audit him. (This also applies to the following assists). 4. In session make a list of times or periods in your life which were difficult for you. Assess by elimination to a single reading item. L1C on it. 5. Fly six ruds with the prefix: "In my life is there....?" 6. In session make a list of times when you didn't get acknowledged for doing something well, or when you continued an action past a win (O/R). Assess by elimination to a single reading item. Handle with rehab by key-out. 7. Further C/S's may be given according to the person's interest. Any open points from earlier auditing programs should be completed now. Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

Section VIII: Professional Level A: Study Study all HCOB's pertaining to the auditing procedures you have drilled. B: Drills Repeat all drills of section VI including E-Meter Drills, to a higher level of competence. The more often this is done, and the more partners you have, the better. This applies to all drills. TR's should be done at every possible occasion, on increasing gradients. 1. Objective Processes. 2. Drill: Postulate Auditing using the E-Meter. 3. Drill: Flying Ruds and filtering out postulates from them.

179

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Drill: The various methods of flying ruds (Chapter 4.3). Drill: Rehab by postulate auditing. Drill: Dating and Locating. Drill: Listing and Nulling. Drill (more than once!): TR-4 on the E-Meter following standard session procedure, with admin, as a "real" session with the coach introducing all possible situations: rising TA, dirty needle, protest, O/R, false reads, somatics, misemotions.

C: Practicals 1. Do S.A. Lists on an auditee on the meter. Audit without reliance on the meter but use the meter just for observation. Keep session worksheets. This method of running S.A.-Lists is a gradient for the trainee auditor, giving him the opportunity to keep worksheets without having to concentrate on meter reads when making decisions. Meter reads are noted down for later interpretation after the session. 2. Get the C/S to give you a simple process from the Grades which can be run by repetitive recall, and audit it on an auditee until both you and the auditee have a win. 3. Audit the Solo Practicals 3-6 on an auditee. This is a real Life Repair action! (See LK2/p. 173.) 4. Audit the postulates found on 3 by repeater technique. D: Further Steps Audit several dozens of hours until you feel confident that you know your stable data. Re-study "DMSMH", "Dianetics Today", "Science of Survival", "Dianetics 55", "Phoenix Lectures", "Scn 8 - 80", "Scn 8 - 8008". Also study the Academy Levels. It is recommended to have some practical experience before studying the Levels, so as to avoid becoming overwhelmed by new words and meanings. (You may of course do further studies according to other available checksheets apart from this course). Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

180

Section IX: C/Sing 1 2 3 4

5 6 7

Find a good C/S with whom to work. Learn from him how to make a good interview, how to categorize and analyze its data and work out an auditing program from them. Audit several thousand hours. Read the relevant parts of L.Kin 2 and L.Kin 4, the "C/S Series" in Tech Volume X, and the various rundowns in Tech Volumes XI and XII. Study the entire Tech Dictionary. You may not use any of this but it shows you what solutions Ron worked out at his time. Do study all books with an "8" in its title (0-8, 8-80, 8-8008), plus DMSMH, SOS, HOM, COHA, PXL. Listen to the Philadelphia Doctorate Course tapes. Repeat point 3. Repeat point 4. Keep repeating points 2, 3 and 4 until you have made the tech your own. Attest: I have studied and understood the above materials. I have completed

the practical exercises and am happy to apply them. Date:

Signature:

181

G. THE SOLO 2 CHECKSHEET Name of Student: Commencement of Course: Note: It is recommended that this course be studied with the personal guidance of an experienced course supervisor who has successfully completed Solo 3 or perhaps even Excalibur! Introduction Solo 2 consists of auditing the Clearing Course implants and then the OT 2 implants. So for those who never ran the Clearing Course materials before, auditing them would be the first step on Solo 2. (There´ll be a demo to explain the reason for this action.) The second step on Solo 2, the actual "OT 2" implants, can only be run successfully if the Clearing Course materials have been drained of all charge beforehand. 1. Read the course materials provided by the course supervisor. 2. Study them thoroughly (using study tech). Solo 2 Theory 1. Demo the "spotting of a thetan". ("Light/spot thetan" would mean: where is the light from the viewpoint of the thetan? Or: where is the thetan with reference to the light?) 2. Checkout: What is the purpose of the light? (Hint: it attracts attention.) 3. Checkout: Explain why one should only reveal one line of the platens at a time. 4. Demo: a. How a GPM is implanted. b. The state of the thetan as a result of this with the GPM dormant. c. Show what happens when the GPM is restimulated.

182

5. Theory: What´s the mark of a successful implant? 6. Clay demo: Show how the CC implant leads to a composite case. This clay demo is done as a moving model in the following stages: a. Put the structure of the CC implant on the clay table. It consists of 5 sections in sequence. (It´s sufficient to do this in a crude and sketchy way.) b. Move a dozen clay thetans through the implants as if on a conveyor belt, and then send them back to the beginning - 10 times over. Show how when they come off after the 10th time, they are all clumped together. They all have the same experience now and to that extent, much as they are still individuals, they are tied up with each other. c. Make a long strip of clay and put it on the clay table to symbolize the time span between 1 1/2 quadrillion years and 75 million years ago. Put the same CC structure at 75 million years ago as at 1 1/2 quad. d. Now show how at this repetition of the CC, whole clusters of "thetans" receive the implant. Move a dozen clusters of thetans 10 times through the 5 sections of the CC, and then 10 times through the sections of the OT 2 implant. See what happens as they come out the other end. (This demo may be hard to confront! The supervisor's help may be required.) 7. Demo: The EP of Solo 2, showing that if each individual thetan is given the chance to run his own incident, the "clumped-up" mass of them will break up and separate. 8. Admin drill: Demo the admin procedures required for running the CC and OT 2 platens (using "green apple" GPMs) to show that one can follow the procedures. 9. Read the C/S earlier in this book and go in session. When running the process, do not run items as your own unless it feels like the correct action. It is best to run the items as "anyone's" (including your own if that feels the right thing to do). Bear in mind that you are running and cracking yourself out of a composite case.

183

H. THE SOLO 3 CHECKSHEET Name of student: Commencement of Course: A. Introduction 1. Read the OT 3 course pack with particular attention to the "handwritten" course materials (i.e. those in Ron´s handwriting). 2. Study them thoroughly, using study tech. B. Incident II and the Whole Track 1. Clay demo: the sequence of Incident II in detail. Use the complete Inc. II sequence as given in LK3/appx. It combines the handwritten materials and the platens. (Put this demo on the far right of your clay table.) 2. Show clearly in the clay demo how, and at what point: a. a BT is formed, b. a Cluster is formed. 3. Exercise: Calculate the proportionate time scales of: Incident II, Clearing Course implant, and Incident I. (Use a scale of 1 million years = 1 mm) 4. Clay demo: Extend from your Inc. II demo, a long strip of clay towards the left of your clay table in order to demonstrate the 4 quadrillion years time span between Incident II and I. Point out on this "time strip" where the CC implant occurred. Mark in clay letters "Incident II" on the right, "CC implant" in the middle, and "Incident I" on the left of the strip. C. The Beginning of the Time Track, and Earlier Universes 1. Study: the definitions of "Universe" and "Three Universes" (Tech Dictionary).

184

2. Checkout: Why does it say that the time track began with Incident I? Before and after Inc. I all three universes existed. But with what significant difference, particularly with relation to time perception? 3. Clay demo: the sequence of Incident I (as per the handwritten materials). 4. Clay demo: a. Three thetans who before Incident I shared a common earlier universe, and who created something within it together. (Use little clay balls to represent objects made of theta quanta.) b. A single thetan with his own earlier universe, who also had created something. c. Show how these creations, no longer being needed or wanted, are discarded and thus become not-ised. d. Show how these discarded creations can be "hoovered up" and then attached to thetans. Show a thetan experiencing this (that´s his earlier Incident I). 5. Exercise: Explain the underlying intention behind this, and how it would affect the individual's power of choice and power to as-is (ref. Axiom 29). D. Auditing BT's and Clusters 1. Exercise/clay demo: Make four free thetans out of clay (from before Incident I), and as you move them through your large clay demo from left to right, show: a. What happens to them during Incident I. b. What happens to one of them during the course of Incident II, so that he becomes a BT. c. What happens to the other three during the course of Incident II, to make them into a cluster. d. At the end point of your clay demo you should now have a BT and a Cluster. 2. Demo (in which you move them backwards through the time track): a. Move the BT back through Incident II, Incident I, earlier Incident I and earlier universes, and show how it ends up slowly loosening up, and finally blowing. b. How and when a Cluster breaks up whilst moving it through Incident II (there are various possibilities). 3. Clay demo: How a Cumulative Cluster is formed.

185

4. Demo (move your clay pieces around): How one can recognise a Cumulative Cluster: (dirty needle, rising TA, Incident II won't run) and how one takes this apart in session. 5. Demo: How to handle a BT who has a dirty needle on Incident II or Incident I, blows little charge and has a rising TA (Dirty needle = missed withold = overt!). 6. Demo and drill: How to audit the ruds on Solo 3. E. Application 1. Write up the complete steps of Incident I and Incident II so as to have them ready when you need them in session. 2. Locate the volcanos in an atlas. 3. Read the Solo 3 C/S-instructions earlier in this book and go in session.

186

I. THE EXCALIBUR CHECKSHEET Name of Student: Commencement of Course: 1. Study the Admin Scale. Make a few Admin Scales until you get the concept. 2. Study the Ethics Conditions. Get a thorough checkout on them. 3. Checkout: Explain how Admin Scale and Ethics Conditions, through the Ideal Scene, tie in with each other. 4. Get your Excalibur Interview and your first groove-in sessions. 5. Study the Excalibur procedure in the appendix of LK3 and get a checkout on the logic of it. Why is the sequence of commands the way it is and no other way? 6. Between sessions, study the worksheets your auditor wrote and see how he applied the Excalibur procedure to the specific BT or Cluster you found with him in session. 7. When you feel confident on your perceptions and the procedure, carry on solo.

187

J. AUDITING AND NUTRITION by J. Dunn, Natural Health Practitioner and Auditor

This section deals with the biochemical and nutritional factors which prevent or which promote effective auditing. The suppressive and the stimulative effects of drugs, vitamins and nutri tional supplements are reviewed. In particular, the section deals with the effects of over-use, by auditors and solo auditors, of caffeine, nicotine and refined sugars. My experience in the clinic and in the auditing room indicates that sociallyaccepted stimulants such as caffeine, nicotine, and refined sugars can have a negative influence upon auditing gains. This influence is due to their drug effects. Those people auditing over those effects may not expect to get the results predicted. My experience also indicates that those results are obtainable when auditing is done effectively and without the influence of stimulants. Ron Hubbard’s bulletins regarding the negative effects of drugs on auditing gains have been ignored by many. Those people under the influence of such substances tend not to confront the effects upon themselves or upon others. The phenomena of drug effects from socially-accepted stimulants are clear to the trained observer. In one particular year, I saw eighteen people in my clinic with panic attacks, extreme nervousness, and, irritability followed by weepiness. Seventeen of those people were heavily dependent upon coffee. Six of those were also hooked on cigarettes, one was a chocoholic. When weaned off the drugs and refined sugars, and put on to balanced nutrition, their symptoms vanished and their lives returned to normal. I have seen similar misemotional disturbances in auditors and so]o auditors who drank a lot of coffee and smoked heavily. In one year, I saw six people who were having problems with their solo auditing. Heavily dependent upon coffee and cigarettes, they were

188

found to have nutritional deficiencies. When their caffeine and nicotine intake was eliminated, and their nutrition was balanced, those people began to audit successfully. Lack of effectiveness of solo auditing is found to be one result of auditing over stimulants. The result can be self-auditing. Here, the malnourished or drug-restimulated case ’audits’ itself. This happens when the spiritual being is out of control and different valences take command. The meter still reads well. Prolonged fasting, and any kind of poisoning by malnutrition or drugs, restimulates engrams in the genetic entity. The spiritual being dramatises this as psychosis or schizophrenia. Caffeine Caffeine is a drug. It is the main addictive factor in coffee, tea and chocolate. Acting mainly upon the central nervous system, it stimulates cerebral and cardiac activity. In excess, it produces nervousness and hallucinations. My experience is that caffeine makes some people paranoid. In this state they constantly look for enemies. They take up them-and-us viewpoints. Caffeine is also a diuretic. Its over-use can result in dehydration. This creates thirst which induces the coffee-user to take more. One effect of dehydration is a hangover. The coffee, tea or chocolate user often reaches for more of the drug to “cure“ that. Nicotine Nicotine is very poisonous. Even if not inhaled, nicotine from cigarettes and cigars enters the bloodstream through the tissues under the tongue. The tongue becomes numb in smokers because nicotine is an anaesthetic too. It numbs deep tissues of the body thereby blocking fluid and energy flows. When absorbed through the mouth and lungs, nicotine creates a very rapid drug effect. It raises both the metabolic rate and the heart rate. This increases oxygen demand. In turn, the production of toxic wastes is increased. More metabolites are required to handle that. Carbon Monoxide The carbon monoxide produced by smoking reduces oxygen availability. Carbon monoxide starves the blood and eventually the brain of oxygen. It kills brain cetls. Hubbard said that oxygen starvation pulls in mental masses. (HCO Bulletin, 27 Dec 1965). In chronic cases, carbon monoxide shuts down the

189

circulation so much that gangrene can set in. Dependence When one sees a solo auditor having difficulty in handling masses, having a short attention span and needing frequent breaks, one should consider nicotine or caffeine dependence as a possible cause. Some very able people have been found to grind to a halt with their auditing because this factor was not spotted and handled. A solo auditor was having difficulties in session and was getting progressively fewer gains. Unable to confront his next level, he was found to be hooked on chocolate and strong coffee. After being weaned off the drugs with supplements and a balanced nutritional programme, he reported feeling as energetic as he had been as a child. He became enthusiastic for life and for his next level. Successful Auditing Successful auditing – particularly Upper Level auditing – is accomplished with fine control of that which one is auditing. Novice solo auditors often do not realise that the attention beam is like a searchlight, waking up ’items’ in their space. Such auditors are seen to cast their attention too wide and to become easily overwhelmed by too may things coming in on them at once. They cannot confront all that they stir up and leave much of that incomplete. Incomplete handling leaves bypassed charge on the case. When this is not spotted, it can leave incomplete levels and unattained states. One coffeedependent solo auditor was found routinely not to be completing items. Out of session, he described the resulting feeling as “a lot of bees buzzing around my head“. In auditing, one of the two people in the session must be above the problem so that the other can discharge to him. It is the flow between the auditor and the auditee which creates the effect of discharge. The auditee ridges against a drugged-up auditor. The auditor is not being there. Then formula “Auditor plus Auditee is greater than the Bank“, is violated. This is also true in solo auditing where the spiritual being (auditor), is supposed to be auditing the case. The more the body is stimulated by drugs, the more its casey flows impinge upon the auditor and impede the session. Two solo auditors have been seen who are only able to audit after several cups of strong, sweet coffee. A person under the influence of caffeine or nicotine has a tendency to self-audit

190

and those two auditors were found to spend many hours in review. One solo auditor reported achieving a state of great serenity where she could have or not have anything. She “tapped the secrets of the universe“ while doing relatively simple processes, going out for cigarettes and coffee in the breaks. She later went on to achieve sixty cigarettes a day and “very high levels of awareness“. Claiming to be “caseless“, she also developed very heavy body problems. I have seen other people who claim “caselessness“, exhibiting very strange behaviour. A truly caseless person can be on stimulants and still be in control. Drugged-up cases believe they’re caseless but do not have the perception to see that they are not. Deficiencies The restimulation of case is only one detrimental effect of the use of drugs. Giving them up is only the beginning. Less obvious effects are the biochemical deficiencies which drugs create. Ron Hubbard said: “Only when we have accomplished the biochemical handling can we then go onto the next step, the biophysical handling (the relationship of the being to the body, the environment or universe), and then onto mental and spiritual processing. When you try to move these around and put them out of sequence you get losses. (HCO Bulletin of 6 February, 1978 RA). Auditing over malnutrition does not work. Taking a lot of vitamins does not, on its own, solve the problem of malnutrition. The body chemistry is often in such poor state that it cannot metabo- lise these vitamins effectively. Drugs burn out vitamins and stress the system. There was a solo auditor who did not make progress in auditing. He was constantly upset. He was considered to be a “very difficult case“, and was in despair. Then he was found to have been a street-drug taker, a heavy smoker, and an alcoholic. He had never done a detoxification programme. Taken off auditing lines, he was given a full spectrum of vitamins, minerals, amino acids, blood sugar stabilisers, enzymes and trace elements. He stabilised quickly. Eating healthily, he became creatively productive. Stress Stress can cause malnutrition as much as stimulants or toxins, or lack of vital elements in the diet. In mechanical terms, stress occurs when a force is applied to a material and the material resists the change which the force tries to induce. Stress in people is the effect of resistance to change. In the conflict, the body

191

burns more than normal amounts of energy and metabolites. Keyed-in people are usually highly stressed. The body becomes rigid. A person completely free of case is strong yet can be compliant. He can have or not have anything. He burns relatively little energy in accomplishing what he wants to. Refined Sugars Sugars in various forms provide the energy source of the body. But the body evolved on fruit sugar (Fructose), and those sugars derived from starches. Refined sugars are poisonous to the system not designed to handle them. Refined sugars destroy the energy-control systems of the body quite inexorably over a long period of time. When eaten, they create a rapid rise in the blood sugar level. High blood sugar levels induce a high metabolic rate. Then comes the wipe out as the system tries to redress the balance and usually overcompensates – particularly in the chronic user. This leaves a low blood sugar level. Masses are pulled in. Hallucinations can be caused by low blood sugar level. Nightmares and vivid dreams result from it. There is a tendency toward depression. To get out of this, the person reaches for more sugar and for stimulants. The result is the blood sugar roller coaster – hyperactivity followed by lethargy and depression. The solo auditor on refined sugars starts the session energetically and then runs out of energy. He finds masses hard to blow and wonders why the session bogs down. He might try to force his attention on to the subject but that only demands more energy. He might give up, go out for a sugar or stimulant fix and thereby start the blood sugar roller coaster again. One solo auditor on upper levels told me, “I have to have a couple of cups of coffee or something sweet to give me the courage to audit, otherwise I can’t confront the horrible things I find“. Minerals Minerals are vital to metabolic balance. Calcium and magnesium are an essential prerequisite if a person is to audit successfully for several hours at a stretch. In the absence of magnesium, the body has cramps and becomes fidgety. Magnesium is as important as calcium in that it is essential for the formation of hormones which facilitate the absorption of calcium.

192

Vitamin Deficits Some auditors try to cure their problems by taking large doses of some vitamins. This in itself can cause imbalance. Certain groups of vitamins work synergistically. That is, each depends upon the others for its optimum function and effect. By overdosing one vitamin, one can create deficiencies in others. Vitamin C Smoking is known to create deficiencies in vitamin C. This vitamin degrades quickly. We need a constant supply. When we do not get enough to keep all systems going optimally, energy levels begin to dive and vital functions run down. The B Vitamins The B vitamins are arguably the most important ones for mental stability and psychological balance. They are essential in producing brain energy. Their absorption is blocked by nicotine. Serious imbalance of B3 can produce psychosis, schizophrenia and paranoia. I have found that people who begin to show unreality, to switch personalities and to exhibit psychotic and destructive tendencies, often suffer from a lack of B vitamins. The states which we routinely see switching on and off during the handling of a case are very similar to those described in severe B vitamin deficiency. A solo auditor was becoming progressively more psychotic with his auditing. He switched valences rapidly. There was no coffee, nicotine or chocolate involvement. He ate healthily and well. Then he was seen to get angry after drinking half a glass of wine. This was enough to indicate a B vitamin deficiency. He was put on to moderately large doses of B3 and B6 with a good backup of B Complex, C and E. The change was dramatic. He became sociable, and cheerful. His earlier auditing gains resurged. He began to have great cognitions. So – one thing we have to be aware of here is vitamin deficiencies caused by auditing. Auditing requires more brain energy than in normal operation. Even if a person, auditing intensively, took a good B Complex supplement each day, the B1 requirement of the brain might still exceed that. Ron Hubbard recommended supplementing B1 when auditing. However, the problem with supplementing parts of the B Complex – such as Bl on its own – is that this runs us into deficiencies of the other B vitarnins. The body extracts the components

193

which it needs and then excretes the remainder, leaving a deficit in other components. Taking unbalanced amounts of B1 can create a deficit in B3 which in turn can produce valence shifting and paranoia, particularly in the person on stimulants. Continual key-ins with their consequent stress, or long hours of arduous auditing, burn out metabolic factors rapidly. The irony is that, in attempting to make the person more sane by intensive auditing, we can produce the very phenomena which we are trying to resolve. When solo auditors use stimulants to raise their energy or confront, the metabolites run out faster. The case keys in harder. The solo auditor who drank several cups of strong coffee before a session, was observed to come out of session looking drained. He was later found to have left numerous incomplete cycles. To prevent this, keep off the stimulants. Take a good range of vitamins including B Complex. Supplement with Bl, B3 and B6 while auditing, and increase the B Complex according to the amount of B1, B3 and B6 taken. When not auditing, drop back to B Complex only. Do not take B1 or B3 in isolation. Vitamin E Vitamin E handles the toxins which result from taking drugs. Another action of this vitamin is to assist in oxygenating the blood. This will help in inhibiting the pulling-in of mental masses due to oxygen starvation. Smoking tobacco creates a heavy drain on vitamin E. Also, a speeded-up metabolism, due to taking a stimulant such as coffee, can wipe out vitamin E fast and leaves the person stressed and keyed in. Vitamin D This vitamin is essential for the absorption of calcium and for maintaining calcium/magnesium balance. Vitamins A and D work synergistically. I recommend that they always be taken in combination. Vitamins A, D and E are fat-soluble and should only be taken in the oils in which they occur naturally. Tablets of any of these vitamins are relatively ineffective. Resolution To resolve the problems arising from the over-use of drugs, and refined sugars: 1. Eradicate drug residues on a carefully-run detoxification programme.

194

2. With expert guidance, take well-balanced, high quality vitamin supplements together with a wide spectrum of amino acids, enzymes and trace elements, for several weeks. 3. Review those areas of the Bridge which were trodden under the influence of drugs to check completeness of levels. (Auditing on over incomplete levels is believed to have caused many people to crash, or to blow from the subject). 4. Avoid all auditors and case supervisors who cannot function without coffee and or nicotine. 5. While on an auditing programme, eat no refined-sugar products. Eat only pure fruit sugar (Fructose), combined with unsweetened yoghourt as a main energy source. (Fructose does not disturb the blood sugar balance, particularly when taken with a first-class protein such as natural yoghourt. The yoghourt slows down the absorption of the sugar which then provides a steady and sustained energy take-up). Add whole grains, fresh fruit and vegetables for balance. Drink plenty of unadulterated water. 6. Consult a qualified medical practitioner on everything concerning the health, before doing anything at all. Good luck.

195